
Class,.S^.-?-s^/ 
Book ' /l^S H 
CoipghtN°_ZX^^ 



COFYKICIIT D£POSrr. 



1 






I 

SELECT TREATISES 



//fM 



m$ 



MARTIN LUTHER,^ 



THE ORIGINAL GERMAN, 



PHILOLOGICAL NOTES, AND AN ESSAY ON GERMAN 
AND ENGLISH ETYMOLOGY. 



BY B. SEARS. ,^ 



ANDOVER: 

PUBLISHED BY ALLEN, MORRILL AND WARDAYELL. 

BOSTON : JOHN P. JEWETT AND COMPANY. 

NEW-YORK: M. H. NEWMAN AND CO. 

1846. 






•%y' ,• t ^ 



\ 






Entered according to Act of Congress, in the year 1846, by 

Allen, Morrill, and Ward well, 
In the Clerk's Office of the District Court of Massachusetts. 



^ y ^1 



PREFACE 



The volume here presented to the public, is designed for 
those who have already made a beginning in the study of the 
German language, and who wish to prosecute it with philo- 
logical accuracy. Helps of this kind in English are very 
scarce, if indeed they exist at all. Explanations that may 
be found in the common grammars or in the smaller diction- 
aries are not repeated here. Particular attention has been 
paid to the pecuHar structure and idioms of the language, to 
the exact signification of difficult words, to synonymes, to the 
connection existing between etymology and usage, and, ia 
short, to everything which should tend to remove from the 
mind of the student vague generalities in respect to the 
meaning of words and phrases. 

If the works of the German authors which are most in 
circulation, were provided with commentaries like the Greek 
and Roman classics, and the object of the present volume 
were to add one to the number, it might be objected to the 
plan of the work, that it embraces too much. But standing 
as it does alone, there is a demand that it should assume, as 
far as is practicable, the character of a manual of German 
philology, which may be used as a book of reference in read- 
ing other authors. With this object in view, the most idio- 
matic writer, the one who in great measure moulded the lan- 
guage to its present form, has been selected. Thus a text, 
of limited extent, has furnished occasion for ample commen- 
tary ; and such is the number of idiomatic expressions oc- 
curring in the author, and of others introduced in connection 
with them in the notes, that no small portion, it is believed, 



IV PREFACE. 

of the difficult idioms to be met with in the current popular 
literature may find an explanation by a reference to the In- 
dex of this volume. 

The synoptical view of German and English Etymologies 
is an addition to the plan of the work made at a late period, 
and containing a very few repetitions of what may be found 
in the Notes. 

It is hoped that the intrinsic merits of the pieces here se- 
lected will add to the interest of the work. With the excep- 
tion of the brief discourse on indulgences, — which is neverthe- 
less important as giving us a view of Luther's early mode of 
thinking and style of composition, — the selections are among 
the richest and most eloquent, not only of the author's works, 
but of the whole body of literature to which they belong. 
The address to the German nobility will render it conceiva- 
ble how he could so arouse the patriotic spirit of his country- 
men. His high-minded and irresistible appeal to the civil 
authorities on the subject of establishing and supporting pub- 
lic schools, will place him, at least, side by side with the 
ablest and most philanthropic promoters of popular education 
at the present day. The specimens of practical commentary 
from his pen will furnish evidence of a religious character 
and of a degree of genius which some, in their ignorance, 
have felt disposed to deny him. 

B. S. 

.Yewton Centre, Od. 1, 184G. 



CONTENTS. 



1. Synoptical View of German and English words having 

the same etymology . . 

2. Sermon on Indulgences . 

3. Exposition of the thirty-seventh Psalm 

4. Address to the German Nobility 

5. An Address in behalf of Public Schools 

6. Exposition of the fourteenth chapter of John 

7. Fragment ...... 



Page. 

vii 
1 

20 

85 
213 
278 
361 



CORRECTIONS. 

Page 5, line 2, read bcnit for bcit* 

6, note 2, strike out tlie period after fciuct, 

20, note 1, last line but one, read admitted for omitted. 

21, note, line 8, read er for Ci^» 

27, note, line 3, read grcifcit for qricfciU 

20, line 4, read OJlailbcu for ©(ailbcil* 

31, notes, 1 and 2, for G and 7. 

35, note 4, (Sdiaubcit is not in tiie singular. See p. .")(). n.3. 

46, line 1, strike out the com ma after lltil||Jcn, 

4G, note 4, line 3, insert m at the beginning of the line. 

52, line 7, rea<l fcilt for feilt. 

5<^, last lino but two, read Sd^nntcn for gchcilbcn. 

81, note 3, line 1, read has this for hast his. 
117, line 2, read Urfaub^ for Uvfaub^, 
19i), note 3, read colon, for semicolon. 
289, note 3, line 2, read thine for their. 



SYNOPTICAL VIEW 

OF 

GERMAN AND ENGLISH WORDS 

HAVING THE SAME ETYMOLOGY. 



The manner in wliicli wuids substantially the same are 
represented in cognate languages, or in the different dialects 
of any one langua^/' , is, lo a very great extent, conformed to 
fixed laws. An exact comparison of the English language 
with the entire family of the Teutonic dialects, with this end 
in view, would be of great service to the critical English 
scholar. In the present outline, nothing more is attempted 
than a mere sketch of the principal classes of w^ords corres- 
ponding to each other in the modern English and the mod- 
ern German. Words that are so nearly the same as to 
be without organic changes, and those, which are either 
very dissimilar, or very irregular, are for the most part 
omitted, the chief object of the essay being to aid the me- 
mory of the student. It must not be supposed that the 
English is derived from the German, or the German from 
the English. The English is much the older form, resem- 
bling the old Saxon, the Gothic, and even the old high Ger- 
man, much more than it does the modern German. In those 
dialects, many words and forms of words common to them 
and to the English are found, vrhich are not preserved in the 
modern German. It is to etymological analogies, rather than 
to derivations, that attention, in the following essay, is direct- 
ed. The classification is made according to the leadino^ cha- 



Vlll 



SYNOPTICAL VIEW OF 



racteristic of the word. Other characteristics are explained 
in the remarks to which the figures, appended to the words, 
refer. 

1. The vowel a in German frequently corresponds to an 
^sound in English ; and the vowel e, when short, corres- 
ponds in a few instances to a. 



9(ar, eel 

Slbenb, even(ing)i6 
25anf, benchU 
a5art, beard 18 
bar, there^S 
&a^, guest 
^anf, hemp22 and 17 
fiaiV clear 
^tnalt, knell 
niaqcr, meager 
g)?at)f, meal 
3tarfcn, neck 
9iabef, needle 
'^a\t^ rest 
Saat, seed^s 
Scl)af, sheep^~ 
(£rf)aUv shell 
(£d)(af, 8leep23 and ^"^ 
®tab(, steel 



(Stamm, stem 

flatt, steadis 
^trape, streeti^ 
:i;hat, deedis 
2iBaffen, weapon^^ 
malten, wield^Q 



@fpe, asp 
fern, far2i 

fefl, fast (firm) 

fct, fat 

^C{6)f chaliceiJ 

?critc, lark^i 

Scf)nicrl5, smart23 and ^^ 

flcrbcn, starveis 

©tern, star2i 

Itbcer, tjir 
2Gcfpe, wasp 



NoTK. The word A])cn(l is explained under No. iO. — The word 
knell is nincli more restricted in its ])re8ent sijjjniHeation tlian Knall, 
which means any (|uiek sound. — Meager is now mostly used in a fig- 
urative* sense, and the word ban corresponds more accurately to ma- 
ger. — The termination en in Nackcn is not an essential part of the 
word. — Saat corresponds to seed in etymoloj^y, but not in significa- 
tion. — Schale signifies any dish or vessel in the foiTn of a shell. — 
Walten is generally used of moral, and wield ^ oi physical agency. — 
Starve is used in a more specific sense than s t e r b c n, and con'csponds 
nearly to the cognate Avord d a rbc n. 



I 



GERMAN AND ENGLISH WORDS. IX 

2. In a certain class of words, and generally before the 
letters I and n, the vowel a in German corresponds to o in 
Enghsh. In a very few cases the vowel is o in German, 
and a, or an a-sound in English. 

m, oidis rang, long 

bebalteu, beholdi^ 3tafe, nose 

©rang, throng^s fanft, soft^i 

fatten, folJis fd)a(ten, scoidis 

(®e)fang, song Xt)a(er, dollari^ 

S)aahn, hook SSatt), woods^i 

batten, hold's 

^affee, coffee SSorfe, bark 

fatt, cold'8 l)Orct)en, hearken^ 

^amm, comb-^^ rob, raw's 

taben, load ©ttob, strawi^ 

Note. Behalten clears up die origin of our word heJioIdcn^ {hound) ^ 
which was such a puzzle to Dr. Campbell, and also of the word behold 
{to see) i. e. to ho'd near, or before one^s eyes. — Drang means a press and 
trouble. See drangen, No. 18. The prefix ge, is frequently depend- 
ent on usage alone, there being no uniform rule for its insertion or omis- 
sion in certain derivative words. 



3. In a few words, the vowel a long in German corres- 
ponds to i or ei in English. 

3Jtcf)t, eighth 3^aci)t, nightie 

33ram, brim nabe, nigh 

gracbt, freightii ©Snger, singer 

5[Rarf)t, mightii (gditamm, slime^s 

5ytacf)bar, neighborly ©trauge, string 



4. The vowel e in German, often corresponds to an i- 
sound in English, and \ to an e-sound. The former is also 
represented by the diphthong ea in English. 
@^, it^4 getb, field 

fecf)teu, fighti^ geben, givei^ 



SYNOPTICAL VIEW OF 



kben, livens 
?cber, liveris 
Iccfcn, lick 
^>erf), pitch 
$Kccf)t, rightll 

(£d)tx>e|ler, sister^s 

©cbnepfc, sni})e23 and ^3 
fecf)iv six 

fpabcn, spy 
flccfen, stick 

ftrcbcn, strivei^ 
tvelrf), which^o and 21 



^i6cr, beavei-is 
^ier, i)eer 
bid), thee^*^ 

55ieber, fever^^ 

^i(l3, felti5 
fr ifd>, tVesli 

Wlimmcr, gleam (mica) 
(^(immcu, gleam 
OiricdiC, Greeks 
.V>il3e, heati^ 
.fticf, keel 
JtlUC, knee 



fcf)miercn, smear^s 

fcf)tt)ilien, sweat23 and ^^ 

fiieben, sevenie 

©ilj, seat^s 

©tn'cf), streak^l 

tief, deepi"'' 

n>id)ti(}, weiglityii and 25 

n)ir, we^i 



95rcd)en, break^ 

bdbren, bear 

(Jrbe, earthis 
ernjT, earnest 

eflfen, eat^^ 

y^^eber, feather^S 
beben, heavens 
Syvi, hearth^s 
vV>erl5, beartis 
ffcben, cleavei6 
Iccfcn, leak 
Ichncn, lean 
frficrcn, shear 
fpred)Cn, speak-i and ^^ 
(Ichfcn, steal 
trctcn, treadJ8 
iDCbcn, weave^^ 
^i^CttCr, weather 



Sd)littcn, sledis 

NoTK. pitch comes from the Anglo-Saxon pir^ and these are con- 
nected with the Latin ;>?>.— Spa lie n is placed here on account of its 
analogy, the ^ hcin^ c(|uivalent to ^, and the / toy. — Bilhren. See 
8 p a h e n ahove. — E rn s t is an ahridgcd form from Ernest. 



5. The o-sound and tlie ^-sound, (or in a few cases the i- 
sound) arc used for each other. 

'iHMMUV bciin 5^0b, flea 

J^reb, hn .id ^lOttC^ fleet 



ENGLISH AND GERMAN WORDS. 



XI 



Ciro^, greati4 
S^bUc, hell 
l)Oren, hear 
— (o^, — less 
TiOth, need 18 
Dbr, ear 
Dtl, east 
Oiler, easier 
rotf), red 18 
frf]m6reu, swear^s 
©trom, stream 
Xoi, deathis 
tObt, dead 
2Socf)e, weekii 
tt)0[)(, well 
SOBoffe, welkin 
Jtt)Olf, twelveis 

@rj, ore 

gel)en, go 
^rdl)e, crowi9 

^fee, clover 



?el)m, loam 
?et)en, loan 
get)re, lore 
indt)en, mowi^ 

met)r, more 

9?eb, roe 

9ll)ebe, road (of the sea) 

fden, sowi9 
fcf)e{ten, scoidis 
®d)nee, snow^s 

@rf)n)ert, sword^s and ^8 

©ee(e, soul 
vt)et)e ! woe ! 
ySerth, worth 
3et)e, toeis 

?ie6ert, lovei^ 
[d)ieben, shovei^^ 
fd)te|ien, shooti^ 

ob, if 17 

©tOCf, stick 



Note. The Dutch word kleiver is intermediate between clover and 
Klee. — The derivation of if^ from the imperative of the Anglo-Saxon 
verb gifan, is doubtless an eiTor. Not only does that fail to explain the 
meaning of the word, but it leaves the cognate forms, in the Gothic ibai ; 
in old Gennan, ibu, ube and obe ; in old Erisian, jef; in Icelandic, ef; in low 
Saxon, of; and in German, o b, unexplained. As these are all connect- 
ed, no derivation can be satisfactory which does not explain them all. 



6. The diphthong au in German, corresponds to the diph- 
thong ea (or a long e-sound), to the vowels o and u^ and 
sometimes to z, in English. 

Stlige, eye b^Ueit, hewi9 

53aum, beam ^ClUfe, heapi'7 

brauen, brewi9 ^aupt, head^^ 



xu 



SYNOPTICAL VIEW OF 



tancn, chewH and 19 
?ailt>C, leaf 17 
?an*, leek»i 
lailfcn, Ieapi7 
']>fau, i)ea(cock)i3 
railjicil, reekii 
Scf)aube, sheaf '^ 

Sitraube, screwi^ 

tailb, deaf 17 
:thail, dewi9 
!traum, dreami^ 
traiirij], drearyi^and 25 

Siaiibcn, rob 
raiih, rough 

9?aiim, room 

(2cfHlllfc(, shoveli7 

(laucn, stowi9 



Jtaii, tovvi9 
Zanbc, doveis 
traiicn, trowi9 



taiicrn, (en)dure 
S'aiim, tlmmb24 

5!}taii((cfe(), inule 

Sfflaillbccve, mulberry 

fauflen, suck 

fd)ailbcr, shudder 
(2d)aum, scum 



^rautigam, bridegroom 
^aiifi:, fist 

Syint, hideis 

frf}[an, sly 



Note. Ange, ^^^, is introduced here with a little license. As the 
n in German, wlien it is the last letter of a diphthong, often l)ecomes to 
in English, the words, breM\ hcic^ c1un\ saru\ (Ieu\ stou\ towy and troiv, 
may he regarded as coming under a modification of the I'ule, which can- 
not he more })articularly specified here. — Kauh, rom/h^ is a little irreg- 
ular, and is mentioned here for the sake of convenience. Tlie same may 
he said of R a u m, and h 1 a u. — 1) a u e r n, will remind one of the old 
English word dinr, and the Latin ciuro. — Maul(esel) and mulr^ come 
from the Latin mitlu.% the animal that works at tlie tm>la, or mill. — 
Groom in hridcfjroom^ is f/itm in Anglo-Saxon. In the Gothic and An- 
glo-Saxon, f/itiHti means n man. — S/i/ is suhstantially conformed to tlie 
rule, the y l>cing ecpiivalent to /. 



7. The letter u in German, corresponds to an o- sound, 
mostly 00, o, and ou in English ; and o short in German, to 
u short, for the mo.^^t part, in English. 

S)clnif, hehoof ii^nir, brood'-fi 

SBfinnC, bloom iMlbc, l)ooby 

g5(llt, blood^e syjjjj^ l,ookn 



GERMAN AND ENGLISH WORDS. 



Xlll 



gfutb, floodie 

gug, f00tl4 

gut, goodis 

5?uf, hoof 

@tul)(, stool, etc. etc. 



95ntber, brotheris 
Slinb, bond 

S5iifen, bosom22 
giid^^, fox 
gltrt, ford's 

gitKen, foal 

gutter, fodder 
geUUg, enough 

^Ub, C0W19 

^upfer, coppers 

SQJutter, mother 

gtutbe, rod'8 

©rf)Ub, shoe 
©tUnU, storm 

tbun, doi8 

2Bltttber, wonder 
3Burm, worm 

5Bur<3, worti5 

SU, tol5 

3unge, tongue'^ 



2)U, thouis 
©rUUt), ground 
§UUb, hound 

Jung, young 

?!JJUttb, mouth2i and ^^ 
rUUb, round 
^fUUb, poundis 
^Uber, powder 
©itb, southis 
(ge)fUUb, sound 
@cf)U(ter, shoulder^s 

2Bunbe, wound 

330Cf, buck 
2)0UUer, thunder 
5()?0rb, murder 

(er)nterberu, murder 

?tOUUe, nun 
3?0fl, rust 
©ommer, summer 
foubern, sunder 

(Bonne, sun 

BtO^, stuff 
©toppef, stouble 
JtoUUe, tun (cask) 
Xorf, turf 
Dolf, full 

SSJone, wool (wul) 



Note. Fallen, genu g, Schuh, Puder, Stoppel, and Wo lie 
only approximate the rule. In t h u n and z u, we see the reason of the 
peculiar pronunciation of do and io. The final n (for en) in thun, 
sondern and other verbs, being a mere ending:, is not taken into the 
account. The few instances in which i in English corresponds to u in 
German, are Durst, thirst ; G u r th, girth : Z u n d e r, tinder, and per- 
haps some others. 

8. Ue in German, corresponds sometimes to i, sometimes 
to e, and sometimes, though rarely, to o, in English. 

2)unn, things fiitteu, fill 



XIV 



8TK0PTICAL XIEVT OF 



fiinf, five^i 

^iirfi:, first (prince) 
©iirtet, girdle is 
fnurteiT, knit 
f iiflfen, kiss 
(iigen, lie 12 

ynme, min 

5Dtunje, mint»^ 
©tiicf, stick 
©iinbe, sin 



Sriiber, brethren's 
S3licf)e, beech 
bill ten, bleed'® 



fiibfen, feel 
giijTe, feeti4 
grim, green 
griifleii, greet^^ 
^iilfe, helpi7 

l)iiten, heed^S 
filbn, keen 
flip, sweeti4 
iibef, evilic 



1^ 



bliihcii, blowiQ 
g[iil)eit, glowi^ 
Ijiipfen, hop^« 
fiibl, cool 
^iijle, coast 

Note. M n n z e, coin ; S 1 c k, piece ; h t e n, guard; and k Q h n. 
bold^ vary somewhat in their signification from the English words of the 
same etymology as now used. 



9. The diphthong ei in German, corresponds sometimes to 
an e-sound, sometimes to an o-sound, and less frequently to 
the vowel a in En^ijlish. 



(S5c)rcit, readyis 

b(eid)en, bleach 

95reite, breadth'® 
brei, three^® 

gleifd), flesh 
frei, free 

5?cibC, heaih and hea- 
Ijeilcil, heal [then'® 

{eitCll, lead'® 
nicinon, mean 
XCid)e\\, reach 
Sd)CibC, sheath'® 
(2d)1t)ciP, sweat'^ 
Jtbcil, deali® 



tt>eicf), weakii 
SBcit^en, \vheat*20 



g5eilt, bone 

beibe, both'® 

brcif, broad'® 
@id)C, oak" 
@ib, oathi® 

cigcn, own 

fill, one 

©eijt, ghost 

(5)eiP, goat'4 
bcilig, holyl2 
l)eim, home 



GERMAN AND ENGLISH WORDS. 



XV 



beifer, hoarsens 

f)eig, hoti4 
Ffetben, clothe^^ 
?efm, loam 
mei(l, most 
Wiethe, row^Q 

©cife, soapi7 
©petite^ spokeii 
Stein, stone 

Note. F 1 e i s c h, nieat ; m e i 
w e i c h, soft ; and Z e i c h e u, a 
%Yords better in etvmolooT than in 



fltreid^n, stroke^i 
^eig, floughis 

3cicf)en, tokeni^ and ^i 

gtt)ei, twoi5 

@m, an 

Seiften, last 

Setter, ladder^s 

5!)teijT:er, master 

n e n, fo 6e o/* opinion ; T h e i 1, part ; 
sign., agree mth their coiTesponding 
their present signification. 



10. The diphthong eu in German, sometimes corresponds 
to an z-sound, or an e-sound in English. 

gear, fire ^reunb, friend 

lend) ten, lighten {light)ii ftreuen, sirewi^ 

tteun, nine fleuem, steer 

fd)en, shy tl)eur, dearie 



11. (5b in German, corresponds sometimes to gh in Eng- 
lish, and sometimes to Tc, and vice versa. In a few words 
ife goes into dge, and g into h 
g[urf)t, flight 



5rarf)t, freight^ 
{@e)Idd)ter, laughter 

(ad)en, laugh 
(etrf)t, light 

m)t, light 

5D?ad)t, mights 

%a*t, tiight3 

9tarf)bar, neighbor^ 

red)t, rigbt^ 

©rf)(ad)t, slaughter 
33orfTd)t, foresight 



Srerf)en, break^ 
^\x<i), b00k7 
2)etcf), dike 

?erd)e, lark^ 
tnarf)en, make 
5!Ki{d), milk 

<S^\6)d, sickle 
©torrf), stork 

fpred)en, speak^i 
mad)en, wake 



XVI 



SYNOPTICAL VIEW OF 



S3anf, benchi 

23irfe, birch 
Malt, chalk (lime) 
^dfcr, chafer 
t^amnicr, chambers^ 
^dfc, cheese 

fauen, chewi^ 
iterl, churl 

Minn, chin 
^rucfe, crutch 

^inf, fihch 

,^ircf)e, church 
jtifle, cliest 



ftrccfen, stretch 
flit)(, chill (and C00I8) 

fiefen, choose 



Sriicfe, bridge^ 
(5cfc, edge 
j'jCCfe, hedge 
5Jiiirfe, midgeS 
Dtiicfcn, ridge^ 



^fanfl, clank 

Hingen, clink 

Dtang, rank 



12. @ final in German is frequently represented bj i/jn 
English, or by i, if another letter or syllable be appended. 



Sctriigen, betray 
bcfiigen, belief 
einiq, any3 
^ci(\e, felly 
V?(cgcl, flail 
flicqcn, fly 
JVriUl)t, fruit 
S>a(\cl, hail 
A^LMUg, honey 
jSiirtcl, hill« 
Imager, lair and layer 
fcgcn, lay 
{gc)(cgcn, lain 

licflcn, lie 

''Dla^l^, "laid 
nianig, many 
yjiorgcf, niarU 

meqcn, may 

3ta(]C(, nail 



^tcrroegcn, Norway 
Dlegcn, rain 
^0(\Cien, rye^ 
fagcn, say 

fd)(agcn, slay23 

®C(]e(, saiP 
©icgcf, seal 
©tag4^fl^^» stay-sail 
(gteigc, stair3, 21 
Xac\, day's 
^[Rontag, Monday 
gonntvlil, Sunday 
yS'VCirag, Friday 
^iBcvftaq, work-day 

gafttarj, ilist-day 

(Oic)t>urtbt3ta(V birth-day 
g)Jitta(l, mid-day (noon) 

Ijernuttag, fore- midday 
3tClljal)rOta(], newyears-day 



GERMAN AND ENGLISH WORDS. XVll 

ta0d), daily SOBccj, way 

tt)dgen, weigh S^^S^f/ ^^^®^^ 

Note. F r u c h t, and weigh (w a g e n) are slight variations from the 
rul^. In the Anglo-Saxon, the letter g performs the same office that it 
does in German, and corresponds to the same letters in English. 



13. The letter p in German often has f appended to it, 

especially in words of foreign origin. 

Slpfef, apple ^flanje, planti^ 

5;)upfen, hop8 ^flaume, plum^ 

^ampf, camp ^flafter, plaster 

^ropf, crop W^fte, post 

v^rampf, cramp pflitcfen, pluck 

^upfer^ copper^ ^florf, plug'7 

opfern, offer (sacrifice) ^^flug, plough^ 

^fab, path^^ W^opf, prop 

^fahi, pale (palus) ^fut)t, pooF 

^^fanne, pan ^funb, pound*^ 

^Y^irre, parish (paroisse) 9?innpf, rump 

^feffer, pepperi^ (Itampfen, stamp 

^fetfe, pipe and fife ©Uinpf, swamp 

^feifer, pillar jtcpfen, stop 

pfennig, pennyis japfen, tap^^ 

Note. K a m p f means a battle rather than thejield. 

14. ©, or g at the end of a word or syllable in German, 
corresponds to the t in English. 

Slpricofe, apricot cflfen, eat^ 

beiffen, bite gfoflfe, / 

beflfer, better g^ag, fat, or vat 

ba^, thati8 g^g^ footv 

tag, thatis meM, bit 

2)roffef, throttle (thrush )18 ©rie^, grit 

e^/ it^ ©ruffen, greet^ 

B* 



XVIU 



SYNOPTICAL VIEW OP 



i^ag, hate 
i|>ornif5, horneH 
^ejTet, kettle 

laffen, let» 
?o^, lot 
mejTen, mete 
iniijTcn, must 

JtCffef, nettle 



gjjorfcr, mortar 
9ta(Tc(, »-attle 
Scf)U>ei^, sweat23 and 9 
StvajTe, streeti 
frig, sweelS 

gpieg, spit 
SKaffer^ water 
tt)a^, what^o 



15. 7' initial in English, corresponds to J in German ; and 
t final, generally to §. In some cases, the t before j is omit- 
ted. 



3ahm, tame 




3ange, tongs^ 


3ebe, toe'^ 


^erj, heart^ 


3iUt, tide (time) 


?fi(5, ^elt^ 


3cbn, ten 


.S>il3C, lieat4 


jicrcn, (at)tire 


^^alj>C, cat 


3ciciicn, token^ 


gDtafj, malt 


3inn, tin 


5DJriujC, mint^ 


3ipf, tip»3 


9iCt3, net 


3"fl/ tug 


^V(,?, pelt 


Jll, toV 


©afj, salt' 


J0((, toll 


frf^nicljcn, smelt23 


3u^^cr, tinder 


Sitmulj., smut23 


J^'^^^"' I tear4 

jcrrcn, ) 


fcUcn, set 


fil5en, sit 


jnvin^Ul, twentyi2 


fd)nicrj, smart23 


3u>iMi], twig 


©rcl^C, stilts'* 


3unfle, tongiie''^ 


flrolHMt, 8trut7 




'M\h ^vit 



Note. /i(M*cii, rorrcsjjonds to thr» old Knj^lish ///v, and to tlic An- 
glo-Saxon tirr. — Z e i (• li c n, a sifjn, ajrrccs only in ctymolojry with token ; 
and so /^u^, ///'• art of drawiw), with tn<i ; MOnzc, (W/i, with mint. 
8 c h m u t z, Jilth, with smut ; and S c h m c r z, pain^ with smart. 



GERMAN AND ENGLISH WORDS. 



XIX 



16. The letter v in English, often corresponds to its cog- 
nate b in German. 



2(6eilb, eveni 
S3i6er, beaver^ 
ehen, even 

^ieber, fever 

®rab, grave 

f)a6en, have 

beben, heave 
^erbfl, harvest! 
f(eben, cleave 

^nabe, kjiave 
feben, live^ 
?eber, liveH 

Jlahc, nave 
yiabcl^ navel 



probett, prove 
^robfl, i)rovost 
5)iabe, raven 
(^albe, salve 
fchabeit, shave 
(^ieb, sieve 
ffeben, seven 
©itber, silver 

ftreben, strive^ 
Xanbe, dove^ 
xtbe{, evils 
n)eben, weave 

2QijTmutt), bismuth 



Note. Abend is a participle from the verb ab e n, which is derived 
from a b. With Tag understood, it means the departing day. There can 
be but httle doubt that everi^ which also has a participial form, evening^ is 
of the same derivation, the letter c? in A b e n d, being dropped. — K n ab e, 
a hoy, agrees with knave only in etymology, or in the obsolete significa- 
tion of the latter. — P r o b s t, or P r o p s t, is a corruption of the Latin, 
praepositus. The English form is nearer to the original, than the Ger- 
man. — W i s s m u t h is placed here, because v and w are often treated 
as the same letter in German. 



17. The letters h and v are cognate with/; the former is 
also cognate with p, and this sometimes with f, 
S^ieb, thief 18 



iialb, half 
kalb, calf 
lieb, lief 

^vtrfunfef, carbuncle 
^robe, proof 
©tab, staff 
Jiafef, table 

SOBeib, wife 



S^afen, haven 
Jteffe, nephew 

Sct)anfef, shovel^ 
Xeufef, deviPO 
35o(f, folk 



93orfe/ purse 



XX 



SYNOPTICAL VIEW OF 



bop^el, double 
grippe, crib 
plappern, blabb 

^et)e((, beadle^ 
politer, bolster 
^Obef, people 
9tippe, rib 
©toppef, stubble 

2(ffc, ape 

offen, open 
frf)arf, sharp 



©treife, stripe 

tief, deepis 
3Baffen, weapon^ 
^anf, hemp 
l)elfen, help 

^arfe, harp 

gaffcn, gape 
grcifen, gripe 
^iifre, hip8 
l)offen, hope 
(2ct)iffe, ship 

reif, ripe 



Note. Weib, woman ^ has a different meaning from what ivife has 
come to have. — N e fFc is placed here with nephew, partly because the ph 
in the latter is equivalent to v (in old German 7ievo), and partly he- 
cause the English comes directly from the Anglo-Saxon nefa. — Both 
Teufel nm\ devil have a common Greek origin. Neither is derived 
from the other. So the words B o r s e, and purse, come from the Greek 
worJ jivpoa. Borse has come to signify //?e ercAa;?r/('. — Pedell and 
beadle come from the Latin pcdellus. — P o b e 1, like people, and the French 
peuplcj comes from popidus. — Greifen signifies to seize. 



18. The letter d is cognate both witb t, and with th^ and 
the two last with each other. 



SJefter, elder 

S3ctr, hed 

bictcn, bid 

SBfatt, l»la(le 

S3[ut, i»iood 
93ot»cn, bottom^' 

brcit, hroad^ 
SBrUt, hrood 
Citcl, idle (empty) 
©liter, udder 
gutter, fodder^ 

gleiten, glide 



®Ctt, Cod 

©iirtef, girdles 
cjiirten, gird^ 

l)art, hard 
5>llt, hood7 

biiten, hecd^ 

fneten, knead^ 
gOJittef, middle 
rciten, rid«^ 

9fetti.q, radish^ 
Sattet, -saddle 

(£d)atteii, shade 



GERMAN AND ENGLISH WORDS. 



XXI 



®eite^ side 
felten, seldomS^ 

jTebeln, settle 

©inter, cinders 
©paten, spade 
©tatt, stead 
^anj, dance 

:j:enfer, devipo 

Zo&itCV^ daughterii 

tragen, drag 
treiben, drivei^ 

tveten, tread4 

trinfen, drink 
S^remmet, drum^ 

2!ropf, drop ft 

n)aten, wade 

— n)art^,— wards 
Unter, under 

S3ab, bath 
S3rnber, brother^ 
S3ube, booths 
(5t)ri|l:entt)nm, christen- 

T^ad), thatch [dom 

Eanf, thanks 
bar, therei 
barein, therein^ 
Saum, thumb^ 
bein, thine 
benfen, think^ 

benn, then (and than) 

berer, their 

birf, thick 
biefe, these 
^\nc\, thing 
Sijlel/ thistle 



bocf), thoughil 
25crn, thorn 

brdngen, throng 
brefct)en, thresh 

brei, three^ 
bU, thou7 
SnrjT:, thirst 
• bitnn, thinS 
@rbe, earth4 
^eber, feather^ 
furber, further 
^eibe, heath and heathen 
^^erb, hearth^ 
?eber, leatheH 
3tOrb, north 
©cf)mtb, smith23 
jTeben, seethe 
©lib, south 

^futb, flood7 

5[)Jett)e, mead4 
5)iutt)e, rod and rood'^ 
Xhal, dale 

Abater, dollar^ 

Z\)at, deedi 
2;baU, dewi, 19 
tbeur, dear 

tbnn, do7 



door^ 



Zi)ixv, \ 
Xbor, ) 
3Bitttt)e, widow 



gort, forth 

iatte, lath 
5!}?enat, month 

?Oiotte, moth 



xxu 



8TK0PTICAL VIEW OF 



taufcnb, thousand 33ater, father 

J^riimm, thrumb^^ 2Cctter, weather* 

Note. Blade does not commonly signify leaf, like B 1 a 1 1. — B o d e n 
ground, soil, and bottom, is but rarely used in this last signification. — • 
E i t e 1, empty, has not the sense of idle. — H u t con'esponds to hood and 
hat. — Re tti g is rddic in Anglo-Saxon, radichio in Italian, and*is deriv- 
ed from the Latin radix. — S el ten has various forms in the different 
Teutonic dialects. — Trage'n goes into drag and draw. Compare the 
Latin traho. — T r o m m e 1 takes the form of T r u m m e in low Saxon, 
and T r o m m e in Upper German. — W arts, as a termination, not 
bearing the accent, corresponds exactly to the English termination 
uKirds in towards, backwards, etc. — Thatch has a more limited signifi- 
cation than Dach, roof. The same is true o^ father., as compared 
with Feder. — Heide, a heath, i.e. a desert, and then a plant that 
grows there ; and finally, as a translation of jKiganus, an idolater living 
in the country or desert, a pagan, a heathen. — Thaler is a coin which 
was first struck in a certain Thai, dale, ( J o a c hf m s - 1 h a 1, in Bohe- 
mia). It is an abbreviation of J o a c h i m s - 1 h a 1 e r . — W i 1 1 w e is wi- 
dowo in the Gothic, and witawa in old German. 



i9. W, at the end of a word in English, stands in the place 
of f), g, (or d), or b) U and t) in German, and of j in the old 
dialects, which is omitted in the modern German. 

©ail, sow 
(gcbne, sinew^ 



93c((en, bellow 
bliiben, blows 
braiicn, brewi 
(jfiibcn, glowS 
baucn, hewi 

bob(, hollow 

fallen, chewii, i 
Stlanc^ claw 
frdben, crow^ 
^ub, cow8 
mabcn, mow* 

?l}?aIl)C, inallow 
lia.qcn, gnaw 
JKcibe, row9 
fdcn, 8ow5 



flaucn, stow2 
prcuen, strew 

©trob, straw2 

Zaw, tow 
Zi)a\\, dewie 

traucn, trow^ 



(9?(afc) balQ, hello ws^ 
bicficn, how 
23i\qcn, how 

Sorfl, barrow^ 

bor(]Cn, borrow 

3?Ur(J, burrow (borough) 



GERMAN AND ENGLISH WORDS. XXlii 

©ffenbogen, elbow ^JJiorgen, morrow 

fotgen, follow f^S^n, saw 

^urcf)e, furrow fdbwcfgen, swallow23 

©afge, gallows ©orge, sorrow 

JQageborn, hawthornis tagen, dawnis 

l)eiligen, hallows ^cilg, tallow 

5D?agen, maw 3Sogef, fowl 

5[)iarf, marrow 
Note. B e 11 e n means properly to hark. Our words bdl and bull 
are cognate with it. In this word there is no trace of the letter j. — 
H o h I is also irregular. The w may come from the h transposed. 
Compare S e h n e. — S a e n is sajan in Gothic. — T r a u e n, to trust, old 
English trow. — B ah re, harrow, i. e. 6/e?', perhaps belongs to this class of 
words. — Hallow comes from Anglo-Saxon halgian for haligan. — Mag en 
properly means stomach.— Sorge now means anxiety, care. — From 
schwelgen comes S c h w a 1 g, the swallow, or throat. 

20. The letter h before w, which is of frequent occurrence 
in the old German dialects, and is retained and inserted after 
the w in English, is dropped in the modern German. 

2Batt(ftfrf)), whale ; old German hual 
SCctl^en, wheat; Gothic hwaiteis 
9Ba^, what ; Dutch wat ; Swedish hvas 
^eii, while ; old Saxon huila 

SKeilanb, whilom 

Weitten, whine ; Gothic guainon 

n^etg, white ; Gothic hveits ; old German huiz 

tt^enn, when ; old German huenne 

n^eflen, whose ; Gothic hvis ; old German hues 

VDCgen, whet ; old German huezan ; A. S. hvettan 

2Serft, wharf; Anglo-Saxon and Swedish hvarf 

n)ifpern, whisper 

Note. It will be observed that though the h comes after the w in 
English, it is pronounced as if it preceded. 



XXIV SYNOPTICAL VIEW OF 

21. A liquid is frequently dropped in the English ; less 
frequently in the German. 

5(f^, as; low German as 

anbcr, other ; Gothic anthar ; old Saxon aihar and othar'^ 

S3icnc, bee ; old German bine and bie 

bir, thee 

fern, far ; old German verre and verren^ 

fiinf, five ; Gothic//?!/-; Anglo-Saxon^s 

niir, me ; old Saxon mi ^gj, 

?0?Unb, mouth; Gothic munths ; Anglo-Saxon mutK^ ■■ 

3UflCnb, youth ; Anglo-Saxon Jwg-wrf/i^ 

nun, now ; in eight dialects nu 

geftern, yester(day)25 

^Vicjlcr, priest; fvom presbyter ; Anglo-Saxon prco5( Jj^ 

^fortner, porteri^ " 

9?efniarin, rosemary ; Lat. ros maris, or ros marimis 
rcd)ncn, reckon 

fanft, soft2 

fold), such ; Anglo-Saxon svilk"^ 

(2pOrn, spur ; old German sporo and spor"^ 

©tern, star : old German ste)ro and sterno^ 

fprcd)en, speak ; Anglo-Saxon sprecan and specan}^ 

S^burnt, tower; old German iurre ; Anglo-Saxon tor 

Un^, us ; old Saxon us 

tDCid), which ; Anglo-Saxon hvilc^ 

tt)ir, vve ; old Saxon toe and tvi ; Swedish vi 

58urbC, burden 
$PraUti.qa"V hndcgroom^^ 
HJatCrnC, huitern 

?ud>(^, lynx 

^BtWrtbe, myrde 
^Ml.qcr, |»ilgrim 

Stcit]C, stnirl 

53c(r, world ; old German mrlt^ 



GERMAN AND ENGLISH WORDS. 



XXV 



22. The liquids are sometimes interchanged with each 
other ; and r is sometimes used for s, and is sometimes trans- 
posed. 



Slfaun, alum 
95efen, bosom^ 
SScben, bottom^s 

SSufen, bosom 

£)egen, dagger^ 
So(rf), dirkS 
geffcf^ fetterH 

^inb, chiidii 

SDrben^ order 
Drgef, organ^ 
^urpur, purple 
^eit^ tent^5 



^ifen, iron 



frteren, freeze (A. S. frysan) 
^afe, hare 

(t)er)[{eren, loosed 
tt)ar, was 



93rennen, burn 
SSitrjle, brush 

SSorfle, bristle ? 
Srette, board^, 18 

britte, thirdis 

blircf), throughi6 
prrf)t, frightii 
bunbert, hundred 
3^0§, (h)orse; old German 
hros and or* 



23. ®dE) in German, when 
corresponds to s in English. 

®d)taf, sleepi 
frf)lagen, slay^s 
©cf)[eim, slime 
fcf)[anf, slank 

fd)taii, sly^ 
fd)(eijjen, slice (split) 
fd)timm, slim 
fd)titten, sliders 
(gd)(nmmer, slumber24 
fd)fitpfen, slipS, i3 
fd)mecfen, smack^ 
fct)meigen, smite"^ 
fd)meljen, smeltis 

©d)mer§, smarti, 15 



it comes before I, m, n, or t^?, 

®d)mib, smithi8 
fcf)mieren, smear 

(Sct)mug, smut^5 

®d)nee, snow^ 
©cf)nepfe, snipeis 
©itnupfen, snuff i3 
©cf)tt)at6e, swallowi9? 

(gcf)tt)an, swan 
©cf)tt>arm, swarm 
fct)n)ar§, swart(hy) 
©chnjebe, Swede 
@cf)n)ein, swine 
©d)tt)eig, sweati^ 

fct)tt)elten, swell 



XXVI SYNOPTICAL VIEW OF 

©cfimert, sword^, is fd)n)ingen, swing 

®d)U>CtT:cr, sister'* fd)n)ifeen, sweat^ 

fcf)tDimmcn, swim fd)tt)oren, swear 

Note. S c h generally corresponds to s h ; in a few cases, to s c, as 
in S c h r a u b e, S' rew ; S c h r i f t, script. The words smack^ smut, sivaii 
or swarthy, do not correspond exactly in sense with the German words. 

24. Mh in English corresponds to mm or m in German. 
Saiim, thumb6 ?amm, lamb 

S)\xm\m{, huinble(bee) JiUmmcr, number 

^amm, comb^ (gd)[iimmer, slumber 

jammer, chamberii tummedt, tumble 

jtriime, crumb 

25. The letter g in German sometimes corresponds to y 
in English. 

©iitnten, yawn ®dfcf)t, yeast 

@arbere6e, wardrobe gdtten, yell 

©ant, yarn ©eftcrn, yester(day) 



APPENDIX. 

It will be useful to add here a few of the most common 
words of Latin origin which have become so far Germanized 
as not always to be recognized by the student. 

?(lirife(, auriculus 33ril(e, beryllus (chrystal) 

3(d)fc, axis 53iu1)L^(t>aiim), buxus 

Slcfer, ager X5crf)aitt, decanus 

51(aiin, alumon (Jbcr, aper 

JlUip't, an;,nistia ^fMfl/ acetum 

93afc(, baculu8 5^lf>^f/ fabnla 

S5orfe, bursa (pui-se) ^^^^^f ^"^^o 

SBricf, breve (epistle) f^^KlV f»ls"s 



LATIN AND GERIMAN WORDS. 



XXVU 



^^afait, Phasianus (bird 

of Phasis) 
l^enfier, fenestra 
©ejicrn, hesternus 
J^^atm, calamus 
^an^, Johannis 
l)eilte, hodie 
^Orn, cornu 

irren, erro 

fal)f, calvus 
jammer, camera 
^anjel, cancelli 
^arf, Caroius 
^atbeber, cathedra 
^ajltane, castanea 
^dfe, caseus 
^ebfe, gula 

Mdd); ealix 
^erfer, career 
^ette, catena 
^tdber, cicer (chick-pea) 
^lofler, claustrum 
^cpf, caput 

^orper, corpus 

^rone, corona 

?or(6ecre), laurel 

?Orenj, Laurentius (Law- 
rence) 
5[)?afe(, macula 

mabnen, moneo 
mafen, molo 

5[)ieer, mare 
?j)?auer, murus 
5)?unfler, monasterium 

(minster) 
y)U\)le, mold (mill) 



3iabme, nomen 

^acf)t, f)actum 

^ebet, pedeUus (beadle) 

^ecf), pix 

^enbef, pendulum 

-^fau, pavo 

^fal^, palatium (Palatinate) 

^feil, pilum 

^^orte, porta 

^ofaf, poculum 

^uft)er, puivis 

^Unft, punctum 
gtab, rota 
3f;utn, ruina 

fd^rciben, s -ribo 

©d)ltge(, scutella 
©enf, sinapi 
fldber, securus 

©iegel, sigillum 

(Eptegct, speculum 
@i)(be, syllaba 
Xa(ar, talaris (long gown) 
Xafd, tabula 
S^erjte, tenia (pars) 
Xhron, thronus 
Xifcf), discus 
Ubr, hora 
U(m, ulmus 
Uttje, uncia, (ounce) 
25eit, Vitus (Saint V.) 
XVahr, verus 
SBllbetm, Guilielmus 
3in^, census 
3ivH(, circulus 
3itt)er, cithera 



XXVIU LATIN AND GERMAN WORDS. 

Words are very commonly adopted from the Latin with 
no other important change than the omission of the final syl- 
lable; as, 2U>(^o(iit, 3IchJ)f, SibDocat, 2(pparat, cafcuc, Son^ 
fufat, Secret, gigur, frit)o(, ©ran, ®9p^, Molo^, 9tatur, 
ytcvo^ Dfttcin, ^>rdfeft, ^rimat, Duart, ®enat, Zxactat^ 
X^xann, Ufur, SSafal, SBocaL See Gram. p. 56. 

When the final syllable of words ending in osus is omitted, 
the vowel o is commonly changed into ; as, 3(mbiti6^, CU^ 
rioe, geuero^, ingeniod, fumino^, ffanbalo^, tuberod* 

When the final syllable of words ending in ulus, a, urn, or 
ola is dropped, the vowels, u, a and o in the penult are chang- 
ed into e, that is, the words all end in ei in German ; as, 2(rti^ 
fel, (5pi|le(, (Srempet, fillet, ©fanbef, 3nfel, ^ixbel, Sta^^ 
itef, gjJafel, ^BJanipef, y)Utvih% ?D?irafe(, yiln^tci, Drafcf, 
^Partifcl, ^cgel, gpectafef, !tempc(, SSehifet, a?ocabeL The 
hard sound of the letter c before those Latin terminations is 
preserved by changing the letter into k. 

When two syllables are dropped, €?itia goes into eilj ; ttius, 
a, U7n, into ij ; and anus sonietimes into av and sometimes 
into dr; as, SlcciDenj, Jibelefcen^, Jlppeteng, Jlubicnj, Sif^ 
fercnj, CSIeganj, Sminenj, ©rcrefcenj, C^rperien^, gvequenj, 
3mpertinenj, 3mpiibcnj, ^ncibenj, :j»"coherenj, 3nba(genj, 
^nflueuj, Cs»l)n'enj, ^^K^f^^Jr Snft^nj (instance, objection 
urged), ificeug, 5Dtiiui(Tcenj, ^{eDcrenj ; — S^ovai, ifiicrej, 
^>ropers, ealpij, Xcvc\n ; ZsWii, 9iOtij, Seljlij, ^prdjubij ; 
— Thenar, (imifar, Ta^UiY, gcnunar, 'lUiiffiondr, (Secretdn 

Substantives ending in tas, gen.tatis, change that termina- 
tion into tdt in GiMinaii ; as, ^HMUtdt, JVvH'ultdt, .V>umanitdt, 

3mmiinitdr, ^^^Nnipunitdr, Csn^ignitdt, C^itinitdt, JCNnftrniitdt, 
5rregu(aritdt, Wajejldr, yjjortalirdt. 

WhiMi the letter c comes before e, i and y, it is commonly 
chang(Ml into J in G^Tman ; as, ^ait^ef, ^^ro^e^, 9icgep, 
Uiiie, ^iwi}, Sirfef, 3itl}eiv etc. 



SELECTIONS. 



SERMON ON INDULGENCES. 

PUBLISHED SEPTEMBER 4, 1517.1 



©ermon t)om 5{b(af^ unb ®nabe\ 

3um erflen^ fctlt it)v m^en^ bag etficf)e3 ncue^ ?et)rer, a(g' 
SiJJagtiler ©ententiarum, @t 2;i}oma^, unb it)re gefger, qc^ 

1 There is special propriety in beginning these selections with the 
sermon on indulgences, not only because it preceded the celebrated 
Ninety-Five Theses, but because, being written in German, it gives us^ 
a good specimen of Luther's early style of composition. It has not, 
indeed, the regularity, the ease and the richness of his later composi- 
tions, and is therefore more difficult to translate ; but it furnishes the- 
most natural beginning, and is, moreover, so short that it may, with-^ 
out danger of being too repulsive, be placed before other more at-^ 
tractive pieces. This sermon was publicly burnt by Tetzel at Frank- 
fort on the Oder. The same person attempted to write a refutation/ 
of it, to which Luther replied in an elaborate defence. 

^Zum ersten for zum ersten Male, in the first place, l\k& 
the Latin primo. Am ersten is equivalent to z u e r s t, first of all. 
FUrs erste, means, /or the present^ or, to begin with, and is equiva- 
lent to far je tzt, or, vorlaa fi g. 

^Etliche, some, is obsolete. For etlicher (in the singular)' 
irgend einer is now used ; and for e 1 1 i c h e (plural), e i n i g e 
is used. 

^ Neue, in comparison with the apostles and early fathers. By 
Magister Sententiarum, he means Peter of Lombardy or 
Lombardus j and by S t. T h o m a s, Thomas Aquinas. 
1 



2 SELECTIONS FROM LUTHER. 

belt ber 93u^e brei Zbeile,^ nemticf) :^ tie Dleue, hie 95eicf)te, 
tie @enu.qtbming»3 jjitb tt>ien)ol)( bicfcr Unterfcf)ieb (nad) 
il)rer ?OJeiniing) fc{)n)erIiiV ^tcx and) gar nid)ti^ gcgriinbet 
crfiiubcn n>irb in ber t)ei(igen Sd)rifr, nerf) in ben alten \)ci^ 
ligen cf)rifl(irf)en ?ebren, bod) tt)eUen n)ir bad jefet fo bieiben 
laffen, nnb nad) iljrer ffi^eife reben. 

3um anbern fagen jTe,^ ber 2lb(ag nimmt nid)t l)in ben 
erRen ober anbern Zljeii,^ bad ifl bie 5Kene ober a3eid)te, 
fonbern"^ ben britten net)in(id) bie ©enngtljnung. 

*DerBussedrei Theile. DerBusse is in the dative 
case, — "assign to repentance three parts," i. e. divide it into three 
parts. 

^Nemlich, more commonly written namlich. Observe the 
use of the colon, which stands not only before quotations, but often 
before words in apposition. 

^ Genugthuung, penanccy properly satisfaction made by submit- 
ting to the penalties imposed by the laws of the church. 

''Schwerlich, like our word /tardhj, expresses, 1. dilRculty, 2. 
a hi^h degree of improbability. This latter is the more common sig- 
nification. " And althongli this division according to their view 
(theory), is scarcely or rather in no wise found (to be) grounded in 
the Holy Scriptures, nor in the ancient holy Christian teaching, still 
we will for the present let timt remain so (let that pass) and speak 
after their manner." Oder auch gar nichts (for nicht), or 
even not at all. In order to perceive the force of auch, also^ even^ 
it will be necessary to regard the phrase, not in tlie light of a contrast 
to the preceding word, but in that of a climax, — *' probably not 
(schwerlich) or even not at all, or certainly not." 

*Sagen sie. When a principal sentence begins with anything 
which has the nature of an adverb, whether it be a proper adverb, an 
adverbial phrase or an adverbial conjunction, the nominative com- 
monly follows its verb. 

•AndernTheil. Ander frequently stands for 2 w e i te r, like 
alter for secundus in I^tin. Strictly speaking, it designates a thing 
differing from the one first named. " Secondly, they say indulgence 
does not remit (nimmt nicht h i n) the first or the second part, i. e. 
repentance or confession^ but the third, viz. penance." 

' So n d e r n, />w/, is derived from the verb sondcrn, to sundcry 
to separate^ and is therefore used only after negatives. Only in such 



SERMON ON INDULGENCES. S 

3um brittert, bte ®enugtf)uung n)irb xtyeitex^ getbeifet in 
fcrei $t()ei[e, ba^ tfi, 95eten, ^^aftert, SHmofen, affo,^ bag 93e^ 
ten, begreife^ aUerfci^ ^iBerf ber ©eelen eigen/ al^ fefett, 

cases could it have its natural antithetic force. Aber, but, is a mere 
adversative, meaning originally, again, but again, as we see in the 
word aber mal, ft 5cconrf time. So in the word Aberglaube, it 
signifies faith of a secondary, counterfeit, or spurious character, that 
is, superstition. 

* W e i t is of the same etymology as the English word wide, the t 
and the d being continually interchanged in the diflerent Teutonic 
family of languages. The Germans use the word to represent dis- 
tance simply without reference to form, as it respects length and 
breadth. Hence we iter means farther. 

'Also, in German, never corresponds to the English word also. 
The second particle in the compound, so, is the significant one, and the 
first, or all (equivalent to gan z) simply gives intensity to the parti- 
cle so, meaning altogether so. Out of the primary meaning so or thus, 
grows the derivative signification, consequently ; though in this sense, 
it never expresses logical necessity, like f o 1 g 1 ic h, but a looser con- 
nection of antecedent and consequent, which may be accidental. 

^ Begreifen means first and literally to take hold of, to seize tcitk 
the hand, as in Geu. 27: 21. Tritt herzu, mein Sohn, dass ich 
dichbegreife. Greifenis of the same origin as the English 
word gripe, p and/ being often interchanged, and corresponds to the 
Latin prehendo. The second sense of b e g re i f e n \^ to comprise, to 
comprehend, as in this place. The third is to apprehend. B e g r i f f, 
means a simple conception, or notion, or that which is expressed by a 
single word, and not by a sentence which would be Geda nke. 

*AIlerlei. Lei was formerly a substantive signifying /ciwci, 
and governed such genitives as aller, vieler, mane her, zwei- 
e r, but finally coalesced with them, forming what are now regarded 
as adverbs, as, allerlei, vi elerlei, mancherlei, zweierlei, 
ail sorts of, many sorts of, etc. 

^Der Seelen eigen. Eigen now governs the dative ; for- 
merly it governed also the genitive, as the Latin adjectives proprius, 
similis, etc. govern sometimes the dative and sometimes the genitive. 
" Prayer comprehends every kind of act peculiar to the mind." Der 
Seelen, is here probably the genitive singular governed by eigen. 
So Luther uses the word eigen elsewhere, as des romischen 
Stuhls eigen. Formerly feminine nouns were declined in the 



4 SELECTIONS FROM LUTHER. 

bicf)ten,i boren ®otte^ 3Bort, prebigcit, febreit unb berglei^ 
cl)en,2 gaj^cn begreift allerlci ^iBerf ber Sajleiinig feiueg 
§(cifrf)e(J, a(^ n)ad)cn, arbeiten, l)art ?ager,3 ^{eiber K* 
3l(mofeu begrcift aiicvki gate 2Serfe ber Siebe unb ©arm^ 
^eqigfcit gegen ben 97dct)ften» 
3unt t)ierten ijl bei it)nen aiicn unbejweifeft, bag ber 2(6^ 

singular number as well as in the plural. We find many remains of 
such declension in hereditary forms of expression, as, a u f E r d e n, 
instead ofaufder Erde, o/i earth. 

* D i c h t e n originally signified to ma/ce^ to produce, as may be 
peen in the works of the earliest German authors. At a later period, 
it came to be used only of the productions of the mind, 1. to meditate 
or think, in a general sense, 2. to compose works of imagination. Com- 
pare the Greek words ttoiecj and noi/jaic. It is here used in the for- 
mer of these two significations (to meditate), now obsolete, except in 
such phrases as Dichten und Trachten,/?Mr/?05cs and efforts. 
Its present prevailing signification is, to icrile poetry or rcmance. 

' D e r g 1 e i c h e n. In the early German, the word g 1 e i c h com- 
monly governed the genitive. Hence we have many compound 
words, formed by the coalescence of g 1 e i c h and the genitive of the 
word it governs. Dergleichen, for derer gleichen, is form- 
ed from the adjective g 1 e i c h and the relative pronoun d e r, which 
both in the genitive plural and in the feminine of the genitive singu- 
lar is derer. This form, therefore, was used, when tlie substantive 
to which it referred was either in the plural or in the singular of the 
feminine. When a masculine or neuter singular was leferr.^d to, 
dessgleichen for dessen gleichen was used. We find some- 
thing very similar in the Latin words ejusmodi and cvjusmodi. This 
will be best illustrated by a few examples; as, dergleichen 
Thiere kenne ich nicht, / am vnacquainted with animals of 
the kind. Sanftmuth, deren gleichen mir inderGe- 
Bchichte noch nicht bekannt ist, a mifdness the like of which 
is not knoicn to me in historxj. Er ist ein Mann, dessglei- 
chen ich noch nicht gesehen habe, he is a man, the like 
of whom I have never seen, Dessgleichen, likewise, also, is a 
conjunction. Dergleichen is not so used. 

^ H a r t [e a] Lager. Before neuter substantives, the nomina- 
tive and accusative ending of the adjective e s is often omitted, es- 
pecially in familiar language or where no particular stress is to be 
laid upon the adjective. 



SERMON ON INDULGENCES. O 

fag t)mmmmt btefefben Sffierfe ber ®euugtf)uung, fur bte 
©i'mbe fd)u(big^ ju tf)un ober aufgefegt Sen fo^ er btefet^ 
ben 5iBerfe atte foffte t)tnnet)men, btiebe nic{)t^ @ute^ mef)r 
ba, ba^ n)ir t[)un m6d)ten. 

3um funften i)T: bei Diefen gewefen eine groge nnb nod^ 
«nbefrf)loiTene Dpinion, ob ber SJbfaf and) nocf) etn)a^ mel)t 
Ijinnebme, benn^ fo{d)e anfgetegte gute 5Berfe, nemltcf), ob 
er ancf) bie ^etn, wdd)c bie g6ttlict)e ®ered)ttgfeit fiir bic 
©i'tnbe forbert, abnebme. 

3um fed)^ten, (a^^ tcf) if)re Dptnion un^ern^orfen^ auf 

* S c h u 1 d i g with its dependent words, far die SOnde zu 
t h u n, qualifies the substantive W e r k e. The sentence is abrupt. 
Regularly it would be, Werke der Genugthuung, welche 
fUrdieSandeschuldigzu thun oder au fg esetzt 
s i n d, " Indulgences release one from those works of satisfaction 
which are due(schuldig zu thun) for sin, or which are impo- 
sed (by the laws of the church)." Aufgelegt would now be 
used instead of a u f g e s e t z t. A 1 1 e, which occurs twice in this 
paragraph, is the only adjective that is declined, when placed after 
its substantive. 

2 S o, ?f, as in old English. " For if it should release from all 
these works, nothing good (no good work) would remain which we 
might perform." In modern German, w e n n is used instead of s o, 
which has become obsolete. 

3 D e n n, in the old writers is the common word after comparatives, 
for which al s, than, is now employed, except in a few cases requi- 
red by euphony, as m e h r d e n n a 1 1 e, not a 1 s a 1 1 e. " With 
many there has been a great and still unsettled question, whether in- 
dulgences release from anything more than such good works imposed 
(by the church), whether it remove also the penalty which divine 
justice demands for sin." 

^ L a s s, for lasse. Such omissions of the final e in the first 
person singular of the present, are frequent in the older language and 
in colloquial style. An elision in German, on account of the vowel 
with which the following word begins is not required, nor even al- 
lowed, at present, except in familiar conversation and in poetry. In 
the very next line we meet with sage i c h without any elision of 
the final e of the verb. 

^ Unverworfen, not reprolated. Though this is a participle, 

1* 



b SELECTIONS FROM LUTHER. 

bie^mabl ;i ta^$ fagc ich, bag man ax\6 feiitcr (Bd)V\ft^ ie^ 
n>al)reit fann, ia^ gott(id)e ®erecf)tigfcit etma^ ^Vin ober 
G>enugtl)iiung begebre ebcr ferbere i^cn bem Siinber, bernt 
allein fcine herj(id)e imb mabre SKeii^ imb 23cfehrung, mit 
^iirfal5/ binfiirbcr^ ba^ .Sreuj (5brifti jii tragen, iinb bie 
jobgenanntcn^ 2Cerfe C^^ndj wn Stiemanb aufgcfel^t)' jii 

the verb, unverwerfen is not, and could not be used. V e r- 
w e r f e n, ^o reject, is used, but its participle, v e r w o r f e n, is often 
used adjectivcly like our word abandoned. U n v e r vv o r f e n is not 
used adjectivcly. 

* Aufdiessmahl, for the old grammatical form, auf dieses 
M a ],for this time, for the present. As an adverb, it is now used with- 
out the preposition, as diesmal, from which even an adjective, 
d i e s m a 1 i g, pertaining to this time, is formed. FUr diesmal 
is still in use. 

^Auskeiner. Schrift, from no passage of Scripture. In 
English, we also say, " this Scripture," lor " this passage of Scrip- 
lure." " This I say, that no one can prove from any passage of Scrip- 
ture, etc. — except simply one's (his) hearty," etc. 

•* Re u, now written Re u e, repentance, is cognate with our word 
rue. Compare n e u, neic, tre u, true. 

^Fursatz. FUr and v o r were originally the same word, and 
hence in later times were often used for each other. V o r s a t z, is 
now the settled orthography. 

* H i n f Q r d e r. F r d e r or f o r d e r, an old comparative of the 
•word fort (as the Knglish word further is a comparative of forth). 
Instead of h i n f tt r d e r, henceforth, the words fcrner, weiter 
aie now employed. 

* Obgenannten. Ob, in old German, was ust'd in the sense 
of o b e n, above, as may still be seen in such compounds as O b d a c h, 
a cover over something, a shelter ; and O b h u t, pjotcction over one. 
In official and Irgal documents, such antiquated forms as ob b e m e 1- 
det, obbesagt, obbcrUhrt, oberwahnt and obgenannt 
are still found for o b c n b e m e 1 d t* t , n )» «» n Iw s a g t, etc. before- 
mentioned, aforesaid, etc. 

^ A u c h von N i e m a n d a u f g e s c i z t, an oHiptical or lather 
pointed mode of expression, perfectly in cliaracter with Luther's terse 
style. In the sinootiier but more diffuse nianner of the present age, 
we should expect such an expression as, a u c h w e n n s i e von 



SERMON ON INDULGENCES. 7 

iibeu* Semt fo fprirf)t er^ buret) @jecf)ie[: SfBetttt fief) 
berSiinber 6efel)ret, unb tl)ut red)t, fo n>itl 
tef) feiner ©iinbe n{ef)t mel)r gebenten. Stem/^ 
alfo l)at er fefbpt aUe bie^ abfo(t)irt, SiKaria 5!KagbaIena, ben 
®irf)t6rudf)igen, bie (5t)ebred)enu 2C. Unb niod)te n>obI 
gerne^ l)oren, tt)er ba^ anber^^ betDcibren foK, uuangefe^en/ 
bag et(id)e Sectored fo gebaiie{)t l)atJ 

Niemand aufgesetz (or rather aufgelegt) wurden. 
" With a determination henceforth to practise the abovementioned 
works (B e t e n, Fasten, A 1 m o s e n), though they should be im- 
posed by no one," i. e, though not required by the discipline of the 
church. 

^Sosprichter. Eris often so used by Luther, in quotations, 
in which the pronoun does not refer to any preceding word, but to 
the general idea, easily supplied in each instance, of God as the au- 
tlior of the Scriptures. In the present case, e r might, indeed, refer 
to the word Clirlsti in the preceding sentence. But it is altogether 
improbable that Luther had that word in mind. 

^ I te m, a Latin word much used by the old German authors, in 
the sense o£ likeicise, also, in enumerating particulars. In its Angli- 
cised signification, where it stands for the particulars themselves (the 
several items), it comes about as near to the original, as the word tan- 
dem does when applied to the mode of harnessing horses at length, in- 
stead of abreast. 

^ A 1 1 e die, nil these. As in Greek, so in German, that, which 
came to be a definite article, was originally a demonstrative pronoun. 
In the old writers, therefore, we must expect to meet with the de- 
monstrative use of the word more frequently than in later writers. 
In Luther's works, it is constantly occurring. 

^Mochte gerne, an abrupt expression for ich mochte 
ger n. Luther often omits the personal pronouns in the nominative 
in this way. Gerne is not now used in elevated style, 

^ Das anders, that otherwise, i. e. the contrary. 

® Unangesehen, dass, notwitlistanding ; a n g e s e h e n, d a s s, 
considering that. Sometimes the genitive is used with the former, 
dessen unangesehen, wo regard being paid to that. This mode 
of expression is now limited mostly to legal forms. Dessen un- 
geachtet is now in good use. 

' GedaQcht hat. Dauchten, an impersonal verb, now, ac- 
cording to the grammarians, requiring the dative, according to usage 



8 SELECTIONS FROM LUTHER. 

3um fTctcnteit, bai ftnbet man n)of)(, ba^ ®ott etficf)e 
ttarf) feiner @erect)ti(3fcit ftrafct, eber burcf) ^>ein bringet ju 
ber Dtcu, n>ie im 89. ^>fafm : ©o feine ^inber wer^ 
ben fiinb ig en, tt) i in d) nt it be r 9tut{)en t^re 
©iinbe l)eimfud)en, ab e r bocf) meine SSarntiJ 
f) e r J i g f e i t n i d) t Don i {) n e n n) e n b e n. 2(6er biefe 
^ein ftebet in 9ticmanbe^ ®ewa(ti nad)5ntajTen, benn altein 
®otM ; ja er n)iK jTe nid)t fajjen, fonbern i^erfprid)t, er 
tt)offe (Te anflegen^ 

3um ad)ten, berbalben^ fo fann man berfelben gebiinften 
^ein fcinen Stamen geben, VDcip and)^ 3tiemanb, n)ad iTe ifl, 
fo <Te biefe (Strafe nid)t ift, and) bie gnten obgenannten 
2Berfe nid)t i{t. 

3nm nennten fage id), ob bie d)ripfid)e ^ird)e nod) f)cnt 
befd]lo(fe nnb an(>erf(aret, bag ber Slblag tnebr benn bie 
^iBerfe^ ber ©enngtbnnng l)inncbme ; fo mdre ed bennod) 
tanfenbmat beffer, bat^ fein Sbrijtenmenfd) ben 5lb(ag li^ 

oflen governs the accusative ; and so it does in this passage. " It has 
so appeared to some doctors." 

* In Niemandes Gcwalt nachzulassen. "In no one's 
power to remit, except God's alone (i. e. to remit this penalty stands 
or is in no one's power, etc.). Nay he will not let it go, but promises, 
he will inflict it." 

2 Dcrhalben, therefore, is an obsolete form, for which dess- 
halben is used. Hal ben originally governed the particle pre- 
fixed to it in the genitive ; at present it is treated as a single word. 
Desshalben so, thus therefore. Halber is now used instead of 
h a 1 b e n except in a few cases, mostly with a pronoun (as m e i n e t- 
ha Ibe n) or where the substantive has tlie article. 

^ A u c h, followed by a negative, means neither, or nor, Weiss 
auch Niemand, nor does any one know; auch die guten 
Werke nicht, nor the ifood icoiks above mentioned. 

*Mehr denn die Werke, etc. " that indulgences release from 
(take away) more than the works of satisfaction," i. e. release one 
not only from the necessity of performing the works of penance im- 
posed by tlie church, but frotii suffering the penalty which God has 
aflixed to rt n. See parngrrij>h fifth. 



SERMON ON INDULGENCES. 9 

fete^ ober begcbrete, fcnbern fca^ fee fieber bie SOBerfe thatcn 
unb bie ^ein titten. Senn ber 2(6(ag nirf)t9 anber^ ifl nod) 
mag merben/ benn gtarf)(ajTung guter SBerfe unb beilfamer 
^^ein, bie man bi((iger fottte ern?dt)fen, benn tjerfaflen. SOBie:? 
n^obt et(id)c3 ber nenen ^rebiger j\t)eierfei ^ein erfnnben, 
Medicativas et Satisfactorias, ba^ ijl:, et(icf)e ^ein jnr ®e:f 
nugtlniung, etlid)c gur Seflernng* 2l6er tt)ir l)aben me^r 
greibeit ju ^erarf)ten (©o t ?ob)4 fo(d)e^ nnb befgteirf)ett 
-^Xanberei, benn jTe baten jn erbid)ten ; benn aKe ^ein, ja 
aKe^J, n)a6 ®ott anflegt, ijl befferlid) unb jutragtic^ bem 
Sbnften* 
3um jebnten, ba^ i\t nid)t^ gerebet,^ ba^ ber -^etn unb 

^ Losete. 'Etymologically, lo s e n means to make 1 o s, loose 
or free. Next it rignifies to redeem, or to purchase one's release with 
money ^ and then to purchase, or obtain. Ablass losen means to 
purchase or obtain indulgence, or release from ecclesiastical penalty. 

^ Noch mag werden, nor may become, i. e. be made anything 
else than the remission, etc. Nachlassung guten Werke is 
not the omission of good works, on the part of the individual, but a 
relaxation of the law which requires them of penitents. 

^Wiewohl etliche, etc., though some of the modern preach- 
ers have invented (e r f u n d e n, with h ab e n understood) two kinds 
of penalty, medicativas et Satisfactorias, i. e. "some penalties (penal- 
ty) as a satisfaction, some as a correction." This sentence is properly 
only a clause belonging to the preceding. 

* Gott Lobb for Gott sey Lob, praise to God. G o 1 1 is da- 
tive. " But we have more liberty (thank God) to despise such non- 
sense (babblings) than they have to fabricate it ; for all penalties, nay 
even everything which God imposes is corrective and profitable." 
Besserlich is scarcely ever used now, and never, as here, in the 
sense of corrective. It ; e m?, at present, improvable, corrigible. 

^ Das its nichts geredet. This turn of expression is pecu- 
liarly German. The Germans often use a passive, where it could 
not be used in English, " That is nothing said," means, " such an 
assertion (as that which follows) amounts to nothing, or is idle talk." 
Nichts must be carefully distinguished from n ic ht, which could 
hardly be used and would give a very different sense, viz. " tha has 
not been spoken' '(sondern ausgeschrien, but screamed out). 



10 SELECTIONS FROM LUTHER. 

SBerfe ju t)icfi jTub, ba^ bcr gKenfcf) <Te nicf)t mag ^ottbrut^ 
gen, ber ^lirje l)albcn2 feine^ ?ebcn^, barum it)m 9iett) fet) 
bcr SIblap. SIitttDortc icf),^ ba^ tai feinen ©runb [)a6e unb 
ein laiiter^ ©ebicf)t ifl* S^cnn 0ott unb bie beifigc ^ircfje 
tegen Dtienmub met)r auf/ bcnn it)m ju tragen moglirf) ift, 

* Z u V i e 1 governs the genitives der Pein und Werke, 
" too much of penalty and of works for a man to perform." Instead 
of d a s s, present usage would require als dass; it would require 
nic h t to be omitted, and mag to come after vollbringen; thus, 
als dass der Mensch sie vollbringen mag. For an ex- 
planation of the idiom, zu viel als dass (too much for a man to 
perform) see Gram. p. 378 infra. 

* H a 1 b e n always follows the genitive which it governs ; conse- 
quently derKOrze is governed by h a 1 b e n, and governs L e- 
bens, "on account of the.brevity of his life." 

^ Ihm Noth sey der Ablass, is, on account of darum^j 
a grammatical or necessary inversion for der Ablass s e yi h ra 
Noth (necessary is indulgence^ for indulgence is necessary). Accord- 
ing to present usage, the inverted sentence would be given thus : se i 
ihm der Ablass Noth. But the words, Antworte ich, 
in the beginning of the next sentence, are inverted optionally, mere- 
ly for the sake of rhetorical effect. The verb is rendered emphatic 
by being placed before its nominative. 

* L a u te r, when declined, means pure, unmixed ; wh^n not de- 
clined, it means, 7ic»//i/w^ ^m^, equivalent to n i c h t s a I s. L a u* 
tere Steine would mean pure stones, each one of which is free 
from foreign admixture. Lauter Steine, would mean nothing X^lf 
but stones. Lautere Weiber, neat, cleanly women; lautef, ^,'J 
W e i ber, nothing but ivomcn, i.e. a company of w men without ^ .? 
any men. E'lie \, empty, mere, is used with a similar distinction 
when declined and undeclined. Eitele Menschen means, • 
rain men ; eitel Menschen, nothing but nun. Lauter Ge- 

d i c h t, or e i te 1 G e d i c h t means, nothing but a fiction^ which , 
accidentally coincides nearly with a pure (unmixed) fiction, or a 
msre (emply) fiction. 

* Lege n Niemand mehr auf. Auflegen, when it 
means, not to place one thing upon another (auflegen eine 
Sache auf etwas), but to impose, in a metaphorical sense, some 
obligation upon a person, as in the passage before us, require j the rfa- 



SERMON ON INDULGENCES. II 

aB audf) ©t ^aulfagt: ba^ ©ott ttid)t ragti)er^ 
fucf)t wevicn 3emanb,imel)r benn er mag 
tr a g e n* Uub eg fanget^ ntcf)t menig ju ber (5l)ri(lent)eit3 
©cf)marf), bag man it)r ©c^ulb giebt, fie lege ntebr auf/ 
benn tt)ir tragcn fonnen* 
Sum eilften, xoenn gleid) bie S3uge, tm getjtlid)ett 3tecf)t5 

tive of the person (N i e m a n d). N i e m a n d is not declined gen- 
erally in the old writers except in the genitive. Modern writers are 
not uniform in respect to this, but more frequently form the dative 
and accusative by adding e m and e n to the nominative. 

^ Dass Gott nicht lasst versucht werden Jemand, 
is a construction that would hardly be allowed at the present time. 
Not only does dass ordinarily require that the leading verb (1 a s st) 
be thrown to the end of the clause, but that the accusative (J e- 
m a n d) stand immediately before the dependent verb (versucht 
werden) thus, dass Gott nicht Jemand versucht 
w e r d a n I a s s t, or for the sake of euphony, lasst versucht 
we r d e n. 

2 Es langet zu corresponds to the modern German e s g e- 
r e i ch t z u. The literal translation, it reaches to, does not give the 
sense. It is exactly of the same import as sum with the dativus 
commodi in Latin, est opprobrio, it is a disgrace, (es langet zur 
S ch m ac h). 

3 Christenheit, properly means Christians collectively, Chris- 
lenthum, (etymologically the same as Christendom), means Chris- 
tianity. Our word Christendom, therefore, does not correspond in 
signification with C h r i s t e n t h u m, as we should expect, but with 
Christenheit. The old writers, however, frequently use Chris- 
tenheit in both senses. 

^ Sie lege mehr auf. For this construction with the subjunc- 
tive (lege, of the same form with the indicative) instead of the in- 
version of the clause with dass and the use of the indicative, (dass 
sie mehr auflege), see Gram. p. 369, med. 

^ Im geistlichen Recht gesetzt, established in the ca- 
nonical law, Gesetzt, from s e t ze n, means settled, established. 
This participle was anciently used substantively (das Gesetzt e) 
in the sense o^ lain, lex. Subsequently the form G e s e tz, something 
settled, law, was adopted. Of the origin of this last word, we see a 
clear trace in the passage before us ; for a few lines below that which 
was gesetzt is referred to, and called G e s e t z. 



12 SELECTIONS FROM LUTHER. 

gefcbt, jc^t ttocf) gienge,! ba^ fi'tr eine jeg[icf)e ^obfimbe 
ffcben 3^l)ve 95u^e aufgetegt n\ire ; fo mii^te bed) bie 
6bri|lcnl)e:t biefelben ©efefee lajTcn,^ unb md)t tDciter auf^ 
legen, benn jTe einem jegtid)en ju tragen n>drcn :3 t)iel nje^^ 
Jiigcr nun fie jefet nid)t (Tnb/ foU man ad)ten, ba^ nid)t 

^ G i e n g e, iz?erc current, ic ere m /orce, obsolete, for which gel- 
ten is now more in use. 

^ L a s 8 e n, /ei go, i. e. relax or suspend. See the use of the word 
in connection with nachlassen, near the close of the 17th para- 
graph. 

^KinemJeglichen zu tragen wtlren, " than (they) 
are possible to be borne by each one." In explaining this idiom of 
the infinitive after the verb sey n, we mast not suppose that there 
is an ellipsis of any such word as m 6 g 1 i c h (m o g 1 i c h z u tra- 
gen waren); for the infinitive itself, in such constructions, has 
nearly the nature of the Latin participle in dus (ferendae sint), ex- 
cept that the German expression conveys tlie idea of possibility and 
rarely that o^ necessity, which is implied in the Latin. Urbs capien- 
dt' est, means, " the city must be taken ;" whereas die Stadt ist 
einzunehmen means " the city can be taken." In other respects, 
the constructions are similar. In sense, the infinitive (z u tragen) 
may be represented nearly by Latin adjectives in bilis {tolcrabites 
sint). See Gram. p. 258, infra. 

* Viel weniger nun siejetzt nicht sind, etc. W e- 
niger does not correspond with the rest of tiie sentence (which 
would seem to require mehr in its stead). There is probably an 
anacoluthon in the words soil man achten dass nicht 
meJir aufgelegt werde. Nun, as an adverb, means now. 
But as a conjunction, for which it is here used, it means noic that^ 
since, and is nearly of the same import as w e i 1. W o h 1, near 
the end of the paragrapli, qualifies tragen, as the emphasis rests 
on it rendering it equivalent to gut. in the sense of e t w a it can- 
not receive the emphasis. The whole paragiaph may be translated 
thus : ** Even if the penance, laid down in the canonical law, were 
now in force, (viz.) that for every mortal offence seven years' penance, 
be imposed, still would the church (C h r is te n h e i t) be obliged to 
relax those laws, and impose no more than each one should be able to 
bear. Much less (should those laws be executed) now that they are 
not (in force) — one sliould take care, that no more be imposed than 
each one can well bear." 



SERMON ON INGIJLGENCES. 13 

mebr aufgelegt njerbe, benn jebermaitn woU tragen faitn^ 
3um jtt)o(ften, man fagt tt)o!){/ bag ber ©iuiber mit ber 

ubrigen ^eiir^ in'g gegfeucr ebcr jum ?i6Iag gemeifet foil 

tt)erben ; aber e^ mxi mol)I mebr Sing^^ ^^jte ®runb itnb 

SScwabriutg gefagt 
Sum brcijebnten, e^ ift etn grower 3trtl)iim, bag 3^ntanl> 

meine, er n)oKe genug tl)un fiir feine giinbe/ fo bod)^ ©ott: 

biefelben allejeit umfonjl au^ iinfd)dgItdE)er ©nabe t)erJeit)e^;. 

iiicf)t^ bafitr bcget)renb, benn biufitrber rvoU lefccn,^" X)W 

* Man sagt wohl. An inspection of the various examples- 
found in most of these paragraphs will show that such adver- 
bial phrases at the beginning of a sentence as z u m z w o 1 f- 
ten sometimes cause tlie principal verb to precede its nomina- 
tive (invert the clause) and sometimes they do not. This circum- 
stance suggests the limitation of the rule. Only when such adver- 
bial phrases at the beginning of a sentence are closely connected 
with, and, as it were, incorporated into the clause does it cause an in- 
version. If the connection is very loose, which is ordinarily indicated. 
by a comma, the natural order is observed. "Whether the connection 
is to be regarded as close or not, will often depend on the mere feel- 
ing of the writer. Besides, the rule was less rigidly observed in Lu- 
ther's time than it is now. W o h 1, is here used, as in paragraph 7th^ 
in a concessive sense {to be sure, indeed) like z w a r or f r e i 1 i c h,, 
as is indicated by the adversative (aber) in the second clause. 

*Der abrigen Fein, that part of the penalty incurred^ 
which is not actually inflicted must be referred either to purgatory,, 
or to indulgences, i. e. must either be suffered in purgatory or com- 
muted for the price of indulgences. 

2 Mehr Dings. Indefinite adjectives, pronouns and numerals, 
or adverbs of quantity govern the genitive. More of thing, many a 
thing. So harsh an expression would not be tolerated in modern. 
German. 

* Er wolle genug thun fttr seine SOnde. See p. 11,, 
Note 4. 

* So d o c h, whereas (since yet). 

•Hinfarder wohl leben. For hinfUrder, see p. 6„ 
Note 5. The infinitive used substantively in German, corresponds very 
nearly to the present participle in English, — " desiring nothing in re- 
turn (d a f U r) but holy living.'^ Wohl, here, is a pure adverb and a. 

2 



14 



SELECTIONS FR03f LUTHER. 



Sbriftenbeit forbert wo\)i etrvaS ;i al]o mag unb fott jTe and} 
bajjcfbe nad)[ajTen imb nicht^ \d}X\>cvc^ unb iintraglid)e^ 
auflcgeiK 

3um t)ieqe()nten, 3(6(ag xvirb jugclaffeu urn bcr init)oU^ 
fommneit imb faiiten Sbrirten mitten, bie jTrf) nid)t tt>oUctt 
ferftict)2 iibcn in guten 'S.^crfen, eber iinteibtid) jTnb* Senrt 
2J6{ag forbert 3ticmanb jum bejTern,^ fonbern butbet eber 
jutajiet ibre UnDotffomment)eit» X^arum felt man nid)t tt>i^ 
iDer ben 2Jblag reben ; man fott ater and) Jtiemanb baju 
reben»4 

3um fiinfje[)nten, Diet f[d)erer unb befier tt)dte bcr, bcr^ 

synonyme of g u t. The latter refers to that which is adopted 'o its 
end, and may be said of inanimate things ; the former means agreeU' 
hly and must always refer directly or indirectly to a sentient being. 
Wohl leben means living in a way that is agreeable to God, 
In like manner, it is distinguished from gesund, iceM. G e- 
s u n d means healthy ; wohl means ia an ogreeabte state, either of 
health or of mind. 

* Die Christenheit fordert wohl etwas, " the (hon- 
or of) Christianity demands indeed something, (i. e. external discip- 
line ; but it should not be severe). Therefore it may, and even 
should, relax the same penalties, (whenever it is necessary), and im- 
pose nothing, etc." 

* K e c k 1 i c h, boldly, courarreously, obsolete in this sense. It sig- 
nifies the same as g e h 6 r i g, properly. ** Who are not willing to 
exercise themselves properly in good works." Oder unleid- 
1 i c h 8 i n d, *' or who are impatient under evil." 

^ Zum bessern, as to grammatical form, might be either an 
adjective in the comparative degree, or an infinitive used substan- 
tively. Here it is probably the latter. " Indulgences stimulate (re- 
quire) no one to improvement, but rather bear with, and make allow- 
ance for one's ftheir, men's) imperfection." Zum bessern, 
means literally, ff/ improrr, or to he ir/tprorrd, which would be jpx- 
pressed in J^alin not hy emevdarc, noT hy emcndari, huihy ud emen- 
dundum. Such is the force of the German infinitive when declined 
with the definite article, and governed by z u, as expressing end or 
dcsffrn. 

* Niemand dazu reden, persuade no one to it. 

*Der, der. Der, wer means any one who, whoever. D e r- 



SERMON ON INDULGENCES, 13 

fauter urn (Botte^ miien gate ju bem (Sebdube ©t ^etrt, 
ober x\>a^ fonjl: geitanut mirb/ benn ba^ er 2(6tag bafiir 
ncbme. 2emt ed fdbrfid)^ ifl, bap er fefcf)e @a6e urn 316^ 
lag milten, unb nirf)t urn ®otte^ n^itteu giebt 

3um fecb^jebuten, mi beflfer tjT: ba^ 2Berf etnem ir^iirf^ 
ttgen erjetgt,^ benn ba^^ jnm ©ebanbe gegeben n>irb, and) 
t)iel bejfer^ benn ber Slbfa^ bafitr gegeben.^ Senn (mte ge^ 
fagt) e^ i]t bcffcr, tin gntee 5Serf getban,^ benn met narf)^ 
gefajTen. 2{b(ag aber i\t 9tarf)faffnng mi gnter 2Berfe, ober 
i\t md)t6 nachgetaijen, 

3a, bag td)^ end) red^t nnterti?eife, fo merft anf : Su fottjl 
t)cr alien ^ingen (n?eber ©t ^Vtrn^ ©ebanbe nod) 2Ib(ag 
angefeben)^ beinem armen 9?ad)jlten geben, mii}t bn^ etwa^ 
Qebcn. 2Benn e^ aber babiH fommt, bag 9^iemanb in bei^ 
ner Stabt mebr i|l, ber Syiife bebarf (ba^, ob @ctt tDill, 

jenige, weleher(a modern form of expression) means th(U 
particular person, who, D e r, d e r is intermediate and may be used 
in either sense. It occurs more frequently in the early than in the 
later writers. 

^Oder was sonst genannt wird, etc., " or whatever 
other object is named, than that he contribute to it by purchasing in- 
dulgences." D a f a r does not here mean instead of that, but to that 
end, 

2 Fahrlich and F a h r are obsolete forms for g e f SL h r 1 i c h 
and Ge f a h r. 

' Erzeigt is a participle agreeing with W e r k. 

* Das, was formerly employed in the sense of w a s, what, and 
so it is here. 

^Ablass da far gegeben, indulgence (money) given for 
that purpose. 

^ Ein gutes Werk gethan, a good work performed is bet- 
ter than many relaxed (excused). This use of participles is still 
common. 

' J a, dass ich, etc. " Indeed, in order that 1 may instruct you 
properly, observe." 

^ Angesehen, being regarded. 

• Willst du, if thou desirest. 



16 SELECTIONS FROM LUTHER. 

nimmer gefcf)et)cn fott)/ bann foHjl in gebcn, fo bn mUft, 
ju belt ^ird)cn, SUtdrcn, (gitmucf, ^etrf), bie in beiner ©tabt 
fTiib, Unb n)cun ba^ mm and) nid)t mcl)r ?totb i(l, bann 
attererjl/2 fo bn n)iU(l, magjl bn geben jn bent ©ebdube St 
^etcv^, obcr anber^ mo* 

2(urf) foUjt bn bcnnorf) bad i\id)t^ nm 2t6fag mitten tbnn* 
®enn ©L ^anl fagt : ^iB e r f e i n e n § a u d g e n o f f e it 
tt i rf) t m b I 1 1) n t, i (t f e i n S b r i )l, n n b d r g e r 
b e n n e i n 5? e i b e» Unb l)a(t'd bafiir frei/ mer bir an^ 
berd fagt, ber Derfiibret bid), ober fud)t je^ beine Seele in 
beinem $8entef, nnb fiinbe er ^^fennige barinne, bad n>dre 
il)m lieber, benn aUc ©eelen. So fprid)jl: bn, fe^ miirbe id) 
nimmermebr 2lb(a^ lofen* Sintworte id)/^ bad babe id) fd)0tt 
oben gefagt, bad mein SBitte, SSegierbe, ^itte nnb yiatt) i|l, 
ba^ 9iiemanb SJbtag (ofe* ?agt bie fanlen nnb fd)(dfrigen 
et)rijl:en 2lb(ag (ofen, ge[)e bn fiir bid).^ 

3nm jTebjebnten : Ser ilbla^ ifl nid)t geboten, and) nid)t 

*Das, ob Gott will, nimmer geschehen soll^ 
"which (need of aid), if it be the pleasure of God, ought never to 
take place." 

* Dann allererst, then for the first time, i.e. then and not till 
then, 

'Auchsollstdu dennoch. Auch, which cannot well 
be rendered in English, repeats and enforces wliat was said in para- 
graph 15th. Dennoch, however, refers to the concession just 
made. 

* U n d h a 1 t's d tl f ur f r e i, "and hold the following opinion 
without hesitancy." F r e i in the sense of u n b e d e n k 1 i c h. 
D a f Q r, to this, for this, referring to the following clause. 

* J e and d a r i n n e, now provincial for j a and d a r i n. 

® So 8 p r i c h 8 t d u, so. The first s o, thus, is not to be transla- 
lated ; the second means then. " Thou sayest, then I would never 
obtain indulgence." 

' Antworte ich, a lively form of exprtssloii for, i c h a n t- 
wo r te. 

•Gehedufdr dich, "take your own uuurst," i. e. follow 
your own convictions, do your own duty, and let others do as they 
please. 



SERMON ON INDULGENCES. 17 

gerat[)eit, fonberit iyon ber Singe 3^f)V bie jugefajfen unb 
ertaubt ^erben. Sarum tfl e^ nicf)t ein SBerf be^ ©ebors^ 
fam^, aucf) nid)t t^erbienRticf), fonbern ein Stni^jng^ beg ®e^ 
l)orfamg. Darnm tt)iemo()( man 9^iemanb mebren foU^ ben 
jn fofcn, fo fottte man bocf) affe (5t)rijlen bat)on jiet)en, unb 
gu ben 3Berfen unb ^einen, bie ba nad)ge(affen, rettjen unb 

3um acf)tjehnten : Db bie ©eefen au^ bem ^egfener Qe^ 
jogen tDerben buret) ben Stbfa^, n)ei^ icf) nicf)t, unb g(aube 
bag and) nod) nid)t ;4 tDietDcM bag et(id)e neue S^octoreg 
fagen, aber ijl; ibnen unmogtirf) ju bewatiren,^ aucf) bat eg 

* Von der Dinge Zahl, "of that class (number) of things." 
The article der belongs to Dinge, not to Z a h 1. In all such 
constructions, (once so common in German, but now occurring only 
in certain phrases) of a genitive coming between a substantive and 
its preposition, since two successive articles would be harsh, and 
since the omission of that belonging to the genitive would often oc- 
casion obscurity, while the other substantive is rendered sufficiently 
definite by the genitive, the article of the genitive is commonly in- 
serted and that of the other substantive is always omitted. Com- 
pare zu der Christenheit Schmach, near the close of 
the ]Oth paragraph. 

' A u s z u g, going beyond, an excess. No German would use 
such an expression at the present day. 

2 Man Niemand wehren soil, etc. "Although one 
ought to prohibit no one from obtaining it (indulgence), we ought to 
dissuade (z i e h e n, draw, attract) all Christians from it, and stimu- 
late and strengthen them to those works and sufferings, which are re- 
laxed, i. e. from which one is dispensed by indulgences." — N a c h- 
gelassen(werden). 

* Und glaube das auch noch nicht, " but I do not yet 
believe it." 

° Aber (es)ist ihnen unmoglich (es) zu bewahren. 
E s is omitted, in the first instance, according to a very prevailing 
usage with Luther, but contrary to modern usage j in the second in- 
stance it is omitted to avoid repetition, (for it could not be used in the 
latter place and omitted in the former,) although it is inserted in the 
next clause. It might, indeed, stand thus : Aber (e^) ist ihnen 
unmoglich (dies) zu bewahren. 
2* 



18 SELECTIONS FROM LUTHER. 

bic ^ivd)c nod) nid)t befcbleflfen* :Sarum ju mebrer (Bid)^ 
erl)eiti ml beflfer ifl ci, ba^ bu fiir fic^ feI6fl bittefl unb 
JDirfcjl ; benn bicg i|l ben)dl)rter imb gen)ig* 

3um neunjet)nten : 5n biefen ^unften I)a6e id) md)t 
3n>eifcf, imb finb genugfam^ in ber ©d)nft gegrimbet. l^a^ 
rum foUt il)r and) fcinen S^^^K^ ()a6en, unb lagt ^^octore^^ 
(£d)oIa(lico^ ©d)otaftico^ fej)n ; jTe ffnb aUfammt nid)t ge^^ 
nug mit il)ren Dpiuionen, ba^ fie eiite ^rebigt bcfejligen 
felitcn* 

3iim jwanjigflen : Db etlidbe^ mid) ttim mobP einen ^et:^ 
jer fd)c(ten, benen fo(d)e 2Cahrt)eit fci)r fd)dblid) ifl im ^af^ 
ten/ fo ad)te id) bod) fofd)' ©eplerre® uid)t grog ; ffntemaP 

* Mehrer Sicherheit. Mehr is sometimes declined, some- 
times not. Mehrer is the dative singular feminine, for which the 
irregular form mehrerer is more commonly used. See Gram, 
p. 129. 

* F U r s i e, for them, i.e. the souls in purgatory. S e 1 b s t does 
not belong to s i e, but to d u and b i 1 1 e s t. The sentiment here 
expressed should not surprise us. Luther had not yet written his 
Theses. 

^ Und (sie) sind genugsam. 

*Und lasst Doctores, etc. " And let the scholastic doc- 
tors be scholastic, they are, all taken together, not sufficient by their 
opinions to confirm a discourse (are not enough with their opinions, 
that they should, etc)." 

* E 1 1 i c h e. See p. 1, Note 3. W o h 1. See p. 12, Note 4. 
•Einen Ketzer schelten, scold me a heretic, i. e. reproach 

me as a heretic. After the word schelten the accusative is al- 
ways used without any such word as a 1 s. 

'Dene n — i m K a s t e n, "to whom in the coffer," i. e. to 
whose coffers. 

"Solch'Geplerre. Solches is written solch some- 
times (more commonly before an adjective), for the sake of euphony. 
Before the article c i n, solch' is the only form in use. G e p 1 a r r 
is now the settled orthography instead of Geplerre. 

* S i n t e m a 1, an obsolete word, for which w e i 1 is now em- 
ployed. 



SERMON ON INDULGENCES. 19 

ba^ tttcf)t t^Utt benni etfirf)e fi'nflere ®el)irne, bie tie SSibfictt 
nie gerorf)en, bie d)nft(id)e ?e()re nie getefen, it)re eigencn 
?el)rer nie tJerpanben, fonbern in ibren I6d)end)en unb ^ex^ 
rijTenctt Dpinien t)ie( nabe t)ent)efen;2 Senn batten fie bie 
t)erjlanben,3 fo miigtcn jTe, ba^ fie ?tiemanb fotften Iciflertt 
nnt)erb5rt nnb uniibertDunben. 2)ocf) ®ott gebe tt)nen unb 
un^ ben red)ten @inn, Slmen. 

*Das nicht than denn, none do that except. An abrupt 
expression. Denn, than, except^ is frequently used after N i c h t s, 
but rarely after nicht. N i c h t d e n n, may be rendered by only. 

* Viel nahe verwesen (habe n). H a b e n must be sup- 
plied to all the participles, gerochen, gelesen, and v e r- 
standen. Viel is used in the obsolete sense, very, — " have well 
nigh decayed (rotted) in their ragged and tattered opinions." 

3 Denn batten sie die verstanden, '* for had they un- 
derstood them (those, i. e. the Bible, Christian doctrine and their 
teachers) they would have known that they ought to vilify no one, 
unheard and unvanquished." 



20 SELECTIONS FROM LUTHER. 



EXPOSITION OF THE THIRTY-SEVENTH 
PSALM.1 

Scr Site ^fafm ®at)ib^, jit trofteu Siejentgen, fo ungebul^ 
big (tnb,2 ba^ bie ©ottlofen Uebel^ t\)nn^ unb bod) fo 

^ This exposition was first published in 1521, and addressed to 
Dem armen HaOflein (the little flock) Christi zu Wit- 
tenberg, accompanied with an epistle of several pages. It was 
revised in 1526, and addressed in a similar way, An die Koni- 
gin Maria in Ungarn. A strict adherence to the chronologi- 
cal order, would require this to be the third piece of the Selections, 
as the next succeeding one was published in 1520. But that the 
more difficult pieces may not come first, except in the instance of 
the short discourse on Indulgences, a slight variation from the chron- 
ological arrangement is here omitted, as being by far the least of the 
two evils. 

^Zu trosten diejenigen, so ungeduldig s i n d. 
A Psalm, written " to console those who are impatient because 
(that) the wicked do evil, etc." 

3 Uebels thun. Uebels is not here the neuter of the adjec- 
tive for Uebles, but is the substantive Uebel used in the gen- 
itive in a partitive sense, — literally, to do of evil, like the old Eng- 
lish expressions, "pour out of thy Spirit," "give us q/" your oil." 
This word is etymologically the same as the English word evil, the b 
and r, being cognate letters which are most frequently exchanged for 
each other, as ; e b e n and even ; o b e r and over ; s i e b e n and seven ; 
leben and live; s trebe n and s^rire; heben and Acarc; geben 
and give ; w o b e n and iccave ; S i e b and sieve ; S i 1 b e r and silver ; 
S a 1 b e and sdlvc ; Grab and grave ; s c h a b e n and shave ; N ab e 1 
and navd. In English,/ often occurs instead of c; or like the latter 
corresponds to the CJorman Z', as ; Stab and staff ; Leben and life; 
Weib and icifc; D i e b and M/c/*; selb and self; ha lb and half ; 
Kalb and calf Thun most commonly signifies ^o do; but it has 
also a wider import, and is often to be rendered by to make, to put; 
as, e i n e n S c h u s s, cine II e i s c, e i n e M a h 1 z e i t, e i n e n 
Trunk, to make (or take) a shot, journey, meal, to drink. Von 
m i r t h u n, ^o put away from mcydic Schue andieFosse 
thun, to puX on shoes. The most common idioms formed with this 



< 



EXPOSITION OF PSALM THIRTY-SEVEN. 21 

[ange ungejlraft in grogem ©ti'icfei hkibcn. 

(Srjurnes bid) nidjt iiber ben 935 fen, fei) 
nid)t ueibifd) iiber bie Uebeltt)ater. 
5Bie g(eirf)3 greift ju unb trifft ber ^rop{)et be^ ^erjen^ 

word, are, es thut ni i r weh, i7 /?azw5 we, or, 1 am sorry for it. 
Esthut nichts, that is nothing, or, it is of no consequence, or 
does no harm. Es thut N oth, it is necessary. Uebel than 
(das Bose thun), to do icrong (different from Uebels thun). 
Einen in die Lehre thun, to put one to% tradc^ Es ist mir 
urn etwas zu thun, I feel an interest in something, Es ist mir 
darum zu thun, I am interested or concerned in that. Er thut 
n u r so, he only feigns it so. E s t li u t g e 1 e h r t, he affects to be 
learned. Er thut bose, Ae makes a show of anger. Z u w i s s e n 
thun {do to vf\t)y to inform. Jem and em zu viel thun, to in- 
jure one. Etwas zu Liebe thun, to do a thing as a favor, or, 
in order to gratify one. Einem wohl thun, or gut thun, io 
gratify one (sometimes also, to benefit one). Ihr habt gut thun, 
or gut s a g e n, it is ea.sy for you to do so, or to say so. Though 
thun and m a c h e n correspond in general to the English words 
do and make, the former referring more to the action itself than to the 
result of it, and the latter more to the result, or the thing produced, 
still, m a c h e n is often to be rendered by do, and thun as often by 
make. This last use of t h u n, to make, is either idiomatic or anti- 
quated ; in the old language it was common. So Otfried, T h i e 
Steina duan (thun) zi brote, i. e. die Steine zu Brot 
machen. Thuen, is duan (duen)in old German. Drop 
the ending e n, and d u, or do (Eng.) remains. 

^ G 1 c k is a compound word, consisting of the prefix ge, and 
1 Q c k, which corresponds to the English word, luck. In the old Ger- 
man the prefix is fully written, G e 1 c k. 

^ErzQrne. Zflrnen signifies to manifest anger, to be angry. 
ErzQrnen, io put into a state of anger, to make angry. S i c h e r- 
z r n e n, to fall into a passion, to become angry. 

^ G 1 e i c h, formed from the word 1 e i c h, English like, and the 
prefix ge, means like or equal as an adjective. As an adverb of time^ 
it means instantly, directly, that is, the two periods of time come so 
near together, or are so much alike as to leave little or no interval be- 
tween them. Compare cowfiWMO in Latin, — " How directly does the 
prophet seize upon and hit the thoughts of the heart in this tempta- 
tion, and remove entirely their cause !" 



22 SELECTIONS FROM LUTHER. 

©ebanfen in btefer 2(nfcrf)tung^ unb l)cbt alTe Urfacf)e2 ber^ 
felben auf, unb fprirf)t jum (Srften : D 9)tenfcf), bu bijl jor^ 
nig, l)aft aucf) Urfarf^e, it)ie mid) bihifet*^ 2)enn eg finb 
bofe 5[Renfrf)cn, tl)nn Unrect)t unb Did Uebeig nub get)et 
ihnen bennocf) n)ol)f ;'* n)ag bie yiatuv ad)tet, rcblidie^ Ur^? 
fad)c beg 3^ri^^^ ')^^^ S^i f^pi^* ^^^^ ^^^^^ ^ff^/ f^^^^^ ^inb, 

* A n f e c h t u n g, literally, ^/, hostile attempt against one ; figura- 
tively, a temptation with a malicious design. It is the common word 
for temptation in a baa sense. Versuchung may be either temp- 
tation or trial. Anfechtungen never come from God ; V e r- 
suchungen sometimes come from him. As F e c h t means a 
skirmish, rather than a general assault, Anfectung means an at- 
tempt against one that may be resisted. 

2 Ursache, literally means original (u r) thing (S a c h e), and 
hence admirably designates a cause. 

3 Wie mich d a n k e t, as it seems to me. When the verbis 
used impersonally, the accusative is, according to the grammarians, 
properly used rather than the dative. But if it is a neuter verb and 
not used impersonally, the dative only can be employed ; as, sie 
dQnket mir schon, she appears to me beautiful. As a reflec- 
tive verb with tJie accusative of the person, it means, to think or ima- 
gine one's self something ;as, du dankest dich klug, you 
think yourself wise. 

*Thun Unrech t — u nd gehet ihnen dennochwohL 
The omission of the nominatives s i e and e s, renders the represen-1 
tation more vivid. " Ti ey are bad men, they do wrong and mucin 
harm, and yet it is well with them, — what nature [uncanctified] con- 
siders to be a just cause of anger." Es sind bose Menschei 
means more commonly, ""they are bad men;" es giebt bos^ 
Menschen always means, ^'^ there are bad men," corresponding! 
nearly to the French ce sont and il y a. Ue be Is is in the genitive 
and governed by v i e I. See p. 13, Note 3. 

* Iledlichr, is a somewhat difficult word to explain. Its an*] 
cient and etymological moaning is, rational, reasonable, proper, fron 
Rede, account. Hen-e r e d I i c h, that of which one can give a good 
account. So it was used in Luthe'r's time. In modern German, it 
meang, honorable, upright, honest. Hence one is called a redlicher 
Mann, when he is icithout intrigue and is faithful in his duties to 
others, i 



II 



EXPOSITION OF PSALM THIRTY-SEYEN. 23 

lag ©itabe^ unb ni&ft yiatnv f)ter regieren/^ brief) ben ^oxn 
uub flitte bicf)3 efne fleine 3^it, fag jTe iibet t()un/ lag it)nen 
tt)ol)l gel)en/ tjore^ nticf), e^ foK bir nirf)t fd)abenJ ©o^ 

^ Gnade, i.e. Ge-nade, is from nah (so in Latin, propitius, 
from prope, ne3.r). The termination de is euphonic as in Kunde 
from kennen, Biirde from bahren and Niemand for Nie- 
man. The word originally signified approach by descending; hence 
figuratively condescension. Die Sonne geht zu Gnade n, in 
the old German, means "the sun was going down, or approaching 
the horizon." Gnade, therefore comes to signify /<2z;or shown to 
an inferior, grace. 

2 Regieren. Verbs of all conjugations from the Latin, French 
and other languages, are adopted into German by changing the ter- 
mination of the orifi^inal into i r e n or i e r e n. The e after i in the 
last form simply shows that the latter is always long in this termi- 
nation. The accent is always on the penult. The word regieren 
comes directly from the French regir, or from some other similar 
modification of the Latin regere. 

^ Stille d i c h. The adjective still in German, as in Eng- 
lish, is opposed, 1. to motion, 2. to noise. The verb, when applied 
to things, as the sea, the wind, means, to stop their motion; when 
applied to men, to stop their commotion, or to quiet their passions, as 
in this passage. It sometimes, though rarely, signifies to silence a 
man. Applied to an infant, it means, to nurse, to put to the breast, 

^Uebel thun. This adjective form (a b e 1) denotes wrong 
doing in general; the substantive form (U e b e 1 s) implies injury 
done to any person or persons. U e b e 1 denotes properly whatever 
is disagreeable to our feelings, and is opposed to w o h 1. B o s e in- 
dicates something bad in itself, and is opposed to gut. 

^Lass ihnen wohl gehen, allow it to be {go) well with 
them. Gehen is impersonal in all such constructions, with e s un- 
derstood. Hence W i e g e h t's ihnen, how do you do f how do 
things go with you ? 

^ Horen corresponds, in etymology, to hear, as schworen 
does to swear, 

"^ Schaden, to injure, is written scathan in Anglo-Saxon, from 
which comes the English word to scathe, in a restricted sense. 

^ So spricht denn der Mensch. An objector is suppo- 
sed here to say : '' Yes, but when will this come to an end ?" 



24 SELECTIONS FBOM LUTHER. 

fpnd[)t beiin ber 30?enfcf) : 3<i/ ^^nn wrb c^ benn aiiffyo^ 
ten ? SOBer mag^ bie ?dnge fatten ? @r anttDortet : 

25enn2 n)ie bag ©ra^ n^erben jTe batb abge^? 
^auen tt)erben, unb tt)ie bag griine ^raut 

din feineg^ ©leicfjnig ijl: bag, fcf)rerf(irf)^ ben ©tei^nern^ 

^ M a g corresponds to the English word may^ as M a c h t does to 
might, m a c h t i g to mighty^ and Allmachtig to almighty. 
Mo gen is intermediate in signification between Konnen and 
w o 1 1 e n, and expresses power and will in a weaker manner than 
konnen does power, or wollen will. It implies ability with 
some degree of inclination to do a thing. That inclination may, or 
may not, be predominant. Sometimes the idea of power, sometimes 
that of inclination is the leading, if not the sole one, in the use of 
the word. Vermogen expresses merely ability. The participle 
gemocht is not used with an infinitive dependent on it, but stands 
itself in the form of the infinitive but with a participial meaning ; as 
Ich habe es nicht thun mogen (gemocht). 

•Den n,/or, is etymologically the same as then ; d u the same as 
thou -J d e i n the same as thine ; dies the same as this ; d i e s e 
the same as these. Abgehauen, cut off ; h a u e n, to hew, like 
k a u e n, to chew. 

2 Verwelken, <o wither. W e 1 k e n is preserved in the word 
%oelk, in old English. 

" The sea nowe ebbeth, and now it floweth. 
The lond now welkethy and now it groweth." — Goicer. 

* Fein in German differs from the English wording, inasmuch 
as it does not express mere prettiness, but expresses the higher quali- 
ties o^ perfect accuracy, fitness and elegance as tlie result of nice per- 
ception. 

* Sch reck 1 ich. Schrecken, in old German, signifies to 
spring, to leap. Hence H e u s c h r e c k e iiieans a grus.^hopper, as 
if it were Heuspringer. Then it means, to experience great 
mental excitement, commonly of tear ; to frighten one so as to make 
him leap or shriek. 

* Gleissner stands for g 1 e i c h s n e r (from g 1 e i c h s e n, 
to imitate), one who pretends to be like anolhtr. Such was its ety- 
mology and use in the old German. Jn modern times, it has been 
connected with the verb g 1 e i s s e n, <o shine, and made to mean one 



EXPOSITION OF PSALM THIRTY-SEVEN. 25 

xtnb trojlftdt)! ben ?eibenben. 3Gie fetn bjcht er uii^ aitg 
unferem ®efic()te2 unb fcgt im^ wx &otte^ ®ejTd)tc. SSor 
uuferem ©eiTrfite grihtet, btiibt unb mebrt ficf) ber ©feigner 
^;^aufe nnb beberft atte 2Be(t ganj, bag jTe attein etn)a^ [cf)ei^ 
nen, tt)ie ba^ gri'tne ®ra^ bie @rbe becft^ nnb fcf)mncft 

3l6er Dor ®ottc6 ®e(Td]te, voa^ ffnb fte ? j'^en/ ba^ 
man fcf)ier^ mad)en fott, nnb je f)ober ba^ ®ra^ n)ad)^t,^ 
beflo ndher finb i^m bie ©enfen nnb §engabe(n: al\o 
je l)ol)er, nocitev bie SSofen griVnen nnb oben (c^tt^eben^ 
bejlo nd^er i(t i()r Unterliegen. 2Barnm molltefl bn benn. 
jiirnen, fo xl)re 93o^{)ett nnb ©titrf fo ein^ fnrjeg 5H$e^ 

t/7^0 assumes shining qualities. It means nearly the same as H e u c h- 
le r, a hypocrite. The difference is this ; the H e u c h 1 e r seeks to 
please, and to win confidence and respect, the G 1 e i s s n e r seeks, 
the admiration of others. 

^ T r 6 s 1 1 i c h, consoling, has a peculiar shade of meaning which. 
h best explained by its etymology. T r 6 s t e n (from T r o s t, Eng- 
lish trust, in etymology) means to inspire confidence, and thus to con- 
sole in trouble. 

' Gesic ht, 1. the poicer of vision) then the vieto itself, as ia 
this passage ; 2. the countenance. The plural, Gesichter, means. 
faces ; but the plural G e s i c h t e, means visions, apparitions, 
*< In our view, the multitude of hypocrites is verdant, flourishes and 
spreads and covers the whole world entirely, so tliat they alone seera 
to be anything, as the green grass covers and adorns the earth." 

^ D e c k e n, to cover ; D a c h, a covering of a house, a roof (Sax- 
on thac, English thatch). Deck, the covering or deck of a vessel.. 
Deckel, a lid or cover. So in English, to deck, to cover, especially 
with ornamented dress. 

* H e u, kindred with the English word hay, means mown grass,, 
from h a u e n, to cut. 

* S c h i e r, as an adverb, is nearly obsolete, and has two significa- 
tions, 1, 50071, 2. nearly. As an adjective, it means, clear, pure, sheer. 
Luther employs it here as a modern writer would use s c h n e 1 1 or 
bald: " Hay, which one will soon make." 

^Wachst. Wachsenis the same word as the English ta 
wax. Oben schweben, wave on high. 
^ S o e i n, is now a colloquial expression for e i n s o 1 e h e r. 
3 



26 SELECTIONS FROM LCTTHER. 



* 



feit^ i(t ? ©0 fpricf)|l bit bcnn : SGBad fctt id} bien^eiP t^mt? 
SDBoran foK id) mid) t)a[ten, bi^ ba^ fold)e^ g^frf)cl)e ? ^ore j 
ju ;3 (jro^e 3Sert)eigutig. efll 

^offe^ auf ben 5)^^t*n unb tl)ue ©itteg, 
b t e i b e i m ? a u b e ii n b n d () r e bid) i m @ ( a u^ 
ben. 

Xa nimmt^ er aKe nngebulbigen ©ebanfen ganj ba^in 



* W e s e n is often used nearly in the sense of D i n g (which, hw 
changing d into th, becomes thing). The difference may be showoj; 
thus : *' Thou hast made all things (D i n g e) and by thy will have 
they received their being (We sen)." Dass Wesen eines 
D i n g e s is the essence, qualities or character of a thing. W e s e 
is an old infinitive, (equivalent to s e y n,) used as a substantive. 

* D i e w i e 1, [in] the [mean] while, obsolete for wahrend des^ 
sen. 

^Hore zu is a compound verb. If z u were a preposition, it 
would require the dative case. Z u h o r e n, ^o listen to, also governi 
the dative. The expression appears to be elliptical, *' give attention 
a great announcement !" Verheissen means, 1 . to make a declm 
ation to an inferior; 2. to promise an inferior. Verheissun^ 
seems to be used here with a latitude of meaning corresponding 
the first signification of the verb. Versprecliung, a promise, 
does not imply any difference of rank. The reason of this distinctioi 
lies in the nature of the word h e i s s e n, which is applied to a supe- 
rior giving directions to an inferior. 

* H offe n and hope are of the same etymology. The letters /i 
and /correspond to each other, as is seen in the words, S c h i f 
(skiff) and ship ; S t r e i f and stripe ; K 1 i p p e and cliff ; t i e 
and deep ; r e i f and ripe ; s c h a r f and sharp, and many others. 

^ N i m m t. N e h m e n, ^o take. The word e of the root was ori^ 
ginally i, and of course, the letter i returns in what are termed tin 
irregular forms of the verb. In Gothic it is niman, the ending an 
being, as usual, changed to en in later German. The old English hai 
preserved the original form of the word. 
" For looking in their plate 
lie nimmcs away their coyne." — Corbet. 
" And hath our sermon of hernomcn" (Ger.geno mme n).-Chaucer, 
N e h m e n signifies to takc^ in its widest and most general sense > 



I 



EXPOSITION OF PSALM THIRTY-SEVEN. 27 

itub fcgt ia6 S^cvi jur 9tii()c. SJf^ foltte er fagen : ?ie6eg 
^inb, lag beiite Ungebufb, unb fluct)e ober ti^iinfdje it)nen 
iud)t<^ SofeiJ, e^ finb menfd)(id)e unb bofe ©ebanfen. Sef^e 
beine ^?ojfnung auf ©ott, n^arte toa^ er barau^ macf)en 
n)itt, ge{}e bu fiir bid), untertaj]e urn 9tiemanb^ n)itten, 
@ute^ ju tl)un, n)ie bu augcfaugeu baflt, n)o unb n)e(d)em bu 
tnagjl, unb gieb uic()t S3ofe^ urn Sofe^, fonbern ®uteg urn 
SSofe^. 

©0 bu aber aurf) barf)te(lt, bu tt^otttejl: fliebeu unb an emeu 
anberu Drt^ ^ichcn, bag bu it)rer io^ tDurbejl: unb t)on il)neu 

a n n e h m e n, fo Z<zA;e what is at hand, or what is offered ; f a s s e n, 
to take, by embracing it on all sides (as a vessel contains a fluid), or 
on both sides (as we embrace a thing with both hands) ; g r i e f e n, 
to take by compressing or squeezing (gripe). Einnehmen means 
to take in, to receive ; a u s n e h m e n, ^o take out, to except ; u n t e r- 
n e h m e n, to undertake ; a b n e h m e n, to take away, to decrease ; 
zunehmen, ^o add, to increase ; a u f n e h m e n, io take up, to take 
in charge, or accept. 

^Setzt. Setzen, fo make to sit, to place, is causative of s i t- 
zex\,tosit,^s sen ken, to cause to sink, is of sin ken, to sink; 
and t r a n k e n, Zo cau^e to drink, of t r i n k e n, to drink ; and fa 1 1- 
e n, to fell, of fal 1 e n, to fall. The letters z and t are often exchan- 
ged for each other, as in s e t z e n and s i t z e n, English set and sit ; 
Her z, English Aeari, (Dutch, Aarri and Aeri) ; Netz, nc^; Hitze, 
heat ; s c h w i t z e n, io sweat ; W i t z, wit. — L ass deineUnge- 
d u 1 d, leave, give up your impatience, neither curse them nor wish 
them any ill. '-^ Those are (see p. 22, Note 4) carnal and evil thoughts. 
Put your hope in God ; wait (and see) what he will bring out of it ; 
take your own proper course (do your duty). To do good, as you 
have begun, when and to whom you can, omit on account of no one 
(i. e. let no one hinder you)." 

' Ort signifies a place, and generally an inhabited place, large or 
small, and may comprehend under it Stadt, Schloss, Burg, 
F lee ken, and Dor f. Platz means a?i open space, or B.ny unoc- 
cupied place which may be used for any purpose. Fleck is any 
small space. But F le c k e n (sometimes meaning a spot or stain) is 
a village with corporate rights, and is thereby distinguished from 
D o r f, a hamlet, without such rights, S t e 1 1 e, means a place v)here 



28 SELECTIONS FROM LUTHER. 

tamcfl : and) nidjt atfo,i 6fei6e im ?anbe, VDo^itc^ n)o bu 
bijl, n)erf)^(e ober maubfe^ am il)re(n)ilteu nid)t beine SGBo^j* 

a person or thing is placed^ and hence often implies a certain order, 
as a particular office under the government, or particular passage in 
an author. 

* Nicht also is elliptical, thue or some such word being un- 
derstood. Also is never to be rendered by alsOj but by thus. 
A u c h, also, refers to what had been said in the preceding paragraph. 
Auch nicht is equivalent to neither, and the sentence may be 
translated thus : " But if you sliould think you would flee, and go to 
another place in order that you might be rid of them and get away 
from them, do it not (not so either). Remain, etc." 

* Wohne, Wohnung. The original meaning of wohnen 
seems to be, to remain. Tatian, in the ninth century says, " the 
branch will not bear fruit unless it wohne (remain) in the vine," 
and " the child Jesus woh nete (remained) in Jerusalem." Hence 
the secondary, but afterwards uniform meaning, to dwell in a place as 
07ie'5 /tor/ic, to reside permanently. Wohnung, the verbal noun, 
signifies the dwelling, i. e. 1. the act of residence; 2. the place of resi- 
dence, which is more definitely expressed by W o h n s i t z. A u f e n t- 
hal t, on the contrary, means, not a permanent residence at homCj 
but a temporary residence from home. From wohnen, to remain, is 
derived g e w o h n e n, <o accustom ; because one becomes accustomed 
to a thing by remaining in connection with it ; G e w o h n u n g, the 
act of getting accustomed ; G e w o h n h e i t, custom, usage ; and g e- 
w 6 h n 1 i c h, customarily, commonly. 

^ W a n d 1 e. This word, as a neuter verb, signifies, to walk ahout^ 
hack and forth, and is generally employed only in elevated style and 
is then applied to a person in easy circumstances walking for pleas- 
ure. A gentleman walking in his garden to view the plants, is said 
to w a n d e 1 n, but not the gardener who goes about to take care of 
them. Then the word is applied to denote any sloic progressive mo- 
tion, mostly in poetry ; and when used of the course of life, it is like 
the English word walk in its biblical use. So W a n d e 1 , manner of 
life. Handel u n d W a n d e 1, is an idiomatic expression, the two 
substantives conveying but one idea, meaning barter, trade. — As an 
active verb, wan del n meant, particularly in Luther's time, to 
change one place for another, or one thing for another. To express 
the idea of changing one thing into another, this word is now rarely 
used, verwandeln and umwandeln being, in modern Ian- 



EXPOSITION OF PSALM THIRTT-SEVEN. 29 

nung ofcer ?anb, fonbern nci^re bicf) im @(auben, treibei 
beine airbett unb §anbeP mie t)orbin. ^inbern^ ober 6e^ 
fcf)abigen fie hid) unb ge6ert bit Urfacf)e ju fltef)en, fo (a^ 
faf)rert, hkibc im ®(auben unb jn)eifle ntcf)t, @ott n)trb btd^ 
nid)t lajTen, tl)ue nur ba^ Seine, arteite unb uatjre bicf), 
unb ta^ i[)n maften.^ 
Su fottjl nirf)t anf^oren, bicf) ju uaf)ren, ob fie bicf) an 

guage, employed for that purpose. W e c hs el means to exchange 
one thing for another; andern and verandern, to change a 
thing by altering, or modifying it, the latter implying the greater 
change. 

' T r e i b e n (old German, d r i b a n) is the same word as the En- 
glish drive, the t corresponding to d, and the b to v, T r e i b e n, 
when applied to business, does not mean to drive, or press it, but sim- 
ply to practise it. T r i e b means, the act of driving, natural impulse 
(instinct) ; T r i f t {drift) is the act of being driven, or the course of 
action ; also a drove, and the pasture to which cattle are driven. 

* Handel, formerly signified action of any sort. It now signifies 
1. transaction, (ein schlimer Handel, a bad a^axV), especially 
a quarrel, or a lawsuit (Handel suchen, to pick a quarrel; 
einen Handel vor Gericht bringen, to bring a suit before 
the court) ; 2. a contract, bargain, barter^ trade, Handlung is now 
the common word for action, in general. When it relates to trade, it 
means a large establishment, or mercantile house. The verb han- 
deln, once signified, Zo handle, hut now signifies to act, to treat, to 
trade. Mitjemandem Qber etwas handeln, is, to treat or 
bargain with one respecting a thing. Mit etwas handeln, means, 
to trade in a certain article: and handeln alone, means to trade. 
Von etwas handeln, is^o treat of a subject, in writing or speak- 
ing. — Handel, in this passage is used in its original sense, of activ- 
ity, business. " Carry on your labor and business as formerly." 

2 Hindern, etc. "If they hinder or injure you, etc." — So 
lass fahren, then let it go (disregard it). — Thue das Deine, 
do your duty, 

-* W a 1 1 e n, kindred with wield, signifies to control, to manage, 
and is used of one in authority. Hence v e r w al t e n, ^o administer, 
or perform the functions of an office. Schalten signifies, to give 
direction to a motion, and then to give direction, in general, and is 
used of one who actually has power, whether lawful or unlawful 

3* 



30 SELECTIONS FROM LUTHER. 

einem ©ti'tcfe^ l)inbern ; ®ott, fo bu boffe(l, gicbt c6 bir am 
anbcrn £)rt, n)ie cr 2(6ra[)am, 3faaf unb S^ccb t()at, bie 
and) a(fo t)crfiid)t n^urben* 

S)abc beine iiift^ am S^evx n^ icx tt) i r b bir 
gcben, wa^ be in 5?erj munfrf)^ 

DacJ i(l: ?ag bid) c^ nid)t Derbriegen/ bagi 0ott fie fogl 
la^t mol)(fat)ren/ (ag[ bir fofd)ett feinen 2CiKen tt)ol)fge^ 



W a 1 1 e n is not limited to persons, but is said of things, as V e r- 
n u n f t, F r i e d e, etc, ; but s c h a 1 1 e n can be said only of per- 
sons, because they only can act arbitrarily. 

* Sttlckje, signifies piece, and means here, as it does often, any^ 
thing. "Though they hinder you in some particular (anything), 
God, if you hope in him, will give it (gives it) to you iu anothe] 
place." 

* Lust, j^^^^sure, desire. So the English word, lust, originally 
meant desire. In tlie singular number, the German word is gener- 
ally used in a good sense (mit Lust horen, io hear with pleasure ; 
ich habe Lust zu essen, / have a desire to eat). It has a bad 
aense in the plural (Ltlste des FJeisches, lusts of the Jic.*th)y 
and sometimes in composition (as W o 1 1 u s t, voluptuousness ; F 1 e i- 
scheslust, carnal lust; Lustdirne, woman of pleasure). In 
most instances in composition, it indicates pleasure or amusement. 
From Lust is derived the verb lasten,io desire; and the same 
derivative form (i. e. the change of tlie vowel from u to ii) is preserved 
in the English verb to list (the i in English corresponding to the ii of 
the German). Listless, in English, means without desire, without 
concern. Lil stern, the frequentative form of the verb in German, 
means repeated or continued, and consequently strong desire. Ge- 
lUsten moans a strong desire, as a hankering for certain kinds of 
food, the prefi.v ge givmg intensity to the simple word. 

•* Verdriessen signifies literally to render one unhappy by giv- 
ing too much of a thing, or by protracting it too long; then to occa- 
sion one chagrin by doing what is highly disagreeable to him, and 
this latter is the prevailing signification. So Verdruss, a few 
lines below, moans, sorrow, chagrin, occasioned by another's fault, or 
by an unpleasant occurrence, as opposed to Lust and Wohlge- 
fallen. 

* Wohlfahren. Fahron, to go, or to irarc/, generally in a 



I 



EXPOSITION OF PSALM THIRTY-SEVEN. 31 

fatten/ fo t)crgel)t bit bie Unluft ixicv ber ©ottfofen ©fiicf, 
ja erfiij^e iid) brinnen, aU in bcm alterbejlctt unb gotttid^en 
5IBitteiv ftcbe, fo l)a|l bu biefc tr6jKid)e 3«fagung :^ „@r 

carriage or vessel, as opposed to g e h e n, to go on foot, and r e i t e n 
to ride on horseback. Fahre wohl, means literally, journey 
prosperously, and was originally said to one who was on the eve of 
taking a journey. F a h r e n was next applied to any proc fss of busi- 
ness, as to go on ; and w o h 1 f a h r e n, to go on prosperously. So in 
English, /arc signified originally to go ; a.nd farewell, go prosperously. 
The substantive fare is what one has in travelling. How fares 
it icith you; means, how does it go with you. Welfare, German 
W o h 1 f a r t, means a prosperous course of things. 

^ Wohlgefallen. The root of this word is fall en, to fall ^ 
and, in those compound words formed from it, which signify some 
effect produced upon the mind, or upon something else, it conveys 
the incidental idea of suddenness. Something falls suddenly upon 
the mind as an unforeseen occurrence. A uffalle n, means to sur- 
prise by something strange falling upon one, (or, occurring to him) ; 
be i fallen, to fall in with one, to agree loith him, or approve. In 
ge fall en, the prefix ge, which corresponds to the Latin cow, giv- 
ing to substantives a collective sense (Gebirge, a chain of moun- 
tains) and to verbs, sometimes the idea of coherence (gefrieren, 
to freeze together), sometimes that of intensity resulting from union 
(Gel il s te n as explained on p. 30, Note 2) ; and sometimes that of 
coincidence or fitness, as in ge fallen, to fall together so as to make 
the object agree with the inclination and so, to please. The verb 
wohlgefallen, means accordingly, to please highly, but it is ob- 
solete, though the substantive Wohlgefallen is still a common 
word. 

7 Zusagung, a promise, meant originally, the giving of one's 
icord in respect to (z u) a thing, an assurance in relation to something 
without a formal compact or pledge as in Versprechung. But 
its more common signification is the assenting to (zu) a request made, 
or compliance with a desire expressed or implied; and it is hereby 
distinguished from Versprechung and Verheissung. See 
p. 26, Note 3. Instead of Zusagung, modern writers employ 
Z usage. "Let it not vex you that God allows them to prosper 
so. Let this (such) his pleasure satisfy you, and then j'our sorrow 
over the prosperity of the wicked will pass away; nay rejoice in it, 
as in the perfect and divine will, (and) behold there you have this 
consoling assurance." 



32 SELECTIONS FROM LUTHER. 

xoivb iiv Qchen S(He^, wa^ bciit S^cxi begcbrt/'i $Ga^ 
rviU\V bn mehr hahcn ? (giebe nur ju, bag bu anfl:att bc^ 
2Scrbni(Tc(^, fo bit wn ilnmx fd)opfe|lt,3 biefe ?iiil unb 2Sol)f^ 
gefattcu in gottIirf)em 2Gi(Ien iibefl, fo n^erbett jTe bir nicf)t 
alfcin fcincn Scf)aben t()mt, fonbern bein 5;^erj n?irb and) 
t)off ^rieben^ fet)n, unb frol)Iicf)'* tt^arten bicfcr S^^f^fl^ng 

S5cficl)P bent §errn beine 2Bege, unb ^ojfc 

^ Begehrt. Begehren differs from wQnschen, used a 
few lines abov^e. in the following manner. W n s c h e n, ^o loish, 
does not imply effort to obtain the object of desire. Begehren is 
stronger, and implies earnest and active desire. G i e r e n is the 
same with the additional idea o£ greediness. B e g 1 e r d e and G i e r 
differ in the same way, the latter being more sensual, and violent. 

^ W i 1 1 s t. W o 1 1 e n is not, in German, a mere auxiliary, but 
a verb expressing positive desire. " What do you desire to have 
rrore." 

^ S c h o p f e s t. S c h 5 p f e n is kindred with scoop and signi- 
fies to take away afiuid with any vessel, a pitcher, spoon, bucket, etc. 
Then it means figuratively, to draw supplies or materials from any 
source. This must not be confounded with another word in the same 
form, 8 c h o p f e n, to create, mostly obsolete, s c h a f^e n having 
taken its place in that sense. But S c h o p f e r, S c h o p f u n g, 
G e s c h o p f , creator, creation, creature, are in common use. " On- 
ly sec to it, that you have (exercise) this joy and pleasure in the di- 
vine will, instead of the vexation which you derive from them, then 
they will not only do you no harm, etc." 

* F r o h 1 i c h, kindred w'lih frolic, comes from f r o h,joiful, with 
reference to the internal feeling ; wlicrcas f r 6 h 1 i c h monns joyous^ 
with reference to tlie external manifestations of joy. F r e u d i g, 
joyful, indicates a feeling of pleasure (F r e u d e) arising from an 
agreeable object, for the attainment of which, if need be, we cheer- 
fully undergo labor and sufiering. L u s t i g means sportive. 

* Be fie hi. Befehlen is here used in its original, but now 
obsolete sense, to surrender, to gire vp, to commend. Tatian, in the 
ninth century says, Bifdikit then uuingarten andern (be fi eh It 
den We in gar ten andern), he gives over the vineyard to oth- 
ers ; also, bivilu.hu minan gcist in thino henti, whicli is given thus in 



EXPOSITION OF PSALM THIRTY-SEVEN. 33 

aiifi[)n, cv n)irb e^ wof)t mad)c n.i 

Tddjt ia^ in tniifjTg gebcn foUtejl, fonbent beiuc 
SDBege, SSerfe, 2Gorte unb SEaubel 6epe{)l ®ott, fef)re 
bid) an^ jTe i\id)t. Senn e^ mug nid)t ®ott alfo befof):^ 
ten mcrben, bag mv nid)t^ tl)un, fonbent toa^ tr>iv tl)Utt, 
cb e^ tjon ben ©feiguern Derfprcttcn/ t)erfd)indt)t/ getdf^ 

Luther's translation, ich befehle meinenGeistindeine 
Hande. Befehlen now signifies, to command. Gebieten 
expresses the same with a stronger idea of compulsion. He is sen 
and vorschreiben, the one conveying orally , the other in writing 
an expression of one's will, rather imply than assert authority and 
compulsion. 

^ W o h 1 m a c h e n, is here the same as gut m a c h e n. When 
gut is an adverb, g u t m a c h e n means to do a thing welL When 
it is an adjective, the phrase means to render a thing good, i. e. to re- 
store or replace a thing, or to pacify a person. — Wohl signifies, 1. 
agreeably, 2. well, 3. no doubt, indeed, nearly. See p. 13, Notes 6 and 
1 end, and p. 12, Note 4 mid. In wohl machen, wohl without 
the emphasis means no doubt, surely. With the emphasis on it, as is 
probably the case here, it means, he icill manage it right (do it well). 
W o h 1 1 h u n signifies both to do icell, and to do good, and W o h 1- 
that is an act of beneficence, 

^Kehre dich an. Kehren, means to turn. S i c h z u e t- 
was kehren signifies to turn one's self to a thing, io give one's 
self up to it. Sich an etwas kehren, signifies to have regard 
to a thing, to hold it in special consideration. " Not that you are to 
be indolent, but commit your ways, works, words and walk to God; 
do not regard them," i. e. opposers. 

3 Versprochen. In the middle ages the particle v e r in v e r- 
sprechen, had its literal import, away, out of the way or icrong. 
The verb meant 1. to refuse, 2. to speak against one. In this latter 
sense Luther often uses it. — Was wir thun, ob es. There is 
here a little irregularity in the construction, a licens3 much more 
common in Luther's time than now, " what we do, whether it is 
spoken against, etc. one should not yield, etc.," for " whether what 
we do is spoken against, etc." 

* Verschmaht. This word signifies to despise a thing on ac- 
count of its insignificance, and thereby differs from verachten, io 
contemn a thing on account of its worthlessness or badness, the oppo- 
site of achten, to respect. 



34 SELECTIONS FROM LUTHER. 

tert^ ober t)crl)inbert tmb fell man bariim nirf)t meirf) tt)cr^ 
ben nod) abfajTen, fenbcrn immcr fcrtfabrcn nnb jTe laffcn 
i^rcn ^int[)n?iKen'^ babcn, ©ott bie ©arf)e 6cfel)fcn, beru)irb 
eg n)ol)( marf)en anf beiben (Sciten, iDa(^ rcc{}t i|lt, 

Unb iDirb beine ©erecfjtifjteit I)ert)ori^ 
bringenmte bag ?icf)t, nnb bein J)tecf)t wie 
ben 9)? it tag. 

2)ieg ijl bie grogte Serge ber 2Deicf)[inge,3 ba^ fie i^er^ 
brej]en n^erben iiber bie ©ottfofen, bag il)re a3cgf)eit fo 
frfjeint nnb mo()[ gebatten xvivh. 2^enn jTe forgen, ibre 
<Zad)c tDerbe t)erbriirft'* nnb t)crji[n(lcrt, vt>ci( jTe fcben bcr 
SBiberparte^ 5ffiiit[)en fo l)od) faljren nnb oben fd)tt>eben* 

* Gelastert. Lastern, signified in early times, to reproach 
one by exposing his faults. It now means to calumniate, or to impute 
what is false. So L a s t e r, from which it is derived, once meant 
reproach, disgrace ; but it now signifies, crime, scandalous vice. 

^ M u t h w i 11 e n, will, arbitrary choice or way. " Let them have 
their own will, or way." At the present day, the word is used only 
in a bad sense, wilful wickedness, wantojincss. 

3 W e i c h 1 i n g, here used of owe who is yielding, i. e. faint-heart- 
ed, or delicate and iceak, not, as is commonly the case, of a voluptua- 
ry. Luther, in another passage speaks of the Weichlingen of 
his flock as distinguished from die S t a r k e n, <Ae strong. " This 
is the greatest trouble of the faint-hearted, namely, that they are cha- 
grined on account of the wicked whose iniquity (and that their ini- 
quity) is so shining and so well sustained." S o r g e, in the early 
writers, means, sorrow, distiess ; in later authors, it means, anxiety, 
painful solicitude, and refers solely to something future. With Lu- 
ther both seem to be united. The misery of the faint-hearted grows 
out of the condition of the wicked, — out of the circumstances that 
the wickedness of the latter triumphs, or tliat they triumph in their 
wickedness. 

* VerdrUckt. VerdrUcken, in Luther's time, signified to 
oppress, as unterdrucl^en d- e < now. 

* Widerpart, opponent, \s now little used; Gegner is more 
common in that sense. Tlie same remark is applicable to Gegen- 
part, Der Widerparte is in the gen. pi. 



EXPOSITION OF PSALM THIRTY-SEVEN. 35 

Daram trejlet er unb fprid)t : ?a^ fci)n/ fiebe^ jtinb, bag 
fte bid), bcine @acf)e mit 2Bo(fen unb ^Mal^regen tjerbritrfeit 
unb m 9tnfel)en t)cr ber 2BeIt gar ju ntrf)te2 marf)en imb 
in ginj^ernig begraten, bag tbre ©acf)e entporfd)n)ebe unb 
fcud)te mc bte ©onne. S5cftel)fjlt bu ®ott bcinen ^anbef, 
bojfejl unb kartell anf ibn, fo fei) gemtg, bein 9?ed)t unb 
©ered)tigfctt mvi nid)t tm ginjlern bleiben, jTe mug l)cx'oox^ 
unb Sebermann fo ojfenth'd) befannt n>erben al^ ber IjeUe 
g}tirtag, bag atte bie^ ju ©d)anben n)erben, bie bid) t)er^ 
briicft unb t)erbunfeft habcn. d^ ifl nur urn iaS SBarten 
ju tl)un,^ bag bu @ott in fo(d)em SSorne^men burd) beitt 
Sitrnen, Unmutt), SSerbriegen nid)t ^inberjl. 2)arum i:)erj^ 
mabut er aber^ cinmal : 

§alte bem I^errn jlifte^ unb lagif^nnttt 

* Lass (es) seyn — dich (und) deine Sache. Such ellip- 
ses are very common in Luther. 

2 Zu nichte. Nicht.j like our word nought was once a sub- 
stantive, making N ichte in the dative. It is now an adverb ; and 
Nichts, indeclinable, is used as a substantive. — Ihre Sache, 
their cause. 

^Sie muss hervor (leuchten, or kommen), it must 
shine or come forth. So, er konnte nicht vorbei (gehen), 
he could not pass by. I c h m u s s w e g (g e h e n), i must leave. 
Such omissions are very frequent in familiar discourse, 

^Alle die — die, " all those who." See p. 14, Note 5. Zu 
Schanden werden, to be put to shame. Feminine nouns 
were anciently declined in the singular. Hence those phrases which 
have been handed down from early times, preserve the old forms of 
the cases. 

^Esist nurum dasWartenzuthun, there is nothing 
to do but wait. U m, with z u t h u n, means to do withy to be con- 
cerned with. — " That you do not hinder God in such a design (under- 
taking) by your anger, vexation and chagrin." 

* A b e r, again, according to old usage, and the primary meaning 
of the word. 

^Halte dem Herrn still e. Stille h al te n with the 
dative of a person, literally, to hold still to one, means to be quiet in 



36 SELECTIONS FROM LUTHER. 

bir mad) en. (Jrjurne bicf) iticf)t i'tber ben 
g}? a n 11, b c m e i ti) o b f g e b c t u n b 1 1) u t n a cf) f e i^^ 

2It^ fotlte cr fagen : d^ n)itt bicf) Derbriegeit, bag bu iit 
recf)ter (2acf)ei Ungdicf empftnbejl iinb e^ 3^nen in 33o^beit 
n>ot)(ge()et, iinb mti iiidit,^ tr>ie bu gerne iDotltefl, tjoii Stat^? 
ten gebcn, nnb jTel)ejl: bed)/ bag bem llngcrcd)ten 3(ffe^ nad) 
feinem 9D?utt)n)iflcn get)t, bag cin ©prud)n)ort l)ieran^ ge^ 
floffen ifl : 3^ groger Sd)a(f, je bejfer @fiid. SIber fei) 
n)eife, liebe^ ^inb, lag bid) ba^ nid)t betpegen, bafte auf 
®ott, beine^ §erjen^ aSegierbe tt>irb and) f ommen gar reid)^ 
Iid).3 

©g ifl aber nod) nid)t 3^it, c^ mug i>ci ^(i)alW ®Iiidf 
Dcrgel)en nnb feine ^cit l)aben, bi^ e^ iJoriiber fommt. 3n^ 
beg5 mngt bn e^ ®ott befet){eiv in iijm bid) erlii|len, feinen 

t^c hands of one. Lass i h m m i t d i r m a c h e n, /cf him do with 
youj i. e. as he pleases, Dem es wo hi gehet und (der) 
t h u t, etc., lolth whom it is well, and icho does. 

^ In rechter Sache, iji a just cause. Gerecht is more 
commonly used in this sense, and r e c h t in the sense of right, pro- 
per, 

* Und (e s) will n i c h t, " It will vex you that you, in a good 
cause, feel misfortune, and that they prosper in iniquity (goes well 
with them in iniquity) ; and things (it) will not go on, as you would 
like, and yet you see that everything goes with the unjust man ac- 
cording to his will, so that a proverb, etc." 

^Garreichlich. Gar is nearly the same as g a n z, and 
they are oflen conjoined, ganz und gar, ichoUy and in every part. 
But gar is a little weaker than ganz, and is therefore oflen to be 
rendered by very. 

* Des Schalks. Schalk signified originally a servant, as 
in Gottschalk, a servant of God, M a r s h a 1 k (from M a r a h 
and M a h r e, horse), marshall. In Luther's time it signified, a dis- 
sembler, a knave. In modern German, it means, in its milder sense, a 
rogvish, artful, cunning man, and is even a gentler term than 
S c h e 1 m. Buth indicate men who practise arts of deception. 

* Indess, 1. and literally, intcrca, meamchiUy in which sense i n- 



EXPOSITION OF PSALM THIRTY-SEVEN. 37 

SBiffcn fcir gcfaKen fajTeit, aitf ba^i bit fetnen Stiffen in bir 
unb in bcinem getnbe inrf)t t)mberfl, n)ie bie tbiiit, bie iucf)t 
aitf l)oren ju n)iUhcn, jTe l)aben benn^ t()r Stitg^ entn)ebcr 
mtt bent ^'opf l)mbnrcf) ober jn Xriunmern^ get)racf)t. 

d e s s e n is now more commonly used ; out of this signification ha» 
grown that of while (which was formerly expressed by i n d e s^s e » 
d a s s, meamchlle that) ; 2. nevertheless^ synonymous with, dock and 
j e d oc h. 

* Auf d a s s, in order that, obsolete for dass. — H i n d e r s t.. 
See Gram. p. 3J7, (2), on this use of the indicative. 

2 Sie haben denn, is a peculiar idiom, like e s s e i d e n n,, 
conveying the idea of an exception, unless. See Gram. p. 315. 
They have then, i. e. unless they have either carried their matter head- 
long through, or (brought it) to destruction. 

^ Ding is the same word as thing. To show how the letters d, 
th, and t correspond to each other, we will present a few more sim- 
ilar examples. Thar, door ; d a n n, thin ; D a u m, thumb ; den- 
ken, think ; D i e b, thief; dick, thick ; D i s t e 1, thistle ; D o r n, 
thorn ; T o c h t e r, daughter ; d r e i, three ; dreschen, thresh ; 
Durst, thirst ; F e d e r, feather ; L e d e r, leather ; W o r t,. 
word ; G o 1 1, God ; V a t e r, father ; B r u d e r, brother ; Nor d,. 
north. 

* Trammer n. Trtimmeris the plural of T r u m, now ob- 
solete. Still the singular is used in poetical and antique style. Voss^ 
speaks of a Felstrum, fragment of a rock falling into the sea. 
Jean Paul, speaks of a broken watch-chain, and the T r u m, frag- 
ment. Compare the Greek -d-pv/zjua. In old German, it meant the 
end of a thing, as, d e s meres drum, (trum), the end of the sea. 
Das schlachten nam ein drum, the battle took an end, i, e. 
ended. This same word is preserved in the English thrum, which 
retains the primitive signification, ends of something cut off, tangled 
threads cut off from cloth. The old German verb, d r u m o n (t r u- 
m e n) means to cut off. Hence the word Trammer has the wide 
signification of anything cut or broken off, as a piece of a broken 
vessel, thread, rock, ruins, wreck, etc., while R u i n e n (Latin, rui- 
na from ruere, to fall) is limited to a fallen structure, and things oT 
that sort ; S c h e i t e r, scattered pieces of a wrecked vessel, the plu- 
ral of S c h e i t, a piece of wood, (hence s c h e i t e r n, to go t» 
pieces, to wreck) ; and Wrack, what remains of a ship after the 

4 



38 SELECTIONS FROM LUTHER. 

2;>tcl) c ab 'oom ^ovn nnb tag ben ©rimm/ 
e r J ii r n e iidj nidjt^ bag b u and) iibel 1 1) u e jl* 

(£ict)e, n)ie fleigig tDarnt cr, bag \t)ir ja incl)t 95ofeg mit 
SSofem i)ergelten, nodi ben SSofen fofgen^ nm it)re^ &iiidc^ 
n)itien, n)ie bie 5Jtatnr jn treiben pflcgt* Unb ma^ I)ilft 
folrf)er S^^t-n ? @r inad)t bie Qad^c nirf)t beffer, ja fnl)rt 
f e nnr tiefer in ben ©d}(amm. Unb ob e^ fd)on anf ^ SJf^^ 
ferbefte gerictl)e,3 bag bn o6en fagejT: nnb gen)onne|lt/ tva^ 
i)aft bn gen)onnen ? ©ott t)a(l bn t)erl)inbert, bamit^ feine 
©nabe nnb ©nnft t)er(oren, nnb ben bofen Uebeltl)dtern biit 
bn Qkid) gemorben, nnb xvix^ gleid) mit itjnen t)erberben, 
tvk fofgt : 

loose pieces are scattered away. Several late writers, as Voss, 
Gothe, Seume and many others, have used Trammer as a mascu- 
line singular, and formed from it a new and second plural, d i e 
T r a m m e r n. 

*Zorn, Grimm. Zorn means anger, a fiery passion. 
G-rimm mesms fury. Hence one may say in Zornes Grimm, 
in the fury of passion. VV u t h means rage, after the manner of the 
ocean. So w Q t h e n in the preceding paragraph. — D ass d u 
a u c h U b e 1 ih u e s i, so as to do evil. 

^ Fo 1 g e n, is here used as it is sometimes in the old German, 
in the sense of v e r f o 1 g e n, to persecute. 

3 G e r i e t h e. G e r a t h e n, means to turn out, as indicating an 
unforeseen result, to terminate in a certain way by chance. But it is 
more commonly used in the restricted sense, to turn out iccll, as 
das Getreide ist nicht gerathen, the grain, (crop) has 
not turned out well. D i e A r b e i t i s t i h m gerathen, the 
work has turned out successfully to him. Ungerathene Kin- 
der, children that turn out poorly. 

* Oben lagest und gewonnest, " shouldst lie top and 
win." Gewinnen which makes the imperfect in gewann, 
has the imperfect subjunctive g e w t1 n n e, for which there is 
another form ge w o n ne. There is here an allusion to tcrcstling. 
Unterliegen is still used to express the opposite of o b e n lie- 
gen which is obsolete. See both words in the first paragraph under 
verse 124. 

* Da mi t. "Thou hast hindered God [from delivering you, and] 
tJureby lost his grace and favor." 



EXPOSITION OF PSALM THIRTY-SEVEN. 39 

Seitn bte So fen n^erben au^gerottet, biei 
abcv be 6 S)cvvn (>arren,2n)erbenba^?anb 
erben. 

@^ l)i(ft3 bid) tnd)t, bag bu nic{)t angefangen^ f)a(l ober 
gereijt fepell. 2)emt e^ i]t cin frf){ecf)te6^ freie^ Urt^eil : 
2Ber Uebel tbut, gercijt ober ungereijt, ber n)irb au^gerot:? 

1 (Die) die, ^/to^e 2^?/to. The antecedent omitted. 

2 H a r re n signified in old German, to tarry. It signifies to wait 
in expectation of somethivg or in great anxiety for it. It is construed 
with a \ii\ or more poetically with the genitive, both forms having 
the same sense, viz. io wait loith anxiety for a person or thing. It 
implies some present evil, and the confident expectation of some 
future good. W a r t e n signified originally, to look^ to look for. 
Hence W ar te means an elevated place from which one can look 
out, a tower ^ an observatory. Wartthurm and Wartburg, a 
icatck-toicer. War ten, therefore, means, fo icatch^ and hence, io 
wait anxiously for . This word also is sometimes followed by a u f , 
sometimes by the genitive. At present, barren is more elevated 
and is used in reference to God, and in written composition ; while 
w a r t e n is more used in familiar style, and with reference to men. 

^ H e 1 f e n when used impersonally or with a neuter nominative, 
or when it governs the accusative, means, to be of use or advantage. 

* A n g e f a n g e n, " that you did not begin (the strife) or that 
you were provoked." As f a n g e n, is equivalent to capere, to take, 
so anfangen is equivalent to incipere (in-capere), to take hold of, 
to begin. A n Ii e b e n, literally, to take a thing up, figuratively, to 
begin, is a more solemn and dignified word, perhaps from its imply- 
ing greater eifort or power (to raise, to lift up) ; as J e h o v a h o.b 
dasGericht an, Jehovah began the judgment. B e g i n n e n, 
to go about, to enter upon, like the Latin, in — ire (if we may trust the 
etymology of g i n n e n as equivalent to g e h e n) ; to begin. A n- 
b r e c h e n, to break upon, has the same sense, (to begin) except that 
it implies suddenness. All of these may be used of precedence of 
time in beginning. Only anfangen can be applied to space, or 
that which is first, because nearest to us ; as, D o r t f a n g t m e i n e s 
Reiches Gr'cinze an, "there begin (in space) the boundaries of 
my kingdom." 

^ Schlechtes, simple, in a good sense, signified originally 
even, level. Luther renders Luke 3: 5, Was uneben ist, soil 
schlechter Weg werden, " the uneven shall become a level 



40 SELECTIONS FROM LUTHER. 

tct wevien. 2)a^ (Tct)t man and) wv 3(ugen in alter 2Ce(t, 
in atten ©efrf)ic()ten. 
2Jber idcv^ auf ®ott n)artct, ber b(eit>t, ia^ ncbcn it)m 

way." From this were derived the significations, 5<rai^/t^, true, sim- 
ple. But the form s c h 1 i c h t is, in modern German, employed 
to designate those ideas, and schlecht has received another fig- 
urative signification. As what is level is lower than the eminences, 
schlecht came to signify loic, and then worthless. So the Eng- 
lish verb slight signified originally, to level, to cast down ; and then to 
cast away and disregard. *' They slighted and demolished all the 
works of that garrison." — Clarendon, " The rogues slighted me into 
the river." — Shakespeare. S c h 1 i m m differs from schlecht in 
this, that it means something positively bad or injurious, while the 
latter is negativehj bad, or worthless. S c h 1 i m m signified ancient- 
ly, croo A;erf, and hence out of form, or out of proper order. Ein 
schlimmer Hals, was a crooked neck ; schlimm schreib- 
e n, was to write crookedly. But in modern usage this meaning is 
not common. Ein schlimmer Finger, means a bad or sore 
finger ; ein schlimmer Hun d, a vicious dog. In English, 
the word slim, means poor and bad. Barrow says, " That was a 
slim excuse." Webster seems to have inverted the propei order of 
the significations of this word. In Dutch, the word slim and in the 
Danish slem are used in the sense of s c h 1 i m m in German, so that 
little doubt can remain of the origin of the English word. 

* A b e r w e r. " But he, who waits for God (looks to him for aid), 
remains (wails) for the evil-doer to perish by his side, whoever can 
but wait so long." W e r followed by d e r, like the Latin qui fol- 
lowed by is. " Wicked men are so very ripe, that, though no one 
drives them on, they cannot restrain themselves ; they, of their own 
accord, bring down calamity Uj)on their own necks, so that they are 
destroyed in one's sight." Vertreiben, to drive away, and conse- 
quently, to drive forward. Anrichten, to prepare ; and then ^o 
bring, or to occasion something evil, like anstiften. Zusehens, 
genitive of Z u s e h e n, the act of seeing, used adverbially and mean- 
ing, at the time of seeing, while one is seeing, visibly. In common life, 
zusehend and zusehends are so employed. *' For ripe 
grass must become hay, and it shall even dry in itself [standing] on 
its stalk." N i e m a n d, on the next page, 7tli line, is in the dative. 
A n must always be used, when tliat is to be pointed out in which 
anything takes place, " in murderers," etc. 



EXPOSITION OF PSALM THIRTY-SEVEN. 41 

unterqef)e ber Uebeft{)atcr, tvev nur fo tange {)arren fonnte. 
2^ie bofen g)Jenfd)en jTnb fo gar reif, i>a^^ 06 jTe S^iemanb 
i)crtrei6t, fo mogen ffe fid) felbfl ntd)t entl)aften, ffe rictjten 
eirt mut[)n)itttg Ungti'trf an liber it)ren §a[g, bag fie jufel)en^ 
tjertifgt merben. ®enn bae^ reife ®ra^ mug fi^eu n^erben 
inib foffte e^ an ihm fefbjl: auf bem ©tamme t)erborren* @^ 
1)1: eitt bofer ?D?enfcf) 9ttemanb fo itnertragftcf) unb t)erber^ 
bftcf) aB ficf) fefbfi. Sag feben voir an ben gjjorbern, Ste:!^ 
ben/Jtprannen nnb berg(eirf)eu (Srempe(n* 

@g i(l nocf) nm etn ^leine^/fo ift ber @ott^ 
lofe nimmer,2 fo xvxv]l bu auf fetne (Btattc^ 
ad) ten, unb er VDirb nid)t ba fepn. 

^ Um ein Klein es, a short time, U m, about, not far from, is 
oflen used where we should expect exactness ; and, in such cases, is 
to be translated by at, when it refers to a point of time, and to be 
omitted altogether, when it refers to measure, either of time or of 
space; as, um vier U h r, at four o'clock. Um drei Jahre 
alter, ihree years older, 

^Nimmer. Je means at any time, distributively, and then all 
times collectively, ever. In the old Gothic form it was a i v, hence 
the English word ever), from which ewig is derived, Je with a 
negative particle prefixed, becomes n i e, and is just the opposite in 
signification. Compounded with m a 1 s (genitive of m a 1) it forms 
j e m a 1 s, and is a stronger expression of the idea at any time {ever 
of time, ever in the icorld) ; which, in the negative form, is n i e- 
m a 1 s. J e with m e r (old German for m e h r) forms i m m e r, 
evermore, and negatively, n i m m e r, never more. These last differ 
from the preceding, by relating to the future, and being properly lim- 
ited to it. N i m m e r m e h r, is a still stronger expression. But the 
word m e h r, in such cases, in denying something with reference to 
the future, does not imply its former existence, as the English ex- 
pression, no more, does, and should not be rendered by these words, 
but simply by never, or never in the world. 

^ S t a 1 1 e, the place where anything stands, or abides. It is now 
used only in elevated style. Statt (English stead) was formerly 
used in this sense, of which we see traces in such compounds and 
phrases as, W e r k s t a 1 1, work-place, work-shop ; B e 1 1 - s t a 1 1, 

4* 



42 SELECTIONS FROM LUTHER. 

^a^ erf(art, tva^ broben^ Q^\ciQt i|T, ia^ jTe finb wic ia^ 
®ra^, ba^ \d)neii a&gcbaucn tDirb, bamit nur unfcre Unge^ 
butb Qcftiiit n^erbe, tt)elrf)e^ f(cf) fiird)tct, bie ©ottfofcn blci>' 
6eu ju (ange. 5!K6d)teft aber fagen : 3«r td) fel)e tt)cl)I, bag 
bie Ungererf)ten gemcinig(id) (angc bleiben, axxni) mit dijxcn 
gum ©rabe femmeu ? 

9(nttt)ort : 2)a^ gcfd)ie{)t gett^iglidy^ barum, bag ber an^ 
bere :j!l)eiP jTd) nid)t itad) bicfem ^^fa(m gebalten^ t)at, fon^ 
tern bie (Zad)c mit 3^vn^ SBiitben, ©rimmen, ^(agen unb 
(2d)reien^ Dert)inbert unb tjerborbiu I)at. Sarum n^eil ytic^ 

bedstead ; an m e i n e r S t a 1 1, in my place ; s t a 1 1 m e i n e r, in 
my stead ; Statt haben, to take place ; Statt geben (or ob- 
fiolete Statt than), to grant a place; i. e. to yields to permit; 
von Statten (dat. pi.) gehen, to prosper; zu Statten 
k o m m e n, to he serviceable to one. 

* D rob en, compounded of d a (which becomes dar before a 
vowel) and o b e n. D a r, is frequently contracted into d r, as it easi- 
ly forms a syllable with the following vowel. 

* Gewisslich, is now nearly out of use, and g e w i s s is used 
adverbially in its stead. Inasmuch as all adjectives in German may, 
without change of termination, be used as adverbs, the adverbial 
ending 1 i c h is used less frequently than formerly. 

^ T h e i 1, here used in the sense of y^ar^T/, properly signifies a 
^ari, that which goes to make up the whole. It is the same as the 
English word deal (Gothic Dail^ Anglo-Saxon, dwl) ; which in old 
Enfiflish signifies a part. So the verb to deal^ originally signified, to 
divide., like the German theilen. Antheil, a part., signifies 
that part (T h e i 1) ickicli falls to (an) one in distribution. 

* S i c h n i c h t n a c h d i e s e m Psalm g e h a 1 t c n, " has 
not held (or regulated) itself according to this Psalm." 

* Wathen, Grimmcn, Klagen und Schreien, infin- 
itives used as substantives and having the force of participial nouns 
in English, " raging, venting fury, complaining, and crying out," 
more forcible than " rage, fury, complaints and cries." While 
schreien, signifies to utter loud cries., whether in intelligible 
words or not, r u f e n means to call hy addressing one distinctly and 
intelligibly. Hence R u f, ]. a call ^2. rr/;w/fl/ion, literally, icftat is 
spoken of one aloud^ and what goes abroad. 



EXPOSITION OF PSALM THIRTY-SEVEN. 43 

manb^ ba gcmcfen tflt, ber feme ©adE)e ®ott empfo()(ett l)dtte 
unb feiueg SOBiden^ gettjartet, fo i\l ia^ Urt[)eiP beg nacf)^ 
jlen t)cngeu3 aSerfeg ii&er 6eibe Z\)cile gegangett, imb ffnb 
t)erti(gt aUefammt/ iic ba Ue6efg getl)an i)abett> 2Bdre 
aber ein X^beif ju @ott 6efe{)rt, fo n)are bed} bag anbre 
^Iheif gemi^lic^ unb ei(enb aiichx' untergegangen, me biefer 
SSerg fagt* 

^ N i e m an d, nobody, the opposite of j e m an d, somebody, is com- 
posed of me and 7na7i, and in old German is written Nieman. D 
or de is often so appended to a word to give it strength of utter- 
ance. N i e m a n d and j e m a n d have no plural, and are common- 
ly varied only in the genitive case (Nieniand s), though we often 
meet with Niemandem and Jemandem in the dative and 
Niemanden and Jemanden in the accusative. See p. 10, 
Note 5. 

2 Urtheil means originally a judicial decision, and in the old 
German and Saxon is found under the forms of urdcli, oordel, and 
ordal, whence ordalium in modern Latin, and ordeal, the judicial de- 
cision of God, in English. Die sele in urteile setzen, in old German, 
means, to submit one's life to the judgment of God, to submit to the 
ordeal, Richardson, in his dictionary seems not to be aware of the 
early use of this word and its corresponding verb in the early Ger- 
man. The modern word for ordeal is Gottesurthiel, which is 
more definite. The derivative and common signification of the word 
Urtheil is any judgment formed by the understanding . An U r- 
the i 1 in this sense may exist in the mind without being expressed ; 
when it is expressed, it becomes a S a t z, a sentence, or declaration. 

^ V or i gen, j^receding. The adjective ending ig is frequently 
joined to particles, converting them into adjectives, as vori g, obig, 
hiesig, dortig, and even etwaig, from vor, o ben, hie r, 
d o r t, and e t w a, meaning the preceding, the above, belonging here, 
belonging there, that which may take place (or incidental). 

*Und sind vertilgt allesammt, d ie, etc., " and (those) 
who have done evil (evil-doers) are all destroyed together." This 
use of d i e for antecedent and relative, is not unlike the Biblical use 
of the word that, in such phrases, as " Other foundation can no man 
lay than that is laid." Da after this relative (d i e d a) is regarded 
as an expletive. 

^ A lie in, "certainly and speedily have perished alone/* 



4» 



SELECTIONS FROM LUTHER. 



Sanim fel)cii mir jelst biefe^ ^^faImg (grempcP in bcr 
SGBelt nicf)t, Tcnn ciu 3c(]Hd)er la^t ®ott fal)ren buret) 
Ungcbutb luib unter|lcl)t jlcf), mit D?cc{)ten ober ged)ten2 ju 
fd)u^en. 2)amit it)irb ©ott an fo(d)em 2Berfe tjcrhinbert, 
tt)e(d)e^3 i)iefer ^>fatm t)on il)m prci^t 

Slbcrbic ©ten be n^ merben ba^ ?anb cx^ 
ben unb ?ujl: baben in gro^em grieben. 

2)icg beflcitigt and), wai brobcn gefagt t|l-, mie bic ©es? 
rcd)tcn 6(ci6cn nad) bcm Scrbcrbcn bcr Ucbclt()ater^ 9tid)t 
bag jTc en)ig anf S'rbcn Ucibcn, fonbcrn bag ibrc ©ad)c jnm 
(gnbe nnb 55ricbcn^ mit @()rcn fommt, and) anf @rbcn, wcU 
(i)cn griebcn fie mit ?eiben nnb ©ebnlb nnb innernd)em 
^rieben t)erbient l)a6en. 

* Dieses Psalms Exempel, would be regarded as a harsh 
construction in modern German. " An exemplification of this 
Psalm." 

"^ Mit Rechten oder Fechten, one of those alliterations in 
which tlie old German, particularly in legal phrases, abounds. "By 
contending at law, or by force." Infinitives used substantively. 
There is an old proverb, Re c h ten ist fechten; and another, 
Wer nicht kann fechten, gewinnt nichts im Rech- 
ten. 

3 Welches. This old interrogative, was not used in early times 
as a relative. It occurred less frequently in Luther's time than now. 
It has properly tlic nature and sense of an adjective (which kind, qua- 
lis), and must always be used after sucli words as s o 1 c h e r and 
others expressing quality. Solchem W e r k e, das, would be 
as much of a solecism, as such a icork, which, in English. See a fev7 
lines below welchen Frieden, which kind of peace. 

* E 1 c n d, in old German, e 1 i 1 e n t i and a 1 i 1 a n t i (another 
land) meant originally an exile (one in a foreign land). Hence, 
wretched and (as an exile is a criminal) contemptible. Arm, poor, 
miserable does not imply the same degror of wrcfclirdness, nor does 
it include the idea of contempt. 4H 

* Z u m E n d e u n d Frieden," tiicir cause w ill come (comes) ""^ 
to its termination and to peace with honor." 



1 



EXPOSITION OF PSALM THIRTY-SEVEN. 45 

SerQotttofe bro{)et ben ©ererf)ten, unb 
bei^et feiite ^al)ne jufamnten iiber it)n. 

2)ad id aber ju !j;rejT: ben 2Bcicf)[ingen^ unb ©d)\t>ad)^ 
gidubigen gcfagt, bie bcr ©cttlcfcu 2;Dben iurf)t feiben mot^^ 
Icn uiib Derbricpt/2 bag )Te ®ott iurf)t ba(b itvaft unb fo n)ol)f 
bajn gcl)en Icipt. 3d) ncnne Impium eincn Oottfofen* 
S^enn e^ l)eigt eigentnd)^ Sen, ber auf ®ott nidtjt tvant nod) 
gfaubt, ber au^ ibm fetbft^ jji^j) feinem freien SOBillen nadj 
in ber ytatnv febt, a(^ benn fonberlid) jTnb bie ©leigner, bie 
®etel)rten unb fcteinenben 5jeitigen, aU ju unferen ^eitcn 
jTnb ^Vibfr, S3ifd)ofe, ^fafen, 5i)i5nd)e,5 :£)octore^ unb ber^ 

* Zu Trost den Weichlingen, "as a consolation to the 
faint-hearted." 

^Und verdriesst, " and (whom it) annoys that God does 
not immediately punish them, and, besides, (d a z u), allows it to go 
so well (with them)." 

^ £ i g e n 1 1 i c h, in its proper and strict sense. As applied to a 
word, it denotes proper and literal signification and is synonymous 
withursprttnglich. Uneigentlich, means figuratively^ 

"* Der aus ihm selbst, etc., " who, in a state of nature, lives 
for himself (draws his motives /rom himself) and according to his own 
free will." 

^Pabst, Bischofe, P faff en, Monche. Pabst, in 
old German B a b s t, but in the modern orthography Papst, 
literally means /a^Aer, and comes not from papa^ but from papas ^ or 
pappas, a Latin word, borrowed from the Greek, and much used in 
the middle ages. This form of the word for father^ in a religious 
sense, was undoubtedly chosen, because the other form was appropri- 
ated to another use, as will be seen under the word P faff. Papst 
is applied exclusively to the bishop of Rome. — B i s c h o f is a cor- 
rup.ion o the word episcopvs, and corresponds in signification. So 
vescovo in Italian, and eveque (evesque) in French. — Pfaff, a 
clergyman, comes from papa, and was originally a title of honor ^iv- 
en to spiritual teachers. But the German word is not applied to the 
pope, nor even to bishops as such. It designates the ordinary secu- 
lar clergy, as distinguished from the regular clergy or monks on the 
one hand and from the laity (L a i e n) on the other. It was used in 
a good sense till about the time of the reformation, when it ceased 



4m SELECTIONS FROM LUTHER. 

QUid)en 2Soff, tt)e[d)e i)on yiatiiv miiffcn, n>iitbcn anbev^ bag 
beifige @i)an(]elium, mic tDir fchcn, bag jTc and) nmtlid) 
tbun. 2l6er tt)ai^ ijUft \lc H)v ^iBut[)cn uub Xobcn ?2 .r^ore, 
tt>ag ba^ fefgt. 

2l6er ber S^cvv ladjct fein/ beun cr fteljt, 
bag fetn ZaQ f omm t 

to be an honorable appellation ; and since then P f a r r e r (P f a r r- 
h e r r, from P f a r r e, parish, and H e r r) has been employed as a 
respectful term for an ordinary' clergyman. G e i s 1 1 i c h e r, is a 
general term, including bishops, secular clergy and monks. Pre- 
d i g e r (from praedicare) means simply a preacher. That 
P faff comes from papa will be doubted by no one who is familiar 
with the frequent use of ;;/and / for p in German orthography. 
The following examples will sufficiently show this ; P f a h 1, Latin 
palus ; P f a n n e, pan; P fa u, Latin pavo ; P f e f f e r, pepper ; 
P f e i f e, pipe und fife ; P f e n n i g, penny ; P f i r s i c h e contract- 
ed into P f i r s c h e, Latin Perslcum, (Italian persica contracted into 
pesca, French ptche (pesche), and English j^tacA) ; P f 1 a n z e, plant ; 
? f 1 a s t e r, plaster ; P f 1 a u in e, plum ; P f 1 o c k, low German 
P 1 u g g e, English, plug ; p f 1 c k e n, <o pluck ; P f o r t e, Latin 
porta; P Cos te, post ; F ^uh], pool; Pfund, pound; Pfad, 
path. Most German words beginning with pf, are of foreign origin. 
— M 6 n c h, and monk, come from monachus {jiovaxoc). 

* Wider, against; gegen, towards. The former implies op- 
position or hostility, the latter may signify that, or may not ; it de- 
pends on the connection, being itself indifferent. 

'WothenundToben. Toben means the raving of one 
icho, in a 2)assion, has lost his self-possession. It signifies disorder 
and confusion in passion rather than r'wlencc, which last is denoted 
by Wathen, raging, a. figure taken from the raging of the sea. 
See p. 38, Note L 

^ D a, is an expletive, like our word there, in such expressions as, 
" there is." So also after the relative d e r. 

^Lachetsein. Lachet governs the gcniii ve. in old Ger- 
man m e i n, d e i n, s e i n, were the genitives of i c h, d u and e r, 
the place of which m c i n e r, d e i n e r, seiner, are now used to 
distinguish the genitive of the personal pronouns from the adjective 
pronouns, m e i n, m e i n e, m e i n ; d e i n, d e i n e, d e i n ; s e i n, 
seine, se i n. These old genitives are perservcd in certain idio- 



EXPOSITION OF PSALM THIRTY-SEYEN. 47 

2Sie mbdjte^ un^ ein flcirfcrcr ZvQ\i gegeben n)erben, bag 
bie ir>utbenfccn g^einbe ber @ercd}ten aKe ibre ^a&jt unb 
S3c5:>bcit DortDcnben, mcinen^ mit gaitjcm @rntle/^ ben ©c^ 
recf)teu (bai^ t|l, ben Otdnbigen in @ott) mtt 3^1)^^^ Sit 
jerreigen, nnb ©ott i)erarf)tet fte fo gar, ba^ er iljxcv Iad)t, 
barum ba^ er anftet)et, n)te fnrj ffe n^i'tt^en wnieW; unb i()r 
Jiaq nicf)t feme i^. 

9tict)t bag ®ott me cin SWenfcf) fadE)e, fonbern bag e^ 
Idcf)erlirf) ijl anjufel)en in ber 5Baf)rl)eit, bag bie toHen^ 
5i}Jenfdf)en fo fel)r mi'ttben unb grog Sing t)ornebmen, bejfen^ 
fie nicf)t ein S^aav breit an^rid)ten niogen. @(eict) al^ ein 

matic expressions, such as, g e d e n k e m e i n (m e i n e r), remem- 
ber vie ; V e r g i s 3 m e i n (m e i n e r) n i c h t, forget me not. 

^ Wie mochte, etc. This sentence is a little irregular in its 
construction. " How could a stronger consolation be given us (than 
this ; — ) that the furious enemies of the righteous should apply all 
their power- and malice (and) suppose with all seriousness that they 
are about to rend in pieces the righteous (i. e. those who believe in 
God) with their teeth, and (that) God holds them in such utter con- 
tempt, that he laughs at them, because he sees how soon their rage 
will be over, and that their day is not far distant." 

2 M e i n e n, (low German m e e n e n, English mean) signifies, 
to hold an opinion without absolutely aj^rming its truth, to be of opin- 
ion. Wahnen, (English ween) to suppose, ov to hold aji opinion 
without good reason. Hence commonly, to imagine or suppose falsely. 

^ Ernst, as an adjective, was formerly written ernest and 
means the same as the English adjective earnest. As a substantive, 
it means, earnestness, seriousness. 

*Tollen. Toll, foolish, irrational, mad, conveys very nearly 
the same idea as w (i t h e n d, raging (see wttthende Feinde, 
a few lines above), and hence the propriety of saying that die t o 1- 
len Menschen wttthen; but it comes still nearer to t o- 
b 6 n d, boisterous, ranting (see p. 46, Note 2) as it represents one 
out of his senses as it were, like an insane person. Hence T o 1 1- 
h a u s, mad-house, ein toller Hund, « mad dog. R a s e n d 
is raving, opposed to quiet, as toll is to rational, 

^ D e s s e n,. is governed by H a a r, " of which they cannot bring 
a hair in breadth (a hair's breadth) to pass." 



48 SELECTIONS FROM LUTHER. 

Idrf)ernd)cr 5i)tann n>are, ber^ einen langen ®pie^ unb fur^ 
^cn S^cgcn ndl)mc, unb wolitc bie (gonne Dom i^inimel bcr^ 
ab(tcd)cn, unb jaud)Ste einmaP barauf, a(^ l)dtte er einen 
reblirf)en Stid) getljan* 

2)ie ©otttofen jieben ba^ (Sdf)trert ani 
unb fpannen^ il)ren SSogen, bag jTc fallen 
ben @Ienben unb Slrmen, unb fd) fad) ten bie, 
fo a nf rid) tig gel) en im 2Cege.4 

(2d)n)ert unb SSogen l)eigen5 bier iic t)ergifteten befen 

^ Gleich als ein lacherlicher Mann Wclre (der) 
d e r, " he who," etc. 

' £ i n m a 1, like once in English, has two significations, the one 
definite when the accent is on e i n, the other indefinite when the 
accent is on m a 1, thus, 1 . one single time, as ich habe ihn nur 
einmal gesehen, 1 have seen him but once ; 2. at some indefinite 
time, past, present, or future, as, eswar einmal ein Mann, 
there was once a man. In this last sense it is often used for empha- 
sis merely and is not to be translated, or may be rendered by even, 
aSydenkedir einmal! Only think ! (d i r an expletive), i c h 
kenne ihn nicht einmal, /^/o not even know him. — " And 
then (e i n m a 1) should shout over it, as if he had given (itj a real 
thrust." 

^ S p a n n e n, means, to stretch, (or bend) any elastic body ; to 
stretch the fingers apart and to form a S p a n n e, span, from the end 
of the thumb to that of the little finger ; (of animals) ^o A^rc/r/i or 
prick lip the cars ; to fasten into any instrument or machine as a lathe 
hy straining it tight; to bind anything on with ropes or chains ; to 
harness a //or^c (a n s p a n n e n) by binding him close to the car- 
riage (das Gespann, a team so fastened ; der Ge^pann, a 
mate, as if harnessed with another — used only in sport) ; also to fet- 
ter a horse ; to strain or pinch, of a garment or shoe ; and then figu- 
ratively to strain and overstrain in any way. 

* So a u f r i c h t i g g e h c n i m W e g e, in the Hebrew sense, 
" wlio walk uprightly in their ways.'' 

* H c i s s o n, to call, (governing two accusatives, Adam h i e s s 
8 e i n W e i b Eva); to call for, to order a thing, which is a milder 
term than befehlen, gebieten (the accusative of the person 
with an infinitive, as Er hiess mich kommen or the dative 



EXPOSITION OF PSALM THIRTY-SEVEN. 4^ 

Sungen/ iamit fie fdjlent, fcf)mdf)cn, tjerfcftren, t^erffagcn 
intb frf)antcu fctc (2arf)e fce^ (Screrf)tcn, auf bag bie ^^rom^ 
meu^ in JOvig, Serfotgmtg unb jum Zoic baburd) fommen 
imb ^cvtiic^t tt>erbcn mocf)tcn. 

Stffo fpricf}t ^>f* 57 : ,fVcv ?0?cnfrf)enfinber S^tngcn ftnb 
2Gvif cn3 iinb ^l>feife, unb tbre S^^ttge ifl etn fcf)arfeiJ 
Q5cf)n>ert/' bamit {)aucn ffe^ nadt) bem @erecf)ten, cb jTe i^n 
fallen morf)ten unb fcf)[acf)ten ; bag tft, uicf)t attein tobteu, 
fcnbern narf) ibrem 9i)?nt{)n)tKen in tl)m n)ubfen unb fubetm 

@r nennt and) bie ©ererf)ten ben ©eringen unb Strmen^ 
barum bag fie i)or ber grogen l^od)mntbigen ^(i)Wixi]t unb- 

of the person and accusative of the thing ;asHore, was ich. 
dirheisse). As a neuter verb (and so it is here used), it has a 
passive signification (to be called), or a mere explanatory sense, as, 
das heisst, that is, that means , or is equivalent to. E s h e i s s t^ 
means, it is said. 

^ Zungen. Zunge, tongue. Z often takes the place of t m 
English ; as Z ehe, toe ; Z e h n, ten ; Z e i c h e n, old Saxon te- 
^•671, English io/cen; Zinn, tin; Z'l^f, tip ; Zoll, toll; Zwan- 
zig, twenty; Zweig, twig; Zwei (old German zwo, fem. and 
z w e e n, masc, twain), two ; z w o 1 f, twelve. 

2 Die Frommen. Fro mm is a word of very wide signi- 
fication, originally that ichich forwards one's designs, useful, 'profita- 
ble. This sense prevails in the verb f r o m m e n. Then, it meant 
excellent, valuable, good ; applied to a man's moral character, pious, 
religious; applied to Go^, benevolent, compassionate, ?in(i so applied 
also to others ; applied to animals, innocent, harmless ; e i n f r o m- 
mer Hund, a dog that does not bite ; e i n f r o m m e s P f e r d, a 
gentle horse, and so sometimes when applied to persons, particularly 
to children. 

^ W a f f e n, old Saxon wapan, Anglo-Saxon iccepen, English weap- 
on, any kind of armour whether oflfensive or defensive. 

^ Dam it hauen sie, etc., " with which they strike at the right- 
eous man that (if) they may strike him down and slay him, that is,, 
not merely kill him, but roll the body (him) about and besmear it ac- 
cording to their pleasure." 

5 



50 SELECTIONS FROM LUTHER. 

S3(afeni bcr ®ettfofcn t)eracf)tet uub gcringc jTnb. Slbcr 
tt)a^ rid)ten jTe an^ ?2 §6re : 

3(6er iljv (Zdjxvevt xvivb in if)r 5?erj gcfjen 
unb if)r 53ogcn n^irb gerbrecf)cu. 

' Schwulst und Blase n, swelling and puffing. The former is 
a substantive, and the latter an infinitive used substantively. Both, 
of course, are used here figuratively. Schwulst, literally, a swell- 
ing tumor for which the word Geschwulst is much more com- 
mon. Figuratively, it is applied to a swollen style of speaking and 
writing, and means, bombast, rant. Blase n means to blow, in the 
widest sense of this term ; in a restricted sense, it means to blow 
with the mouth ; and figuratively, to puff and swell. 
. 2 Richten sie aus. Richten means, to put straight, to put 
in order, to put right, from which a variety of other significations are 
derived. A u s r i c h t e n, is io carry a thing out properly to its end, 
and hence to accomplish. E i n r i c h t e n, to bring a thing into its 
proper place or order, to arrange, to adjust. Anrichten, to ar- 
range or prepare a thing for something else, as food for the table, 
(mostly limited to such a use) ; to occasion (something evil). A u f- 
richten, to erect, to build ; figuratively, to raise up, and comfort. 
E r r i c h t e n, to build up, to complete that which is a n g e 1 e g t, 
or has a foundation eilready laid ; figuratively, it is limited chiefly to 
establishing universities and formiiig leagues. Gardens, groves, nur- 
series for trees, ditches, pools, as also lower schools, factories, etc. 
are an ge leg t, (laid out) as they are on the surface of the ground 
or figuratively represented as low and inferior ; buildings, trees and 
anything raised up in establishing it, are errichtet. Convents, 
hospitals, poor-houses, monuments and the like are gestiftet. 
E n t r i c h tc n, is to pay one's debts, taxes, etc., i. c. to do what is 
right towards (e n t) another in regard to payment. II i n r i c h t e n, 
to direct a thing to its place, to carry a criminal to execution, or to 
execute, to destroy. V e r r i c h te n, generally of mechanical labor, 
to do or perform ; to carry a business forth (v e r, away, to its end) 
to its completion. Zurichten, to direct a thing or aim it towards 
(z u) its object ; to fit or prepare. This word is used in a much wider 
and looser sense and in more connections than anrichten. A fa- 
rich ten, (in mechanical arts,) to jjrrpa re work, to fit it or make 
it ready by putting in order whatever is necessary; also, to teach any 
thing meclianically to men or animals, in a much lower sense than 
un ter r i clitcn. 



EXPOSITION OP PSALM THIRTY-SEVEN. 51 

Sa6 tjl : t^re befen 5K5orte mii^en jTe ^ieber freflen/ 
uiib etDtg(icf) baxan evtt)urqcn, bag ihv ©cnjiffen tm ©ter^ 
ben bamit biird)rtod)cn ett)ig{irf) n)irb gcpeiuigt l^a^ii ber 
Segen^ mirb jcr6recf)en, bag Jilted tJergeben^^ fj]; ^^^t) jte 
nirf)tc> aii^riJ^teu mit a(( ibrem SBiitben, benn bag ffe ihnm 
fctbjl; \old)ci Unglucf jurid)teit etDigficf), ba^ arme etenbe 
2SoIf. Saritm foK ffcf) tbre^ ^>iffen^ mib ©d)anben^ 9tte^ 
maub entfcgen,^ e^ mug a(fo fcpn, bag fte tl)ttcn fe(bfl bag 
S3ab in ber 5;^5He n)ot)f bereiten, n)ien>o[)t bie S'tatur fo[d)e 
frf)ti:)ere ?d|lern)orte uttgern (eibet Socf) ber ®etjl, ttacf) 
biefem ^)falm gcricf)tet, tadE)et ibrer mtt @ott unb ilebt auf 
tt)r (Sube. 

* Fressen and es sen are thus distinguished by an old writer. 
Ein Wolf soil fressen, ein Mensch soil essen. Thus, 
fressen means to eat gi-eedily or devour ; essen, to eat. So sau- 
fen, to drink like a beast, trink en, to drink like a man. "Their 
malicious words shall devour them, and forever torment (strangle) 
them in this (daran) that their conscience, filled with compunction 
(punctured) thereby, will be tormented forever. Besides (dazu, in 
addition to this) the bow shall be broken, so that all is in vain, and 
they effect nothing by all their rage but (d e n n, like als; nichts 
denn, nothing else than) that they prepare for themselves forever 
such wretchedness — poor, miserable people ! Therefore should no one 
be terrified at their hate and abuse ; so it must be in order that they 
may prepare for themselves a bed (bath) in hell, although (human) 
nature bears unwillingly such severe reproaches. Yet the spirit (as 
opposed to the flesh, or nature) regulated by this psalm laughs at 
them as God does (with God) and looks at their end." 

2 B o g e n, a howj from b i e g e n, io bend, has a passive significa- 
tion, anything bent (corresptpnding to g e-b o g e n, bent), and therein 
differs from the active forms, B i e g u n g, the act of bending, and 
B'le ge, the bend. It means, a boio, an arch, a crooked path, or a 
sheet of payer (from its being doubled together). 

^ V e r g e b e n s, ^■?^ vain ; literally, given away, given to no pur- 
pose, or falsely. 

* Entsetzen, as an active verb, to put one (s e t z e n) away or 
out of his pl^ce (e n t) ; as a reflective verb, to be put out of one's self. 
i. e. to be terrified or amazed in a very high degree. 



52 SELECTIONS FROM LUTHER. 

t)cnn ba& grogeSiit^ ber ©ottfofen. 

S)a6 t(lt and) i^erbricgticf) ber ?tatur, bag bie ©ettfcfcn 
reicf) ffnb imb il)vcv t)ieP imb mcidijtig : abev ber ©erecf)tc 
i(l arm unb attein, bat aucf) u>entg, unb jTe nel)men it)m ba^? 
ju ba^ (Seine/ l)inbent il)n and) an ber 9taf)rung* 2)arum 
troflet ber f)ei[ige ©ei|l feiu liebe^ jlinb unb fpricf}t : ?ag 
bid) e^ nicf)t t)erbriegen, bag bu tDentg, fte t)iel baben ; lag 
jTe l)ier reicf) unb fatt fet)n, ed ijl bir bejfer, bag bu ein tvc^ 
i\\Q l)abejl mit Sotted ©imfl,^ benn ob^ bu groge §aufen 

* Es ist besser, etc. When in a simple sentence a verb 
precedes its nominative, the expletive e s must come before the verb. 
"The little of the righteous is better than, etc." 

2 D a s Gut, ordinarily means as it does here, an estate, property. 
The plural, die G tt t e r, means generally, goods, possessions ; 
but sometimes is applied to the possessions of the mind, or mental 
attainments. Das Gute, is the abstract form, </ic good, as we 
bay, the sublime, the beautiful. Gilte, means goodness j kindness^ 
although the latter is more perfectly expressed by Gotigheit 
which is rarely used. So gut, good; and gU tig, kind. 

3 Reich sind und ihrer viel, etc. " are rich and many of 
them and powerful." 

*Und sie nehmen ihm das Seine, "and besides they 
take from him what he has." Ihm, from him. This idea (from) 
does not lie in the dative so much as it does in nehmen, to take 
away ; and " to take away withreference to him," (the dative merely 
shows the indirect object of the action) is the same in sense, as "to 
take away from him." The Germans cannot use sein substantive- 
ly for "his own," but must prefix the article and give it the form of 
the neuter adjective used as an abstract noun. 

* G u n 8 t, favor, comes from g o n n e n, to favor, to grant. St 
is a mere euphonic addition to the root. The vowel of the root is 
in such cases, ordinarily changed into u. This addition of st is lim- 
ited to those verbs whose roots end with a liquid. So K u n st from 
kenncn; Brunst, from brennen; Runst, from r i n n e n ; 
S c h w u 1 s t from s c h w e 1 1 e n. 

* D e n n o b, etc. " than if you liad groat pik's of goods, not only 
of one, but of many and of all the ungodly," etc. 



EXPOSITION OF PSALM THIRTY-SEVEN. 53 

©liter, n\d)t alteitt eiite^, fonbern Dieter unb affer ©ottlofen 
l)dtteft mit ©otteg Ungunjl, tvie jTe Ijabcn. atud) t)6re, trag 
fiir cin^ Uvtljcil ge^t iiber beiite Slrmutb unb il)ren Dieicf)^ 
t[)um. 

£)enn ber 3trm ber ®ott(ofen wirb jer^ 
brecf)en, aber ber ^perr er()dtt bte ©erec^^ 
ten* 

2)er 2(rm unh §anb ftnb ber Sht^ang^ ber ©ottlofett, bag 
if)rer 3Siefe jufamment)aften, itttb baburd) jTnb fte grog, 
macf)tig iinb jlarf ; glcid)n)te jegt be^ ^ab^e& Slrme ffnb 
bie ^ontge,3 gurjlen,^ S3ifrf)ofe, ©etef)rte, ^ajfen unb 

* Was fQr e i n, what kind of. This phrase for describing the 
quality or character of a thing, is to be explained by a reference to 
the peculiar use of f ii r in German. In English, we say, " he 
holds a thing to be good ;" the Germans say, " he holds it/or good." 
Hence Was far, means " what it is held to be," and hence " of 
what kind it is." 

2 A n h a n g. Observe here the resemblance of several succes- 
sive words to the Enghsh. Arm, u n d. Hand, An hang (Eng. 
hang,) Gottlos (godless). Han gen signifies £o 7mw^ ; Hang, 
declivity, and (then as derived from this) propensity, A b h a n g, 
precipice, is a still stronger term for declivity, and is much more fre- 
quently used than Hang. A n h a n g, appendix, and (as ap- 
plied to persons) adherents, party. V o r h a n g, something hung 
before, i. e. a curtain hung before a window, stage, etc. U m h a n g, 
a curtain hung around a bed, etc. A ushang, something hung out 
for show, as show goods, Aushange-schild, a sign-board, 

3 K o n i g e. The orthography of this word is various in the old 
German. Among other forms we find Kttnic, KUnc and 
King. So, Der edel king von franckenrieche by 
one of the Meistersingers. The word comes from K a n n e, race^ 
genealogy, i. e. noble race. This agrees well with what Tacitus says 
of the Germans, Reges ex nobilitate sumunt. Richardson on the 
word, king, is incorrect, or, at least, is at variance with the best Ger- 
man authorities. 

"* Farst, is the superlative of f tt r the old form of v o r, the 
foremost, the first, and hence, the leader, like the Latin princeps, and 
the English prince. 

5* 



54 SELECTIONS FROM LUTHER. 

?0?6ncf)C, aitf mc(cf)c er ffcf) 'ocxia^V unb ©ott nicf)t acf)tet 
2(ffo bat ciu jcgtid[)cr ©ottlcfe ben S>axifcn, bie ®ctt>a(ti^ 
gen aiif fcincr ©cite. Dcnn 3?ctcf)tt)iim itnb ©ctDaft^ bat 
nocf) nie ober gar mcnig auf bc^ ®crccf)ten ©ette gcflanben. 
aibcr y^a^ t)i(ft c^ ?^ ^raiie itur @ott, e^ mu|5 Slttc^ 
gerbrocl)cn ti:)crbcn, barfjl^ bicf) barob nid)t entfcl^en nocf) 
bid) i^erbrie^en fajTen, ©ott cntl)dtt^ bid), bu tt)ir(l nid)t t)er^ 
finfcu, fcin 2trm unb feine ^^^anb ijl iiber bir unb ^at iidj 
fedgefa^t. 

2)er .^err tennt^ bie ;i;age ber grcmmen, 
unb if)r Srbe n)trb en^iglid) bleiben. 

^ Verlasst. Verlassen signifies, to give up, or abandon, 
(las sen, to leave, \ gv, away). Sich verlassen auf, means 
to give one's self up (a u f) to somethings i. e. to rely on it, or trust 
in it. 

' G e w a i t, from w a 1 1 e n, to control, means controling poiner 
which involves the idea of superiority, or ability to compel. JNeith- 
v^r M a c h t, might, power, nor S t il r k e, strength, conveys this 
relative idea of power. Starke has reference to physical energy 
as resulting from a vigorous body. Kraft refers to efficiency, or 
producing effect. A medicine may have S t 'I r k e, or ^c strong, and 
yet not have Kraft, or be effective. 

^ Was h i 1 f t e s ? " What does it avail them ?" So, e s h i 1 f t 
n i c h t 8, it avails nothing, it is of no use. See p. 30, Note 3. 

'^ D a r f e n is rarely used in its original signification, to dare. 
W a g e n is used in its stead. It commonly means to have the pow- 
er or liberty to do a thing (may, can). Nicht d CI r f e n, implies 
that one is prevented by a want of permission, reason, or propriety (i. e. 
may not, must not, because it is not allowed, is not proper, or there is 
no good reason). Then it means furthermore, to nce^/, though be- 
<1 Q r f e n and b r a u c h e n are much more common in this sense. 

* E n t h a 1 1. E n t h a 1 t e n, as a reflective verb signifies to re- 
strain one's self As an active verb, it means, to contain. In old Ger- 
man it also meant to aid, to uphold. So Luther uses it here, and 
in many passages in his version of tlie Scriptures. 

^ K e n n e n and w i s s e n differ as connoitrc and savoir do in 
French. The former means to know so as to distinguish or recognize, 
and approaches to erkenncn in sense, to recognize. Tlius : 



EXPOSITION OF PSALM THIRTY-SEVEN. 55 

©ott erfenttt ilm ^tage, ibre @e[egenf)eit,i ba^ ijl:, bie^ 
tt)ci{ jTc ibm frei gfauben unb nidt)t tr>tflfen n^otten, n)enn nub 
tt)ie i!)nen ju belfen fci), fo ttimmt ©ott ftcf) ibrer an,^ itnb 
06 e^ t)or ben ©ottlofen fcf)cint, at^ t)a6e ©ott i^rer tJcrgef^: 
feit, fo ijl: e^ bocf) nicf^t a(fo, ©ott xt>ei^ n)ob(, tDenn ibre 
3eit ijt, tbnett ju beffen. Sffite audf) ^fafm 9 : „@ott tfl 
ein §elfer ju rei^ter 3eit/^ unb ^f. 31 : „5Kctne 3ett ftel)t 
in beinen ^dnben/' Slt^ tDottte et fagen : ®ie jTnb arm 
unb tpenig,^ 3^ne jTnb reicf) unb mdd)tig ; abcr ia^ geben, 
jTe n:)erben bennod) genug {)a6en unb feine 9totf) feiben. 
©ott meig n)ot)f, tt>enn eg 3^it ^1^/ i')^^^ J^^ l)^ff^^ ««^ ^^ 

Ich kenne ihn dem Namen nac h — v on Gesicht, 1 
knoio him (can distinguish him) by name — by sight. W i s s e n can 
never be so used. Hence it is apphed more to things than to persons. 
In fact so broad is the distinction that the Germans never treat them 
as synonyms. Observe the use of these three words in this and the 
following lines. 

^ Gelegenheit means, literally, situation. From the local 
idea is derived that of situation in respect to circumstances j i. e. condi- 
tion^ and finally, occasion, 

*So nimmt Gott sich ihrer an. " Since they volun- 
tarily trust in him, and do not desire to know when and how they 
are to be helped (it is to help them), Ae takes care of them.'^ A n n e h- 
men means to accept^ to take what is offered, or is at hand. E i- 
nen Rath, eine Meinung annehmen, to accept, or 
adopt, advice f an opinion. Angennommen is sometimes equi- 
volent to verstellt, affected, prttended, assumed; and sometimes 
to g e s e t z t, taken for granted. Sich annehmen with the 
genitive, to take an interest in, to feel a concern for, literally to put 
one's self, or engage (sich n e h m e n) in (a n) something. For this 
wide use of the genitive, corresponding to all the relations express- 
ed by von, vor and an, see Gram. p. 326. 

3 W e n i g, in the old German often written w e i n i g, comes 
from w e i n e n, to lament, and signifies in the oldest writers, la- 
mentable, deplorable ; then it came to signify weak and small, for 
which g e r i n g and k 1 e i n are now used ; and finally a small por- 
tion either of a mass or number, i. e. little, few. The connection here 
shows that wenig is used in its ancient sense j for it is opposed to 
machtig as arm is to re ich. 



56 SELECTIONS FROM LUTHER. 

rat()en, n>cfc()cm jTe aucf) traucit, ol}ne eigcne 5;\iUfe iinb 

Sajii mirb il)r @r6c fei)n et^ig, nid)t allein in jcner SEeft, 
fonbcrn aucf) in fcicfcr 2Ce(t- Senn fte tt)crben miijyen im^ 
mer genng Ijaben* Db (Te n)ol)I nid)t iiberfliiffigen SSer^ 
ratt)i t)a6en tpic bic ©otttefcn ; ©ott ijl il)r SSorratt) unb 
^ornboben, 2BeinfcUcr nub alt il)re ®nU^ ©arum and) 
folgt: 

©ietDcrben nicf)t ju ©cfjanben^inberbo^ 
^cn ^cit, nnb in ber S^^eurung iDcrben fie 
genng l)a6en. 

SBenn ^ricg ober thcixxc 3cit fommt, fo n>crben bie 2JUe 
ju ®d)anben, bie il)ren Jtrofl anf il)ren ^ornbobcn unb 

^ UeberflUssigen Vorrath. Compare the etymology of 
these words with that of svperjluous and provisions. 

2 All ihre Gut, "and all their property." We should here 
expect alles instead of all, for the termination es in modern 
German is properly omitted only when no particular stress is to be 
laid on the word. But all seems to be emphatic here. The old 
writers indulged in much greater freedom in such matters than those 
of later times. That license has descended to us in many forms of 
expression in whicii the word all occurs, for it is frequently unde- 
clined before a substantive, and declined when it comes afler; as b e i 
all dem and bei dcm alien, i?i all this; der Wein ist 
shon a lie (i. e, all gone); and a few lines below die A lie, 
those all, or "all those, who have put their trust, etc." 

^ Sie werden nicht zu Schanden, they are not disgraced. 
Schande means literally shame arising from improper exposure of 
the person, also from the marring or disfguring of the body. This 
will best account for the use of the plural (which occurs only in the 
expressions zu Schanden, mit Schanden, both occurring in 
this and the fcjllowing paragraph), cacli mutilation being regarded 
as a disgrace. Tlio plural is often, as in the passage before us, used 
in the derivative and more common signification of disgrace. We r- 
d e n z u S c h c n d e n to come to disgrace. S c h i m p f, originally 
sporty now 8'\gn\fic3 derision^ reproach ; Schmach, contumely, con- 
temptuous treatment. 



i 



EXPOSITION OF PSALM THIRTY-SEVEN. 57 

^iDeinfctter obcr ®iit gejieKt ^a6en ; fccnn e^ ijl: balb 'oex^ 
fd)[un(]cu imb iimgebracf)t»^ So jleheu jTe benn iibet unb 
mit ®cf)anben, bic jiiDcr fo mutl}ig mtb flc(j gett)efen jTnb* 
%bcv bie ®cred)ten, n?ei( @ott T()r IJiropt unb aSorratf) tjl, 
mogcn nid)t ?!Kaugc( l)abcn, eg mii^tcn ef)er2 atte @ngel t)om 
.^immc( fommcit unb jTe fpeifen* Senn ber aSorratt) Idgt 
|Te maitgelit, bem jTe traiien, tDcber jeitfirf) tied) cu)tgltd)* 
SBie aber bie ©oUlofen ? §5re ju : 

i:}cnn bie ©ottfofen werbeu umfommen^ 
unbbie^einbe beg §errn, n?enn jTe gleid) 
jTnb tDie eine foflticf)e Stue/ n)erbeu ffe bocf) 
alle^ tt?erben, mie ber JHaud) a lie tvivb. 

^ Umgebracht. Umbringen, in the sense of destroying a 
thing, is now used only in common life, although, to spoil and de- 
stroy in war, appears to have been its original signification. So it 
^9eems to be employed by Luther, It now generally means, to put 
one violently to death, always, however, illegally, and in this it differs 
from h i n r i c h t e n, to execute. — E s refers to Gut. 

2 Eher, sooner, is undoubtedly the same word as the English 
ere, and the superlative erst, first, the same as the obsolete English 
word erst. 

3 Umkommen, more fully um das Leben kommen, to 
come to one's end. Um in many cases means, around a thing as taking 
the measure of it, and when one has come round to the point where 
he began, he has reached the end of the measure. Hence u m, 
me3.ns often, to the end. In the word umbringen, i. e. um das 
Leben bringen, in the sense of to kill, probably is to be explain- 
ed in the same way, to bring one to his end ; but in the sense of 
plundering and destroying it may, perhaps, find an easier explana- 
tion in the marauding movements of an army. 

^ Aue or A u. Gothic a h w a, kindred v/ith aqua, signifies ori- 
ginally, a stream of water ; then the rich vale lying along a stream, 
and now its most common meaning is, a rich meadow as a pasturage, 
whereas Wiese means a rich ??iearfoz^ (literally a meadow c/oiAed 
with grass) /rom which the grass is to be cut. 

^ A lie, as an adverb, signifies all gone, and is now used only in 
common life, as, das Geld ist alle, the money is exhausted; 
es ist alle, ii 15 a^Z gone; er hat sein v^lterliches Ver- 



58 SELECTIONS FROM LUTHER. 

Sa^ i^ jc nal)ei gercbct nnb i)crarf}tlirf) gcurtbcift iic 
grogen mdcf)tigeit vcid)cn Sinifer^ @r fprid^t: „Db jTe 
gfeid)*^ tt^aren bie al(errcid)|Ie nub f5ft(irf)ilte 9Juc/^ barinnen 
iibrig gcniig ti3ud)fe, n)ie <Te benn andj jTnb, benn fie baton 
genug* ©le jTnb bie gotbene reid^e Slue in ber SBelt ; ben^ 
nod) miijieu jTe untergef)en, ja i)erge[)en, iinb Sitte tt^erben 
me ber D?aud). 2So fiub fie, bie juDor gemefen nnb gro^e^ 
®nt gel)abt ? (iS i]l ibrer Reiner im ©ebdd)tnip : aber 
bie ®ered)ten fiub in gutem @ebdd)tuij|e imb in alien dbxcn. 

©arum, liebe^ ^inb, fa^ jTe reid) fet)n mie jTe tt>cUen, 
fie^e anp^ (Jnbe, fo ^irflt bn fi'nben, xoic aUc6 ibr S^ing^ tin 

mogen alle gemacht, he has wasted his paternal estate ; W e i n 
alle mac hen, to consume all the icine ; est ist alle mit rair, 
it is all over with me (actum est de me), I am ruined; alle w e r- 
de n, to be consumed^ — " will be consumed or pass away as the smoke 
is consumed, or passes away." 

^ Nahe, near^ is often employed in an idiomatic way. Thus 
v^inen etwas nahe legen, means, ^o bring a thing so closely 
home upon one that he will feel it, Nahe r e d e n, means, to speak 
home upon one, to thrust him through with sharp words. Z u nahe 
t re ten, to infringe upon one's rights, to offend him by some im- 
propriety . Ihm ist zunahe geschehen, injustice is done 
him. Es geht mir nahe, z7 goes near my heart, it troubles or 
pains me. Zu nahe, in such idioms, is very similar in meaning 
to our phrase, too far, to carry a thing beyond what is proper. What 
is too far toicards one, or too near to Jiim, is of course, too sensitively 
felt, and becomes offensive. — The sentence has the irregularity of 
a colloquial, pointed saying. *^ Tiiat is, indeed (j e for j a) speaking 
to the quick, and deciding with contempt, — the great, the mighty, 
the rich nabobs !" That is, they are summarily disposed of. Jun- 
ker stands for j u n g e r H c r r, a young nobleman, or a gentleman 
of rani;, as Jung f e r stands for j u n g e Fran. 

2 Ob sie glcich, etc. " Kven though they were the richest 
and finest meadows, in which there should be a superabundant 
growth (as they really are, for they have abundance. They are the 
golden rich meadows in the world) still they nmst perish, nay vanish 
and pass away as tlie smoke." 

^ Ding, designates whiUver is^ or exists, and is often equivalent 



EXPOSITION OF PSALM THIPvTT-SEVEN. 59 

dland) tjl, fcarum ba^ jTe ®ottc$ ^ctnbe ffnb unb t()m bie 
©cineni bafleu unb t)erfofgen* 2^aJn (a^ btrf) ba^ aucf) 
trefteu, ba^ er ffe nennt @ottc^ gcinbc, fo bod)^ bibber ffe 
nur beine geinbe geuannt ftnb, auf bap bn n^tjTefl:/ n>ie 
jTcf) ©ott feiner affo annimmt, ia^ beine geinbe^ feiite 
geinbe jTub. 

to etwas. Sac he, is a species included under the genus Ding, 
excluding persons, whereas Ding includes them. Sac he must 
always be some object of human pursuit, occupation or interest. 
Ding, is subject to no such limitation. Esistnicht meine 
S a c h e {business — not Ding, thing) dass ich Complimente 
m a c h e, it is not my business to make compliments. Eure Sache 
(caw5c, inierc5^, not D i n g) n i c h t allein, ich habe meine eig- 
ne auszufechten, / have to fight out 7iot only your cause, but my 
own. — P ersonen und Sache n, not Personen und Din- 
g e, which would make no contrast. Meine Sache n, my bag- 
gage, things 'pertaining to me, not meine Dinge, in this sense. 
Occurrences and a course of events are S a c h e n but not Dinge. 
On the contrary Gott ist der Schopfer aller Dinge (not 
Sache n). Dinge, not S a c h e n may be imaginary ; e r g e h t 
mit grossen Dingen (not S a c h e n) u m, he has loonder- 
ful projects in his head. Guter Dinge (not Sache) s e y n, 
to be cheerful. When a definite object or person is called a thing by 
way of indefiniteness. Ding only is used. This is most frequent 
in speakmg of young girls, as das Made hen ist ein alber- 
n e s Ding, the girl is a silly tiling. In old German, Ding was 
also used in the sense of property, and so here by Luther. G e- 
genstand like our word object, always implies a subject or person, 
to perceive or contemplate it. 

^ 1 h m die S e i n e n, I h m, as in many other instances, the 
dative is not to be rendered. It is so remotely connected as the in- 
direct object of the verb as to be regarded as an expletive, although 
it is not strictly so. See Gram. p. 347. 

2 So d o c h, whereas, 

^ Auf dass du wissest, "in order that you may know that 
(how) God so interests himself in his own (seiner for der S e i n- 
i ge n .^) that, etc." Ordinarily the subjunctive is employed in such 
dependent clauses as express design ; but when the clause is to be 
rendered particularly forcible, the indicative is used. 

* Feind (old German fiant and feient) was originally a 



60 SELECTIONS FROM LUTHER. 

Ser ©ottfofe borgt^ unb iai)U nic()t; 
ber ©ererf)te aber ip barmberjig unb 
mifbc,2 

£)a^ ifl aber cin trojltfid^er Unterfd)ieb ber ©emutber,^ 
bag ber (Scttfofen ©liter nicf)t affetn t^ergcingfid) fitib unb 
ein @ube baben, fonbern and) bofe ©liter jTnb lutb t)er^ 

present participle from fian, to hate, q.s He i land (Heilant), 
Savior, was a participle from heilen (he i Ian, old German); 
Freund (old German, Friiint), a friend, from frijon, to love- 
Fe i n d, means a bitter, malignant enemy ; and hence the word is 
often applied to Satan, which is the prevailing use of the same word, 
fiend in English. Widersacher, (originally, an adversary at 
law), now generally signifies one icho seeks to harm another. As 
g e g e n implies less opposition than wider, so G e g n e r means 
an opponent, who yet may be a friend. 

^ Borgt. Borgen, leihen, and 1 e h n e n all have this 
remarkable peculiarity, that they signify both to lend and to borroiD. 
This always perplexes a student till he observes that e i n e m e t- 
was borgen, leihen or lehnen, always means to lend some- 
thing to another, while etwas von jemand borgen, lei- 
hen, or lehnen always means to borroio something of some one. 
Observe, then, whether the dative of the person is used tcith or 2cith- 
out the preposition von, and that will decide the meaning. B o r- 
g e n is used of moveable property, but not of landed estates. L e i- 
h e n and lehnen arc used of both, and often means to rent or 
hire. These last two have the same signification, but leihen is 
the more dignified word and lehnen the more vulgar. This last 
sometimes means in good usage, fo enfeoff. Borgen frequently 
means to buy (von e i n e m) or sell (e i n e m) goods on credit. 

' M i 1 d e, means the same as the English word mild, but has a 
secondary sense which the English word has not, viz., benevolent, be- 
neficent. Ein milder G e b e r, e i n e m i 1 d e G a b e, a be- 
nevolent giver, a benevolent gift. Seine milde hand auf- 
t h u n, to open his liberal hand. Milde S t i f t u n g e n, benevo- 
lent institutio7is. JVl i 1 d t h a t i g k e i t, liberality, benevolence, 

3 G e m a t h c r. G e m u t h means animus, sensus, feelings, dis- 
positions, as distinguished from Geist, Vernunft, mens, ratio. 
G c m n t h e r, here stands for characters, different dispositions of the 
righteous and the wicked. 



EXPOSITION OF PSALM THIRTY-SEVEN. 61 

bammlid)^^ banun ba^ <Te nur auf S^aiifm gefammelt unb 
ittcf)t ben Siirftigen mitgett)ei(t n)evben, \vcld)c6 wibcx bie 
5Jtatur bcr ©emiitber i^. 

S(6er ber ©ercd)tcn ©ut^ hat iucf)t aKeiit feiit (gnbe, ba^ 
rum bag er ©ott tvant unb fein ©ut t)on ib,m xv^axtct^ fou^ 
beru ijl and) ein vcdht mt^ttrf) ©ut, ba^ 2{nbern ntitgett)eift 
unb uidjt auf eineu .^aufeu gefamniclt*^ glifo \)at er geuug 
obne alten je(t{icf)en aSorratb, unb giebt aucf) 2tubern geuug. 
®a^ bcigt^ ein rerf)t ©ut* ^afl bu uid)t Did, fo ijl e^ bod) 
g5tt(id) unb uit^tid)*^ Sie ©ottlofen l^ahcn t)icf, aber uu^ 
d)riftlid) uub uuuufe(id). 

Sap er aber fagt: „Ser ©ottlofe borget/' ifl nid)t jn 
i)er(lebeu, ba^ bie 9?eid]eu Don ben S!Jienfd)en (3nt ent(ef)nen, 
fonbern e^^ ill: gefagt in einem ©{eid)nig unb (2priid)n)ort : 
@icid) al^ ber ba Diet borgt^ unb xxid^t bejal){t, barnad> 

^Bose Outer si nd undverdammlich, " are evil pos- 
sessions and damnable." Observe that /the adjective bose is de- 
clined because it precedes its substantive, whereas verdammlich 
is undeclined on account of its coming after its substantive, and 
being regarded as a mere predicate (die Outer sind verdamm- 
1 i c h). — N atur der Oemiither, ichich (i. e. to be hoarded up 
niggardl};) is contrary to the nature of mind^ or spiritual possessions. 

2 Der Oerechten Out, " the property of the righteous," 

^Mitgetheiltundnicht aufeinen Haufen ge- 
s am m e 1 1 (w i r d). 

* H e i s s t, is. See p. 48, Note 5. 

^So ist es dochgottlich undnatzlich, ?/eizf (what 
you have) is godly and useful. 

^Oleich als (der) der da viel borgt. "As he who 
borrows much and does not repay, strives (unconsciously) for this, 
(namely) that he shall not long remain in his possessions (i. e. en- 
dangers his property), just so all the rich and ungodly (i. e. all who 
are rich and ungodly) receive much from Ood, accumulate and bor- 
row from him, and yet do not repay him by giving (in that they give) 
to the poor, for which end it was given them. Therefore [this is the 
completion of the comparison] their estate will have a bad end and 
pass away as the smoke. That this is the meaning is proved (by the 

6 



62 SELECTIONS FROM LUTHER. 

jlrebt, bag er nidjt lanc^c im &utc fi^en xvitt ; alfo alU 'tHeU 
d)en unb ©otttefcn empfaucjen i)icl t)on ©ott, faninietn iinb 
borgen t)on ibm, unb jal)tcn i()n bod) iucf)t, bag jTc ben 2)urf^ 
tigen aiii^tl)ei(en, n)ojii e^ iljncn gegcbcn vvirb. X^egmegcn 
tt>irb it)r @ut cin 6ofe^ (Snbe net)men imb tt)ie ber 9taucf) 
t)ergel)ein 2)ag bieg bie 5i)icininig fei), 6en)ei^t, bag er jTe 
gegen cinanber l)d(t, ben ©otrfofen unb ben ®ered)ten ; ber 
gine giebt, ber SUtbre nicl)t, unb empfangcn bod) 93eibe Don 
©ott. 

2)arum lil be^ ©ottlofcn (Smpfangcu i)ergfid)en bcm S3or:^ 
gen unb nid)t SSejabfen. 9(ter be^ ©ered)ten ©nt ifl nid)t 
SSorgen nod) ©d)n(b, fonbern frei Don ©ott empfangen nnb 
nii^lid) gebraud)t it)m nnb feinem 9tad)flcn. 

®enn fetne ©efegneten^ erben bad ?anb, 
a ber feine SSerfl ud] ten tr>erben an dgerot^ 

(Siel)e ba, er nennt bie gottlofen 3ieid)cn ©otted SSerma^ 
lebeite^ unb bie ©Idubigen ©otted ©ebencbeite, anf bag bid) 

circumstance, or proves the circumstance) that he (the sacred writer) 
holds them side by side (by way of comparison), the wicked and the 
righteous ; the one gives, the other docs not, and yet both receive 
from God." 

" Therefore the act of receiving on the part of the wicked, is com- 
pared to borrowing and not paying. But the properly of tJie right- 
eous is neither borrowing nor debt, but (something) freely received 
from God and used advantageously for him (God) and one's (his) 
neighbor." 

* Seine Gesegnetcn. " His blessed," i. e. tliose blessed of 
him. S e g e n is a corruption of signum^ a sign^ and s e g n e n a 
corruption of signnre^ to maLc a sign. When Christianity was in- 
troduced into Germany, these words, as designating the sign of the 
cross, were introduced with it. As the sign of the cross was made 
jn benedictions, the sign itself came to stand for benediction. In the 
old German, the word is found in its original meaning, signum and 
Vtzillvm. 

• Vermaledeien and m a 1 e d e i e n from the Latin maU- 



EXPOSITION OF PSALM THIKTT-SEVEN. 63 

ja md)t6^ t)erbriege, ncd) ieincn ©fauben l)mbere t()r grc^eg 
©at unb beine 2(rmutt)» ^£ia6 mii\t bit ntet)r ? Slit bag 
nid)t Xvoftc^ S^niig'^ jur ®ebu(b ? 5;^aft bu ind)t iiberfliif^ 
fTg,3 tt)ie jTe babeii, fo n)ir(l bu bennorf) genug l)abeu unb bag 
?anb bejTI^cn. 

9tic()t ia^ bu etn 5;^err ber 2Sc(t fct)ejl:/ foubcru bu n)irfl 
©utcg QcmiQ t)abeu auf (5rbeu, uub im ?anbe tDohuen mit 
gutcm ^ricbcu* ^cnn ©ott beuebeiet bicf) jeitlicf) unb ett^tg^iJ 
lief), barum ba(5 bu il)m traueft, ob bu mobi Don ben ©ott** 
(cfeu Dennafebcit unb befcf)dbigt wivit. SEieberum, bie gott^^ 
lofen 5Keici)en, ob ^e je^t eine 3^^ff^^^g uberflitfjTg l)aben, fo 
merben jTe bod) t^erberben unb nid)t im ?anbe unb ®nte 
jTl^eu bteiben/ jTe tt)erbeu gen)i^(icf) au^gefrf)opft unb eiit 

dlcere, and benedeien from hcnedicere^ are antiquated words, for 
which verfluche n and s e g n e n are now commonly used. 

* N i c h t s, here used adverbially, in nothings as a stronger ex- 
pression than nicht. Ihr grosses Gut und deine Ar- 
m u t h, all put together as making out one condition of inequality, 
forms the nominative to verdriesse and hindere. "That 
their great riches and your poverty may not vex you nor hinder your 
faith." 

*Trostes genug, enough of encouragement. 

^ Hast du nicht Uberflttssig, "aboundest thou not," 
i e. if thou dost not abound. The substantive for property or 
riches is understood. 

* S e y e s t. The conjunctive is used particularly in all those de- 
pendent clauses, which, instead of positively asserting a thing, state 
it problematically, or as a mere supposition or conception of the 
mind. T r a u e s t and beschadigt wirst, a few lines be- 
low, by being in the indicative, represent the subject, as a matter of 
fact, and not as a supposition. The conjunctive might have been 
used, but with a different shade of meaning. 

^Sitzenbleiben, to continue to sit, or to remain sitting. 
Bl e i b e n and several other verbs take an infinitive where in Eng- 
lish a participle would be used. Liege n, sitzen, or stehen 
b 1 e i b e n, means to continue lying, sitting or standing, i. e. not to 
move, or not to rise. Wo sind wir stehen geblieben, 



64 SELECTIONS FROM LUTHER. 

2(nberer breiit (jefejst, barunt bag ffe ®ott Dcrmafcbcit nnb 
i()ncn entjicbt fcine ®natc jeitlid) imb etDiglicf). 2)cnn fie 
g(au6cu iud)t an il)n, ob fie mot)! dou 93cenfcl)eit gebenebeit 
nnb bcc^akt n^erbcn* 

S^arnm n)o bie @crecf)ten finb, ba haien fie (?enn(] anf 
(Srben, nnb bfeiben im ©nte fifeen. 2Qiebernm, bie (Sottto^ 
fen iDerben an^genjnrjeft, tt)o fie ffgen in ©litem, l^a^ he^ 
tt>eifen aUc gnrrtentl)nmer, dicidjc^ nnb grope ©liter, bie 
tt)ir fe()en,2 n?ie ffe t)in nnb l)er fal)ren wn einem ©e^ 
frf)fedHe jnm anbern. 

©iebe, fo f)a|l bn^ ba^ Urt()ei( iiber bie jeit(id)en ©liter, 
ba^ fiirjtid) 6efd}(offen ift. 2^er ©ered]te nnig genng bci^ 
ben nnb ber Ungered)te t)erberben, barnm bag ber ©ered)te 
©ott txanct nnb ber ©liter tt)ol)I brandjt ; ber ©ottlofe 
tvaxxct nid)t nnb brand)et ibrer nid)t VDobf* 

2(tfo (efen n)ir, bijg 3(bral}am nnb ?otl) reid) n)aren nnb 

where did ice stop? (where have we remained slopping?). Sitzen, 
to sU^ means here, to be in jjosscssion of^ (to sit in the enjoyment of). 

* Re i c h e, kingdoms. This word, and the adjective r e i c h, 
rtc/t, come from the verb r e i c h e n, to extend. They refer to ex- 
tent of territory and of power. Reich was formerly applied to 
smaller governments as well as large, but is now limited to kingdoms, 
empires, etc. Frankreich means the kingdom of the Franks^ 
or France ; Oesterreich, the Eastern part of the empire ; K o- 
n i g r c i c h, kingdom ; K a i s e r r e i c h, empire ; E r d r e i c h, 
the whole earth (the extent of the earth). Smaller territories are des- 
ignated by other words, as H e r z o g t h u m, F U r s t e n t h u m, 
though Herzogreich was once in use. 

'Alle — die wir sehen. This must not be translated " all 
the principalities, kingdoms, and great estates, wliich we see," etc. 
The sense would be complete, were tlie sentence to close with the 
word G « te r. The irregularity, if it may be called such, consists in 
saying, " which we see how they pass back and forth" instead of 
*♦ which we see pass," etc. 

' S i e h e, so hast d u, etc. *' Look now, and you have the 
decision in regard to temporal goods, which is included in few 
words (k a r z 1 i c h), viz." etc. 



EXPOSITION OF PSALM THIRTY-SEVEN. 65 

gcrne M)cvbQvg,ten^ bie ^ifger. I^arum 06 ffe tt)o{)P feitt 
cigen ?anb nod) aSovratt) t)atten, bemtoct) Uicbcn fie im 
?anbe jTlscn intb l)atten genitg. 

2Son ©ott tt>erben beg ?DJanned ©ange ge^ 
forbert, uiib l)at ?u(l an fetuem SBSerte.^ 

©iebe ba a6ermat Xxo% 9tid)t affem tt)ir(l bu jetttid) 
®ut genug {)a6cn, fonbern StUeg, it>ag bu tlmjl:,^ bein gatt^ 
jeg ?e6en unb ^IBaubef, and) gegen bie @ott(ofen, n)irb 
fa)feiinig fe^tt ant) fortgcben, barnm ia^ bu ©ott trauell 
unb il)m bicf) unb betne (2acf)e ergie6|l, tn beinem ?eben if)m 
gefajTen fkl)c%^ S^amit mad)(l bu,^ ba^ er ©efaffen, ?ujl 
unb g(eicf) eine SScgierbe l)at^ beineu 2Beg unb SBanbel ju 
ferbern* 

3(6er bagegen ftdjt^ nun, bag fc[rf)er gottgefdCtiger 3Beg 
ntrf)t geforbert, ja t)erf)mbert unb t)ern)orfen n)trb Don ben 
©ottfofen. J^ag t^erbriegt benn bte 9^atur : barnm ntu^ 

^ Beherbergten. Herberge is a place where a person 
travelling stops for a time, whether at the house of a friend, or at a 
monastery, or tavern or any other place. Hence the person may be 
received gratuitously as a guest, or he may pay his bills as at an inn. 
Wirthshaus is a general term, and very often means a small 
country tavern ; Gasthaus, a more respectable inn ; G a s t h o f, 
a spacious and more splendid hotel, especially for persons of rank. 
Beherbergen, means to receive a guest into one's house. 

' D a r u m, o b s i e w o h 1. " Therefore (because they were 
rich), though," etc. 

3Und(er, Gott) hat Lust an seinem (his own) 
W e r k e, (work, creature). 

*Alles was du thust, etc. " whatever you do, your whole 
course of life, even towards (in respect to) the wicked, will prosper 
and move on." 

^Und in deinem Leben ihm gelassen stehest, 
" and in thy life yieldest passively (remainest passive) to him." 

^Damit machst du, " thereby thou causest, that he have 
gratification, pleasure, and as it were a desire," etc. 

'Aber dagegen ficht, " but with that conflicts (the cir- 
cumstance) that," etc. 

6* 



66 SELECTIONS FROM LUTHER. 

ntan jTd) luer troilcn, ba^ iinfcr SBcfcn^ ®ctt Qcfailt nnb 
Don il)m geforbcrr trirb, nirf)t anfel)cu bic i^inbcrni^ unb 
SEBcgtt^crfiuig bcr &ott{o\cn. 

^ixUt cr, fo mirb er n\d)t megg ett>orf en, 
b e n n b e r 5;) e r r c r I) d ( t iljn bci f e i n e r 5;^ a u b* 

X)a& '^allcn'^ mori)te t^erftanbcn ircrben, bap bcr G5crcd)te 
jiimcitcit fiinbigt, abcv voicber aufjlcbr, it)ic ©atomen fagt 
®prnd)n>» 24* 2(6cr ba(^ la^cn roir jclst fa()rcn unb bkibcn 
auf bcr 93al)n, bac? J^aKcit l}icr l}cif^e fo ^icf, aU ob cr ciit:^ 
nta( imtcrlicgc nnb bic ©ottlcfcn cblicgcn, ali 2^at)ib, ba 
er t)on (3an( nnb 2(6fa(om gcjagt mirb, nnb GbrilTn^, ba cr 
gcfrcnjiqt wavi. Scnn fotd)c^ gaUcn voaljxt nid)t {ange ; 
©ott IdfU ibn nid]t ficgcn. nnb tvcggcroorfcn fct)n, fonbcrn 
ergrcift fcine ^anb, xid)tct il)n n^icbcr anf, baf5 er bcflctjcn^ 
ninf5. 

Samit trojlct bcr ©cijl nub anhrortct ben l)cim(icf)en4 
©cbanfcn, bic Scmanb babcn mod)tc nnb bci il)m fclbft fa^ 
gen : 3^/ id) b^bc bcnned)''^ ctn)a gcfcbcn, baj} bcr @crcd)te 

' Unser Wesen, ourselves and every thing belonging to 1/5, 
(conduct). Trosten — (and) nicht ansehen, "one must 
be encouraged — and not regard the obsticlcs and rejection," etc, 

2 D a 8 Fallen, etc. *' Falling might mean that, etc." — " But 
we let that pass, and go upon the ground" — " as if he may once (one 
day) be overcome, and the wicked conquer." See p. 38, Note 4. 

^ Bestehen, to stand firm and unmoved. 

* Jl e i m 1 i c h e n. This word, derived from li e i m, homCy was 
once used as h e i m i s h now is, to indicate rohat taas at home or 
what pertained to home. But its common meaning is secret, or con- 
cealed designedly, wliereas g e h e i m means prirate, i. e. not pub- 
lic, in which the idea of sccresy is not intended. E i n ge h i e me r 
Rath is a privy counseller, who may be known to the public; but 
e i n h e i m 1 i c h e r Rath, would mean, a concealed counsellor. 
Science has its mysteries, G e h e i m n i p s e -, but jugglers have 
tlieir secrets, Hcimlichkeiten. 

* I) e n n o c h, from d e n n (in the old sense of d a n n, then) 
and n o c h, stilly means, still then, even then^ stilly and generally fol- 



EXPOSITION OF PSALM THIRTY-SEVEN. 67 

hat muiTcu^ uuterlicgcn, imb i]t feinc (Bad)c gar in bie ^b^ 
^d)cn gcfatfen i>or ben ®ott(ofen ? 3^^/ fprirf}t er, liehe& 
iliub, (ap bao aurf) fc^n, er fatte ; aber er mirb bennocf) 
nid)t fo liegen bkibcn unb t)ertt)orfen fei)n : er mu^ iDieber 
aiif,2 ob\d)cn aik S[Qc(r baran t)crjmeife(t babe. I^enn ©ctt 
ern)ifrf)t3 ibu 6ei ber J'^inb unb l)ebt it)n tt)ieber auf. 

3cf) bin ju ngc gett>efen unb alt gen)orben, 
uttb babe necf) nie gefeben ben@erecf)ten 
Dertaffen ober feinen ©amen nad^ SSrobe 
geben^ 

Siebe, ba fcfet er jn tneljrerer^ (2td)ernng feme eigene 

lows some concession and introduces something apparently, but not 
really opposed to what preceded. D o c h, is a stronger adversative, 
and introduces an unexpected modification of a previous concession^ 
\. e. where a thing would naturally be inferred, from the concessive 
statement, doch intimates that ihe fact is at vaiiance with the 
inference. Ich habe dennochetwa gesehen, " (though 
all this may possibly be true) still (d e n n o c h, apparently irrecon- 
cilable with that) I have seen," etc. And a little below, "be it so, 
(that) he fall; but still (den.noch)he will not continue," etc. 
Doch would be much stronger here, and would imply that the two 
things were not so easily reconcilable. Wie steht es um Di- 
d i e r ? — d och er schliift wohl lange schon, " how is it 
with Didier ? — (withdrawing that supposition or concession, the 
writer says) but he is probably long since dead." 

* Hat mdssen, for hat gemusst, which would be harsh. 
^Er muss wieder auf(stehen). 

^ E r w i s c h t. W i s c h e n, signifies, to move or slip away 
hastily. E n t w i s c h e n, to escape quickly. Erwischen, now 
but little used except in common life, means to seize quickly, and is 
Bynonymous with ertappen, to catch one or to fall upon him (a 
thief) as if by accident ; e r h a s c h e n, to catch one loho is running 
away, or escaping ; e r g r e i f e n, to seize, or to get a secure hold of 
one ; and f a n g e n, means simply to catch. 

* M e h r e r e r. M e h r, more, is commonly used adverbially 
without the form either of comparison or declension. In the compa- 
rative /ori/i as an adjective it is either mehrer, mehre, mehres, 
or mehrerer, mehrer e, mehreres. Here it is in the lat- 



88 SELECTIONS FROM LUTHER. 

(Jvfahnntiv Unb iff and) \vah\\ tic ta(i(ic()C Cnfabnutc) 
flicbt CO, nub m\\\]cn bcfcuiicii allc Wonfd)cn, ta\) ci^ alfo 
fep» 5l>ut alHT 'jicmaub iKvlajTcu, baf? cr ba(J ^i^rob fud)cn 
wuf?, fo ijlt ci^ jinvip, baO cc^ ihm am t^Uaubcn gcl>rod)cui 
l)at ; banim cr and) rcd)t iiiib billui i>crla)Tcn i|l. 

3U>cr bicf; iM'ob fiid)cir- obcr luid) a5vob (\cl)c\\ muf? matt 
fo iH^ntcbcn, ba)l cr nid)t >;uniicr fcibc obcr jount^cn^ ftcrbc,^ 
eb cr u>ol)l arm ift unb wcwu] jiii>or bcit. (Sr unrb c^croif?^ 
lid) crnahrct, ob cr (]Icid) in'd)tc^ Uctn*ii]cc^ hat tnii aiif bcu 
aubcru Xa(\ ; cjicbt il)m (Sincr nid)t, fo (^icbt i()m bcr 2ln# 
bcrc, ci^ muO fcinc ?iabrun.q (icunf;Iid) fommcn. 5BictDol)I 
bic fiinbijicn, bic il)m nid)t jicbcn unb bclfcu. 

^ciui bcr armc Jajarm^, ?iica 16, ol> ihm bcr rcid)C 
9);ann nid)tiS c\al\ \]i cr bcunod) cVnahrt nnn-bcit, ohvohf ccJ 
mit iflrmnth jiiflicmv** ?lrmutl) nimmt &ctt nid)t von fci^ 
ncn x>cilij)cn ; ahcr cr taf?t jTc nid}t nntcr^cbcn nod) Dcr^ 
bcrbcn^ 



ter form, dative feminine. Used substantively, it signifies more than 
onf, i. e. iteverat and loses its comparative force. See p. 18 Note 1. 

* Gebroclien. Es gebricht with a dative is nearly eqiii- 
vnlent to e s m a n g e 1 1, there is trantivsr to /tim, he fails in. 

"Diess Brod sue hen. Observe the substantive use of 
B r o d 8 u c h e n and n a c h Brod g e h e n. 

' Hungers s t e r b e. Several neuter verbs are accompanied 
by a genitive expressing tlie viunncr of the action ; as g e h e n sei- 
ner W e g e, to ffo (how :) his oirn irays ; 1 e b e n d e r H o f f- 
n u n g, to live in the hope, to entertain tlie hope ; 1 e b e n d e s 
G 1 a u b e n s, to beJUUd with, or to hare the Lclirf; eines natOr- 
lichen T o d e 8 b t e r b e n, to die a natural death ; v e r b 1 e i- 
chen eines TodeB, to turn pale tcith death, i. o, to d'lO. So 
Hungers e t e r b e n, to die of hunger. 

* Z u g i e n g. Z u g e h e n, is used imivrsonally in the sense of, 
to take place, to happen, with some adverbial phrase, expressing the 
manner. ** Altliough it was with poverty." Untergehen noch 
vcrderbcn, perish nor (even) be ruined. V e r d e r b e n, to 
rcudcr unfit for use (either by being maried or destroyed). 



EXPOSITION OF rSALM THIRTY-SEVEN. 69 

Zac^lid) ift cv 6 a r m I) c r ^ i .q int b ( c i [) e t, u n b 
fciu Saa mc xvixb flcfcjjuct fei)iu 

Va^ ijl \>on bent babcnbcn' GJcrccl)tcn (jefagt, eb er alfo 
fct)/^ bag cr .Stinicv babe ; fo bcrfctbc frf)on au^tl)ci(t, (]ic6t 
imb [cil)ct tac\lid), bcnneci] n)ivb cr unb fcin ^inb (\cm\c] ba^ 
ben. I^cnu bic a5cnebciiin3 ill, baf? fie iDerbcn .qenn.q ba^ 
bcii ()ier unb bort/^ .qar feinen yjlan(\Ql fcibcn an ?eibeg 
9tabrun.q unb bcr Scelen S^cil, ob c^ \iool)l jutt)ci{cn nid)t 
libriq ill. 

2t(fo haben tDir/ n)ic &ott bie ©(aubigen ()anbc(t in jcit^ 
Iid)er -Jtabrnnq unb ibren Sad)cn, bag mv ja [i(i)cv fepen 
in beiben Stiicfen, er tr>erbe un^ nicf)t t)er(ajTen unb n^erben 
baju qenuq b^^ben an ber 9tabrun.q. Unb alfo qebt ee! and) 
(\cxvi^lid), fo wiv qtanben unb un^ ber 0ctt(ofen &li\d nid)t 
i^erbriegen nod) beroeqcn faffcn. I^arum roieberbolt unb 
fcf)Iiept er aberma( unb fprid)t : 

?ag bom S36fen unb t(}ue ©ute^, unb bicibc 
i m m e r b a r.^ 

2((^ fottte er faqen : ?ag &ott forgen, tf)ue uur bu, \t>ai 
fint \\t, unb fag bid) nid)t bemegen, S36fe^ ju tbun, bleibc 
uur immerbar, n>ie bu bifl, unb (ag ge()en, n)a^ ba ge[)et* 
512 ie and) St. ^etru^ fagt : ,/iBerfet auf it)n alic cure 

* Jlabenden, possessing property. W o h 1 Ji a b e n d is gen- 
erally used in such cases. 

2 Ob or also s e y, "though he be such," that, i. e. though 
one who has children. " Though he distributes, gives and lends 
daily, still," etc. 

3 H i e r u n d d o r t, "in this world and in the other," to which 
tlie words, Leibes Nahrung and der Seelen 11 e i 1, 
refer. " Although at times nothing will be on hand," (0 b r i g) 

*Also haben wir — dass wir ja sicher seyen. 
"Thus, as God treats the righteous, etc., we have security (we have 
that we are secure)." U n d [wir] w e r d e n. 

^ Immcrdar, obsolete and poetic for i m m e r. 



70 SELECTIONS FROM LUTHER. 

©orge. Scnit er tragt ©orge iibcx un^/'^ Unb ^>fa(m 55 : 
ff'^iQivf atte bcin Sluliegeu^ auf ®ctt, unb er n^irb bid) vooi)i 
tefcf)irfen^ eber beforgeu unb nid)t lajTen e^))iglid)4 bett)egen* 

2)cnn ber S>cvx hat ba^ 9ied)t fieb, unb 
tjerfci^t feine 5^eifigen n id) t, cn)igficf)n?er^ 
ben jTe 6en)a()ret: aber ber ©otttefen ©a^ 
men n)irb au^^gerottet 

2)arf(l nid)t forgen/ ba^ bein D?ed)t untergebe, e^ i(l 
nid)t moglid). 2^enn ©ott t)at ba^ 9?ed)t licb, barum mu^ 
er e^ crt)alten, unb bie @ercd)ten trcrbcn n<d)t t)cr(aflen* 
Ifficnn er ein Slbgott^ n>dre, ber llnred)t lieb batte ober bent 
5Hed)ten fcinb wave, roic bie gotttofen 5)?enfd)en, fo battejl 
bu Urfad)e ju forgen nub bid) ju fi'trd)ten» Slber nun"'' bu 
tt)eip|l, bag er ba^ $)ted)t fieb l)at, wa^ forgefl bu ? 5Ba^ 
fiird)te|l bu ? 2Ba^ jn)eife()l bu ? ©tDiglid), nid)t altein 
jeit(id), tt)erben feine ^eifigen erl)a(ten unb bie ®ett(ofen 
mit ^inb unb all bem 3f)vcn« au^gercttet 

* Er tragt Sorge Uber uns. " He takes care of us." Far 
commonly follows Sorge, care for; Sorge uber, care respecting 
or of, is a little more general, but means nearly the same thing. 

2 An lie gen, signifies, what lies upon the heart, anxiety, care, 
wish. The verb a n 1 i e g e n means, to lie hard upon anything, to lie 
close upon the heart, to he solicitous. Angelegen, the participle, 
careful, anxious. Angelegentlich, earnestly, zealously. 

^ Beschicken signifies 1. to send to, 2. to arrange, 3. to take 
care of. It is here used in the last sense, of course. 

* Ewiglich, belongs to n i c h t, never. Connected with be- 
wegen, it would give a ludicrous sense. 

^ (D u) darfst nicht sorgen. The ellipsis makes the ex- 
pression more pointed. 

* Abgott, a false god, viewed as a living being. Gotze, an 
image to be icorshippcd. Gotzenbild, a likeness of an Abgott 
or of a Gotze, but not an object of worship, as they are. Hence, 
figuratively an idolized person is called an Abgott; an idolized 
thing, a Gotze. 

'Nun, now since, now that. 

^Dcm Ihrcn. Das Ihre is used as das 1 h r i g e is, 



EXPOSITION OF PSALM THIRTY-SEVEN. 71 

2^te SyiliQcn allhicv^ ()eigen nidjt bie tm ^tmmef ftnb, 
t)cn tt)efrf)en bie (gd)rift felten rebet, fonbern gemeintgfirf)^ 
Don beneit, bie aiif Arbeit (eben, bie ba gfaiiben in Oott, 
nnb bnrd) benfe(6en ©fanben ®otte^ ®nabe nnb ©eijl \)a^ 
ben, baiuMi^ ]ie l)ei(ig genannt n)erben, n)ie tt>ir Jttte ftnb, fo 
n)ir gfanben n)a^rl)aftig. 

2)ie ©eredE)ten erben ba^ ?an b, nnb bfei^j 
ben ewi^iid) brinnen.'* 

X^a-S i% wic broben gefagt ifl, jTe baben genng anf (Srben, 
biirfen e^ nirgenb^ benn^ bei ®ott getrarten, n)0 fte n)ol)nen 

and signifies, what belongs to them, their property. Die Ihrigen 
means their relatives or friends. On a 1 1 undeclined, see p. 56, 
Note 2. 

^ A 1 1 h i e r. In general, a 1 1 prefixed to a word makes no other 
alteration in the signification than to give intensity to the word, and 
even that fiDrce is frequently no longer perceptible. 

^Gemeiniglich is generally employed in the sense of g e- 
w o h n 1 i c Ii, commonly, usually, though of much less frequent oc- 
currence than the latter. Gemeinhin is a more vulgar word of 
the same import. Gemeiniglich is som.etimes used nearly as 
i n s g e m e i n is, meaning in general, or collectively as opposed to 
in particular. There is an apparent absurdity in the use of the word 
in the case before us, as if the writer would say, " the word (d i e 
H e i 1 i g e n) commonly means in this passage (a 1 1 h i e r)." But 
the sentence takes a new turn after the words, von welchen die 
S c h r i f t, and gemeiniglich, instead of referring to the main 
clause (allhier heissen nicht) refers to the word s e 1 1 e n 
in the relative clause. Thus : " The saints in this passage does not 
mean those which are in heaven, of whom the Scriptures seldom 
speak ; but they commonly speak (and so here) of those, etc." 

^ D a V o n stands for von d i e s e m, from this, ichence. It be- 
ing aticays a neuter singular, it refers to several preceding words 
collectively, and these are all thrown together and viewed as one 
thing, or circumstance. D a v o n is therefore limited in its use to 
Buch cases. 

* Drinnen, droben. See p. 42, Note 1 . 

* Nirgends denn, nowhere except. N i r g e n d s refers in- 
definitely either to time or to place, nowhere, never. 



72 SELECTIONS FROM LUTHER. 

in ber SCelt. 2:^cnn ©ctt [cif^t ffe md)t : Icigt cr ffe aber^ 
fo jTnb fie gcn:)i^(id) inigerccbt unb gottto^, ebne ©laiibcn 
iinb Zvaimx in ®ott Unb alfo ifl ba^ 6efd){offen, ba^ nnr 
nur gut tlnin unb tkibcn auf ber ^abn unb im ?anbe, faf:^ 
fen ibn fergen nnb niadiciu 3^un fctgt, n)a<5 bie (£ad)e2 
fei) bc^ ©crecbteu, bareb foId)Ci^ SGcfen [id) crl)ebt jtr^ifc^en 
if)m unb ben ©ottfofen. 

2)er 3D? nnb beg ©erecf)ten ge[)et mit SDBei^^ 
hett nm, nnb fetne S^nge rebet Dom (3cf 
xidjt.^ 

2)arnber erbebt jTcf) ber ^aber, bie ©ottfefcn xvoVicn He 
g6ttlirf)e 2Bcig[)eit nnb 5)ted)t nicbt l)eren, t)erfo(gen Derbam^ 
men nnb fd)lern eg fiir X\)ov\)eit nnb Unred)t, nnb gebt ben^ 
felben^ (£d)a(fen eine 22ei[e VDcbf barob^ S^ag tJerbrief t 

^ Lasst er sie aber, conditional, " Forsakes he them," i.e. 
if he forsakes them. 

*Was die Sac he, etc. " Now follows, what the part (duty) 
of the righteous is, respecting which (da rob) such a difference (or 
difficulty) arises (such a thing or affair raises itself) between him and 
the wicked." The word W e se n oflen means difficulty^ disturbance. 
Viel Wesens machen, to make much trouble. Ein grosses 
Wesen in der Welt machen, io jnake a great stir in the icorld. 
It frequently gives a mere collective sense, meaning ichatevcr pertains 
to a thingy lis nature, character, arrangement, and the like. Das 
gemeine Wesen, the Commonweal tli. Das S t a a t s-w e- 
8 e n, the state. Das K i r c h e n-w e s e n, the church, or the ec- 
clesiastical government. Das S t a d t-vv e s e n, the city govern- 
ment. Das M a u s-w e s e n, household matters. Das Kriegs- 
wesen, military affairs, tlie war department. Das S c h u 1-w e- 
se n, the public schools, the department of education. 

^ G e r i c h t, tliough commonly meaning judgment, court of jus- 
tice, and theologically, divine punishment, appeals to be used iiere as 
the F.nglish word judgment oflen is in the Bible, to signify, equity, 
righteousness. The word R e c h t is substituted for it below. 

* Und geht denselben, etc., " and for a while it goes well 
with these wrong-doers, in the matter." 



EXPOSITION OF PSALM THIRTY-SEVEN. 73 

benit unb 6en)egt ttaturfid)i bie ©erecf)tett, unb n>erben ba^ 
buret) gerefjt jum SSofett unb SOBieberDergelteu ober Uugc^ 
bulb. 

Datum fe^rt jTe btefer ^fatm (liffe balten unb tmmer 
fortfal)reu, immer febren, birf)ten unb reben^ fctcfjc 2Set^[)eit 
unb ^ed)t^ &ott bte ©adf^e befelilcu, 3^tte taflen bet^eu^^ 
miitben, ^alm fnirfrf)ett, Idjlern, fcf)fageu, (2rf)tt)ert bfogeu,^ 
S5ogeu fpauuen, jTcfj t)dufeu unb ftdrfeu 2Cv ^t)te gefagt ifl. 
S)eun ©ott mirb e^ n)ot)[ Tuarf)ett, fo VDir fetu uur gewarten^ 
uub immer auf ber S3abn b(eibeu, unb um if)retn)ttten ni(i)t 
auft)oreu ober uad)(afleu, ®nte^ ju tijxm. d^ mu^ bocfy 
jute^t baiS Urtbeil biefe^ aSerfe^ hUiben unb funb n^erben 
tt)te ber belle 9[Rittag, bagl ber @ererf)te l)abe rec{)t unb ti:)et^^ 
lid) gerebet, bie ©ottlofeu jTub ?tarren unb Unred)t gen)efeu. 

25ag ®efe§ feine^ ®otte^ ift in feinem 
^erjen, feine S^ritte gleiten nid)t. 

Sarum rebet er recbt nni birf)tet 3Bei^beit, ba^ @otte^ 
©efefe nid)t in bem a3ud)e, nicf)t in ben Dbren, nid)t auf 
ber Bi'i^g^/ fcnbern in feinem ^erjeu i% ©ctte^ ©efe^e 
mag 9tiemanb recf)t i:)erpef)en, eg [ep it)m benn im §er^ 
jen/ baf er eg lieb ^abe uub (ebe barnad), n)efdE)eg 
tt)ut ber ©(aube an ©ott. ©arum ob bie ©otttofen n)o^f 
met SBorte marf)en t)on ©ott unb feinem ©efe^e, xnij^ 
men fid) ber ©d)rift ?e()rer unb (5rfat)rne/ fo reben fte bod) 
uimmer red)t nod) tDeigfid). Senn fie l)abeu eg uid)t im 

1 N a t a r 1 i c h, of course, according to the general course of 
things. So this word should generally be translated. 

^Dichten und reden, think and speak. See p. 4, Note 1. 

3 Blossen, to make naked or Aare, and applied to a sword, fo 
draw it from its scabbard. 

*Sein nur gewarten. Seinan old genitive and govern- 
ed by g e w a r t e n. See p. 46, Note 4. 

^Es sey ihm denn inHerzen, unless it is in his hearts 

^ Erfahrne for Erfahrene, experienced^ skilled, and as a 
substantive, adepts, — " teachers of, and adepts in the Scriptures." 

7 



74 SELECTIONS FROM LUTHER. 

5perjen ; barum Derflehen jTe fein m'cf)t/ ed betriigt jTe ber 
©d)ein, bag jTe bie SGBorte ber Srf)rift fitt)ren, «nb barob 
tt)Utt)en unb t)erfofgen bie @ered)ten* 

"^tem, be^ @erecf)ten ^tritte fd)Iupfern2 nicf)t, fonbern ge^ 
^en gen?ig frei einber im guten @en>ijTen,3 barum bag er 
ber @acf)e gemig ifi, iinb mag ntd)t i)erful)rt merben buret) 
5D?eufd)eugefe^ uub a5ei(el)ren»4 5l6er bie ©ottfofeu fatten 
unb fcf)fiipferu attejeit l)iu uub ber, f)abeu feiuen gen^ijjen 
^ritt, barum bag ffe ©otteg @efe^ auger bem ©fauben^ 
ttirf)t red)t t)er(lel)eti. Uub alfo fabreu jTe ijin uub f)er, n^ie 
jTe it)r Siiufel^ fiibrt ober ?!}?eufcf)eugefe§ (ebrt, je^t bieg, 
je^t jeue^ SBerf, je^t (e[)rt man ffe fouflt, jei^t fo/ uub 
fd)liipferu f)iu, mo mau jTe biuful)rt mit ber ?tafe, ein 83Iiu^ 
ber hen Sluberu. I^arum n)ie jTe uid)t recf)t t)erflet)eu, fo 

* Verstehen sie sein nicht. Verstehen does not 
commonly take a genitive after it (se i n for seiner), and scarcely 
ever except when it is a reflective verb. " They do not understand 
it (the law). The show (of knowledge, from the circumstance) that 
they quote the words of Scripture, deceives them, and on that ac- 
count they rage and persecute the just." 

' SchlUpfern, now properly means to be slippery. In the 
sense of s c h 1 Q p f e n, to sLide, it is at present not used. 

^ Gewissen, conscience, is here used in its original and etymo- 
logical sense, of consciousness, or certain knoicledge. This whole 
passage illustrates well the way in wiiich the word Gewissen 
(certain knowledge) came to signify conscience. 

* Beilehren, collateral teaching, what is taught aside from the 
Scriptures. 

*Ausser dem Glauben, not in faith, i. e. in faith, or a 
state of faith, men can understand the law of God ; out of that state 
of faith^ they cannot understand tlie law. 

* D (J n k e 1, from d li n k e n, notion, whim, different from D u n- 
k e 1, darkness, obscurity. 

''Jetzt lehrt man sie sonst, jetztso, etc. " One 
teaches them (they are taught) now otherwise, now so (now this way, 
now that), and they slide away wliorever one leads them by the nose, 
a blind man (leading) the other (blind men). 



EXPOSITION OF PSALM THIRTY-SEVEN. 75 

n>anl)e(tt jTe and) nicf)t red)t ; nod)^ n)utf)en fie urn fo(rf)e 
it)re fcf)(upfnge ?e{)re uitb ?efcen, miber bte gett)ijTe ?e[)re 
mtb ?c6en ber ®crecf)ten, n)offen je it)r £)ittg attein bepa^ 
ttgen. 

Scr ®ott(ofe f[e()t anfben @erccf)ten unb 
gebenft ibn ju tobten. 

(5^ Derbrte^t thn imb fann e^ tttdft feiben, ba^ man feme 
?ebre unb ?ebcn ftraft, ai^ ein unrect)te^ unb nnvoei^iid)e^^ 
aOefen. Sarum benft er nid)t ntebr, benn n)ie2 er feine 
(Zad)e befefttcje* 9tun fann er^ tJor bent @erecf)ten ntd)t, 
tDe(cf)er fetn Unred)t nicf)t nngejlraft Ici^t ; barnnt treibt it)n 
fein falfcf)eg SBefen bat)in, ba^ er be^ @erecf)ten fo^ VDerbe, 
tl)n nmbringc,, bamit fein SBefen recf)t nnb ungeftraft 6(et6e* 
SBie ber ^abjt nnb bie ©einen aUe^cit unb nocf) tl)un/ n)te 
voir n)o()I fel)en, ba^ ffe ©otte^ ©efege and) fd)ier ntc^t in 
ben S3ucf)ern l)ab^n, gefcf)n)eige benn im §erjen : nocf) xooU 
len fie bie fei)n, bie ta SEBei^bett btcf)ten unb recf)t (e^ren, 
n?utl)en unb rafen bariiber, trie bie totlen ^unbe ol)ne Stufj^ 
boren. 

Stber ber §err la^t ihn nid)t infeinen 

^ N o c h does not refer to n i c h t, (not^ nor) ; but begins a dis- 
tinct clause and, of course, means, stiU. 

2 Unweisliches, unicise ; an unusual word. W e i s 1 i c h, 
wisely^ is common. 

•^Nicht mehr denn wie, "of nothing but how he may es- 
tablish his cause" (no more than how). 

^Nun kann er, etc. " Now he cannot (establish his cause) 
in the presence of the righteous, who does not suffer his iniquity to 
go unrebuked. Therefore his false (and corrupt) character impels 
him to rid himself of the righteous man, etc." 

* (G ethan haben) und noch thun. "As the pope and 
his adherents have always done, and still do ) as we see, (that) they 
have not the law of God even in their books, not to say in their 
hearts ; neither do they desire to be those who meditate and rightly 
teach wisdom ) they rage and rave about it, etc." 



76 SELECTIONS FROM LUTHER. 

j^dnben, unb t)erbammt ii^n nidE)t, njenit er 
)otvnvt\)cilt with. 

®ott Idgt^ bcu @ercc{)ten iDo^f in if)re S^ani fommen ; er 
Idgt if)u aber nid)t brimten : fie mo.qen it)n nicf)t bdmpfen, 
tDenn jTe il)n g(eicf) tobten. 2)ajii t)ilft t{)r Urtbeif iiict)t, 06 
fie gfeid) riibmen, ffe tbim e^ an ®otte^ &att unb in ®cU 
teg Dtamen ; benn ®ott ricbtet bag ©egenurtljeiL^ Sag 
feben n>ir and} jn nnfern B^^ten. 

Ser ^abft^ xnit ben ©einen b^f^^n Sobanneg S)n^ "oex^ 
bammt ; nod) l)ilft fie fein 33erbammen, fein (2c{)reien, fein 
^(drren, fein 3Biitben, fein Xohcu, feine S3nlle, fein S5(ei, 
fein ®iege(, fein S8ann, er ift l)en)orgeb(ieben attejeit, ba 
fein 93ifrf)of, feine Uniuerfitdt, fein ^onig, fein giirjl etn)ag 
batDiber t)ermod)t, n)efd)eg nod) nie t)on einem ^e^er gebort 
ijl:. £)er einjige tobte 9!Kann, ber nnfd)nlbige 2l6e(, mad)et 
ben (ebenbigen ^ain, ben ^abft, mit attem feinem Slnbang 
ju ^etsern, Slbtriinnigen, 9)?orbern, ©ottegfdfterern, foUten 
ffe ffd) barob jerreigen nnb berilen. 

^arre anf ben ^^errn nnb bema^re fei^ 
nen 2Beg, fo wirb er bid) erbol)en, ia^ bu 

* Gott lasst, etc. " God does indeed suffer the righteous to 
come into their hands^ but he does not leave (1 a s s t) him there. 
They cannot extinguish him even though they kill him." 

^ Gegenurtheil, an opposite decision, a reversal of the de- 
cision. 

^Der Pabst, etc. " The pope and his party condemned John 
Ilusa ; but no condemning sentence, no outcry, no howling, no rag- 
ing, no blustering, no bull, no lead, no seal, no excommunication 
avails them anything; he still (always) exists (is extant), because no 
bishop, no university, no king, no prince could prevail (effect any- 
thing) against him — which was never known (heard of) in respect to 
a heretic. This simple man (tiiough) dead, this innocent Abel makes 
the living Cain, the pope and all his followers, heretics, apostates, 
murderers, blasphemers, though they lacerate themselves and burst 
over it." 



EXPOSITION OF PSALM THIRTY-SEVEN. 77 

ba^ ?anb er6e|l, VDenn bie ®ott(ofen au^gc^s 
rettet aurben, n)irft bit fel)en. 

Slbermal ermal)nt er, auf ®ott ju trauen unb ©itteg ju 
tf)ittt, banim bagi bie mtgebrodjene, ungetajTene, bfobe 9^atur 
jTcf) fcf)it)erltrf) ergtebt, unb auf @ott ewagt, baf jTe gen^arte 
2)ejifcn, ba^ jTe nirgenb^ jTeht nocf) empftnbet, unb iTcf) 2!e[^ 
feu du^ere, rva^ ffe ftcf)t[id) empftubet. 

9fiuu ift aucf) geuugfam gefagt, me bte SSefi^uug beg 
ianie€ ju t)er(lef)eu fet), uSmfirf) ia^ tin @ered)ter 6fei6t 
unb genug \)at auf @rben. ®aju n)0 er ju n^enig ()at jeit^ 
(icf), l)at er beflo mebr geijlt(icf) ; n>ie S^riftu^ (et)rt unb 
fprid)t : SBer einerfet^ tjerld^t, ber fott eg bunbertfdftig mc^ 
ber t)aben auf biefer 2CeIt unb baju bag en>ige ?e6en* 

5[G(emo()P t(i) nirf)t n?iberfecf)te, ba^ fofdf)eg (Jrbenbefigett 
morf)te t)eriltanben n^erben ntrf)t t)on einem jegticf)en ®erecf)j? 
ten tnfonberfjeit, fonbern t)on bem ^jaufen unb ber @e^ 
meine : o6n)ol)( t)ietteid)t @tttcf)e jett(ict) t^ertiCgt n^erben, 
Wei6t bennodf) ju(ei^t tl)r ©amen unb ?et)re o6en ;4 n)ie bte 
(5^ri|T:en in ber Sffiett gebfieben finb itnb bte ^eiben t^ergan^ 
gen, 06 tf)rer tvoU aStefe tfoxx ben §etben jettltcf) gemartert 
unb gettfgt n^orben, me ^falm 112. aucf) fagt : //©eltg tft 

^ Darum dass, etc. " Because (that) unsubdued, insubmis- 
sive weak nature reluctantly surrenders, and reflects upon God, that 
it may wait for that which it nowhere sees or feels, and abstain from 
that which it sensitively (visibly) feels," i. e, live in view of future 
spiritual blessings and disregard present evils. 

* E i n e r 1 e i generally means, one and the same. Here it is used 
in its original, etymological sense as the antithesis ofhundertfal- 
t i g, "He who forsakes one thing shall receive it back a hundred 
fold." 

3 W i e w o h 1 — o b w o h 1. — d e n n o c h ; although — although (re- 
peated in a slightly different form) is the protasis or first member of 
the sentence, and d e n n o c h corresponding to both, introduces the 
apodosis or second member. 

^Bleibt oben is the opposite of unterliegen or un- 
tergehen. See p. 38, Note 4. 



78 SELECTIONS FROM LUTHER. 

ber 9[Wattn, bcr (3ott fiircf)tet unb an feinen ©ebotcn Su(l 
!)at, fein ©amen n)irb regieren auf (Srben, unb ba^ ®e^ 
fcf)fed)t ber @cred)ten tt)irb t)ermet)rt merben" k. 

Dccf) n>ie gefagt, u6er ia^ Sltte^i f^^^ efn 3^stid)er and) 
fiir jTd) [e(b|l genug, unb &ott Qxcbt il)m and), wa^ er barf 
antb bittet : unb n)o er e^ nirf)t giebt, ba i(l gen)i^(icf) ber 
®ererf)te fo miCig, bag er e^ nid)t l)a6en tDilt bon @ott, unb 
iDebret ©ott,^ ba^ er e^ ibm ntd)t gebe ; fo gar @in^ ifl er 
mit ®ott, bag er t)at unb nicf)t l)at, voie er nur n)if( t)or 
@ott, n)ie ^falm 145. fagt : „®ott tbut ben SBitten berer, 
t)ie if)n furcf)ten, unb ert)6rt ibr SSitten, unb f)ifft ibnen/' 

2)ag er bi^t* fagt : Su n)irjlt e(^ feben, menu bie ©ottlofen 
au^gerottet merben, ifl nicf)t t)on einem fd)fec()ten ©efjen^ 
(jefagt, fonbern nad) bem ®ebraud)e ber ©cf)rift beigt e(J 
©eben nad) feinem 2Bitten cber ta^ er fangjl gerne gefeben 
l)dtte, n)ie tt>ir auf 2)eutfd) fagen : ba^ n^ottte id) gerne fe^? 
^en* 

3d) fet)e einen ©ottfofen mad) tig unb ein^ 
genjurjeft, wic einen griinenben Sorbeerj^ 
baunt. 

^ier fegt er bie anbre (Srfabrung ju^ einem (Jrempel unb 
3eid)cn t)om ©otttofen. 2)roben bat er eine (Srfa^rung 



* Ueber das Alles, beyond or nottcithstanding all that. 

2 Wehret Gott, hinders God^ so that he may not give it, i.e. 

prays him to withhold it. So perfectly is he one with God, that he 

has, or fails to have, whatever he will from (before) God. (God 

- gives or withholds whatever the worshipper in his presence, asks him 

to give or withhold). 

^Sch lech ten Sehen, simple, i. e. incre seeing, (See p. 39, 
Note 5), " but — seeing according to one's desire," that is, be gratifi- 
ed with what you desire. H e i s s t e s (it, the word Sehen means 
or is equivalent to) S e h e n nach seine m Willen. 

* Die andere Erfahrung zu, etc. " Here he presents the 
opposite (other) experience as (z u) an example," etc. Z u is used to 
point out that to which a thing is destined, or what it is to be. 



EXPOSITION OF PSALM THIRTY-SEVEN. 79 

gefagt 'oon bent ®erecf)ten, ba^ er nodf) ttie Yemeni t)er(af^ 
fen gefc{)ert l)abe. 

S>iex fagt cr eine (grfal)nmg t)om 9Bibert^ei(,2 t)on bem 
©ottfofert, n)ie ber tjergangen fei), unb fprtd)t: (5r n)ar 
retcf), mad)tig, gro^, ba^ ficf) Sebermann t)or Sbtn furcf)tete 
unb xr>a^ cv fagte, t^at (ief, bag n^ar gefagt, getbatt, ge(af^ 
fen.3 ®enn einen fofcf)en bebeutet ia^ l)ebrdifct)e SGBortfem 
„2lrtj/'4 1)^^ {)abe idt) jiti)or t)crbeutfd)t „tttdd)tig/' 2)ag 
bebeutet aucf), n)ag er baju tbut : „@r briijltete fid) unb 
tt)arb fiirbrad)tig, tf)at iTcf) bert)or, war etmag fenberttcf) t)or 
3(tten, macf)te fid) breit unb f)orf), g(etd)n)ie ein ?orbeerbaum 
t)or anbern 23aumen attejeit griinet unb etrva^ fonberlid) 
prangt t)or 2lffen, fonberlid) wx ben jat)men SSciumen unb 
(Sartenbdnmen, ifl and) nid)t cin fd)(ed)ter SSufd) ober nie^ 
briger 35anm, beg man and) marten unb pflegen mug, 
n>e(d)eg man ben n)i(ben S3dumen unb 3^bern ntd)t tf)ut" 
2((fo mug man anf btefen gotttofen Sunfer and) fe^en unb 
fpred)en : ©ndbtger §err, (ieber Sunfer* 

^ Nie Keinen. Such double negatives are not uncommon in 
the older German. 

2 Widertheil, opposite party. See p. 34, Note 5, Widerpart 
in a similar sense. 

2 " What he said, did (or) omitted, that was said, done (or) omit- 
ted." No one contradicted or opposed him. 

* Ariz, "which (Hebrew word) I have above (zuvor, i. e. in 
the text) translated, machtig." It also signifies how he acts, viz. 
" He tossed up his head, was impetuous, rushed onward, signalized 
himself before others, branched out and grew up as a laurel-tree, is 
always verdant more than (vor) other trees, and decks itself preem- 
inently above (vor) all, particularly above the cultivated trees, and 
trees of the garden," — is not a mere shrub or low tree, which one 
must attend and cultivate, — (a labor) which one does not perform for 
the wild trees and cedars. — Sich br Listen, means literally, to 
raise one's breast, and hence to make a show of energy, and is used 
now only in this figurative sense of making a boastful display. F a r- 
brachtig is a word entirely out of use, so far as we know, and 
probably means, breaking or pushing forward, far standing as it 
often does with Luther, for vor. 



80 SELECTIONS FROM LUTHER. 

2)a man t)orubergteng,i jTel)e ha wax ex 
ba^i It, id) fragte narf) it)m, batt)arberntrs? 
genb gefunben. 

(5o(d) @rempeP ijat 2)at)ib an bent (Sant,^ Slbitop^et, 
2(bfafon nnb berg[etd)en mobf gefef)en, n)elcf)e ntdd)ttg n)aren 
in tbrem gotttofen 2Befcn, nnb ebe man [id) nmfat), n^aren 
jTe babiit, bag man fragen nnb fagen mod)te : SK3o ftnb jTe 
l)in ? 3(i e^ nid)t voaijv ? 3n nnfern Betten tjl ber ^ab|t 
3n(in^ and) ein foId)er 5D?ann gett)efen, n)c(cf) eiit^ Slnj nnb 
grdnficf)cr S^cvx wax ia^ ? 3fl ex aber nid)t t)crfd)n)nnben, 
et)e man jTd)'^ t)erfa() ? SBo HI ex nnn ? 3Bo tjl fein 
J^rcljen nnb ^rad)ten ? 2tIfo foUen n)tr nnr jliCe l)a(tcn, 
jTe tDcrbcn Sltte alfo^ t)erfdE)n:)inben, bie jegt n)ntl)en, nnb 
tDottcn ben §immef jerjloren nnb ^^effen nntpef en. ^a^ct 
nng nnr ein n>enig^ frf)n)eigen nnb Doriiber get)en, n>ir n^er^? 
ben nn^ fcf)ier nmfet}en nnb il)rer jjeinen fef)en, fo tvir nnr 
®ott red)t tranen. 

^ Da man vorilbergieng, " as one passed by." A mistrans- 
lation; it should have been Er ging voraber, " he passed away ; 
behold he was gone (dab in)." 

2 Sole h Exempel. JNeuter substantives with Luther often 
take adjectives without the termination es (seiches). 

^An dem Saul. Where we use the English word, in, literally 
and strictly, implying the idea of within or interior, or keeping before 
the mind the image of locality within something, the Germans also 
use the word i n. But where we use the word to signify where a thing 
takes effect, or takes place, pointing out specimens, materials or exter- 
nal marks in ichich (but not within which) a thing is done or realized, 
the Germans employ an. See Gram. p. 359. 

* Welch ein. Welch and solch are used instead of wel- 
c he r and s o 1 c h e r, etc., when they take e i n immediately after 
them. See p. ] 8, Note 8. A r i z, see p. 79, Note 4. 

* Also — also. The first is a conjunction {therefore), the sec- 
ond an adverb {so). 

<* E i n w e n i g, a littU while. " Let us, for a little time, be si- 
lent and pass along." 



EXPOSITION OF PSALM THIRTT-SEVEN. 81 

g3ett)af)re bie ^rommtgfeit^ unb fcf)aue, 
vc^a^ aufricf)tig ifl* Senn juU^t mirb ber^ 
felbtge grteben {)aben. 

Da^ ijl: fo t)iel gefagt, aU ^anin^ Xit 2. ©et) nur recf)t^ 
fcf)affen im etnfaUtgen ©(auben ju ®ott, unb n)anb(e anf^ 
xid)tiQ unb reblirf), barauf jTe6e allein^ unb rtdE)te bid) bareitt, 
la^ ©otttofe ®ott(ofe fei)n, fief)e, fo n)irfl: bu julefet ^riebe 
l)a6en, unb n)irb bir n)o[)I ge^en. Ste l)ebrdifd)e ®prad)e ^at 
bie atrt, bag, mo wiv anf beutfcf) fagen : d^ ge^t ibm n)o^r, 
er gebabt jTct) tt)obf, c^ jle^t tt)o^( um ibn, unb auf ?ateinifcf) : 
Valere, bene habere, etc. ia& ^eipt ffe r^ ^riebe f)aben* 

2lt[o ®enef. 37. fpracf) Sctcob ju feinem ©obue Sofep^ : 
„®e^e bin in ©id)em ju beinen SSri'tbern, unb ftebe, ob 
iijixcn griebe unb bem aSie^e griebe fei), unb fage ntir me^ 
ber/' bag ijl : ob eg i^nen aucf) tt?of)f ge^e. ©a^er fommt 
ber ®rug4 im ©t^angetio, anf bebrdifcf)e 28eife : Pax vobis, 
^riebe fei) eucf), melcf)eg n>ir auf Seutfcf) fagen : @ott gebe 
eud) einen guten S^ag, guten 5!Korgen, guten Slbenb ! 3tem, 
im 3lbfrf)eiben fagen mv: (3ci)abt eucb tt>obf/ ^abt gute 
3lad)t^ ia^t eg end) n)obt ge^en ! E^ag f^eigt Pax vobis. 

^ Bewahre die Fromraigkeit, etc., " preserve piety and 
regard what is upright." An error in translation. It should be, 
" Observe the righteous man and behold the upright." 

2 Darauf siehe allein, etc., " regard only that and regu- 
late (exercise) yourself in it ; let the wicked be wicked," etc. 

^Dasheisstsie. " The Hebrew language hast his peculiar- 
ity, that where we say in German, es geht ihm wohl, etc. 
and in Latin valere, etc., that it (the Heb. language) calls, 'having 
peace.' " Notice the use of the colon before examples, quotations, etc. 

*Daher kommt der Gruss, etc. Hence the salutation 
in the Gospel comes after the Hebrew manner, pax vobis, peace be 
with you, which we express in German by, " God grant you a good 
day, good morning, good evening." Also we say in parting, " fare 
you well, (may you) have a good night," " let it be well with you," 
that is, pax vobis. 



82 SELECTIONS PROM LUTHER. 

2l(fo VDctttt fcer ©ottlofe bahin i(l, fo gebt e^ bent ®ercd)ten 
unb ©fdubigen n)ob(, unb ijl l)ernacf) eitet^ griebe* 

2)ic Uebertreter aber tt)erben t)ertilgt 
mit etna n be r, unb bie ©ottlofen merben 
^niei^t au^gerottet. 

2)a^ ijl ba^ 2Biberfptef : bie ®ered)ten bfeiben, unb ge{)t 
i^nen n)ot)f ; bie Slbtrimnigen ge^en unter, unb gebet il)nen 
iibef l)crnad) unb julei^t. 

@^ m6d)ten biefe jn)ei SSerfe and) n)o{)f Derflfanben n)erben 
i)on beiber Zljeile^ nad)ge(ajyenen ?el)ren, @rben unb ®u^ 
tern, bag bie 5!)?einung fet) : 2)ie @ered)ten, tva^ jTe binter 
fid) faffen, ba^ beftebt unb gebt il)nen voo% me broben im 
26. 3Ser^ g^f<^gt ill, bag be^ @erecf)ten ^inb and) genug 
^aben merben ; aber SlKeg, n)a^ bie ©ottfofen binter fid) 
laffen, t)erfd)n)inbet unb fommt jufebenb^ unter, n)ie ^^fa(m 
109. fagt : ,^®cin ®ebad)tnig foU in einem ®fiebe be^ @e^ 
fd)[ed)t^ Dertifgt tDerben/' Da^ f[el)t man and) tag(id) in 
ber (grfal)rung. 

2)a^ ^eil ber ®ered)ten aber ift t)on bem 
^errn, ber ift i^re ©tdrfe^ in ber 3^it ber 
5«ott). 

2)ie Urfad)e ber t)origen4 jtt)ci SSerfe ifl : benn ba^ Syii 
ber ®ottlofen ift t)on i^nen fe(bfl, unb il)re ©tdrfe ijl ibre 

* Eitel, empty; mere, pure. In the latter sense, it is not de- 
clined, " pure peace," " nothing but peace." Soeitel Brod es- 
se n, " eat nothing but bread." It is now superseded in this sense 
bjlauter. See p. 10, Note 4. 

' Von boider T h e i 1 e, etc.," of the doctrines, inheritance 
and property of both parties, left behind" (at their deatli). 

'Der ist ihre Starke, Ae is their strength. D e r cannot 
be a relative here, for it would invert the clause and throw the verb 
(i B t) to the end. 

* Die Ursache der vorigen, etc. (this verse) is the ground 
of the two preceding verses ; for, etc. 



EXPOSITION OF PSALM THIRTT-SETEN. 83 

eigene ?!Kacf)t, fte ffnb gro^, Dtel/ retdf) unb ntad)ttg, burfett 
®otte^ gtdrfe unb i^eil nirf)t Slber bte @erecf)ten, bie il)r 
®e<Tcf)t miijien abfef)ren t)on Slttem, wa^ man jTef)t unb 
ful)lt unb attetn ®ott trauen, bie tjaien tein S)eil norf) 
©tdrfe, benn t)on ®ott, n)e(d)er jTe and) ni&jt (d^t, unb tf)ut, 
mc jTe tbm gtauben unb tvancn^ aU biefer fofgenbe (egte 
gSer^ befrf)(ie^t unb fagt : 

Unb ber §err iDtrb i^nen bcifteijen nnb 
mirb ffe erretten, unb wirb ffe t)on ben 
©otttofen erretten unb ibnen ^etfen; benn 
jTe trauen anf iijn. 

©iebe, jTef)e, meldhe eine retcf)e 3«f^9^/ grower Zvo^t unb 
iiberfliifiTge (Srma^nung tjl: ba^, fo wiv nur trauen unb 
gtauben. ^nm @rflen, ©ott l)tfft t[)nen, ndm(id) mitten in 
bem Uebef, Id^t jTe nidf)t aUein brinnen flerfen, ip bei if)nen, 
jldrft jTe unb entt)d(t jTe.^ Ueberbieg, nirf)t allein l)itft er 
i^nen, fonbern errettet^ jTe and)^ ba^ fie fommen.^ Senn 
biefe^ l)ebrdifcf)e 2B6rtIein^ ijei^t eigentticf) bem Ungfiirf ent:^ 
tonfen unb bat)on fommen. Unb ba^ eg bie ©ottfofen t)er^ 
briegen morf)te,6 fo britdt er fte mit 5Ramen an^ unb f:pricf)t : 
„@r n)irb fie erretten t)on ben ©ottfofen/' cb eg i^nen n)o^I 

' V i e 1, many. This adjective, being a predicate heje, cannot be 
declined, and of* course could not be put in the plural number. 

' E n t h a 1 1 s i e. In old German enthalten signified, to 
sustain, to profxct. See p. 54, Note 5. 

2 Errettet. Rettenis to rescue one from danger or evil by a 
quick action, by seizing one and snatching him away. Erretten 
is the same, except that er adds the idea of successful or complete 
deliverance. Erlosen, literally means to make one loose or free 
from something that holds him firmly, to free one by the exertion of 
power, or with effort ; to redeem. B e f re i e n, is Zo set one at liberty. 

4 Kommen, for wegkommen. 

* " For this Hebrew word (i. e. the Hebrew word translated by 
erretten) signifies, properly, etc." 

^ Und das es — mochte, " and in order that it might." 



84 SELECTIONS FROM LUTHER. 

Uxb fet), unb fott tf)r 3Biitf)eni fie nicf)t^ ^elfett, n^iemof)! jTe 
meinen, ber 0erect)te fotte tl)nen nid)t enttaufen, er miifle 
Dertifgt^ xvcxicn. 

Bum 2)ritten, ntrf)t altein errettet er jTe, fottbern er l)tfft 
i^neit aurf) fiirber tmmerbar,^ bag jTe binfort in feinem Un^ 
gti'tcfe bfeiben, e^ fomme, voenn e^ n)iE : unb ba^ 3(lte^ ba^^ 
rum/ bag jTe il)m t)ertrant b^ben. 2J(fo fprtd)t er and) ^f. 
91 : „Darum bag er mtr Dertraut, fo n>iU id) ibn erretten 
itnb befcf)irmen.5 2)enn er erfennt meinen Seamen, er bat 
micf) angerufen, barum VDitt ic^ i^n er{)oren» 3rf) n^itt bei 
i^m fet)n in feinem Uebe(, nub tt)ilt il)n b^^^u^reigen unb 
it)itt ibn ju @bt*en fefeen, unb ibn fiilfen mit gauge ber ZaQC 
unb ibm ojfenbaren mein §ei[/^ 

D ber fcbdnbetidben Untreue, 5!Kigtreue6 nub t)erbammten 
Ungtauben^, bag mx folcben reid)en, mddbtigen, tr6(tticf)en 
3ufagungen ©otte^ nirf)t glanben, unb jappeln fo gar [eic^t^ 

^ Soil ihr Wuthen. These words are not connected to the 
foregoing clause, o b es ihnen wohl leid sey; neither the posi- 
tion, nor tiie meaning of soil would admit that. Soil, when it rep- 
resents what is said or thought by another, as it does here, means, 
must according to what is said or thought. Hence it is often rendered 
is said to he. " And (according to these words) their rage will not 
help them." The clause is connected by und to the words quoted, 
and is a paraplirase or explanation of those words. 

2 Vertilgt. The word tilgen corresponds to the Latin word 
delere ; and vertilgen means to blot completely out, to destroy ut- 
terly. Vernichten, to annihilate^ is often used diifcrently, espe- 
cially in figurative language, as, es stehtjemand vernichtet 
da, one stands there annihilated., i. e. exposed in his nothingness, or 
made to feel his nothingness. 

' F Order, further, afterwards ; immerdar, the same as i m- 
mer. See p. 69, Note 5. 

* Und das Alios darum, " and all this because." 

* B e 8 c h i r m e n, to cover with a shield, to defend. S c h i r m, a 
defence, a shield, a screen. S o n n e n sc h i r ni, a /yarrt^o/. Regen- 
schirm, an umbrella. 

* Misstreuc, for Misstrauen, mistrust, distrust. 



ADDRESS TO THE GERMAN NOBILITY. 85 

iidj in geringen 5(u(l6^en, fo mv nxw bofe SBorte wn ien 
©ottfofen !)oren. S>ii\ ®ott, bag mv eiitmaf recf)tett 
@(au6en iiberfommen/ ben n>ir fe^en, ha^ er tn atter 
©chrift gefcrbert n?erbe, ^men. 



ADDRESS TO THE GERMAN NOBILITY.* 

©cf)rift an ben c^rtftfic^en 2lbet bentfc^er 

Station; SSon be^ cbrtftHc^en ©tanbe^ 

S3effernng* 



Introductory Notice hy Pfizer, 

[Unter biefem ^itel fcf)ne6 ?nt^er in ber 9[>?itte beg Sa^r^ 
1520 eine, bem cf)riflfidE)en 2lbel bentfcf)er 9Ja^ 
tion gen)ibmete ©cf)rift, in ntancf)er S3ejie^nng eine ber 
n)icf)tigpen nnb merfmiirbigflen, fofern er barin einen SSor^ 
fd^fag mad)t jnr nmfajjenben S^eforntation ber ^ircf)e, nnb 
nte^r a(g in anbern ©c()riften ein jnfammen^angenbeg, fe 
benbigeg S3i(b t^on ben SOJif brdndf)en in ber ^irc{)enDerfafi' 
fnng nnb Dlegternng entn)irft, VDci^renb bie Don i^m fonjl 
befampften ? e ^ r e n ^ier nte^r jnriirftveten, tt)ie eg ange^^ 
meflen n^ar in S3etracf)t beg ^nblifnmg, fitr it)efc{)eg er l)ier 

^ Ueberkommen in the sense of bekommen. "God grant 
that we may one day obtain true faith which we see (that it is) re- 
quired in all the Scriptures." 

* Of this eloquent production of Luther we can here present only 
a part, though the connection will be generally maiutained. In or- 
der that the general plan and peculiar character of it may be better 
comprehended, we prefix, by way of analysis, a very interesting no- 
tice of it by Gustav Pfizer, omitting most of his quotations. The arti- 
cle from the pen of this elegant scholar, is taken from his life of Lu- 
ther, written in 1836. 

8 



86 SELECTIONS FROM LUTHER. 

frf)ric6. 3(6er ?el)re unb ^irdf)en^@inricf)tun(j l)iengen fo 
eng nub unjcrtreniUicf) jufammen, bag mit glbjltelfung ber 
5i)?igbrditd[)e in Icl^tcrer, and) jcne gereinigt unb if)rer ^ef::^ 
fe(n eiittebigt merben mn^tc. 

©ct)on bie 3wfrf)^ift cin Jtifofau^ t)on 2lm^borf, feineit 
grcunb unb Settegen, ijl bejeicf)nenb unb aiigtel)enb. 
©ie beginnt mit ben 2Bortem : „2!ie 3^it ^^^ ^djxveU 
gen^ i(l t)ergangen, unb bie ^dt be^ 9?ebeu^ tjl: fom^ 
men ! 3rf) l)abe jufammengetragen etncl}e ©tiirfe, (f)rijl^ 
licfjen ©tanbe^ S3ej]ening bcfangenb, bem d^riftlirfien 3Jbe[ 
bentfd)er "Nation t)orjntegen, oh ©ott n^oKte bod) bnrd) ben 
?aien|lanb feiner Stivdjcn l}e(fen ; jTntemaf ber gcijl(id)e 
©tanb, bem e^ biKiger gebtibrt, \\l ganj unad)tfam n)orben* 
3d) bebenfe n)ot)(, bag mir'(^ nid)t n)irb unt^ern^iefen b(ci6en, 
aU t)ermej]e id) mid) ju ()od), bag id) t)erad)teter begetner 
5!JJenfd) fotd)e f)o()e unb groge ©tdnbe barf anrcben, in fo 
frejflid)en unb grogen ©ad)cn, af^ 'wave fonft 9tiemanb in 
ber SGBcft, benn Doftor ?utf)er, ber ftd) be^J d)rifKid)en 
©tanbe^ annebmen unb fo I)od) Derjldnbigcn ?euten dlath 
gebe* 3d) i^^^ meine (Sntfd)ntbigung anfteben, t)ern)eife 
mir'^, n?er ba will ; id) bin inelteid)t meinem ©ott unb ber 
aSeft nod) eine Xl)ox\^cit fd)u(big ; bie babe id) mix je(5t fiir^ 
genommen, fo mir'i^ gefingen mag, enblid) ju bejablen unb 
and) einmaf 5;^o|fnarr ju iDerben/' ©o n^ugte bie l)crr[id)e, 
reid)e 9tatur biefec^ 5i}Janne^ and) bie il)m ernl^cften 3(nge[e^ 
genl)eiten mit einer Ijeiteren ?aune ju beljanbein, aber felbjT: 
unter biefem ©d)erjen (eud)tet bie fromme 2^emutl) ben^or. 
X)enn fo l)eigt e^ treiter : ;,'^h\d) bien^eil id) nid)t atlein ein 
Tiaxv, fonbern and) cin gefd)a^orner X^oftor ber beiHgen 
©d)rift, bin id) fxoh, bag fid) mir bie ©efegenbeit giebt, 
meinem CSib eben in berfelben ^iarren^'iffieife genng ju tbun. 
3d) bitte, tr>oUet mid) entfd)nfbigen bei ben mdgig aSerfldn^ 
bigen, benn ber iiber bod)t 'iserftdnbigen ©nnfi: unb Cinabe 
tt)eig id) nid)t jn i^rbienen. — 0ott b^ffe un^, bag unr nid)t 
unfre, fonbern aUein feine (gl)re fud)en» 3(men» 



// 



ADDRESS TO THE GERMAN NOBILITY. 87 

3tt ntandbctt pKen hahen g^arrcn, vodd)e bte gitrjlen 
ehemaU an ibvcn Syfcn jur ^urjn)cif ju baltcn beliebten 
unb bie n^ol)f eft fcinem ber ^oflmge an SSerflanb n)irf)en, 
it)re ©ebicter mit fretmittbigeu aBabr^citen bebient, n)eld)e 
fein ^ofling au^jufprcc{)en <Tc{) getraiit bcitte ; bag tnod)te 
?utbcrn' 'oox\d)\vchen iei btefer S^fcbrtft, bag er ftcf) fefbil: 
mit einem ^^ofnarren 'ocvQiid). 2(bcr in ber (2cf)rift fefbjl 
l)at er feine (2acf)e nid)t mit t)erbecften Scf)erjen nnb be^s^ 
fnjltigenben ©paflen gefuf)rt, fcnbern mit einem @rn(l: nnb 
einer 2Qiirbe, mit eincr fct)onnngg(ofen 2infrirf)t{gfeit nnb 
mit einem nnt)erjl:el[ten ©efiibf, bergepalt, bag 2)entfd)fanb 
einen berebteren nnb ebferen SSertreter nnb Sofmetfcf)er 
feiner Dtotf) nnb @cf)madE), feiner SSebftrfniffe nnb 2Bitnfd)e 
nicf)t f)dtte ftnben mogen, aU biefen fitr feine ^erfon fo be^ 
miUbigen, aber im aSertranen anf ©ctt fo flarfen nnb ge^ 
trcjlen Wond). Slber Dor SIttem ermaf)net er, bie Qadje 
jticbt mit Sertranen anf eigne ?Ocarf)t, fonbern mit ©ott an^ 
jngreifen^ „2(ng bent ©rnnbe, forge icf), fet) eg t)or 3^^^^^ 
fommen, ba^ bie tbenren giirften, ^aifer ^riebricf) ber erfte 
nnb ber anbere, nnb Diet mef)r bentfcber .Kaifer fo jammer^? 
lid) finb Don ben ^^dbften mit giigen getreten nnb Derbrnrft, 
Dor n)efd)en ffd) bod) bie 2Bett fitrd)tete. ®ie baben fid) 
Dietteid)t Derfaffen anf ibre 9Kad)t, met)r benn anf @ott, 
barnm b^^ben fie miiffen fatten/^ — //2)rei gjJanern baben 
bie 9?omanijlten nm ftd) gejogen/' S)iefe brei papierenen 
SKanern reigt ?nt^er mit ftegreid)er Serebfamfeit, anf bag 
3engnip ber vgd)rift nnb ber @efd)icf)te ftd) ftii|enb, jnfam^ 
men* (5r jeigt, in ^ejiebnng anf bag erfle : me aKe 
Sbriflen gei|1t(id)en ©tanbeg nnb ^riefter fepen, nnb fein 
Unterfd)ieb jn)ifd)en @ei|l:(id)en nnb aQe[t(id)en fet), benn 
beg atmtg f)atber alkin ; barnm fommt bem ©eiftlidien 
fein befonberer 2Sorjng jn ; nid)t grogere ^eitigfeit, nid)t 
eigne Snrigbiftion, nid)t ©trafloftgfeit ber n)e(tKd)en Dbrig^ 
feit gegeniiber, nod) l)drtere S3ejlrafnng ic^ gegen @ei|lfid)e 



88 SELECTIONS FROM LUTHER. 

begait(]cnen Unrcrfjt^. &cn\o wivi bte jn^ette SBebauptiittg 
ffdrtidi) anbcrfegt, bie tern ^abjl bie 2(u^(egung ber l)^ 
®d)vift Dorbctjiifr, ba bcr ^abft md)t l)el)eren Stanb^ ijlt in 
gei(l(ic()en Singcn, benn jeber Sl)ri(l, luib er eben fo gut ix^ 
ten faitn, iDej5l)a(6 ein SonciHum iibev i()m fleben ntu^, ba^ 
gu bcrufeu nirf)t i()m, fonbent 3t^bem, ber ei^ t^ermag^ am 
fd)irf(id)|lcit bent ^ai\ev gebul)re. SD'tit frciftigen BH^^ 
geid)ncte ?iit()cr cinem ju ()aftcnbcn goncifium bie 5?aup^ 
gegenftdnbe feiner Xl)dtigfeit t)or, a(g ba ffnb : SnnfdjrditJ^ 
f uiig ber n)c(tHd)en, drgcr(id)en ^rad)t unb ^^^offart be^ 
^abjl^, ^erabfe(3ung ber ^arbtndle, bie eine ^tage fnr 
2)eiitfd)[anb, t^eit ihre Sotationen atte ^ird)engiiter in 
2)eittfd)fanb au^faugeit. (Srmdgiguttg be^ pd6fHid)en £^of^ 
l)alt^, a[6fd)ajf lutg ber urfpriutgnd) jum !i;iirfenfrieg erl)o6^ 
nen, nact)l)ev fd)dnb[id) t)ergeubeten unb i:)erfd)leuberteu Sfn^? 
ataten, be^ 5[Rig6raud)^, ba^ ber ^abjlt bie ^frihtben t)er^ 
gebe, mie ber ^aKiiimgelber, ber 93ifd)of^eibe n^oburd) ein 
i8ifd)of jTd) in ff(at)ifd)e Slbl)dngigfeit Don 9iom t)erfej^e. 
2)er er6(id)en ^friinben, ber ©imonie, ber nntt)iirbigen 
^UUflgriffe 'oon pectoralis reservatio, be^ proprius motus, 

ber Unio et incorporatio, beg ^friutbenl)anbelg unb 2Ser^ 
faufg ^on 2)ifpenfationen jeber 9(rt ; (foldjer ^anbel fet) 
fogar an Rugger in Slug^bnrg iibertragen,) fo nne nod) an^^ 
bere fd)dnbtid)e unb fd)dblid)e 5[)tif;brdud)e unb ^>raftifen, 
n)eld)e bie geilM'gen 9t6mer gegen bie t)on il)nen t)erad)teten, 
t)ofIen toUcn 2^eutfd)en amiiiben* 9iun aber rdt^ 
?utl)er, ali bem Unmefen niit fetgenben 3(norbnungen ein 
(5nbe ju fei^en : 

Sie 3(nnaten, bie niif;braud)t u^crben, foUen i>on a((en 
giirften,, 9(beligen, ©tdbten bem ^abft Deru>eigert iDerben, 
tocil bie u>e(tlid)e ©en)a(t fd)ufbig, bie llnfd)n(bigen ju 
fd)iil3en ; in alien jenen romifd^en ^Vaftifen, u>obnrd) ber 
^abjlt Vehen unb ^^fninben an fid) reijlt, ben 2'entfd}en ent^ 
jiel)t unb gremben, /,groben unge(el)rten (Sfehi unb S3uOen 



ADDRESS TO THE GERMAN NOBILITY. 89 

jii ^om/^ 5un)enbet, fott ber dE)rii^fict)e Stbet ftcf) {()m njtber^ 
fegcu ; e^ foHe t)er6oten merben @inbo(mig beg ^aUiitmg 
unb ber SSeftdtigung ber 93ifrf)ofe i)on 9?om, bamit ber ^abjl: 
jTcf) ntc()t eiue unbiffige ©eit^att i'tber biefel6en anma^e mtb 
in aUc ©act)en eingreife, i>a i^m bodf) nur gebu()re, fd^mier^ 
ge, llreitige ^citte jn)ifrf)en ^rimaten unb @rj6ifd)ofen ju 
frf)(icf)ten unb augjurict)ten ; t)erboten fotte n^erben, tDeWiclE)e 
®acf)en nact) 9?om -ju jieben unb bte „©cf)mberei" ber £)f? 
ftjiafen ; alfe ^riefter fotten ermadE)tigt fe^n, fitr alfe ©iitt^ 
ben bie SJbfohitiou ju ert()et(en; bte itnt)erfcf)amten ^n^ 
fpriicbe beg ^abftg auf ^utbigung t^on ©eiten beg ^dferg 
foUen, alg fretjel^aft, aufl)oren ; ebenfo ik meftlfcf)e 5;^err^ 
fd)aft beg ^vibflg, bte ju feinem geirtfirf)en 3(mt unb S3ernf 
nid)t ftimme ; bte 2BaUfabrten, bte ^ubeljabre, bte SSettef:^ 
ftofler, bte Xb^tfungen (gtneg unb befletben Drbeng abge^? 
ttfan, ^(o)ler unb ®tifte reformtrt, bte ©efitbbe fitr unt)er^ 
btnblirf) erf (art, ben ^riejltern ber f«i)rtftn)tbrtge unb Derber^^ 
bftd)e ^blibat erfaflen, bie "^atjvtaQe^ SSegangniflfe, ©eefmefj? 
fen meniglleng t^enninbert, bag ftnniofe Snterbift nicf)t me^r 
Derbangt, bte ©trafen beg geirt(icf)en 9?ecf)tg 10 dUcn tief 
in bie (grbe begraben n)erben ; man feUe aUcin bie ^eier 
beg ©onntagg unb iDeniger ^^jl-age be^aften, n)eif bie 'oic^ 
ten geiertage nur bem ?eib unb ber ®ee(e fd)aben, bie ^a^ 
jlen unb ©peifet)erbote aitfgebett, bie n)i(ben ^apetlen unb 
gelbfirdt)en, b. b* i^te ueiten Sffialtfabrtgorte jerjloren t)om 
^abfl nicf)t mebr Sifpenfaticnen unb 3nbutgenjen faufen, bie 
SSetteforben, bie auf Mo\ten ber flei^igen icnte fani itnb i'tp^ 
pig Ubtcn; einfcf)rdnfen ober aufbeben, bie gejlifteten S[Rep 
fen eingeben faffen, nirfjt geflatten, ba^ @iner mebr atg 
@ine ^fritnbe babe, bie pdbjlfirf)en dtnnticn tJerjagen, i>a 
man 'oon ibnen nicf)tg alg SSofeg (erne, ^an foEte et(icbe 
fromme unb tJerjtdnbige S3ifcb5fe unb ®e(ebrte, bci Mbc 
feinen ^arbina( ober ^etjermeijler nad) 33obmen fcbiden, 
itm iic @emeinfd)aft mieber b^t^supeUen ; ber ^abjl fcKe 
8* 



90 SELECTIONS FROM LUTHER. 

ffrf)/iim bcr ©ccfcn n>i((en, cine ^cit lang fciner Dberfeit 
augcrn iinb cinen STj(n[rf]of an^S ben 58ol)men fclbjl tt)dl)fett 
laffcn ; man fcKte jTe mi)t jn)ingen, bem ®cnu^ ic& <Ba^ 
cramcnti^ in bcibcrfci (3c{tait jit cntfagcn, n)ei( e^ widjt xxxtif 
djviiilid) nod) fci5crifcf)- 3(ud) bie Untocrfitdtcn bebiirfert 
ciner jltarfcn ^Reformation ; 3(rifloteIeg fottte man n\d)t 
ntet)r fo abc^ottifrf) n?ie bi^ev treiben, ba^ geiplid)c 9?ed)t 
Dom erjien 33n\1)(ltaben btc^ jnm (eMen 'oon ©rnnb an^ ^etJ* 
tilgen nnb ba»5 n?ett(td)e ^ecf)t, tai and) eine 5Qi(bni^ ge^ 
n)ovben, bocf) in 23ergleid) mit bem geijtlicf)en norf) gnt nnb 
reb(icf) fci;, n>eil eg jn n)eit(dnftig geti^orben, befrf)rdnfen, 
bag ©tnbinm bev I)eitigen (2rf)rift aber t)or 3(I(em treiben 
unb begen* Sie ^f6|T:er foKen i()rer nrfprnng(id]en Sejlims^ 
mnng beg llnterrid)tg nnb ber S'rjiebnng jnri'tcfgegeben nnb 
^flanjfd)nlen ber 3ud)t nnb ©itttid)feit n^erben. 2(nd) anf 
bag romifd)e jlaifertl)nm fomnit Anther jn fv>red]en* (Sine 
itnl)ei(uoUe &ahc fei) ben 2^entfd)en bamit jn 2:l)eif gemote 
ben ; „eg l)at nnn ber romifd^e ©tnbt 9{om eingenommen, 
ben bentfd)en itaifcr ^eranggetrieben nnb mit @iben i)cx^ 
^)flid)tet, nid)t immer jn 9{om jn tDobnen. ©oU 9iomi[d)er 
^aifcr fei)n nnb bennod) 9fom nid)t innen baben ; bajn a\U 
geit in'g ^pab|ltg nnb ber Seinen 53intbtt)itten bangen nnb 
n)eben, ba(5 uvr ben 3iamen baben nnb fie bag ?anb nnb He 
©tdbte. 

.N';^iemit fd)Iief5t i^ntber fcine Jtnjeige gei)l(id)er 0ebred)en, 
aber and) He u>e[t(id)en wnU er nid)t nngeriigt la^cn. S^od)^ 
notb vvdre, fd)reibt er, cin gemein GJebot nnb 3?en>it(ignng 
25entfd)er 9tation n>iber ben iiberfd)U>engtid)cn lleberflnj} 
nnb Sio\t ber it(eibniig, babnrd) fo inel 3lbel nnb reid)eg 
aSotf ivrarme. (5r trarnt t»or Sammt nnb Seibe nnb 
©pecerei nnb UMid)erifd>em 3inc>nehmen nnb i>or bem Syw^ 
bet. — 3(nd) J^reffen nnb Sanfen fet) eingeri^Jcn nnter ben 
X>entfd)en, n)orang bie anbern V\ifter felgen ; biefem allern 
gu flenern, ermabnet er bie Dbrigfeit nnb entfd)nfbigt 
gnm 6d)lnP feine greimiitl)igfeit mit bem Strang feineg 



ADDRESS TO THE GERMAN NOBILITY. 91 

©emiflfen^, ia Urn lieber fct), bie 2BeIt jitrne mit {f)m aU 
(BotL 

©0 fitrieb Sutf)er ju ber 3^^^ ^«> ^^ fc^tt t)otttgen SSruc^ 
ntit bem ^abjl rntb ber atten ^ircf)e ttorf) tticf)t fiir notf)n)en^ 
big erarf)tete, n)o er nod^ SSertrauen ober ^oflFnung ^atte auf 
bie ?!)?0(]ftcf)feit etner burdjgreifenben Dleformation. dv 
mocf)te e^ fe(6|I: n)oh[ a^nett, ba^ biejentgen, n)e[rf)e er axxf^ 
forberte, ftcf) jtt btefem SBerfe ju tJeretnigen^ ntcf)t 3(Ue 6e^ 
reitmittig few tt^i'trben ; er fonnte e^ ffcf) fefbfl: fc{)tt)erltc{) 
Derbergeit, ba^ ber ^ahfl in etne fo[cf)e ^efcf)ranfung feiner 
^a(tjt itnb ®ett)alt nimmermel)r n>{ttigen mxxie : aber er 
^atte ba^ ©einige getban, er batte SSorfcf)tage gemac^t/mcf)t 
itur bte ^irrf)e in i{)rer (gtn^eit ju er^atten, fonbern and) bte 
tjon tl)r getrettnteit SSobmen mteber mit tbr au^jufo^nen unb 
gu Dereinigen, er hat bamtt gejeigt, ba^ er nicf)t jerret^en 
n)otlte, fonbern ^eiten. D^eftgtofftdt nnb jTtt(tcf)er (grnft, 
aSaterianb^tiebe nnb ttefeg ??attona(gefn^f t)eretnfgten ffcf), 
fo[cf)e 2Borte anf feine 3^^9^ J^ f^S^^ ; f^^'^t Stnge, anf ba^ 
§ocf)|le gerid)tet, lieg and) bag ^feine, Unbebentenbere fei^ 
ner SInfmerffamfeit ntcf)t entge{)en ; bie dijxe ©otte^, bie 
t^n befeelte nnb entflammte, mad)tc il)n nid)t g[eid£)gnttig 
gegen bie @f)re feine^ 35otB, bie fcf)anttofen grprepngen, 
itnter n)e(c{)en bie Station Derarmte, giengen bent Wond^e^ 
ber feine §abe 6efa^, an^g §erj ; bie SOJi^banblnngen nnb 
ber ^of)n, weld)e groge ^aifer t)cn ben ^cibjlen erbntbet, 
cntporten bav ©efuf)t einei^ SKanneg, ber, feiner S3efd)eiben^ 
l)dt nngeadjtet, \oml §ocf)fmn befa^, bag er im 3camen 
nnb anS ber ©eele ber bentfdE)en Elation jnt)erficf)rticf) rebete, 
nnb fo rebete, ba^ biefe feiner 2Borte ffd) nicf)t jn fcfjdmen 
^atte. @en)if , man fann i^m nidE)t t)orn)erfen, er fjabe 
ganj 2)entfd)(anb in feine perfonfic{)e 3(ngelegenf)eit ^inein^ 
jief)en nnb bnrcf) Stn^j^rennng ber ©aat ber geinbfrf)aft ffcf) 
©cf)nlj nnb ©icf)erf)eit t)erfd)afen n^otten ! Sag fmb nic^t 
bie SBorte eineg ^Kanneg, ber ftcf) jn Derjlecfen unb ju ber^^ 



92 SELECTIONS FROM LUTHER. 

gen tracf)tet in fciger Sfngjl ; e^ jTnb bie befcf)morenben, ge^? 
maftigcn ©prucf)e eine^ macf)tig crgrijfenen, iiber perfoni^ 
ricf)e ^Hiicf jTrf)ten nnb 2Bunfrf)e erf)abcnen 9[TJanncg, ber ben 
SSfinbcn bie 5(ugen ojfnen, bie ?al)nten anfriittetn, bie '^atU 
I)erjigen befencrn moctite, unb ber nnr in hem ffaren SSe^^ 
n)n^tfei)n, ba^ ba^ .^^ottpe auf bent ©piete jlanb, an bie 
@^re nnb baS ^flirf}tgefnb( einer gro^en ebefn "Jlation ap^^ 
peUirte. ^dt biefer (2rf)rift t)at ?ntl)er jTcf) ein Senfmal 
gejTiftet, ba^ ihn bittig fchitlsen foUte t)or atfen 5lnf(agen, bie 
il)m (Sd)n(b geben : 2}entfrt)(anb jerriften nnb jertl)ei(t ju 
^aben ; n^enn Siner, fo batte e r ©inn bafnr, ba^ e^ einig, 
gro9, mdd)tig nnb frei fei) wn fcl)anblicf)em 3od£)e ; ba^ 
feine 25crfrf)(dge nnb 3tdtbe jeitgemdg nnb ffng voaxcn, \)a^ 
ben and) biejenigen, n^etd^e jTd) il)m nid)t anfd)fo^en, friit)er 
ober fpdter bnrd) bie Xhat, bnrd) tbeifu^cife glnfbebnng ber 
t)on ibm geriigten 9}tigbrdnd)e, anerfannt ; ba^ bie bentfd)^^ 
en ^iir jlen, bag ber .^aifer fetbfl nid)t fein 5[Serf nnterftii^^^ 
x?.n nnb gemeinfam ^anbetten, n^ar feine ©d)n(b nid)tj 



©nabe nnb ©tdrfe^ wxx ©ott jni^er*^ 2llterbnrd)fanct)5^ 
tig(le,3 gndbigfie fiebe i'^^erren ! & ijl nid)t an^ tanter aSor^? 

^ Starke. A blessinrr appropriate to be invoked upon princes and 
nobles, especially in a military age. This word is undoubtedly taken 
from the Scriptures^ in which God is often called t/ic strength of his 
servants. 

* Z u V o T J first, a common form of official salutation, because il 
stands at the bc<rlnning of the address, and is designed to conciliate 
favor ; as, M ein en freundlichen Gruss und Dienste 
z u V o r ! first of all, I present my friendly salutation and offer my 
service. 

^ Allerdurchlauchtigstc, most illnstrionSy a title given 
now to emperors and kings only. D u r c h 1 a u c h t i g, is a literal, 
but awkward translation of the Latin title pcrillustris. A 1 1 e r, pre- 
fixed to superlatives to give them intensity, was originally a genitive 
plural governed by the superlative, the most illustrious of all. 



ADDRESS TO THE GERMAN NOBILITY. 93 

iinfei nod) gret^el gefcf)ef)en, ia^ id) einiger^ armer 5[>?enfcf) 
mid) unter|lanbeit,3 t)er eiiern l)ot)en SBurben ju reben. 
Sie 9tot[) unb a3cfrf)n)evung/ bie al(e ©tcinbe ber (S{)njlem 
f)eit, ^ut)or Seutfdt)tanb bri'tcft, ntcf)t aKetn mtcf), fonbern 
Sebermann hmcQct hat i)ic(mal ju fcf)reien imb ^iilfe ju 
kge()ren, l)at mid) and) jc^t gejtt)ungen ju fd)reien unb rn^ 
fen, ob^ ©ott Semanb ben ®eifl geben n)ollte, feme .^anb 
jn retdE)en ber etenben Station, d^ tft oft buret) (Soncilien^ 
etwa^ Dorgen^anbt/ aber bnrd) et(icf)er ?0?enfrf)en ?ijlt 6ef)en^ 
bigficf)^ i)erl)inbert unb immer drger Qcwovien ; n)efcf)er 
^iicfe unb So^bett id) je^t, ®ott l)e[fe mtr, ju bnrcf)teurf)ten^ 

^ V o r w i t z. In. the old writers F u r w i t z often occurs, the 
particles vor and far being used indiscriminately. It means fm- 
jtertinent foricardness and rashness, 

2 E i n i g", which now expresses unity ; as, G o 1 1 i s t e i n i g, 
God is one and indivisible^ was formerly used in the sense of e i n- 
z i g, one alone. So here, and elsewhere, as in Mark 10: 18 ; N i e- 
mand ist gut, denndereinige Gott, JVo one is good hut 
God alone. 

3 Unterstanden, with the auxiliary h a b e omitted, as it of- 
ten is. 

*Die Noth und Beschwerung. As these two words 
designate one and the same things the verbs agreeing with them are 
put in the singular. Zuvor Deutschland, especially Ger- 
many. B e w e g t hat is connected with druckt by und un- 
derstood. This copulative conjunction is frequently omitted between 
verbs in German where it would be indispensable in English. 

^ O b. Before this word, the English reader would expect some 
such expression as u m z u s e h e n ; but it is not necessary in Ger- 
man. 

^ C o n c i 1 i e n, especially those of the 15th century, held at Pisa, 
Constance and Bale. 

"^ Behendiglich, dexterously. B e h e n d e stands for b e i 
derHand. Sovorhanden means at hand. B e h e n d i g- 
k e i t, dexterity .f occurs below. 

^ Darchleuchten, io clear up., governs Tttcke und Bos- 
he i t, and these govern w e 1 c h e r in the genitive plural. " Whose 
intrigues and wickedness 1 now intend, with God's help, to expose." 



94 SELECTIONS FROM LUTHER. 

gebenfe, auf ba^ jTe evfannt,^ t)infort n\d)t ntebr fo {)inber^ 
lid) iinb fd}ab(id) fepn merf)tcn. ©ott hat xxn^ ein jimge^ 
ebfe^ 33fut jum ^aiipt^ gegeben, bamit Diel i^erjen ju groi^er 
gutcr 5;^offnung crtDcdet ;3 bancben^ unit fid)'^ jiemen, ba^ 
Unfcre baju jii tl)un, inib bcr 3^^^ i^^i^ ©nabe niilplirf) 
braucf)cn»^ 

Sie 3tomani|tcn habcn brci 3)?aiiern mit grower SSeben^ 
bigfeit urn ^c() gejogen, bamit jTc fief) bibber befcf)ii$ct,6 bag 
ffe ?iicmanb bat megcn reformircn, babiird) iic ganje 
(5^rifleu[)eit greulid) gefaUcn ifl. 

3um erften, ^x)citn man {)at auf fie gebrungen mit wdU 
Iid)er ©cmatt, l)abcu f[e gefcl^t uub gcfagt :' 5[Be(t(id)e ®e^ 

* Erkannl, a participle used adjecti vely with s i e. A u f d a s s 
for d a s s or d a m i t, io the end that. 

2 Einjunges Blut zum Haupt. Charles V. who had been 
recently elected zum HsiU pi, for a head, or emperor. Z u is the 
proper word for expressing destination, or that which anything is de- 
signed or appointed to become. 

^ [Und] damit viel Herzen — e r w e c k e t, " and thereby ex- 
cited many hearts to high and pleasing hopes." The predominant 
meaning of d am i t in Luther's writings is thereicith, thereby, where- 
as, in modern German in order that, is as common a signification. 
This last idea Luther generally expressed by auf dass. 

* Daneben, etc. "In connection with that, it will be proper 
[for us] to contribute our part." Dazu thun, as an active verb, 
means to add ; as a neuter verb, it signifies, to be attentive or careful. 

^ Branch en, sometimes governs the genitive, and sometimes the 
accusative. With the former, it has a more elevated and antique air. 
" And to make a good use of the occasion and favor." 

^ Damit sie sich bis her beschutzet [haben], "with 
which they have iiitherto defended themselves, so that no one has 
been abb' to reform them ; and by this means (d a d u r c h) all Cliris- 
tcndom has sadly fallen. ' 

^ Gcsetzt und gesagt, "established (as a law) and proclaim- 
ed, that the civil power has no authority over them." And a few 
lines below, setzen sie dagegen, " they, on the contrary, lay 
it down as a law, that it belongs to none but the pope to interpret the 
Scriptures." See p. 11, Note 5. 



ADDRESS TO THE GERMAN NOBILITY. 95 

wait f)a6e iticf)t 9?cdE)t itber jTe, fonbern n)iel)erum, geiflttcf)e 
fcj) iibcr iic tvcltlid)C. 

3um anbcnt, {)at man jTe mit ber beifigen ©cfjrift tDotten 
(Irafeiv fegen jTe bagegen : (g^ gebii^re bie ©d)rift 3tiemanb 
au^jutegen, benn bcm ^ab(l. 

3um britten, brauet^ man i^nen mit etnem ^oncitio, fo 
erbicf)ten fte, e^ moge Sfttemanb etn Soncifinm berufen benn 
ber ^ahft. 

3{(fo f)aben ^e brei ^ntijen xxn^ ^etmltrf) gejltof)Ien, ba^ 
fTe mogen nngefltraft fet)n, nnb ftdt) tn ffcf]ere S3efe|ltgnng 
btefer brei SKanern gefe^et,^ atte SSi'tberei nnb a3o^beit ju 
treiben, n^ie tt)ir benn je^t feben. Unb ob ffe frf)on cin (5on^ 
cifinm mii^ten macf)en, f^aben fte bocf) baflelbe jnDor matt 
Qcmad^t bamit, ba^^ j^e bie giirpen jnt)or mit (giben Der^ 
pflid)ten, fie hlciben jn ia^cn roic fte jTnb ; bajn bem ^abfl 
DoKe ©emaft geben fiber atte Drbnnng be^ Soncitinm^ ; 
alfo, ia^ g(eicf) gift, eg fet)en t)iel Soncilien, ober feine Son^ 
cilien, obne bag jTe nn^ nnr mit Sart^en nnb ®piefgefecf)ten 
betritgen. @o gar grenlid) fiircf)ten fie ber S)avit^ ^ov einem 

^ D r a u e t, from d r a u e n, v/hich is obsolete for d r o h e n. 

2 Sich — gesetzt, placed themselves^ connected with g e s t o h- 
len by und. Zii treiben is used in the sense of um zu trei- 
ben. "Thus have they secretly stolen from us three cudgels, that 
they might go unpunished, and put themselves under the sure defence 
of these three walls, in order to practise all kinds of mischief and in- 
iquity, as we now behold." 

? Damit, dass, '■'•hythis means {y\z.) that they first bound the 
princes with an oath, to let them (the Romanists) remain as they are ; 
and besides (dazu), to give to the pope full power over the entire 
arrangement of the council, so that (also dass) it was indifferent 
whether there be (e s seyen, there Oe, subjunctive) many councils 
or no councils, except that they deceive us with mere masks and 
mockfights." Ohne dass, in modern German, does not mean 
except^ but loithout, and ohne dass sie uns betrtlgen, would, 
at the present day, mean the same as ohne uns zu betrUgen, 
without deceiving us. 

* Der Haut, for their skin. Such an adverbial use of the geni- 
tive, limiting or qualifying the verb, is very common. 



96 SELECTIONS FROM LUTHER. 

recf)tcn frcien goncitie, imb baben tamit^ ^onige itnb %hx^ 
flen frf)ucf)tern gemad)t, ba^ jTe gfauben, c^ wave tv>ibex 
©ott, fo man tl)nen nicf)t ge^orcf)te in aEen fofd)en fdjat^ 
^aftigen lijiigcn S^^iignipen. 

3tnn l)clfe nn^ @ott, nnb gebe nn^ ber ^cfannen etne,^ 
bamit bie SO^anern 3eric()o ^nrbcn nmgen)orfcn, ia^ mx 
biefe flrol)ernen nnb papierncn 5iKanern ancf) nmbtafcn, nnb 
bk cf)ri|l:Iicf)en 9?nt()cn, ©iinbcn jn jlrafen,^ lo^ niacf)cn,4 
be^ ZcnfeU ?ijl nnb Xrng an ben XaQ jn bringcn, anf bag 
n)ir bnrrf) ©trafe nn^ beflfern, nnb feine S^nib wicbex exlan^ 
gen. SBollen^ bie erfle Wlaiux am erjlen angveifen.* 



3nerfl jeiget er affo,^ bag alle (5^ri(len an bem gei(l(id)en 

^ D a m i t, with that, more commonly indicates instrumentality ; 
but it may also express mere concomitancij, as it does here. " Thus 
terribly are they frightened for their lives (skin) by (vor, before, in 
'cieio of) a really free council, and with this (fear in their hearts), they 
have intimidated kings and princes, so that the latter believe, that it 
would be an offence against God, if one should not obey them (the 
Fapists) in all such mischievous hobgoblin tricks (trickish hobgob- 
lins)." S p g n i s s e n, is now a Thuringian provincialism, for which 
Luther sometimes uses GespUgniss, which is found in the glos- 
saries of the old German. It is derived from S p u k, by the addition 
of the termination niss, and a dialectical change of the k into g. 

^ Der Pausaunen eine, " one of the trumpets^ with which the 
walls of Jericho were oveithrovvn." U m b 1 a se n, to bloicorer, or 
down. 

^ Zu strafen, depends on 11 u t h e n, rods to punish sin. 

* Los machen, to pull aicay from, the hands of tlie Romanists 
who held them fast, to prevent their being used. 

* [Wir] wo lien. 

® Also, here in its secondary, or illative sense, tlicrc, therefore. 

* Instead of tlic theological discussions respecting " the three walls 
of the Romanists," which here ensue, we have preferred merely to 
preserve the connection by substituting an abridgement from Mar- 
heinccke, mostly in the words of Luther. 



ADDRESS TO THE GERMAN NOBILITT. 97 

Sffiefen^ 2;beit f)aben unb i)m Uin Unterfrf)teb fei), benn beg 
3lmte^2 (^afbett attein, ba^ n)ir aCtefamt^ finb ju ^rieflern^ 
gen)eil)et buret) bie :j:aufe, obn)ot)t nicf)t 3ebem gejtemet, bag 
2lmt ju Dermatten. Sarum,^ fagt er, foUte cin ^rieflerflanbe 
tticf)tg anbered fepn in ber gbrt(tent)ett, betttt aB ein 2(mt^ 
mann ; n)eil er am Stmt i(l, get)et er t)or, n)o^ er aber abge^ 

^ Geistlichen We sen, spiritual or ministerial character. For 
the peculiar use of the word W e se n, see p. 26^ Note I. 

2 Denn des Amtes, "no other difference than that of the office 
alone." So denn and als are often used after ke in, " no other 
than." 

^ Allesamt, etymologically the same as altogether, meanings 
however, all collectively. 

* Zu Priestern. See p. 94, Note 2, and Nohden's Gram, p* 
338. This clause, in simple modern German, would be arranged 
thus : dass wir allesamt durch die Taufe zu Priestern 
geweihet (worden)sind, obwohl (es) nicht, etc. 

* D a r u m causes s o 1 1 1 e to precede its nominative . S a g t pre- 
cedes e r when any words of a quotation precede. So in English 
the phrase, " says he." 

* Priesterstand. The modern taste for minute accuracy in ex» 
pression would be offended with the incongruity, not felt at all in 
Luther's time, of representing "the priesthood to be nothing else in 
Christianity than an officer.'' " Because he is in office, he takes the 
precedence (gehet er vor); but if he be deposed, he is a peasant 
and (or) citizen, as the other (the individual supposed, i. e. any other^ 
who is not a priest)." 

■''Wo, now nearly obsolete in the sense of wenn, and which was 
originally an adverb of place (where) ; afterwards it was a conditional 
conjunction (ij). It expressed, at first, a local condition, in what 
place, or wherever a certain thing shall occur, equivalent to, if any-- 
where it occur. Hence it expresses a condition more emphatically 
than wenn, if, which barely indicates a condition without any in- 
tensity of expression. So (if) is sometimes used in the same sense 
as wo (a condition emphatically expressed) ; but this use is less fre- 
quent and has more of an antique air. W o f e r n, s o f e r n, and d a- 
fern (if), limit the condition to a certain measure or degree, to the 
extent that, so far as. They differ from wo in intensity as wo dif- 
fers from wenn. Falls (if), expresses more uncertainty as to the 






•6 SELECTIONS FROM LUTHER. 

fe^t, ifl er ein SBauer uttb SSurger/ rvie bev attbere^ Unb 
fo tjat and) wcltiidje Dbrigfeit, t)on (3ott eingefel^et, ibr 
2lmt,2 bie S56fen ju flrafen, bie ^rommen ju fd)iitjen ; fo 
foil man t()r 2lmt tajfen frei gefjen imb untjerbmbert^ burd) 
ben ganjen harper ber (5t)ri|ltenbeit, niemanb angefebcn/ 
ffe treff e ^abfl, S3ifc()6fe, ^fafen, 5[)?oncf)e, 9ionnen ober 
n^ag er ifl.^ £»enn fo ba^ genng tDdre,^ n>eltftcl)e ®en)alt 
jn f)inbern, tt>cil fie geringer ift nnter ben ct)rifilict)en Slenti? 
tern, benn ber ^rebiger nnb SSeicbttger gJmt ober ber geift^j 
Iid)e ©tanb, fo follte man and) binbern ben Sdjneibern/ 
©djnllern, ©teinmel^en, ^immerUntcn^ Modj^ ^eltnem, 
aSanern nnb alien jeitlid)en 5?anbn)erfern, ba^ ffe bem ^apfl 

event, and differs from w e n n, as in case that^ in English, differs 
from if. 

* Bauer, BOrger. The termination er, indicates one who cul- 
tivates (bauen) the soil, or who lives in a castle (Burg) or town. 
See Gram. p. 70. 

* Ihr Amt, explained by the following words in apposition. 
" So also the civil government, appointed by God, has its office (viz.) 
to punish, etc." 

3 Unverhindert is used adjectively and connected by u n d 
to frei. 

* Niemand angesehen, (an obsolete expression) nominative 
absolute, " no one regarded," i. e. without respect of persons, " be it 
(fall it upon,) pope, bishops," etc. See p. 15, Note 8. 

* Was er ist differs from wer er ist, just as "whatever he 
be," differs from "whoever he be." Was refers not to one's indi- 
vidual character, but to his standing, or rank. 

* So das g e n u g w ft r e, "if that were (reason) sufficient for 
hindering the civil power, because among the Christian offices it is 
lower than the office of preachers and confessors, or than the priest- 
hood," etc. See p. 07, Note 7, on s o. Das refers to the clause, w e i 1 
sie geringer ist, etc. Zu liindern is dependent on gen u g. 

'Hindern den Schneidern — dass sie dem Papst 
keine Kleider mac h ten, hindertailors,eic. from making (hin- 
der them, so that they make no shoes, etc.). Hindern, which 
commonly governs the accusative, here governs the dative. Weh- 
ren is now used for h inde rn, which is obsolete in this sense. 



ADDRESS TO THE GERMAN KOBILITT. 59 

a5ifrf)6fen, ^riejlern, 5Di6ncf)ett feme ©cf)uf), ^(eiber, S>an^ 
fer, Sflfnt mb Xvinten ma(i)tcn^ nod) 3in^ gabert. Stlfo 
mein id), biefe erfle ^apiermaiier liege barnieber, jTntemali 
mltlid)e 55errfrf)aft ijl: ein SDiitglieb tuorben be^ d)ri|itic^ett 
^orper^. 

(Sbenfo tt^iberfeget er and) ben anbern Strt^um, bag bte 
©cf)rift atteiu in bm §anben beg ^apj^eg fet), ba^ er nid)t 
irren fonne^ in 2(ug(egnng berfeI6en/ 2Co i>a^ n)dre,3 n>oju 
ttjare bie l)ei(ige ©d)rift norf) ober nii^e ? ?aflet |Te nn^ 
Derbrennen^ nnb nng 6egniigen an^ ben nnge[el)rten ^erren 
jn D?om, bie ber ^eitige ©eijl inne l)at ;^ menn icf)'g nicf)t 
gelefen ^dtte, mare mir'^'^ nng(an6(id) getDefen, ba^ ber Sten^ 

^ S internal, see p. 18, Note 9. The construction is antiquated 
for sintemal weltliche Herrschaft ein Mitglied des 
christlichen Korpers (ge) worden ist. 

'Sei — irren konne. These verbs, sei and konne, are 
pat in the subjunctive because they relate not to a reality, but to a 
conceit or imagination, indicated by the word 1 r r t h u m, which they 
are employed to explain. 

3 Wo das ware, wozu, if that were (so)^ for what, etc. ? for 
Wenn das so ware. See p. 97, Note 7. 

* Lasset sie uns verbrennen, let us burn it. S i e refers 
to Schrift. 

* Uns begnagen an, content ourselises with. For the use of 
an with the dative, as pointing out an agreeable o]^ject, see p. 80, 
Note 3. 

^ Inne hat, " whom the Holy Ghost has in charge." Literally, 
to have within one's self i. e. to have in one's power or at one's dispo- 
sal. It differs from b e s i t z e n, to possess, i. e. to have the ownership 
of, because one may have in his power, or at his control, (inne 
h a b e n), a hired house, and yet not possess it (b e s i t z e n) . A com- 
mander-in-chief is the Inhaber (disposer) but not the Besitzer 
(owner) of his army. 

'Ware mi r's, for w a r e e s m i r. " Had 1 not read it, it 
would have been incredible to me that Satan should, at Rome, have 
made such absurd pretences (have pretended such absurd things) and 
have found adherents, or a party." Vorwenden, almost precisely 
similar io pretend {prae and tendo) both in etymology and in signifi- 



MB SELECTIONS FROM LUTHER. 

fcf fcttte ju SKom fofd)e ungefcf)idte 2)inge t)ortt>enben unb 
2(nl)ang ftnbeit^ ?utl)er eignct bier einem jeben Sbrijlen 
ba^ 9ted)t gii/ bie l)ci(ige ©djrift gu fefen unb bie 5!)^ad)t, ju 
fd)mcrfcn2 unb ju urtl)ei(en, wa^ ba recf)t ober unrcrfjt im 
©fauben fei), 

2)ie britte gKauer fdttt Don fefbjl urn, fo bie er(len ^wo^ 
fatten, namfidv bag ber ^abjl attein bag 9?ecf)t babe, Son^ 
gilien gn i^erfainmefn* Senn n^dre bag nid)t, fagt er, cin 
nnnahir(icl) SSornebmen, fo ein gener in einer Stabt anf^ 
ginge unb jebermann fottte jlille pebn, laffen fiir unb fiir^ 

cation, always, when used in this secondary sense, conveys the idea of 
making a false pretence, while vorgeben has the same general 
meaning, except that there may be some truth in the pretence. E. g. 
To avoid an engagement, one may vorgeben a pressure of busi- 
ness (which may be the truth) or he may vorwenden a feigned 
illness. — A n h a n g, appendix^ i. e. something appended to a book 
or chapter of the same character with it, (and therein differing from 
Z u s a t z, which may be similar or dissimilar) but designedly separ- 
ated from it (and therein differing from Nachtrag, which is the 
addition of something omitted before, either from forgetfulness, or 
from ignorance). Applied to persons, An hang means, a clique 
which a man gathers around him of persons of the same sentiments 
and feelings with himself. See p. 53, Note 2. 

^ Eignet — zu. Zueignen, means literally to give or to ac- 
cord to one something as his own. To dedicate (a book), to ascribe (an 
act) to one, are derived significations. 

' Schmecken, (like the Latin saperc)^ to taste ; then to feel ^ to 
experience^ to perceive, Tliis is particularly tlie biblical use of the 
word, as also of the English word taste, as " come taste and see," 
etc. " Luther concedes to every Christian the right to read the Scrip- 
tures and the power to perceive and to decide what (d a is an exple- 
tive) is right and wrong in (matters of) faith." 

'So die erstcn zwo, (/* the first two. For s o, see p. 97, 
Note 7; for z w o as the intermediate form between z w e i and the 
English two, see p. 49, Note 1. N a m 1 i c h refers not to z w o, but 
to die dritte Mauer. Mauer, is derived from the Latin 
mujuSy though with a change of the gender, for the ground of which 
see Gram. p. 91. 

*Far und far. This is an old form of expression which orig- 



i 



ADDRESS TO THE GERMAN NOBILITY* 101 

6rennen, tva^ ia 6re«tten maq^ aCein barum, ba^ ftc ntcf)t 
bic y)lad)t bc^ S8urgermei(l:er^ {)dtten ober ia& geuer tJiel^s 
kid)t xxiKfjt an be^ S3urgermet|ler^ S)an^ anhiibe ?i 311 l)i^t 
xxidjt cin jeglicf)cr SSitrger fcf)ulbtg, bie anbern ju ben^egen 
urtb ju berufeit ? aCieDtef me^r fott ba^ in ber gei(t(id)ett 
©tabt Sfyrifti gefrf)el)en, fo em geuer beg Stegernifleg jTcf) 
erl)e6et, eg fei) an beg ^apjleg SJegintent ober n)0 eg n)otte. 
Sa^ jTe aber ihre ©en^alt ruf)men, ber jTd) nic^t jteme^ ju 
tDiberfecf)ten, ijlt gar nirf)tg gerebt @g tjlt feme ®ett)alt in 
ber ^ird)e, benn nur jur SSefl^erimg : barum n:)o jTcf) ber 
^ab(l3 moKte ber ®ett>ait braud)en, gu nje^ren, em frei 
^onjitium ju mac()en, bamit t)er{)mbert n)urbe bie SSeflerung 
ber ^ircf)e, fo fotten tt^ir i^n unb feine ®etx)att n{d)t anfefjen 

inated when far was equivalent to v o r, and means literally /or- 
wards and foricards, i. e. ever onward^ 1. in regard to space, 2. and 
more commonly, in regard to time, incessantly, " Stand still (and) 
let it burn on continually as far as it will (whatever may burn). 

^ A n h ii b e, obsolete for a n h 6 b e imperfect subjunctive from 
a n h e b e n. See h e b e n in Gram. p. 420. For the signification 
of the word, see p. 39, Note 4. 

' D e r s i c h [e s] n i c h t z i e m e. " That they boast of a 
(their) power, which it is not becoming (sich nicht zieme) 
to resist, is saying (or amounts to) nothing at all;" — literally " is 
nothing said." See p. 9, Note 5. 

^Darum wo sich der Papst. " Therefore if the pope 
should be disposed (w o 1 1 1^) to make use of (s i c h [g e] b r a u- 
c h e n) power to prevent holding (zu maehen) a free council, 
in order that the reformatiou of the church may (might) be hindered, 
we ought to disregard (both) him and his power ; and if he should 
come and thunder (in his bulls), we should look down upon it as up- 
on the work (undertaking) of a mad man, in reliance upon God (i n 
Gottes Zuversicht) put him, in turn, under the ban, and 
drive him away as well as we can (as one can)." According to good 
modern usage, brauchen signifies to need, and gebrauchen 
is employed in the sense of to use. Sich gebrauchen, Zo 
make use of, with the genitive, is now provincial. Such is the change 
which the language has undergone since Luther's time. 

9* 



102 SELECTIONS FROM LUTHER. 

TOO ev fommeu unb bonitern miirbe, fottte man ba^ t)erad)^ 
ten, aU cinc6 toUen 5yjenfcf)en 2Sornef)men, unb il)n in ®oU 
te^ 3i^^^^^^)t n)iebcrum bannen unb tveibcn, mc man ntag. 
2)enn fo(rf) cine tjermeficne @en>a(t ifl nicf)t^ ;i er bat jTc 
and) nicf)t unb n)irb bafb mit einem (2prud)e ber Sd)rift 
nieberge(e,qct ; benn ^aufud fagt 2 (5or^ 10, 8* ©ott l)at 
un^ @cn>alt gegeben, ntcf)t ju t)erberben, fonbern ^u beffern 
tie (5l)riftenl)eit. Sffier n?iK iiber biefen Sprud) ^iipfen ? 



SBoDon in benSoncifienju ^anbefn* 

9ftun n^offen n^ir feben bie (Stucfe,^ bie man bittig^ in ben 
(Soncilien foHte banbetn, unb bamit ^dbfle, Sarbinafe, S3i^ 
fct)ofe unb aUe ©e(el)rten fottten bitttg 2!ag unb 5ytad)t umge^ 
I)en/ fo fie Sbriilum unb feine ^ird)e lieb batten. 2Bo fie 
<iber ba(^ nid)t t[)un, bag ber §aufe unb bad n)eft{id)e 
©rf)n)ert baju tbue, unangefef)en il)r 93annen cber £^onnern. 
2?enn ein unrecf)ter 33ann ift bejTer benn jeben rerf)te Stbfo^ 
lutionen ; unb eine unrecf)te Slbfofution arger benn jel^n 
red)te S3dnne* Sarum lajTet und auftt)arf)en, licbc Seutfd)e, 
unb ©ott mebr benn bie 5)?enfd)en fiird)ten, bag mv nicf)t 
t^ei(()aftig tt)erben ader armen ©eeten, bie fo fiagficf) burd) 

^ N i c h t s, a nonentity. " Nor has he it ;" u n d (s i e) w i r d 
bald, etc. 

2 S t a c k e, i/^c j)articulars. See p. 30, Note 1. 

•* B i 1 1 i g, reasonably., is not to be connected with h a n d e 1 n, 
to act reasonably., which would give a false sense ; but it must be 
connected with sollte, ought reasonably, i. e. ought in justice. 
To neglect to do these things would be unreasonable. So also a few 
words below b i 11 i g indicates the reasonableness of the obligation 
expressed by s o 1 1 1 e n. 

* D a m i t — u m g e h e n, " with w^hich popes, etc. ouglit in rea- 
son to concern themselves night and day, if they had any regard for 
Christ and his church." The subjunctive, hat ten, implies that 
they had no regard for Christ. 



ADDRESS TO THE GERMAN NOBILITY. 103 

bai frf)dub(icf)e, teufenfcf)e Diegiment ber SKomei: t)ertoren 
n)erbeu* 

3um erilen t|l'g greuticf) imb erfrf)recf(icf) attjufef)en/ ba^ 
ber £)6erfte in ber Sbriflenbeir, ber fic^ Sbrtili asicarium, 
iinb St. ^etero 3?ad)fotger rul)met,2 fo meWtd) unb prdd^s^ 
tig fdbret/ ba^ ibn barinnen kin ^onig, f ein ^aifer mag 
ertangen unb g(eirf) n)erben, unb inbem ber 2(Herf)ei(igfte3 
unb ©ei)l(id)jle jTcf) Id^t nennen, n)eWid)er 2Befen ifl, benn 
bie 2BeIt fe(6er i]t. dv trdgt eine breifdttige ^rone, mo bie 
^6cf)jlten ^onige nur (iinc ^rcne tragen ; g(eid)t ffcf) ba^^ 
mit bent armen Sbrifto unb ©t. ^eter, fo ifl'^ ein ueu 
g[eicf)en. 9Jian pfdrret, e^ fei) fefeerifcf), tt)o man ban^iber 

* Anzusehen, is net here used in an active sense, governing 
the following clause, but that clause is in apposition with e s (in 
i 8 t's) and consequently in the nominative ; and erschrecklich 
anzusehen corresponds to the Latin horrihile visu. 

' Sich — rtihmet, ordinarily signifies to 'praise one's self, or to 
boast of, with the genitive of the thing of which he boasts. But 
originally the word meant to call one's self something, and so it is used 
here. Viele Menschen werdenfrommgerOhmt, "ma- 
ny men are called pious." Pro v. 20: 6. Comp. Prov. 16: 21. in Lu- 
ther's version. 

^Der allerheiligste, etc., '-and while he allows (causes) 
himself to be called the most holy and most spiritual, he is a more 
worldly creature (being) than the world itself." Observe the use of 
the nominative (der allerheiligste) after nennen with sich 
which is in the ac<iusative. So in closing a letter one says, 1 c h 
empfehle raich als Ihr gehorsamster (not Ihren ge- 
horsamsten) Diener. Titles as well as proper names are often 
used without the ordinary variations of declension. See analogous 
instances in Gram. p. 323, infra. In all other cases the accusative is 
used when in apposition with sich in reflective verbs. — Weltli- 
cher for weltlicheres. For an explanation of the omission of 
the ending e s, which is so common in the writings of Luther, see 
p. 4, Note 3. Selber an indeclinable pronoun is nearly obsolete 
for selbst. 

* G 1 e i c h t sich das, "if that resembles, etc., it is a new (kind 
of) resemblance." 



104 SELECTIONS FROM LUTHER. 

rebet ; man mil aiev and) ni(tft ()oren, me und[)rijllfid) unb 
imgottfirf) fofcf)' Sffiefen fci> 3d) i)altc aber, wemx er mit 
$l!l)rdnen bcteu foltte t)or ©ott, er miigte je fotd)e kronen 
abtegen ; bien)ei(i unfer ®ott feine §ojfaf)rt mag teibem 
5Run foKtc fcin 3(mt ntc{)t^ anbere^ fci)n, beitn tdglicf) trei? 
jten unb 6ctcn fiir bie g^ri|len^eit, unb ein (Srempel atter 
£)emnt^ t)ortragen* 

3nm anbern, n>eju t(l ba^ aSe(f nnfee^ in ber (Sl)ri(len^eit, 
ba^ ba f)ci^et bie Sarbindte ? 25a^ n?ilt id) bir fagen* 
SGBelfd)^^ unb 2)entfd)tanb habcn t)ief reid)er ^(ojlter/ ©tifte, 
?e{)en unb ^farreien ; bie bat man nid)t gemt^t befler gen 
9tom ju bringen, benn ba^ man Sarbindfe mad)e,5 ^i^b beus? 
felbigen bie S3i^tt)iimer, ^tofler, ^rdtaturen ^u eigen gabe,^ 
unb ©otte^bienfl alfo ju S3oben flie^e. 2)arum fief)et man 
je^t, bag 2Be{fd)fanb fajl n^iifle ifl, diopter t)eriloret, aSi^^ 

^ Die well originally meant while, during. See p. 26, Note 2. 
Afterwards, it came to signify as it does here, since, because, which 
is now provincial, and w e i 1 is now the common word for since, be- 
cause. 

2 WozQ ist das Volk nutze — das, "for what is that [class 
of] people useful (i. e. of wliat use are they) which are called car- 
dinals ?" 

3 Welsch [land]. Welsch signifies what \s foreign, particu- 
larly what is of Roman origin ; and hence more commonly it means 
Italian, but sometimes it means French, 

* Kloster in the genitive plural, governed byviel. Kloster 
comes from the Latin claustrum, a closed, or secluded place. Stif- 
ter, Lehen und Pfarren, religious foundations, ecclesiastical 
fiefs, and parishes. The two former are indefinite terms for which 
BisthUmer and Prlllaturen seem to be used a little below. 

^ Denn dass man — machte, " than that one should make," 
i. e. than to make. 

^ Zu eigen gUbe, to give for their oxen. Zu, expreBsmg des- 
tination, is to be variously translated by to, for, and as. All the 
grammatical relations are here fully and clearly expressed ; — " that 
one should give to the same (the cardinals) the sees, etc., to be their 
own." 



ADDRESS TO THE GERMAN NOBILITY. 105 

t^iimer t)cric[)ret/ ^xaiatnxcn itnb aUev ^ivdjen Sinfe gen 
9tom gejogcn, ©tdbte i^erfatten, ?anb unb i^ntc Derborben, 
ba feiu ©otte^bientT; nod) ^rebigt mel)r ge()et 2Garnm ? 
£)ie ^arbmd(e miififen bie ©liter l)a6en. ^ein Xiixh ^dtte 
2Ge{fd)(anb fo mogen t)erberben, nnb ©otte^bienfl nieberkj* 
gen. 

9tun2 2Qetfcff (anb an^gefogen ijl:, f emmen jTe in^^ Sentfcf)^ 
lanb, I)e6en fetn [duberlfd)^ an : aber fe^en tt)ir jn, SeutfdE)^ 
lann foil balb bem 2Betfrf)en gteid) n^erben. SOBir l)aben 
fcf)on etlicf)e garbindle. 3Ba^ barinnen^ bie Dtomer fncfjen, 
folten bie trunfuen Sentfcl)en^ nid^t t)erfle^en, hi^ fte fein 
aSi^tt)nm, Alofter, ^farrei, ?ef)en, feller ober -pfennigs 

* Verstoret — verzehret, participles for verstort and 
Verzehrt and construed like waste; "Therefore we see that It- 
aly is almost desolate, cloisters broken up, episcopal sees consumed, 
prebends and the revenues of all the churches carried to Rome, cities 
decayed, the country and people ruined, in which (d a in the sense 
of wo) there is no longer religious service nor preaching." 

2 Nun. See p. 12, Note 4. 

' Sauberlich means, neatly, nicely, with finesse, " Now that 
Italy is drained, they come to Germany, and go to work with admi- 
rable finesse. But behold! Germany, in their view, (soil) is soon 
to become like Italy." Heben — an, see p. 39, Note 4. Sehen 
wir zu, lo ! as an imperative is unusual. See Gram. p. 169, note. 
The common form would be, sehetnurzu. Soil, 15 said, oi 
is thought, see Gram. p. 180, 3. So s o 1 1 e n a little below, expresses 
merely the view or intention of the Romans. 

** Darinnen, therein, refers not to De[utsc h 1 an d, but to 
CardinSLle. "What the Romans seek therein (in the appoint- 
ment of cardinals), the sottish Germans must not understand." 

^ Die trunknen Deutsche n. Here used in the sense of 
the Italians, as a term of reproach, and we are sorry to add that the 
reproach was but too well merited. Hence the Italians despised the 
Germans as a sottish people. Luther often alludes to this sottishness 
and stupidity, and calls on his countrymen to wipe off the reproach. 

® Pfennig, often in old German and Upper German P f e n- 
n i n g formerly meant money, coin in general, and hence had vari- 
ous adjectives prefixed to it, which have at length come to be used 



106 SELECTIONS FROM LUTHER. 

nte^r haitn. Set 3(nticf)ri(l: mug bie (2cf)a^e ber @rbe f)e^ 
ben/ mc e^ t)erfunbiget ijl* @^ gehet bal)er,2 man frf)du^ 
met oben ab^ Don ben a3i^t[)umern, Mb)icxn unb ?et)en ; 
unb n)eif jTe nod) nic()t aiKe^ biirfen gar t)erfd)n)enben, n)ie 
fee ben 30Be(fcf)en getf)an l)aben, brancf)en fie bien)etH [oIrf)e 
l^eitige SJebenbigfeit, bag jTe 5e()n ober Stt)anjig ^rd(atnren 
jufammen foppefn, unb Don einer jeglid)en ein jdljrlicfje^ 
©tiicf reigen, bag bocf) eine (gumma barau^ n)erbe. Die 
^robflei ju SEiirjbnrg giebt taufenb ©ulben, bie ju 93am^ 
berg and) etvoa^, 5IKainj, 2:rier unb ber meljr ;^ fo mod)te 

alone as nouns ; thus gulden Pfennig, a gold Pfennig or Gul- 
den ; gross Pfennig, a large Pfennig or Groschen ; H a 1 1 e r, 
or Heller Pfennig, a Pfennig made at H a 1 1 in Suabia, or 
a Heller (or Halle r); Kreuzer Pfennig, a Pfennig with 
the stamp of the cross upon it (originally), or a Kreuzer equal 
now to four Pfennigs. A P f e n n i g is about 1-4 of a cent, and a 
Heller about 1-8 of a cent. 

*Die Schatze der Erde heben. Hebe n, to elevate^ 
forms with various words peculiar idioms, most of which spring from 
the signification to take vp, to take away ; as, e i n e n S c h a t z h e- 
b e n, to dig up and carry away a treasure ; ein Kind aus der 
T a u f e h. e h e n^ to be godfather or godmother at baptism ; e i n e n 
aus dem Sattel heben, io supplant one ; G e 1 d — S t e u e rn 
heben, to raise or receive money — taxes ;eine Krankhei t — e i n 
Hinderniss — einen Zweifel heben, to remove a disease 
. — an obstacle — a doubt ; einen Streit heben, to terminate a 
quarrel. 

* Es gehet daher, hence it comes that. D a h e r often ex- 
presses the ground or cause from which anything proceeds or results. 
Daher kommt es, dass is the common phrase, for, hence it 
comes that. 

•*Man schaumet oben ab, " tliey skim off the cream." 
A b 3 c h a u m e n, means to take off the scum, or skim off the cream, 

*Brauchen sie dieweil, " meanwhile tliey exercise such 
holy skill that they unite ten or twenty benefices together [for one 
cardinal], and seize on an annual amount from each, so that a [good 
round] sum is raised [without exciting alarm]. 

* Und der mehr, and many others, literally, and of these more^ 



ADDRESS TO THE GERMAN NOBILITY. 107 

man eiit taufenb ©ufben ober je^ni jufammenbrmgen, ba^ 
wit ein Sarbinaf jTd) einem xcidjen ^onige g(eicf) f)alte ju 

seBenn wit nun bai genjonnett,^ fo tt)otten tt)tr bret^tg 
ober t^ier^ig Sarbincife^ auf etnen 2^ag madE)en, «nb einem 
geben ben ^ixndjbcvQ^ jn 95am6erg, nnb ba^ ^i^t{)um ju 
®?iirjhirg bajn, baran ge{)dngt^ etlicfje reicf)e ^farreien, bi^ 

d e r being a demonstrative pronoun in the genitive plural, governed 
by m e h r. " The provostship of Wurceburg will furnish (furnishes) 
li thousand guldens ; that at Bamberg also something, (and so) May- 
ence, Triers and many others." 

* Zehn, i. e. zehn tausend. " One thousand guldens or 
ten," is a very peculiar idiom, found also in Dutch, for " about ten 
thousands guldens." D a m i t, with which sum. 

^Wenn wir nun das gewonnen (haben). So Lu- 
Aer represents the Romans as saying to themselves. 

3 Dreissig odervierzig Cardinal e. This number of 
cardinals for Germany will not appear so extravagant and void of 
verisimilitude, if we recollect that in Italy, which Luther holds up 
MS a specimen of what is to be expected in Germany, there were 
fourteen cardinal deacons, and fifty cardinal presbyters, connected 
with the different churches in the city of Rome, and seven cardinal 
bishops from adjacent Italian cities. The number of cardinals was 
variable till Sixtus V. in 1586, fixed them at seventy, corresponding 
to the number of the elders among the Israelites. Luther undoubt- 
edly had in mind the recent instance of arbitrary power by which 
Leo X. created thirty-one new cardinals in a single day. Hurter's 
Innocenz III. vol 3, p. 156. 

* M U n c h b e r g. " In it (Bamberg) is the cathedral of St. Ste- 
phen and St. James, together with the grand and rich Benedictine clois- 
ter of Munchberg^ and the nunnery of St. Theodore." Busching's 
Geography. 

. * Gehangt, a participle used absolutely with Pfarreien. 
^ And give to one (of the cardinals) MQnchburg in Bamberg, and 
the bishopric of Wurceburg besides, several rich parishes being at- 
tached to it, till churches and cities are desolate" (their revenues go- 
ing to cardinals) ; and then say, we are the vicars of Christ, the 
shepherds of Christ's flock ; — the senseless, sottish Germans must 
bear it," These last words represent the feelings, not of the Ro- || 



108 SELECTIONS I^ROM LtJTHER. 

ba^ ^ircfjcn iinb (Btaitc mi\ie jTnb, mtb barttad) fagett, n){t 
finb gbrtfli asicarien, :inb §irten ber ©d)afe 61)ri(li ; bic 
totten t)oUen 2)eutfcf)eu miiflen e^ n)ob( feiben. 

3cf) ratf)e aber, ba^ man ber Sarbindfe tDcniger ntad)e,i 
cber laffe jTe^ ben ^abjl wn fetnem @ute ttabren. 3f)fer 
tt)are iibrig genug an jtDoIf,^ nnb ein 3^ber Ijdtte^ bed 
3af)red tanfenb @u(ben einjnfcmmen* SOBte femmen n?ir 
2)entfc()en bajn, ba^ mv folrfje 5Kdnberei, Sd)n)inberei5 nn^ 
frer ©liter, i:fon bent ^abjl leiben miiffen ? ^at bad ^b^ 
nigreicf) granfreid) firf)^d ern>ebret,6 n)arnm faffen mx 
25entfcf)e und affo narren nnb affen V (Sd n)are 3(tted er^ 
tragficf)er, n)enn fie bad ®nt aCein nnd alfo abjloblen ; bie 
^ird)en i)ern)njlen jTe bamit, nnb beranben bie ®cf)afe 
Sbrijlti i^rer frommen ^irten, nnb fegen ben l^ienjl nnb 
SOBort ©otted nieber^ Unb menn fd)on fein Sarbinal mare, 

mans, whom Luther had just introduced as speaking, but of Luther 
himself. 

* Der CardinJlle weniger machen, make fewer cardi- 
nals. W e n i ge r, as an adverb of quantity, governs the genitive, 
der Cardinal e, 

' S i e, is governed by n rl h r e n, and den Papst by lass e> 

^ Ihrer ware Ubrig genug anzwolf, " quite enough 
of them would be left with about twelve," i. e. about twelve of them 
would be amply sufficient. U e b r i g is used in the sense of tt b e r- 
f 1 U s s i g when it qualifies genug, plenty enough, A n, when it 
relates to number, is indefinite and signifies about, 

*Und ein jeder hatte, etc., *' and each one might have a 
thousand guldens to come in yearly," i. e. annual income. 

^Schinderei is a coarse word which would not now be used. 
It is connected to Rauberei by und understood. 

''Sic h's erwehret, the use of the accusative (e s in sic h's) 
with this verb is provincial. Sich erwehren is a reflective 
verb governing the genitive of the object. " If the kingdom of 
France has kept it off," etc. 

7 Narren und affen means, to be treated as fools and apes. 
•' All this would be more tolerable, if they plundered only property 
thus; [but] they," etc. 



ADDRESS TO THE GERMAN NOBILITY. 



lOto 



bie ^ird)e whvie bennocf) nid)t t)erjTnfeu ; fo t{)un fie 
5Jtirf)t^,i ba^ jur Sbrijltenbeit bicnet, luir @elb unb .^aber=^ 
[ad)en urn bie a3i^tl)umer unb ^rdtatureu tvcibcn fte ;2 bag 
and) tvol)l ein jcglid)er 9iduber tt)un fanu. 

^ So thun sie nichts, "but now they do nothing;" — a 
peculiar use of the word s o. It may be regarded here as nearly 
equivalent to j e tz t. 

^Nur Geld und Hadersachen — treiben sie," they 
only seek to get money and to excite litigation respecting benefices 
and fiefs." Treiben, in such connections, simply means <o/oZ- 
loiD or practice. See p. 29, Note 1. — All that Luther has here af- 
firmed might be proved by the testimony of Catholic writers, if 
this were the place for such demonstrations. To prevent the suspi- 
cion that the Reformer misrepresents the case (which would be very 
silly in an address to those who certainly could not be misled by him) 
w^e will give a few brief specimens of the language held by the Cath- 
olics themselves on the subject. In 1359, the chancellor of the Pal- 
atinate said in a diet, " The Romans have always regarded Germany 
as their gold mine ; and what does the pope give in return but letters, 
bulls and words ?" Clemangis, in the same century, said, " Scarce- 
ly can a bishop be found, who, though he could give a demonstra- 
tion of his right clearer than the sun, has been able to obtain his ben- 
efice without a lawsuit." An account of the city of Salzburg, pub- 
lished in 1784, states that, " in 1388, the pope gave the archbishop 
permission to levy taxes on all the benefices of his province for re- 
building his cathedral and for redeeming his pawned palace and es- 
tates, provided half the sum collected should go to the apostolic treasu- 
ry.'' Clemangis says again, " Churches that were formerly rich 
and affluent bore for a long time the rapacity of Rome, but now that 
they are exhausted they cannot bear it longer." In 1367, says Wes- 
senberg, " single dignitaries of the church were found, who by spe- 
cial permission of the pope held more than twenty benefices." Ber- 
nard said, " A whole year passes away, in which those who have the 
care of souls, do not utter a word of religious instruction." Gerson, 
said in the Council of Pisa, " Scarcely a benefice below the high pre- 
lacies is conferred, but that the pope confers it on one, a legate on, 
another, and the ordinary on a third." He insisted on " the residence 
of the higher clergy, and the suppression of the cormnendams and of 
all the system of plunder practised by the Apostolic See." At the 
Council of Constance John Zachariah said, " that Socrates, who 
10 



110 SELECTIONS FROM LUTHER. 

3unt britten, n^enn man be^ ^a6|le^ i^op fie^ ba^ hun^ 
berte ^t)cit bieiben, unb that ab ncun unb neimjig ^bcife, 
er wave bcnned) greg g^nug, 2lntn)ort jii geben in be^ ©(ani^ 
ben^ Sad)en* 9?nn aber ift ein fo(d)e^ @ett)nrm nnb @e^ 
fct)n>nrm2 in bem $Kom, nnb attej^ jTd) pdbjlifrf) riibmer,^ ba^ 
gn S3abt)(onien nid^t ein fotd)e^ ^JEefen gen)cfen ift* @^ jTnb 
mebjX benn 3000 ^>abjl:^(5cl)reiber atfein ; xvex mtt bic an^ 
bem 2(mtlente jdbfen, ba ber Slemter fo Dief jTnb/ bap man 
fie fanm jdbfen fann, rvd&jc aUc anf bie ©tifre nnb ?ebne 
bentfd)ed ?anbed marten/ mie ein 2Bo(f anf bie Sd)afe. 

laughed when he saw great robbers hanging little thieves, would laugh 
still more, if he were here to see great thieves suspending the little 
ones from office." 

^ Des Papstes Hof liess, etc. H of is perhaps in the accu- 
sative, and das hunderteTheil, in apposition with it ; unless, 
Hof stands for H o f e s, for the sake of euphony. " Were one to 
let the pope's court remain the hundreth part [of it] and to do away 
ninet}>-nine parts, that (e r, referring to Hof) would be large enough 
still to give responses (decisions) in matters of faith." 

^GewOrm und Geschwilrm, collectives from VVurm and 
Schwarm, " such a nest of reptiles and such a swarming hive." 
For the formation of collectives from their primitives, see Gram. p. 
73. 1. In the word GeschwOrm, the letter il is employed in- 
stead of a for the sake of the alliteration. Indeed, there is no ne- 
cessity for forming a collective from Sc h w arm, as it is already a 
collective ; and this may be the reason why Luther elsewhere says 
GewOrm und Sc h w Q rm,- preserving the alliteration, but drop- 
ping the collective prefix ge. As the Grammars contain the rules 
for forming collectives, it is not to be expected that these forms 
should all be found in the If^xicons. 

3 Und A lies sich pflpstlich rdhmet is to be regarded as 
parenthetical, and dass to be connected with solch in the preced- 
ing clause. In referring indefinitely either to persons or things be- 
fore mentioned, the German employs the neuter singular. Thus A 1- 
les is to be translated as tliough it were a 1 1 e, alt vien, ererij body. 
Sich rOhmen, call thcmsrirrs or hnnsl of beinrr. See p. 103, Note 2. 

* Da der Ae niter so viel sind, ''since there are so many 
offices." See p. 13, Note 3. 

* For the force of the word w a r t e n, see p. 30, Note 2. Instead 



ADDRESS TO THE GERMAN NOBILITY. Ill 

3cf) acf)te, bag i:)eutfd)fant) je^t xoeit mcijX md) 3Jom giebt 
bent ^\i6|l, bcnn tjor Beiten ben ^aifern. ^a e^ metnen 
mid)c, bag jabr(trf) mebr benn 300,000 ©utben^ aug 
2)eutfd)(anb wad) 9?om fommen, tauter Dergeben^ imb itnt^ 
fonfl, bafitr^ n)ir nicf)t^ benn ©pott imb ©d)mact) erfangen. 
Unb mv i)errDitnbern un^ xiod)^ bag giirjlen, Stbef, ©tdbte, 
©tifte, ?anb unb iente arm werben ; mr foltten un^ 'ocx^ 
munbern, bag mv nod) ju eflfen t)a6en.3 

ofdeutsches Landes, modern usage would admit, bat per- 
haps not require deutschen Landes. That is, in the genitive 
singular of the masculine and neuter genders, the adjective termina- 
tion e n is now much used instead of es. See Gram. p. 116. med. 

^ Gulden, standing alone, without the word Gold (as Gold- 
gulden) generally means a silver coin, or the common gulden, 
worth from about two-thirds to three-fourths of a Thaler, according 
to the places where they v/ere coined. A G o 1 d-g u 1 d e n was val- 
ued at about 2J T h a 1 e r. 

2 D a f tt r, for ichich. As da is often used by the old writers for 
wo, so is dafar, for wofUr. Present usage, however, does not 
allow such a license. They ought never to be employed in refer- 
ring to persons, and not commonly, to things of an individual or defi- 
nite character. So also we must say, Es war mein Vater mit 
w e 1 c h e m (not wo mit) ich ging. Thue nichts, womit 
l[not mit welchem) Du Dir schaden konntes t. — The pas- 
sage in the text is highly tautological — " purely thrown away, and 
for nothing, for which we receive nothing but ridicule and reproach." 
We have endeavored to indicate in the translation, though at the sac- 
rifice of good English, the etymological difference between the words 
vergebens, and umsonst. 

^Dasswir noch zu essen haben, *' that we still have 
[anything] to eat." The idioms of the English and of the German, 
in this use of have and haben with the infinitive, are very diflfer- 
ent. In English, the word have with a mere infinitive, expresses ne- 
cessity like must. But if an accusative intervene, as the word any- 
thing in the example above, the verb to have^ has, for the most part, 
its ordinary signification. In German, the rule is reversed in regard 
to the former, while, in regard to the latter, it is much as in English. 
Ich habe zu essen, means, " I have something toeat;" and Ich 
habe etwas zu essen, means, " I have a little of something to 



112 



SELECTIONS FROM LUTHER. 



T:ic\m{ n)ir fcenn l)ier in fca^ red)te <B)(:i\ei^ fommcn, tt)oI^ 
len mir cin wcnic]^ ftitt baltcn, imb un^ fet)en lali'en,^ n)ie 
bie I)eutfd)en itirf)t fo ganj grebe 9tarren jTnb, bag jTe 
bie romifci)eu ^^raftifen4 gar nid)t tt>ijTen nod) Dcrfteben. 
3cf) f(age l)ier nicf)t, bag ju 9?em ®otte^ ©ebot unb d^rijtj? 
Iirf)e^ $)icrf)t i?erad)tet ift ;^ benn fo tt>obl ftebet e^ jefet iud)t 
in ber (Sbriflcnbeit, fonber(id) jn SKom, bag tt)tr Don fo(d)en 
l)oben I^ingen f(agen m6d)ten. 3d) f(age and) nid)t, bag 
ba(^ natnr[id)e obcr n)e(((id)c SKedU nnb aSernnnft nid)t^ 
gift ; e^ liegt nod) 2(Ite^ ticfcr inx ©rnnbc* 3d) f(age, bag 
jTe il)r eigen erbid)tete^ gci|l(id)c^ 'Sicd^t ntd)t baltcn, ba^ 
bod) an tt)m felbjl: einc lantere -l^prannei, ©cijerei nnb jeits^ 

eat;" but, Ich habe etwas zu thun, means, "I must do 
something." 

* Spiel is often used figuratively for any business^ action or af- 
fair of hazard. " Since we here come into the very action," i. e. 
have come to the main point. R e c h t, proper, real. 

' W e n i g does not qualify still ("a little still") but e i n w e- 
n i g, here means, a little while. 

3 Uns sehen lassen, cause ourselves to 5cc, i. e. take occa- 
sion to see. 

* Praktikcn. Praktik, from the modern Latin word, practica^ 
means, in the singular, practice ; but in the plural (P r a k t i k e n), it 
means loic tricks, or mean arts. Most of the smaller lexicons in use 
among us, are inaccurate on this word. 

* Gottes Gebot und christliches Recht verachtet 
i 8 t. A verb in the singlar with two connected nominatives, explain- 
ed p. 93, Note 4. So a few lines below Recht undVernunft 
gilt, and p. 110, line 2, istein solchGewUrm und Ge- 
8 c h w U I m. See also p. 4G, line 3. — " I do not here complain that 
at Rome, tlie command of God and the Christian law is contemned, 
for things arc not in so favorable a state in Christendoni, especially 
at Rouje, that we may complain in respect to things so elevated. 
Nor do 1 complain that natural or civil law and reason are of no ac- 
count ; everything is depressed to still lower depths (Rome is sunk- 
en below that too). 1 complain that they do not even observe their 
own pretended canonical law, which, however, is in itself, pure tyr- 
anny, avarice and luxury, rather than law" (right). 



ADDRESS TO THE GERMAN NOBILITY. 113 

Ud}e ^vad)t ijt, mef)r benn eiit 5Rerf)t. Sa^ n^otten xoix 
fcben. 

@^ f)a6en t)or Seiteit' beittfdie ^aifer «nb prflen ber^ 
tt)ittiget bem ^\i6j^e bie 5{nnaten auf alte ?et)en beutfcfjer 
Tiation einjiine()mctt,ba^ ill bie §d(fte be^ 3infe^ beg erjleit 
Sabrei^, auf einem jegtidieu ?eben. 2)ie aSewilligung aber 
i)la(fogcfcf)eben, bag ber ^ab\i burd) fo(d) grogeg ®e[b foffte 
fammefn eineit @d)a6, ju (Ireiteu triber bie Xiirfen unb 
Uugtaiibigen, bie (Sbrit^enbeit jit fd)it^en, auf ba^ bem Slbel 
ttid)t ju fd)tDer witrbe, arteiu ju flreiteu, foubern bie ^rie^? 
^erfd)aft aud) etoag baju tijatc. ©otdjer guteu eiufdftigen*^ 

*Vor Zeiten. Vordem, vor diesem and v o r m a 1 s, 
all agree in expressing indefinitely time prior to the present, without 
intimating whether it is near or remote. Vor Z e i t en refers 
to a former period that is somewhat remote; and vor Alters to 
one very remote, anciently. " In a former age, German emperors 
and princes allowed the pope to receive annats from all the fiefs [i. e. 
the larger benefices] of the German nation, that is, half the income 
of the first year from each fief [after passing into new hands]. But 
this permission (the permission so) was granted, that the pope might, 
by so ample a contribution, raise a fund for carrying on war against 
the Turks and infidels [and] defend Christendom, in order that it 
might not be too burdensome to the nobility to carry on the war 
alone, but that the priesthood might come to their aid." This last cir- 
cumstance requires that the word, L e h e n, jitf, as so often elsewhere, 
should be restricted to ecclesiastical fiefs. Furthermore, the word 
A n n a t e n relates only to ecclesiastical estates. The annats were 
ordinarily the entire income of a benefice. In this instance there 
was a special concordat between the pope and the Empire, restricting 
the contribution to half the income, if Luther's statement is correct. 
But we find no such concordat ; and as the annats varied according 
to the arbitrary rates of the pope and sometimes fell below the in- 
come of the year, Luther probably put them at the very lowest esti- 
mate, not aiming at strict accuracy in a matter so common and yet 
so variable. 

2 Einfaltigen A n d a c h t. An appeal to the pride of the 
German nobility. Their very piety and simplicity had been abused 
by the intriguing court of Rome. 

10* 



114 SELECTIONS FROM LUTHER. 

9(nbacf)t ber beiitfcf)ctt Elation habcn bte ^a6(le bajit ge^ 
6raucf)t, bag fTe bibber mehr benn bitnbert S^btc^ fo(cf) ®e(b 
cinc^enommen^ unb nun einen frf)ulbigcn unb t)erpflid)tetcn 
3in^ intb 9(uffat3 barau^ gemacfit, imb nid)t attein iiichW 
gefamme(t,2 fonbern barauf (^ejltiftet t)ief ©tdnbe unb Stent:? 
ter ju 9?om, bie iamit jdl)rficb, aU ani einem (5rbjin^, ju 
bcfofbcn. 

SGenn mait nun wiber bie Ziivten ju flreiten t^orgiebt, fo 
fenben jTe^ beran^ SSotfcbaft, @e(b ju fammefn, baben 'oicU 
mat and) Slbfag beran^ 8^frf)irft, eben mit berfetben garbe 

'Mehr denn handert Jalire. "In the year 1318, pope 
John XXII. published a constitution in which he reserved for himself 
one year's income of all the non-elective benefices, (of all those who 
are inferior to the bishops) pro hecessitatibus ecclesiae Romanae.'' — 
Planck. Long before that, each bishop, consecrated at Rome, paid 
for the ceremony his first year's income. At the time of the Coun- 
cil of Constance in 1417, these contributions had become so estab- 
lished by usage as to be claimed as regular taxes, which Planck af- 
firms had become necessary " to support the thousands of officials, 
reporters, assistants, commissaries, secretaries and copyists of the 
Roman court." The abuse continued, notwithstanding all the efforts 
of the councils of Constance and of Basle to the contrary. Planck's 
Gescllschafls-Verfassung, V. 572 — 793. 

•Nicht allein nichts gesammelt, etc., "not only 
have collected no fund [for the w^ar against the Turks] but have used 
the money to found departments and offices at Rome, which are to be 
paid with it annually, as if from a perpetual tax.'' H a b e n is to be 
supplied after g c s t i f t e t and referred to the preceding participles, 
eingenommen, gemacht and gesammelt; and s i n d 
is to be supplied after zu besolden. Such omissions of tlie aux- 
iliary verb are mostly limited to subordinate clauses, and are rarely 
to be found in the principal sentence or clause. 

^ So senden sie, etc, " They despatch messengers to col- 
lect money, and have often sent out indulgences, with just the same 
pretext of carrying on (to carry on) war against the Turks." — 
S c h i c k e n, means merely to send away persons or things. Sen- 
den means to send persons for accomplishing some 5/7Cc/a/ o/{/>r/, 
and is therefore a word of more elevated character, and implies a mon 
honorable office in the person sent. 



ADDRESS TO THE GERIMAN NOBILITY. 115 

mibcr bte Surfeit jit flreiten, meirtenb, bie totten Deutfcheit 
foffcn imenblirf) tobte ©tocfnarren 6[ei6en,i nur immer ®etb 
geben, ibrem nnausfprecbfichen ®eij genitg tbun, ob mx 
greirf) otfentnd) feben, bag n>eber 9J[nnatcn nocf) 2l6(a^, @elb, 
itocf) adci^ 9Inbere, ein 5;^et(er VDtber bie ^titrfett, fonbern att^ 
jumat in ben (gacf, bem ber SSobcrt aii^ ifl, fomntt ; (iigen, 
triigcn, fcfeeu inib madien mit itn^ SSi'mbe, ber jTe ntcf)t em 
5^aar brett ^u halten gebenfen ; ba^ mug barnact) ber ^eif^ 
tge ?tame Sbrij^i itnb (St- ^etrt 3ICe^ getban baben. 
^^tem, barnad) ijl getbeift it^orben ba^ 3^t)r2 ^tt)ifd)en bem 

^Unendlich todte Stocknarrenbleiben, " forever 
remain senseless (lifeless), arrant fools, and always (nur gives in- 
tensity to immer) give money, and satisfy their inexpressible ava- 
rice, although we clearly see, that neither annats, nor indulgence- 
money, nor collections [taken up by the B o t s c h a f t], nor any- 
thing else, a farthing of it, goes against the Turks, but it goes all of 
it together into that sack which lias no bottom ; — [they] lie, deceive, 
make laws and treaties, not a hair of which do they intend to observe. 
All that, consequently, the sacred name of Christ and St. Peter must 
have done." Stock gives intensity to the word to which it is pre- 
fixed, like our word stone, in stone-Olind, etc. O e f f e n 1 1 i c h is used 
in its original signification, openly, before the eyes of all. The omis- 
sion of s i e before 1 a g e n is abrupt, and would not now be con- 
sidered as allowable. For an explanation of this use of s e t z e n see 
p. 11, Note 5 and p. 94, Note 7. D e r is in the genitive plural, for 
which d e r e r is now used, and is governed byHaar breit. See 
p. 47, Note 5. A 1 1 e s near the end, agrees with das at the be- 
ginning of the clause. 

*Darnach ist getheilt worden das Jahr, etc. 
In the Vienna Concordat of 1448, it was agreed that besides all those 
benefices, which were reserved for the disposal of the pope, to be 
conferred according to his pleasure, he should have one half of the 
remainder, the other half to belong to the ordinary authorities. Those 
which became vacant in the even months of the year, namely, Janu- 
ary, March, etc., were to fall to the latter ; and those which became 
vacant in the odd months, February, April, etc., to fall to the pope. 
These were called the P a p s t-M o n a t e, or menses papales. The 
pope sold these places to the highest bidder at public auction ! — Eich- 
horn's Staats-und Rechtsgeschichte, Vol. III. p. 543. 



116 SELECTIONS FROM LUTHER. 

^^a6jl iinb rcgierenbcn Sifct)efcn unb ©tiftcn, ba^ bcr ^>abfl 
fed)^ gOicuate l)at im 3abr, cinen urn ben anbcrti/ ju t)er^ 
Ieil)cn bie ?et)en, bie in fcinem ^onat t^erfaUen, bamit fafl 
aUe ?eheu binein nad) 5Kcm tDcrbcn gegogen, fonbertid) bie 
aUerbeften ^>fritnben unb 2)ignitdten* Unb t)ocid)c^ einmal 
fo nad) JHom fatten, bie femmen barnad) nimmer n)ieber be^^ 
rau^, ob fie binfort nimmer in be^ ^abft^ 9)?onat tjerfatten, 
bamit ben ©tiften 'oici jn fnrj (}efd)iebt,2 nnb i)T: eine red)te 
Dftduberei/ bie il)r Dorj^enommen bat, nid)t^ t)erand jn laf^ 
fen. 2}arnm ijlt fie fafl reif, unb ifl bol)e 3^it, bap man bie 
^abft^Wlonate gar abtl)xic^ unb 3J(ffe^, n^a^ babnrd) nad) 
9tom gefommen ifl, n^ieber berau^reige, 
X)cnn giirflen unb 5tbe[ fcUen barauf fei)n,^ ba^ ba^ ge^^ 

^Einen umden andern, " every other, or second one." — 
D a m i t, whereby, 

'Und welch e, etc. " And such as once fall to Rome, these 
never come back (out) again, though they never afterwards become 
vacant in the pope's months." 

^Damit den Stiften viel zu kurz geschieht, "by 
which these institutions come short of their rights," i. e. are deprived 
of their rights. Literally " it comes far too short to the institutions, 
or religious establishments." The word kurz is often used in a 
peculiar way ; as, k u r z h a 1 1 e n, " to hold one by a short rope," 
or to allow him little freedom. Den ktlrzeren Ziehen, "to 
draw the shorter lot," or to be excelled or overcome. Zu kurz 
k o m ni e n, " to come short of what is due," or to suffer injur}^ or 
loss. E i n e n z u kurz g e s c h e h e n, " to turn out to the in- 
jury of one." 

* Und [es] ist eine rechte Ran here i, etc., " and it is 
downright robbery, which has proposed to itself to let nothing escape. 
Therefore it has nearly reached its acme, and it is high time," etc. 
1 h r is here used instead of s i c h, the personal pronoun feminine 
in the dative for the reflective pronoun. II e r a u s, out of its hands. 
Und [c b] ist h o h e z e i t. 

* Uarauf scyn, "be [intent] upon this," a form of expression 
not now in common use, and similar to d a r a u f s e h e n, except 
that it is much stronger. Und die [die]," and those who abuse 
their privilege, be deprived of it." 



ADDRESS TO THE GERMAN NOBILITY. 117 

fltof)[ne ©lit wcvie wicbcv gegeben, bte Siebe gcjltraft, itnb 
tie ibxe^S Urfaub^ mi^braiid)en, Urlanb^ bcvanbt n)erben. 
S)dit imb gift e^, fe^ bcr ^abfi: be^ attbern Xage^ fetner @r^ 
n)dl)Iung ^tegel unb ©efelje mad)t in feiner Man^ki^^iainrdj 
uufre ©tifte^ unb ^frihtben geraubt n)erben, ba er fein ^c&ft 
baju bat ; fo fott e^ Diefmebr ge(ten, fo^ ber ^aifer Sari beg 
anbern ZaQC^ feiner ^ronung JHegel unb ©efege gcibe, burrf) 
ganj 2)eutfd)tanb fein ?et)en unb ^fritube mel)r naci) 3iom 

^Halt und gilt es, so, etc. " If it holds [good] and pass- 
es, that the pope on the second day after his election," etc. Halt 
is here explained by gilt, as a synonyme. Tages seiner Er- 
w a h 1 u n g. These words illustrate the wide use of the old geni- 
tive, for which prepositions with their cases are now more commonly 
used. Tages is a noun in the genitive used adverbially, which is 
very common with those woids which designate time and manner. 
" The second day of his election" is a very loose expression for " the 
second day after (n ac h) his election," 

*In seiner Kanzelei. The K a n z e 1 e i or Cancellaria 
is one of the four departments or bureaus of the Roman court. The 
others are the Rota Romana, or court of appeal, the Dataria for the 
distribution of favors, particularly offices, and the Poenitentiaria for 
absolutions. The Cancellaria was both a court of judicature and a 
kind of office of registry , where all official documents were prepared. 
The rules which the pope gave to this bureau for adjusting disputed 
claims were called Kanzeleiregeln. As they were special and 
temporary (being limited to the lifetime of the pope) they were 
not a part of the canonical law, and therefore were not of any bind- 
ing authority, except with the pope's secretaries or registrators. 
Eichhorn 111. 510. A good historical view of the subject will be 
found in Planck, V. 587, Note 14. 

^Dadurch unsre Stifte, etc., "whereby our religious 
foundations and benefices are plundered, as he has no right to do so 
(to it)," etc. This imposition was extensively practised by the popes 
after the time of John XXII. 

*So soil es vielmehr gelten, so, t*so should it much 
rather pass (be valid) that the Emperor Charles V," etc. If the pope's 
authority be pleaded, on the one hand, for the abuse, let the empe- 
ror's be brought forward to confront it, 



118 SELECTIONS FROM LUTHER. 

(affen^ fommen burd) ie6 %ibit^ 5[Uonat, iinb \va^ (nncin gc^ 
fommeu ift, it)icbcr fret tDcvbe, unb Don bcm romifdien D?du^ 
ber eriofet, bajii er dicdjt tjat wn ^mt^ iDegcn feineg 
©rf)n>crt^. 

9tuu t)at ber romifrf)e ©cij:? nub D?aub(tul)P nic()t mogeit 
bie ^cit ertoarten, bag burrf) ^Aab(l:^5l}Jonate aUe ?ehen bin^ 
eiit fdnien, cine^ narf) bem anbern, fonbcnt eitet nad) feinem 
unfdttigcn ^iGanll-, bag er fie alTe auf^ ^iirjefte bmeitt 
reipe, unb iiber bie 2lmta en unb 2Bonate eiueu fo(rf)en ^unb 
erbad)t,3 bag bie ?eben unb ^friinbe nod) breierlei 3B3eife ju 
9?om bet)aftet n>erben : 

* Lassen, for zu lassen, (Gesetze, kein Lehen 
nach Rom kommen zu lassen) is in the infinitive and de- 
pendent on Gesetze, The form of the imperative is, by a change 
in the construction (anacoluthon), used in the second member (w e r- 
d e) which is connected to lassen by u n d, " gave rules and laws 
in all Germany to let no fief or benefice go any longer to Rome, on 
account of the pope's month, and let, what is already gone thither, 
become free again, and be recovered from the Roman plunderer. To 
this he (the emperor) is entitled by virtue of his sovereignty (sword)." 

^Nun hat der romische Gei z-u nd Raubstuhl, 
etc. " Now the seat of avarice and plunder at Rome could not wait 
for the time that all the fiefs might come in one after another, through 
the pope's months, but, in compliance with his insatiable appetite 
(belly), he hurries on that he may in the shortest time bring them 
witliin his clutches," etc. Hat mogen for hat g e m o c h t, 
has been able. See p. 24, Note 1, and Gram. p. 260, med. Er war- 
ten means, to xcait to the end, or till the time arrives. W a r t e n is 
to wait simply. Nach must not be translated as if it were followed 
by an accusative, which would give a ludicrous meaning here. 

^ £ i n e n s o 1 c h e n Fund e r d a c h t [hat], " has invented 
such a device." Are the cliargos, made in this paragraph, false or 
malignant .'' Let us Jiear tiie judgment of one of the most candid of 
historians. *' In every misapplication which the popes now (13th, 
century) made of their power, money was tlie object. Every new 
operation which they performed was one of extortion, and every new 
act of oppression, was, on their part, a financial speculation. — These 
oppressions were so intolerable, and the evils which grew out of 



ADDRESS TO THE GERMAN NOBILITY. 119 

3um crimen, fo, ber fo erne ^friinbe ^at^ jit 3{om ober aitf 
bem 2Bege pirbt/ biefetbe ntii^ etDig etgen bkiben be^ xh 
wifd)eu Crduberifd)en) ©tul)!^, foKt^ td) fagen,^ unb n>elten 
benned) nicf)t D?duber beigen ; fo fo(cf)e 9?duberet Dtiemanb 
je geboret nod) gefefen l)at 

3itm ainbent, fo, ber ein ?eben hat^ ober iiberfommt, ber 
be^ ^abjlte^ ober (5arbtnd(e ©efmbe ift, ober, fo er jut)or 
ein ?el)en bat, unb barnad) ^ab^t^ ober Sarbtnafg ©effnbe 
mirb. 5Jtun n)er mag be^ ^afcjlg unb ber Sarbindfe ©efinbe 
jdbleU/^ fo ber ^abjl:, n)enn er nur fpagieren rettet, bei ixcU 

them so crying, that no one could excuse them on the ground of the 
necessities of the court of Avignon." — Planck, V. 574. 

^ Z \i Rom oder auf dem Wege stirbt. "In 1266, 
Clement IV. issued a decree in wiiich he reserved for the chair of 
St Peter provisionem omnium beneficiorum apud Curiam vacantiutn, 
i. e. the right of presentation to all those places whose incumbents 
died at the court of Rome, or within two daj^s' journey of it. This 
leservation was made at a time when multitudes were resorting to 
Rome on pilgrimages, and most frequently fell upon the richest bene- 
fices, for the holders of these most frequently visited Rome." — Planck, 
V. 580. Eichhorn, II. 508. 

^Romischen (rauberischen) Stuhls, sollt' ich 
s a g e n. A play upon the word, — " the r o m i s c h e n (or as T should 
say, rauberischen) Stuhl s." The genitive Stuhls is here 
governed by e i g e n, — *' always continue to be the pope's own (pe- 
culiar to the pope)." See p. 3, Note 5. U n d [s i e] w o 1 1 e n, 
etc., " and still they refuse to be called robbers, though no one ever 
heard or read of such robbers." 

^So der, einen Lehen hat, etc. ["It also belongs to 
the pope] if he has a fief, who belongs to the retinue of the pope or 
of his cardinals, or if he before held (holds) a fief, and afterwards 
becomes attached to the court of the pope or of his cardinals." In 
this paragraph, the first der is a demonstrative and the second a rel- 
ative pronoun. At the beginning of the preceding paragraph, the 
demonstrative which is nominative to stirbt, is omitted. 

'^Gesinde zahlen. in the bull of Benedict XII. to which 
Luther here alludes, the pope himself kindly furnished a list of those 
who are to be regarded as Gesinde. He names the ofl[iciales, 
camerarios, vicecancellarios, notaries, auditores literarum contradicta- 



120 SELECTIONS FROM LUTHER. 

obcr mv taufcnb 5D?au(reuter urn \id) bat, trofei atten ^ai^ 
fern unb ^ouigcn. 2^cnu 6l)nftu^ iinb &. ^Vter giengeH 
ju gag, auf bag ibre ©tattl)alter bcflomebr ju pract)ten unb 
ju prangcn^ batten. 9tnn ijat ber @eij tveiter fid) extin^ 
get,3nnb fc()ajfet,bag and) brangen SSiete ben 3camen t)aben,* 
:pdbjKid)en 03ejTnbe^, n)ie jn 5Kcm, bag nnr in alien Drten 
bag bloge fd)altbaftige 3B6rt[ein, ^>ab(l^ ©efinbe, aHe ?e* 
Iben an ben r6nnfd)en Stnbl bringen nnb etDiglid) f)efteii 
fott. ©inb ba^^ nid)t i:)erbrieg(id)e, tenflifd)e giinbe ? (ge^ 

rum, auditores causarum palatii apostolici, correctores et scriptorea 
literarum apostolicarum, poenitentiarios, abbrevialores, commensalet, 
capellanos, et quoscunque alios legates, nuntios, rectores in terris ec- 
clesiae Romanae, sive thesaurios et collectores liactenus missos et in 
posterum mittendos ! Planck, V. 586 adds : " The number of the 
courtiers was countless, and most of them had several benefices apiece; 
but to increase the number, the title of officiates and curiales was 
conferred upon hundreds, who had no real connection with the court." 

* T r o t z, generally signifies JTi spite of^ notwitlistanding. But it 
also means, assuming an cqualitij witli^ or even superiority over^ and 
8o here. — Bei drei-oder vier tausend, a little above, 
means, " not far from three or four thousand." B e i used with ref- 
erence to numbers, is indefinite, and is nearly the same as a n, or 
g e g e n in the same connections. 

* Aufdass ihre Statt halter destomehr zu prachten 
und zu prangen, "in order that their vicars might, so much the 
more, have the means of making, or be able to make, a parade and 
show." The irony is skilfully applied. 

^ ErklOget. The word erklUgen, which is not found in the 
dictionaries, must not be confounded with the frequentative erklQ- 
geln, which means to invent by subtlety^ and to rcjine in speculation. 
Er, prefixed to an adjective with the addition of the verbal termina- 
tion en, forms a derivative verb which means to come into that state 
expressed by the adjective. Thus k 1 u g, wise; crklugen, to be- 
come wise, which by a change of the vowel becomes a causative verb, 
e r k 1 a g e n, to make wise. S i c h e r k 1 g e n, to render one's se{f 
wise, \. e. to become wise. See Gram. p. 241). 4. for the first change, 
and p. 41). 1. for the second. 

* Den Namen haben. See p. 1 1 D, Note 4, end. 

* Das, when used indefinitely, is indeclinable. See Gram. p. 303. 



ADDRESS TO THE GERMAN NOBILITY. 121 

f)Ctt n)ir ju,i fo fot( 5!}?amj, ?!}ta(]beburq, S)albcx\iait, gar 
fein nad) 5Hom fommen, unb ba^ (§arbina(at tt)ener genitg 
bejal)(t merben* Sarnacf) iDoKcn mir al(e beutfrf)e 23ifc{)ofe, 
garbtna(e macf)ett, bag nid)t^ braiifjen btetbe. 

3um britten/2 mo urn ein ?et)en eiii ^aber ffcf) ju D?om 
anc|efangen, tveld^c^^ id) acf)te, fajl bte gemeinfle unb gro^ 
gefie ©trafc^ ijl, bie ^friinbe nad) D?om ju bringen* Deittt 

* Sehen wir zu, etc. ^^ Let us see j or behold I [th-e Romans are 
supposed to say] ; then Mayence, Magdeburg, and Halberstadt shall 
be a good hall for Rome [the funds of these large sees being appro- 
priated to make a cardinal] and the cardinalate shall be paid for dearly- 
enough. After that, we will make all the German bishops cardi« 
nals, so that nothing shall be left out of our hands." 

2 Zum dritten, etc. "Thirdly [this takes place] if a contro- 
versy respecting an ecclesiastical fief has originated at Rome (which^ 
I think, is well nigh the most common as well as the greatest calam- 
ity), in order to bring the livings to Rome." The first sentences of 
these three paragraphs, beginning with, zum ersten, zum an- 
d e r n and zum d r i 1 1 e n, all taken together, are in apposition with 
the words dreierlei Weise, at the close of the preceding para- 
graph, and are an explanation of that expression. This will be ren- 
dered obvious by the following arrangement. Dass die Lehen 
und Pfrdnde nach dreierlei Weise zu Rom behaftet 
sind} — zum ersten, so, der so eine Pfrande hat, etc.; 
zum andern, so der ein Lehen hat, etc.; zum dritten, 
wo um ein Lehen, etc., " that fiefs and prebends are attached to 
Rome in three ways; viz. 1. If he who has such a prebend dies at 
Rome, or on the way, it must always belong to the Roman see. 2. If 
he who possesses or obtains a fief, belongs to the retinue of the pope or 
of the cardinals, or if he had one before, and afterwards becomes at- 
tached to the retinue of the pope or of the cardinals, [that also becomes 
the property of the Roman see]. 3. [The same is true], if a litigation 
respecting a fief commences at Rome," etc. 

^ Angefangen [hat], welches, etc. Welches, referring 
to the preceding clause as an antecedent, introduces a parenthetical 
remark. 

* Grosseste Strafe. We cannot give a better comment upon 
these words than an abstract from Planck, V. 651, on the subject. 
" So far did the unnatural extension of the judicial functions of Rome 

11 



122 SELECTIONS FROM LUTHER. 

too \)iex^ fcin i^aber ijl, ftnbet man iinjciMige 95u6ctt ju 
D?om, bie ibaber au^ ber @rbe graben,^ unb ^fritnben an^ 
greifeit, tt>o jTe nur roolteu, ba mand^er frommc ^riefler feiue 
^friinbe mu^ i^erlieren, ober mit etner ©umme ©cfbe^ ben 
5jaber abfanfen, eine 3^^ff<^ng fofrf)^^ ?eben3 mit j!>aber^ 
recf)t eber llnred)!^ Derbaftet, mug and) be^ romifc^en 
©tuhl^ en)ig eigen fei)n* (S^ ^x)dre nicf)t 2Cunber, bag @ott 

go, that all other courts of judicature in the church were almost an- 
nihilated. Cases were taken in the first instance from the inferior 
courts, without any regard to the nature of the trial, even when one 
of the parties protested against it. Sometimes they were taken from 
the lowest courts during trial, no regard being had to the interven- 
ing court of the metropolitan. And finally, instead of the proper and 
legal way of appointing judges from Rome, who should attend to tri- 
als on the spot where they originated, the pope removed the trial to 
Rome, where, to say nothing of the bribes which were necessary to 
any degree of success, the expenses of travel and court-fees were 
enormously augmented." Hence the council of Basle found it ne- 
cessary to decree, that no litigation originating at a distance exceed- 
ing a four day's journey from Rome, should, in the first instance, be 
tried there, but in the appropriate courts where the parties reside ; 
that all appeals should ascend in regular gradation from the lowest 
court to the highest ; and that in appeals to the highest court, the 
pope should not remove the trial to Rome, but appoint a judge to 
hold a court in the place where the parties reside. This Council gave 
a melancholy description of the evils resulting from the abuses com- 
plained of, which is quoted by Eichhorn, III. 522, Note a. 
* Hier, in Germany. 

2 Die Hader aus der Erde graben, " who dig quarrels out 
of the earth, (i. e. who hatch up law-suits) and lay their greedy hands 
on prebends wherever (wo nur) they wish, in which (da in the 
sense of w o) many a pious priest must either lose his living or with 
a large sum of money purchase a respite from lawsuits for a time." 
See the words of Clamangis, p. 109, Note 2. 

3 Sole he s Lehen, with which the participle verba ft et 
agrees, is nominative to muss. 

*Haderrecht oder Unrecht. The word Unreclit is a 
play upon the latter part of the compound lladerrecht; — "a 
court of justice, or rather of injustice." 



ADDRESS TO THE GERMAN NOBILITY. 123 

t)om ^immef (Sd)Vt)efef unb f)oCLifcf)e^ %exxcv regnete, iinb 
9tom m ben aibgrmtb Derfenfte/ tvie er t)or Batten ©ebom 
imb ©omorra tt)at. 3Ba^ fott^ eiit ^abjl: in ber gl)nRen^ 
t)eit, menn man fetner ®ett>alt nicf)t anber^ brand)t, benn 
ju fo(cf)er $anpt^23o^f)eit, nnb er btefeI6en fdjii^et nnb [)anb^ 
ijabct ? D ebfe gitrjlen nnb §erren, me (ange xooiit i^v 
ener ?anb nnb ?ente foIcf)en reigenben SBotfen ojfnen nnb 
frei faflfen ? 

©a nnn^ fofcf)e ^raftifen ntcf)t genng n^ar, nnb bent @eij 
bie ^cit jn fange marb, aCe 93t^tbnmer t)injnreigen, ^at 
mein (ieber ©eij bed) fo t)ie[ erfnnben, ba^ bie 93i^tt)iiimer 
mit 3tamen angen, nnb mit bent ©rnnb nnb S3oben jn 5Hont 
finb. Unb ba^ a(fo fein S3ifrf)of tnag beftdtiget n)erben, er 
fanfe benn mit grower ©nmme Oelbe^ ba^ ^affinm, nnb 
t)erpflirf)te jTd) mit gren(icf)en S'iben jn einem eigenen ^nec^t 
bem ^ab(lt. 25aber fommt e^, ba^ tein S3ifd)of tt)iber ben 

^ Regnete — versenkte, imperfect subj unctive, " should rain , 
should sink." 

2 Soil, is often, as here, used in the sense ofhelfen ntttzen, 
" What is the utility of a pope, if men make no other use of his pow- 
er than for such arch-iniquity, and he (himself) defends and prac- 
tises jt ?" 

^ Da nun, etc. "Now as these tricks were not sufficient, and 
as time became too long to avarice for seizing all the bishoprics, the 
dear creature (my dear avarice) found out ail this (so much) namely, 
that the bishoprics were nominally foreign, but in truth and reality 
(in ground and soil) were at Rome ! and that thus no bishop could be 
confirmed, unless he purchase with a great sum the pallium and ob- 
ligate himself with horrible oaths to (be) an own servant to the pope." 
Luther does not introduce these usages in a chronological, but in a 
rhetorical order. This last practice is older than that of annats. 
War, after a plural nominative, is a little irregular, unless a noun 
in the singular be understood as a predicate. Hinzureissen is 
dependent on lange. Grund und Boden, being capable of a 
double sense can be but imperfectly rendered into English. For the 
idiom, er kaufe denn, see Gram. pp. 315, 362. For the peculiar 
use of zu, see Gram. p. 338. 1. and note. 



124 SELECTIONS FROM LUTHER. 

^abft barf ijanicln. ®a^ haben^ hie 9?6mer and) gefurf)t 
tnit bem (Jibe, imb jTnb atfo bie al[errcid)jlen SBi^tbiimer in 
(Srf)ulb unb aSerberben gefcmmen. 5!)Jainj, l)6re icf), giebt 
20,000 ©nfben ; ba^ finb mix je SHomer,^ al^ mid) bimft.3 
©ie l)a6cn e^ n)ol)I t)or 3eiten gefel^t im geifKid)en '3tcd)t,'^ 
ba^ ^attium umfonfl ju geben, be^ ^ab)l^ ©effnbe tt^cnii^ 
gern, iSaber minbern, ben Stiften nnb 33ifcf)6fen ibre grei^ 
I}eit fajjen* 2lber ba^ ir>oltte nid)t ®elb tragen ;^ barnm ijl: 
bag S5(att nmgefebrt,^ nnb i]l ben S5ifct)ofen nnb ©tiften 
atte ©en)a(t genommen,"^ fifeen tt>ie bie St^cfnn^ l)a6en tt)eber 

^Dashaben. Das seems to refer to the preceding sentence on- 
ly, to the obligation of the bishop never to oppose the pope. Also, 
thus, refers not to the same, but more particularly to purchasing the 
pallium at great cost, so that the richest sees were ruined and ren- 
dered bankrupt. 

^ Das sind mirje Romer, "that is a genuine specimen of 
the Romans," or " that is the way the Romans manage." On the 
use of das, as nominative to sind, see Gram. p. 303. On mir as 
an expletive, see Gram. p. 348. Je was often employed by Luther 
for j a, which is now a provincialism. 

3 Mich dankt. See p. 22, Note 3. 

* Gesetzt im geistlichen Recht, etc. See p. II, Note 5. 
" They (the Romans, or rather the church) have indeed decided in 
the canonical law to give the pallium without charge, to reduce the 
number of the pope's dependents, to diminish litigation (at Rome by 
transferring it to the bishops and) to leave," etc. If this refers, as it 
probably does, to the concordat between the pope and the Council of 
Constance, the statement is a little exaggerated. To the decisions of 
the Council of Basle, which went much farther than those of the 
Council of Constance, the pope never gave his assent. 

^Geld tragen,'to bear, bring forth or yield money,' a figurative 
expression, for which eintragen is now used, as applied to money. 

* 1st das Blatt umgekehrt, the leaf is turned over, i. e. the 
tables are changed. Blatt in such idioms means, the case, fortune, 
thiuirs. " To turn over a new leaf conveys a different idea. Das 
Blatt hat sich gewendet, fortune has changed. 

' Den Bischofen — genome n, " taken /ro/n the bishops." 
See p. 52, Note 4. — S i tze n, i. e. the bishops. 



ADDRESS TO THE GERMAN NOBILITY. 125- 

^mt^ Wtad)t nod) SEerfe, fonbern regieren atte^ 2}tttge bie 
S)anxitbnbcn ju 9?om, and) frf)ier be^ ^iiftcx^ unb ©locfnerg 
Slmf2 tn atten ^itcf)en ; atte §aber n)erben nad) SHom gejo^^ 
geit, thnt Sebermann buret) ^abjlg ©emalt, vvae er tt>itt. 

S3i^{)er haben n)tr t)erflanben, n)te ^e mit ben ^frimbeit 
l)anbe(tt, bte Derfalten unb fog merben.^ 5tun erfallt^ bent 
jarten ©eij ju n:)entg (o^, barum ^at er feme SSorfichtigfett 
erjeigt aucf) tn ben ?eben, bte nod) befeflfen ffnb invd) tf)rer 
aSerwefer, ba^ btefetben and)^ to^ fei)n ntitflen, 06 jte \d)cn 
nid)t fo^ ftnb, unb bag mand)erfet 2Betfe* 

3um erjlen fauert er, mo fette ^raBenben jTnb ober SSt'g^ 

^Regieren alle, etc., "the great ones (Hauptbuben) at 
Rome control all things." In modern style it would be Es regi- 
ren alle, etc. So a few lines above, und (es) sind also die 
allerreiches ten Bisthtlmer. 

' Des Kttsters — Amt, " even the sacristan's and sexton's of- 
fice.'* That J e d e r m a n n, " every one [at Rome] by the aid, or 
through the power of the pope, does what he pleases." 

^Die verfallen und los werden. PfrOnden, or Le- 
hen verfallen, when the occupant by any neglect or violation 
of his trust, loses his title to them; they werden los, when in 
any way they become vacant, e. g. by the death of the occupant. 
The latter expression is more generic than the former. 

^ Nun erfallt, etc., " now too few (too little, zu we nig) be- 
come vacant for gentle avarice (personified) ." E r f a 1 1 e n as an ac- 
tive verb, means to cut down, to slay, and sich erfallen, to be cut 
doicn, or to fall. But here it is a neuter verb and refers not to a per- 
son, but to a thing, for which the lexicons give no explanation. Its 
etymology will sufficiently explain its peculiar use here. Er as a 
prefix shows that the action expressed by the verb is for some one, 
for his benefit, (dem Geitz, in this instance). See Gram. p. 248. 
The prebends, or ecclesiastical fiefs fall to avarice, (i. e. the pope). 

^ Dass dieselben auch, etc. Dass depends on Vorsich- 
tigkeit. " Therefore has he exercised (shown) his foresight in re- 
spect to (ecclesiastical) fiefs, which are still held by their incumbents, 
that they also should become vacant (though they are not so) and 
that in various ways." (Auf) mane her lei Weise, in many 
a way. 

11* 



126 SELECTIONS FROM LCTTHER. 

t^umer, biircf) ei'nen 2((teni ober ^ranfeti, ofcer and) mit 
einer erbicf)tetcn Untitd)tigfeit befejjen ; fcemfelben giebt fcer 
j^eilige ©tubt cineit Seabjutor, b. u : einen 3l}?ttl)etfer obne 
feinen 2Biffeu unb 2)anf, ju @ute bem goabjutor, barum, 
fca^ er be^ ^ab(I^ ©ejTnbe ifl, ober @etb barum gtebt, cber 
fonflt mit einem romifd[)eu gro{)nbicnfl tjcrbienct hat. 2)a 
mug bcnn aiQch^n^ frete Srn)at)(ung be^ (5apite(^, obcr 
3?erf)t be^, ber ik ^frimben ^at ju tjerlei^en, unb Silled uur 
uarf) $)iom. 
3um anberu, l)ei^t ein 2Q6rtteiu gommeubeu,^ b* i^ : 

'Durch einen Alten. " He lies in wait where there are fat 
prebends or bishoprics, possessed by (bessessen durch, a rare 
use of durch) an old incumbent, or an invalid, or even one of a 
pretended incompetency. A man who belongs to the retinue of the 
pope, or who has given him money, or done him some other service, 
is appointed coadjutor (colleague) where he is not needed, but is ap- 
pointed merely /or Ids own iencfiC (zu gute dem Coadjutor, 
for good to the coadjutor^ literally). For a similar use of z u gute, 
see Gram. p. 334. 

' Da muss denn abgehen, etc. " These then must vanish, 
a free election (of the bishop) by the chapter, or the right of him 
(d e s s for d e s s e n) who has the prebend to bestow (i. e. the pa- 
tron) ; and everything (goes) towards Rome." 

'Heisst einWortlein, etc. " There is a little word called 
commendam.'' The canonical law often stood in the way of the most 
advantageous sale of benefices. A rich person, not ordained and 
therefore not competent to hold a benefice, would often offer for a 
place, which he particularly desired, much more than others would 
give. So sometimes one of the secular clergy would particularly de- 
sire one which could lawfully be held only by one of the regular 
clergy and vice versa. To make sure of such advantageous bargains, 
the places were sold under the title of covirncndains, respecting which 
the canonical law said notiiing by way of prohibition. By resorting 
to such evasions the pope could gratify a prince who wished a place 
for one of his young sons, (he might be but eight years of age), or a 
canon who wished to enjoy four or five incompatible incomes. What 
it was unlawful for one to hold as an actual incumbent, he could hold 
as a protector under the title of a comvicndam. The duties of the 



ADDRESS TO THE GERMAN NOBILITY. 127 

mnn ber ^ai]t emem Sarbinal ober fonjl feiner (Sinem,i cin 
reirf)e(^, fetter Mio^lex ober ^ird)e beftet)(t ju bebaften, (^feid^ 
al^ tt>enn tcf) bir ^unbert ©ulbeu ju 6ef)alten t^dte.^ £)ie^ 
i^ci^t^ i>a^ Moilev nid)t geben nod) tjertei^en, aud) ntcf)t t)er^ 
jloren, nod) ©otte^btenjlt abtl)nn, fonbern aCein jn be^a(ten 
t^un ; nid)t ba^ cr eg 6en)abren ober banen foK, fonbern 
bie ^Vrfonen angtreiben,^ bte ©liter nnb ^in\en einne{)nten, 
nnb irgenb einen Slpojltaten, i)ertanfenen Wond) t)ineinfe^en, 
ber fiinf ober fed)g ©nfben beg 3^f)tg nimmt, nnb jT^t beg 
2!ageg in ber ^trd)e, t^erfanft ben ^ifgern 3^^rf)en nnb fSilb^ 
lein, ba^ meber ©tngen nod) ?efen bafelbjl nte^r gefd)ief)t 
2)enn mo bag f)ieg ^(ojlter Derjloren nnb ©ottegbtenfl ai^ 
t^nn, fo mit^te ntan ben ^abjt nennen einen SSerjltorer ber 
gbrijlen^eit nnb Slbt^ater ©ottegbienjltg. Xicnn er treibet 
eg fiirn)a^r mad)tig. 2)ag n^are eine l^arte ©prad)e ju 
Dtom ; barnm ntng man eg nennen ein Sommenben ober 
S3efe[)[nng, ba6 ^fojler jn be^aften. :Ciefer ^(ojlter fann 
ber ^ab|l mv ober mefjr^ in einem S^^re jn (Sommenben 

station would, in such cases, be scandalously performed, if perform- 
ed at all, by a cheap vicar. Thus everything sacred was made to 
yield to avarice. — Planck, V. 621, 

^ Oder sonst seiner Einem, "or to some other one of 
his dependents,'* literally, "or otherwise to one of his," a construc- 
tion that has ceased to be very common. 

'Zu behalten thate. Thunis here used in the sense of 
put^ commit, " As if 1 should commit to you a hundred guldens." 
A preposition as, a u f or in generally follows instead of a dative 
when the word is used in this sense. See p. 20, Note 3. 

^ Diess heisst, etc., " this is not called giving, etc. (although 
it is so)." 

*Personen austreiben, monks, if ii be a cloister, the per- 
sons belonging to a chapter, if it be a cathedral institute. G a t e r 
und Zinsen, the property and income appropriated to the sup- 
port of such persons. 

* Deiser Kloster — vier oder mehr, " four or more of 
these cloisters can the pope make into commendam^ in one year, 
in which (d a)," etc. 



128 SELECTIONS FROM LUTHER. 

macf)en, ba ciiie^ me{)r benit 6000 ©iitben ©nfommen fiat 
SlCfo me()reni jTe ju JKom ©otte^bienft, unb cxljaltcn bie 
^lofler ; ba^ lernet jTd) in beutfdien ?anben and). 

3um britten, finb etltdje^ ?e[)en, bie jTe I)eigen Incompati- 
bilia, bie nacf) Drbnintg geij^licf)en 9?ecf)t^ tticf)t mogen mit 
einauber bel)alten iDerben. 2lf^ ba finb jn^ei ^^farren, jn^ei 
S5i^tl)iimer nnb bergfeirf)en. §ier brel)et fid) ber f)ei[igc 
r6mifd)e ©tnbl nnb @eij a(fo an^ bent geifllid)en 5Ked)t, 
ba^3 er il)m ©(offen mad)t, bie l)eigen unio et incorporatio, 

^ Also mehren, etc. *• This is the way (thus, also) they pro- 
mote religious worship, etc. at Rome." Das lernet sich, "one 
learns that, or that is learned in Germany also." This reflective 
form for the passive, with a neuter nominative, is peculiar and limit- 
ed chiefly to colloquial style. 

2 (E s) s i n d e 1 1 i c h e, etc., " there are some ecclesiastical fiefs 
which they call," etc. A 1 s da s i n d, such as. D a s i n d, cannot 
easily be translated without disturbing the sense in English. 

^ Also aus dem — dass, " winds its way (d r e h e t s i c h) m 
this manner (also) out of the canonical law (viz.), it (that it) makes 
glosses to the law, which glosses are (called) unio et incorporation i. e. 
(that) it incor})orates many incompatabilia into one body so that one 
shall be member with another and thus (all) be regarded as one pre- 
bend. Thus they are never more (no longer) incompatabilia y and the 
difliculty with the canonical law is overcome (and help is brought to 
the canonical law), so that it is no longer binding except (d e n n) 
with those only, who do not purchase those glosses (i. e. buy the 
places under those names) of the pope and of his datarium (a sort of 
office or court). Of this sort (d c r A r t) is the unio^ i. e. union, that 
it(der romische Stuhl und Geiz) couples many (of) such 
fiefs together, like a bundle of sticks, on account of which coupling 
they are all regarded as one fief. Thus one may find one courtier at 
Rome, who holds for himself twenty-two parishes, seven provost- 
ships and forty-four prebends besides, all which such a masterly gloss 
helps on, and maintains that it is not contrary to law. Now, what 
the cardinals and other prelates have, let each one consider for him- 
self. Thus must men drain the purses of (to) the Germans, and 
drive out their pruriency (sinful desires)." — A device of the same 
character with the commendam is the unio or incorporation to evade 
the illegality of holding a plurality of benefices, or such as were in- 



ADDRESS TO THE GERMAN NOBILITY. 129 

b* u : ba^ er 'oiel incompatibilia in etitanber (ei6et, ba^ eineg 
be^ anbern ©fieb fei), nub affo gfeicf) aU @tne ^friinbe 
geacf)tct it)erben ; fo finb jTe ttimmer incompatibilia, unb ijt 
bent l)eifigcit geijllid)en 9?erf)t gebotfen, ba^ e^ nicf)t mebr 
binbet, benn attein bci benen, bte fo(cf)e ©loflfen bem ^abjl 
nnb feinem Satan'o nicf)t abfaufen. Ser 2(rt ijl: and) bie 
Unio, b* i : SSereinigung, ba^ er fo(d£)er ?e^ett Diet jufant:^ 
men foppeft, a(^ ein S3unb §o(j, urn tt)e[cf)e^ ^oppet^ n)i(^ 
len jTe atte fi'ir ein ?el)en gebalten merben. aiffo finbet man 
tt)ol)f etnen (Sonrttfanen ju 3?om, ber fitr jTrf) attein 22 ^far^ 
ren, 7 ^rcbjleien nnb 44 ^friinben bajn hat ; n)e(cf)eg aUe^ 
])ilft fetc^e meiflerncf)e ©(oflfe, nnb ijalt^ bag ntcf)t mtber 
5){ecf)t fet). 2Ba^ nnn Sarbindfe nnb anbere ^rdfaten ^a^ 
ben, bebenfe ein Seber felbft. (go foK mann ben 25entfcf)en 
ben Sentef rdnmen nnb ^igel t)ertrei6en. 
Slber alleg, tt)a^ bi^()er gefage^ ift fafl aft nnb gen)6f)n^ 

compatible with each other. As in the time of wars weak dioceses 
were united together to form one strong and prosperous one, so sev- 
eral might be united, and one of them be called the principal and that 
be conferred without any mention of the others in the document, the 
latter being enjoyed as a matter of course. Thus different and in- 
compatible kinds of benefices could be conferred upon a favorite in 
this way. They could be incorporated and that one could be called 
principal which it was lawful for the individual of a particular char- 
acter to hold ; and the others need not be mentioned by name ; their 
funds would find an easy passage to the place of destination. Child- 
ren, and any person, no matter what his character, could be accom- 
modated in this way, by giving them nominally a heneficium simplex^ 
with trifling duties such as the observance of the canonical hours, or 
repeating the breviary, while the heneficium curatum^ which required 
ordinary clerical duties, might be incorporated, and enjoyed without 
service in the name of the former. — Planck, V. 627, 

^Was bisher gesaget (ist), " but all that has been said 
thus far, is well nigh old and has become common at Rome. One 
trick (thing) more has (Roman) avarice invented, which 1 hope (so 
that 1 hope it) will be the last, of which (I hope) it will die." D a- 
ran er erwarge, "of which it will choke to death." The evil 
18 represented as a disease which produces strangulation. 



130 SELECTIONS FROM LUTHER. 

lid) Qeworien ju diom. Stocf) @ine^ i)at ber ®cij erbadi)t, 
bag id) l)offe, foK bac^ ?el3te fci)n, baran er ern)urge^ Ser 
-^ab(l: l)at eiit eble^ giinblein/ bad t)eigt pectoralis reserva- 
tion b, i. : feiucd @emutl)d 25or6et)a{t, et proprius motus, 
imb cigencr '^nt\)mllc bcr ©ewalt Sad gebet a(fo ju r^ 
2Genu ©incr ju ^tom^ ein ?el)cn erfangt, bad it}m n>irb jTgjf 
nivt nub reblicf)er 2Beife jugcfd)ricben, me ba ber SSraucf) 
i(l, fo fommt benn (Siuer, ber ®elb bringet, ober fonfl t)eri* 
bienet l)at, ba nid/t t)on ju fagen ijl, unb begebret bafifelbige 
?el)ett Don bem ^abft, fo giebt er ed tt)m unb nimmt ed bent 
Slnbern. (Sprirf)t man benn, ed fei) nnred)t, fo mug ber 
allerbeiligfte 2Sater fid) entfcf)ufbigen, bag er nid)t fo ojfent^ 
lid) mit ©emaCt n^iber D?ecf)t ju t)anbefn, gejlraft n^erbe/ 
unb fprtd)t : dv i)abc in fetnem ^erjen^ unb ©emiit^ bafj? 

^ Fan die in, diminutive of F u n d, "a precious invention," 
(a noble little invention). Eigener Muthwille der Ge- 
w a 1 1, his own arbitrary power, (arbitrariness of power) . 

^Das gehtalso zu, this takes place thus. Z u g e h e n, 
signifies first, and in common life, to go quick, as ge h z u, hasten 
(or in the vulgar New-England dialect, " be spry"). 2, To close, to 
shut (and sometimes to end, to tcrjiiinatc). 3. To proceed, to take place, 
(but only with reference to manner and generally impersonally), as, 
Wie geht es zu? How does it happen that ; how is it that? 
Q^ui fit ? in Latin. Es geht natOrlich zu, it takes place nat- 
urally. Est geht bunt zu, everything is topsy turvy. See p. 
68, Note 4. 

^Wenn Einer zu Rom, etc. " When one obtains a fief 
(or prebend) at Rome, which is promised to him in writing (which is 
signed and written to him) in good faith (a u f r e d 1 i c h e r W e i se) 
according to custom, tlicre comes another person (Einer) who 
brings money, or otherwise has done some service that is not to be 
named (da n i c h t von, for d a v o n n i c h t, '• of which noth- 
ing is to be said") and desires the same prebend of the pope, and the 
latter gives it to liim and takes it from tlie other." 

* Z\i liandeln, gestraft werde, *' that he be not censured 
for acting (to act, or to have acted) so openly," etc. 

* £r habe in seinem Hertzen, etc., "he had, in his heart 
and mind, reserved that prebend for himself (ihm selbst — vor- 



ADDRESS TO THE GERIMAN NOBILITY. 131 

fe(6e ?e^en tl)m fcf6|t uttb feitter t)otten ®ewait DorBe^alten, 
fo er bocf) fetn ?e6lag juDor ttie baran gebadit nocf) gel)oret 
^at. Unb l)at nun alfo etn ®to^Ietn^ gefnnben, ba^ er in 
eigcner %Vrfon (itgen, triigen, unb 3^bermann dffen unb 
narren mag ; ixni} ba^ alle^ uni:)erfcf)dmt unb ojfenrticf) ; 
unb mii bennccf) ba^ §aupt ber gbriilenl)eit fei)n, ldj]et jTcf) 
init^ ojfcnt{id)en ?ugen ben bofen ®eijl regieren. 

Siefer 5[Rutt)n)iae3 unb fiigenbafte aSorbet)a(t be^ ^a6fl^ 
mad)t nun ju 9?om etn fo(cf)e^ SBefen, ia^ 9tiemanb ba^on 
reben fann. Sa x\l ein ^anfen/ SSerfaufen, 2Bect)feIn, 
!i;anfd)en, D?aufd)en, ?iigen, Jtritgen, SKauben, ®tet)fen, 
^rad)t, ^urerei, SSitberei auf alferlei 2[Beife, ®otte^ 3SeradE)^ 
ttmg, ba^ nid)t inogtict) tjl bent a[ntid)n|l: fdflerficfjer gu 
regieren. @^ ijl ntd)t^ ntit SSenebtg, 2t(torf, 3((fatr,5 ge^ 

behalten) and for his plenary power, although (so — doch) he 
never before, in all his life, thought of it, nor heard of it." 

^ Glosslein, diminutive of Glosse. "And he has now^ so 
invented a fine little gloss, that he can," etc. The diminutive is both 
ironical and contemptuous. 

2 Lasset sich mit, etc. "(and) allows the Evil Spirit with 
open falsehood to rule him." 

^ Dieser Muthwille, etc. "Now (nun, differing widely 
from jetzt) this arbitrary will and pretended reservation of the 
pope [viewed as a nominative singular, because they are but two 
names of the same thing] creates such a disorder (W e s e n) at 
Rome that no one can describe it." Davon reden, /o speak of it, 
has a general sense ; but here the connection gives it a special meaning. 

*Da ist ein Kaufen, etc. '* There is buying, selling, 
money-changing, bartering, carousing (making a tumult), lying, de- 
ceiving, robbing, stealing, extravagant parading, dissoluteness, kna- 
Tery of every sort [and], irreverence for God, so that it is not possi- 
ble for antichrist himself to reign more iniquitously." 

^ Venedig, Altorf, Alkair, Venice, Altorf and Algiers, 
celebrated places of trade, where the love of gain is supposed to be 
stronger than moral principle. Altorf, a small town in the can- 
ton of Uri on the Reuss in Switzerland, was, on account of the 
transportation of goods through it from Germany to Italy, a place of 
much trade. The orthography Alkair forAlgier is no longer 
in use. That place was once a great slave market. 



lS2 SELECTIONS FROM LUTHER. 

geni biefen 5ctt)rmarft imb ^anfbanbet ju 9?oni, o()ne baf 
bort bod) aSentiinft mtb 3lecf)t gcl)alten VDirb ; l)ier gcbet e^, 
tt)ie ber Zenfei felbjl wiK. Unb au^ bent 5!JJecre fliept mm 
in aUc ffiett g(eicf)e itugenb. ©ottten jTd) felcf)e ?eute ttidjt 
billig2 furd)ten Dor ber Reformation unb einem freien (5om 
cilio, unb el)e aUe ^onige unb gitrfteu in einanber l^angen,^ 
bag je nirf)t buret) il)re (^inigfeit ein Soncifium n)crbe ? 
SDBer mag [eiben, bag folct)e feine SSuberei^ an ben $tag 
fomme ? 
3u(e^t ijat ber ^abp^ ju biefen atten ebetn ^anbefn ein 

^ Geg-en, in comparison with, "There is nothing with Venice, 
Altorf and Algiers, (i. e. Venice, Altorf and Algiers, are nothing) in 
comparison with this market and trade, except, however, that there 
(ohne dass dort doch), reason and justice are regarded, 
(while) here everything goes as Satan will have it." Jahrmarkt, 
literally means an annual fair, but by usage it is also employed to des- 
ignate the greater fairs which occur only in a few times in a year to 
distinguish them from the weekly markets. Hence figuratively it 
signifies, not an annual sale, but a great sale at Rome. 

^Sollten sich sole he Leute nicht billig, etc. 
" Is it not natural that such men should stand in fear of a reforma- 
tion and a free council ?" Literally, " Should not such men reason- 
ably fear," etc. ? See p. 102, Note 3, on the word billig. 

3 In einander hangen, embroil, make kings and prin- 
ces seize and hold upon each other like tigers. The expression cor- 
responds in character to the English, " to set by the ears." Han- 
gen as an active verb is causative of hangen, a neuter verb. 
In einander hangen would, applied to persons, mean to be 
at variance, while an einander hangen, would be, to be at- 
tached to each other, to love each other. 

^Solche seine Buberei, "such knavery of his." The 
use of these two adjectives together is unusual. The word seine 
is not necessary after s o 1 c h e. 

*Zuletzt hat der Pabst, etc. "Finally the pope has 
erected for all these honorable transactions, a proper market house." 
H a n d e 1 n is, as the change of the vowel would indicate, the plu- 
ral of H a n d e 1 n, an infinitive used substantively. E i g e n e s 
does not refer to Pabst ("his own"), but to Handel n. Die- 



ADDRESS TO THE GERMAN NOBILITY. 133 

etgene^ ^aufl)au^ aitfgerirf)tet, b. t. : beg Vataxii 5;^aitg ju 
atom. 2)al)iu mitjTen aUe iic fommen, bte btefcr ^Seife 
ttad) nm^ ?el)en imb ^friutbeu banbefn, bemfefben niu^ 
man'- fo(cf)e @(o|Ten unb §anbtbierung abfaiifen, unb 5)D?ad)t 
erlangen, fotcf)e 5^aupt>S3it&erei ju tvcibcn. d^ wax Dor 
3etten uorf) gncibig ju 9?om, ba man bag 9?cd)t mnf te fau^ 
fen, obev mit @e(b nieberbritcfen ; aber je^t tfl fie fo f5fKi# 
gen^crben, bag fie 3tiemanb (dffet SSitberei treiten, eg mu^ 
mit gnmmen jnt^or erfanft tt)erben. 

S^ail bn nnn (Selb in biefem ^anfe, fo fannft bn jn aUm 
ben gefagten ©tiirfen^ fommen, nnb nid]t aUein jn benfef:^ 
ben, fonbern aKerlei 2Bnct)er'^ n)irb l)ier urn ©elb reblid),. 

sen would according to present usage, be placed after alien, and 
nach a little below would more commonly be placed before die- 
s e r W e i s e. 

^ U m, in trading, means /or, either the money for the article pur- 
chased or the article for the money. " To trade for fiefs and pre- 
bends." 

^Denselben muss man, etc. " Of this datarium one must 
(first) purchase such glosses (i. e. such as the commendam, unio, etc.) 
•nd obtain the authority (power) to practise such superlative kna- 
very. Formerly they were (it was, i. e. comparatively) gracious at 
Rome, when one had (merely) to purchase justice, or to oppress by 
bribes ; but now it has come to such a fine pitch, that it (Rome) al- 
lows no one to practise iniquity, unless it (the right) first be purcha- 
sed with a large sum of money." Here we see the natural explana- 
tion of the idiom, es sei denn, es muss denn, etc. "It 
allows no one to practise iniquity [freely, gratuitously] ; the right 
must first be purchased," i. e. it allows no one to practise except it 
purchase. A negation is followed by a hypothetical statement which 
has the nature of a condition or exception. 

^ S ttl c k e, things, or priviliges. 

* Sondern allerlei Wucher, etc.', " but all kinds of un-- 
lawful gain are here made (become) honorable for money, as, e. g^ 
stolen and plundered property is justified." [W ird] gerechtr 
fertigt. There is no convenient English word for rendering 
Wucher. Usury is too specific. The word shaving, as vulgarly 
12 



134 SELECTIONS FROM LUTHEK. 

al^ geflobferte^, geraubte^ ®ut gerecf)tferttget» ^ler tt^er^ 
fceu bie ©eliibbe aufgel)o6eit, bier n)irb ben 5i)i6nrf)en grei^ 
heit gegebeit, aii^ bem Drbcn 311 gel)en, l)ier tfl frei ber ebe^ 
Iirf)e ©tanb ben ®ei(lCirf)en, \)iev mogen ^urenfinber ebelicf) 
tt>erben, alte llnel)re unb (Sd)anbe bier ju S^itrben fommen, 
aller bofer ZaM unb 5!Ka(i bier 9?itter gefd)lagen unb ebel 
tt>irb» ^ier mug jTd) ber ebelicbe ©tanb leiben, ber in Der^ 
botenem @rab^ ober fonfl einen SUJangel Ijat. D n)e(cf) eine 
©d}d^erei3 unb (gc()inberei regieret ba, ba^ einen Sd)ein 
bat, ba^ alte gei(llict)en ©efege barum gefe^t, ba^ nur t)iel 
©etbftricfe miirben, baran^ ficb iniigte lofen, voev ein Sbrifl 
fei>n foU* 3^ W^ '^^^^ ^^^ Zcnfd ein ^eiliger unb ein 
@ott baju. 2Ba^ ^imrnel unb ©rbe nid)t i)ermag/ ba^ 

used, often comes nearer to it. They are both comprehended under 
the German word. 

^ Aller boser Tadel und M a 1, etc., ♦' every vicious de- 
fect and stain is here knighted and ennobled." The two senses of 
Tadel, 1. fault, censurableness, 2. the imputation of fault, censure, 
correspond to the two in which the English word blame is used. 
Mai, or M a a 1, in the sense of spot^ stain (formerly M a h 1) is so 
written for the sake of distinction. It is of the same etymology as 
M a h 1. 

^Der in verbotenem Grad [ist], etc., "here the con- 
jugal state which exists within the prohibited degree of relationship, 
or is defective for any other reason, must endure it. S i c h 1 e i- 
d e n, to endure one's self, i. e. to put up with one's condition^ is an ob- 
solete expression. 

3 O welch eine Schatzerei. " Oh, what a tax-levying 
and fleecing (flaying) is there [two nominatives regarded as one], so 
that it has the appearance that all canonical laws are established for 
Uhis end, that there might only be many pecuniary bonds, out of 
which he, who would be a Christian, must deliver himself!" G e- 
8 e t z t [s i n d] . 

*Was Himmel und Erde nicht vermag, etc., 
" What heaven and earth cannot do, that can this house do. It is 
called compositionrs ; — conipositioncs, to be sure, or rather confusioncs ! 
How poor a treasure is the toll on the Rhine compared to this sacred 
house !" 



ADDRESS TO THE GERMAN NOBILITY. 135 

^crmaq bie^ haw^. & beipen compositiones, freiftd) com- 
positiones, ja confusiones. D tvefrf) eiit fd)[ed)ter ©cl)a§ tjl 
ber 3oI( am Dlbeiu gegen biefe^ beifige S^an^. 

9^iemanb fott acf)ten/ ba^ icf) ju t)ief fage ; ee ifl 5lKeg 
oflFentfid), ba^ <Te fe(6)l ju 9?om ntiiffen befennen, e^ fe^ 
grcutidber unb mebr, benn S^ntanb fagen fonnte. 3d) babe 
nod) nid)t, mitt and) nod) nidjt, riibren bie red)te b^tte 
©runbfu^pe Don ben perfonlidjen ?a(l:ern ; td) rebe nnr t)ott 
gemeinen [anftgen Sad)en, unb fann fie benned) mtt 28or^ 
ten nid)t erlangen. (So fottten S3ifd)ofe^ ^nejlerfd)aft, unb 
jut)or bie Soctoren ber Unii^erfttciten, bie barum befotbet 
(tub, ibrer ^flid)t nad)^ hicwieicx eintrad)tig(id) gefd)rieben 
unb gefd)neen baben. 2a n^enbe ba^ 33(att um,^ fo finbefl 
bu e^^ 

di ijl and) ba^ 25a(ete babinten,^ ba^ ntu^ id) and) ge^ 
ben* 2)a nun ber unau^meg(id}e @eij^ nod) nid)t genug 
batte an aUtn biefen ©d)agen, ba bittig fid) brei mad)tigc 

^ Niemand soil achteri, etc., " No one should suppose 
ihat I am saying too much. It is ail notorious (public) so that they 
themselves at Rome must confess that it is worse in character and 
degree (more abominable and more extensive) than can be told. I 
have not yet touched, nor will 1, the genuine (real, clear) sediment 
of personal corruptions ; I speali only of common, current matters, 
and yet I cannot find words to express them (reach them with words). 
Bishops, the priesthood, and especially the teachers iqthe universities, 
who are paid for this purpose, should, in obedience to their duty, have 
cried and written against this with one consent." 

*Ja wende das Blatt um. " Turn the tables, (i. e. look 
for the opposite) and you find it." These men have concealed or de- 
fended what tliey ought to have exposed. 

^ Valete dahinten, " the farewell is still behind," or is still 
to come. The Germans often call the last thing or tlie end of a 
thing, a Lebewohl. The Latin word valete explains itself. The 
«ense is, " There is still one thing remaining ; I must bring that for- 
ward also." 

* Da nun der unausmessliche Geiz, etc. " Since, 
now, the immeasurable avarice would not have enough with all these 



136 SELECTIONS FROM LUTHER. 

^onige (ic^en baxan begniigen, ()c6t er nun an, fotcf)e feine 
^dubel ^u Dcrfclseu iinb jii t?erfaiifen bem S"99^^ i^^ 2tug^^ 
burg, ba^ mm Si^tbum. imb ?el)eu ju t)er[ciben, taiifct)cn, 
faufen, lutb bie liebe ^';)anbtl)iernug geifl:Iicf)er ©titer treibcn, 
eben auf ben rect)tcn £)rt ijl gcfommcn, uub nun au6 geijl? 
nd)cn unb mekJichen Oiiitcnt, cine ^anbtlnerung gctt)orben. 
9tiin mod)te id) gerne eine fo l)ot)e aSernunft boren, bie erbem 
ten mod)te, xoa^ nnn binfort gefdieben fonne buret) ben romt^ 
fd)en @eij, ba^ nirf)t gefrf)el)en fei) ; e^ nxire benn, ba^ ber 
Rugger feine beibe,unbnun einigen >;^anbel and) SemanbDcrs' 
fe^t ober t^erfanft, 3d) meine, e^ fep an^^ Snbe gefennnen. 
2Bir jTnb bier fd)n(big alien gleip t)orjnn)enben,i fold)em 

treasures, with which (d a for w o) three powerful kings would have 
good reason to be satisfied (would reasonably let themselves be sat- 
isfied with it), it began now (n u n, in these circumstances, or there- 
fore), to transfer this (such) its trade and to sell [the privilege] to 
the house of Fugger in Augsburg, so that now conferring, bartering 
and purchasing sees and fiefs, and following the (darling) business 
of [dealing in] ecclesiastical property, have come to exactly the right 
place ; and now from ecclesiastical and secular property a regular 
business has arisen. Now I sliould like to hear of (so high) an inge- 
nuity which can invent what further can be effected by Roman ava- 
rice, which has not been effected ; unless it be (e s ware d e n n) 
that Fugger should transfer and sell to some one (to some third person) 
both of iiis (branches of business, tlie pope's and his own). 1 think, 
the matter has gone to its height, (is come to its end, i. e. can be 
carried no farther). Unausmessliche is not a common word, 
but it is easy to learn its import from its derivation. Ausmessen, 
means to measure out. A u s m e s s 1 i c h (not used), that which can 
be measured out ; u n a u s m e s s 1 i c h, that which is immeasurable. 
Fugsrer was a great banker, the Rothschild of that age. H a n d t h i- 
e r u n g means, mcchnnical emploijmcjit, business, trade. Auf den 
r e c h t e n O r t, as the conferring of benefices had become a regu- 
lar matter of trade, it is just in character to let it out to a great bank- 
er. The only conceivable way in which the matter could be carried 
farther, was that Fugger sliould let out tlie business to others, who 
should sustain the relation of retailers to liim as a wholesale dealer. 
> Vorzuwenden. The word vorwenden literally means, 
to turn or to bring forward, and hence to exhibit, to manifest. So it 



ADDRESS TO THE GERMAN NOBILITY. 



137 



5ammer unb Serflorung ber gf)riflenbeit jutt)ebren* 2BoI^ 
fen mv^ mtcv bie !titrfen (Itretten, fo faffet un^ bier anbe^ 
ben, ba <Tc am atterargflen^ ftnb, fi^anqen mv bie Siebe, 
unb fopfen bie ^Haitber, VDanim foHten mv fret laffen ben 
romifcben ©eij, ber ber grogte l^ieb nnb JRanber iff, ber anf 
(Jrben gefcmmen ifl ober fommen mag ; nnb ba^ Wie^ in 
Sbrifti nnb ©t. ^Vter^ beifigen Stamen* SOBer fann's boct) 
jnfefet feiben ober fd)n)eigen ? @^ ifl ja gejlobfen nnb ge^ 
ranbet fail 3Jtte<J n)a^ er bat, ba^ i(l je nicf)t anber^,^ tt)etd)eg 
an^ atten 5>i(lorien ben^abret tt)irb. @^ bat ja ber ^abfl^ 
fefcf)e gro^e ©itter nicf)t gefanft, bag er t)on feinen Dfjxcien 
mag anfbeben bei jebn bnnbert tanfenb 2)nfaten, otjne bie 
cben genannten ©d)at§grnben nnb fein ?anb. ©o bat e^ 
tbm Sbriftn^ nnb ©t* ^peter and) ntd)t anfgeerbet/ fo bat 
e^ ibm and) 9?iemanb gegeben nocf) gelieben ; fo ijl eg and^ 

is used here and on p. 93, line 4. But, at present, it is employed on- 
ly in the figurative sense, to pretend. W e n d e n, old English, to 
wend. 

* W o 1 1 e n w'lr^ifwe wish. So a little below, hangen wir, 
if we hang. 

2 Am allerargesten, the worst of all. For this form of the 
superlative, see Gram. p. 126. A 1 1 e r, once a genitive governed by 
the superlative, has come to coalesce with it into one word. Com- 
pare p. 3, Note 4, and p. 92, Note 3. The Papists are here called the 
ivorst of Turks. 

^ D a s i s t j e n i c h t a n d e r s, ii^ i5 not cthericise, or it is in- 
deed so, is tautological. Welches, refers not simply to this ex- 
pression, but to the preceding words. " Nearly all that he has is 
stolen and plundered, — it is exactly so — which is proved by all his- 
tory." 

*Es hatja derPabst, etc. « The pope has not purchased 
•uch great wealth that he can raise a million ducats from his officers 
[of business and trade at Rome] in addition to the above-mentioned 
treasures and his lands." The meaning is, the pope can raise a mil- 
lion ducats, etc. but this ability or wealth has not come to him by 
purchase, but by stealth and plunder. G e k a u f t is emphatic. 

* Aufgeerbt, left by inheritance. A u f e r b e n is out of use 
at present, except as a provincial word. 

12* 



138 SELECTIONS FROM LUTHER. 

tticftt crfcjjcn^ nod) erjal)ret* Sage bu mir, n>of)er macj cr 
•eg habcn ? I^aran^ nterfe, tt?ag jTe fucf)en iinb meincn, 
tDcnn jTe !?egaten berau^ fenben, ©etb ju famme(n n)iber 
fete Jturfen. 



?ltatb t)onS5efferung c()rtftnc^en ©tanbcg. 

2Biett)obf id) nun ju gering bin, ©tiirfe^ tjorjufegen, ju 
fotct)ert greutid)en 2Bcfeng SSefferung^ bienllfid), mtt id) bod) 

* Ersessen participle from ersitzen, "to obtain a right to 
ti thing by long occupancy," which is the same in sense as e r j a h r- 
■e n , ^0 " acquire by prescription.'' 

2 StUcke. The extensive use of the word Stack, and the 
many idioms formed with it, render it necessary to explain its nature. 
It means 1 . literally, what sticks together ^ or adheres, or one solid mass ; 
as, etwas aus einem Stilcke, mac hen, to make a thing 
jout of one unbroken piece (of timber, etc.) In einem StQcke 
fort arbeiten (figuratively), to labor on icithout interruption, (in 
tone piece). ^ piece, i. e a coherent mass, broken off from some- 
thing else. In this signification it corresponds exactly to the English 
word piece. 3. A solid mass, or a whole with respect to a settled or 
customary measure ; asaSttlck Tuch, a piece of cloth contain- 
ing a certain number of yards ; ein Stack Gam, a certain 
number, (four or six) of skeins of yarn or thread; ein Stack 
W e i n, a pipe of wine ; ein Stack Salz, a certain measure 
of salt, varying in different places from three bushels to three fourths 
of a bushel. 4. .^n individual vieiced as a part (piece) of a class or 
species, as a piece of money, of artillery. Zehn Stack BO- 
c h e r, ten books ; Zehn StOckVieh, ten head of cattle ; e i n 
S t a c k V o n einem M e n s c h, a blustering or contemptible man, 
^applied to a human being, Stack is a word of contempt, as " a 
miserable thing of a man"). 5. A piece, as a work of art, especially 
of painting, poetry, music, etc., 6. A bad act, trick, especially in 
biblical usage. 7. A thing, a circumstance, a particular, a point, as 
in d i 8 e m S t U c k e, in this matter ; von freien St a eke n, 
voluntarily, of his own accord; grosse Stacke auf ihn 
h a 1 1 c n, to make much (great things) of him. 

'Zu sole hen greulichen Wesens Besserung. 



1 



ADDRESS TO THE GERMAN NOBILITY. 



139 



ba^ 9tarrenfpie( ijinan^ ffngcit, unb fagen, fo mi tneiu aSer^ 
flanb t)ermag, tt)a^ n?ol)f gefcf)el)en moct)te unb foUte, t)on 
n)cItJtcf)er ®crvalt ober gemeinem Soncifio. 

3um erjlen, ba^ ein jegncf)er ^itrft,i ^bet, ©tdbte, ttt 
if)reu llntertt)anen frtfrf) an t)erbteten bie SJnnaten nacf) 
D?om ju gc6en, unb jTe gar abtbun. 2)enn ber ^abp f)at 
ben ^act ge6rocf)en, nnb eine 3?duberei gemarf)t an^ ben 
Shinaten, jn ©cf)aben nnb ®rf)anben gemeiner bentfd)er2 
SJtatien, giebt jTe feinen grennben, t)erfanft fte fiir gro^e^ 
®e{b, nnb jliftet Dfftcten baranf ; barnm l)at er ba^ D?e(i)t 
bajn Derforen nnb ©trafe i:)erbient* ®o tjl bie n)e(tttd)e 
®en)a(t fcf)ntbig jn frf)nt3en bte Unfcf)nfbigen, nnb jn tt)ef)ren 
ba^ Unrecf)t, n)ie ®t. ^anht^ Dlom. 13. te^ret 

3nm anbern, bien)eif ber ^abft mit feinem roinifcf)en 
^raftifen,3 gommenben, Stbjntorien, 9?efert)ation, Gratiis 
expectativis, ^ab(l^?[ftonat, incorporation, Union, ^enjton. 

This last word is governed by z u, and governs solchen greu- 
lichen Wesens. Although 1 am too insignificant to set forth 
particulars, (which would be) subservient (d i e n s 1 1 i c h) to the 
reformation of such an abominable state of things (affair, or concern), 
yet 1 will carry out (or sing out my merry Andrew song) my part as 
court fool, (alluding to his presumption in offering advice to the 
emperor, and to princes and nobles), and say what might and should, 
perhaps (w o h 1), be done (take place) by the civil government or by 
a general council." 

^Dass ein jeglicher F a r st, etc., "that every prince, the 
nobility and (the free) cities prohibit promptly (frisch an, briskly 
on^ spiritedly) their subjects (among or in their subjects) from giving 
(to give) annats to Rome, and abolish them altogether" (ga r). 

2 Gemeiner deutscher, for allgemein. (Er) giebt 



'Romischen Praktiken, etc., "Roman tricks (viz)., com- 
mendamSy adjutoria, (right to appoint coadjutors to bishops), reserva- 
tions (mental), expectancies (promise of a benefice, when it shall 
become vacant), papal months, pensions, palliums (purchased by 
archbishops), rules of the court or office (where such business was 
transacted, the datarium), and the like knavery." 



140 SELECTIONS FROM LUTHER. 

Palliis, Sanjetei^JKegetn unb berg[eicf)en SBiiberei, alte 
beutfcf)eu ©tifte ol)ne ©eiDaft^ unb 9iecf)t ju jTd) rcigt, unb 
biefelbeit jii Dtom gremben, bie nicf)t^ in beutfd)en ?anbcn 
bafiir than, gtebt unb t^erfanft, bamit er^ bie Drbinaricn 
6erau6t ibrc^J D?ecf)te^, ntacf)t au^ ben a3ifd)bfen nnr ^iffcxn 
unb Defgbl^en, unb a(fo n)iber fein eigen gei(l[icf)e^ ^ed)t; 
Statur unb 3Sernunft b^nbelt, ba^ jutegt babin fommen, 
bag bie ^friinben unb ?eben nnr groben ungelel)rten @fe[n 
itnb SSnben ju JHorn, burrf) lantcv ©eij t)erfanft tt>erben, 
fromme unb gelebrte ientc ibrer 3Serbien(lte unb ^unfl nid)W 
geniegen, baburd) ba^ arme 2SoIf beutfcber Station guter ge^^ 
te^rter ^rdfaten mug mangetn unb t)erberben ; fo foU bi^t 
ber d)briilfid)e Slbet jTcb gegen x\)n fe^en, af^ miber einen 
gemeinen geinb unb B^^i^brer ber Sbriflenbeit, urn ber 
arnten ©eelen S>d9 mitten, bie burd) fo[cf)e J^prannei t)er^ 
berben miiffen ; fe^en, gebieten unb t)erorbnen, bag f)infort 
fein ?eben mebr nacb ^{om gejegen, feinec^ mebr barin er^ 
[angt merbe auf feinertei 5H5eife, fcnbern wieber wn ber 
t9rannifcf)en ©etraft tjerau^riicft, braugen bet)a(ten/ unb 

*Ohne Gewalt, without lawful power. 

' D a m i t e r, etc., "whereby he robs the ordinary or regular 
bishop of his right, makes the bishops mere ciphers and drones (O el- 
go tze, a lazyfelloic, now a low word), and thus violates his own 
canonical law, (as well as) nature and reason, so that at last it has 
(they have) come to this, that prebends and fiefs are, out of mere ava- 
rice, sold to coarse, ignorant asses and knaves at Rome, (and) pious 
and learned men derive no benefit from their merit and talents, 
whereby the unhappy people of Germany must do without learned 
prelates, and suffer (be ruined), therefore," etc. (so refers to dic- 
weil der Papst, etc.). 

' H e i 1 instead of H e i 1 s in the genitive for the sake of eupho- 
ny. Luther often uses such a license. 

•Heraus(ge)rnckt, drausscn behalten (werde), 
"be wrested again from its tyrannical power, and kept from it (out 
of Rome) and the rights and office of the ordinary bishops, to dis- 
pose, to the best of their power, of such benefices among the Ger- 
mans, be restored to them." 



ADDRESS TO THE GERMAN NOBILITY. 141 

ben Drbinaricn il)r ^fiedjt unb 3(mt mcievilattm, fo(rf) ?e^ 
I)en jii Dererbneu, auf'^ 33ejle \ic mogen, in beutfd)er Jta^* 
tion. 

Unb iDO ein Sourtifan berau^ fame/ ba^ bemfelben ein 
entfter 23efeb( gefdE)el)e abguiltet)en, ober m ben Stbein nnb 
bad ndcbjle SBafler ju fprmgen, nnb ben romifd)en SSann 
mit ©iegel nnb ^riefen jnm fatten S3abe fiibren, fo tt)nrben 
jTe jn 9icm nterfen, bag bie 2)entfd)en nid)t atte 3^tt toE 
nnb tjolt^ fe^en, fonbern andf) einmal &)xiiten getDorben 
mdren, aid bie^ ben ©pott nnb ©d)macf) bed beifigen 3la^ 
ntend Sbrijli, nnter n>efd[)en [ofcf)e Siiberei nnb (2ee(t)erber^ 
ben gefd)tebt, nid)t mebr jn (eiben gebenfen, ®ott nnb &oU 
ted (H)ve me[)r ad) ten benn ber aBenfd)en ®en)att. 

3nm britten, bag ein f aiferficbed @efe^ andge^e, f einen 
a3ifd)ofdmanteI, and) feine SSejldtignng irgenb einer S)igni^ 
tdten^ fortan and JHom jn ^o(en ; fonbern bag man bie 
Drbnnng bed afferbei(igil:en nnb beriibmtejlen Soncifii "iRU 
c&ni mieber anfrid)tete, barinnen gefe^t iflt/ bag ein S3ifd)of 

^ Heraus k a. me, etc. "And if a courtier should come out 
here (from Rome), that (d ass, here as in the second paragraph, 
dependent on s a g e n in the first paragraph) a strict command be 
given to him to keep at a distance, or to leap into the Rhine or (and) 
the nearest river, and take the Roman bull of excommunication with 
seal and letters to a cold bath. Thus would they at Rome perceive." 

'Toll und voll. Voll, has reference to feasting and drink- 
ing, which tends to make one toll. Compare VoUerei. This fond- 
ness for alliteration is apparent in numerous phrases, transmitted 
from the earliest times. 

^ A 1 s d i e, a5 who, i. e. as those who. 

*lrgend einer Dignitaten. Dignitaten, is either 
genitive singular after the old form, according to which feminine 
nouns were declined in the singular, or genitive plural, governed by 
einer," any one of the dignities." 

^Aufrichtete, darinnen (darin)gesetzt ist, " should 
be restored, or one should restore (imperfect subjunctive) in which 
it is established," etc. 



142 SELECTIONS FROM LUTHER. 

foil beffdtiget merben t^on ben anbent jwei itdcf)flcn, obet 
t)on bent (Srjbifcf)of» 

3nm t)ierren, ba^ Derorbnet n)erbe, ba^ feine melt{icf)e 
(Sad)e gen 9tom gejogen n)erbe, fonbern biefelben atte^ ber 
n)e(tlid)en ©ewatt laffen ; wie jTe fetbft fe^en in it)ren geiji^^ 
nd)en 9ted)ten, nnb bod) nirf)t baften. 2?enn beg ^>ab(l^ 
2lmt felt fei)n, ba^ er ber 3(Kerge(ebrtefle in ber Sd^rift, nnb 
tt)al)rl)aftig,2 nid)t mit JJamen, ber SJKerbeinqfle, regiere bie 
©ad)en, bie ben ®(anben nnb b^ilifl^^ ?eben ber C^hrijlcn 
betreffen, bie ^rimaten nnb (Srjbifd^ofe bajn bcxtten,^ nnb 
mit ibnen brinnen banbetn nnb (Serge tragen, voic @t 
Waning 1* Sor» 6. (el)ret, nnb t)drtig[id) jlrafet/ bag [\e mit 
tt)elt(id)en ©adjen nmgiengen. :^enn eg bringet nnertrdg^ 
lid)en (Sd)aben aKen ?anben, bag jn 5Kom fo(d)e Sad)en 
tt)erben gel)anbe(t, ba groge Soften anfgel)en, ba^n^ biefelbi^ 

*Sondern(man solle) dieselben (S ache) all e, etc., 
" but one should leave all these to the civil power, as they them- 
Belves (the Romanists) lay it down in their canonical law, and yet 
do not observe it." 

•Und wahrhaftig, etc., " and in reality and not (merely) in 
name, the most holy (of all)." Allerheiligste (sei). 

^ Dazu halten, and obligate them to do the same (hold them 
to it)." 

* Hartiglich strafe t, etc., "as Paul teaches and severely 
censures (them) that they," etc. Hartiglich, is obsolete, as used 
here for h a r t. In the sense of a little hard, the form h a r 1 1 i c h, 
is now used instead of h a r t i g 1 i c h. S t r a f e n is no longer used 
in the sense of censuring, but tadeln is now the common word to 
express that idea. 

^ A u f g e h e n, dazu, etc., " much money is consumed, and be- 
sides (dazu) these judges (at Rome) are iirnorant of the customs, 
laws and usages of (otlier) countries, so that they often force matters 
(causes) and bring them to (conform to) their laws and opinions, by 
which injustice must be done to the parties." Aufgohcn, to 
ascend, comes to signify, as here, to consume, probably from the figure 
drawn from fire, in which the tiling consumed, is said to ascend, or 
go up in flames or smohe. The other derivative significations of 
the word are easily traced out. 



ADDRESS TO THE GERMAN NOBILITY. 143 

gen 9?icf)tcr nidf)t n>ijyen tie ©ttten, D?ecf)t «nb ®ett>of)nt)eit 
ber ?dnber, ba^ mel)rmat bte ©acf)cu jwingett utib jtet)ett 
tiacf) il)rert 9ted)tcn unb D^inionen, bamit ben ^arteien 
mu^ nnrecf)t gefd)e{)en* 

X)abci^ miigte man and) t)erbteten in aKen (gtiften bfe 
greufid[)e (B(i)inbevei ber Dfficiale, bag jTe nid)t mel)r benn^ 
be^ ©(anben^ ©acfje nnb guter ©ttten jTrf) anne^men ; tt)a^ 
®e(b, @nt nnb ?ei6 ober (5l)re anbetrift, icn tt)elt(id)en 
SRid)tern (afien. Sarnm folC tie n)eltlict)e ®en)alt ba^ SSan^ 
next nnb Itreiben^ ntd)t gejltatten, tt>o e^ nicf)t ©fanben ober 
QVitt^ icben anbetrifft @eirtfid)e ®walt fott gei|l(icf)eg 
®nt regieren, me ia^ bte SSernnnft lel)ret ; geijltlid) @nt 
aber ill nid^t @e(b nod) (eiblid) Ding/ fonbern ©tanben nnb 
gnte ^iBerfe. 

3nm fiinften, ia^ feine 9?efert)ation niebr gefte, nnb fein 
8e^en me()r iehaftet n^erbe jn 9?om, e^ (Iterbe ber S3ejT^er,^ 
eS fei) ^jaber barob, ober fei) eine6 Sarbinal^ ober ^abjl^ 
®ejTnbe. Unb bag man jlrenge Derbiete nnb n)el)re, bag 
fein Sonrtifan anf irgenb ein ?el)en §aber anfange, bte 
frommen ^prieper jn citiren, tribntiren^ nnb anf ^ gonten^ 

^ D a b e i, with this, or in connection with this. Der OfEciale. 
An O ffi c i a 1, is generally a substitute or vicar of the bishop in ju- 
dicial matters. 

*Das sie nicht mehr d e n n, etc., " that they meddle with 
(interest themselves in) nothing but matters of faith, and good 
morals." S a c h e, is the genitive without the article. It governs 
des Glaubens, and is itself like S i 1 1 e n governed by s i c h 
a n n e h m e n, for an explanation of which, see p. 55, Note 2, end. 

^Bannen und Treiben, excommunicating and banishing. 

* Geistlich (es) Gut, and 1 e i b 1 i c h (e s) Ding. See 
p. 4, Note 3. 

^Es sterbe der Besitzer, etc., " whether the incumbent 
die (at Rome, or on the way), or a law-suit be commenced respecting 
it (the benefice, d a r o b) or (the incumbent) be attached to the reti- 
nue of a cardinal or of the pope." 

• Tribuliren, from the corrupt Latin, tribuiare. Any foreign 



144: SELECTIONS FROM LUTHEE. 

tiren trcibeiu Unb too banimi aii^ D?om etn S5ann ober 
geiil[id)cr B^^^^S fame, ba^ man^ ben t)erad)te, at^ tt>entt 
etn 2ie6 3emanb in Sann tl)dte, barnm, bag man iljn ntd)t 
n)ot(te fteb(en ia^cn. 

3nm fecf)^ten, bafi and) abgetban n)erben bie Casus re- 
servati, bie bel)a(tenen %ailc, bamit nid}t aUcin t)iel ©elb 
t)on ben ?enten gefd)nnben n)irb, fonbern Diel armer @en>tf? 
fen tion ben n)utl)erirf)en Xprannen Derilrirft nnb Demirret, 
jn nntrag(icf)em ®cf)aben ibreg ®tanben^ jn ©ott 

3nm jTebenten, bag ber remifd)e (Stnl)I bie Dfficia abtbne, 
ba^ @ett>iirm nnb <B(i)tr>\ivm^ jn 9tem tDenigere, anf bag beg 
^abjl^ ©ejTnbe moge t)on bec^ ^Vibftd eigen ®nt^ erndbret 
tt)erben, nnb (affe feinen S^of nirf)t atter ^enigen Joof mit 
^rangen nnb Soften iibertreten :^ angefet)en/ bag fo(cf) 
SBefen nid)t altein nie gebienet bat jnr ^ad)c be^ d)rifHid)en 
©tanben^, fonbern fie and) babnrd) DerbinberF am ©tnbi^ 

verb maybe adopted into German by adding the ending iren to 
the root. See p. 23, Note 2. Contentiren, is formed in the 
same way from the French verb contenter, and is used as a substan- 
tive, as all infinitives may be. Aufs content iren means, 
to their satisfaction, i. e. till they are satisfied. 
^ Und wo darum, and if on that account. 

* Dass man, here, as so often elsewhere in this connection, re- 
ferring to what Luther says or advises, as implied in the first para- 
graph. See p. 141, Note 1. 

^ Gewurm und Schwtlrm, see p. 110, Note 2. " Abolish 
the offices (and) diminish the swarm (of dependents) at Rome." 
A u f dass, see p. 37, Note 1. 

* Eigen Gut, is in the dative. When the c in the genitive 
termination of such substantives is omitted (Guts, for Gutes), 
it is omitted also in the dative (Gut for Gut e). Luther general- 
ly adopts this form. The adjective being prefixed to a neuter sub- 
stantive, is here, undeclined, (eigen for e i g e n e m). 

* Uebertreten obsolete, for b e r t r e ffe n. 

^ Angesehen, considering^ like angenomen, supposing. 

7Sie dadurch vehindert (hat)," but has thereby hin- 
dered them (s i e, the persons concerned) from study and prayer so 
that." 



ADDRESS TO THE GERMAN NOBILITY. 145 

ten unb @ebet, bag jTe fefbjl fa\1 md)t^ mebr miffen t)om 
©(auben ju fagcu, n)c(ct)e^ jTe gar groblid) betDiefen l)abett 
iu bicfcm [efetcu romifdieu goucilio^ 

3um ad)tcn, ba^^ bte fct)n)ercn greulicben @ibe aufget)oben 
tDiirbcii, fo bie Sifrf)ofe bem ^>abjl ju tbun gejtDUttgen, ol)tie 
affe(^ $Kerf)r, bamit^ jTe g(eicf) n)ie bie ^Tued)te gefangen tt)er^ 
ben ; me ia6 untud^ttge, imgclebrte ^apitct, Significastij^" 
i)on eigencr ©enmtt^ unb grogcm Unt)erftanb fe^et, 3fl'^ 
nidit genug,^ ta^ jTe un^ @ut, icib unb ©ee(e bcfd)tt)ereit 
mit mkn ibreit tetten ©efegen,^ babiird) ben ©tauben ge^^ 
fd)wad)t, bie (^briftenbeit t)erberbet, jTe nebmen benn and)^ 
gefangen bie ^erfon, if)r ^mt xmi SGerf : baju and) bte 

* Gezwungen (vverden) ohne alles Recht, damit^ 
etc., " which the bishops are compelled to swear (take) to the pope 
without any right (or law requiring it) by which they are bound like 
servants." 

^ UntUchtige, ungelehrte Kapitel, Sign'ificasti, Sig^ 
nificasti means the chapter in the canonical law beginning wMth this 
word. T u c h t i g, meant originally, strong, able. Thence it sig- 
nified, that tchich has force and excellence. It often means useful^ or 
fit^ but only in those cases in w^hich strong and high qualities consti- 
tute the usefulness or fitness. Herein does it differ from t a u g 1 i c h^ 
which means that which can he put to some particular use, which one 
can use. B e q u e m is convenient, and is used of things which can 
be easily and readily used. Geschickt, with reference to per-^ 
sons, means, skilful, an adept ; with reference to things, it means, 
adapted. 

' Eigener Gewalt, grammatically referring to K a p i t e 1, 
must of course relate to the aiithor of the chapter. Such freedoms, 
of construction are of perpetual occurrence. 

* I s t's n i c h t g e n u g, is not a conditional clause, but inter- 
rogative ; or possibly an emphatic assertion. 

^Vielen ihren tollen Gesetzen instead of i h r e n 
V i e 1 e n. It is a harsh construction, but it gives great emphasis to 
the word v i e 1 e n. 

*Sie nehmen denn auch, etc., " unless they take cap- 
tive." See Gram. pp. 362, 315. 
13 



146 SELECTIONS FROM LUTHER. 

3ni)cflitur, bie Dor S^iten ber bcutfrf)en ^aifer gemcfen, unb 
in granfreirf) m\t} etlid)en StoniQvcid)cn ncd) bev ^onige 
fTnb,i l^ariiber jTe mit ben jl'aifern^ gro^en Mvicc^ nnb :f?a^ 
ber gebabt, fo lange, bi^ ba§ jTe mit fred^er ©ett)a(t genem^ 
men nnb 6eba(ten babcn bibber ; gerabe al^ miipten t>k 
2)entfd)en Dor alien gbrij^en anf @rben be^ ^abft^ nnb rlW 
mifd)en ©tnbt^ ©ocfetnarren-^ fepn, tbnn nnb leiben, roa^ 
fonfl 9iiemanb (eiben nod) tbnn milt* 2^ien)eil benn bieg 
©tiicf eitel ©cmaft^ nnb 9{anberei i]t, jn ^^linberniffen bU 
fd)6flid)er orbent(id)er ©ewvitt, nnb jn ©d)aben ber annen 

* Die — der Kaiser gewesen (ist) und — noch der 
K o n i g e s i n d, which was the tmperors\ and are now the lilngs\ 
i. e. which belonged to the emperors, etc. The subject is here chang- 
ed from the singular to the plural. The genitive is sometimes used 
as a predicate, and approaches the nature of an adjective or adjec- 
tive pronoun (which was his or theirs). 

'DarUber sie mit den Kaiser n, etc. There is a little 
irregularity in the construction of this sentence, near the close. 
There is an incongruity in sajiing, " On account of that (the right of 
investitures) they have had severe wars and contests with the emper- 
ors until (so lange bis dass) they seized them with shame- 
less violence, and retained them vp to this time, (And tliey have re- 
tained them, etc.)." 

2 Gockelnarren. Gockel is written in old German g o- 
ge 1, and sometimes g i g e 1 (the root of our word giggle, respect- 
ing which Richardson has some strange fancies). As an adjective it 
means, jesting, toanton. Hence Gockelnarr, is a merry An- 
drew. 

*Dieweil denn diess StOck eitel Ge wait, etc., 
" since then, this thing is sheer violence and plundering," etc. On 
the force of e i t e 1, see p. 10, Note 4. — T yrannei zu wehren, 
to restrain such tyranny. The verb wehren in the early writers 
sometimes governs the accusative as the direct object of the action. 
So it is found several times in Luther's version of the Scriptures. 
But according to modern usage, the dative is required by this verb. 
With this dative, however, there may be an accusative of the thing, 
as, eincni etwas wehren, fo hinder one in respect to anything, 
\. e. to restrain, hinder or prevent him from doing it. 



ADDRESS TO THE GERMAN NOBILITY. 147 

®ee(en, tfl ber ^aifer mit feinem Slbef frf)u(big, fotct)c Xp 
vannci ju tDebreit unb jii jlrafeu* 

3iim ueunten, bag ber ^ab]t iibcv ben ^aifer feine ®e^ 
wait babe, obne bag^ er ibn auf bem 3((tar fatbe unb frone, 
tt>te cin S?ifc()of etnen ^oiug frcnet ; unb je titrf)t bie teiifeU 
ifcbe i^effabrt t)tnfort jugelajTen n>erbe, bag ber ^aifer beg 
'^abi'vS gitge fiijfe, ober ju fetnen gitgen jT^e, ober n)te man 
fa(]t, i()m ben (gtegreif t)afte, nnb ben 3^^^^^ feineg "^anU 
pferb^,2 ^x)enn er anfftfet jn reiten ; nocf) tJietoeniger bem 
lAabft §u(b nnb trene Untertbantgfeit [cl)n)6re, n?te bie ^d^ 
bjle nntierfcbdmt vjornebmen ju forbern, a(g batten fie D?ecf)t 
bajn* @^ til: bag ^apttcl Solite, barinnen pdbjlKicf)e ®e^ 
matt itber faiferlicbe ©cn:)a(t er^;oben mrb, nicf)t eineg S>eU 
{ev6 n)ertb,3 nnb 2ilfe, bie ]ld) baranf griinben ober batJor 
fnrrf)ten ; biemeif eg nid]t anberg tbnt, benn bie beitigen 
©otteg^3Sorte jwinget nnb bringet t)cn ibrem red)ten SSer^ 
jlanb, anf if)re eigene Itrdnme : mie irf) bag angejeiget babe 
im ?atein. 

@g ift and) (dcfier(irf) nnb finbifcf), bag ber ^abf! ang foU 
cf)em i:3erblenbeten, i:)erfel)rten ©rnnb ffcf) rit{)met in feinem 
Secretat Pastoralis, er fei) beg ^aifertbnmg^ ein orbenttid)er 
@rbe, fo eg tebig ftiinbe^ 2Cer bjat eg ibm gegeben ? S)aV^ 
Sbriftng getban, ba er fagt, ?nc» 22. ,,2^ie gi'trflten ber 

^ Ohne dass, in the sense of a u s g e n o m m e n, or a u s s e r, 
obsolete. See p. 95, Note 3. 

2 M a u 1 p f e r d, obsolete for M a u 1 1 h i e r or M a u 1 e s e 1. 

^Nicht eines Hellers werth, is not icorth a Heller, 
Werth governs the genitive; but in modern style, the accusative 
often follows it, especially when a dffinite number of anything is giv- 
en, as in this case. — li n d alle, die sich, etc., "and all (i.e. 
nor any of) those who act on its authority, or stand in fear of it ; in- 
asmuch as it does nothing but (not otherwise than that it) force God's 
holy words and press them away from their proper meaning to their 
own dreams." 

* Er sei des Kaiserthums, etc., " that he is the (a) proper 
heir of the Empire, should it become (stand) vacant." 



148 SELECTIONS FROM LUTHER. 

^eiben jTnb Syxxcn ; ibr abcv fottt ind}t fo fei)n ?" S>aVi 
t()m v2t, ^pctcr aufgccrbct ?i 93cicf) tjcrbricgt, bag n>ir fetd)c 
iint)erfd)amte, grobc, telle Sitgen mi\\]cn im geifHid)cn 9icd)t 
lefcn inib Icbrcn, bagu fiir rf}rifHid)e ?el)re balten, fo ei bed) 
teufelifcl)c ?ngen jTub* SBeliter Slrt^ and) ift bie iincrberte 
?iige, de donatione Constantini. d^ mug ciue befenbere 
Page t)en @ett geiDefen fct>n, bag fo mele t)erftdnbige !i?eiite 
ffd) baben lajTen berebcn,^ [ol.i e ?ugen aufgmtebmen, fe jTe 
beef) fo gar greb mib iinbct)cnb f[nb,bag mid) bimf t, ed fellte 
ein triinfcncr 33aiier bebenber iinb gefd)idtcr liigcn fbnnen. 
9Bie fodte bcjleben bci einem ^aifertbum ju regieren, pre^ 
bigen/ beten, flubiren unb ber SJirmcn marten ? ^ii?eld)eg 
2lmt^ auf ^ allereigentlid)fte bent ^^abf^ jnftebet, unb t)en 
(5l)rifto mit fo grepem (^rnfl aufgelegt, bag er and) t)erbet, 
jTe fellten nid)!^ 9^ocfe, nid)t @etb mit fid) tragen ; f[ntemal 

* Aufgeerbet, bequeathed. See p. 137, INote 5. Mich ver- 
d r i e s s t, for es verdriesst mich. See Gram. p. 304. 2. 

* Welcher Art, of which sort, genitive as a predicate. See p. 
146, Note J. The fiction of the donation of the empire to the pope 
by Constantine, was exposed by Laurentius Valla. 

^ Haben lassen bereden, would according to present usage 
ordinarily stand thus, haben bereden lassen. Sollte — kon- 
nen. l^ defective English verbs be employed in the translation of 
Buch words as konnen, (can) tliere is a difficulty in expressing the 
force of sollte. It will be perfectly easy, however, if, in all such 
cases, a regular Knglish verb, or a circumlocution be substituted (for 
can) ; as ** should be able." 

* Zu regieren, predigen, etc. " How would ruling, preach- 
ing, praying, studying and attending to the poor, consist with an em- 
pire .**" i. e how could he who had an empire under his care do all 
these things ? Zu regieren and the following infinitives are used 
substantively, and are nominative to so 1 1 te. All those infinitives 
refer to the episcopal oflice. Regieren is perhaps to be under- 
stood of ccdtsiusticni rule. Tliis seems to be required by the next 
gentence. 

* Welches A m t, viz. that of '* ruling, preaching," etc. 

* Verbot, aie soUten nicht. This form of expression, like 



ADDRESS TO THE GERMAN NOBILITY. 149 

ber faiim fetter 5(mt waxten fatin, fcer eintge^i ^aug vt^U 
even mu(j ; xxnb bcr ^ab^ vmlf ^aiferthum regieren, baju 
^ab(l bfcit^en* @i^ t)aben bte SSuben erbact)t/2 bie imter beg 
^a6ft^ 9?amcn gerne 5;^erren tvaxcn iihev ik 5Be(t, unb bag 
i>crftoretc romifcf)e D?eid) burrf) ben ^abjl unb 9iamen 
gbn'lli ttneber aufrid)ten, n)ie eg tJorher gen)efen tft 

3um jebnten, bag iidf ber ^abjl entbalte, bte §anb an^ 
ber ©uppe jiebe, jTcf) fetneg Xitefg untertDtnbe beg ^otti^ 
greicf}g ju ?teapef unb ©icifian, (^r t)at eben fo t)te( 9tecf)t 

all double negatives, is nearly out of use, and is now regarded as in- 
elegant. 

^ E i n i g e s, in the sense of e i n z i g e s. See p. 93, Note 2. 

2 Buben erdacht, devised^ invented. " This has been invent- 
ed by the knaves (the knaves have invented it) who would gladly 
(gem e, familiar form for g e r n), under the name of the popes, be 
roasters of the world, and, by the pope and the name of Christ, re- 
store the fallen Roman empire, as it was before." 

^Zumzehnten dass sich, etc. The genitive K o n i g- 
reichs is equally dependent on enthalte, S u p p e and u n- 
1 6 r w i n d e. " Tenthly [in my view, it is necessary] that the pope 
relinquish (enthalte) the kingdom of Naples and Sicily, that he 
keep his finger out of that pie (the pie of it), and that he assume (or 
Tenture to claim) no title to it. He has just as much right to it as I 
have [and no more], and yet he wishes to be its feudal lord. It is a 
robbery and violence as nearly all his other possessions are. There- 
fore the emperor should not allow him such a fief, and, in case it had 
been done, he should not permit it any longer ; but direct him to the 
Scriptures and prayer-books to this end (viz.) that he let civil rulers 
govern territory and people especially those which (d i e) no one has 
given to him, and that he preach and pray." Die Hand aus 
d e r S u p p e z i e h e, "to take his hand out of the porridge." G e- 
walt is here employed with great license, for 3, possession seized by 
power. W a re, in the subjunctive, implies that the concession had 
never been made, thus : " and even if it had been done" (which is 
Rot the case). B i b e 1 n, is plural, after the analogy of the Greek 
and Latin, biblia, books. D a f u r. The following clause is in appo- 
sition with d a, for tfiis^ viz. for what he is going on to state. D ie 
[die], those which. 

13* 



150 SELECTIONS FROM LUTHER. 

baran aU id), wili bennocf) ^ebeiieihcrr tariiber fet)n, di 
ift eiu D?aub iiub ®ctt)a(t, tt)ie faft alle aiibere fcine ©iiter 
ffitb ; barum fellte ibm ber ^aifer fcfcf)e^ ?ehcn iurf)t (je^ 
flatten, unb wo e^ gcfcf)et)en tvixvc, nicf)t mebr t)ern}tlli3en ; 
fonbern ibm bie S3i6e(u unb ©e6etbnrf)er bafiir attjeigen, 
bag cr yt>e[t(icl)c i^errcu fajfe ?anb unb ?cute rcgieren, fon^ 
berlicf) bie ibm Diiemanb gcgeben I)at ; nnb er prcbige unb 
bete^ 

®ofcf)c 5}teinung^ fottte aucb geba(ten n^erben itber 93enOiJ 
uien, Sniofa, SSincenj, iHa'oen, unb Sllfe^ voa^ ber ^Mbfl in 
ber SMnconitaner^ 9}iarf, 9?omanbief, unb mebr ?dnber 
^e(fcf)(anbed3 mit ©cxvalt eingenommen, unb init Unrecbt 
bejT^t, baju tt^iber affe ©ebete gbtifti unb (2t* ^Muti jTcf) 
brein menget. Senn atfo fagt ©t. ^auhi^ : „gtiemanb 
n>icfe(t jTd) in bie weftfidben @efd)afte, ber gottficber ^titters' 

^ Solche Meinung sollte, etc. " The same opinion should 
be entertained respecting Bologna, Imola, Vicenza, Ravenna, and 
everything in the Mark of Ancona, in Romandiola and other coun- 
tries of Italy, which the pope has seized with violence, and holds with 
injustice, and moreover meddles with, contrary to all the commands 
of Christ and of St. Paul." 

* Anconitaner is an adjective. The proper adjective termina- 
tion for names of places is isch, as spanisch, preussisch. 
But frequently the substantive termination e r, indeclinable, is used 
adjectively for the sake of euphony, as die Berliner Jahrba- 
c he r, the Berlin Annals ; die Leipziger Zeitung, the Leip- 
sic Times, or Gazette jder Magdeburger Dom, the Magde- 
burg Cathedral. The cases, which are comparatively few, in which 
the termination e r is used adjectively, must be learned by usage. 
For example we must say Colnisches Wasser, Cologne water, 
and die Coiner Domkirche, the Cologne Cathedral. To all this 
there is some analogy in English in such terminations as ian and er 
in the words, the Bostonians, and the Vcrmonters ; the Philadelplii- 
ans and the New Yorkers. Romandiola was an Italian province on 
the Adriatic extending from the Mark of Ancona to the Po. 

3 U n d m e h r Lander W e 1 s c h 1 a n d s. M e h r is usea 
substantively and governs the genitive Lander, and is itself, like 
the two preceding substances, governed by i n. 



ADDRESS TO THE GERMAN NOBILITY. 151 

fcf)aft tvavtcn fott/' dlnn fott ber ^abjl ba^ 5;)aupt unb 
ber Srfte fej)n itt btefcr 9?itterfcf)aft ; unb meitget jTd) met)ri 
lit n)e(t(irf)e @efrf)afte, benn feiit ^aifer nod) ^ontj^ : je fo 
miigte^ man ibm bcran^ f)c[fen, nnb feiner $Hitterfcf)aft mar^ 
ten tajjen* Sbrtjltn^ and), beg ©tattbafter er |Td) riibmet, 
n)o(lte nod) nte niit n)e(tlid)em Slegiment jn fd)aflren ^aben,^ 
fo gar, bag er jn einem, ber ein Urtt)ei( Don ibm itber feinen 
Srnber begebrte, fprad) : ,,2Ber batmid)btr jn einem 9?id)^ 
ter gemad)t ?'' 2(ber ber ^ab(t fdbret einber^ nnbernfen, 
nntertt)inbet jTd) alter Singe, me ein ©ott, bi^ bag er fefbjl 
nid)t mebr meig, tDa^ Sf)rijln^ fet), jn beg ^tatt\)altev er 
jTd) anftt)irft»^ 

3um eilften, bag ba^ '^i'tge fiiffen be^ ^abjlt^ and) nid)t 
met)r gefd)ebe* @^ ijl ein nnd)rifltid)e^, fa antid)rij^ifd)e^ 
grempef, bag ein axmev fihtbiger 5!)?enfd) ibm (dflet feine 
pge fitflfen^ ijon bem, ber l}nnbertmat beflfer i\t benn er* 
©efd)iebt e^ ber @ett>a(F jn @[)ren, n)arnm tt)nt ed ber 

^ Und (doch) menget sich mehr, etc , " and yet he in- 
termeddles in worldly business more than any emperor or king (no 
emperor nor king)." See p. 148, Note 6. 

^ Je so mlisste, for j a, " now then one ought to help him out 
and let him attend to his (spiritual) warfare." 

^Zu schaffen haben mit, " to have (anything) to do with." 
Viel zu schaffen haben, "to have much to do." It does 
not mean to he obliged to do. See p. Ill, Note 3. 

* Faret einher, " plunges in, uncalled," etc. 

^ A u f w i rft. This word means literally to throw up, both in the 
sense o£ raising (a mound, a billow, scum, a wrinkle in cloth) and of 
turning up, out or open (a nose, lip, door with violence, a question, or 
doubt, by proposing it). With sich followed by zu or f U r, it 
means, to volunteer to be, to give one's self out for ; but when followed 
by wider, it means to revolt. 

^Ihm lasset seine FUssekitssen. Ihm, as a dative, 
merely points out the person to whom the action is performed, and 
stands, as it often does in Luther, for sich. 

' Geschieht es der Gewalt, "if it is done out of honor to 
the (imperial) power, why does not the pope do it to others out of 



152 SELECTIONS FROM LUTHER. 

^ab|l and) nid)t ben anberii, ber S>ciliQteit ju (g^ren ? S^ait 
ffe gccjcn cinanbcr^ (Sbriffiim unb ben ^ahit. &)v\]tni 
tDiifcf) feinen ^nncjent bie ^i^^^ »nb trocfnete jTe ; unb bic 
3itngcr n)iifrf)cu fte il)m nccf) nie. Scr ^abft, at^ bobet 
benn gbriftu^, febrct bag urn, unb (dffet eg eine gro^c 
©nabe fcpn, tbm fetne ^iige ju fiiffen ; ber bod) bag bittig,^ 
fo eg 3^nianb t)on il)m begcl)ret, mit aUem SScrmogcn n^el)^ 
reu foKte, tDie ®t. ^audig unb Sarnabag, bte fid) nid)t 
tvoUtnx (ajten ebren a(g ®ctt, Don benen jn ?iftra, fonbern 
fprad)cn : „5Bir <Tnb Qieid) ?[lf?enfd)en afg^ ibr/' Slbcr un^^ 
ferer ©d)meid)(er ()aben'g fo bod) gebrad)t, unb^ ung einen 
Slbgott gemad)t, bag ?iiemanb fid) fo fnrd)tet wv ©ott, 9iie^ 
ntanb ibn mit fo[d)en ©eberben ebret, afg ben ^ab}t. X:ai 
fonnen [\e n)ol)f leiben, aber gar nid)t,^ fo beg ^|\ibflg ^xad)^ 

honor to the holiness (of the pope)." This is obscure. Probably, 
the Papists gave such an explanation, referring to the example of 
Christ in washing the disciples' feet. 

^ Halt (haltet) sie gegen einander, etc., " hold them, 
Christ and the pope, side by side (i. e. compare them). See p. 132, 
Note 1 . 

2 Der doch das billig, etc., " who ought rather (yet) by 
good rights (billig), should any desire it of him, to resist it with all 
his might." 

3 Gleich Menschen als. Gleich — als, literally, like 
as. 

^ So hoch gebracht und, " have brought it so high (have 
carried it so far) as to make, etc." S o does not correspond to d a s s 
in the next line, but by a peculiar idiom, to u n d. Thus in the col- 
loquial plirase, Seien Sie so gut und sagen sie mir, 
" be so good as to tell me." D a s s of itself, often means so that^ 
and docs so here. 

* A b c r gar n i c h t, so, etc., " but (they could not endure it) at 
all, if the splendor of tbe pope should be abridged a hair's breadth. If 
now they were Christians, and held the honor of God dearer than 
their own, the pope would never be happy ; but should he perceive 
that tlie honor of God was trampled on, and his own exalted, he 
would allow no one to honor him until," etc. N i e m a n d is here 
in the accusative, as the connection shows. 



ADDRESS TO THE GERMAN NOBILITY. 163 

ten em S^aaxhveit n>urbe a6ge6rocf)ett. 2Bentt fie ttun 
v(§l)ri|len mdren, nub ©ctted (St)re (te6er t)dtten, benn tf)re 
etgene, n)urbe ber ^abft nimmer frol)ncf) ttjerben ; tt>o er 
a6er geix)al)r tDiirbe, ba^ @otte^ @t)re t)erad)tet, unb feme 
efgeue erba6en n)are, miirbe aucf) 9ctemanb taflen tbn ef)ren, 
bit? cr Dermcrfte, bag ®otte^ (5t)re n)ieber er^aben, unb 
grower benn feme dljvc rndre. 

I)erfe(ben grogen drgerftrf)en ^ofa{)rti ijlt aud) ba^ em 
:'l)dg(trf)e^ ©titrf, bag ber ^IJabftitim nirf)t fdgt begnugen,bag 
.er reiteit ober fat)ren moge, fonbern ob er tvoiji jtarf uttb 
gcfimb ijl, fief) Don 5i}ienfcf)en, aU em SJbgott, mit imerf^ors* 
tor ^racf)t tragen (djfet. ?ieber, me veimet ficf)^ bod) fo(cf)e 
(iiciferifi-t)e 5?offabrt mit Sbriflo, ber ju guge gegangen ift 
imb aKe feine Slpojlel ? SBo i(l ein n)eltlirf)er ^onig geVDes* 
fen, ber fo wettlid) imb prdd)tig je gefat)ren t)at, a(^ ber 
fdbret, ber ein S^an)f)t fei)n n)i(t Sitter berer, bie \ioeltli(i)e 
^vad)t t)erfd)md()en imb flieben fotten, b. i* : ber S^rijlen ?3 
9?icf)t ba^ «n^4 j^^jg j^^jit fott bemegen an ibm felbft ; fonbern 
ia^ mv bittig (Sotted 3^^« fiirrf)ten fotten, fo n)tr fofd^er 

^Derselben grossen argerlichen H o f f ar h t, etc. 
" Of the same (great) wicked arrogance is this a hateful piece, that 
he is not content (i h m for s i c h) with riding (that he can ride) on 
horseback or in a carriage, but though he is strong and healthy, he 
causes himself to be carried by (v o n) men," etc. R e i t e n is used 
only of riding on horses, mules, camels ; f a h r e n, only of being con- 
veyed in vehicles, ships, etc. G e h e n includes both these modes 
of conveyance, and also walking. Hence figuratively fahren 
means to move with velocity or violence. 

2 Lieber, wie reimet, etc. "Dear sir, how does such satanic 
^ pride comport with," etc. .^ Und alle seine A p o s t e 1,* " and 
l|(i. e. as well as) all his apostles," is irregular in its construction. 

3 d. i. d e r C h r i s t e n, in apposition with the genitive d e r e r. 
*Nicht dass uns, etc. "Not that this (d a s) should, in itself, 

very much (fa s t) affect us." Fast in the sense of s e h r is obso- 
lete ; it is used now almost exclusively in the sense of b e i n a h e. 
Und unsern Verdruss nicht me r ken lassen, " and 
do not manifest (cause to be observed) our displeasure." 



154 SELECTIONS FROM LUTHER. 

§ojfa()rt fcf)meid)efn, unb unfern SSerbrug ttid)t merfcn (af? 
feit. @^ ijl: genug, bag ber ^abfl alfo tobet unb narret ; e^ 
ifl aber jii Did, fo voiv ba^ Lnlligen unb t)crg6nneiu 

Senn tt)c(d)c^ (Ibriftcu^i^erj mag obcr foU^ ba^ mit ?u(l 
fet)en, bag ber ^abjl, n)enu er jTcf) n)itt (affen commiuiiciren, 
jlitte jT^t, ai^ ein ©itaben 3nngl)err, unb lajjet ibm bad 
©acrament wn einem fniecnben gebeiigten garbinat mit 
einem golbenen 9?obr reirf)en ; gerabe ali wave ba^ beilige 
©acrament nirf)t n)iirbig, bag ein ^>abfl:, cin armer fliufen^ 
ber ©iinber anfiliinbe, feinem ©ott eine @[)re tbcite ; fo 
bod) al(e anbere gl)ri(l:en, bie ml beiliger fnb, benu ber aU 
(erl)ei(ig(l:e aSater, ber ^abjT:, mit alter Sbrerbietung bafleJbe 

^ Mag oder soil, etc., '* may (can) or ought to view it with 
pleasure, that the pope, when he communes (causes himself to com- 
mune), sits still, like a gracious young lord, and causes the sacra- 
ment to be reached to him with a golden reed, by a kneeling, bow- 
ing cardinal, just (g e r a d e) as if the holy sacrament were not wor- 
thy that a pope, a poor, filthy sinner should rise up (and) do his God 
honor, whereas (so d o c h) all other Christians, who are much ho- 
lier than the most holy father, the pope, receive it (kneeling) with 
all respect ? What wonder would it be that (i. e. if) God should send 
judgment upon us all indiscriminately (a 1 1 e s a m m t), that (i. e. 
because) we suffer, etc." Notice the various uses of the word dass. 
See p. 144, Note 2. — Roh r. J. Vogt has written an essay entitled, 
Historia fistulae eucharisticae, cvjus ope sugi sold e calice vinum bene- 
dictum^ " by the aid of which the consecrated wine was sucked from 
the cup." Tliis explains the word, R o h r, or fistula. See also 
Coleman's Ch. Antiquities, p. 329. The object of the instrument was 
to prevent the loss of a single drop of the sacred element. Afler the 
communion under only one form, which arose from the same super- 
stitious veneration, was introduced, there was no further use for the 
fistula^ or tube. It was retained, however, in the mass in which the 
pope participated, and was of gold, as we heie learn. — Ehrer- 
bietung, act of rererence bij lincding. Nunc solus sacerdos cel('- 
brans coinmunicat stans^ reltqui omncs gcnllnis flcxis de manu sacer- 
dotis cominunionem accipiunt Summus Pontifex, cum solcnmitcr 
celebrat, scdcns communicat. Bona, 7?er, Litur^. quoted by Augu.i- 
ti, Archaeol. II. 7^, 



ADDRESS TO THE GERMAN NOBILITY. 155 

empfangcit ? 2Ba^ mvc eg SBunber, ia^ mx^ ®ott aUc^ 
fammt pfagete, ba^ wiv folcfje Une()re ©otteg (eiben unb 
lobcn in unfcrtt ^rdfatcn, unb fe{rf)er feiner t^erbammten 
J^^offabrt ung t()eit()aftig machen, buret) unfer ©chmeigen 
ober ©dhmeicfjefn ? 

2Ufo (]e()ct eg aitdf), tt)entt er bag ©acrament in ber ^ro^ 
ccfjTen umtrdgt : tbn mug mau trageu ; aber bag ©acra^^ 
nteut ftebet t)or if)m mie ein ^aubeP 2Beiug auf bem Ziid), 
.^iirjlicf), (5bri|lug gift uicf)tg2 ju 9?om ; ber ^a6(l gift'g 
aUeg fammt : uub vooUcn uug beunocf) brtugeu uub bebrdu^ 
en, mv [etten fo(rf)e autidE)ri(ltifcf)e Isabel biCigeu, preifeu 
unb ebreu n?iber @ott unb atte cf)ri)l(id)e ?et)re. ^^elfe nun 
' ©ott einem freieu Soucilio, bag eg ben ^abjl: fefjre, n)ie er 
. and) ein 9[y?enfrf) fei), unb nicfjt mef)r, benu ®ott, tt)ie er ficf) 
unterftet)et ju fepn*^ 

^ K a n d e 1, cw;?, provincial for K a n n e, 
^ *KQrzlich, Christus gilt nichts, etc. " In short, 
^ Christ passes for nothing, at Rome ; the pope passes for everything 
(taken together alles sammt, different from allesammt a 
few lines above); and yet (they, the Papists) wish to force us and 
i threaten us (d r a U e n for d r o h e n), that we should approve (i. e. 
'to force and drive us to approve) commend and iionor such an un- 
1 christian abuse in opposition to God and all Christian doctrine." 
i| ^Er sich unterstehet zu s e y n, as he undertakes or as- 
'' sumes to he. Sich u n t e r s t e h e n, to take upon one's selfunneces- 
isarily^ generally construed with the infinitive, is nearly the same as 
ithe expression, sich unterwinden. They both mean putting 
\ione^s self voluntarily under a burden or difficult work. Sich un- 
terwinden, implies that the undertaking is too arduous for one's 
1 strength. Sich unterfangen, means the same, except that it 
'expresses mere difficulty, without implying that the undertaking 
is either unnecessary, or too great. Sich getrauen, or sich 
t ra u e n, expresses the same general idea of undertaking a difficult 
work, with a shade of difference conveying the signification of per- 
\\sonal confidence, which, when carried to a dangerous extent, is ex- 
1 pressed by sich erkOhnen; and when carried io ?in immodest 
extent, is expressed by sich erdreisten. 



-li 



156 SELECTIONS FROM LUTHER. 

Siirn jn)o(ften, bag ntan bie aBaUfaf)rten gen 3tom aU 
tf)ate, obcr 9ticmanb t)cn cigcnem SSortDig ober 3(nba(^ 
waiicn licge/ er wiirbe benn ^Mov i)en feutem ^farrbernii 
©tabt ober Dberberrn erfaitut, gcnugfame unb reb(irf)e Uii 
fad)e ()aben. Sa^ fage icf) nicf)t barum, bag 2Battfal)rtetf 
bofe fei)en ; fonbent bag jTe ju bicfer ^eit ixbci geratbcn :* 
benn jTc jii 5Hom fein gutc^ @rcmpel, fonbent eitef Slergeri^ 
jtig feben, unb rr>ie ffe fetbjl: ein ®pruct)n)ort gemact)t baberti 
3e naber 9tom, je drger Sbriften ; bringen <Te init jTd) SSeil 
adf)tung ©otteg unb @otte^ ©eboten. 5)?an fagt, trer ba* 
erflemal gen 9iom gebet, ber furf)et einen Scf)alf ; jum an^ 
bernmal ftnbet er ibn ; jum brittenmal bringt er ibn m^ 
berau^* Stber pe jTub nun fo gefd)icft n^orben, bag fie bit 
brei Oieifen auf einmal an^vidjtcn, unb b^ben fiirtrabr xint 
foIcf)e ©tucffein^ ani 9?om gebracf)t^ @^ tDcire beffer, $How 
nie gefeben norf) erfannt^ 

Unb ob fd)on biefe Qadjc nidjt tDcire, fo ifl bod) nod) ba 

* Wallen liesse, etc., " allow no one, from his own ind'ni- 
Crete curiosity or devotional feeling to perform a pilgrimage, unless he 
be first known, on the part of (v o n) his pastor, city or ruler, to hate 
(haben for z u h a b e n) a satisfactory and good reason." On the 
word r e d 1 i c h see p. 22, Note 5. W a 1 1 e n, is the same as w a o- 
dern, except that it has an elevated character, arising from the di|f- 
nity of the object of pursuit, or the serious nature of the termination 
of the journey, or career. It seems also to have borrowed a shade of 
meaning from its application to the rolling waters of the ocean and 
the waving fields of grain, especially when multitudes are represen- 
ted as thronging to a place of special sanctity. It is hardly necesat- 
ry to add, that it relates to a journey made on foot. 

* Uebel gerathen, turn out badly., lead to evil consequencei. 
See p. 38, Note 3. " For they see no good example at Rome, but 
mere scandal, and as they (the pilgrims) have it in their own proT- 
erb, ' the nearer Rome, the poorer Christians ;' they bring back 
with them contempt of God and of his word." — " But they haTe 
become such adepts that they make all tJiree journeys at once." 

3 Stttcklein, diminutive of S t a c k, " such a fine thing" (▼!«. 
OS a S c h a I k) or " such ware." It is an expression of contempt. 



ADDRESS TO THE GERMAN NOBILITY. 157 

cim J:)ortreffIirf)ere/ nemlicf) bic, ia^ tie einfdttigen Wlen^ 
fcf)en baburd) tjcrfitbret wexicn in eincm falfrf)en 2i?al)u unb 
Unt^erftanb g6ttttrf)er ®e6ete. 2}enn fie ineincm, ba^ \oU 
cf)e^ SffiaEen fei) eiit foilftd)^ guteg 2Bcrf ; ba^ bod) nid)t 
n)al)r tjl* @i^ ifl ein geringe^ gute^ ^Berf, ju mebrmaten ein 
bofe^ Derfiil)rerifd)c^ Sffierf ; benn @ott l)at e^ nid)t ge6o^ , 
ten. @r bat aber geboten, ba^ ein ^Mann \einc6 SBeibe^ 
unb ^inber vparte, unb n^a^^ bem ebefidien Stanb juge^ 
biif)rt, babei fetnem 9uid)(len bienen unb betfen* dliin ge^ 
fd)iet)t e^, bag einer gen 9?om tt)al{et, t)er^et)ret fihtfttg^ 
^unbert, mebr ober \x>eniger ©u(ben, ba^ ibm gtiemanb be:^ 

^VortrefFlichere, nemiich die. VortrefFlicli, and 
trefFl ich, like our word precious, are often used ironically, or in a 
bad sense. Lessing says of Salmasius : *' He brings together, re- 
specting this passage, einen trefFl ichen Wirrwarr, a pre^ 
clous jumbie.'' " And although this evil (this thing) did not exist,, 
there is still another (noch ein, yet one or one more) of more mo- 
ment, namely, that simple-hearted men are thereby led away to a 
false notion and a perverse view of the divine commandments." 

^Kostlich gutes Werk. Kostlich is capable of being 
construed in three ways, in conjunction with the two following 
words. It might be an adverb qualifying gutes, "a particularly 
good work." But both the nature and the connection of the word 
g e r i n g e s, in the corresponding part of the antithesis, show that it 
cannot be so used here. Again, it might be coordinate with gutes, 
and like this agree with Werk alone, as "a precious (and) good 
work." But then it ought properly to have the full form of declen- 
sion (k o s 1 1 i c h e s) and be separated from gutes by a comma^ 
though these rules are not always observed by German writers. See 
boses verfiihrisches Werk, below, where only one of the 
rules is observed. Thirdly, it is here used as an adjective qualifying 
gutes Werk taken together. The question here is, what kind of 
good work it is, or rather what its rank is among good works. It is 
not an exalted good w^ork, but ein geringes gutes Werk, 
an inferior good work, and often an evil, seductive work. 

^Seines Weibes und Kinder warte, und [thue] 
was, etc. "that a man take care of his wife and children, and do 
whatever belongs to a husband, and also (dabei, with that) serve 
and aid his neighbor." 

14 



158 SELECTIONS FROM LUTHER. 

fobfen l)at, unb (djTet fctn 5Bcib imb 5linb, cbcr je feincn 
9tari)jltcn baheime giotb leibcn ; unb mcinet bedv bcr thb^ 
rid)te 93tcnfi-{)/ er n>ol(c fodtcn Ungeborfam iittb aSerachtung 
g6tt(id)cr ®ct>otc mit feincm cigcnrDidigcn SGallcn fitmiirfcn, 
fo e^ bod) ein lautcrer aSorwils ober !teufef^ aSerfiihrmig i(l» 

£^a babeit nun baju geboffcn bie ^Vibfte mit ibren fa(fd)cn, 
erbid)tcrciv narrifd)en gclbcncu 3vibrcn, bamit tag SSoIf cr^ 
regt,2 Don OkHtcd ©cbotcn gcriffcn, unb ju ibrem eigenen 
t)erfiibrcrifd)en aSorncbmcn gcjogcn, iinb ebcit bajTctbe an^ 
gerid)tct, ba^ jTe felttcn Dcrboten baben* 3lbcr c6 bat ©ctb 
getragen, unb fa(fd]e ©ctvalt gcjlcirft, barum bat^i miiflfcn^ 
fortgebcn, c^ fei) voihcv ®ott ober bcr Scclcn S^ciL 

©otd)cn fatfd^eit Dcrfubrerifdjeu ©(aiibcn bev cinfaftigen 
6l)riftcn au^iurotten/ unb tDiebcrum cincn rcd)tcu aScrflanb 

^ Der thorichte Mensch. These words are rendered em- 
phatic by coming after the verb. " And yet he thinks, foolish man, 
that he will garnish over such disobedience and contempt of* God's 
commands with his self-willed pilgrimage; whereas it (the latter) is 
nothing but foolish presumption, or a temptation of the devil." 

2 Damit das Volk erregte "[and] thereby stirred up the 
people, and drawn them away from the commands of God, and at- 
tached them to their own seductive scheme, and set up just what 
they ought to have prohibited." In respect to a n g e r i c h t e t, see 
p. 50, Note 2, and p. 40, Note 1. 

3 Hat's mOssen fortgehen. See p. 67, Note 1. *' There- 
fore was it necessary that it should go on, though it be contrary to 
God and to the interests of the soul." 

* Sole hen — Glauben — auszurotten would be a little 
more perspicuous, if um were prefixed, thus ; Um solchen, etc. 
"In order to root out this false, enticing faith of simple-hearted 
Christians, and to implant in its stead a just perception of good 
works, all pilgrimages should be put down ; for there is nothing good 
in them ; [there is] no command, no obedience ; but innumerable 
causes of sin and for contempt of God's command." The con- 
struction at the close of tiie sentence is changed from the genitive 
(der Son den) to the dative with zu (z u r Ve rac h tu ng) to 
avoid the concurrence of three genitives differently governed, all 
coming ai\er u n d (" and of the contempt of the command of God"). 



ADDRESS TO THE GERMAN NOBILITY. 159 

guter fficrfe aufjunc{)ten, fottten aile SS3attfaf)rten nieber^^ 
gefcgt merben ; benn e^ ifl fcin &nte^ nirf)t barimteit, fein 
@ebet, fcin ®eborfam, fonbcrn unjdl)(icf)e Urfad)en ber 
©ituben, uub ®ctte^ ®e6ot jur aSerad)timg. Saber font:^ 
men fo ml S3ett(er, bie bnrcf) fo(cf)e^ Sffiatten nnjdbtige SSi't^ 
bereien treiben, bie bettefn ot)ne 3tott) fernen^ nnb gett)ot)nen. 
®a fommt \)ev^ freie^ ?e6en nnb mebr Santiner^ bie icf) 
jefet nid)t jdbten unff* 2Ber nnn tDottte mattcn ober waUm 
gefoben, \oiitc i)orl)in feinem ^^farrberrn ober Dberberrn bie 
Urfact)e anjeigen ; fdnbe jTdy^,^ t)^g ^r^^ tbdte nm gnten 
SBerf^ n)il(en, bag bajfelbe ®e(ii6be nnb Sffierf bnrrf) ben 
^farrberrn ober D6erl}errn nnr frifcf) ntit giigen getreten 

^Die betteln ohne Noth lernen. The construction, 
though somewhat harsh, is demanded by the sense. Die ohne 
Noth betteln lernen, which w^ould be smoother and more 
flowing, would mean, " who unnecessarily learn to beg;" w^hereas 
the meaning of the author is, " who learn to beg unnecessarily." The 
rule is simple, where the governing infinitive (lernen) follows the 
one which it governs (betteln), or more briefly, when two con- 
nected infinitives close a sentence, no word should intervene. Be t- 
leln ohne Noth, therefore, is to be regarded as one word, and 
therein consists the abruptness of the expression. 

2 Da kommt her freies Leben, for daher kommt, 
etc. Freies Leben does not mean a free livings which would 
be expressed by ein freier T i s c h, freie Kost, but it is 
equivalent to eine freie Betragung, a licentious life or de- 
portment. The difference between jetzt and nun, is clearly 
perceptible as they appear at the close of this sentence and at the 
beginning of the next. 

^Fande sich's, das e r's thate, etc. " if it is found that he 
does it for the sake of a good work (i. e. as a meritorious work), then 
[I advise] that this vow and work be trampled instantly under foot 
by the pastor or ruler, as a Satanic emissary, and [that the same 
individual] should teach him to apply (a n z u 1 e g e n) the money m 
labor, which would be required for the pilgrimage, to what God ha 
commanded (God's command), and to a woik a thousand times better, 
that is, either to his own family, or to his poor neighbors." On the ex- 
pression den Seine n, compare p. 70, Note 8. Nachsten Ar- 
me n, literally means nearest poor ^ or the poor nearest to one's doors. 



160 SELECTIONS FROM LUTHER. 

witrbe, al^ ein teiife(ifcf)e^ ®efpcnfl, unb Urn anjcigetc, ba^ 
@cft) nub bic 5(r(>cit, fo jnr 2i?al(fabrt gcbort, an ®ette^ 
®c6ct nub taiifntbmal bejjcr ^iGcrf anjulcgen, b, t, : an ben 
©eincn ober fcincn naitften 2{rmen» 2l>o cr'd aber an^ 3Scr^ 
n)il3 tbcitc, \?anb nub Stdbtc jn bcfcben, mag man ibm fei^ 
nen ^iBt((en laflen.^ s^at er'^ aber in ber ^'raufbeit ge(o^ 
bet, bag man biefelben ©edibbe i^erbiete/^ i)erfprecbe, nnb 
bte ©otte^ ©ebote bagegen empcr bebe, bag er t)infort ibm 
begniigen lajfe an bem ©eliibbe in ber ^anfe gefdKben, 
©otte^ ©cbot jn l)aften. X^ecf) mag man^ ibn anf ba^ 
maf, fein ©etDijten ju (liKen, fein ndrrifd) ©eliibbe fajjen 
an^rid)ten. 9tiemanb mil bie ricf)tige gemeine Strage gotti^ 
Iid)er ©ebote tpanbeln ;4 jebermann mad)t ibm felbjl neue 

* Ihm seinen Willen lassen, *Meave his will to him;" 
whereas, in English, we say, " leave him to his will." Luther did 
not wish to abridge the personal freedom of the people, but to deliver 
them from superstition. 

' Dass man dieselben GelUbde verbiete, etc Here, 
as in so many other places, there is an ellipsis before d ass. " [I ad- 
vise] that one forbid and prohibit these vows, and bring up the coin- 
mands in opposition to them ; that he (the person who made the vow) 
henceforth be satisfied with his baptismal vow to keep the command 
of God." E r cannot refer to man; for this latter, not being a sub- 
Btantive, can never be referred to by a pronoun, but must always be 
itself repeated. Ihm begnUgen lassen is explained p. 135, 
Note 4. Ihm is frequently used for sich. See p. 151, Note 6. 
Gc ache hen is a participle agreeing with GelObde, although 
Buch a construction would not now be used. " The vow which 
took place, or was made in baptism." 

3 Doch mag man, etc. "Still one may, for this time, allow 
him, in order to quiet his conscience, to perform his foolish vow." 
Ausrich ten, see p. 50, Note 2. 

* \V a n d e 1 n, as a neuter verb, generally takes a preposition af- 
ter it to govern a substantive. But it may take an accusative of a 
similar signification. So in Engliyli, *' to walk the street," etc. 
" No one will walk in the right, the common jiath of the divine com- 
mands ; every one makes to himself new ways and vows [beyond 
the one required in baptism] as though he had fulfilled all God's 
commands." 



ADDRESS TO THE GERMAN NOBILITY. 161 

2Bege unb ©eliibbe, a\^ hixtte er ©otte^ ®ebote alTe 'ooU^ 
bvad)t. 

X)av\md) f ommen mv anf ben gro^en i^^aufen/ bie ia t)tel 
(jefcben nub beef) n)entg l)a{ten. 3^^^^^^^ ^^cf)t, fieben Syx^ 
ren, id) metne e^ xv^a\)xiid) gut, e^ tft bte bittere unb fit^e 
SGBabrheit,^ unb tfl, bap ntvin ja nicf)t mel)r Setteff (ofter 6au^ 
en fajje ; t)i(f @ott, tbrer ffnb fdf)on ju t)ie[ ; ja tt>ottte 
®ott, jTe tDdren, aKe ab, ober je auf jmei ober brei Drte 
gel)dufet ! @g l)at ntcf)t^ ®ute^ g^tban, e^ tbut and) nim^ 
mermebr gut, trre faufen auf bem ?anbe. J)arum iil mein 
9?atb, man fcf)(age jebn, ober me met ibrer^ 3Jotb ijl, auf 

^ Den grossen Haafen. The reader must not infer from 
the plural pronoun (die), that Haufen is in the plural. Den 
Haufen might, indeed, be the dative plural; but auf after a 
verb of mofiow, requires the accusative, and therefore den Hau- 
fen must be in the accusative singular, and as it is a noun of multi- 
tude, the relative d i e can be used in the plural. " Next we come 
to the great multitude, who," etc. 

2 Es ist die bittere und sQsse Wahrheit, equivalent 
in sense to, " unwelcome, but wholesome truth." The words bit- 
ter und sQss, or more frequently, bittersuss, is used to de- 
scribe a thing which is pleasant in one respect and unpleasant in an- 
other. In other instances, opposite qualities are, in a similar way, 
attributed to the same thing. Wahrlich, before gut, does not 
qualify that, but the verb. " Truly good," would not be expressed 
j by these two words, but by w i r k 1 i c h gut. " My intention is 
certainly good ; it is unwelcome, but wholesome truth [that 1 am 
( about to communicate ; and] it is this, that no more convents of men- 
,' dicant friars be built. God deliver us ; there are already by far too 

Imany of them (i h r Gen. for i h r e r). Would to God, that they 
were all abolished, or collected together in two or three places. Wan- 
Idering about the country, has never done any good, and never will." 
[Irre laufen, etc. is the nominative] Ab might possibly be 
1 used here for abgethan; but more probably it is used without 
I «ny ellipsis, in the sense of away ^ out of the way. 

^ I h r e r is in the genitive, and governed by v i e 1, as it is by z u 
V i e 1 a few lines above. " Put ten, or as many of them as is neces- 
sary, into one great one (lump), and of them make one, which, being 

14* 



162 SELECTIONS FKOM LUTHER. 

einen ^^^aiifcn, intb mad)e @ineg barau^, ia^ genugfam "ocx^ 
forget, nid)t bettcln biirfe* D c6 ijl: Incr t)icfmcbr anjufe^ 
l)en, xva^ gcmcincm x^aufen jur Sefigfcit netb iR/ bcnn 
mi^ St» granci^cii^, E^ominicu^, Sluguftut ebcr je cin 
^cnfrf) gefcljt bat,^ befenbcr^ tpeit ei nicf)t geratben i|l 
ibrer ^JlJteiniing nad). Unb baf man ftc iibertjebe^ ^Vcbi:? 
gen6 unb 33cid[)ten^, e^ trcire bcnn, bag^ jTe i>on S3ifd)ofen, 

satficiently provided for, will not need to beg." Versorget is a 
participle used adjectively. 

^ Was gemeinern Hau fen zurSeligkeit noth ist. 
N o t h, necessary, is construed directly, not with a preposition, but 
with the dative ; consequently it is here immediately connected, not 
with zur-^eligkeit, but with Haufen. The sense is al- 
ways given in English by making the noun in the dative, nomina- 
tive, and by rendering noth est by needs. "What the com- 
mon mass needs for its salvation, rather than (vielmehr den n)." 
See p. 10, Note 3. 

' Gesetzt hat, see p. 1 1 , Note 5, and Gerathen ist, see p. 
38, Note 3. 

2 Ueberhebe. When the accent is on the preposition, or first 
part of the compound, this word, as an active verb, signifies to raise 
a thhig and put it over soviething else, e. g. to put a basket over, or 
on the other side of a wall. But wlien the accent is on the verb, or 
second part of the compound, the word means, to raise one nhove a 
thing (in the genitive), so as to deliver or release him from it; and 
that is the sense here. Asa reflective verb (sich uberheben) 
it signifies, to exalt one's self in the sense of being proud, insolent or 
arrogant, with the genitive of that of which one is proud. Some- 
times it is used of too great physical effort, and means to strain one's 
self, or injure one's self by lifting too hard. The following may serve 
as examples of the two uses of the reflective verb. D a s s i c h 
mich nicht der ho hen O ff'e n b a r u n g a be r he be, ist 
m i r g e g e b e n e i n P f a h 1 ins F 1 e i s c h, " that J miglit not be 
elated for, or proud of, the high revelation, a thorn in tlie flesh was 
given me." Es war niir zu schwer, ich habe mich 
d a m i I b e r h o b e n, " it was too heavy for me, I have strained 
myself with it." 

* Es ware donn, dass, except that, unless. D a s s near the 
beginning of this sentence, depends on d a r u m ist me i n Hath 
several lines above. 



ADDRESS TO THE GERMAN NOBILITY. 163 

^^farrern, ©enteine ober SDbrigfeit baju bentfen unb begeb^ 
ret tt)urben* 3(1 borf)^ au^ fo(d)em ^rebfgen unb S3eicf)tett 
iucf)t^ mebr benn eitef S)a^ unb S^eib ju)ifd)eu W^ffen unb 
?!Kend)en, groge^ 3Iergernig unb 5;^tnberni^ be^ gemeinen 
2Soff^ ern)vicf)fen, bamft e^ n)itrbig n)urbe, unb n)ot)I tJerbie^ 
net aufjubcren, bien^eil fein maq^ n)ol)[ geratben n)erbem 
@(^ bat nirf)t ein ung(eid)e^ 3(nfel)en,3 bag ber b^th'ge ro^ 
ntifcbe @tubf fo(d)e^ 5;^eer ntd)t umfonfl geme{)ret l)at, auf 
bag ntdf)t bte q)nefterfcf)aft unb St^tbum fetner X'ovannei 
nnteibtg, etnmat tbnt ju ]tavf tt)urben, unb eine 9?eformatton 
anftengen, bte ntd)t trdgttrf) feiner ^eiftgfeit wave. 

3um t^ierjebnten, mv fet)en and), tvie bie ^ne(l:erfcf)aft 
gefatten, unb mand)er anne ^^faffe, mtt SBetb unb ^inbern 
iiberfaben, fein ®en)ijTen befcbn^ert/ ba bod) Jtiemanb ju^* 
Ojiit, wo itfxien ju l)ei:fen n)dre.^ ?dgt^^ ^abfl: unb ©t^ 

1 [E s] i s t d o c h. See p. 17, Note 5, and p. 22, Note 4. 

^ Dieweil sein mag, etc. " because one can get along well 
without it." Gerathen is the participial form from rathe n, 
which in old German is used, as it is here, in the sense of e n t b e h- 
r e n, io do without. It governs the genitive (sein for seiner, 
p. 46, Note 4). Mag gerathen werden, being impersonal and 
in the passive, cannot be translated literally into English. " It may 
well be deprived of it," would be the form of the expression, the first 
word being impersonal like there may fee, and the last word (it) refer- 
ring to the subject of discourse, viz. solchem predigen, etc. 

^Eshatnichtein ungleiches Ansehen. Ungleich 
here means corresponding to the person or character spoken of. " it 
is quite in character that," or " it has no unbecoming appearance 
that." 

*Wie die Priesterschaft ge fa lien [ist], und 
[wie] mancher arme Pfaffe, mit Weib undKin- 
dern Oberladen, (participle), sein Gewissen (accusative) 
beschwert, " how the priesthood is fallen, and how many a poor 
priest, burdened (morally) with wife and children, brings upon him- 
self remorse of conscience (burdens his conscience)." 

^Da doch Niemand zuthut wo ihnen zu helfen 
w are, " whereas no one puts his liand to the work, where it is pos- 



164 SELECTIONS FROM LUTHER. 

frf)ofei t)\e ge[)cn, wa^ ba gebet, k)erfcerben, xt>a^ t^erbirbt, fo 
n)i(l id) errctteu mcin @ett)ijT<^n unb ba^ 5i)?aul frei aiiftbmt,^ 
c^ ^crbric^c^ ^abft, $8ifcf)6fe eber tt)en c^ voitt^ unb fagc 
alfo : 

2)ag itacf) (Shrifti unb ber 3(pojlte( ^infel^en^ cine jc(}Itd)e 
©tabt cincn ^>farrberrn ober 93ifd)of foil baben, n)ic f Idrlicf) 
^Mului^ frf)vcibet Zit. 1. ; unb berfelbe ^farrberr nid)t ge^ 
brungen^ obne ein ehelid)e^ SOBeib ju leben, fonbern nioge 
einc^ babcn, rvie ©t- ^Mulud fcbrcibt 1. ^imotb* 3. unb 
fpnd)t : „(5^ felt ein S5ifd)of fei)n6 ein 5!JJann, ber unflrcU 

sible t/O aid them." Z u t h u n, as a verb, is, at present, but little 
used in the sense of to take a part in a work, to assist, to help. But 
it is still in good use as a verbal noun, or infinitive used substantive- 
ly, a^si^/aMce, aid, i. e. the act of assisting, or aiding. Compare d a- 
z u t h u n, p. 1)4, Note 4. Z u h e 1 f e n after the verb s e i n, em- 
braces the idea of possibility. See p. 12, Note 3. 

^ L a s s t's (d e r) Pabst und (die) B i s c h o f e, etc. "If 
the pope and bishops, in this matter (h i e for hie r), let tilings (e s, 
it) go as they now go (let it go whicli goes) and (let) that be ruined 
which now goes to ruin (i. e. the priests and tlieir households), still I 
icill keep viij conscience, and speak freely, though it annoy pope, bish- 
ops, or whomsoever it may." 

2 Aufthun, differs from aufmachen, as thun does from 
mac he n. See p. 20, Note 3, near the end. The former expresses 
merely the act of opening without any regard to the circumstance 
whether the thing remains open or not, while the latter has reference 
chiefly to the result, i. e. that a thing not only be opened, but kept 
open. Aufthun is especially appropriate where a thing is closed 
very fast, and where great effort is requisite to open it. O e f n e n, 
is the most general and indefinite \vord, and conveys neither of the 
specific ideas which are conveyed by the other two words. 

^ Verdriesse. Sec p. 30, Note 3. 

* Einsetzen corresponds both in etymology and signification 
with institution, i. e. the act of instituting. It is an infinitive used 
substantively, and corresponding to our participial noun, the institut- 
ing. See p. 13, Note 6. 

* Gcdrungcn (werde). 

^ Es soil ein Bischofsein, forEin Bischofsoll seyn. 
See p. 52, Note 1. 



ADDRESS TO THE GERMAN NOBILITY. 165 

flid)^ fei) nub nur eiite^ e()elic(}en 9Bei6^ @emal)f, n)c{d)e^2 
^inbcr geborfam mib iii(i)ti(i ftnt)" ic. Senn ein 93ifcf)of 
unb ^pfarrberr fjlt (gin I:^tng3 bet @t. ^aufu^, mie ba^ aurf) 
©t 5^icront)muiS4 betDabret. ^(ber tJcn ben 25ifrf)ofcn, bte 
je()t (tub, xvci^ bie (grf)rift nittte^, fonbern fi'nb 'oon d)rijl^ 
Iicf)cr gemciner Drbnuug gefegt,^ ba^ einer iiber ml ^farr^ 
l)erren regiere* 

2^a iini nun f)ernad)ma(g,6 ^^^ j-j^ ^{e( aSerfofgnng nnb 
©treitc^ mar miber bie ^eger, t)ie{ bettiger aSdter gemefen, 
bie jTrf) frcimiKig be^ ebe[irf)en ©tanbe^ tJerjieben l)aben,'^ 
aii\ ba^ ]ic befto bejiex ftubirten^^ nnb bereit n?dren anf aKe 

^ Un s trail i ch. For the signification of its primitive, see p. 
130, Note 4. 

2 Welches, whose^ obsolete. See p. 52, Note 1. 

'Ein Bischof and Ffarrherr ist Ein Ding. Pfarr- 
herr, is used in the sense of presbyter or elder. When the word 
ein, as an adjective, is emphatic, it is written with a capital letter, 
which is equivalent to writing the word in Italics in English; as 
Ein, one. 

* Hieroriymus. The words of Jerome are : Idem est ergo pres- 
byter qui eptscopus. Cora, on Tit. 1. 

^Sondern sind von christlicher gemeiner Ord- 
nung gesetzt, "but they are created (established) by mere (ge- 
meiner, common) ecclesiastical authority (arrangement)." 

^ Hernachmals, obsolete for hernach, which means mme- 
diately after, whereas nachmals means aftericards, without the 
idea of immediate succession. Luther uses the word hernach- 
mals here in a general sense, when nachmals might be used. 
" Now, afterwards, when there was so much (of) persecution, and 
controversy with the heretics [in which the vanquished party were 
often banished], there were many holy fathers," etc. 

^ Verziehen haben. Sich verzeihen, with the genitive, 
which is now nearly obsolete, means to surrender something valuabie, 
and thereby differs from entsagen, to renounce anything whether 
it be good or evil. Sich verzeihen, like verzichten (auf), 
means also, to make a format surrender of anything, and thereby 
differs from sich b e g e b e n, to give a thing up in fact, without 
saying anything about it. 

" Studirten, subjunctive , might study. 



166 SELECTIONS FROM LUTHER. 

(Stmtbcn jum Zo\>e unb jiim Streit* 2)a ifi nun ber xiy^ 
nufd)e Stn()( an^ eigcnem grctJef brein gefaUen/ nnb cut 
gemein ©ebot barau^ (]emacf)t, Derbeten bem ^>rierterflanb 
c\)elid) ju fet)n ; ba^ bat ibnen bcr Xcnfef gcbeipen,^ me 
©L ^anlu^ 1* 3:im. 4, Derfiinbigt: „@^ n)erben femmen 
?ebrcr, bie JCenfel^^Sebre bringen, nnb Derbieten, ebelid) ju 
tt)erbcn'' ic. Sabnrd) fciber fo t)iel 3cimmcrt? entftanben,^ 
bag nid[)t jn crjatjfen ijlt, nnb bat babnrd] Urfad) gebcn^ ber 
gricd}i[cf)en ^ircf)e, jTd) abgnfenbern, nnb nnenblirf)e 3tt)ies^ 
tvad)t, ©imbe, (2cf)anbe nnb 2(crgernig gemebrt : tvic benn 
t()nt aKe^, n?a^ ber ;x;enfet anfdl)et nnb treibet^ SBa^ tt)ol^ 
(en mx nnn l)ie tbnn ? 

3cl) ratbe, man mact)'^^ n)ieber fret unb lajTe einem 3^^ 
gttd)en feine freie 28itlfnf)r, et)eHrf} ober nicf)t ebetirf) jn mer^^ 
ben. Slber ba mng gar t^icl ein anber SKegiment^ nnb Drb^ 

^ Drein ge fa lien, Aos intermeddled, or fallen in vpon reck- 
lessly. D r e i n, or d a r e i n, properly differs from d a r i n, as 
thereinto differs from therein. It implies motion into. Hence with 
many verbs, it conveys the idea of interruption, disturbance, inter- 
meddling icithout regard to consequences ; as, d a r e i n r e d e n, to 
interrupt, drein schlagen, ^o strike on, hit where it may. 

2 Das hat ihnen der Teufel geheissen, " Satan 
commanded them that, instigated them to that." H e i s s e n, see p. 
32, Note 5. 

^ £ n t s t a n d e n (i s t). " Thereby, alas ! has so much (of) 
trouble arisen, that it cannot be told." Z u e r z a h 1 e n i s t, see 
p. 12, Note 3. 

* Geben for gegeben, " and has thereby given to the Greek 
church cause to separate and occasioned (multiplied) infinite dissen- 
sion, sin, scandal and offence, as does everything which Satan begins 
and prosecutes." A n f a h e n, obsolete for a n f a n g e n. 

* M a c h's, present subjunctive for m a c h e e s. See p. 5, Note 4. 
^Aberdaniussgar viel ein ander Regiment, 

etc. ** But then there must be (take place) a very widely different 
control and disposal of the property, and the entire canonical law 
must sink, and not many fiefs go to Rome. 1 fear that avarice has 
\>cen a cause of the miserable unchaste chastity ; whence it has come 



ADDRESS TO THE GERMAN NOBILITY. 167 

ttiiiig ber ©liter gefcf)ef)en, mtb iai ganje geifllidK 9?erf}t ju 
a3oben gehen iinb nirf}t- t)ie( ?ehen gen 3tom fonimen* 2cf) 
beforge, ber ®eij fei) etne Urfacf)e getuefen ber efenben, im^ 
feufrf)en ^eufcf)bett ; barau^ benn gefofget, ba^ Sebermann 
babe motten ^faflF n>erben nub feiit ^inb baraiif (lubiren 
laiTen : nid)t ber Syjeinung, feufd) ju feben, ba^ tt)obf ol}ne 
^AfaffenRanb gefcf)ef)en forinte ; fonbern jTd) mit je{tlid[)er 
9tabritng obne Sfrbett unb ^iihe ju ernabren votber iaS 
®ebot ©ctte^, ©en. 3. „i:}n fottfl bein S3rob ejTen tm 
(2d)n)ei^ beine^ 2(ngepcf)t^/' l)aben ibm^ etne garbe ange^ 
(Iridhen, al^ foUte tbr 2(rbeiten fei)n S3eten nnb 5D?ejye batten. 
3cf} laffe f)ier anfleben ^abfl, S3ifcbofe, (Sttfte, W^ffen 
unb 5Koncbe, bte @ott nicbt eingefe^t bat. §aben jTe ibnen 
fe(bjl 53urben aufgelegt, fo tragen jTe fie and). 3* tt)itt 
reben Don bem ^>farr(l:anb, ben ®ott eingefe^t bat, ber eine 
©emeinbe mtt ^rebigen unb ©acratnenten regieren tnu^, 
bei ibnen tt>obnen unb jeitKd) ban^balten ; benfetben foKte 
burd) em d)ri)Hid)e^ Soncttium nad^gefafien^ merben grei^ 
beit, ebefid) ju merben, jn Dermetben ®efal)r{td)feit unb 

(gefolget [ist], has folloioed) that every body would become 
priest, and every body would put his son to study for it (the priest- 
hood), not with (of) the purpose of living chastely (which might 
take place without entering the priesthood)," etc. 

^Haben ihm, etc., " they have given it (i h m, i. e. das G e- 
bot a gloss (color) as if their labor were to be praying and holding 
I mass. I leave to themselves (I here let remain, or stand) bishops, 
( convents, priests and monks, w^liich God did not institute. If they 
, have imposed upon themselves burdens, let them bear them. 1 will 
speak only of the ministry which God ordained, which is to guide a 
church with preaching and ordinances, live with them (the church), 
and maintain a household relation (i. e. live otherwise than in a con- 
vent)." 

* Nachgelassen, yielded back, restored, conceded. Liberty in 

i this respect had been taken from the ministry by the papacy ; it 

should now be formally conceded or restored by a council. Zn we r- 

den is dependent on Freiheit. Zu vermeiden, is equiva- 

toum zu vermeiden, in order to avoid. 



168 SELECTIONS FROM LUTHER. 

©i'tnbe. Denn bie^wil jTe ©ett fe(b(l nicf)t t)ertinibett hat, 
fo fott imb mag fic ?iicmanb i^erbinben, eb e^ g(cid) ein @n^ 
gef 'oon .^^^immel n>dre, fd)wcige benn^ ^ai>)l ; iiiib \va6 ba^ 
gegeu im geifllitteu 3?erf)t gefefet, finb lauter gabedt unb 
©efdwaJ^e. 

3inn fccf)^jehntert, e^ n)dre and) ^totb,^ bag bie 3^I)t'tage, 
aSegangnijye, (gcc(enmej]*en gar abgctban, ober jc gar c^nixif 
gert n^itrbcn ; barum, bag^ n)ir ofcntfid) fcben t)or 3(ugen, 
bag nicbt mcbr benn ein ©pott barauc? gcVDorben tft, bamit 
®ctt boct)Iicf) crgiirnet n)irb, unb nnr auf @c(b, grcfl'eu unb 
©aufcn gertcf)tet jTnb* "^SQa^ felttc @ett fiir cincm (i)efalten 
barin l)abcn, menu bie ctenbcn 2Sigi(ien inib 5)tcjTcn fo jam^ 
tiierlid) gefd)(appcrt mcrben, nod) gelcfcit, wod) gcbctet ; unb 

* S c h vv e i g e d e n n, noi ^o say. Schweige for geschwei- 
ge. Gott, and Niemand are in the nominative. 

2 Es ware audi noth, etc. "It would also be needful, that 
the holy-days, processions, and mass for the dead, be abolished, or at 
least, (their number) greatly diminished." instead of J ah r tag, the 
word Jahrstag is now used. It means any yearly festival, as 
Christmas, New-years, saints' days, etc. Begangniss, is now 
limited to funeral processions ; it was formerly used of processions 
in general. 

^ D a r u m d a s s, etc. " Because we openly see (right before our 
eyes) that only (nicht mehr denn) contempt comes from it (it 
is all turned into ridicule) with which God is highly displeased, and 
that (they) are appropriated only for gain, feasting and drinking. 
What kind of pleasure can God have in it, when vigils and mass, are 
neither read nor prayed, but slabbered out ; and even though offered in 
prayers, they are not performed on God's account, out of love to him, 
but for the sake of money, and on account of obligations entered into ? 
Vor Augen is tautological after o ffe n tl f c h. Ge r i elite t auf, 
directed to. F r e s s e n differs widely from e s s e n. See p. 51, Note 
1. So does 8 a u f e n differ in the same way from trinken. 
Schlappern, and the more common word s c h 1 a p p e n (to iii}U 
as a dog), of a kindred meaning, are also written schlabbern, 
and 8C hi abb en, in the former of which (schlabbern) we 
see the original of the English word slabhtr, with which it agrees 
precisely in signification. 



ADDRESS TO THE GERMAN NOBILITY. 169 

ob ffe fcf)on Qchctet n)iirben, bod) nirf)t urn ©otte^^ miffen aug 
freier ?iebe, foitbern urn bed @e(bed n^ittcn unb i)erpfltd)te^ 
ter ®tf)utb DolI6racf)t n^erben* 

9^1111 i]t ed borf) tttcf)t mog(icf), ba^ ®ott^ ein 3Berf gefalle;. 
ober etwad bei tbm erfange, bad ntrf)t in freier 'ikbe qc^ 
frf)iebt. ®o ijl: ed je d)rifKicl), bag mir 3(tted abtbmt, ober 
je meniger mad)en, n)ad^ iDir feben in einen ?i}?igbraud) foni^ 
men, nnb (3ott mebr erjiirnt benn t)erf6bnt* @d n)dre mir 
fieber, ja &ott angenebmer nnb Diet befler, bag ein ©tift^ 
^ircf)e ober ^(ofter aCe ibre ja()r(irf)en SRefen^ nnb SSigifien 
auf einen .s^anfen ndbnien, nnb t)ietten einen :j!ag, eine 
red)te SSigifien nnb 9}?efle mit berj(icf)em ©rnjl, 2(nbarf)t nnb 
©fanben fiir aUe if)re 2Bol)(tbater, benn bag ]ie ibr tanfenb 
nnb tanfenb atte 3^bre einem Seben eine befonbere bieften^ 
obne fo[df)e 3tnbarf)t nnb ©fanben. D lieben Sbrijlten, ed liegt 
@ottnirf)t an Diet, fonbern an n)ol)f beten,^ ja er Derbammt 

^ Gott is in the dative. 

' A 1 1 e s — was, " abolish, or at least diminish everything which 
we see come to abuse, and (which) offends God," etc. 

^Alle ihre jahrliche Messen, etc. " put all their an- 
nual masses together (into one heap), and should hold, during one 
day, a genuine vigil and mass, etc.— than that they should every year 
hold their thousands upon thousands (of masses and vigils), a sepa- 
tate one for each benefactor." Einen Tag, during one day; 
eines Tags, on a certain day. Eine rechte Vigilien^ 
Vigilien, is not here plural, but singular. The Thuringians 
still say eine familien, eine Schulen, eine Mtihlen, 
eine Kirchen, a family^ a school^ a mill, a church. The addi- 
tion of the letter n is peculiar, and now provincial. 

*Es liegt Gott nicht an viel, sondern an wohl 
b e t e n, " God attaches importance not to praying much^ but to pray- 
ing well. Liegt is here an impersonal verb ; Gott is the dative 
of the person, which is the logical subject, and viel beten, as a 
j substantive, is the dative of the thing, governed by the preposition 
« a n. The compound verb a n 1 i e g e n, in which the preposition is 

(separable, has a similar signification and construction ; but the differ- 
ence in construction is this, that with the former (1 i e g e n) a sec- 
ond dative follows the preposition a n and is governed by it ; in the 

15 



170 SELECTIONS FROM LUTHER. 

bie fangen unb 'oidcn ®c6etc, 5D?attb» 6. unb fagt, jTe tDcrben 
ttur mebr ^Vin bamit ^erbiciien* 2(ber bcr ®cij, bcr ®ott 
nicf)t fanu trauen, vid)tct fold) 2Befcn an/ t)at ©orge, cr 

3um jTebenjebnten, man mii^te and) abtbitn etlirf)e ^^one 
ober ©trafen bc^ gcifHirf)cn 5){ed)t^, fonber(id) ba^ Snterj? 
bift,2 n)e(d)e^ ot)ne atteii 3^<^if^t t*^^ bb^^ ®^il^ erbad)t bat 

latter (a n 1 i e g e n), this is not the case. L i e g e n, in its literal 
sense, followed by an, is very simple, as Coin liegt am 
R h e i n, " Cologne lies on the Rhine." A n, after this verb, very 
often indicates a cause of something ; as, er liegt an einem 
F i e be r, "he lies sick of a fever," i. e. the fever is the cause of his 
lying sick. Die Zogerung liegt an ihm, " the delay 
lies in him," i. e. he is the cause of the delay. Es liegt daran, 
dass, "this is the reason that" (the reason lies in this). Es liegt 
V i e 1 (or w e n i g, or n i c h t s) d a r a n, " it is of great (or little, 
or no) consequence, or importance:" and es liegt ihm viel 
an dieser Sache (which is the construction to be illustrated), 
"this thing is very important to him," or "he attaches great im- 
portance to this thing." 1st gelegen is much used in the same 
way as liegt. See the lexicons on gelegen. Anliegen 
is construed thus : "Die Sache liegt m i r an, " the thing 
affects my heart, or is important to me." See p. 70, Note 2. 

* Richtet solch Wesen an, etc. "makes such work 
(produces such disorder) and fears, it will starve." Anrichten, 
see p. 40, Note 1, and p. 50, Note 2. Solch, p. 18, Note 8. W e- 
sen, p. 72, Note 2. Hungers s terbe n, p. 68, Note 3. 

' Sonderlich das Interdikt, " especially the interdict." 
" The interdict is the ban of excommunication extended to whole 
kingdoms or provinces. If it be pronounced against a country and 
its inliabitants, no churcli bell is to be rung, no religious service held, 
no child baptized, no penitent to receive absolution, no person to re- 
ceive Christian burial, — in short, the curse of God, as it were, was 
made to rest upon them." Neudccker, Lexikon der Kirchenge- 
schichte, 1. 198. Hence the indignant language of Luther, " Is that 
not a Satanic work, to correct one sin by means of many and greater 
sins ? It is a greater sin to clo.so and lay down (neglect) the word 
of God and his service, than to murder twenty popes, at once, not to 
say than to detain a priest, or ecclesiastical property." S c h w e i- 



ADDRESS TO THE GERMAN NOBILITY. 171 

3(1 ba^ nirf)t ctn teiiflifd)e^ SBerf, ba^ man cine QSiiitbe bc\^ 
fern mid mit mkn nub gregereu ©iinben ? @^ ijl ja gro:^ 
^cre (Siinbe, bag man ©ettes^ 2Bort nnb Sienjl fd)n)etget 
ober niebevfegt, benn ob etner jmangig ^abj^e bdtte ermir^ 
get anf einmal, gefchtDetge benn einen ^nejlter, cber getftltcf) 
®nt bebatten. @^ tjl: ber jarten ^ngenben etne/ bie im 
geijltidien 5Hed)te geternet n)erben ; benn ba^ geifltid)'e 
9ted)t l)ci^t and) barnm geijlticf), bap eg fommt Don bem 
©ei|i, nid)t i)on bem beiligen ©eijl:, fonbern wn bem bofen 
©eiiL 

2)en SSann^ mitgte man nid)t eber branct)en, benn tt)o bie 
(£d)rift n)eifet jn brani1)cn, b. i. : toitcv bie, fo nid)t red)t 
gtanben, ober in ojfenttirfien ©i'tnben teben, nid)t nm ba^ 
jeitlicf)e ®nt. aiber nnn i\t eg nmgefe^rt,^ gfanbt, febt 3^^ 

gen as an active verb, is now an archaism, verschweigen 
having taken its place in that sense. Schweige is frequently 
used by Luther in the sense ofgeschweige, not to say. N i e- 
d e r 1 e g e n, is here used in its literal sense, to lay or put down. It 
is more commonly used figuratively, to resign^ Einen Pri est- 
er, Oder geistlich Gut behalten, refers to foreign 
princes, such as the kings of France and England, who often seized 
prelates, and ecclesiastical property in order to maintain their sover- 
eignty in their own dominions. 

^Es ist der zarten Tugenden eine, "It (putting 
under the interdict) is one of the amiable virtues, which are learned 
in the canonical law ; for it is called spiritual law because (d a r u m, 
d a s s) it comes from the spirit, not from the Holy Spirit, but from 
the evil spirit." For the construction of the genitive Tugen- 
den with eine, see p. 96, Note 2. 

*Den Bann. Luther here condemns what is called the great- 
er ban, or civil proscription, and pleads for a return to the primitive 
practice of excommunication from an individual church by the prop- 
er authorities, or the lesser ban. 

^Aber nun ist es umgekehrt, etc. " But now the rule 
is reversed. Every man believes and lives as he chooses. Precisely 
these fleece and disgrace other people most with their bans ; and all 
bans are now resorted to only for the sake of spoil (temporal goods), 
for which we have to thank no one but the holy code of injustice (ca- 



172 SELECTIONS FROM LUTHER. 

bermann, rvic er wiH ; c6eu bie am meifleu bic anbern ?eiitc 
fd)inben imb fd^dnbcn mit Sanneu, iinb aUe fdaimc je^t 
niir m\V6 jcit(id)e Out gangl)afticj finb, meId)C!^ wix and) 
Jticmaub benu bcm bciligen gei|l(id)cn llnred)t ju banfen 
babcn, ba^ou id) t)ovbin im ©ermen it)eitcv gefagt babe. 

Sie aubcru ©trafcn^ unb ^oncn, ©iifpcnfien, 3tregu^ 
Iaritdt,2 2{ggrat)ation,3 SJeaggrai^atiou, I^cfpejlticn, iMiben, 
2}onncnt, a5ermalcbeien, 2>crbamnicn, inib roa^ ber gimb^ 
lein mehr jTnb/ fcKte man jebn g'tleit ticf bcgraben in bcr 
@rbe, ba(5 and) ibr 9tame unb @cbdd)tnii5 iud)t mebr auf 
Srben mdre. 2^cr bofe @ci|V t)er burd) ba^ geirttid)e SKcd)t 

nonical law), of which I have spoken more at large in my Sermon 
(on the subject)." E b e n die is very emphatic, and must be so 
read. Am m e i s te n, the most. This form of the superlative is 
strictly relative, or makes a definite comparison. The other form, 
me is tens, is absolute and indefinite, mostly, for the most part. 
The same rule obtains with all the superlatives of these two forms. 
The other forms of the superlative, as meist and a u f s beste, 
zum schonsten, im geringsten, belong to the absolute 
and indefinite class. In other words, while the superlative of adverbs 
formed with a m is definitely and strictly a degree of comparison, 
those ending in st and ens, or formed with aufs, zum and i m, 
are not so, but m(»rely express a high degree of anything. — G a n g- 
haftig is now out of use and gangbar has taken its place. 
D a n k e n is generally a neuter verb, but is sometimes active in the 
sense of v e r d a n k e n, and then takes an accusative. 

*Die andern Strafe n, etc. *' The other punishments 
and penalties (viz.), suspension," etc. 

* Irregularitat. Wliat sort of penalty is this? Is it de- 
priving persons of the privileges which belong to them as rcgulares^ 
or members of a certain monastic order ? 

^ Aggravation. Jlggravatio est repetita et iterata excommu- 
nicatio — Du Cange, Glossarium. Reaggravation is a slill 
further repetition. 

* Und was der Fondle in mehr sind, ^' and what- 
ever more (of; inventions there are." Mehr governs the genitive, 
der F u nd 1 c i n. See p. 13, Note 3. 

* Der bose Geist, etc. " The evil spirit who is let loose by 



ADDRESS TO THE GERMAN NOBILITY. 173 

\]t fcp Qctvovhcn, hat fcfdf)e greuncf)e ^fage imb Samnter in 
bad t)immfifd)e Dteicf) ber l)ei(igeu (Jbriftenbeit gebracf)t, unb 
nirf)t rnebr benn (2ce(eu?aSerber6cn mtb §inbern baburcf) 
5ugeric{)tet ba^ tt>o[)[ mag Don tbnen t)erflaiiben n)erben bad 
SGBort gt)ri(li 9}?atth. 23 : „gBet)e end) ©cf)riftge(ef)rtett, 
ibr" I)abt eiicf)^ gcuommcu bie ®en>a(t ju fel)ren, unb 
^,fcf)(iepet ju bad Symmelvcid) t)or ben ?i)?enfcf)en ; tbr ge^et 
nid)t binein, unb wehvH benen, bie binein gef)en/^ 

3um acf)tjebnten, ba^ man aKe ^efle abtijate^ unb atfein 
ben ©onntag bebiefte^ SBottte man aber je unferer ^rau^? 
en2 unb ber grogen ^eiftgen 5?e(l balten, ha^ jTe atte auf 

I the canonical law, has introduced such horrible evil and wretched- 
; ness into the heavenly kingdom of our sacred Christianity, and 

thereby effected nothing but the hindrance and ruin of souls," etc. 

H i n d e r n belongs to S e e 1 e n, in the same v^^ay that V e r d e r- 
I ben does. Though used substantively, they, in the character of 
i verbs, govern the accusative. Seel en. On zurichten, see 
I p. 50, Note 2, near the end. 

' E u c h must not here be taken for the ordinary dative after the 

verb n e h m e n, (indicating the person fiom whom a thing is taken 

p. 52, Note 4.), but as a kind of expletive indicating, as usual in 

such cases, the interest of the agent in what he is said to do. See 
' Gram. p. 348. 
■ *Wollte man aber je unserer Frauen, etc. "But 

if men would hold the festival of the Virgin (of our Lady) or of the 
I distinguished saints, (I advise) that they all be transferred (from 
* week-days) to the Sabbath, or that service be held only in the morn- 
' ings, leaving the remainder of the day for business. (The following 

are the) reasons ; — for, since an abuse is now practised in drinking, 
< amusements, idleness and all sorts of sin, we offend God more on 

these holy days than on others. And now they are entirely revers- 
^ ed, — the holy days (so called) are not holy, and working-days are 
J holy ; and with these numerous festival days, not only is no service 
j either done to God or to his saints, but great dishonor. And yet 
' certain senseless prelates think, that if they institute a festival to St. 
j Otiliaand St. Barbara, each one (doing so) according to his own blind 

devotion, they do a very good work ; whereas they would have done 

Inuch better if they, out of honor to a saint, had turned a festival day 
15* 



174 SELECTIONS FROM LUTHER. 

ben Sonntag tDurben t)ertegt, ober nur beg 5[)?orgeng jur 
?OZe(Te (jebaften, barnacf) lieg ben ganjen ^taq 5Berftag fei)n, 
Urfad}e : 2;enn a(g nun ber ^[Ri^brancl) mit Smifen, Spie^ 
len, 5D?n6iggang unb alicvki (Siinbe gebet, fo erji'trnen tt)ir 
ntel)r ©ott anf bie beitigen iJ^age, benn anf bie anbern, Unb 
ffnb ganj umgefebrt, ba^ beilige S^age nid)t l)ei{ig, SGBer^ 
tage bcitig jlinb, unb &ott; nod) feinen i^ei(igen, nicf)t attein 
fein S^icnjl:, fonbern gre^e Une^re gcfcf)icl)t mit ben melen 
I)ei(igen ^agen- 2Gien)obl etfiche toUe ^Vataten meinen, 
tDenn jTe ©t. Dtifien, (2t- 93arbaren, unb ein 3cglic{)er nad) 
feiner btinbcn 3(nbadit ein gejl: macf)et, babe gar ein gnteg 
®erf getl)an, n)o er ein "oid SSejJereg tbate, n)o er jn gbren 
cinem ^eiligen, au^ einem l)eitigen XiiQ einen SBerftag ge^ 
anarf)t» 

2)ajn nimmt ber gemeine ^ann^ jtt)ei feib{ict)e ©rf)aben, 
iiber biefen geifHicf)en ©ct)aben, baf; er an feiner 3(rbeit t)er^ 
faumet mirb, baju ntel)r t)erjel)ret benn fonfl ; ja and) fei^ 
nen ?eib fct)tt)dd)t unb nngefd)icft mad)t, tt)ie n?ir bag tag^ 
lid) feben, unb bod) Dtiemanb jn beflern gebenft, Unb t)ier 
foHte man nid)t ad)ren, cb ber ^|>abfl bie ^^efte eingefel3t b^t, 
ober eine I^ifpenfatiou'^ unb Urtanb l)aben mii^te* 2Cag 
mber ®ott ijlt,^ nnb ben 5!}cenfd)en fd)ab(id) an ?eib unb 

into a working-day." F ran en. Genitive singular. Feminine 
nouns were formerly declined in the singular- 

^ D a z u n i m i m t d c r gemeine Mann, etc. " Further- 
more, the common people sustain, besides this spiritual injury, two 
temporal loesses, (the one) that they are interrupted in their labor, the 
other (or in addition to that) they expend more than they would 
otherwise." VersaOmen means properly to suffer a thing to 
pass awny through dclny^ or negligence, to neglect. In' the passive, 
it means, to he neglected^ when used of a thing, and to be put behind- 
hand^ or in arrears, to be hindered^ when used of a person. 

* Oder [m an] eine Dispensation, " whether the pope 
has instituted the festival, or wlirther one must obtain special per- 
mission to hold it." 

3 W a 8 wider (i o t t i s t, etc. *' WJiat is opposed to God 



ADDRESS TO THE GERMAN NOBILITY. 175 

©eek, bat md)t attein erne jebe ©emeine, 9?atf) ober SDbrig^ 
feit &e\valt abjuttfun uub gu n)e()ren, of)ne SBiffen unb ^MU 
leit bed ^abjld ober S3ifd)ofd ; ja tjl and) fd)iilbig bet feiner 
®ee(e ©eftgfeit, baflfelbe ju tt)ebren, cb ed g(eid)^ab(!t unb 
»ifrf)bfe nicf)t tt)oUten, bie borf) bte grflen foKten fei)n, 
fcfcbed ju mbren. 

3um neunjebnten, ta^ bte ®rabe ober ©Iteberi n)itrbeit 
gednbert, tit xvcidjcn ber ebe(icf)e ©taitb voixh t)erbotett, a(d 
ba jTrtb ®et)atterfcbaften, ber t)terte unb brttte ©rab,^ ba^ 
wo ber ^^abjT: jtt 3iom bartn mag bifpenftren tim'd ®e(b, 
itnb ©cf)dnbltdE)en t)erfatift,3 ba^ and) fefbfl etn jeber ^farr^ 

and injurious to man both in soul and body, every parish, common 
council or magistrate, has not only the power to abrogate and pre- 
vent, without the knowledge or will of the pope and the bishops, but 
is bound, upon (peril of) its salvation, to prevent it, notwithstanding 
the pope and bishops do not wish it, who ought, hov/ever, to be the 
first to prevent it." 

^ Die Grade oder Gleider, in the canonical law, where 
the degrees of relationship within which marriages are lawful, are 
definitely pointed out. 

2 Der vierte und dritte Grad. Vierte comes be- 
fore d r i t t e, because one would naturally begin with the most re- 
mote degree in abrogating the prohibitions. 

^ Schandlichen verkauft, " sells (the privilege of un- 
lawful practices) to scandalous persons." So this singular expression 
must be translated, if there is no error in the text. But it is almost 
beyond a doubt, that by an error of the press, through the addition of 
the single letter t, the word verkauft was made out of V e r- 
kauf. Substitute this word, and everything is simple and easy. 
** That where the pope at Rome may in this matter dispense for 
money and for scandalous merchandise, that there also every pastor 
may dispense for nothing, and for the good of souls." Thus urn's 
Geld, in the first clause, corresponds to um — sonst in the 
second ; and [um] schandlichen Verkauf, in the first, 
to [um] der Seelen Seligkeit, in the second. Besides, 
this is supported by the use of the parallel expression, d u r c h s e i- 
nen schandlichen Jahrmarkt zu verkaufen, at 
the end of the paragraph, where Jahrmarkt is used in the sense 



176 SELECTIONS FROM LUTHER. 

berr moge fcifpenjTrcn, itmfonfi: unb ber <£ee(en (gcligfcit^ 
3a n^otttc @ott, ba^ 2ltte^, wa^ man ju 9?om mup faufen, 
unb ben ©ctbftricf ba^ gcifKicf)e ®cfeg lefcn/ ba^ ein jcber 
^farvbcrr baffelbe ebne @e(b mocl)te tl)un unb la^en ; a(^ ba 
ffnb 2(6(a^,3(Ma^6rierV SSutterbriefe,^ g!JJe^6nefe/ unb n)a^ 
(5onfcfjTona(ia^ ebcr Siibercien metjr jTnb jn 9?cm, ba ba^ ar^? 
nte 3Se(f mit tt)irb 6ctrogen unb nm'^ Oefb gcbrad)t;6 benn 
fo bcr '^i>akii 5[)?acl)t l)at fcinen ©cfbjirirf nnb,gei(llid)eg 9ic^" 

of V e r k a u f . On a subsequent page occurs the expression : 
Umsonst und [um] Gottes willen. 

^Und den Geldstrick das geistliche Gesetz 
1 o s e n, " and loosen that money-shackle, the canonical law," for 
" obtain by loosening," etc. Luther often calls the canonical law a 
Geldstrick, a money -fetter. 

2 Ablassbriefe, certificates of indulgence. 

^ Butterbrie f e, signified, in the fifteenth century, written 
documents from the pope, in which permission was granted to eat 
butter during the church fasts. 

* M e s sb r i e f e is defined, in the lexicons, " bills of exchange 
available during a public mass or fair." But here it must mean 
" permission to hold mass," which was abused by the priests for ava- 
ricious purposes. 

^ C o n f e s s i o n a 1 i a, " writings which contain directions in 
regard to religious service." On the grammatical construction, see 
p. 106, Note 5, 

* U m's Geld gebracht, " ruined in the purse." See u ni- 
b r i n g e n, p. 57, Note 3. U m's Leben b r i n g e n means '*to 
take away one's life." So U m's Geld bringen would mean 
" to take away one's money ;" that is, " to deprive one of his money ;" 
and passive, " to be deprived of one's money." This word alvvaya 
implies that the privation or loss is undeserved. 

'Geistliches Netz. Observe the alteration, and hence the 
play upon the word in the last syllable of Gesetz, like, " spiritual 
cords (rv-cvrds 1 siiould say)." " P^'or if the pope has power lo sell 
his money-shackles and spiritual net (or law, I siiould say) for 
money (i. c. to dispense one from the obligation to keep it), cer- 
tainly a preacher has more power to tear it in pieces, and, for the 
honor of God, trample it under foot." For if there were a moral obli- 
gation to do what the canonical law prescribes, no dispensation from 
that obligation could be given for money. " i£ he has not power 



ADDRESS TO THE GERMAN NOBILITY. 177 

(®efel3 \oUtc id} fagcn) ju t)erfaiifen um'^ ®c(b, t)at qc^ 
rvi^iid) ein ^farrhcrr t?ic(mebr ©cwalt bicfef6cn ju rci^en, 
unb urn ©ette^ tDitten mit giigen gu treteit. i?at er a6er 
bad nirf)t ©cmatt, fo bat and) ber ^abjl feine ©etDaft, bie^ 
fc(6eu biird) feinen fc{)anb(icf)cn ^aljvmavh ju t)erfaufen^ 

Sahtu gel)5rcti and), bag bie ga|lteu tt)iirben frei getaffen 
einem Sebcrmann, unb alkxiei ©peife frei gemact)t, note ba^ 
(gi\inge(ium Qicbet. Venn fie fetbfl ju 3?om ber fallen 
fpotteit,2 (ajjen^ und braugen Dete freflfen, ba jTe nid)t it}re 
®rf)ube mit liepen fcbmicreu ; Derfaufen und barttarf) ^reiJ? 
^ l)eit, 33utter unb atterfei ju ej^en ; fo ber b^ilige 3(po|le[ fa^ 
get, bag mir bep 2(((ed4 ju^^r ^reifjeit b^f^^n and bent 
@t)ange(io. 2i6er fie bciben mit ibrem geiftfirf)en ^cd)t un^ 
gefangen unb geilebfen,^ auf bap tDir eg mit @e(b n)ieber 
faufen miijfen ; b^^^n bamit fo blobe^ fd)iirf)terne ©ewijfen 
gemacf)t, ia^ nid)t gut mebr 'oon berfefbeu greibeit ju pre^ 
bigeu i\\ barum, ba^ fid) bad gemeiue 3So(f fo fajlt barinuen 
cirgert, unb ad)tet fiir grogere ©iinbe S3utter effen, benn 
(iigen, fcf)moren, ober and) Unfeufcbb^tt treiben. @d tflt bod) 
9}Jenfd)entt)erf/ tva^ 5Kenfd)en gefe^t ^aben, man Tege ed 

(for) that, then the pope has no power to sell the same in his scanda- 
lous trade (at his scandalous market)." 

* G e h o r e t, agrees with the following clause as its nominative. 
^Der Fasten spotten, " they ridicule the fasts." In fa- 

, miliar German, the preposition ti b e r, with its case, is more com- 
\ mon than the genitive after this verb. 

( ^Lassen, etc. " they (merely) allow us to eat oil, with which 
f| (da — mit) they would not grease their shoes, and afterwards sell to 

I QB permission to eat butter and all sorts of things, though (or while, 
so), etc." 

* D e s s a 1 1 e s, '' of all that," governed by F r e i h e i t. 

II ^ Gefangen und gestohlen, "caught and stolen," prob- 
l ably refers to making captives for the money with which their friends 

would redeem them. 
1 ^Haben da mit so b 15 de, etc. " and they have thereby made 
i (among the people) such weak and timid consciences, thai it is no 
n longer easy (gut) to preach respecting that liberty." 
'^ ' Es ist doch Menschenwerke, etc. "Still it is the 



178 SELECTIONS FROM LUTHER. 

tt)o man Ijm tt)itt, unb entrtel)t nimmer cttva^ ®x\tci iax^ 

Sunt ^tDanjigjlen, ba^ bie n)i(ben ^apcKen mib gcltfir? 
cl)eui miirbcn ^u SSoben t^crfteret ; af^ ba jTnb/2 ba bie ncuen 
SOBattfabrlcn bingel)en, 2Ge(pnad)t, Sternberg, airier, iai 
®rimtba(, unb jel^t JKegen^^burg, iinb ber 2(njal)f t)ief mebr. 
D ir>ie frf)tt)ere efenbe dlcd)en]d)aft n)erben bie 93ifrf)6fe ntiif:? 
fen gebcn,3 bie fektec? ^enfetd^Sefpenft^ jntajTen, nnb ®e^ 
nnp bviDon empfangen ?^ (2ie feKten bie (Jrften fev)n baf? 
fetbe jn n)et)ren ; [o meinen jTe^ e^ fei) gottlid) t)eilig Sing, 

work of man; — (it is) what man has ordained, do what you will with 
it, and nothing good ever comes from it." 

* Die wilden Kapellen und Feldkirchen. " The 
chapels in the forests and in the open fields," places of superstitious 
resort. 

^Als da sind, " such as those, where (da for wo) the new 
pilgrimages are made (whither they go, d a — h i n ge h e n), namely, 
Welsnacht, Sternberg, Triers, Grimthal, and at present Ratisbon 
and many more (and of that multitude many more)." So Triers had 
its pretended relics long before the time of Ronge, and is now only 
sustaining its old character ! Grimthal, or Grimmenthal, a little 
south-east of Meiningen, and not very remote from Erfort, where Lu- 
ther had resided, was one of the most celebrated places of resort for 
the superstitious. A n z a h 1 always refers to an actual collection or 
assemblage of persons or things, and thus differs from Z a h 1, num- 
ber. 

^ Werden mOssen geben. " Will be obliged to give.' 
See p. 148, Note 3. 

* Teufels-Gespenst. Gespenst, gJiost, is figuratively 
employed for any imaginary object of fear. Here it refers to the pre- 
tended relics or miracles of these places. 

* Und Genuss davon empfangen. "And make money 
out of it." The figurative signification of Genuss, corresponds 
very nearly with that of the Latin v/ordfructus. 

^So meinen sie, etc. ** they (seem to) think, that it is a re- 
ligious and sacred affair, and do not consider that Satan practiecs 
such things in order to strengthen avarice, to uphold false, factitious 
opinions, to undermine regular religious service (parish churches), to 



ADDRESS TO THE GERMAN NOBILITY. 179 

fe()ert tticf)t, ba^ ber Xcnfci fofcf)e^ trei6t, ben ®eij ju \lax^ 
fen, fatfrf)e crbtcf)tete @(au6en aitfrid)ten, ^>farrfirrf)en ju 
fcf)tt?dd)en, Xabcxnen unb ^ourerei ju met)ren, luinii^ @e(b 
unb Slvbeit tjerlieren, unb nur ba^ arme SSoIf mit ber ^Jafe 
umfiibren* .fatten jTe bie @cf)nft fo tt)al)t gefefen, al^ ba^ 
i^erbammte geijl:ncf)e ©efe^t, |Te n)u^ten ben ©ad[)en n)o^I 
JU ratben. 

2J[6er ma^ fett id) fagen ? @in S^ber gebenfet nnr, voic 
er eine fo(cf)e 5Gatlfabrti in feinem Mvei^^ aufrid)te nnb 
erbalte, gar ntcf)t^ forgenb, mie ba^ aSeff recf)t gtaube nnb 
lebe. Sie 9iegenten fmb n)ie ba^ SSoIf, ein SSlinber fiil)ret 

multiply grog-shops and profligacy, to squander money and time (la- 
bor), and do nothing but lead at pleasure the poor people by the nose. 
Had they studied the Scriptures as much as they have the accursed ca- 
nonical law, they would have known how to manage the matter." 
Glauben is in the plural, which is not very common, and means 
' convictions, opinions. Taberna, in Latin, means a booth or shop ; 
Tab erne, in German, means a small tavern or grog-shop. Tav- 
ern, is the same word, with the ordinary change of the b into v. See 
; p. 20, Note 3. We may here remark that many German words are 
adopted in English by dropping the liquids I, n, r ; thus, a Is be- 
comes as by dropping the /; uns becomes us by dropping the n; 
iwir becomes (w i) 2f?e by dropping the r ; solch becomes (soch) 
^such by dropping the /; welch (Anglo-Saxon huilc) becomes 
which by dropping the I ; a n d e r, (Gothic a n t h a r, old Saxon 
othar), becomes other, in the same way, which Webster falsely 
i derives from o d e r. {Or comes from o d e r, by a similar syncope.) 
. So from spree hen comes speak ; from B i e n e, bee ; from 
Gans (Low Saxon, G a u s) goose; from I n s e 1, isle; from 
jsanft, soft; from S p o r n, spur; from Stern, star; from 
( w Unsch-en, wish. 

^ K r e i s. The use of this word here, which properly designates 
:one of the Circles into which Germany was formerly divided, shows 
ithat Luther had not bishops particularly in mind, but princes and 
pcivil rulers, including the archiepiscopal electors. 
y. ' Wall fa hrt, though governed by aufrichte and erhalte 
jmeans the act of performing a pilgrimage, rather than the place of 
(pilgrimage and whatever gives sanctity to it. See the next note but 
jlone. 



/ 



180 SELECTIONS FROM LUTHER. 

ben anbcrn* 3a, tt?o fcie SQattfabrtcn tticf)t n>offen angci^ 
f)en/ bebt man bie i^eiHgcn an ju erbebcn ; ittd^t ben SyilU 
gen jn (Jbren, bie VDobf ebne tbrc (Srbebung genng gcebret 
n)nrben, fcnbern ©efdnf nnb ein ©etbbringen anfjnrirf)ten» 
25a beffen nnn ^ah^^ nnb S3i[cbefe bajn, l)icx regnet e^ 3(6? 
la^, ba bat man ©etbe^ S^nng bajn ; aber ma^ @ott gebo^ 
ten bat, ba ijl 9tiemanb forgfaWg, ba fcinft ?tiemanb nacf), 
ba t)at 5Jtiemanb ©efb bajn* 3Jrf) bag n)ir fo bfinb jTnb, 
nnb bem !f enfef in feinem ®efpenften nfcbt aKcin fcinen 
5D?ntbn)il(en lafifen, fonbern anct jldrfen nnb mebren !^ 3* 
iDoKte man tiege bie fieben fi^eitigen mit g^rieben, nnb \>a^ 
arme 3So(f nnDerfiibrt. aBefcf)er ©eijl bat bem ^abft ®e^ 
n)a(t gegeben, bie A^eitigen jn erbeben ? 2Ber fagt ej^ ibni, 
ob fte beitig ober nicf)t l)ei(ig jTnb ? Sinb fonft nicbt^ (Binv 

^ A n ge h e n, io succeed, to prosper. " Nay, if pilgrimages will 
not succeed (will not go), then men begin to celebrate the memory 
of (elevate) saints, not in honor to the saints, etc., but to secure (or 
establish aufricliten) concourses of people, and pecuniary ad- 
vantages." 

2 Da helfen nun Pabst, etc. " To this the pope and bish- 
ops contribute their aid, and here indulgences come in showers ; and 
the people have money enough for this. But what God has com- 
manded, no one cares for this ; there is no flocking thither ; no one 
has money for tliis." When d a is separated from z u, it is often 
now in colloquial style in Thuringia repeated and prefixed, so that 
da — dazu is equivalent to d a — zu (i. e. d a z u). Soda — nach 
stands for d a r n a c h, thither, or towards that. 

^Stflrken und mehren can grammatically govern noth- 
ing but M u t h w i 1 1 e n. 

^ Sind sonst n i c h t, etc. "Are there not already (other- 
wise) sins enough in the world, that one must tempt God, interfere 
with his decision, and sot forth the saints as idols of Mammon .'" 
Liebe cannot be translatecj in such connections. Everything 
which relates to life, or supports it, or gives the least pleasure may 
be called lieb, asder liebe Gott, the bcnrjicent God ; das 
liebe Brodt, {nourishing) bread ;die liebe Sonne, theg^ 
niai sun ; d e r liebe R e g e n, the refreshing rain. Jt cannot be 



ADDRESS TO THE GERMAN NOBILITY. 181 

bcu gcnn(] aiif grbcn, man mug ©ott and) ^erfud[)en, in 
fein Urtbcit fatten, unb bic fieben 5;^ei(igen ju ©clbgo^en 
aiiffcl3en ? 

©arum ratbc tcf), man faffe iTct)i bie ^cifigen felbjl erbc^^ 
ben, ja ®ott attein foKte fie erheben, unb Seber bkibe in 
feiner ^^farre, ba er mebr fitnbet,^ benn in alien 2BaItfird)en,. 
tt>enn jle gfeirf) aUe eine 2BaCfircf)e mdren. £)ter fi'nbet man 
Itaufe, ©acrament, ^>rebigt nnb beinen ^tdctften ; n)elrf)eg 
gropere I^inge jTnb, benn alle .^^eifigen im ^unmeL l^enn 
(Te 9ltte jTnb bnrrf) ia$ 2Bort ®otte^ unb (Sacrament ge{)ei:^ 
ligt worben* 

Unb of>fcf)on i^eifigenerheben "oov ^citcn tt^ctre gut geme^^ 
fen, fo tjl e^ bod) jel^t ntmmer gut ; g(etcf)n)ie mel anbere 
Singe t)or ^eitcn f[nb gut gevr>efen, unb beef) nun drger(id) 
unb fd)dbtid), al^ ia ftnb ^eiertage, ^irrf)enfrf)ag unb 3ter^ 
ben* Senn e^ i\l ojfenbar, bag burdf) 5)ciligen^@rl)ebung 
mcf)t ©otte^ @()re uocf) ber @bri|len S5efferung, fonbern 
®elb unb Stnbm gefucf)t mirb, bag eine Mirdje wiU etvoa^ 
SSefonbere^ Dor ber anbern fet)n unb t)aben,.unb ibr feib 
tt)dre,3 bag cim anbere beggfeirf)en l)dtte unb ibr aSortl)ei( 

translated in such expressions as, d e r 1 i e b e Z u f a 1 1 ; m e i n e 
lie be N oth, where the proper meaning of the word almost van- 
ishes. 

* Sich is not governed by 1 a s s e, but by erheben. 

^ Da er mehr findet, etc., " in which he finds more (that is val- 
uable) than in all places (churches) of pilgrimage, if they were all 
put into one. Here one finds baptism, the eucharist, preaching, and 
one's neighbor (to serve), — that which (welches) constitutes 
greater things," etc. In welches we see the peculiar use of the 
neuter singular of a pronoun, in an indefinite sense, and yet referring 
directly to what is plural. See p. 110, Note 3, and p. Ill, Note 2. 

^ Und ihr leid ware, etc., "and it would regret (would be 
painful to it) that another should have the like, and that its advan- 
tage be common (equally enjoyed by all). To such an extent (so- 
gar) have men perverted spiritual blessings (not ecclesiastical prop^ 
erty here as will appear near the close of the paragraph) to improper 

16 



182 SELECTIONS FROM LUTHER. 

gemein n)dre ; fogar bat man Qei\iiid)e ©iiter ju ^d^bxand) 
unb ©cminu jeitliciicr ©iiter Dcrerbnet, in bicfer argflen 
lef^ten ^cit^ bap 3([(e^, wa^S ©ott felbcr ijl, map bem @eij 
bieneit* Sliicf) fo bienet fe[cf)cr 2Sortt)eiI nur ju jweierlei, 
Secten^ unb ^:)o)jfal)rt, bag eine ^ird)e ber anbern ungfeid), 
^cf) iinter einanbcr t)erarf)ten intb cvbebcn ; fo bed) alle gott^^ 
lid)en ©iiter SJKen gemein unb g(eicf) nur jur ©inigfeit ^ie^ 
nen fctten. 2^a bat ber ^>abfl aucf) ?n)l ba^ii^ bem leib 
n)dre, bag atte (5l)ri|ien g(eirf) nnb Sine^ n>dren, 

^ier geboret l)er,2 bap man abtlnin foKte eber t)erad)ten, 
ober je gemein mad)en atter jtirc()en grei()eit,3 SuKen, unb 
rt>a^ ber ^ab(l Derfanft jn Diem anf feinem ®d)inbleicf).^ 

uses and to worldly gain (gain of worldly goods), in these worst and 
latest times, that whatever God himself is, must he subservient to 
avarice." 

^ Secten, divisions. " And thus, such priviliges serve only to 
two ends, to divisions and to arrogance, so that one church being un- 
like the others, they exalt and depress each other (i. e. depress others 
and exalt themselves), whereas all spiritual blessings, being common 
and equal to all, should be subservient only to unity. The pope 
takes pleasure in this (abuse), to whom it would be a matter of re- 
gret, that all Christians should be equal and united." Sich unter- 
einander, cannnot easily be translated with the two following 
verbs, because sich is a reciprocal pronoun, with the first verb and 
a reflective with the second. " They reciprocally despise each other 
and exalt themselves." Each other^ in Knglish, is simply reciprocal, 
and themselves^ simply reflective. It is a well known principle that, 
in German, reflective verbs, may be used as reciprocal. Sich bas- 
se n may mean either, to hale themselves^ or to hate each other. 

' Hicr gehoret her, equivalent to, hierher gehoret. 

^Aller Kirch en Freiheit, is governed by the last verb, 
mac hen; but, only the words Kirchen Freiheit, apart from 
the qualification, al le r, is governed by ah th u n and verachten, 
" that on(» should abolish the immunities of (particular) churches, or 
despise them, or make them common to (of) all." The next sentence 
explains the meaning of this. 

* Schi ndle ic h, a Thuringian word, for which Schindanger 
is more common, and sometimes Schindgrube (implying excata- 



ADDRESS TO THE GERMAN NOBILITY. 183 

^eiirt fo er ^iCittenberg/ .^atte, SScnebig, nub jut^or feinem 
jtom i)crfauft ober Qiebt 3nbu[te, ^rit)t(cgicn, ^bla^, ©uabe, 
aScrtbcif, gacuftdten, marum Qicht cr eg itict)t alten Miv&jcn 
tngemein ? 3fl er ntcf)t fc()ulbig, alien gt)nilen ju tl)un 
umfonjlt mtb ©ottcg milfen^ 3(Keg, wag er Dermag, ja ami) 
feiit 93lut far fie ju Dergiegen ? ©o fage mir, VDarum giebt 
er cber t^erfauft biefer .f irct)e, imb ber anbertt ni&it ; ober 
mug bag Derflucf)te @efb in feiner SyiliQtcit 3(ugen fo einen 
grcpeu Unterfdhieb mad)cn unter ben (5t)riflen, bie 3ltte 
g(eirf)e Xaufe, SBort, ©laxxbe^ gbrijlum, ©ott unb alle 
I^inge haben ? 5ffiiff man ung benn^ atter Singe mit \e^ 
l)enben 2(ngen bliub, unb mit reiner Sernnnft tt)orid)t marf)^ 
en, bag n>ir fe(d)en ©eij, Siiberei unb (2piege{fed)ten fotten 
anbcten ? (5r i|^ etn ^irte, ja voo bn ®efb bajl nnb md)t 
meiter, unb frf)dm.en firf) bennorf) ntcf)t fo(d)er SSitberet, mit 

fio/i) is used, means a spot or place (1 e i c h) where dead animals are 
skinned or flayed. Figuratively, this low word, means a place where 
mean dishonesty, and shaving are practised. 

^ Denn so er Wittenberg, etc. " For if he sells or grants 
to Wittenberg, Halle, Venice, and especially to his own Rome im- 
munities, privileges, indulgences, favors, advantages and powers (or 
permissions)," etc. These substantives are not here used to indicate 
so many things specifically different from each other ; they are syno- 
nymes, accumulated for rhetorical effect. 

* Umsonst und [u mj Gottes will en. This is a clear in- 
stance, where und connects a genitive to the second part of a com- 
pound, or where um, is a part of a compound and yet holds the re- 
lation of a preposition to a following substantive. Contemplate 
sonst as a separate word, used substantively, and the construction 
will not appear so strange. 

^ Will man uns denn, etc. "Would they, make us in all 
things blind, with our eyes open, and idiotic in the full use of our 
reason, in order that we should pay deference to such avarice, knave- 
ry, and mockfights .'' He is a shepherd: — yes! so far as you have 
money, and no farther; and yet they are not ashamed of such vil- 
lany, but lead us about at pleasure with their bulls of indulgence." 
AUer Dinge is a genitive, of an adverbial character. 



184 SELECTIONS FROM LUTHER. 

il)ren SSnKcn iind l)iu nub her ju fu[)rcn. d^ i|lt ifnten nur 
urn ba^ t)crfliicl)te ®c(b ju than/ uub fenjl nirfU^ mel)r» 

So ratbc id) ba^,^ fo fe(d)eg 3iarrcnn)erf nid)t trirb ah 
getl)ait, bafj ein jeg{id)cr frcmmcr gt)ri|len:?5Renfd) fcinc 
Slitgen aiiftlnie, luib fa||e fid) mit ben romifdjen 35nUen, 
©iegel nnb ber ©fei^nerei nid)t irren,^ Ucibc babeim in 
feincr ^ird)e, nnb ia^e il)m feine ;tanfe, @t)anflelinni, 
©fanbe, Sbriftnm nnb ©ctt, ber an alien Derten gleid) i|t, 
ba^ S3efte fei;n/ nnb ben ^>abft bfeiben einen blinben g-iil)^ 
rer ber S3(inben* (i$ fann bir meber Crngef nod) ^Mbjl fo 
mef geben, a(^ bir @ott in beine ^Y^irrei giebt ; ja er tJer^ 
fiibret^ bid) 'oon ben gott(id)en ©aben, bie bn nmfonft bajl 
anf feine ©aben, bie bn fanfen nni^t, nnb giebt bir SSlei 
nm'i^ ©o(b, gett um'^ Sf^^fd)/ ©d)nnr nm ben aSentef, 
^£ia(i)$ nm 5;»onig, 2Gort nm^g ©nt, ©nd)ftaben nm ben 
©eift, voic bn Dor 5(ngen ^ebejl:, nnb n)il(jl:'^ bennod) nid)t 
merfen* Sott(l bn anf feinem ^Vrgament nnb 2Gad)(^ gen 
.^immel fahren, fo nn'rb bir ber ^-EBagen gar ba(b jerbred)en, 
nnb bn in bie Syiic fallen, nid)t in ©otte^ Seamen. 

* 1st — um — zu thun. See p. 35, Note 5, and p. 20, Note 3, 
middle. 

* Das, <///5, ^Ac/o/<'o?r/7?«-, namely, " if such foolery be not done 
away, that each one," etc. 

^Lasse sich — nicht irren, "not suffer himself to be 
misled." 

*Lasse ihm seine Taufc — das Beste seyn, " and 
regard (1 a s s e s e y n, let it be) his baptism, etc. as the most impor- 
tant to him." 

* Jaervcrfuhret, etc. " Nay, he seduces you away from 
God's gills which are gratuitous, to his own which you must buy, 
and he gives you lead in exchange for gold, skin for flesh, purse- 
string for purse, wax for honey, words for goods, the letter for the 
spirit, as you see before your eyes, and yet will not notice. Should 
you (attempt to) ride to heaven on his parchments and wax, your 
chariot would soon go to pieces, and you fall into perdition, and that 
not in God's name." 



ADDRESS TO THE GERMAN NOBILITY. 185 

?ag bir'^^i ttiir eitte Qcwi^e 5)Jege[ fei)tt : 5Ba^ bu t)om 
^abfl faitfen mugt, ba^ ifl nirf)t gut ticcf) wn ®ott X^enn 
wad aibJ ®ott ift, bad mirb tnclE)t allcin umfonfl gegebett, 
fonbcrn alfe 2Be[t mirb bariim geftraft unb i^erbammt, ba^ 
fie cd nidf)t bat vt^ollen^ umfonfl aufnebmen ; aU ia ifl bad 
(giiangetium unb gottftcbe 3Berf. (So(cf)e SSerfiibrung^ ()a^ 
ben nnr t?erbienet urn ©ott, ba^ mv fern betHged Sffiort, ber 
S^aufe ©nabe, Deracf)tet babeit, mc ©t. ^autud fagt : „®ott 
iDirb feuben eine frctftige St'titng alien benen, bte bte 'SSa\)v^ 
belt ntct)t baben anfgenommen jn ibrer ©eligfett, anf ba^ 
jTe glanben nnb fofgen ben IHtgen unb SSiibereien, me fte 
wtrbtg jTnb. 

3nm ein nnb jtt>anjtg)len* (5d i(l: n^obl ber gro^ten 9t0t^ 
cute, ba^ affe Settetei abgetban mwbe in aller Sbrijlen^ett, 
ed foltte |a 3tiemanb nnter ben Sbri|len betteln gel)en ; ed 
n)dre and) eine lefcbte Drbnnng^ barob ju mad)en, tt^enn 
tt)tr ben gjcutb unb Srnjl ba^n thaten^ udmltcf), ba^ etue 
jegticbe ^tait ibre armen ?eute i^erforgte, unb feinen fvem^ 
ben SSettler jutie^e, ffe btegen VDie ^e tt^ollten, ed t^arett 
SBalbbriiber ober Settelorben. @d fcnnte je eine jegtid)e 
(Stabt bie il}ren erndt)ren ; unb ob jTe ju gering tt)are, ba^ 

* L a s s d i r's, etc. " Let this be an infallible rule for you." 

^Nicht hat wollen, was not tcilling. See p. 148, Note 3. 

^ Seiche Verfohrung", etc. *' Such delusion have we de- 
served of (with) God, because we have contemned," etc, 

*Es ware auch ein leichte Ordnung", etc. *' It 
would be an easy arrangement to be made (to make) respecting it, if 
we were to apply (suitable) courage and earnestness to the matter, 
viz. that every towm provide for its own poor, and admit no beggars 
from abroad, be they who they may, whether eremites or mendicant 
friars. Every city could support its own (poor), or (and) if it were 
too small (1 would propose) that one direct the people in the adjacent 
villages to give to that object. If they must otherwise support many 
vagabonds and worthless fellows under the name of beggars, they 
might (in the way proposed) ascertain who are really needy and who 
are not," 

16* 



186 SELECTIONS FROM LUTHER. 

man auf ben nmtiegenben 25orfern and) bag 3SoIf t^ermat)^ 
nete, baju ju cjcben. 5)tujT^n iTc bed) fonfl: fo t)iet ?anb^ 
Idufer nnb bofe S3it{)en unter beg S3ette(g ?tamen erncibren, 
fo fonnte man ami) n>ij|en, n)e(d)e n)a[)rbafti(] arm n^dren 
Dber nicf}t 

®o mi'tpte ba fei)n ein 3Sern)eferi ober aScrmnnb, ber aUe 
tie 5(rmen fennete nnb n)ag it)nen notf) mdre, bem 9?atb 
ober ^farrberrn anfagte, ober me bag anf g bejle mecf)te 
t)erorbnet n^erben* (Jg gefrf)iebt meineg 3Icf)teng anf feinem 
^anbel fo 'oici Sitberei nnb it^riigerei, afg anf bem SSettefn, 
hie ba al(e Ieid)tlicly^ tvixven jn t)ertrei6en. S(nd) fo gefct)iebt 
bem gemeinen 3So(f )x>el)e bnrcf) fo frei gemein ^ettefn* 3d) 
bah'^ n6erfegt,3 bie fiinf ober ferf)g 93etteforben fommen beg 
3af)rg an eincn Drt, ein jegficf)er mebr benn fecf)g ober ffe^? 
benmaf, bajn bte gemeinen SSettfer, 93otfrf)aften nnb ^aU^^ 
briiber, ba^ ftrf) bie $){erf)nnng fnnben hat, rvie eine (Stabt 
bei fedigjig 5[Raf im 3cit)r gefrf)d§t tt)irb, obne n>ag ber t\>eiU 
lid)en Dbrigfeit gebiibrt, 5(nffdfee nnb (2d)a(snng geben mxi, 
imb ber romifdje ©tnbt mit feiner 5E5aare ranbet, nnb jie 

^ So mOsste da seyn ein Verweser, etc. "There 
would need to be a manager or overseer, who should know all the 
poor, and report to the city council or to the pastor, what they were 
in want of, or in whatever (other) way the matter might be best ar- 
ranged." 

^ L c i c h 1 1 i c h obsolete for 1 e i c h t, " all of which might ea- 
sily be put away." 

^ 1 h h a b's U b e r 1 e g t, etc. " I have made the calculation 
(have reflected on it) ; the five or six orders of mendicant friars 
come, eacli one not less than six or seven times a year to one place, 
besides the common beggars, (papal) messengers and pilgrims, so 
that the account has been found to be (f u n d e n for gefunden) 
that (how) a city is fleeced about sixty times a year, besides what be- 
longs to the government (and) is given as imposts and taxes, and 
(besides what) the Roman see, with its wares (indulgences), plun- 
ders and squanders, so tliat it is to me one of the greatest of God's 
wonders, how we can still live and support ourselves." 



ADDRESS TO THE GERMAN NOBILITY. 187 

uitniifelicf) uerjefireit, ia^ mir'g ber gro^ten ©otte^ SKSunber 
einc^ i|l, me mx bod) bkiben mogeit xmb entdbret n)erben> 
Sa^ abex ctiid)e metnen, e^ n)iirben mit ber Sffieifei bie 
Slrmen nid)t mobi Derforgt itnb nicf)t fo gro^e (Iteitierne i^du^ 
fer unb ,ttojlter gebaut, and) nirf)t fo reidilirf) ; ia^ glau6e 
id) fail n)obL Sl^t'^ bodf) and) xiid^t nott). Sffier arm 
xoiii fei)n, fcH tttd)t reicf) fei)n ; vdiK er aber xeid) fei)n, fo 
greif er mit ber .^anb an ben ^^flng unb fud)'^ i()m fe(6jl: 
a\v$ ber Srben. (S^ tjl: genng, ba^ jtemltd) bte Slrmen t)er^ 
fcrgt fei)n, babei fte ntd)t §unger^ flerben nod) erfrieren. 
a^ fiigt ffd) ntd)t, bag etner anf ^ Stnbern Slrbeit ntufffg 
ge^e,2 reid) fet) unb n:)of)t(ebe, bei eineg Slnbern Uebet feben,^ 
n)ie jegt ber i^erfebrte 9}iigbraud) ge[)t Senn ®t. ^an(u^ 
fagt : „2Ber ntd)t arbeitet, foC and) nid)t eflen/' @^ i|l 
5Riemanb wn ber Sfnbern ©i'tter ju feben^ Don ®ott iJer^ 
orbnet, benn aUein ben prebigenben unb regterenben ^rie^^ 
jlern (tt)ie ©t. ^aufui^ 1. Sor. 90 um if)rer gei)lfid)en 2lr^ 

^Es vvQrden mitder Weise, etc. " That some suppose, 
the poor would not in this (d e r, demonstrative) manner be so well 
provided for, and that such great stone buildings and cloisters would 
not be built, nor so richly (so many of them), that I (as well as they) 
believe very firmly. Nor is this necessary. He who wishes to be 
poor (chooses poverty, i. e. a monk) should not be rich. But if he 
wishes to be rich, let him take hold of the plough with his hand and 
seek (dig) it (riches) for himself out of the earth." 

^Aufs (auf des) andern Arbeit mitssig gehe, 
" live idly upon another's labors." 

^Bei eines Andern Uebel leben. Uebel leben, 
ill-living is used substantively, and is governed by b e i and governs 
the genitive eines andern, of another. 

*Niemand von der Andern Giiter zu leben, is 
a substantive phrase, and nominative toist verordnet. " (For) 
no one to live on the property of another, (except priests who actu- 
ally preach and preside, etc.) is ordained of God." The construc- 
tion is very irregular. W i r k e r for A r b e i t e r is now little used 
except in composition and applying to manufactures, as S t r u m p f- 
w i r k e r, and the like. 



188 SELECTIONS FROM LUTHER. 

tuMt, tDie and) C5hri|liic^ fa^it ju ten 5(po(lcIn : ,,(Sin jcgficfjer 
2Cirfer i\i \mvtu] fcinci^ V^>hiu^/' 

3nm i>icr uu^ jUMiijuiilcn, ci^ ifl bobc S^'it, taf; unv and) 
cinmal crnft[id> iinb mir ^^I'ahrhcit tcv S3ohmcu Sac(>c i^cr^ 
itchmcii, \'\c mir mii^ uitb luu^ init ihnon ju iHnTini(]cn, tag 
cinmal aufhorcni tie grduliitcu ?d|lcrun(?cn, AMf? mib 9ieib 
auf bcibcu Sciteiu '"srf) u>i(( meiner !thorhcir- itad> bcr 
cr|lc mciii ©uttunfcu iHn'U\]cn, mit asorbcbaft ciiic*:^ jc^ 
gtirfKii bc(Tcrn Jscrt'tantct^. 

3nm cviicn miiiTcn unr tvabrfirf)^ t^ic ^rmbrbcir bcfcnnen, 
imt unfcr ::)fcd>tfcrti(icn laffcn, ten Ju>hmcn ctUMi^ jugcbcn, 
ncmlid) taf; 3«>l>^innc(^ >>ut^ unb Joicronnmui^ wn ^vac\ ju 
Softnie, n>iber pdhllirf), dnnitlirfv .Waifcrlid) ©cicit iiitb Sib 
ffnb i>crbrannt, bamit unbcr Ciottci^ (5U^bot (icfd)chen/ uitb 
bie 53ohmcu bod) 311 'iMttcrfcit i>crurfad)t \ln\>. Unb mcf 
n>ol)t fie foHtens i^ottfommeu t]etDefen fcpit, fofd) fd)n>ere^ 

* A u f h 6 r e n, subjunctive. 

•Ich will meiner T h o r h e i t, etc. "1 will, according 
to my indiscretion, give my opinion, the first, with the reservation (to 
adopt) any better view (which otliers may present)." 

' W a h r 1 i c h, rcriVy, (qualifies, not b e k e n n e n, but m n s- 
8 en. "We must, indeed, confess the truth, and not undertake 
(and give up) our justification, (but) concede something to the Bohe- 
mians, namely, that," etc. 

* Da mit wider Gottes Gebot geschehen, " and in 
that act (therewith) something was done (g e s c h e h e n with i si 
understood, and used impersonally) contrary to the command of 
God," i. e. and thereby we violated the law of God. 

* U n d w i e w o h 1 sic s o 1 1 t e n, etc. " And though thej 
ought to have been faultless (and) to have endured such great injus- 
tice and such obedience to God on the part of our countrymen ; still, 
they were not under objiiration to approve of it, and acknowledge it 
as done justly ; nay, they ought at this day lose body and life for it 
(d a r be r) sooner than (they ought) acknowledge that it is right 
to violate an imperial, papal, and Christian safe-conduct, and act 
faithlessly in contravention of it. Therefore, although the Bohemi- 
ans have been impatient (it is the impatience of the Bohemians), still 



ADDRESS TO THE GERMAN NOBILITY. 189 

Unrccf)t unb ©ottee^Un.qeborfam )oon ben Unfcrn (^elitten 
\)aben ; fo (Tnb fie beef) nirf)t fd)ii(big cjen^efen, foldiee ^u bi(^ 
ligen, intb af^ red)t getban befennen : ja ffe foKten nod) 
Ijeutige^ Za^e^ bariiber (ajjen I'eib nnb Ceben, ebe fie be^ 
fennen foKten, bag :Kecf)t fei), faifer(id) pdbft(id), diriftlid) 
®e(eit ju bred)en, tren(o6 ban)iber banbefn* Xarnm, me^^ 
n)ot)( e^ ber SSobmen Ungebulb ifr, fo i)VB bod] mebr beg 
^abjl^ unb ber Seinen 2d}ii(b aU' ber 3cimmer, aU' ber 
jrrtbum unb 2ee(en^Serfcerben, ba6 feit bemfe(fcen CSoncitio 
erfofget ift» 

3d) mil bier 3obanne6 5;uh 2(rtife( nid}t rid}ten, nod) 
feinen 3r^tbum i:)erfed}ten, tt)ien)ob( mein SSerftanb nod) 
nid)tg 3^^ig^^ &^i ibm gefunben bat, unb id) mag'i5^ frob^ 
lid) gtauben, bag bie nid^tg @ute6 gerid)tet, nod) rebd'd) 
Derbammt i)aben^ bie burd) ibren treufoeen £:anbel diriftHd) 
©e(eit unb @otte6 ©ebot ubertreten, obne ^voeifel mebr 
t)om bofen ©eift benn tjom f)ei(igen ©eift befeff^n getiaefen 
finb. S6 n)irb D'tiemanb baran ^weifefn, bag ber beih'ge 
©eift nid}t xioiiex Oottee ©ebot banbelt ; fo i]i DTtiemanb^ fo 
unmiffenb, bap &eleit unb Xreue bred)en fei) tDiber ©otteg 
®ebot, ob )ie g(eid) bem Xeufe( feCbft, gefd}tt)eige einem ^e^ 
$er, tDdre ^ugefagt. go i\i and) offenbar, bag 3obanneg 
^ug unb ben SSobmen fo(d)e0 &clcit ift jugefagt, unb nid)t 

all the wretchedness, all the errors and ruin of souls, which have fol- 
lowed since that council, are in a greater degree (rn e h rj the fault 
of the pope and of his party." 

^ U n d i c h ma g's, etc., " and I would readily (cheerfully) be- 
lieve, that they have not judged well at all, nor honestly passed sen- 
tence of condemnation, who, through their faithless doings, have 

' violated a Christian safe-conduct, and God's command, (and who) 

' were, without doubt, more possessed of the evil spirit than of the 

I Holy Spirit." 

I *So ist Niemand, etc, " nor is any one so ignorant (as» not 
to know) that violating safe-conduct and one's faith, is contrary to 

I God's command, even though they were pledged to Satan himself, 
not to say a heretic." 



190 SELECTIONS FROM LUTHER. 

ge[)aften, fonbern bariiber^ er t)crbrennet* Srf) rt>ili and) 
Sobanne^ X^ug fcinen SyiliQen nod) ?[)idrti)rer mad)en^ mc 
etiidfc ^ol)meit than, ob id) g(cirf) bcfenne, ba^ ilnn Unrcd)t 
ge[d)el)cn, lutb feiit S3urf) unb ?et)re unrecf)t tjerbammt i(l» 
2)enn ©otte^ ©ericf)tc finb l)eim(irf) iinb erfcl)rccflid), bie 
3ticmanb benn^ cr [c(6rt alkin offenbarcn unb au^bnicfcn 

Da^ iDiff icf) nur fagcit, er fet) ein ^efeer,^ n)ie bofe cr im^ 
nter m6rf)te fepn, fo bat man ibn init Unrcd)t unb tDiber ®ort 
Derbrcnnet; unb fed bie SSobmcu nid)t briugeu, ^oid)ei ju 
bidtgen, ober mx fommcn fonft nimmermel)r jur (Sinigfeit, 
(i^ mag aa^4 bie offeatlicbe 2Bal)rbeit eia^ mad}ea, unb 
nid)t bie Sigeafiaaigfeit. (i6 bilft aid)t,5 bag fie ja bcr S^it 
l^abea Dorgeweabet, bag eiaem Reiser fei) aid)t ja baltea 
bad Oefeit ; bad ifl ebea fo t)ie( gefagt, ntaa foil ©otted ®c^ 
bot aicf)t baftea, aaf bag ataa ©otted ©ebct bafte. (Sd bat 
fie ber S^eafet toll aab tl)6rid)t geniacf)t, bag fie aid)t babea 
gefel)ea, xViVS fie gerebet ober gctban babea. ©eleit balten^ 
l)at ®ott gebotea, bad foHte maa baltea, ob g(eirf) bie 2Celt 
fodte aatergebea, gefd)n)eige beaa eia ^et^cr led tt>erben. 
®o foUte maa bie jtel^er aiit Sd)riftea, aid)t atit geuer 
abern)iabea, n)ie bie altea 3Sater getl)aa bfabcn. 2Beaa ed 

* Sondern darQber er verbrennet (ist word en), 
but contrary to it (d a r a b e r, over it, across it) he was burnt." 

* N i e m a n d, d e n n, no one except. Comp. p. 97, Note 2. 
^Er sei ein Ketzer, etc., *' though he were a heretic, as 

bad as he could possibly be." 

^Es muss uns, etc. " The open truth, and not dogged per- 
tinacity, must unite us (the Germans and the Bohemians)." 

^ VjS h i 1 f t n i c h t, etc. " It is of no avail, lliat they then pre- 
tended that the safe-conduct is not to be held with a heretic. That is 
as much as saying (said), one must not keep the command of God (in 
one instance) in order that he may keep the command of God (in 
another).'' 

^ G e 1 c i t h a 1 1 n, a substantive phrase, in the accusative. 



ADDRESS TO THE GERMAN NOBILITY. 191 

Mnn^l^ n)are, mit geuer ^e^er ju iibewtnben, fo maren bie 
^^enfer bie gelebrteftcn S^octore^ auf @rbcn ; biirfteu n)ir 
and) iurf)t2 mel)r ftubiren, fonbern n)c(rf)er ben anbern mit 
©ematt iibermnbe, mocf)te ibn t)er6rennen. 

3inn anbern, ba^ ^aifer^ nnb giirjlen btneinfc{)irfen cU 
Iicf)e fromme Derfldnbige S3tfd[)6fe nnb @elet)rten, bei ?eib 
feinen garbtnat nod) pdbfKirf)e S3otfd)aft, nod) ^e^ermeijlter ; 
benn ba^ SSoff tjl: mebr benn jn "oiel nnqetebrt in d)rifttid)en 
®ad)en, nnb fnd)en and) nid)t ber ©eefen §et( : fonbern 
tt)ie be^ ^ab\i^ §end)fer 21((e tl)nn, ibre eigene (3etdalt, ytn^^ 
en nnb (il)ve. (gie finb and) bie ^dnpter getpefen biefeg 
3ammer^ jn Softni^* X^a^ biefelbigen ®e[d)idten4 foden 

^ K u n s t, aw arf, an attainment. 

^Durften wir auch nicht, etc., " neither should we need 
to study any more, but whoever should overcome another with force, 
might burn him." 

^Dass Kaiser, etc. " (My proposal would be) that the empe- 
ror and princes send thither a certain number of pious and intelli- 
gent bishops, and learned men, but, for the life of you, no cardinal, 
nor papal delegate, nor inquisitor ; for these people are more than too 
ignorant in Christian affairs." 

* Geschickten, is not an adjective here, meaning skilful^ but 
the participle of s c h i c k e n, used above, and means the persons sent, 
i. e. the messengers or delegates of the emperor and princes. " That 
these same persons thus sent, should ascertain of the Bohemians, 
how matters stand in regard to their faith, whether it would be pos- 
sible to unite all parties into one. Here ought the pope, out of regard 
to the souls of men, to lay aside, for a time, his supremacy, and, ac- 
cording to the decision of the most Christian council of Nice, to al- 
low the Bohemians to choose from among themselves an archbishop 
of Prague, whom the bishop of Olmutz in Moravia, or the bishop of 
Gran in Hungary, or the bishop of Gnesen in Poland, or the bishop 
of Magdeburg in Germany, might consecrate (confirm) ; it is suffi- 
cient if he is confirmed by one or two of these, as it was in Cypri- 
an's time. And the pope must not prevent such a course ; if he does 
so, he acts like a wolf and tyrant, and no one should follow him, but 
return his ban with another." All the bishops here mentioned by 
Luther, were archbishops. 



192 SELECTIONS FROM LUTHER. 

erfmtbtgen bei ben S6()men, wic e^ urn i\)vcn ®fanben ^inv^ 
be, 06 c^ niogtid) wave, alk ihrc ©ectcn in eine ju bringen, 
S>iex fen fid) ber ^\ibft um bcr ©eeten n>i(ten eine S^it^^ng 
feiner £)6erfeit entcin^ern, nnb narf) bem Statnt bc^ aQer^ 
rf)ri)l(icf)jl:en (Soncilii 9ticdni ben SSobmen jnfaffen, eincn 
(Srj6ifrf)ef jn^^rag an^ ibnen felbft jn ent>abfen, ^t>e(rf)en 
beftdtige ber 23ifd)of jn SDInnils in SKdbren, cber ber Sifd)cf 
jn ©ran in Ungarn, cber ber 23ifd)ef wn ®nefen in ^^clen, 
ober ber 5?ifd)of jn 5i)tagbebnrg in X:^entfdi(anb ; ijl gcnug, 
n>enn er Don biefer ©nem ober ^wcen beftdtiget n)irb, wic 
gn ben ^eitcn ®t gt)priani gefd)al)* Unb ber ^>abjl bcit 
fo(d)e^ feine^ jn n)e()ren ; n)el)ret er e^ aber, fo tbnt er aU 
ein SfBoff nnb !t!i)rann, nnb fo([ i()m nienianb fofgen, nnb 
fein Sannen mit einem SKiberbannen jnriicf treiben* 

3nm fimfnnbjn^anjigllen, bie Uni^erfitdten bebi'trften audi 
n)obl einer gnten (larfen Dteformation, idj nnt^ eii fagen, e^ 
t)erbriege n)en e^ n>i((^ 3iit bod) 9l(Ie^,2 ^^^^ t^^^^ ^^>abfltbnm 
f)at eingefe^et nnb orbiniret, nnr gerid)tet anf ©iinbe nnb 
3rrtl)nm jn mel)ren, wa^ finb bie Uni^erfftdten, wo fie nid)t 
anber^, benn bibber, t)erorbnet, benn, wic ia^ S?nd) 5!}2ac^ 
Cabdornm fagt, Gymnasia Ephesorum et Graecae gloriae, 
barinnen ein freiec^ ?eben gefiibret, n>enig ber beiligen 
©d)rift nnb d)ri(lt(id)er ©fanbe gefebret voirb, nnb alfeinber 
bfinbe beibnifd)e 5iKeifter 9lrijtote(eii regieret and) n?eiter 
benn ($l)rifln^ ? ^*>ier wave mux mcin diatb, ba^ bie ^\u 

* E s V e r d r i e s s e wen c s will, let it offend mhom it rnay, 
^ 1st doch Alles, etc. " If indeed everything (Is yet every- 
thing ?) which the papacy has introduced and established, tends only 
(is only arranged) to increase sin and error, what are the universi- 
ties (if not regulated otherwise than heretofore) but Gymnasia^ etc., 
in which an unrestrained life is led, little of the Holy Scripture and 
of the Christian faith taught, and the blind heathen master Aristotle 
reigns alone, even more than Christ." G 1 a u b e, which is here in 
the genitive and governed by w e n i g, is used, as it frequently is in 
the old German, in the feminine gender. 



ADDRESS TO THE GERMAN NOBILITY. 193 

cf)Cr 3(ri|ioteti^, Physicorum, Metaphysicae, de Anima, Ethi- 
corum, weld)e bibber fitr bie beften gcbatteii/ c^ati^ n>iirbett 
abgetban, mit alfen anbeni, bie 'oon natitrltcf)en I^ingen firf) 
tubmen, fo bed) ind)td barinnen mag gelebret tt)erben,2 n^e^ 
ber "oon naturticbeu nod) getjl(id)en S'ingeit ; baju feme 
SiJJeinitng bibber Jfiemanb tjerftanben, inib mtt iinniifeer 2(r^ 
belt, (gtubiren unb ^ejlen fo i:)iel ebler 3^^t unb ©eeten 
itmfonil: befaben gett)efen ffnb* 3d) barf ^ f^jg^n, bag ein 
stopfer mebr ^iinfl: bat ber natur(id}en Singen, benn m be* 
neu a3nd)ern gefd)rieben jlebeL 
2>a^ m6d)te td) gerne feiben,^ ta^ 2(rifloteft^ S3nd)er ^on 

*Filr die besten gehalten (worden sind). 
2 So doch nichts darinnen mag gelehret wer- 
d e n, " inasmuch as nothing may be learned from (in) them, either 
of natural or of spiritual things. Besides, no one has as yet under- 
stood his doctrines, and so much valuable time and (so many) mindg 
have been needlessly burdened with useless labor, study and ex- 
pense (i. e. and much time and strength have been consumed to no 
purpose in useless, etc.). I may safely afRrm that a potter has more 
knowledge (K a n s t for W i s s e n) than is found (stands) written 
in those books." 

^Das mochte ich gerne leiden, etc. " I would de- 
sire (would very willingly suffer) that. Aristotle's books on log- 
ic, rhetoric, and poetry, should be retained (behalten with 
w tt r d e n understood) . Or, brought into another briefer (brief) 
form, they would be (have been) useful to exerc'se the youth in elo- 
I quence and preaching (to speak well and to preach). But the (scho- 
lastic) comments and party contests (parties) ought to be abolished ;. 
and as Cicero's rhetoric (is read) without comment and party-strife, 
j so Aristotle's logic ought tobe read (mU ss ten gelesen werden) 
i in a simple (uniform) manner, without such bulky commentaries. 
1 But at present neither eloquence nor preaching is taught from it (one 
1 teaches neither, etc.), and nothing but disputes and mumbling are 
j made out of it. In connection with these (dane ben) one should 
\ study (have) the Latin, Greek and Hebrew languages, mathematics 
and history, which (studies) 1 recommend to (the attention of) my 
j SQperiors in knowledge, and which would suggest themselves, if one 
liiould seriously meditate a reformation (of the schools). And in- 

17 



194 SELECTIONS FROM LUTHER. 

ber ?ogif, 9?t)etorif, ^oetif, bcbaften, ebcr jTe in einc anbere 
furje ^orm gebract)t, mifelirf) gemefen fet)n iDurbcn, jungc 
?eiite ju iiben, tvohl rcben iinb prcbigen ; aber bie Comment 
iinb Sccteu mii^ten abgetban,, inib gteid) tt)ie gicereni^ 
5Ht)etonf, obne (Comment imb Secten, fo and) SlrilltotcJi^ 
?ogif, einformig, obne fe(ct)c grcgc Clemmcnt gefefen tDcrben, 
aiber jel3t (ehret man mcber rcben nccf) prebigen barau^J, 
unb i]l ganj eine l^ifpntation nnb 9)?uberei baran^ qcwox^ 
ben* 2)anebcn bcirte man nnn bie (2prarf)en ?ateinifd), 
®ried)ifrf) nnb i^ebrdifcb, bie Mathematicas, disciplina?, A^if:? 
torien, n)elrf)e^ id) befebte aSerftdnbigern, nnb pd) fefbfl ircM 
geben wiirbe, fo man mit ©mil: wad) einer 9?cfermation 
tracf)tete ; nnb fitrn^abr 'oiel baran getegen tfl. Eenn bier 
foU bie dbrifHid)e 3ngenb, nnb nnfer ebte^ 2Soff, barinneu 
bie Sbrii^enbeit bfeibet, gelcbrct nnb bncitet trerben, I^ar^ 
urn id)'^ ad)te, bag fein pdbfKid)er nod) ^aifer{id)er 58erf 
mi>d)te gefd)eben, benn gntc Sleformation ber Unit)erjTtdten; 
miebernm, fein tenfe(ifd)erej:^ 5iBefcn, benn nnreformirte 
UniDerfttdten* 

2)ie 5lerjte lajje id) ibre g^acnftdten rcformiren ; bie 3nri^ 
flen nnb ;il)eotogen nebme id) fiir mid) nnb [age jnm STtTen,^ 
bag e^ gnt tt>dre, bail geifKid)e '^Icd^t^ wn bem erfien 

deed this is a matter of great importance. For here should the 
Christian youth of our noble nation, in which Christianity still has 
footing, be instructed and prepared (for their duties). Wherefore, 
I think no act more truly papal and imperial could be performed, 
than a tliorough reform of the universities ; and on the other hand, 
notliing more Satanic than universities unreformed. The physicians 
1 leave to reform their (the medical) faculties ; the jurists and theo- 
logians I will take (in hand) for myself and say." Papstlicher 
and k a i sc r 1 i c h e r, are in the comparative degree, without the 
terminations (p a p s 1 1 i c h e r e s, k a i s e r 1 i c h e r e s) as the substan- 
tive is neuter. See teuflicheres a line or two below. 

* Zum Ersten, etc., " first, that it would be well (that) the ca- 
nonical law should be expunged utterly (to the ground) from," etc. 
Da SB after ware is omitted to avoid harshness. 



ADDRESS TO THE GERMAN NOBILITY. 195 

g5ucf))laben, bi^ auf ben lci}tcn, n>nrbe ju ®runb au^getitget, 
fenber(id) bic I'ccrctafcu* (i$ i)t itn^ itbrig geniig* in ber 
93ibel gcfitrte&en, n)ie n)ir nn^ in alien S)ingen l)a[ten fols^ 
len ; fo binbert foId)e^ ©tabiren nnr bie beirige ©d)rift, 
ancf) t^iVS niebrere Xhcik nad) eitcl ®eij unb S^o^a\)vt 
fcbmccfr. Unb ob fdben 'oiel (Bnte^ barinnen n)dre, fottte eg 
bennccb biffig nnterge{)cn, barnm, ba^ ber ^^abjl aiie geipj? 
Hrf)e 9{ecf)te tn feineg ^;^erjeng ^aften^ gefangen bat, ba^ 
binfort eitcf nnnitlpci^ Stnbircn nnb SSetrng barinnen i% 
S^cnt ill gcijKicbe^ 9?ecbt, nidbt bag in ben S3itd)ern, fonbern 
iDail in beii ^abftg nnb feincr (Srf)mcid){er ?!}JntbtDill ftebet 
^aft bn cine Sacbe im geijlfid)en 9?ect)t, gegritnbet anf g 
2I(Icrbe|le, fo bat ber '^ahft bariiber Scrinium pectoris, bar^ 
nad) mnp jT* fenfcn alteg 9?ecf)t nnb bie ganje 2Bett* 3tnn 
regieret baj]e{bige Scrinium me(maf ein 33nbe, nnb ber Xcn^ 

^ Es ist uns tibrig genug, etc., " there is quite enough writ- 
ten in the Bible (showing) how we should conduct ourselves in all 
things. There, such study only stands in the way of the Holy Scrip- 
tures ; and the greater part of it (canonical law) has the savor (lusts 
after) of avarice and pride." On ubrig, see p. 108, Note 3. 

2 In seines Herzens Kasten, etc., " holds it locked up in 
i his own heart (fastened in the shrine of his heart), so that henceforth 
there is nothing in it (the canonical law) but useless study and de- 
ception. Now-a-daj^s the canonical law is not that which is (stands) 
in the books, but what is in the arbitrary will of the pope and his 
I flatterers. Though you have a cause, with the best support (founded 
i in the best manner) in the canonical law, still the pope has a scrlni- 

um pectoris respecting it, to which all law and the whole world mus 
I conform. Now a knave, and even the devil himself often governs 
\ that scrinium^ and yet it receives the praise (it causes itself to be 
I praised) that the Holy Gfiost governs it, i. e. it pretends to be gov- 
i erned by the Holy Ghost. So they manage with the suffering people 
J of Christ, impose on them many laws, observe none of them, and yet 
compel others to observe them, or to purchase a dispensation. Now 
since the pope and his adherents, have set aside even entire canoni- 
,j callaws and do not regard them, and govern themselves everywhere 
j «ily by their own arbitrary will, we should follow their example." 



196 SELECTIONS FROM LUTHER. 

fe( felbfl:, iinb [d^t <Tct) prcifen, ber l)ciHfle ®ei(l regiere e^. 
So gehet man am mit bent annen 2Self (5()njli, fd^t xijm 
Diel dicd)t^ iinb hdtt fcincd, jtt>ingt anbcre ju balten, cber 
mit 0e(b jii lofen. 

I'icmcil bemt bcr *^>a6fi: unb bte (Seinen fel6fl ganje gei|b 
nrf)e 5>icd)te aufgebebcn, nirf)t ad)tcn, unb ftch mir nad) 
it)rcm eigcncit iDJutbUMllen hattcn iibcr al(e 2Belr, foUen mr 
ibncn folgcn, iinb bie 23itd)cr and) Dcitr>crfen. SlHirnm fell^ 
ten wir t>erqeben^ barinnen ftnbiren ? So fonncn n:^ir and) 
nimmcrmcbr bed ']}abft6 "SlntlwiVicn, \vdd)c6 nnn geiiKid^e^ 
Dtecbt gemorben ift, anolernen* (§i fo fair e^i ja bahin in 
©otteiS Stamen, bad in'd Il^enfetd 97amen fid) erheben bat, 
unb fei) fein Doctor Decretorum niehr anf Srben ; fonbern 
allcin Doctores scrinii papalis, bad jTnb bed ^]>abfld .v>end}{cn 
9}ian fagt, bag fein feinered tDeltlid^ed Sfegiment irgenb fe^, 
benn bei t)cn ij^iirfen, bie bod) n>eber gei|l(id)ed nod) wciu 
lid)ed $Ked)t baben, fonbern allein ibren SKforan : fo miiflen 
tvix befennen, bag nid)t fd)dnblid)ered 5Kegiment iff, benn 
bei nnd, bnrd) gei|lfid)ed nnb n>eltlid)ed '3icd)t, bag fein 
©tanb mebr gebet, natiir(id)er Sernnnft, gefd)n)eige ber 
l)eiligen Sd)rift genidg* 

i:^a^ tt>e(t(id)e dicd)t, biff ©ott, mie ifl and) bad eine 
9Bi(bnig gen>orben ! 5ffiieti)obl ed ml bejfer, fnnfHid)er, 
rebtidjer i|l, benn bad geift{id)e, an a>e[d)em, iiber ben yia^- 
men,2 nid)td ©nted iff, fo ifl fein bod) and) inel jn ine( ge^ 
tt>orben» giirwabr, iKrniinftige DJegenten^ neben ber l)ei(i^ 

' £i 8 fair es, etc. "Come, then, in God's name, let that 
which, in Satan's name has elevated itself, fall (dahin, away)." 

* Ueber den IN a men, etc., "in whicli there is nothing g-ood 
beyond tlie name. Still it has become far too bulky." Sein, is 
genitive for seiner and is governed by z u v i e 1. Literally, " Yt-t 
if it lias become much too much." Sec p. 46, Note 4. 

^ FUrwahr, vernunftige Regenten, etc. " Indeed, seii- 
siblc rulers would be (juite competint with (the aid of) the Holy 
Scriptures. St. Paul says," etc. i. e. would be able to get along 
without laws. On b r i g, see p. 108, Note 3. 



ADDRESS TO THE GERMAN NOBILITY. 197 

gen Sct^rift, n^drcit ii6rig red)t genug, wie <Bt ^aufu^ 1. 
^or, 6. fagt : „2(it 9tiemanb untcr each, ber ba moge fetneg 
9tad))^en ®acf)e nd)ten, bag ibr t)or l)cibnifd)en ®erid)ten 
miilTet babent ?„ @i^ biinft mid) gleid),i bag ?anbred)t unb 
Janbfitten ben ^aifer(id)en gemeinen $)ted)ten VDerben t)or^ 
gejcgen, nnb iic ^aifer(id)en nnr jnr ?tott) gebrand)t* Unb 
modte ®ett, bag, VDie ein jegtidjei^ ?anb fetne eigene 2trt 
unb ®aben bat, alfo and) mit etgenen fnrjen 5>ied)ten re^ 
giert mi'trben, mie ]ie regieret jTnb gen^efen, ebe fotd)e 3?ed)te 
<Tnb erfunben, nnb nod) obne ^e Die(e ?dnber regiert xiocv^ 
ien. Sie n^eitfdnfttgen nnb fern gefnditen 9?ed)te ftnb nnr 
S5efd)n)ernng ber ?ente nnb ntel)r ^inbernig benn gorbe^ 
rung ber @ad)en* Eod) id) bojfe, e^ fei) bie (Sad)e fd)on 
"oon Slnbern 6ej)er &ebad)t nnb angefet)en, benn ic^'^ mag 
anbringen;^ 

SReine tieben S^bebiogen baben ffd) an^ ber 5!JJn^e nnb 
9(rbeit gefegt, fafen bie a3ibe(n n)ob( rn^en nnb lefen Sen- 

tentias.3 

@o mv benn^ b^ten ben Seamen nnb $titef, bag n)tr 
?ebrer ber S). Sd)rift t)eigen, fofften n)tr n)abrltd) gejwnu:^ 
gen fei)n, bem 9tamen nad) bie S>. (2d)rift nnb feine anbere 
ju lel)ren. 9inn a ber, fo Sententiae alien ^errfd)en, fi'nbet 

* Es dUnkt mich gleich, etc. " It seems to me that the laws 
and usages of the particular State, should be preferred to the imperial 

I (which was a modification of the civil law)." Luther desired — and 
I who will deny his wisdom in this matter ? — that each of the States 
included in the Grerman empire, should be governed as far as possi- 
{ bJe by laws which grew out of its own necessities, and that the 
' Roman and imperial law be resorted to only when the former was in- 
I sufficient." Gle ich, a5, a5 zAomo^/i, cannot be translated here. 
j * D e n n i c h's mag a n b r i n g e n, " than I can present it." 
I 'Sententias, the books of the scholastic theologians or Sen- 
< tentiarists, who quoted the sententiae of the Fathers, as authorities. 

* So wir denn, etc. " Since we have the name and title of 
T being teachers (so that we are called teachers)," etc. 

17* 



198 SELECTIONS FROM LUTHER. 

man mebr ^:ibnifrf)en intb menfd)tirf)cn ^ihtfeV benn 
l)einqe gemijTe ?el)rcn ber (2d)nft in ben !tf)eo(ogen» 5Bie 
YDoUen n)ir ibm nnn tbnn ?*^ 3cf) tt^ei^ bier feinen anbern 
3?atb, benn ein bemiubigej^ ©ebet jn ®ett, ba^ nn^ berfetbe 
^octore^ Zl)coloQia gebe. S'octore^ ber ^nnft, ber 2(rjnei, 
ter Merf)te, ber Sententien, mogen ber ^ah]t, ^aifer uub 
Unit)erjTtaten madden ; aber fet) nnr gemig,^ einen Sector 
ter beitigen ©cf)rift n)irb bir -Riemanb inad)en, benn aEein 
ier beilige @eift Dom §imme(, n^ie gbriftn^ fagt Sol)- 6. : 
„©ie miijTen aKe t)on @ott fefber gelel)ret fei)n." Stun 
fragt ber beilige @eift nid)t nadb rotb, brann ^areten/ ober 
tt)a^ bed ^rangend ift,^ awd) nicf)t eb einer jnng cber alt, 
^aic ober ^faf, 5i}iond) ober tDeltticb, Sungfrau ober ebeti* 
fet). 

2)ie S3iicf)er miigte man and) tt>enigern, nnb erfefen bie 
bejlen ; benn i)ie( 55iid)er macben nirf)t gefebrt, t)iet ?efen 
and) nid)t ;6 fonbern gnt Sing nnb oft lefen, n>ie menig fein 
ifl, bad mad)t gelebrt in ber Sd^rift, nnb fromm bajn^ 3^ 
^d fotltcn alter l)ei(igen aSdter ©djrift^ nnr eine B^i^f^^fl 

* DOnkel, from danken, not to be confounded with Dun- 
kel. 

2 W i e w o 1 1 e n w i r i h m nun t h u n ? " How now shall we 
manage it (do to it, or in regard to it) .-'" 

•* Aber sey nur gewiss, ^^ but be well assured.'' N u r, only 
Assured, not/ting but assured, i. e. well assured. 

* Pare t for Bare t, a cap. The /; is often used for b in Ger- 
man, especially in the south of Germany, and in the old writers. 

^ Oder, was des Prangen's ist, "or what (anything that) 
pertains to show." 

® Viel Lesen auch nicht, etc., "nor does extensive read- 
ing, but valuable matter and frequent reading, however little of it 
(bo in, genitive for seiner, referring to Ding) there may be, 
that makes one learned in the Scriptures and pious too." No mod- 
ern teacher on this subject has expressed more truth in fewer words. 

' V a te r S c h r i f t, t/ic writings of the Fathers. Luther seems to 
use the word S c h r i f t as a collective, with a plural verb. 



ADDRESS TO THE GERMAN NOBILITY. 199 

werben gcfefeit, baburcf) in bie ©cf)nft ju fommen ;^ fo fefen 
tt)ir jTe nur, ba^ n)ir bariu bfeiben, unb nimmer in bie 
©d)rift fommen, bamit mv g(eicf) benen jTnb, bie bie 28ege^ 
jeicf)en anfel)en, unb n^anbeln bennod) ben 28eg nimmer. 
Sie [iebcn aSdter l)a6en nn^ n:)oHen in bie ©rf)rift fiit)ren, 
mit ibrem (gd)rei6en, fo fiibren n)ir nn^ bamit beran^ ; fo 
borf) allein (2rf)rift nnfer SEBeingarten ijl,^ barin n?ir Stffe 
nn^ fottten iiben unb arbeiten. 

3Sor aUen Singen, fotlte in ben l)ol)en unb niebrigen 
@d)u(en bie ijornebmjlte unb gemeinjte Section fei)n : bie 
beitige ©cfirift,^ unb ben jungen ^naben ba^ ^Dangelium. 
Unb tt)ol(re ®ott, cine jebe gtabt batte and) eine ?OJdgb(ein^ 
®d)u(e, barin be^ Xag^e^S bie 5)?dgb(ein eine ©tunbe ba^ 
@t)angefium borten, e^ tt)dre ju beutfcf) ober (ateinifd). 
giimabr bie ©rf)u[en, 9}?ann:^ unb grauen^^(o(ler/ ffnb 
i)or 3^iten barauf angefangen, gar and (6bfid)er d)riftfirf)er 
SDZeinung, mie n)ir lefen t)on (5t. Signed unb mebr ^ei(igen; 
ba n^urben bei(ige 3«ngfrauen unb 9!)?drti)rer, unb ftunb 
ganj n)ob(^ in ber (It)ri|lenbeit ; aber nun ift nirf)t mebr 
benn 35eten unb ©ingen barauf gett)orben* ©oltte nid)t 

^ Dadurch in die Schrift zu kommen, etc., " to come 
thereby (i. e. to be introduced bj^^ them) to the Scriptures; but we 
read them (the writings of the Fathers) only to remain in them, and 
never to come to the Scriptures, whereby we resemble those who 
look at the guide-boards, and yet never follow the way (they point 
out)." 

^Sodoch allein Schrift unser Weingarten ist, 
" whereas the Scriptures alone are our vineyard.' 

^ :die heilige Schrift, the semicolon in German is some- 
times used very much like a dash in English, to give emphasis to a 
word., 

* Die Schulen, Mann- und Frauen-Kloster. " In ear- 
ly times schools, (i. e.) convents for males and those for females, be- 
gan with this object in view." 

* Und (es) stand ganz wohl, etc. "and it was very well 
with Christianity," i. e. the Christian church was in a healthy condi- 
tion. 



200 SELECTIONS PROM LtTTHER. 

bittiQ etu jcber (5()ri(T:eu^5!)?enfd)i bci feinen itenn unb ^chxif 
ten %\hxcn ttnjyen iaS ganje Ijeifige ^Dangelium, ia fein 
3tamc unb ?eben inuen fle()et ?2 ?el)ret beef) eine gputJ? 
nerin^ unb 3ta()erin ihve Xcd)tex baflelbe ^anbtDcrf in jurt^ 
gen Scibrcn ; abcv nun miffen ba^ @t)angefium aitrf) bie 
grogcn gclcbrten ^H^atatcu unb S3ifcf)ofe fefbft nid}t. 

D n)ie ungteid) fabren voir mit bem armen jungen i^^au^ 
fen, ber nn^ bcfcbfen ifl, jn regieren nnb nntern^eifen ?4 
Unb frf)tt)ere 9{ed)nnng bafiir mng gegeben n)erben, bag mx 
it)nen ba^ SBort ©otte^ widjt Dortegen : gefd)iel)t ibnen/ 
tt)ie Seremiag fagt : ^(ageL 2. : ,,gD?eine SIngen finb Dor 
SBeinen miibe gen)orben, niein Snngen>eibe ift erfrfirocfen, 
mcine ?eber ift an^gefrfjiittct anf bie (Srbe, nm be^ 3Ser^ 
berben^ tDiHen ber Xocf)ter meine^ aScff^^, ba bie 3nngen 
unb ^inbtein Derberben, anf alien ©affen ber ganjen (gtabt 
®ie fprad)en jn ibren 5!Jtiittern : 50Bo ift S3rob nnb 2Gein ? 
Unb i:)crfrf)marf)ten al^ bie 25crn>nnbeten anf ben ©tragen 
ber ©tabt, nnb gaben ben ®eijl anf im Sd)oog ibrer 9Jiitt^ 
ter/' Siefen efenben Santmer feben tt>ir nid)t/ trie and) 
jegt bad jnnge SSolE mitten in ber Sbriftenbeit Derfd)mad)^ 
tct nnb erbdrmlid) t)erbirbt, ©ebred)en balben bed ©iiange^ 
linmd,''' bad man mit ibnen immer treiben nnb iiben feltte. 

* C hri s ten - Me nsc h. Mensch, like homo in Latin, stands 
for a human being, and therefore may be applied to a person but nine 
or ten years old. Mann could not be so used. 

'-^Dasein Name innen steht, fordarin sein Name 
ste ht. 

^ Lehret doch eine Spinner in, etc. is not a hypothetical 
clause, but a strong alfirmation, as an antithesis to the latter clause. 

* Der uns bcfohlen ist, zu regieren und unterwei- 
sen, " which is committed to us to be governed and instructed (to 
govern and to instruct).'* U n g I e i c h, refers to what is done to the 
spinster and seamstress. 

'^ ( K «) g e 8 c h i e t i h n e n . 

^ Sehcn wir n i c h t, " we do not see," i. e. we shut our eyes to. 

^Gebrechenhalben des Evannreliums. "on account 



ADDRESS TO THE GERMAN NOBILITY. 201 

SOBir follteu aucb,i wo bie f)o{)en ©cf)u[en flci^tg tt)dren tit 
bev l)ciTigen ®cf)nft, nicf)t babin fdjirfen 3^bermantt, tt^ie 
je^t gefd]iet)t, ba man nur fraget nad) ber ?[Retige, unb 
em 3eber witt eiiten S^octor t)a6en, fonbern aUein bte 
2JKergefd)idtejlen, in ben f(einen @cf)nlen t)or tt)obt er^ 
jogen, baritber ein giirjlt cber Dtatf) einer ©tabt felt 2lcf)t 
baben, nnb nic{)t jnfajien jn fenben, benn tt)obfgefd}irfte. 
SDBo aber bie beifige (Scf)rift nid)t regiert, ba rat^e id) fiiiv 
n^abr 9tiemanb ba^ er fein ,ffinb bintbne. Q^ mn^ Derber:^ 
ben 21Ke^,2 ^^^ j|ie()t ©otte^ ^iSort ol)ne Unterlag treibet; 
barnm feben mx and),^ n)a^ fitr aSotf n)irb nnb ijl in ben 
boben @d)n(en ; ift Jtiemanb^ ©d)n(b benn be^ ^abfle^, 
93ifd)ofe nnb ^rdfaten, benen fo(d) be^ jnngen SSoffe^ Stn^en 
befobfen i% Senn bie boben (2d)nfen [oUten erjieben eitel 
bcd)t)erilanbige 'iente in ber (2d)rift, bie ba mod)ten S3i^ 
fc^ofe nnb ^farrberren merben, an ber ©pige jleben^ voiiex 

of a deficiency of the Gospel." H alb en does not govern Evan- 
gel! urns, but always governs the noun which it follows — Ge- 
b r e c h e n, in this instance. 

*Wir sollten auch, etc. " Even if the Universities (that is 
the meaning ofhohen Schulen) were diligent in (the study of) 
the Scriptures, we ought not to send (indiscriminately) every one 
thither, — as is now done, inasmuch as men are anxious only about 
numbers (tlie universities seek to be much frequented) and every 
man wishes to have (his son) a doctor — but only the most promis- 
ing (who have been) previously well trained in the preparatory 
schools. Respecting this matter the ruler or council of a city should 
exercise a supervision and not permit (persons) to send (to the uni- 
versities) any but young men of talents." 

*Es muss verderben Alles. Allesisin the nomina- 
tive. 

^Darum sehen wir auch, etc. " for this reason do we 
see what sort of persons are formed (w i r d, become) and now exist 
(i s t)," i.e. do we see such persons as are now formed and as now 
exist in the universities. 

*Pfarrherrn werden (und) an der Spitze ste- 
he n, " become pastors and stand at the head (as leaders)," etc. 



202 SELECTIONS FROM LUTHER. 

bie ^e^er lutb ;i;eiife( unb alter 2CcIt* 3(6er wo finbet man 
ba^ ? 3d) babe groge ©orcje, bie bohen (Sd)ufen fTub grcf e 
^forteu ber J^oKe, fo (Te nicbt emjTg(trf) bie beilige (Ec()rift 
iiben, unb treiben in'6 junge aSolf* 

3um fcd)i^ unb gt^anjigfteu, id) xvci^ n^cbf, baj5 ber ro^ 
ntifcf)e .'oaufe n)irb Dormcuben unb bed) aufb(afen/ n^ie ber 
^abfi: \^abc ba^ beifige romifdie D?eid) t)cn bem gried)ifd)en 
^aifer gcnommen, unb an bie 2^entfd)en gebract^t, fiir n)eld)e 
(i\)xe^ nub SBobftbat er bitlig Untertbcinigfeir, l^anf unb 
aUc'S ®nte^ an ben 2^entfrf)en i^erbienet unb erfangt baben 
fell* S^e(5ba(b fie Die(Ieirf)t allerlei Dornebmen, jTe ju reform 
miren, jTrf) untertDinben n^erben, in ben 2Binb ju frf)fagen, 
unb nidbt^ tajjen anfeben, benn fo(cf)e^ ri>mifd)en 9{eid)et^ 
93egabungen* 2Iut^ biefem ©runbe baben fie bibber man^ 
d)en t(}euern ^aifer fo inutbtDiltig unb iibermiitbig t)erfefgt 
unb gebrucft, bag 3^ittmer i(1: e^ ju fagen,^ unb mit berfef^ 
ben 93et)enbigfeit fid) felbft ju SDberI)erreu gemad)t, alter 
n)etttid)er ®eu>a(t unb Dbrigfeit, tt)iber ha& t)ei(ige @t)an^ 
gelium, barum i&f and) bat)on reben mug* 

(S^ ift ol)ne S'^veifci^ bag red)te r6mifd)e 9ieid), bat)ou bie 

^ Vorwenden und hoch aufblasen, pretend and 
trumpet aloud that (how)," etc. Vorwenden, see p. 99, Note 
7. A u f b 1 a s e n, ^o ma/tc a proud display of a thing. See p. 90, 
Note 7. 

^FOr welche Ehre, etc. " for which honor and benefit he 
deserves in reason, and shouUl iiave received, submission, gratitude, 
and every favor from (he deserves, etc. in) the Germans. There- 
fore they wiU, perhaps, venture (s i c h u n t e r w i n d e n) to disre- 
gard (in den Wind z u s c h 1 a g e n) every kind of attempt to 
reform tliem, and allow one to regard nothing but the grant of such a 
Roman enipire." S i c h u n t e r w i n d e n, see p. 155, Note 3. 
In den Wind zu schlagen, (<o give to the winds), to disre- 
gard, to despise. Begabungen. The plural may refer to the 
successive grants of the empire, made to the different emperors. 

^Dass Jammer istzu sagen, ** that it is painful to speak 
of it." 



ADDRESS TO THE GERMAN NOBILITY. 203 

©thrift bet ^Vepbeten 3ium* 24. iinb Santcf t)erfintbu]et 
babeiv f^inflfl: jcrftort ift unb ein @nbe [)at, mie 33alaam 
3iiim. 24. f(ar yerfihibiget bat, ba er fpract) : „(S^ tuerben 
bie Corner fommen, unb bie 3wben t^erf^oren, unb barnacf) 
merben jTe and) untergebcn/' Unb ba^ ift gefd)cbcni biird) 
bie ©eta^, fonberlid) aber, ba bct^ Xiirfen Dteirf) ifl: ange:^ 
gangen, bei taufenb 3al)ren, unb ijl alfo mit ber 3^tt abgc^ 
fallen 3(jTen unb aifrifa, barnaci) granfreicf), ©panien, ju^ 
(efet aSenebig aufgefommen, unb nidbt^ mebr ju SKom geblie^ 
ben \)on ber t)origen ®erv^alt. 

S)a nun ber ^>abfl He ®ried)en unb ben ^aifer ju Son^ 
ftantincpef, ber erbltd) romifcber ^atfer tt)ar, nirf)t mod)te 
md) feinem SDtntbiDitten jtDingen, bat er ein felcf)e^ giinb^? 
(ein erbacf)t, ibn beflefben Dieid)(^ nnb giamen^ ju berauben, 
unb ben X^eutfcften, bie ju ber S^^it preitbar unb gute^ @e^ 
fcf)rei reicf)2 maren, ^ujun)enben, bamit jTe be^ romifcf)en 

^ Und das ist geschehen, etc. "And this took place 
through the Goths, and especially when the kingdom of the Mo- ' 
hammedans arose, about a thousand years ago, and thus in process of 
time Asia and Africa fell oif, and afterwards France and Spain and 
finally Venice arose, and, at Rome nothing of its former power re- 
mained." Tq rken is used here in a wide and loose sense. Bei 
taasend Jahren qualifies geschehen. Angehen (ange- 
g a n g e n) is used here, as it often is elsewhere, in the sense of be- 
ginning. The position ofFrankreich und Spanien is am- 
biguous. But the construction is simple, and the sense better, to 

I connect them with the following rather than with the preceding 
words. Z u Rom is not connected with b 1 e i b e n, but with 
nichts mehr; otherwise the dative without z u would be used. 
* Gutes Geschrei reich, " rich in good report," i. e. in very 
high repute. Geschrei was once used as R u f now is, report^ 
fame. See p. 42, Note 5, on both words. Geschrei is still used 

i in the sense of report, but only of evil report. The extensive use of 

* the word reich to express abundance, is apparent especially in such 
compounds as, geistreich, liebreich, fischreich, which in 
old German were written separately, with the first part in the geni- 

I tive. Reich is now commonly construed with an, as reich an 
guten Werke, " rich in good works." 



204 SELECTIONS FROM LUTHER. 

SReicf)(^ ©emaft unter jTrf) brdcf)ten, unb Don ibren ^cinben^ 
ju ?ebcn (]tenfle* Unb ift and) alfo gefc{)cben ; bcm ^aifcr 
gu (5on(lantinopc( ifl c^ gcnommen, nnb nn^ S^cutfcbcn- bcr 
9tame nnb Xitel bcffelbcn jugcfd)riebcn, jTnb bamit bc^ 
^abi'lcc^ ^nccbte geworben, nnb i|l nnn cin anbcre^ romu 
fd)c^ SKcid), ba^ ber ^abft bat anf bie 2^entfrf)cn gcbauet 
2)enn jene^, ba^ erftc, ift fcingft, n)ie gefagt, nntergcgangen, 
Sllfo bat nnn^ bcr remifd)c Stnbf, feinen ?Ocnthn>il(en, 
(^dbfte baben aUejeit ber I^entfd)cn Sinfditigfcit nn'f;^ 
brand)t,) Dtom eingenommen, ben bentfcben jlaifer beraui:^ 
getriebcn, nnb mit iiiicn Dcrpflidbtet, ntd)t in 9tem jn n)oh^ 
nen. ©ott romifrf)er ,taifcr fei)n/ nnb benned) 9{om md)t 
inne b^ben ; bajn altejcit in be^ ^abfti nnb ber Seincit 
9[Wntbn)i(len b^ngen nnb mcben, ba^ wiv ben Juimen baben, 
unb tTe ba^ ?anb nnb ©tdbte* 2)enn fie aUejeit nnfere 
(Sinfaltigfeit migbrand)t l)aben, jn it)rem Uebernintb nnb 

^ Unci von ihren Hclnden, etc. "and that (it) might pro- 
ceed from their hands as a fief." The word i hre n, is used by neg- 
ligence for se i n er referring to Pabst. So sie in the preceding 
clause refers to the Romans, whereas, grammatically, it should refer 
also to Pabst. 

2 Und uns Deutschen, etc. '' and to us Germans the name 
and title of it is given (ascribed) and we are (w i r, understood) 
thereby made slaves of the pope ; and now there is another (or 
second) Roman empire, which the pope has built up upon the Ger- 
mans." 

^ Also )i a t nun, etc. "Thus tiic apostolical chair has now 
its heart's desire (viz. it has) taken Rome," etc. 

* (Man) soil romischer Kaiser seyn, etc. " Orif is lu 
be Roman emperor and yet not have Rome under his control ! Be- 
sides, always be dependent on and interwoven with the good pleasure 
of the pope and his friends, so that we have the name, and tliey tlie 
country and cities!" The preposition in instead of an with J 
h a n g c n before M a t h w i 1 1 e n, gives a peculiar shade to the idea, i 
It conveys the idea of an internal connection, approaching that ex- 1 
pressed by we ben, but docs not imply any affection. See p. 13^» 
Note 3. 



ADDRESS TO THE GERMAN NOBILITY. 205 

X^vannei^ iinb l)eipen imi^i toUc 2}eutfcf)e, bie jTcf) affen mb 
narren la\Jen^ tvie jTe woUcn. 

TiXin tt)obfan, @ctt bem S>cvvn tjl'^ eiit ffeuieg Sing 
sReicb imb giirftcntbum l)in unb l)er ju n)erfen ; er iflt fo 
milt) berfe(ben/2 bag er ^nwcikn einem 65fen SSuben ein 
^onigreirf) giebt iinb nimmt ec^ cincm g^rcmmen. 3un)etfen^- 
burd) 23errdtl)erei bofer untreuer 5Renfd}en, jiweilen invdj 
Srben, n)te n)ir ba^ fefen in bent jlonigreicf) ^erjTen, ©rie^ 
cf)enfanb mtb fa jl affen 9?eicf)em Unb I^anief 2. nnb 4, fagt : 
,,@r n>obnet tm S^immcl, ber iiber atte X^inqe berrfcf)et, nnb 
er allein ijl et^, ber bie Jlonigrcid)e Derfefeet, l)in nnb l)er 
mirft, nnb marf)t/' Sarnm, n)ie 9?iemanb fann ba^ fiir 
grog arf)ten, ta^ ibm ein 5){eicf) n)irb jngetbeifet, fonbertic^ 
fo er ein (Sbrijl i\l : fo mogen n)ir ®entfrf)en and) nid)t f)od):^ 
fabren,4 bag nn^ ein neneg romifd)e^ dieid) x\l jngeVDenbet 
Denn e^ ijl t)or feinen Stngen eine fd)fed)te ©abe, bie er ben 
2llternntnd)tigjlen ba^ mebrmat^ giebt. SBie ©aniel 4. 
fagt : „2iae bie anf (Srben tt>obnen, ffnb t)or feinen 3tngen, 
al^ bad Ttid)t6 {ft,6 nnb er bat ©emaft in aKen dteidjen ber 
SKenfd]en, fie jn geben, tt)eld)em er mU/^ 

2Biett)ot)f nnn ber ^ab\t, mit ©en^aft nnb Unred)t ba^ 

^ Und heissen uns, etc. "and call us senseless Germans^ 

j who suffer themselves to be treated as apes and fools, according to 

their pleasure." On afFen and narren, see p. 108, Note 7. 

2 Mild derselben, "free or liberal in regard to them," i.e. 

' empire and principality. For this use of m i 1 d, see p. 60, Note 2^. 

Derselben is in the genitive, vi^hich has a very v^ide and loose use 

j in the German. See p. 117, Note 1. In old German we meet with 

such expressions as D a n k e s m i 1 d e, abundant in thanks. 
I ' Zuweilen introduces a sentence, which is properly but a 
J cilause of the preceding. 

I *Hochfahren, ^o^e proud (to soar high), is now used only in 
the participial form hochfahrend, lofty, proud. 

^ Das mehrmal, more frequently, not exactly equivalent to 
I mehrmals, /rc5'wen%. It is not now in use. 
^DasNichtsist, " that which is nothing." 
18 



206 SELECTIONS FROM LUTHER. 

r6mifcf)e di:id)^ ober be^ roniifcf)en dicid)^ 9tamen, hat bem 
recf)tcn ^aifer berau6et, iinb un^ S^ciitfdien ^ugetwnbet ; fo 
ijl: e^ bed) gewig, bag ©ott be^ 0)a6|lg So^beit bierin bat 
gcbraiicf)t, beiitfd)er 9tation ein foId)c^ 9?eicf) ju geben, unb 
nart) gait be^ erflen romifcbcn 9?cid)^, ein anbere^, ba^ je^t 
jlebt, aufjunct)ten, Unb n)ien)ol)I xviv ber ^cibflei S5o^f)eit 
!)ierm nirf)t Urfacbe geben, ned) t'bre fa(fd)en @efud]e itnb 
5!)ieinungen t^erftanben, baben n>ir bed) burd) pabft(id)e 
S^iicfe xitib (gd)alf beit, mit unjdbttgem S3futt)ergiegen, mit 
Unterbriirfung unfercr greibeit, mit 3uf^&^ itnb JHaiib alter 
unferer ©liter, fonberlid) ber ^ird^en iinb ^Y^^iinben, mit 
2)utben unertrdglid)er Xriigerei unb Sd)mad), fotdie^ ^eid} 
leiber attju tbeuer, bejabfet. 2Bir baben be^ '3teid)e^ 5ta^ 
men, aber ber ^abft bat nnfer (3iit, @bre, ^eib, ^eben, 
©eele, nnb Silted mad n)ir baben. ©o felt man bie X)c\\U 
fd)en tanfd)en,3 nnb mit Xdn\(i)cn tdnfd)en. 2^ad l)aben 
bie ^dbjle gefndjt,^ bag iie gerne ^aifer tt)dren gett)efen, 

1 Und wiewohl wir der Pabste, etc. "And though we 
did not wholly give (geben for gege ben, with haben un- 
derstood) cause (or occasion) to the wickedness of the popes, nor un- 
derstand their false attempt and designs." G e s n c h means properly 
seeking through request^ visit ^ and undoubtedly here refers to the re- 
quest of the pope that the Franks would deliver Italy. 

* Zusatz, that which is added to a small income, to piece out a 
living; and hence any additional expense. 

3 Deutschen tauschen, a play upon the words, and hence 
the repetition : " So must they humbug ihe Wyttembergers, and give 
them humbug upon humbug." 

* Das haben die Pabste gesucht, etc. "That did the 
popes attempt, because they would gladly have been emperors ; and 
because tliey could not accomplish this, tliey (nevertheless) set them- 
selves above the emperors." Das at the beginning of the sentence 
refers to the whole plan of the popes in respect to the Greek empire 
in Italy, and tlie sentence is explanatory of the words Gesuch 
und Meiniingen, above. See also the last sentence of the next 
paragraph. The use of dass in the sense of because^ is not very 
common in modern German ; in old German it is more common. 



ADDRESS TO THE GERMAN NOBILITY. 207 

unb ba jTe ba^ nicf)t ^)aben mogen frf)irfen, ()a6en fie firf) 
bodt) itbcr bie ^aifcr gefegt 

Sieweit benu bard) ®otte^ ®efcf)icf unb bofer 5[Renfcf)en 
©efiicf)/ ol)ne unfere ©rf)utb, ba^ 9?eid) un^ gegeben ifl, 
Witt id) ixid)t ratben, bajTetbe fabren ju fajTen, fonbern in 
©otte^ ^nrcbt, fo fange e^ ibm gefafft, rebfid) regieren. 
Denn mie gefagt ift, ei^ (iegt ibm nirf)t^ baran,^ wo ein 
3{eicb berfommt, et will eg bennocf)^ regiert b^ben* S^ahen 
eg bie ^Vibfte unrebHcb anbern genommen, fo bciben mv eg 
bocf) nicbt nnrebticf) gewonnen. @g ifl nng burd) bogwiffige 
g!Kenfrf)en ang ©otteg 2Biffen gegeben, benfefben mv met)r 
anfeben,4 benn ber ^dbile faffd)e 5iJieinung, bie fte barin ge^ 
babt, fefbfl ^aifer unb mebr benn ^aifer jn fei)n, unb ung 
nur mit bem Stamen dffen unb fpotten. 

®er ^bnig ju ©abi)(on batte fein 9?eicf) and) mit ^anien 
unb ©ewalt genommen, bennod) wottte ©ott baffelbe regies^ 
ret baben burd) bie beitigen g^iirften, Sanief, SJnania, Mfa^ 
ria, gWifaet. SSiefmebr mii er t)on ben d)riitfid)en beutfd)en 
^iirften biefeg ^dd) regieret Ijaben, eg \)aie eg ber ^abjl 
gellohfen ober geraubt, ober t)on ?teuen an^ gemad)t ; eg 

Mo gen stands for gemocht. See p. 24, Note 1 . S chic ken 
means to adjust, to make a thing succeed. 

^ Gottes Geschick und boser Menschen Gesuch. 
This is an alliteration, bearing some little analogy to the English 
proverb, " Man appoints, God disappoints." 

2£s liegt ihm nichts daran. See p. 70, Note 2, and 
p. 169, Note 4. Wo ein Reich herkommt, forwoher ein 
Reich kommt. 

^Er will es dennoch, etc. " He would nevertheless have 
it governed (whatever be its origin)." 

* Denselben wir mehr ansehen, '^ which (same) we re- 
gard more than," etc. After the words "false design of the popes," 
the clause, " which they had in it," is tautological. " To be themselves 
emperors and more than emperors," is dependent on M e i n u n g. 

^VonNeuen an, anew, from a new point of time onward. 
A n, onward, is not needed here, and cannot so well qualify m a- 
che n, as the idea of continued existence after it is made. 



208 SELECTIONS FROM LUTHER. 

i(l 5ttfe^i ©otte^ Drbnnng, tt)elcf)e^ et)e ijl gcfd)et)en, beitn 
tt)ir bariim haben gett>ugt* 

Segbalb mag fid) bcr ^Mbft unb bie ©ctnen iiid)t riibmeit, 
bag jTe beutfd)er Station baben grog ©utc^ getbau mit SGer? 
Iciben biefc^ romifd)cu 9ieid)e^* 

3iun crfteir^ barum, bag jTe ntd)t^ ®ute^ iin^ gegonuet 
t)aben, fonbern babcn unfcre @infa(tigfcit barin nngbraucf)t, 
ibren Uebermutb, roiber ben red)tcn romifd^en ^aifer ju 
Sonftantinopef, gu ftdrfen, bem bcr ^Mbft fo(d)e^ gcnemmen 
^at, tpiber ©ott unb 9?ed)t, beg er feine ®en)alt l^iatte. 

3um anbern, bag ber ^abft babiird) ixidbt un^, fonbern 
i^m fe[b(l ba^ ^aifertbnm jnjneignen gefnd)t bat, ibm jn 
untern)erfen3 atte unfere @en)a(t, greibeit, ©nt, ^eib nnb 
©ee(e, nnb bnrd) nn^ (iDo e^ ©ott nid)t bdtte gemebret) 
aUe 2I$e(t, vt)ie ba^ f(dr(id) in feinen Decretaten er fe(b(l 
erjdt)(t, nnb mit mand)en bofen J^iicfen an t)ie(en bent[d)en 
^aifern t)erfnd)t \)at. Sllfo jTnb wiv 2^entfd)en l)nbfd) bentfd) 
gefebret ; ba wiv t)ermeinet ^;^erren ^n n)erben, jTnb n)ir ber 
altertijligilen ;ii)rannen ^ned)te geworben, baben ben 9ia^ 
men, S^itef nnb SCappen be^ ^aifertl)nmg ; aber ben ^djai}, 

* E s i 8 t a 1 1 e s, etc. " It is all of God's ordination ; it (which) 
look place before we had any knowledge of it." 

*Zum ersten, etc. " First they have not done us a favor, 
but have therein abused our simplicity in order to strengthen ihem- 
selves (their arrogance) against the rightful Roman emperor at Con- 
Btantinople, from whom the pope took it (the empire) contrary to 
(the law of) God and to justice, when he had no power over it." 
D e 8 s genitive governed by G e w a 1 1. 

^Ihm zu un ter we rfe n,etc. 1 h m here,as above, for si ch. 
** To subject to himself our power, liberty, property, body and soul, 
and through us (if God had not prevented) all the world, as he him- 
self liJis clearly expressed it in his decretals, and has made the at- 
tempt with various wicked intrigues upon many German emperors. 
Thus we Germans are taught in fine German (i. e, as we Germans 
generally are, by being wheedled). While we expected to become 
masters, we have become the slaves of the most insidious of tyrants; 
we have the name," etc. 



ADDRESS TO THE GERMAN NOBILITY. 209 

&ett>alt, ^e(i)t mb ^rei{)eit beflelben fjat ber ^abjl ; fo 
frigt ber ^abft ben ^ern, fo fpielen n)ir mit ben lebigeit 
©cf)a(en. 

©0 belfe nn^ ®ott, ber fold) Dieid), (tt)ie gefagt) un^ 
burcf) fijlige Xt)xannm l)at jugemorfen, unb ju regteren U^ 
foMeu, ba^ n)ir aucf) bent Stamen, Zitd nnb SBappen gofge 
tl)un/ nnb nnfere gret^eit, erretten, bte Dtomer einntaf laf? 
fen fe^en, tt^a^ mv bnrcf) ffe tjon @ott empfangen l^aben. 
S){nl)men f[e f[d), ffe baben nn^ ein ^mfert^nm jngemenbet : 
moMan/ fo fet) e^ atfo, la^ ja fet)n, fo gebe ber ^abjl f)er 
g?om nnb Sttteg, n)a^ er l^at t)om ^atfertf)nm, lafie nnfer 
ganb frei t)on feinem nnertrdgtid)en ©cf)dgen nnb ©d)tnben, 
gebe mieber nnfere grei^eit, ®e)^ait^ ®nt^ (Sf)re, ?ei6 nnb 
©eefe, nnb faffe^ ein ^aifertljnm fei)n^ n)te etnem ^aifer^ 
tbnm gebnf)ret, anf ba^ feinen 2Sorten nnb aSorgeben ge^^ 
»ug gefd)ef)e. 

SBill er aber ba^ nicf)t t\:fm^ \r>a^ fptegeffxrfit^ er benn ntit 
feinen faffcf)en erbid)teten SBorten nnb ©efpiigniflen ? 3(1 
fein nid)t genng gevDefen/ bnrcf) fo Diet t)nnbert 3ct{)re, bte 
ebfe 3^ation fo groblidf) ntit ber JJafe nmjitfiibren, o^ne atteg 
Stufboren ? (S^ fotget nic{)t, baf ber ^abfl fottte itber ben 
^aifer fet)n, barnm, bag er it^n fronet ober mad)t £)enn 

^ * Folge thun, o"/??e effect to the name, title, and coat of arms. 

* W o h 1 a n, etc. " Very well ! so be it ; let it then take place ; 
let the pope surrender Rome and whatever of the empire he has," 
etc. 

^Und lasse, etc. "and let an empire exist, as becomes an 
empire, in order that his words and pretence be fulfilled." 

*Was spiegelficht, etc. " Why does he make a mock-fight 
with his false, hypocritical words and ghostly terrors .?" Spiegel- 
fichten, is not now used as a verb, but it occurs as an infinitive 
used substantively. On Gespttgnissen, see p. 96, Note 1. 

^Ist sein nicht genug gewesen.? " Has there not 
been enough of it ?" Sein is in the genitive for seiner, and 
governed by g e n u g. "In leading about (to lead about) for so many 
centuries, so savagely, the noble nation without intermission .^" 

18* 



210 SELECTIONS FROM LUTHER. 

"ber prophet ©t* ©amuef fafbte unb fronte ben ^onig ^anl 
tinb 1^at)ib, aii^ g6ttlicf)em SSefebf, xinb wax bod) ibncn un^ 
tertf)an* Unb ber ^>rop{)et 9?atban fatbete ben ^onig ©alc^ 
-mon, n>ar bavnm nic()t iiber it)n gefe^t. 3tem, ©t* Slifeu^ 
tie^ feiner Sinc&jte dinen^ faf ben ben ^ontg 3^bu t)on Sftael ; 
bennocf) bfieben jTe nnter il)m geborfam* Unb x\t nod) nie- 
gefd)eben in alter 2Be(t, ba^ ber iiber ben ^onig n)dre, ber 
H)n n)eibet ober fronet, benn affein bnrd) ben einigen ^ab(l- 
?tnn la^t er fid) felbft brei (5arbtnd(e fronen jnm ^ab(l^ 
bie nnter ibm finb, nnb ift bod) nid)t beflo n)entger iiber jie» 
SGBarnm foltte er benn^ tDiber fein eigene^ (Srempel nnb ah 
ler 2Be(t nnb ©d)rift Uebnng ber ?el)re fid) iiber n)e{t(id)er 
®ctvalt ober ^aifert{)nm erl)eben, attein banim, bag er il)n 
fronet ober n)eil)et ? d^ ifl genng, bag er iiber i\)n i(l in 
gott(id)en (Bad)cn, b* i» : in ^rebigen, 2el)ren, nnb ©acra^ 
ntent reid)en, in n)e[d)en and) ein jeber S5ifd)of nnb ^farr^ 
berr iiber 3ebermann ift ; g(eid)n)ie ©t. 5(mbrofind in bem 
©tnb(4 iiber ben ^aifer 2!t)eobofin^, nnb ber ^ropl)et 9ta^ 
tt)an iiber 2^ai)ib, nnb ©amnel iiber ©an(* Sarnm lagt^ 

* Liess seiner Knechte Einen, etc. " caused one of 
his servants to anoint," etc. Sie unter ihni, "they (tlie 
propliet and his servants) remained subject to him (Jehu)." 

^Und ist noch nie, etc. " And it never yet happened, in 
all the v^^orld, that he who consecrated or crowned a king, was supe- 
rior to him, except (d e n n after nie) through the pope alone" 
K i n i g e n for e i n z i g e n. See p. 93, Note 2. 

"* Warum sollte er denn, etc. " Why tlien should he, 
contrary to his own example and the practice of all the world and of 
the Scriptures, exempt himself (s i c h e r h e b e n) from the teach- 
ing [in the Scriptures] respecting the civil power (i. e. subjection to 
it) and the empire, merely because he crowns or anoints the empe- 
ror .•*" S i c h e r h e b e n governs the genitive, der Lehre. 
U e b e r is immediately connected with Lehre; sich inter- 
venes to avoid harslmess. 

* In d e m s t u li 1, in the episcopal chair, or pulpit, was superior 
to the emperor Theodosius (i. e. would not admit him to the commu- 
nion after a bloody act)," etc. 

^ D a r u m 1 a s s t, etc. " Therefore let the German emperor be 



ADDRESS TO THE GERMAN NOBILITY. 211 

ben beutfrfjen ^aifer recf)t unb frei Mai\ex fei)n, unb feme 
®ett)a(t, nod) ©cf)tt)ert, nicf)t ineberbriicfen, buret) fo(rf) bliit^ 
be^ aSorge6en pd6jlifrf)er §eucf)(er, a(^ follten fie au^gejo^ 
gen, u6er bag @d)VDert regieren in alien Dingen. 

Sag fet) bte^mat genug. Senn mag ber n)eft(irf)en ©e^* 
n)a(t unb bem Slbef ju tbun fei), f)abe tcf) nteineg ^Jiinfeng 
genugfam gefagt im Sucf){etn t)on ben guten 3Berfen. 2)enn 
fte feben and) unb regieren, ba^ eg mol)! beflfer taugte.i 
Sod) tjl fein @fetcf)en, tt>eftnrf)er unb gei|inc£)er 5!Ki^6raucf)e, 
tt)ie tcf) bafetbjl angejetgt {)a6e. 

3rf) acf)te auct) tvobi^^ ba^ tcf) ^oc^ gefungen ^a6e, t)tel 
Sing t)orgegeben, bag unmogficf) voivh angefe[)en, "oid 
©titcfe ju fcf)arf angegrifen. 2Bie fott id) iifm abev t\)nn ? 
3cf) bin eg fcf)ulbig gu fagen. ^onnte icf), fo tx)ottte id) and) 
atfo tf)un. @g ijl mir (ieber, bie 5B}ett jitrnet mit mir, benn 
@ott ; man mirb tnir je nid)t met)r benn bag ?eben fonnen 
ne^men* 3cf) ^abe bigger Diefmaf griebe angeboten nteinen 
2Biberfacf)ern ; abev^ aU tcf) fel)e, @ott ijat mid) burcf) ffe 
gejmungen, ia^ ^lanl immer n)eiter auftutl^un, unb ibnen, 

a true and free emperor, and let neither his power nor his sword be 
trampled down through such blind pretences of the papal hypocrites, 
as if they should be made an exception (ausgezogen with 
warden understood) and should in all things rule over the sword, 
or civil power." NiederdrOcken has, perhaps, an accusative, 
J e m a n d, understood before it, " let no one put down his power," 
etc. Regieren is connected, by u n d understood, to a u s- 
gezogen werden. 

Dass es wohl besser taugte, etc. " that the state of 
things may be improved, (literally, that it might, perhaps, better be 
worth something). Still there is no comparison between (of) the civil 
and religious abuses." 

^Ich achte auch wohl, "1 am well aware that I have 
sung on a high key, and have brought forward many a thing which 
will be regarded as impossible (and 1 shall be considered as) having 
assailed many points too severely. But how ought I to act in re- 
gard to it .? I am bound to speak out. If it were in my power, it 
was my wish so to do (to represent the matter truly)." 



212 SELECTIONS FEOM LtTTHEE. 

tvdl [\c unmiifjTg jTnb, ju rebett, betteit, fcf)reieni unb fcf)rcien 
geniig gcben* Sffioblan, id) tt>ei^ nocf) ein ?iebtein Don 9iem 
unb t)on il)nen ; jurfet il)nen ba^ Dl)r, icf) tnilt e^ il)nen and) 
jTngeu, unb bie Jtoten auf ^ §6d)(le ftimmen. aSer(lel)efi 
bu mid) n)ol)f, (iebe^ 9tom, n)a^ id) mcine ? 

2(ud) babe idj mein ©d)reiben t)ielmar auf ^rfenntni^ 
unb aScrbor erboten, ba^ 2(Ue^ nid)t^ gel)oIfen»2 2Bictt)o^[ 
and) id) tDeig, fo meine (Ba(i)e red)t ifl, bag ffe anf Srbcn 
mng t)erbammt unb attain Don gl)rifto im §imme{ mng ge^ 
red)tfcrtiget n)erben. 2)enn bai^ ift bie ganje (2d)rift,3 ba^ 
ber St)rijlen unb (5l)ri(lenf)eit ^ad^e attein Don @ott mu^ 
gerid)tet tt)erben, ifl and) nod) nie eine Don 5!)?enfd)ett auf 
(grben gered)tfertigt, fonbern i|l attjeit ber SOBiberpart ju 
grog unb fltarf gen)efen* @^ ifl and) meine attergrogte 
gorge unb gnrd)t bag meine ^ad)c mod)te unDerbammt 
bleiben, baran idj gett)iglid) erfennet, bag ffe ®ott nod) nid)t 
gefatte. 2)arum lag nnr frifd) einberge[)en, ed fei) ^abfl, 
95ifii)c>fe, ^fa^f Wondj ober @elel)rter ; fie ffnb ba^ redjte 
SBoIf, bie ba fotten bie 2Ba[)rl)eit Derfofgeat, trie fie attejeit 
getl)an f)aben* ©ott gebe nn^ Sltten cinen d)rifKid)en 9Ser^ 
jlanb, unb fonberlid) bem d)ri(l(id)en Slbet beutfd)er -Jtation, 
einen red)ten gei(l(id)en SOJutl), ber armen ^ird)e ba6 SSejlc 
ju tbnn, SJmen.* 

3u SBittenberg im 3af)re 1520* 

* Zu reden, bellen schrei e^n u n d s c h r e i e n, are all 
dependent on genug geben, " compelled me to open my mouth 
wider and wider ; and, since they are restless, to give them enough 
to say, to bark and to cry and cry." 

2 Das A 11 e s (hat) n i c h t s g e h o 1 f e n. "I have oflen offer- 
ed my writings for examination and trial ; all that has done no good. 

^Denn das ist die ganze Sch rift, "for this is the 
(teaching of the) whole Bible, that the cause of Christians and of 
Christianity must be vindicated by God alone ; never was one 
(cause, etc ) justified by men, but the opposition iias always been the 
greater and stronger party." 

* Before taking leave of this piece, we must quote the following ob- 
servation from Marheineke : Wie diese Schrifl den Feinden Luthers 



ADDRESS IN BEHALF OF PUBLIC SCHOOLS. 213 



AN ADDKESS TO THE MAGISTRATES AND COMMON 

COUNCILS OF ALL THE CITIES OF GERMANY 

IN BEHALF OF PUBLIC SCHOOLS. 

©cbri ft an bteSiirgermet ft er unb diat\)^^ 

^errn alter ©tdbte 2)eutfct)fanb^, bafg 

fie cbrifttict)e @ct)ulen aufrict)ten 

unb 1} a 1 1 e n f o f f e n. Stnno 1525.* 



@rtabe unb ^riebe t)on ®ott unferm aSater unb §errn 

eine willkommene Ursach zu neuer Lasterung war, so gereichte sie 
viel frommen Gemaihern zu wahren Erbauung und Ergotzlichkeit. 
Sie war in jeder Rucksicht in Ton und Haltung, in Kraft und Le- 
bendigkeit eine wahrhafl teutsche Volksschrift zu nennen. Das rein- 
ste und edelste Interesse an dem Wohl des Volks und dem Heil 
der geraeinen Christenkeit sprach aus ihr und liess in gut gesinnten 
GemQthern keinen Misbrauch zu. Die scharfen, hellen, blahenden 
Farben des Styls gaben ihr einen hohen Reiz. Was Tausende langst 
dunkel gefahlt, oder sich zu sagen geftirchtet hatten, stand hier in 
kraftigen, grossen Zugen gezeichnet, vor den Augen der ganzen 
Welt. Auch war die Aufnahme derselben ihren gewichtvoUen In- 
halte angemessen ; Schon im September (it was written in June) 
waren viertausend Exemplare davon unter dem Volk verbreitet. — Ge- 
schichte der teutschen Reformation. I. 162. 

* This truly philanthropic and patriotic address is given entire, 
with the exception of a few short polemic passages. The ablest Ger- 
man writer on education, says : In Luthers Schriften findet sich 
sehr vieles iiber Erziehung in Predigten, Bibelerklarungen, Briefen, 
Tischreden ; einzelne StUcke handeln nur von diesem Thema. Bald 
wendet er sich an den Aeltern, bald an die Obrigkeit, bald an den 
Lehrstand und redet alien aufs Eindringlichste zu, sich doch die 
Kinder auzunehmen, indem er ihnen Segen und Fluch vorlegt, Se- 
gen der guten, Fluch der bosen Kinderzucht. Zugleich giebt er die 
treflichsten Lehren, wie es mit der Zucht zu halten sey, was und 
wie die Kinder lernen sollen, etc. — Wen soUte es nicht freuen, den 
grossen Mann auch als Reformator des deutschen Erziehungswesens 
kennen zu lernen ? Seine Ermahnungen gingen unzahligen Deut- 



214 SELECTIONS PROM LUTHER. 

Sefu (§t)riilo. giir<Tc{)tige,i n)eife, liebe ^erren, tt)ictt)ol)( 
id) nun^ mot)I brei 2ahre tjerbannet unb in bte 3ld}t getban, 
J)dtte foKen fcf)n)eigen, n)o ui) g)icnfct)cn^@e6ot nie[)r, benn 
@ott^ gefcf)euet l)dtte ; tt)ie benn and) t)ie( in bentfcf)en ?dn^ 
bern, bci\>e grog nnb ffein, mein 9?eben nnb Srf)reiben, au6 
berfctben ®ad)e nod) innner Derfolgen, nnb Did 95(nt barii^ 
bet ijergiegen ; aber mcil^ mir ®ott ben ^Dcnnb anfgetban 
Ijat^ nnb mid) beigen reben, bajn fo frdftiglicf) bei mix (le^^ 
l^et, nnb meine (£act)e, obne meinen Dtatt) nnb !t!t)at, fo ml 
fldrfer macf)t, nnb weitcx an^breitet, fo mel ffe mebr toben, 
nnb fid) g(eid) (lellet, al^ (acf)e nnb fpotte er ibre^ Itobcn^, 
n)ie ber 2, ^falm fagt. 2tn tt)e(d)em altein merfen mag, 
n)er nicf)t Derftodt ijl:, bag biefe (2ad)e mng ©otte^ eigen 
feprt. ©internal fief) bie 2(rt gottncf)e^ 2Sort^ nnb SSerf^ 
i)ier ereignet, tt)e(d)e^ attejeit benn am meiften jnnimmt, 
tt)enn man e^ anf ba^ S>od)fte t)erfofget nnb bdmpfen tt>itl : 
2)arnm2 tviil id) reben (wie @faia^ fagt) nnb nicf)t fd)tt)ei^ 

schen zu Herzen, weckten schlafende Gewissen und starken mode 
Hande ; seine Urtheile galten bei Farsten und Volkern wie Gottes 
Stimmen. — Karl von Raumer^ Geschichte der Padagogik. 1. 137, and 
189. 

* Farsichti^e, prudent^ for vorsichtige. See p. 6, Note 4. 

* Wiewohl ich nun — Aber weil — Darum. Several im- 
perfect sentences occur here, which must be joined into one period 
in order to make out the sense. " Although I, having been put under 
the ban and outlawed for three years, should be obliged to keep si- 
lence, had I respected the command of man more than that of God 
(as many, indeed, both great and small, in the German territories, 
from that cause, assail incessantly what 1 have said and written, and 
shed much blood on that account), yet since God has opened my 
mouth, and bidden me to speak, and moreover stands by me so firm- 
ly, and, without any counsel or effort of mine, strengthens and ex- 
tends my cause tlie more, the more they rage, and acts as if he held 
tlieir rage in derision and contempt, as the second Psalm, v. 4, says. 
(By which alone, one may |)erceive if he is not rendered obdurate, 
that this cause must be God's own. For here the peculiar manner 
of God's word and work appears, which always spreads most when 



ADDRESS IN BEHALF OF PUBLIC SCHOOLS. 215 

geit, Weill id) (ebe, 6i^ ba^ St)ri)lti ®erecf)ttgfett au^6re(f)e, 
me eirt ©(anj,. unb feine Ijettodrtige^ ©nabe n)ie eine 
?ampe ange^itnbet vt)erbe* Unb bitte end) tiim atte, meme 
lieben Joerrn unb ^reunbe, moKet^ biefe nteine ©cf)rift imb 
grmabnimg freunb(trf) anttel)men unb ju ^^erjen fajjen* 
2)enn id) fet) gleict)^ an mix felber tt)ie ict) fep, fo fann id) 

men most oppose it and seek to check it) ; therefore will I speak," 

etc. Hsittesollen. See p. 148, Note 3. — V i el as a neuter is 

more terse than viele would be. Aus derselben Sache, i.e. 

Ursache. — Dartiber refers to Re den and Schreiben. — 

Mir den Mund, " the mouth to me," is the proper German idiom, 

for "my mouth." See p. 18, Note 7. — Rath und That. See 

p. 44, Note 2. — Sich gleich stellen als, "to place or demean 

one's self as if "— An welch em. See p. 80, Note 3. — Eigen 

is used after a genitive just as it is after a possessive pronoun, se i n 

eigen, for example. See p. 119, Note 2. — Sich ereignet, oc- 

cursy\s somewhat harsh as applied to Wort. The idea is : "the 

I manner in which God ordinarily disseminates his word and carries 

' on his work is obvious or takes place here." — D e n n and w e n n, 

then and ivhen, are still used with reference to time, though d a n n 

and w a n n are more commonly so used. — Am meisten, most^ 

is here clearly distinguished from m e i s t e n s, mostly, for the most 

part. See p. 171, Note 3, end. 

, ^ Weil, while. This use of the word is obsolete. It now means, 

, because. Die well underwent a similar change of signification. 

' See p. 104, Note 1. 

^ Heilwartige, savings obsolete for heilbringend. 
^Und [ich] bitte — [dass Ihr] wollet. 
'*Ich sei gleich, etc. " be I, in myself, as I may," or " though 
(gleich) I be as I may, in myself." The proper and literal mean- 
ing of the word gleich is like, equal. It is, indeed, identical with 
' like, being compounded of 1 e i c h, and the prefix g e. When used 

I with another particle of comparison, it is commonly to be translated, 
,just, even. Then, as applied to time, it means equal in time, i. e. in- 
' stantly, immediately. See p. 21, Note 3. From this last signification 
, is derived that of yet, i.e. an immediate consequence, which is ex- 
|.! pressed by the word itself, and an adversative relation to what pre- 
cedes, which it borrows of course, from the connection. In such 

, cases, the word d o c h might be substituted for gleich, without 

I I affecting the sense. 



216 SELECTIONS FROM LUTHER. 

borf)^ 'OCX ®ott mit rcd)tem ®en?iffenriibnien, ba^ id) iaxw 
ncn nid)t ba^ 5)?eine2 fud)c, tDelche^ t)iel beffer mod)te mit 
©titlfitn^eigeu iiberfommen ;^ fonbern mcine eg t)on ^er^ 
jeu'* treii(icf) mit end) unb ganjem bcutfd)en ?anbe, bal)in 
mid) ©ott t)crerbnet t)at, eg gtaube^ ober glaube iud)t, mer 
ba n?i((» Unb tDill eiire ^iebe^ bag frei unb getrofl jugefagt 

^ So kann ich doch, etc. D o c h implies a concession to 
the prejudice of the reader. " For be 1, in myself, as I may (in the 
wrong on other subjects, if you choose), still I can," etc. 

2 Das Meine, my oicn, my oion interest. Com p. p. 70, Note 
8. When the possessive adjective pronouns are used substantively, 
which is indicated by their beginning with a capital, the word e i- 
gen cannot be added. Thus we could not say, mein Eigne s, 
my own, instead of d a s Meine. But when they are used adjec- 
tively or as predicates, e i g e n can be added to give them empha- 
ses ; as mein eigenes Haus; dass sie sein eigen 
seyn sollten, that they should be his oion. Even to a genitive, 
eigen may be added merely to give it emphasis, as Gottes 
eigen, God's own. See p. 119, Note 2, end. 

^ Ueberkommen as an active verb, in the sense of b e k o m- 
m e n though now obsolete, is frequently used by Luther. See Dan. 
4: 33. Rom 9: 31, and 2 Pet. 1: 1, in his version. In the sense of, 
to fall upon, to overtake, to befall, it is no longer in common use. As 
a neuter verb, it means, to cross or pass over, to arrive, to come to 
hand. It is employed provincially in Upper Germany in the sense of, 
to agree, to make a contract. It is now beginning to be used of that | 
which is handed down to us from antiquity, as writings, fragments, etc. 

'* (Ich) meine e s von li e r z e n. This profession of sin- 
cerity stands connected with the conviction that God had raised him 
up to be a benefactor to Germany — dahin mich Gott ver- 
ordnet liat. 

* Es glaube, etc. " believe (it) or not, whoever will." £ s is 
not in ilie accusative, governed by glaube, but an expletive, em- 
ployed merely because the nominative comes after its verb. See p. 
52, Note 1. Glaube is in the subjunctive. 

^Und (ich) will eure Lie be (i.e. e u c h) das, elc. 
" And 1 desire to have this freely and confidently said and declared 
to you (or 1 wish you distinctly to understand this, namely), that, if," 
etc. Eure Liebe, is a pulpit phrase, used in addressing an ail- 



ADDRESS IN BEHALF OF PUBLIC SCHOOLS. 217 

mi angefagt babeit, bag il)r, tDO it)r mtr f)icrin ge()orcf)et, 
obne 3n)ctfe( nirf)t mir, fenbern (5t)n)tc gel)ord)et ; imb n)er 
mir nid)t get)ord)et, nicf)t mid), fenbern gbrifltnm Derad)tet. 
®erol)at6eni bitte id) end) alte, meine tieben §errn nnb 
^^rennbe, nm ©otte^ nntten nnb ber armen Sngenb wiUen^ 
woUct^ biefe (Badjc nid)t fo geringe ttiad)en, n)ie SSiek thnn^ 
bie nid)t fel)en, xoa6 ber ®e[t giirjl gebenfet.^ r^cnn e^ 
ijl eine ernjle nnb groge ®ad)e, ba (5t)ri|lo nnb aller 2iBeft 
Diet anliegt, bag^ ^>i^ bem jnngen aSo(fe belfen nnb ratben. 

dience, " your love" instead of " my dear hearers," (meine G e 
1 i e b t e) the abstract for the concrete. If the punctuation of the 
text is correct, it is necessary to regard the words as the indirect ob- 
ject of the following participles, and as being, from negligence, put 
in the accusative instead of the dative, so that the sense would be 
given by substituting e u c h. — A n g e s a g t, annovnced to, is a 
more formal and elevated expression than zugesagt, said to. This 
difference of meaning arises from the different nature and use of the 
two prepositions, a n and z u. These participles are not connected 
with h a b e n as their auxiliary, but they are used adjectively with 
das, which is governed by h a b e n. Comp. p. 15, Note 6. 

* Derohalben, therefore, is an obsolete word, used only in for- 
mal or solemn style. It is derived from h a 1 b e n, on account of, and 
d e r o (an old genitive plural of d e r,) these things, Deswegen 
is now used in both numbers in place of it. Compare derhalben 
p. 8, Note 2, and p. 4, Note 2. 

2(Dass ihr) wollet. — Der Welt FUrst, "the prince 
of the world," or satan. In such constructions, the article (d e r) 
j always belongs to the first of the two substantives, and is consequent- 
ly in the genitive. See p. 17, Note 1. 
^ Gedenket. Gedenken was in the Middle Ages equiva- 
ij tent to d e n k e n, to think. But from the collective or frequenta- 
ll live force of the particle ge, it came to signify, to have in mind, to 
Ij keep in mind, to intend, as in this passage. Thence, the derivative 
i signification, to show by some act, whether kind or unkind, that one 
j kept in mind, or remembered something past, i. e. to requite a favor,, 
y or an injury. To these leading significations of the word it is easy to 
trade all those which are to be found in the lexicons. 

*Denn es ist — dass, etc. E s refers to the clause intro- 
j duced by d a s s. "It (namely, that we aid and counsel the young) 

19 



218 SELECTIONS FROM LUTHER. 

2)amit ifi: benn and) itn^ nub atten geboffen^ nnb gcrathen* 
Unb benfet, ba^ fefchen/^ piKen, l)cim(ict)cn tiicfifiteu 3Jn^ 
fecf)tungen be^ ^eufc((^ witt mit bem gro^cm^d)rijl(id[)en 
@rnft geiDebret fcpn.^ !SJiebe ^crrtt, mu^ man jdbrnd)^ fo 

is a serious and important matter in which (d a) Christ and all the 
world are deeply concerned." Comp. p. 103, Note I. 

^ Damit ist — ans — geholfen. The German abounds 
much more than the English in the impersonal use of passive verbs, 
as does also the Latin. 

* S o 1 c h e n, refers to a description in a passage, which is omit- 
ted here. 

3 Will — gewehret seyn, "it is necessary to ward off." 
It is impossible to represent the structure of this highly idiomatic sen- 
tence by anything corresponding to it in English. Will geweh- 
ret seyn is impersonal, and governs the dative A n f e c h t u n- 
g e n. — There are many idiomatic expressions formed, from the pe- 
culiar use of the word w o 1 1 e n. It expresses 1. a icish, as, Was 
willst du von mir.^ " What do you wish of me ?" or inclina- 
tion^ as, E r will n i c h t d a r a n, "he has no inclination to do 
it ;" E r w o 11 e o d e r w o 1 1 e n i c h t, nolens^ volcns ; E s will 
s i e N i e m a n d, " nobody will have her." 2. Intention^ as, W a s 
will er damit haben? " What is he afler .?" " What is he 
seeking for ?" Was w o 1 1 e n S i e damit s a g e n .^ " What 
do you mean by that ?" 3. Jissertion^ or affinnation ; as, E r will 
es selbst gehort haben. " He declares that he heard it 
himself," or beliefs as, D a s w o 1 1 e n j e n e gar n i c h t, " They 
will not admit that." 4. On the point of doing something; as, Er 
wollte eben weggehen, "He was just on the point of go- 
ing away." E r will s t e r b e n, " He is at the point of death." 
5. Demand^ requisition^ as, Der Krieg will viel Geld, 
" War requires much money." 6. Supposition, or concession for ar- 
gumcnVs sake ;as, Ich will mich einmal geirrt haben, 
" Suppose, then, that I am mistaken." 7. Contingency, or indiffer- 
ence ; as, D e m s e i, w i e i h m w o 1 1 e, "be that as it may" i 
(let it be in respect to that, as it will). 8. It is used plconasticaUy ; ' 
as, Das will viel sagen, " That is much, or is important." ; 
Hundert Thaler wollen wenig sagen, "A hundred i 
dollars are but little." 

* MusB man jahrlich, etc. " If we (one) must annually ox 
pend so much on rifles, roads, bridges, dams and many other similar 



I 



ADDRESS IN BEHALF OF PUBLIC SCHOOLS. 219 

mi wenben an S3itcf)fen, 2Bege, ©tege, Samme unb ber^ 
g[etd)en unjdbtige ©tiicfe mebr, bamit efne ©tabt jettlicfjen 
'^riebcn unb ®emac()i I)a6e ; n)arnm fottte man nid)t 'oicU 
mebr beef) auct)^ fo Did irenben an He biirfttge arme 3u^ 
genb, bag man einen gefrf)idten 5yfann cbcr jn^ei ju ©cf)ul^ 
mciitcrn hieite. 
X^cnn ®ott ber 2(ffmdcf)tige f)at fiirtDa^r un^ 2)entfcf)en3 

things, etc., why should we not, etc. ?" W e n d e n signifies to turn, 
in general ; k e li r e n, ^o turn, more commonly in the specific 
sense of turning about, or assuming the opposite direction ; d r e- 
h e n, to turn around a centre or axis. Sich an jemanden 
wend en means to apply to one, to come to him for something. 
DenRUcken wenden, ^o^o aicay from one, to turn from him 
and leave him. Geld auf etwas wenden, to expend money 
for a thing ; Geld an etwas wenden, to expend money on 
or for anything. Flinte is the ordinary word for gun, and 
B a c h s e, the name for a rifle. The former is so named from the 
flint used in striking fire ; the latter from the barrel of the gun, re- 
garded as a box. S t e g properly means any long and narrow piece 
of wood, which will explain several uses of the word in the mechani- 
cal arts. Next it signifies a plank or narrow bridge across a ditch, 
or river. It is sometimes used for S te i^*, a />«i^. Dergleichen, 
though used adverbially, is properly a genitive plural, governed by 
Stacke. 

^ G e m a c h, in the old German, means convenience, repose. Com- 
pare the adjective gemach, and the compound, Ungemach. 
It now signifies an apartment for repose, or convenience, and hence is 
used mostly of palaces, or poetically when applied to ordinary rooms 
or apartments. Luther here uses it in its ancient signification, re- 
pose, quiet. 

^Vielmehr doch auch. Such an exuberance of particles 
would hardly be admitted in English ; and yet they all have their 
force in German. Omitting them all, we should translate the pas- 
sage, " Why not apply as much ?" Auch, modifies the expression 
to even as much. Doch added, makes it, " Why not, however, ap- 
ply," etc. ; and v i e 1 m e h r, " Why not, however, rather apply 
even as much," etc. But this is tautological in English. 

^Uns Deutsche n. Deutsche n, coming after the pro- 
noun uns, is of the new, or third declension. In themselves con 



220 SELECTIONS FROM LUTHER. 

jel^t gnabignrf) bal)eim gcfucf)ct, unb eiu ved)M gclbencg 
3abri anfgcrid)tct,2 T)a3 l)abcn wit jel^t bie feinrten/ ge? 
(e()rte)len, jungen ©cfeKcu^ unb 5iJZdnner, mit ©pract)cn 
imb alter ^unfl gcjicret, tt)e[cf)e fo n)ot)I Jtugen frf)ajfen6 
fonntcn, n^o man ibr braitd)en tDcHte, ba^ junge -Soit ju 

sidered, these two words might be either in the dative or in the accu- 
sative. But h e i m s u c h en, and its equivalent daheim s u- 
c h e n, govern the accusative. This verb was formerly used in an 
indifferent sense, to visit either with good or with evil. Here it is 
used in the former sense. But, at the present day, it is used only in 
the latter sense, as, " to visit with a rod." . 

^ Goldenes Jahr, a golden year, is here used indefinitely of 
time. 

2 Aufgerichtet. Aufrichten signifies literally to raise, 
to erect, to build. See p. 5, Note 2, Applied to things of an imma- 
terial, or abstract nature, as a covenant, doctrine, etc., it means to 
establish, to bring into existence. See Ezek. 16: 60. Rom. 1: 5, and 
2 Cor. 5: 11), in Luther's version. Also, to raise up, to support, to 
comfort. 

3 D a is here an expletive. 

4 Die feinsten. See p. 24, Note 4. 

*Gesellen is derived from sal, a hall, or in the old Grer- 
man houses, " a large lower loom, where persons ate, played and 
lept together." G e s e 1 1, therefore, meant originally an inmate ; 
and afterwards, an associate. Hence, Schlafgesell, a bed-fel- 
low ; S p i e 1 g e s e 1 1, rt playmate ; Stubengesell, fl room' 
male ; J u n g g e s e 1 1, a bachelor, an unmarried man (originally, as 
in this passage, a young gentleman) \ Gesellschaft, society. 
In early times, the word G e s e 1 1 was used in an honorable sense ; 
but now it is more commonly used in a low sense ; as, D i e b b Re- 
sell, an associate icith thieves. In a restricted sense, it mean! a 
journeyman mechanic. G e fa h r t e, an associate, literally meant a 
traveling companion ; and in its wider signification, it means, an 
associate in any enterprise, G e n o s s, from Geniessen, to en* 
joy, means an associate in somt thing agrcrailc, though in many ap- 
plications of the word, tlie idea of enjoyment is nearly lost. 

^Nutzen scha ffe n does not mean to derive benefit to ones 
self, but to be useful to others. So w o h 1, so well, i. e. very loeil. 



ADDRESS IN BEHALF OP PUBLIC SCHOOLS. 221 

khrenJ Sjl^ nid)t Dor Stitgen^^ bag man jei^t einen Mna^ 
ben in brei ^ahven juricf)ten3 fann, bag er in fetnem fiinf? 
jebnten 3^1)1*^ ober acf)tjet)nten 3«t)te met)r fann/ bettn 
6i^()er alle bobe ©cf)u(cn5 unb ^(o(l:er gefonnt babeu ? 3a, 
iM^ bat man gefernet in ()oben ©d)n[en nnb ^lojlern U^^ 
bcr, benn nur^^ @fe(, ^foge nnb SSfocfe merben ? ^^voan^xQ^ 
Dierjig S^^bre l)at etner gefernet, nnb l)at nocf) weber fateim 
ifrf) nod) bentfd) gemngt 3cf) fcf)n)etge ba^ fd)anbttd)e faj? 
llerfid)e ?eben, barinnen bie eble^ Sngenb fo jdmmerlicf) t)cr^ 
borben i|l. 

^ Z u I e h r e n, is dependent on Nutzen scha ffe n, " which 
could be so useful in teaching (to teach) the young, if one would em- 
ploy them." 

*Vor Augen, like ante oculos^ in Latin, before one's eyes, ob- 
vious. Aus den A a ge n, out of sight. In die Augen, in 
one's sight or observation. But an den Augen, refers to 
something as observable in the eye itself physically. One may dis- 
cover another's emotion an den Augen, as the place where it 
is betrayed. This meaning grows out of the peculiar nature and use 
of the preposition, an. See p. 80, Note 3. 

•^ Zurichten. See p. 50, Note 2, near the end. This word, 
which generally signifies to prepare, is sometimes employed in the 
sense of instructing or qualifying a person for a certain place or ser- 
vice. Isa. 43: 21, and Eph. 4: 12, in Luther's version. It is often 
used in a bad sense, like the vulgar English phrase, " to fix one out," 
i.e. to beat him severely, or to injure his person or appearance in any 
way. 

* K a n n is frequently used, as it is here, in the sense of knowing. 
See the lexicons. 

* Hohe Schulen signifies universities, as distinguished from 
gymnasia and other schools. High School, in English, has a very 
different import. 

*Was — denn nur, what but. 

''Edle. Edel is generally, as here, used in a moral sense, 

noble, generous ; when applied to persons of rank, it includes both 

the higher and the lower nobility. A d e 1 i g, noble, designates the 

j lower nobility, or those lower than a Graf and higher than a 

I Ba rge r, 

19* 



222 SELECTIONS FROM LUTHER. 

Slber nun' un^ ®ott fo reirf)lid[) bcgnabct,^ nnb fe(d)er 
?ente bie ^JJenge^ gcgeten bat, tie ba^ jnnge 3Solt fein 
lebren nnb jteben mogen, tDabrtirf) fo ifl'^ ?totb, ba^ n)ir 
tie ©nabe ©otte^ mdjt in 2Sinb fd)fagen4 nnb (afien iJ)n 
nict)t nnifonfl anffopfcn. dv Rebct i)or bcr Xbiiv^ tDobI un^, 
fo^ n?ir ibm anftbnn ; er griipet nn^, feltg ber ibm anttDor^ 
tet» aScrfcben tt)ir e(^,6 j)^^ er Doriibcr getjet, tt)er mill il)n 
rDieberl)oten ? 

?ajTet nn^ nnfern tjorigen 3^nimer anfel)en nnb bie %m 
fterni^, barinncn xvir gen^efen jTnb. 3d) a(i)tc, ba^ I'eutfd)^ 
tanb nerf) nie fo Did Don ®otte^ 2Bort geboret l)abe^ al^ 
jel^t, man fpiiret je nirf)t^ in ber ^ijtorie baDon. ?affcu 
wir e^''' benn fo t)ingef)en obne X^ant nnb (Jbre, fo i(l^ ju 
beforgen,^ voir merben nod) grantirf)cr ginflerni^ nnb ^tage 

1 Nun. See p. 12, Note 4. 

'^Begnadet. Begnadenisan obsolete word, for which 
begnadigen is now in common use. It means to shoic favor to. 
It is an active verb, as nearly all which have the prefix be, are, 
•and, of course, u n s is in the accusative. This prefix not only con- 
verts neuter verbs into active verbs, but is used in forming verbs 
"from substantives and adjectives, as in English. 

3 Sole her Leutedie Menge, a/i abundance of such peo- 
ple. Observe the peculiar use of the word M e n ge with the defi- 
nite article. Z i e h e n is frequently used by Luther where e r z i e- 
h e n, to educate, would now be employed. 

4 I n W i n d s c h 1 a g e n. See p. 202, Note 2. 

* W o h 1 u n s, so, etc. " happy are we, if we open to him." 
S e 1 i g d e r, " happy is he who." 

® Versehen wir es, etc. " If we disregard it, so that he pass 
by, who will recall him (bring him back).''" V e r s e h e n, to 5«'« 
icrong, means also, to overlook, to neglect ; and hence, as a substan- 
tive, it means an oversight, an error. 

' Lassen wir es, not here in the sense of 1 a s s e t u n s, .i3 
it is sometimes, but of wenn wir lassen. 

8 So ist es zu besorgen, then it is to be feared. In such 
expressions, where the passive form of the verb is more commonly re- I 
quired in English, the active form is employed in German. ThiiJ<, 
Er istnirgcnds zu finden, "heis nowhere to be found ;' 



ADDRESS IN BEHALF OF PUBLIC SCHOOLS. 223 

kibciu ?ie6en Seutfdjen/ faufet wcii ber yjlaxtt Dor bev 
Xylite ifl, fammlet ein, wcii c6 fd)emet unb gut ^Setter ijl, 
6rauc{)et ©ottci^ ®nabe unb 2Bort, n>eit eg ba i^fi Senn 
ba^^ fottt ihr tt>iffeu, ©ottci^ 2Bort unb ®nabe ijl^ eiu fat)^ 
renber ^^fagrcgcu, ber nid)t n)ieber fommt, tDo er etnmal 
gewefen x]t. dv ift bci ben Suben gen)efen, aber Ijin ift ^in/ 
jTe baben nun nirf)tg. ^aufn^ 6ract)te if)n in ®riecf)enfanb, 
bin i)l and) \)in ; nun t)aben jTe^ ben ^^iirfen* 9iom unb 
?ateinifrf)[anb Ijat il)n and) gebabt, bin i]l l)in ; ffe^ ifaien 
nun ben ^ab(l. Unb i^r X>cnt\ifjexf biirft nid)t benfen, 

er ist zu loben, " he is to be praised." It is probably out of 
this use of the infinitive that the present participle, as a future pas- 
sive, sprung; as der zu lobende Schuler, "the praise- 
worthy scholar," the scholar that is to be commended; die zu 
f a r c h t e n d e G e f a h r, " the danger that is to be feared." E s, 
in this passage, refers to the clause immediately following. For the 
omission of the conjunction d a s s, and the corresponding change of 
the construction, see p. 11, Note 4. 

^Lieben Deutsche n. Present usage would require lie- 
be Deutschen, in the vocative plural. The addition of the w, 
is a Thuringian peculiarity. See p. 169, Note 3. 

2 Weil es da ist, " while it is here at hand." D a, has a 
signification intermediate between h i e r and d o r t ; that is, it 
points out a place not so near as h i e r, nor so remote as d o r t. 
Therefore, it may stand for either of those. 

^ D a s, this, refers to the following clause. As d a s s is omit- 
ted in this clause, the latter is not inverted. Comp. p. 11, Note 4. 

"* I s t with two nominatives. See p. 93, Note 4, and p. 112, 
Note 5. Fahrender Platzregen, a moving shotoer. P 1 a t z- 
r e g e n, a heavy local shoicer, in opposition to Landregen, a 
wide-spread rain. 

* H i n ist h i n, literally, gone is gone., or lost is lost, i. e. what 
is lost is lost, or he is gone. 

^ S i e refers to the inhabitants of Griechenland and 
Lateinischland. This latter word is antiquated, for which 
I tali en is now used. 

"^ Ihr Deutschen, ye Germans. The old or full form of de- 
clension is necessary to the adjective, whenever no declinable article, 
adjective, or pronoun precedes it, or when these are themselves im- 



224 SELECTIONS FROM LUTHER. 

bag i^r ihn ewig baben tDcrbct, bcnn bcr Unbanf unb 33c? 
rad)tung wixi ihn nid)t (affcn bkiben.^ 2)arum greifet ju^ 
unb haltet ju, wer greifen unb haltcn fann, fautc j^dnbe 

@ottc^ ®ebot treibet bard) 5Kefec^ fo oft unb forbert, bie 
(iitcvn foKen bic ^inber lebrcn, bag^ and) ber 78» ^^fata 
fpricbt : „2Bie bat er fo bod)^ unfcrn SSdtcrn geboten, ben 
^inbcrn funb ju tbun, unb ju lebrcn ^inbe^ ^inb/' Unb 
ba^ n^eifet and) an^^ ba^ t)ierte ®ebot ©otte^, ba er ber 
aitcxn ©eborfam ben ^inbern fo \)od) gebeut/ bag man 
and) invd)& ®cxid)t tobten foil ungeborfame ^inber* Unb 
tt)arum leben tvix 2l(ten anbcr^, benn ba^ wix be^ jungen 
aSoIf^ tt)arten,'^ tebren unb anfjteben ? (5(^ ift nid)t moglict), 
bag ffcf) bag toKe aSoff^ foKte fefbfl febren unb marten ; bar^ 

perfect in their declension. In all other cases, the new or imperfect 
form of declension may be used. Here Deutschen is preceded 
by the personal pronoun I h r, which clearly indicates the case, and 
hence the form Deutsche is not needed. See Gram. p. 118, 3. 

* Nicht lassen bleiben, "will not let it remain," will 
drive it away. In such expressions, lassen ordinarily stands at 
the end of the sentence. 

*Darum greifet zu, etc. " Therefore seize and hold, who- 
ever can." W e r, on account of its indefinite sense, ichoever^ is re- 
ferred to in the preceding imperatives, as though it were a plural. 
The reader will not fail to perceive the stirring eloquence of this 
passage. 

3 So oft — dass, so often that. 

* H o c h, above ickat is ordinary^ in a high degree, or earnestly. 
The word, in this sense, is now but little used. So h o c h, is not 
here a direct comparison, but indirect — so earnestly (i. e. as he does). 
This idiom is common to the German and the English. 

* Weiset — aus, a compound verb, ausweisen, to shoto^ to 
prove. " And the fourth commandment of God shows this, where," 
etc. 

^ G e b e u t, obsolete for g e b i e t e t. See Gram. p. 203 supra. 
' W a r t e n. See p. 30, Note 2. From the primary signification, 
to watch ^ is derived that of attending to, taking care of. 

'Das tolle Volk, thai \s, the giddy youth. War ten does 



ADDRESS IN BEHALF OF PUBLIC SCHOOLS. 225 

urn i)at jTe nn^ (3ott befo()fcn,^ tie mv ait imb evfaijvcn 
jTnb, tt>a^ ilnten QUt ifl^ unb n)irb gar fd)tt>ere 5ied)nimg t)on 
un^ fiir biefelteu forbern. I^arutn aucf) SKofe^ befie^ft 
Sent. 32, unb fpricf)t : „5rage beincn 35ater, ber n^irb bit 
e^ fagen, bie 3((ten tDerben bir e^ jeigen/' 

2Biett?cl)( e^ ©iinbe unb (2d)anbe ifl:, bag babin^ mit itn^ 
fommen tjl, bag n)ir allereril^ retjen unb un^ reigen taflen 

not, like 1 e h r e n, govern s i c h, but it stands without its object, 
seiner or sein being understood. 

* Sie uns — befohlen, etc. " has commended them to us, who 
are old and experienced as to what (or, who know what) is good for 
them." Die w i r, who. See Gram. p. 157. 

*Dass dahin, etc. " that it has come to this with us, that we 
must now arouse (ourselves) and be aroused, to educate our children 
and youth, and to consider their interests ; whereas, nature itself 
should move us to this, and the example of the heathen variously in- 
struct us." Kommen for gekommen. 

3 Allererst, (first of all) not till now. See p. 16, Note 2. 
Erst stands connected with the old English erst, as e h e r does 
with ere. But the manner in which the words erst and aller- 
erst are sometimes used is very peculiar. "Erst, schon and 
n o c h, when they quahfy the predicate itself, are all adverbs of 
time. Erst then indicates the priority of one act to another ; as, 
man soil erst denken, dann sprechen, " one should 
first think, then speak." Schon means already. N o c h means 
still. But when these words do not qualify the predicate itself, but 
relate to some other word, erst expresses limitation, and is synony- 
, mous with nicht frtlher ornichtmehr; as, Eristerst 
, ge stern angekommen, "he did not arrive till yesterday;" 
Er ist erst zehn Jahr alt, " he is but ten years old." But 
I s c h o n, in such a use of it, means not later than, not less than ; while 
' n o c h, if it relates to time, limits the duration of an occurrence ; as, 
' Er wild noch heute kommen, "he will yet come to- 
day (not later)." Ich habe ihn noch gestern gesehen, 
j "I saw him as late as yesterday." Where noch refers to quan- 
tity, it conveys the idea of a climax, like the English word stilL — 
Heyse's Schulgrammatik, p. 292. We add a few more examples of the 
] use of e r s t, as it is difficult to explain it sufficiently by rules. 
* Jetzt allererst bin ich gekommen, " i have but just 



226 SELECTIONS FROM LUTHER. ' 

I 

folteii, unfere Winter inib jmtge^ 25o(f ju Jtef)ett, unb ibr 
S5e(le^ bebenfen, fo bod) ba^clbe nn^ hie yiatnv fclbjl foHte 
trei6eit, unb and) bcr ^eibeu (grempet un^ mannigfdl^ 
tig tt)eifen» d^ ifl fein imtjcrnimftig $tt)ier, ba^ feiner 
3ungen nicf)t tvavtct unb (el)rct, n>a(^ tl)nen ge6ul)ret;^ j 
ot)ne ber ©traiig,^ t)at)on @ott fagt §tob 39* : „X^a^ er ! 
gegen feme 3ungeu fo Ijart i|l, aU rcavcn fte ntd)t fein, 
unb Id^t fetne (Sier anf ber @rbe fiegen/'^ Unb n)a^ ^ilft 

now come." Jetzt erst, "not till now." Er hat erst an- 
ge fan gen, "he has just begun (not before)." Erst jetzt , 
merke i c h's, " I just begin to perceive it." Erst abers [ 
J a h r, " not till next year." Er ist erst aufder Hinrei- ' 
s e, "he has just started on a journey." In the passage before us, 
allererst conveys the idea that there has been negligence, — 
" that we must now (in regard to that which ought to have been done 
long ago), after all that God and nature have taught, need, or begin, j 
to arouse ourselves and to be aroused." Ziehen, in the sense of ' 
e r zi e h e n. 

* Gebuhret, belongs to them, in the sense of, " it is due to or 
from them." G e h o r e n, to belong, as a part does to the whole. 
Hence, " to be essentially, properly, or justly connected with." Z u- 
s t e h e n, to belong to, i.e. to be the proper part of, to be fitting to a 
voluntary agent. Dem Alter gebohret Ehrerbeitung 
und es steht der Jugend zu diese jenem zu wei- 
se n. 

2 Ohne der Strauss, da Gott von, " Except the ostrich, of 
which," etc. Ohne, see p. 147, Note 1. — Da — von, see p. 130, 
Note 3. j 

^Als waren sie nicht sein, und lasst seine Eier lie- 
gen. According to present usage, when the possessive adjective 
pronouns are used as a jyrcdicate, and the subject to which they be- 
long, is a substantive or a distinct and definite personal pronoun, thoy 
are not declined. See sein in the sentence above. But if they are 
not in direct agreement with the subject, but merely refer to it in an 
in<ic/in//c way, especially by the use of the indefinite pronoun es, 
they are then declined; as, Wera gehoret der Hut — die 
Feder — das Buch.^ Er — sie — es ist niein. Herees is a 
neuter pronoun referring to a neuter substantive. But let e s be used 
indefinitely referring to any one of the three genders, and then the 



ADDRESS IN BEHALF OP PUBLIC SCHOOLS. 227 

e^,^ ba^ mv fottfl^ atte^ i^attcn unb t^dten, imb waxen gfeicf) 
citel £^ctfigen, fo mv ba^ untermeg^ t^ff^tt, barum n)ir af^? 
lermeiil feben, ttdmlicf) : beg jungen SSoIfg pflegen. 3cf) 
l)a[te aurf), ba^ xxntex ben du^erltcf)en ©itnben bte 2Be(t t)or 
©ott Don feiner^ fo ^ocf) befrf)n)eret ifl, nnb fo grdnltd£)e 
©trafe Derbienet, aB eben Don btefer, bie n)ir an ben ^inb^ 
em tbnn, ba^ n)ir fte ntd)t jiel^en. 

D n)el)e ber 2BeIt immer nnb en)igltcf). 2)a tDerben td=? 
glid) ^inber geboren nnb n)acf)fen bci nn^ baher/ nnb tjl: 

answer will be; es ist meiner — meine — meines. But the 
forms der meine, der meinige, etc. with the definite article, 
never agree with a substantive expressed or understood, but merely 
refer to one going before ; or they are used as substantives and are 
written with a capital ; es dein Bruder istmitdemmei- 
nigen ausgegangen; or Du hast das Deinige get h an, 
"you have done your part;" die Meinigen lassen sich 
Ihnen und den Ihrigen empfehlen, "my family (pa- 
rents, children, relations) send their respects to you and yours." 

^Und was hilft es, etc. " And of what avail will it be, 
that we should have and do everything else, and be like pure saints, 
if we neglect that for which we chiefly live, namely, to take charge 
of the young .?" Etwas unterwegen 1 as s e n, is the same 
asunterlassen, but is now a provincialism. Was h i 1 f t's .'* 
is equivalent to, " What good will it do ?" 

* S o n s t and a n d e r s are both rendered by the word otherwise ; 
but they are very different words. — A n d e r s means, in another 
manner. S o n s t means, aside from this, and hence, in other re- 
I BpectSj or at another time. 

^Von keiner (Sande). H o ch, highly, in a great degree. 
See p. 224, Note 4. " T consider, that among outward offences, the 
j world is, in God's view, so heavily laden with none, and, for none 
\ deserves so severe punishment, as for this which we commit against 
I children in that we do not educate them." How strong the author's 
j convictions, and how just his views of the necessity of popular edu- 
j cation ! 

I *Wachsen — daher, grow up. D a h e r, hence, in compo- 
! sition with verbs has the accent on the second syllable (h e r) and 
I conveys the idea of approach, — hither, or motion from another place 
' and towards us. Sometimes the idea of approach is nearly lost, and 



228 SELECTIONS FROM LUTHER. 

letber 9ticmanb, ber ffcf) be^ armen jungen 3So(f^ antiefimc 
unb regiere, ha (dffet man c^i gel)en, wie eg get)et. 

3a fprid)jl bu, fo(cf)eg aKeg^ fp tj^n dltcvn gefagt, wa^J 
ge{)et bag bie 9tatbgl)ernt unb Dbrigfeit an ; t(l rcd)t gere^j 
bet,3 ja, VDie n)enn bie (Sftern aber fe[cf)eg nicftt tbnn ? 5Ger 
folt eg benn tt)un ? ©olt eg barum nacf) bleiben/ unb bie 

atong, without particular reference to the direction, expresses nearly 
the force of the word, when applied in its literal sense to raotion, 
and up or off, when used figuratively ; as daherfahren, to drive 
along ; daherprangen, to show off. 

^ E s is not here a personal pronoun referring definitely to V o 1 k, 
but it is used indefinitely and impersonally ) — " and things are suffer- 
ed to go as they do." See p, 164, Note 1. j 

2 Solches alles, etc. " all that is said to parents ; what does 
that concern the members of the council, and the magistrates?' 
Rathsherr, in the time of Luther, meant, a senator, or a mewJber i 
of the city council. This council was originally a kind of senate, con- 
sisting ordinarily of about twenty or thirty persons, chosen from the 
higher or noble families. Not far from Luther's time, the wealthy i 
classes of burghers had been admitted, and thus this senate sunk to the I 
character of a common city council. The Borgermeister some- \ 
times one, and sometimes two in a city, was the head of this council, | 
and chief magistrate, to whom the abstract term, Obrigkeit is 
often applied. Below this smaller council stood a larger council or 
popular assembly, whose concurrence was necessary on certain sub- 
jects of common interest. 

3 1st recht geredet, etc. " That is all true (that is rightly 
said, namely, that parents are under obligation to educate their chil- 
dren) ; but how, if parents do not attend to it ^ Who shall do it ! 
then .^" J a, can be omitted in the translation, when there is an ad- ] 
versative particle, like a b e r or a 1 1 e i n, in the sentence. If there 1 
be no Jidvorsative particle, in such interrogative clauses after a con- ^ 
cessive clause, j a itself must be regarded as an adversative, and j 
translated by but. Literally, j a corresponds nearly to the word . 
TTc//, used concessively, as " Well, but how if parents do not attend ' 
to it." But it is redundant in English. i 

* Nach bleiben, to remain unnoticed, to be passed by. But it ^ 
is used in familiar phrase, and the corresponding English expression • 
would be, '' Shall we therefore let it alone ?" So the words, so ; 



ADDRESS IN BEHALF OF PUBLIC SCHOOLS. 229 

^tnber t^erfaumet n>erben ? 2Bo \r>iU ^id) ia bte Dbrtgfeit 
mi ?ftath entfd)ufbtgen/ ba^ it)nen fotcf)e^ nicl)t foKte ge^ 
bitt)ren ? 2)a^ e^ t)on ben @ftern ntd)t gefd)tet)t, t)at man^ 
d)crfei Urfacf)e : 

3(itf ^ (Srflte, finb aucf) etttdf)e nicf)t fo frcmm unb rebltcf),^ 
bag iTe e^ tf)aten,3 ob jTe e^ g(etrf) fonnten, fonbern, x^ie bte 
©traugen barten jTe fid) aucf) gegen it)re Sungeit, unb la^cn 
c^ babei bfetbeu,^ t)^^ ^e bte (5ier Don jTrf) gen)orfen unb 
^inber gejeuget baben, ntcf)t ntebr tbun fie baju. 5ytun biefe 
^inber^ foffen bennod) unter nn^ unb bei un^ leben in ge^ 
meiner ©tabt 2Bie mil benn nun aSernunft unb fonber^ 
(id) d)rijl(id)e ikbe ba^ leiben, bag fie ungejogen^ aufn>ad)f=? 
en, unb ben anbern ^inbern @ift nnb ®efd)meige7 \e^n^ 

mag's nachbleiben, "well, then, let it alone." V e r s a u- 
met, see p. 174, Note 1. 

^ Wo will sich da — entschuldigen, etc. "How will 
the magistrates and council excuse themselves [and make it appear] 
that such a duty does not belong to them ?'^ Wo for w i e is now 
provincial. On will in the singular, see p. 93, Note 4. After 
entschuldigen, there is no ellipsis in German. But the word 
excuse^ in English, cannot be immediately followed by such a phrase 
as, " that it should not." 

2 F r o m m u n d r e d 1 i c h. See p. 49, Note 2, and p. 22, Note 5. 
— Sonde rn, p. 2, Note 7. 

^ D a s s s i e e s t h Si t e n^ as to do it, that they should do it. 
1 * D a b e i b 1 e i b e n, " stop, or break off with this, viz. that," etc. 
ij Dam i t could not be used for d a b e i, in such connections. M i t 
d i e 3 e m would be an equally gross Anglicism. 

^Nundiese Kinder, etc. " Now these children must never- 
jtheless live in the same town among us and with us. How then can 
:^ reason and, most of all. Christian charity suffer (this) that," etc. A 
free translation in order to give the sense more fully. 

• Ungezogen means, ill-bred ; unerzogen, uneducated, and 
sometimes, not yet grown up, not an adult. 

' 'Geschmeisse, the eggs of vermin. In its widest sense, it 
limeans whatever is cast forth from the body. Hence it means either 
miik^ or the eggs or brood of winged-insects. It therefore often stands 
ifor vermin, for which, however, the more modern word U n g e z i e- 
20 



230 SELECTIONS FROM LUTHER. 

bamit jufel^t etite ganje Stabt t^erberbet, vt)ie ed bcnn ju 
©obom inib ©cmcrra unb ®aba, unb ct(icf)cn meljr Stab^ 
ten ergancjen i]t. 

Sliif ^ 9inbcre/ fo i|l ber grogte 5^aufen ber @ftern leiber ! 
ungefcf)icft baju,^ unb nid)t n)ij|*en, ruie man ^inber jiel)en 
nnb lebrcn felt. Senn jTe felbfi^ nicl)t^ gefernet baben, 
obne ben 95ancf) Derforgen ; nnb gebiJren fenberlicl)e ?eute 
ba^n, bie ^inber n)obI nnb recbt fe[)ren nnb jieben foUcn* 

2(np^ S^ritte, cbgleirf) bie @(tern gefcbicft n?dren,nnb molt 
ten eg gerne fe(b(l: tbnn, fo baben fe t)or^ anberen ©cfcbdfte 
nnb .?;^angl)altnng n)eber 3t*it nod) 9?anm bajn, alfo bag bie 
?iot^ Stt)inget, gemeine 3uct)tmei(T:er fiir bie ,fi:inber jn bat^ 
ten* a^ vooUtc benn cin ^cQlidtjCx fiir jTd) felbfi einen ®g^ 
enen l)a[ten. Slber bag n^iirbe bem gemeinen ^Utann ju 
frf)tt)er, nnb mitrbe abermaP mand)er feiner ^nabe nm 9lr^ 
mntbg n:)itten t^erfdnmet- Sajn flerben fo t)iele ©(rent, 
nnb la^cn 5Baifen f)inter ftd), nnb tme biefelben bnrd) Se^ 
miinbe Derforget tt>erben, ob nng bie S'rfat)rnng^ jn rvcnifi 

f e r is more coinmonlj^ employed. The latter is less expressive of 
loathsomeness than the former when both relate to vermin. Luther 
compares uneducated children to a nest of young vermin. 

^ A u f's a n d e r e. " Jn the second place." See p. 2, Note 6. 

^Ungeschickt dazu, "unqualified for it." See p. 14o, 
Note 2. — N icht wissen, would by present usage be required to 
stand thus ; wissen nicht. 

3 Denn sic selbst, etc, " For they themselves have learn- 
ed nothing except to provide for their stomachs ; and a distinct class 
of persons are required for this purpose, who shall," etc. 

* Vor. On account of. This preposition often denotes a cause act- 
ing upon the subject or agent and obstructing his activity. See Gram, 
p. 356. " Still, on account of business and household affairs they 
have neither time nor space for it, so that necessity requires," etc. — 
Kb wollte denn, unless each one would. 

* A be r m al, again, on the other hand. See p. 35, Note 6. 

* Ob uns die Erfahrung, etc. "even if experience did not 
sufliciently teach us (were not enough), this (circumstance, viz.) tiiat 
God calls himself the father of the orphans, as of those who are neg- 
lected by every body else, should teach us." 






ADDRESS IN BEHALF OF PUBLIC SCHOOLS. 231 

ware, foKte un^ ia^ tt)of)t seigett, bag jTcf) ®ott felbfl bet 
SBaifeu aSater nennet, aU berer, bte i)on 3^t)ermann fotijl 
t)erfaflen jTnb. 2(itrf) finb et(id)e, bte fetne ^inber l)aben, 
bie net)men firf) and) barimt tiid)t^ an^^ 

Sarum tt)ilf e^ bier bem 9?atb itnb ber Dbrigfeit gebii^^ 
ren/2 bte aftergrogejle ©orge ititb g(etg aitf ia^ junge 2SoIf 
ju baben. J^enn n)eif ber ganjeit ©tabt ®nt; @b^e, ?etb 
uub ?eben tbneu ju treuer §anb befobfen i%^ fo tl)dten fie 
ntcf)t retcf)(trf)4 t)or @ott itnb ber SGBelt, mo fie ber ©tabt 
©ebetben uttb Sefierung ntd)t furf)teu mtt attem SSermogen 
!Iag Itnb 9tad)t* 3^un (iegt etner ©tabt ©ebetben tttd)t aU 
kin barin, ba^ man grofje ®rf)dl3e fanimte, fejle 5iKaitern, 
frf)one Ijaitfer, t)ie(e ^itrf)fett ttnb §arntfrf)jeitge ;5 ja, n)o 
beg me{6 ijl, unb toKe ?tarren baruber fommett/ t(l fo me( 

^ Nehmen sich — an. See p. 55, Note 2. 

2 Gebahren. See p. 226, Note 1. 

^ Ihnen zu treuer Hand befohlen ist, " is committed to 
their trust." This is an idiomatic expression. The pronoun in the 
dative expresses the persons to whom, and z u the object for which, 
it was committed. S t a d t is governed by the following substantives, 
all which, being regarded as constituting a whole, are construed with 
a verb in the singular number. 

^ So thaten sie nicht reichlich, etc. "they would not 
do enough (richly, sufficiently), i. e. they would be held recreant be- 
fore God and the world, if they should not seek," etc. 

^ Harnisch (harness), " what is worn upon the body for pro- 
tecting it in battle." It includes everything below the helmet. 
Panzer, a coat of mailj \s a part of a Harnisch, covering the 
body, but not the limbs. K urass, for which Luther and the older 
writers often use Krebs, is a breast-plate. Harnischzeuge, 
means the various coverings worn as armor. 

® Dess viel, much of this. 

'DarOber kommen, come vpon them., come in possession of 
them. Daraber itself me3.ns, a bout ^ concerning or for that; upon 
or during that ; over and above that ; and across ; and generally mod- 
ifies the verb to which it is prefixed by adding to it one or more ot 
these significations. Examples; daraber arbeiten, 1. to labor 
beyond (what is required). 2. to labor on a thing ; daraber bauen, 



232 SELECTIONS FROM LUTHER. 

beflo cirgev intb bc(lo grogcrer Srf)abe berfetben (£tabt, 
fonbcru ba^ i)l eiuer Stabt belted iiub aUerreid)(le^ ®ebci^ 
l)en, 5;^ci( unb ,f raft, ba^ jTe fo Dic[i feiner, ge(et)rter, t)er^ 
ni'mftiger, et)r6arcr, moblgegogener S3nrger bat, bie fonnen 
barnacf) wiM ©rf)d6e, unb al(e^ @ut fammeln, baften unb 
recbt bxand)cn. 

2Bei( beun eine (gtabt fell unb mu^ geute^ baben, unb 
allcntbalbcn ber grogte @cbrecf)e, ?Otangel unb ^lage ijt, 
ba^ e^ an ?euten fel)le, fo mug man nid)t barren, bi^ jic 

to build (active) upo?i a thing, or (neuter) during a time; darQber 
b i e t e n, to overbid, outbid ; daraber bringen, 1. to bring over 
or across. 2. to bring more (than is necessary); darUber gehen, 
1. to pass or go over or across. 2. to go about a icork. 3. to excel or 
surpass; darUber halten, \.to hold one thing orer another. 2. 
to estimate highly. 3. to hold on to, to observe (a usage), to preserve^ to 
cherish; dardber hergehen, 1. to go at or about a icork. 2. to 
blame, to assail ; darUber hinge hen, to pass ocer (ordinarily 
in silence) ; darUber h i n rn a c h e n, to run over a icork hastily and 
lightly ; d a r U b e r h i n s e h e n, \. to look beyond a thing. 2. to over- 
look or neglect ; darUber machen, to do over and above ; darU- 
ber sich machen, like darUber gehen, or hergehen, to 
apply ones self to, to begin a work ; darUber schreiben, \. to 
superscribe. 2. to write about, or treat upon ; darUber s c h w i ra- 
m e n, i. to sioim at the top. 2. to swim across ; darUber setzen, 
1. to set or place one upon a thing or over a business. 2. to carry one 
across a place. 3. to prefer one to another ; darUber s e y n, \. to ex- 
cel. 2. to be busied loith ; darUber w e g s e y n, I. to be, or to have 
gone through a business or trouble. 2 not to need a thing, not to be 
troubled about it ; darUber k o m m c n, 1. to rise above, to excel. 2. 
to go beyond, to rise (in price). 3. to fall upon, to happen to come to. 
4. to begin, to take in hand, to take away. With these illustrations, it 
will not be difficult to make out any other similar combinations. — 
** Wiierc tiiere is much of this, and reckless fools come into posses- 
sion of tiiem (upon tliem), it is so much the worse." Viel ap- 
pears to be redundant. 

• Dass (sie) so viel, etc. " that it have many — citizens who," 
etc. So merely gives intensity to viel. 

* Leute, (skilful) people. — Gebreche for which das Ge- 
brechen is now used. 



ADDRESS IN BEHALF OF PUBLIC SCHOOLS. 233 

fef6(l n)acf)fen ; man mvh fie and) iDeber an^ ©tettten ^auen, 
norf) aug §otj fd)ni^e(n ; fo n)irb ®ott m'd[)t SOBunber tf)un, 
fo fange man ber ©acf)en bnrd) anbere feine bargetl)ane 
©liter geratf)eni fann. Sarum miijTen tt)ir baju tt)nn,2 
unb SfKiibe unb ^ojl baran n>enben, fie felbflt^ erjteben unb 
inacf)en. ®enn n)eg t(l: bie ©rf)n(b, bafi e^ jegt in alien 
©tabten fo bitnne f[el)et^ i)on gefd)tcften ?enten, ol)ne ber 
D6rigfett, 6ie ba^ junge SSotf bat taffen aufn)ad)fen, tt)ie bag 
^oJj tm 5Ba(be n)arf)fet, unb ntrf}t jngefef)en, mte man eg 
(ehre unb jteb;e ? 2)arum tft^ eg and) fo unorbentltd) ge^ 

* Gerathen. See p. 156, Note 2. "God will not perform a 
miracle, so long as men can attain their object (things) through his 
other benefits shown." At present the preposition z u generally fol- 
lows this verb, instead of the genitive. 

^ Dazu thun. See p. 94, Note 4. Dazu, when prefixed to 
j verbs, generally signifies, 1. to that. 2. in addition to that, 3. to that end. 
fi. g. dazu brauc he n means, 1. to need for that. 2. to apply to 
that object. 3. to use at the same time, or in addition to ; dazu essen 
1. (neuter) to eat while doing something else. 2. (active) to eat one ar- 
' tide of food icith, or in addition to another; dazu halten, 1. (ac- 
tive) to keep or employ a person for a certain object or business. 2. (re- 
flective), to hasten. 3. to follow, to belong to the sect or party of, D a- 
I X^Q kaufen, 1. to purchase in addition to. 2. to purchase for a spe- 
i e^ object ; dazu kommen, to come to, to fall upon, to happen ; e s 
< koramt dazu das s, accedit quod or ut, add to this ; dazu g e- 
; hen, 1. to go to. 2. (in music) to fall, or strike in with. Nearly all 
\ other instances of the use of this particle with verbs may be explain- 
ed after the analogy of these examples. 

^ Selbst, belongs not to s i e, which is in the accusative, but to 
the subject of the verb, " to educate them and form them ourselves." 

* Dass es — so dQnne siehet. "Whose fault is it that at 
present, in all the cities so few skilful people are seen (it looks so thin 

I of skillful people) except of the magistrates, who have left the youth 
i to grow up like wood in the forest, and have not taken notice how 
they are taught and educated .^ L e h r e and z i e h e are in the sub- 
, junctive, because they refer not to the view of the author which was 
' definite, but to the ignorance and uncertainty of the magistrates. 

^ Darum ist's, etc. "Therefore has it grown so irregularly 

20* 



234 SELECTIONS FROM LUTHER. 

n)ad)fen, baf5 ju feincm 58au, fonbern itur ein imnii^c^ ®e^ 
{)ege, iinb nur jum geuertDcrf tiidf)tig i% 

a^ mug bod) tDcfttirf) Dtcgimcnt bfeibcn* ©oH man bernt^ 
jiiIajTcn, bafj citet JKiUjen unb ^nebel rcgiercn, fo man e^ 
*t>ot)I bejTern fann, t(l je ein mibeS uuDernunftigeg ^iixmy 
men. ®o (ag man eben fo me\)x^ Sdne unb 2Goffe ju 
^:^crrn mac()cn, unb fefecn iiber bie, fo nicf)t benfcn tDotten, 
voie fie Den 5)Zcnfcf)en regierct tDcrben. So ift e^ ancf) cine 
unmenfrf)(id)e S3odl}eit, fo man nicf)t n^eiter benft ; benn aU 
fo : n)tr moKen jel^t regieren, ma^ gel)et nn^ an, xvie e^ be^ 
nen geben tt)erbe, bie nad) un^ fommen. 9ticf)t iiber 9IKen=^ 
frf)en, fonbern iiber ©cine unb 5;^nnbe foltten fofd)e ?ente re^ 
gieren, bie nidjt mef)r benn it)ren ?tugen unb @bre im dte^U 

that it furnishes no timber (is good for no building), but is a useless 
hedge, and good only for fuel." 

^ Soil man denn, etc. "If then we should permit that per- 
fect dolts and stocks should rule, when we can prevent it (make it 
"better), it would be a barbarous and brutal undertaking." Ru Is for 
R U 1 p s, belching ; one thai belches, a sottish fellow. 

'-^Solass man eben so mehr, etc. "Then let us rather 
make swine and wolves rulers, and set them over those who will not 
think how they are [to be] governed by men (i. e. under what rulers 
they shall live). It is a barbarous crime, if one thinks of nothing 
farther than this; viz. We will now reign ; — what does it concern 
us how it shall be with those who come after us ?" — Gehet — an. 
Angehen, as an active verb, means 1. to address ones self to a 
thing or to a person to take hold of, to apply to. 2. (impersonally, for 
the most part), to concern, to relate to. As a neuter verb, it means, /a 
begin, to go on, to succeed, or prosper. — d enen gehen. See p. *«^ 
Note 5. — Tiie word so at the beginning of these two sentences, may 
be rendered by thus, or then, or tliey may be omitted in tlie Knglish. 
At the commencement of several of the clauses which occur here, it 
menns, if, and in one of them (die, so n i c h t d e n k e n) it is a rel- 
ative pronoun. This word, in its various uses, and with the vari- 
ous intonations which it receives in conversation (expressing, as- 
sent, surprise, doubt, etc.), has a great diversity of significations. 
It would of itself be no mean test of one's knowledge of German. ■ 



ADDRESS IN BEHALF OF PUBLIC SCHOOLS. 235 

ment fucf)en. SBcntt man gfeid) ben ^ocf)(len gteig fiiwen^ 
bet,i baf man ettef fetne gefe{)rte, gefcf)trfte ?eute erjoge ju 
regieren, e^ mitrbe bennocf) 5[)Jut)e nnb ©orge genng f)a6en, 
ta^ c^ mo()( jugtnge.2 5CBie folt eg benn jngeben, n)enn man 
bagar xxid)t^ jutt^ut?^ 

3a, fpricf)jt bu abermaf/ 06 man g(eicf) foKte nnb mii^te 
®c()u(en {)a6cn ; xva^ ifl nn^ aber niige Iateinifd)e, grie^ 
(i)i\d)c nnb ebrdifrf)e S^ttgen nnb anbere freie ^i'tnfle jn le^:^ 
ren ? ^onnten mir bod)^ moM bentfcf) bte 93ibe[ nnb @ot^ 
teg aSort [ef)ren, bte nng genngfam tjit jnr ©efigfeit ? 2(nt^ 
tvovt : ia id) rvei^ feiber tvohi^ ia^ wiv 2)entfd)en mitffen 
immer ©eflien nnb toKe Ztfieve fet)n nnb bfeiben,^ tDte nng 
benn bie nmtiegenben ?dnber nennen, nnb wiv and} tooijl 
t)erbtenen. ^id) mxnbevt aber, n)arnm mv nidjt and) etn^ 
map fagen : voa^ foP nng ©eibe, 2Bein, ©enjiirje, nnb ber 

* Furwendet for vorwendet. See p. 136, Note 1. — Eitel, 
see p. 110, Note 4. 

2Zuginge. See p. 130, Note 2. 
3 Zu thut. See p. 163, Note 5. 

* J a, sprichst du abermal. See p. 228, Note 3, and p. 230, 
Note 5. 

^Konnten wir doch, etc. is not a direct question, but an affir- 
mation, with a point of interrogation, which is equivalent to the in- 
terrogation, " Should we not?" in English. *' We could still teach 
the Bible and the word of God in German, which is enough for our 
salvation, [could we not ?]." Such sentences are common in German. 

® Seyn und bleiben. These two words are very often coupled 
together in German for the sake of emphasis, though they express 
but one idea. 

'Einmal. See p. 48, Note 2. 

^ Soil en. See p. 123, Note 2. " Of what use to us are silk, 
wine, spices and [other] foreign articles, since we ourselves have 
wine, corn, wool, flax, wood and stone in the German States not on- 
ly an abundance of it for sustenance, but a choice and selection of it 
for embellisliment and ornament." Die Fulle is construed like 
die Menge. See p. 222, Note 3. When it is preceded by words 
expressing the material to which it refers, these words may be either 
n the genitive or in the accusative. The former is the more eleva- 



236 SELECTIONS FROM LUTHER. 

fremben au^(anbifd)en 2Baaren, fo mx bod) fefbjiaCein, 
^orn, 2QoCe, gfad)^, ^ofj unb Steine in beitt[d)en ?dm 
bent nidjt aHcin bie gii^^ h^^^^ i^^ 9tal)rung, fonbern and) 
He ^iibr^ imb 2Bat)l ju Sbren unb ©d)mitcf ? Sie ^iinfle 
unb ©prad)en, bie un^ ol)ne ©cl)aben, ja gro^erer ©d}muef, 
?tu^en, @t)re unb grommen jTnb,^ beibe jur l)ei(tgen ®d)rift 
ju t)er(lel)en unb meftfid) 5Kegiment ju fiibren, tDotten tt)ir 
t)era(i)ten ; unb bie au^tanbifd)en SBaaren, bie un^ n>eber 
not() nod) nii^e finb, baju un^ fd)inben bi^ auf ben ©rati), 
ber woUen wiv nid)t entratben ; l^ei^cn ba& nid)t bilfiq 
beutfd)e 9tarren unb Seflien ? 
3n)ar,3 n)enn fein anberer D^ugen an ben ®prad)en n)dre, 

ted, the latter more colloquial ; as, Erodes und Weines die 
F a 1 1 e, "an abundance of bread and wine," orBrod und 
Wein die Fulle, " bread and wine [in] abundance." 

^ K a h r or K U r, choice, election, is now most frequently found 
in compounds, as W i 1 1 k CI r, arbitrium, and KUrfOrst, elec- 
tor . 

2 Die uns ohne Schaden — sind, etc. "which are harm- 
less, nay a greater ornament, benefit, honor and advantage [than are 
those things] both for the understanding of the Scriptures and for 
managing the civil government, we are disposed to despise \ and with 
foreign articles, which are neither necessary nor useful to us, [and 
which] besides strip us to the very back bone, with these we are un- 
willing to dispense. Does not that make us deserve the name of 
German dunces and brutes ?" — O h n e Schaden is used as a pred- 
icate afler sind, much as the following nominatives are. — From- 
m e n, see p. 49, Note 2. — Z u r h e i I i g e n S c h r i f t, " for the 
Holy Scriptures, to understand them," i. e. for understanding the 
Scriptures and for managing the civil government. — Grath or 
Grat, for which Ruckgrat is now more common. Der is for 
derer. — Heissen das nicht billig deutsche Narren 
und Bestien. On the use of d a s, see p. 110, Note 3, and Gram 
p. 30rj. " Are not tliese reasonably called," etc. equivalent in sense 
to, " Do thoy not deserve to be called," or " Is that not being Ger- 
man fools and brutes." 

^ Zwar is compounded of z u wahr, in truth, and is written 
separately in old German. Zwar, freilich and wo hi are used 



ADDRESS IN BEHALF OF PUBLIC SCHOOLS. 237 

fotttc fcorf) un^ ba^i bittig erfreuen unb attji'mbett, ba^ er^ fo 
eine ebtc, feiitc ©abe ®otte^ ijl:, bamtt un^ 2)eiitfd)cn @ott 
jc^t fo reicf)ficf), fafl i'tber atte ?dnber, bctmfucf)et3 unb be^ 
gnabct. g3?an fief)et tiic{)t Diet,^ ba^^ ber Zenfd biefefbeit 
hatte lajTen bard) bie bo^en @c{)u(en unb ^lojler auffom^ 
men ; ja jTe fiaben attejett auf ba^ ^orf)fte baVDtber getobet, 
unb aucf) nocf) toben. X^enn ber S^eufel rod) ben SSraten 
n?o()I : mo bte ®pracf)en bert)or fdmen, n^iirbe fetn SKeirf) em 
^ gacf) getDinnen, ba^ er ntcf)t tDteber (eidE)t fonnte juflopfen* 
2Beif er nun nid)t {)at mogen n)el)ren, ba^ fte berDor famen, 
benfet er bod) fie nun alfo fd)mat ju l)a(ten, bag fie 'oon 

R as concessive particles, meaning, indeed or fo fee sure, and are gener- 
ally followed by an adversative (doch, aber, etc.) in the next 
clause. They differ thus ; Z vv a r, expresses certainty ; f r e i 1 i c h, 
unhesitating concession, or obviousness ; w o h 1, probability. 

^ Das, like hoc in Latin, refers often to a following clause. See 
p. 223, Note 3. 

^ E r refers grammatically to N u t z e n. In sense, it is more gen- 
eral. 

I'l ' H e i m s u c h e t. See p. 219, Note 3. B e g n a d e t. See p. 222, 

" Note 2. 

* V i e 1, much, in many instances. The sense is ; " We do not 
find in many instances, that Satan allowed them (the languages) to 
flourish by means of the universities and cloisters ; nay more, they 
have always raged most violently against them, and do so still ; for 
Satan got the scent of it, that if the languages should come into 

Ivogue, his kingdom would have a hole made in it, which he could 
not easily stop up again. But as he could not prevent them from com- 
ing up, he intends, at least, to keep them within such narrow limits, 
ithat they will of themselves waste away and fall. In these, no wel- 

^come guest has entered his house ; therefore, he desires to give him 
(Such dry picking, that he will not stay long. Very few, dear sirs, of 
jour people perceive this mischievous trick of Satan." — Roch den 

IjBraten is a phrase corresponding to the French, sentir de loin la 

}fricass6e, and the English, to smell a rat.—F a c h has here a peculiar 
:meaning and is used in the sense of L o c h. — W ehren dass. See 
p. 98, Note 7. — U n s e r, o/ us, is governed by w e n i g. 



238 SELECTIONS FROM LUTHER. 

if)nen fe(6fl n^ieber foKen t)crgehen itnb fatten, d^ i(l if)m 
ntcf)t ein lieber ©aft bamit in^ S^an^ gef ommen, barum n)ill 
er tbn and) alfo fpeifen, ba^ er nict)t langc feUe bfeiben. 
I^iefeu bofen ^tiicf be^ il^eufel^ fel)en unfer gar mnig, liebcn 
^errn. 

2)arum, Ifeben Seutfrf)en, (ajTet un^ l)icr bie Slugcn aiif^ 
tf)un, ©ott banfen fiir ba^ eble ^feinob, unb fell baraiif 
battctt/ bag e^ itn^ nid)t tDieber cntjogen werbe, unb ber 
$teufel ntd)t feinen 9Kntt)n?itten bnjTc. 2^enn ia& fenncn i 
tt)ir nid)t fengnen, bag, n)ten)cbt ba^ @t)angelinm allein 
burrf) ben ^eiligen ©eifl: tjl gefemmen, unb tdg(irf) fommt, 
fo tft e^ bodE) buret) yjlittcl ber (5prad)cn gefemmen, unb i 
fjat and) baburd) gugenommen, mug and) baburd) bebaftcn 
rt)erben. 2)enu g(eid) al^ ba^ ©ott burd) bie 2(po(le( tt)olIte 
in atte SGBeft ba^ @t)angelium laffen fommen, gab er bie 
Sungen baju ; unb ^atte and) juDor burd) ber JHomer 9Jei]i^ 
ment bie gried)ifd)e unb fateinifd)e (Sprad)e fo weit in alle 
?dnber an^gebreitet, auf bag fein ©t^angetium je balb fern 
unb n)eit grud)t brad)te. 2((fo \)at er je^t and) getban. 
5Riemanb t)at gewugt, n>arum ©ott bie ©prad)en l)ert?or 
tieg fommen,^ bi^ bag man nun attererft^ ficbet, bag e^ urn 
be(J @DangeIii mlkn gefd)eben ifl, n)eld)e(^ er bemad) bat 
n)otten^ ojfenbaren, unb baburd) be^ @nbed)rijl^ 9tegimcnt 

* Fest daraufhalten, hold on to it, take pains to preserve it, 
to cherish it. — B Q s s e. This verb not only signifies to mend, to inaki 
good, to atone for, but also to satiate, to gratify ; and so here. 

' Gleich als da, itmnediately when. 

•*Hervor liess kommen, instead of hervor knminen 
1 ie ss. 

* A llererst. See p. 225, Note 3. 

*Hat wo lien. The verbs d r f e n, konnen, mo gen, 
masse n, sollen, wollen, lassen, as also he i dse n, heli'm, 
horen, sehen, and sometimes lehren and lernen, have this 
peculiarity that the infinitive is used in the place of the perfect parti- 
ciple (afler an auxiliary) when another verb in the infinitive is (l*"- 
pendent on them. See p. 24, Note 1, end. 



ADDRESS IN BEHALF OF PUBLIC SCHOOLS. 239 

aufbecfen xtnb jerporcn. Santm hat er and) ®riecf)en(anb 
ben Ziivfen gegeben, auf ba^ bie ®ricd)en, Derjaget unb jer^ 
fireuet/ bie gnecf)ifcf)e ©pracf)e au^brdcf)ten, unb em ^n^ 
fang wiirbe, ancf) anbere (Spracf)en mtt ju (ernen> 

©0 lieb nun af^ un^ baS @t)angelinm tp, fo ^axt kflet 
un^ liber ben ©pracf)en f)alten.2 J)enn @ott ^at feme 
@cf)rift ntd)t umfonft alfem in bie jtt)ei @pracf)en fc^reiben 
(affen, bag a(te :i;e(l:ament in bie (5brdifd)e, baf 3^ene in bie 
®rierf)ifrf)e. 2Befd)e nun ©ott nid)t t)erad)tet, fonbern ju 

' feinem 2Sort ern)dt)[et t)at t)or aUen anbern, foKen and) n)ir 

; biefelben^ t)or alien anbern el)ren. ®enn ©t ^autu^ rii^:j= 
met bag fiir eine fonberficf)e (5t)re unb aSortbeil ber ebrd^ 
ifrf)en ©prad)e, ba^ ©otteg 2Bort barinnen gegeben ifl, ba 

i a fprad) Dtom. 3 : „5Bag f)at bie 93efcf)neibung SScrt^eit 
ober Taii^en ? gaft^ DieL atuf g @r|te, fo finb il)nen @ot^ 
teg Diebe befol)fen/'^ Sag ritl)met and) ber ^onig 2)at)ib, 
^f» 147 : „@r t)erfitnbiget fein 2Bort Scifob, unb feine ®e^ 
bote unb 9?ecf)te SfraeL @r bat feinem 3Sef{ alfo get^an, 
nod) feine 3?ed)te ifjnen offenbaret/' Sa^er and) bie ebrd^ 
ifd)e ©prad)e ^eifig f)ei^et* Unb ©t. ^aufug 3tom. 1. uen^ 
net fte bie l)ei(ige ©d)rift, obne B^eifel urn beg beiligen 

j SGBortg ©otteg n)itten, bag barinnen Derfaflet ift. 2lffo mag 

^Verjaget und zerstreuet, participles used adjectively. 

" In order that the Greeks, driven awaj and dispersed, should carry 

the Greek language abroad, and that a beginning be made to learn 

other languages also at the same time (mit)." 

2 H*art — u ber den Sprachen halten. Ueber etwas 

I halten is the same in sense asaufetwas halten. Compare 

\ darauf halten p. 238, Note 1, and dariiber halten p. 231, 

t Note 7. " So dear as the gospel is to us, so zealously let us cherish 

I the languages." 

* Welche — dieselben. *' What languages (or such lan- 
; guages as) God has not despised, but chosen for his word in prefer- 
, ence to all others, these we also should honor more than all other lan- 
I guages." See p. 44, Note 3. 
I * Fast. See p. 153, Note 4. 



240 SELECTIONS PROM LUTHER. 

and) tie gned]ifd)e ®prad)e n>of)I ^ei(ig bei^en, ba^^ Hefclbe 
t)or anbent bagu crn)dl)(et ijl, bag ba^ neue Xeftamcnt bar^ 
inneu gcfchrieben winie. Unb au^ berfefben,^ a(^ au^ 
einem Srmtnen, in anbere (2prad)e burd)^ 2:)oInietfrf)en ge^ 
ftoffen, unb fie and) gel)ei(iget l)cit. 

Unb la^ct nn^ bae gefagt fet)n,3 bag tt)ir ba^ (jDangclium 
md)t tt)ot)t n)erbcn erl)a(tcn of)ne bie ®prad)en* Sie 
©prad)en jTnb bie ®d)eibe, barinnen bieg SO^effer ic^S ®ei(le^ 
jlerft. ©ie (Tnb ber (2d)rein/ barinnen man bieg jltcinob 
tragt. ©ie jlnb ba^ ®efag, barinnen man biefen $tranf 
faffet. ©ie finb bie ^emnot,^ barinnen biefe ©peife fiegt 
Unb n)ie ba^ @t)angetinm fefbjl: jeigt, jTe jTnb bie j^orbe, ba^ 
rinnen man biefe S3robte, nnb Sifd)e nnb S3rerfen bel)aft» 
3a mo mir e^ t)erfeben,6 bag mir (ba @ett t)or fei))'^ bie 
©prad)en fat)ren Iaj]en, fo merben voir nid)t atlein bag 
@t)angelinm t^erlieren, fonbern mirb and) enblid) bal)in ge^ 

^ D a s s, because. 

* Und aus derselben, etc. " and from this language as from 
a fountain it (the New Testament) has flowed into other languages 
and sanctified them also." 

3 Und lasset uns das gesagt seyn, " and let this be kept 
in mind ; literally, " and let this be said to us." But gesagt is not 
a passive with seyn, which would require gesagt worden 
seyn, but it is used adjectively. "Let this be regarded as said or 
settled." 

4 S c h r e i n, (English shrine, Latin scriniiim), a box, or casket, is 
more used in poetry than in prose. 

^ K e m n o t, or K e m n a t e, a store-house, so used only in the 
old German. It commonly means, a house, room, or chamber. 

« Versehen. See p. 222, Note 6. 

' Da Gott vor sey, which may God forbid. Da — v o r for 
d a V o r. One is represented as hindering a thing by being before it. 
See p. 230, Note 4. Compare the word j/rcrent. " Indeed, if we are 
80 negligeni as to let tlie languages go, (if we neglect it, so that we 
let, etc.) — wliich may God prevent — then we shall not only lose the 
gospel, but it will finally turn out (or come to this) that," etc. D a- 
h i n g c r a t h e n. See p. '.]^^ Note 3. 



ADDRESS IN BEHALF OF PUBLIC SCHOOLS. 241 

ratben, ba^ wiv n)eber ?ateinifcl) nerf) S^eutfcf) redE)t reben 
ober fc()reiben founen* De^ la^t un^' ba^ etenbe grdultd)e 
©rempct ^ur Sett^eifung nub SBSaniung nehmen in ben I)o^ 
l)en ©d)ulen unb ^tofl:ent^ bannnen man nid)t attein ba^ 
StjangcHnm Dcrfernct, fonbern and) fatetnifrf)e nnb bentfrf)e 
(2pracf)e t)erberbet f)at, bag bie efcnben ?ente frf)ier ju 
tanter ©ejltien gemorben jTnb, tt>eber bentfrf) nod) fateintfcf) 
recf)t reben ober fdE)re{ben fonnen, nnb beinat)e and) bie na^^ 
tnrltd)e SSernnnft Dertoren l^abcn. 

£^arnm baben e^ He 3lpojl:et and) felbflt fitr n6tl)tg an^ 
gefeben, bag fte ba^ nene ^ellament in bie gried)ifd)e 
®prad)e faffeten nnb anbdnben, obne 3^'^cifel, bag jle eg 
nn^ bafelbfl: fid)er nnb gemig t)ertt)al)rten, xvie in einer l)ei(i:^ 
gen ?abe. Senn jTe t)aben gefeben-^ atte ba^jenige, bag jn^ 
fimftig n?ar, nnb nnn affo ergangen ift ; n>o eg attein in bie 
^opfe gefafl'et n)iirbe, voic mand)e n)i(be, n)itflte, Unorbnnng 
nnb ©emenge, fo mand)erfei ©innen, Sitnfel nnb ?ebren 
jTd) erl)eben miirben in ber Sbri(l:ent)eit, n>eld)en in feinem 
28ege jn n>e[)ren, nod) bie @infd(tigen jn fd)iifeen n)dren, n)o 
nid)t bag nene S^ejlament gett>ig in (2d)rift nnb ©prad)e ge^ 
faffet n)dre. Sarnm ifl eg gewig, n)o nid)t bie ©prad)en 
bleiben,3 ba mng jnte^t bag (St)angelinm nntergeben*^ 

* Dess lasst uns, etc. " Of this let us take as a proof and 
as a warning, the wretched and shocking example [presented] in the 
universities," etc. Lasst for 1 a s s e t. On z u, see p. 78, Note 4, 
and p. 104, Note 6. 
I *Denn sie haben gesehen, etc. " For they all foresaw 
j H^t which was then future, and which now has taken place accor- 
I dingly ; namely, that as much wild and strange disorder and con- 
1 fusion so also various views, opinions and doctrines would spring 
up in Christendom, if it (divine revelation) were to be received mere- 
ly into the mind ; w^hich it would be impossible to prevent." 

^ Wo nicht die Sprachen bleiben, etc. " Therefore 
it is certain that where the languages are not preserved (do not re- 
main) there the gospel must at length become extinct." By the lan- 
guages is meant the study of the languages. We might expect the 
word d a s s before w o ; but it is not necessary in German. 

* Untergehen, to sink, to go to the bottom, to jjerish. In order 
21 



242 SELECTIONS FROM LUTHER. 

Tia^ l)at and) bewiefen/ unb jetget nod) an bie (Jrfafv 
rung. Senn fobalb nacf) ber 3Ipopef 3^^^/ ^^ '^^^ ©prad^en 

to distinguish this word from n i e d e r ge h e d, it will be necessary 
to form a precise idea of the difference between u n te r and n ie- 
d e r. It is well known that unter has two sig-nifications, ex- 
pressed in Latin by sub and inter. With this last signification, inter^ 
amongj and sometimes between^ we have here nothing to do. In the 
former signification, in which it bears a close analogy to the adverb 
u n t e n, below^ beiteaUi^ it is properly the opposite of Q b e r. Thus, 
placed antithetically, the words woald stand, Ober und unter, 
over and under ^ ober und nieder, upper and lower. Unter- 
g e h e n is therefore a much stronger expression than n i e d e r ge- 
he n. As applied to the sun, the former would imply that it is set- 
ting or passing below the horizon., whereas the latter would mean that 
itis declining., i. e. either approaching the horizon^ or sinking beloic it. 
Any descent is expressed by niedergehen; but u n t e r g e- 
L e n means to descend so far as to be under something else. Unter 
is also used frequently in composition as the opposite of ober. 
Thus we have not only Oberdeutschland and N e i d e r- 
deutschland; Oberhessen and Niederhessen; Ober- 
r h e i n and Niederrhein, Upper Germany and Lower Germany ; Up- 
per Hesse and Lower Hesse ; the Upper Rhine and the Lower Rhine ; but 
Oberitalien and Unteritalien; Oberagypten and Un- 
teragypten, Upper Italy and Under Italy ; Upper Egypt and Under 
Egypt. In those compound verbs in which either u n te r or nieder 
are used in nearly the same sense, such as niedertauchen and 
untertauchen; niederliegen and unterliegen, 
the latter, or those compounded with unter, are more elevated and 
dignified. Nieder is etymologically the same as the Engliih 
word nether., and enters into the compounds hcneath^ underneath. 

* Das hat auch bewiesen, etc. " Experience has proved 
that, and still shows it; for immediately (s o b a 1 d) after the times 
of the apostles, when the languages (gift of tongues) ceased, tlie gos- 
pel, and the [true] faith, and Christianity itself (entire) declined more 
and more, until thoy entirely vanished under the pope; and since the 
lime that the languages disappeared, not much that is special or good 
Cbesonders) has been seen in Christendom, but very many shock- 
ing abominations (very much shocking abomination) have found 
place." S o b a I d, does not necessarily imply any comparison, that 
is, it may signify not only as soon as, but immediately, directly. But 



ADDRESS IN BEHALF OF PUBLIC SCHOOLS. 243 

auff)6rten, na()m and) ba^ dmnQcimn unb ber ©faube unb 
gange (5t)ri(leut)eit je mebr unb mebr ab^ big ba^ jTe unter 
bem ^^abjl gar t)evfunfeu tp, ititb i(l, fcit ber ^eit bie ©pra^ 
d)en gefaKeu ffnb, md)t t^iel befonber^ in ber S[)riftettt)eit 
erfeben ; aber gar 'oicl grdulid^er ©rauel an^ umDijyenbeit 
ber (5pracf)eu gefcf)el)eu. 2i(fo njieberum :^ mett jei^t bte 
gpracf)en bert)cr gcfommen jTitb, brxngen fie tin fjD(d)eg ?icf)t 
mit iTcb^ unb tl)un fc(d)e groge Swinge, bag f(d) atte 3Bett 
i)ertt)unbert, unb mug befenuen, bag tt)tr bag (St)angelium 
fo tauter unb rein baben, fafl aU bie Slpojlel gebabt l)abeu, 
unb ganj in feiue erjte Meinigfeit gef ommen i|l, unb gar 'oiel 
reiner, benn eg jnr ^cit ©t ^iereu^mi ober Stuguftini ge^^ 
tt^efen i^i. Unb ©umma,^ ber l)ci(ige ©eijlt idt fein 3tarr,3 
gebet aucf) ntcf)t mit leid}tfertigeu unnotbigeu ©ad)eu nut ; 
ber^ bcit bie (Spradien fo niifee unb nott) gead)tet in ber St)rii^ 
(lent)eit, bag er fie oftmalg Dom ^immef mit fid) gebracftt 
i^at 5Bet£i)eg ung aUeiu fottte genugfam ben)egeu, btefels^ 

8 bald, written separately always implies some comparison. 
Nahm — ab. See p, 26, Note 5. It indicates gradual decrease. 
Applied to one's declining health, it means to pine away, whereas 
ab f a 1 1 e n means that the Q.esh falls away more rapidly, and e i n- 
f a 1 1 e n that li falls in or leaves visible marks or cavities. — E r s e- 
he n is a participle, forming the perfect tense with i s t. B e s o n- 
ilers improbably here used forBesonderes by a negligence 
in the orthography. On the word Ohristenheit, see p. 11^ 
Note 3. 

^ A I s o w i a d e r u m, " So on the contrary." See p. 3, Note 2. 

^ S u m m a, or in S u m m a, in a icord. Adopted from the La- 
tin. 

^Der heilige Geist ist kein Narr. The argument 
is this : ' Since the Holy Ghost does no foolish or useless thing ; and 
yet has bestowed the gift of tongues, it is evidently our duty to cul- 
1 tivate a knowledge of the languages as a useful and Christian attain- 
ment.' 

'* D e r, a demonstrative is more emphatic than e r in the next 
I clause. The form of both may be given by the word, he, italicised 
' in the former case and not in the latter. 



n 



244 SELECTIONS FROM LUTHER. 

hen mit ^iei^ imb dhrcn ^u fuctert, imb tiicf)t ju t)erad)ten, 
tt>ci{ er^ jTe nun fcl&ft xvicbev anf dvben ermccfet 

3ci fpn'djit fcu : eg jTub t^iefe SSciter feh'g (jetDorbeit, ha^^ 
ben and) gelebret el)ite ©pratten^^ T^a^ t|t mabr* 2Go 
recf^nefl: bu aber aud) bag fjin,^ bag jTe fo oft in ber 
©djrift gefel)(et I) a ben ? SBie oft fel)let ®t. Slugufti^ 
ttng im ^fatter nnb anbern Shigfegnngen, fo xvohi aU 
S^ilaxin^^ ja and) atte, bie o()ne bie (2prarf)en ftrf) bie @rf)rift 
Ijaben untent)nnben^ angjnfegen ?^ Unb ob jTe gfeid)^ 

* Weil er, etc. The Holy Ghost or divine Providence, is here 
represented as having produced the revival of learning. 

2 Ohne Sprachen belongs not only to haben gelehrt but 
also to sind selig geworden. In such sentences the punctua- 
tion is different in the German from what it is in the English. — J a at 
the beginning of the sentence, is to be rendered nay but, or simply but. 
See p. 228, Note 3. The German j a and the English yea are the 
same word. 

3 Wo rechnest du aber auch das hin, etc. ** But to 
what (wo — hin, ickither) do you ascribe this, namely, that they 
have so often mistaken the meaning of the Scriptures?" 

* Unterwunden. See p. 155, Note 3. 

* Auszulegen. Auslegen, in its literal sense, is equivalent 
to h i n a u s 1 e ge n, to put out to shoic (as goods), to expose to view. 
Figuratively, it means to set forth a subject so that all its parts maybe 
seen and understood. The leading idea is to bring from a state of 
concealment. Applied to language, it means to explain or interpret 
the sense of the words by unfolding the grammatical construction. — 
Erklaren is originally the same as klar machen, and relates 
to what was before d u n k o 1, obscure ; and hence, to make clear by 
giving the reasons or grounds of a thing. — De u te n, means to indi' 
cat e, to point out, to intimate by a sign, a winh , nod, etc. Ausle- 
gen and d e u t e n relate only to things as signs or symbols of some- 
thing else (words as signs of ideas, and prognostics as signs of events), 
whcri'as erkl.'lren relates to things in themselves. Thus einen 
T r a u m auslegen or d e u t e n, is to interpret or tell the mean- 
ing of a dream ; but einen Traum erklaren, is to explain the 
cause of the dream. Hence Sterne deuten is the otfice of an 
astrologer; but Sterne erklaren is that of an a5^ronowcr. 

® O b s i e g 1 e i c h. Ob, in old German is nearly equivalent to 



I 



ADDRESS IN BEHALF OF PUBLIC SCHOOLS. 245 

ettt)ai xed)t gerebet babcn, ffnb ^e bod) ber ©acf)en tiid)t 
gcwi^ gett^efen, ob baffcfbe^ xcd)t an bem Drte (lebe, ba ftc 
ed bin bcuten ? Slt^J, bag idf) beg eiu (frempet jetgc, recf)t 
ifl e^ gerebet, bag (5brif>u^ ®otte^ ©obn ift. 2{ber n)ie 
fpottifrf) lantet e^ in ben Dbren ber 5Siberfad)er, ba fie beg 
©ruub fiibreten a\\^ bem 110» T^falm : Tecum pnncipium 
in die virtutis tuae, fo bed) bafelbjl tit ber ebrdifd)ert ©prad)e 
md)tS Doit ber ®ottl)eit gefcbrtebett (Itebet 2Benit man aber 
alfo mtt uitgemtjTen ©riinben itnb 5v^btfptitd)ett^ beit ®faitJ^ 
icn fd)n6et, tfl ei ntd)t etite (2d)mad) iini ©pott ber 

wenn. See p. 16, ISote 1. But it now means ichether. Conse- 
quentlvj obgleich, obwohl, ob audi, obschon, and ob- 
zwar have substantially the same signification as the simpler and 
easier forms, wenn gleich, wenn auch, wenn schon, and 
wenn zwar. Obgleich and wenn gleich are frequently 
separated by personal pronouns and other intervening words ; the 
I others are less frequently separated. Ob auch is poetical ; and ob- 
xwar is obsolete. The etymological differences of these words are 
not regarded by writers at the present day. They are that ob, as a 
concessive particle, expresses more of </o«6Z than wenn, which pre- 
supposes the condition expressed. Gleich implies that the condi- 
may follow immediately or imtJiout hindrance ; schon implies that it 
has already taken place : w o h 1 implies the possibility of the condi- 
. tion ; z w a r implies the certainty of it ; auch implies that the con- 
dition follows a/^o, or follows as a consequence of something else. 
^ Etwa properly means apparently or according to one's opinion. 
I Hence its two leading significations,!, about, nearly, like unge- 
.' fahr ; that is, about or nearly so, if we may judge from appearances, 
^2. perhaps, perchance, like v i e 1 1 e i c h t ; that is, it may be so, judging 
; ffDm appearances. But U n gef a hr, about, nearly, expresses mere 
j indefinit.eness, without reference to any uncertainty, arising from the 
^ro«/nrf5 on which the judgment is formed ; and vielleicht means 
literally very easily (v i e 1 in old German means the same as se hr) ; 
and hence, very likely, perhaps. 

^ Dasselbe, neuter singular, referring in an indefinite way to 
the plural S a c h e n. " And though they said what was not far from 
the truth (nearly right), still they were not sure (of the things) 
whether it belonged to the place, where they intimated it." 
^ FehlsprQchen, false proof-texts. 
21* 



246 SELECTIONS FROM LUTHER. 

Sbrijicn bet ben 2Giberfcc{)tcrn/ fcie ber Spradbc funbicj 
ITnb? Unb merben- nur bafdf^arriger im Svtbum, unb 
baften mtfern ©tauben niit giitem (Sd)ein fiir einen Wlcn^ 

SOe^ i\l nun bte vgd)u(b,3 bag nnfer ©(aube a(fo ju 
©d}anbcn n)irb ? JiamHrf) : bag ^ir bie (Sprarf)cn nid)t 
n)ijien, nnb ijl: bier fcine ^iUfe, benn bie ©pradben tt)ij)en» 
3Barb nirf)t ®t- ioieronpmn^ gejmungen, ben ^>falter t)cn 
ttenem au^ bem Sbraifcben jn Derbotmetfcben, nm beg rt)\U 
len/ bag, n^o man mit ben Suben au^ unferm^ ^falter Ijan^ 

' Wider fechter, can easily be explained from its etymology. 
It differs from W i de rsac he r, as antagonist in English differs 
from adversary. It means, literally one Y/ho fights against another. 
It is not now in common use. 

^ lind [sie] werden, etc. " And they are only made the more 
obstinate in their error," etc. 

^Wessistnun die Schuld, etc.? "What is the cause, 
that our faith is brought into such disgrace, or is so disgraced .'' It 
is our ignorance of the languages ; and here there is no remedy but 
a knowledge of the languages." Literally, it would be, " Of what 
is it the fault, that our faith becomes so disgraced (to disgrace) ? 
Namely, or forsooth [tlie circumstance] that we do not know the lan- 
guages, and there is here no help than knowing the languages." — 
W e s s the genitive of was is now mostly out of use except in such 
compounds as wesshalb and we ss we gen. — Schuld is often 
employed wliere the word cause would be, in English ; but it differs 
widely from U r sac h e, by being only an evil cause, and is hence 
often to be rendered by the word fault. — Z u Schanden. See p. 
56, Note 3. — Na m 1 i c h is here used in the sense of, to be jwrt.— 
Die Sprachen wissen is a substantive phrase. See p. ^^^ 
Note 2. 

* Urn desswillen, because^ on this account. This word differs 
from desswegen and desshalb, as n^a does from ori. Strictly 
Bpeaking, desswegen, because, denotes grounds or motives of ac* 
tion ; desshalb, because, indicates that in regard to which, in COU' 
sideration of which, one arts ; u m desswillen, because, expressei 
personal intention, or it is used in tlie sense of desswegen. 

*» U n se r m, our, \. e. the Christian or Latin version of the Psalmf 
then in use. 



ADDRESS IN BEHALF OF PUBLIC SCHOOLS. 247 

befte,^ fpcttcten fie unfer,^ bag e^ nidjt a(fo jltimbe xm &va^ 
if(f)en, me e^ bie Unfern^ fiil)rten ? yinn jTnb^ alter alien 
aScitcr 2(u^te(]itng, bie ehne ©prad^en bie ©d)rift t)aben ge^ 
t)anbeft (06 fte toobi md)tS mixedjte^ febren) bod) bergejlalt, 
bag (Te fail oft ungcn)ijTe, unebene, unb unjeitige ©priid)e 
fa()ren, unb tappen v^ie ein SStinber an ber 5Banb, bag jTe 
gar oft be^ red)ten Xexte^ feblen, unb madjen ibm eine 
9tafe nad) ibrer 2lnbad)t, tt^ie bent SSer^ oben angejeiget : 
tecum principium, etc. 2)ag and) ©t. StugufltinuiS felbfl 
mug befenneu, n)ie er fd)reibet de doctrina Christiana, bag 
einem d)rijl(id)eu ?ebrer, ber bie ®d)rift foil au^fegen, 9totf) 
jtnb itber tie ?ateinifd)e, and) bie gried)ifd)e unb ebrdifd)e 
@prad)e ; e6 ill fonjl: unmog(id), bag er nid)t aKent[)aIben 
anjloffc, ja nod) ?tott) unb 2(rbeit ba i(t, ob einer bie ©pra^ 
d)en fd)on roo()I faun. 

Sarum ift e^ gar tiieP ein anber 2)ing um einen fd)Ied)^ 
ten ^rebigei^ be^ ©lauben^, unb um einen Stu^feger ber 

1 Handelte. See p. 29, Note 2. 

' Spotteten sie unser. See p. 177, Note 2. Comp. p. 46^ 
Note 4. 

^ Die Unser n, our party, i. e, the Christians. Comp. p. 70, 
Note 8. 

^ Nun s i n d, etc. " Now the interpretation of all the ancient 
fathers, who, without a knowledge of the languages, have treated of 
the Scriptures, (though they teach nothing heretical) is still of such 
a character that they very often employ uncertain, variable and un- 
timely expressions and grope like a blind man along the wall, so that 
they often fail of the right [sense of the] text, and shape it (make a 
waxen rose of it) to their pious fancy, so that even St. Augustine 
himself was obliged to confess — that tiie Greek and Hebrew langua- 
ges are necessary over and above the Latin to a Christian teacher, 
who is to interpret the Bible. It is otherwise (i. e. without this aid) 
impossible that he should not everywhere stumble ; indeed, there is 
trouble and labor, even though one be well acquainted with the lan- 
guages." — E in em — nolh sind — die Sprachen. See p. 162 
Note 1. 

^ Gar viel, very much^ or quite. 

• Um einen schlechten Prediger, etc., with a simple or 



248 SELECTIONS FROM LUTHER. 

@d)rift, ober, tt)ie e^ ®t» ^aufii^ itennet : einen ^rophetcn, 
din fd)[erf)ter ^>rcbiger^ (ifl tt)at)r) bat fo met l)e(ter Sprud)e 
unb Xexte bitrd)^ botmetfd)cn, ba^ er Sbriftum t^erfle^ 
l)en, lebrert unb l)et(tgffrf) leben unb anberu prebigen 
faun. Stber bie ®d)rift aui^jufegen, unb ju l)anbefn fiir (Id) 

mere preacher of the gospel (faith) from what it is with an interpre- 
ter," etc. Literally, It is quite another (i. e. it is not the same) 
thing with a preacher and with (or, as with) an interpreter. On the word 
schlecht, see p. 39, Note 5, and p. 78, Note 3. Perhaps all the 
significations of u m can be brought under the following heads,!. 
circum, circa, circiter. 2. de. Here a few phrases. Ich rede 
wie es mir urns Herz ist. "I speak my mind, (as it is in or 
respecting my heart)." Es sieht Ubel um ihn a u s, "He ap- 
pears to be in a bad way (either as to his health or as to his affairs). 
Literally, " it appears ill respecting him." Er thut sehr um 
seinen Freund, "He feels much for his friend." Comp. p. 20, 
Note 3, med. and p. 35, Note 5. Es ist um mich geschehen, 
de me actum est. Esist ein sonderbares Ding um die 
L e i b e, " There is something singular about love, or love is a strange 
thing." Sich um Einen verdient mac hen, " to gain one's 
favor by some service (to make one's self deserving of another)." 

3. For, that is, nach when a certain end or object is sought; and 
fu r, when there is reference to price in trade. See p. 133, Note 1. 

4. As marking measure of time, space and degree, where it may be 
omitted in the translation, or rendered by the word by when it is a 
measure of excess. See p. 41, Note 1. — 5. To ruin with kommen, 
bringen, etc. See p. 106, Note 6, and p. 57, Note 3. — (j. Every 
other, or alternately. See p. 116, Note 1. — 7. In order to with the in- 
finitive. — 8. Right about, over, prostrate, as an adverb. 

* Kin schlcchter Prediger, etc. "An ordinary preacher, 
it is true, has so many clear passages and texts through interpreta- 
tion (in translations) that he can understand and teach Christ, lead a 
holy life, and preach to others." Where several words in the same 
regimen succeed without the conjunction und expressed, they all 
belong to one category ; but when u n d is inserted, as it is here 
afler lehren and leben, it implies that the following words be- 
long to a new class. Hence the rule for the omission or insertion of 
this conjunction is very different in German from what it is respect- 
ing the word and, in English. 



ADDRESS IN BEHALF OF PUBLIC SCHOOLS. 249 

Ijin,^ xxnb ju ilreitett n>iber bie trrigeit (iinfhhvcv ber @dE)rift, 
i(l er ju geringe,^ ba^ (ciflet jTrf) ot)ne ©pracf)en tticf)t tbim.3 
Diint mug man je in ber @t)ri|Ien()eit fofd)e ^ropt)eten ba^ 
ben, bte bie ©d)rift trciben^ nnb au^fegen, nnb and) jnm 
©treit tangen, unb ifl nic{)t genng am t)ei(igen ?eben nnb 
recf)t lebren. Darnm ffnb bie ©prarf)en jlrarf^ nnb alter 
2)inge Donnott)en in ber Sbrijlenbeit, gletd)tt)ie bte ^ropl)e^ 
ten eber Stn^feger, ob e^ gleirf) nicht 5Rot{) ijl, nocf) fe^n 
mii^f ba^ ein jeg[id)er Sbrijl: ober ^rebiger ein fo(et)er ^ro^^ 
pt)et fet), n)ie ®t. ^anln^ fagt 1. (5or. 12, 8. nnb 9., (Jpbef. 
4, IL 
I Saber fommt eg, bag feit ber 3tpojle( 3^^t bk ®d)rift fo 
< ftnller i^ gebfieben, nnb nirgenbg gett^ifle,^ bepnbige ^n^k^ 
gnngen bariiber gefcf)rieben ftnb. Senn and) bie beiligen 
SSater (n)ie gefagt) oft gefet)(et, nnb tveil |Te ber ®prad)en 

^ For sich hin, /rom one's oicn view, independently. Comp. p. 
16, Note 8. 

^ G e r i n g means small with special reference to quality ox value ^ 
and hence often means inferior, weak. Klein, small, relates strict- 
ly to dimensions, or size. 
I ^Lasstsich — nichtthun, cannot be done. So the phrases, 
I Das lasst sich horen, that may be listened to, i. e. is reasona- 
I bie ; das lasst sich denken, that is conceivable. 

* Die die Schrift treiben, etc. "who study and interpret 

J tfee Scriptures, and are competent to controversy , nor is holy living 

\ and orthodoxy enough (for the defender of Christianity). Therefore 

the languages are strictly and altogether necessary to the Christian 

church, as are prophets, or interpreters, although it is not necessary 

1 nor indispensable that every Christian or preacher should be a proph- 

\ et/'—Treiben, see p. 29, Note 1, and p. 109, Note 2.— Taugen, 

I to be good, useful ox fit for. Compare tauglich, p 145, Note 2. — 

f 1st nicht genu g, etc. literally, " there is not enough in holy liv- 

! ing and correct teaching," meaning, that, " a pious life and orthodox 

teaching are not all that is requisite." — A Her Dinge which is 

ij now out of use, differs from al ler d ings only by being in the gen- 

' itive plural instead of the genitive singular. See p. 183, Note 3. 

^ Gewisse, like the English word certain, \q used in the two 
j' senses of sure, and some. 



250 SELECTIONS FROM LUTHER. 

Uttn>ij7enb gett)efen,i jTnb ffe gar fetten ein^, ber fd[)ret fonfl, 
bcr fdl)ret fo. (St 93ernbarb ifl cin yjlann Don gro^em 
®eifl: getrefcn, ba^ id) it)n fcf)ier2 biirfte iiber allc ?cbrcr 
fcl^en, bie bcrul)mt fTnb, beibe alte unb neue ; aber jlebe^ 
n)ie er mit ber ©rf)rift fo oft (n)iemol)( geiiltid))^ fpielet, unb 
fie auger bem red)ten ©inn fut)rt* 2)erl)albeu l)aben and) 
bie ©opbiften gefagt : bie ®rf)rift fet) jtn(ler, b^^^tt gemei;^ 
net/ ©otte^ ^iSort fei) t)on 2lrt fo ftufler, unb rebe feltfant, 
2lber ffe feben nicf)t, bag after Mangel an ben ©prac{)en 
liegt,^ fonfl^ t^dre nidbt^ (eirf)ter6 je gerebet, benn ©ctte^ 
SGBort, n)o mir bie ©prarf)en t)er|liinben* @in Xiivh m\i^ 
mix n^obf jtnfter reben, tt)e[rf)en bod) ein tiirfifd) Mini Don 
ffeben Sabren n)obf t)ernimmt/ bien^eil id) bie Sprad)c 
nid)t fenne* 

£)arum ift ba^ and) ein totted SSornebmen gen^efen, ba^ 
man bie ®d)rift iiat molten fernen burd) ber SSdter 5(u^Ie^ 

* [Haben] oft gefehlet — gewesen [sind], "For even 
the holy fathers, as we have said, have often failed, and because they 
were not versed in the languages, they are very seldom agreed ; one 
goes this way, the other that." See on this last expression, p. 74, 
Note 7. 

* S c h i e r, almost. See p, 25, Note 5. 
^ Geistlich, spiritually. 

^ Haben gemeint, etc. " They have supposed that the word 
of God was (so) obscure in its nature, and speaks in (such) a singu- 
lar manner." 

^Dassaller Mangel an den Sprachen liegt, " tliat 
all the fault lies in the languages," i. e. ignorance of the languages 
is the cause. On this use of the preposition an, see p. 160, Note 4, 
med. 

® S o n s t, aside from t/iis, referring to Mangel, renders the 
close of the sentence a little tautological. ** But for this, nothing 
easier (sicnpler) could ever be spoken, than the word of God, if we 
understood the languages." 

7 Vernimmt, perceives^ is here used in the obsolete sense of 
understands. 



ADDRESS IN BEHALF OF PUBLIC SCHOOLS. 251 

geit, unb "oicl S5itd)er itnb 0foj]en ?efen.^ SRan foKte jTcf) 
bafiir auf bie ®pracf)en begebeu t)aben»2 ®enn hie lichen 
SSdter, n)cif ffe ol)ne (2prad)en geujefen jTnb, baben fie 
jutt)ei(cu mit mUn 28orten an etnem ©priirf) geartettet, 
unb bcitnocf) nxxv tamn f)tenad) geabmet,^ unb l)a(6 geratben, 
l)af6 gefebfet ©o (anfefl bu bemfefbtgen^ tiacf) mit meler 
gjiiibe, unb fonntejl: bien)ett burd) bte @pract)en bemfelben 
Diet befler felbjl vatijen, benn ber, bem bu folgejl. Seun 
tt)ie bie (Sonne gegen bem (gcf)atteu ijlf, fo ijl bie Spracf)e 
gegeu after SSdter ®(ojT^n* 

5Ceif benn nun ben Sbrijlten gebiibret, bie beilige ©dbrift 
ju iiben, aU ibr eigen einige^^ 53ud), unb eine ©i'mbe unb 

*Viel Bacher und Glossen Lesen is a substantive 
phrase, and Lesen itself governs v i e 1 in the accusative. " Read- 
ing many books and glosses." Comp. p. 68, Note 2. 

* S i c h — a u f — begeben haben, to have given themselves 
to. S i c h begeben, to give one's self, to put one's self, which is 
no longer used in a metaphorical sense, may generally be translated 
by to go, to resort. With the prepositions a u f , n a c h and i n it 
implies motion to, whereas with the genitive it indicates motion from, 
or the surrender of a thing. See p. 165, Note 7. 

^Hienach geahmet, approached it in resemblance. N a c h- 
a h m e n, for which hienach ahmen seems here to be used 
! with a slight modification, properly signifies to imitate. On g e r a- 
t h e n, see p. 38, Note 3. 

* Demselbigen, refers indefinitely to some one of the fathers ; 
and demselben, refers to Sprue h. Rathen with the da- 
tive, to arrive at, is unusual. " You pursue him (one of the fathers) 
with great trouble, and yet might, with the aid of the languages, 
yourself better reach your object, than he whom you pursue." 

^ E i n i g e s in the sense of e i n z i g e s. See p. 93, Note 2, and 

ijp. 149, Note 1. " Since, then, it is proper for Christians to use the 

1 Bible as their own [and] only book, and [since] it is a sin and shame 

that we do not know our own book, nor understand the language 

and word of God, it is the greater sin and shame that we do not learn 

ijthe languages, especially as God is now both oflTering and giving us 

'men and books and whatever else is serviceable to that end, and is 

I even inciting us to it, and would gladly have his book [made] open. ' 



tt 



252 SELECTIONS FROM LUTHER. 

©djanbe i% bag mx unfer eigen SSudt) nicftt VDiflen, nocf) 
unferg ©otte^ ©prad)e unb ?iBort iiicf)t fennen, fo i(l: c^ 
nod) ml me\)v ©iinbe unb ®d)anbe, ba^ n:)tr ntd)t (Spra^f 
d)en fernen, fonber(id), fo nn^ jegt @ott barbent, unb giebt 
geute nnb 93itd)er, unb atterlei ma^^ baju bienet, unb uniJ 
gfeid) baju reijet, unb fein S3nd) gerne n)oHte offen l)abcn* 
D n)ie frob foltten bte (ieben 93dter gen^efen fei)n, n)enn jTe 
l)atten fo founen jur b^ifig^n ©d)rift fommen unb bie gpra^? 
d)en (ernen, afg wir fonnten. 2Bie l)aben fte mit grower 
5iJJube unb ^fetg fanm bie 93roden erianget, ba tt>ir mit 
t)atber/ ja fd)ier obne alte 2(rbeit, ba^ g^nje S3rob gewin^ 
nen f onnten. D voic fd)dnbet ibr gtcig unfcre gautbeit, ja, 
n)te bcirt n)irb ®ott and) xixdjen fofd)cn unfern Unfleig unb 
Unbanfbarfeit 

2)aber2 geborct and), bag[ St* ^auhi^ 1. Sor. 14. wiff; 
bag in ber Sbri)lent)eit fott ba^ Urtbcil fet)n iiber allerlei 
?ebre, baju atter J)inge Don 9totben iflt, bie @prad)en ju 
n)ijfen* ®enn ber ^rebiger ober ?ebrer mag n:>ol)f bie S5ibct 
burd) unb burd) (efen,^ n)ie er tDiff, er treffe ober febfe, i 
n>enn 9?iemanb ba ifl, ber ba urtbeife, ob er e^ rect)t madie 
ober nid)t. ©oil man benn urtbeifen, fo mug ^unjl^ ber 
(Sprad)en ba fepn, fond ift e^ Derloreu- Sarum, obwobi 
ber ©laube unb ha^ (5t)ange(ium burd) fd)fed)te5 ^rebiger 

^ H a 1 b e r is an adjective agreeing with Arbeit in the dative. ; 
" Whereas we with half — or rather ahnost without any, labor, might 
obtain the whole loaf." 

* D a h e r, which commonly means hencc^ sometimes means hithef } 
or hcre^ as in this passage. 

^ L e s e n, here means the public reading and exposition of the [ 
Scriptures. " For the preacher or teacher may read [from the pulpit] . 
the whole Bible (or, the Bible through and through) as he choses, 
right or wrong (hit or miss), unless there be some one to judge ; 
whether he does it correctly or not." 

4 K u n 8 t. See p. 191, Note 1, and p. 193, Note 2. 

* Schlechte. The use of this word here, illustrates the con- 
nection between its two significations simple and bad or poor. Thi | 



ADDRESS IN BEHALF OF PUBLIC SCHOOLS. 253 

mag o()ne (2prarf)en geprebiget n^erben, fo gebef ^ bed) faixV- 
unb fd)tt)ad)/ unb man wixi julcfet miibe unb iiberbrii^ig, 
mib faKet bod) ju Soben. SIber vt>o bie ©prad)en jTub, ba 
get)et c^ frifd) unb jltarf, unb voixi tie (2d)rift burd)trteben^^ 
unb jitnbet ffd) ber ®(aube immer neu, bnrd) anbere unb 
aber anbere ^JBorte unb 2Berfe. 

a^ felt un^ and) ntd)t irren,^ ba^ (5tnd)e jTd) be^ ®ei(1:eg 
riibmen, unb bte (2d)rtft geringe ad)ten. @t(id)e and), tt)ie 
bie Sritber aSatbenfe^, bie (2prad)en nid)t nug(id) ad)tem 
2lber lieber ^reunb, ©eijl l)in, ©eift l)er/ id) bin and) im 
@et|l geVDefen, unb habe and) ®ei)ler gefeben (n:>enn'^ je 
gcften foK t)on eigenem gleifd) riibmen) t)ielteid)t mebr^ 
benn ehen biefelbigen nod) im 3abr feben n)erben, n)ie fall 
jTe and) fid) ruf)men* 2(ud) bat mein @ei)l ffd) etma^ be^ 
tt)eifet, fo bod) it)r ®eijl im SOBinfel gar fliKe ipt, unb nid)t 
Diel mel)r tbut, benn feinen 9?ul)m aufmirft. ©a^ n)eig id^ 
aber mot)!,^ n)ie fa(l ber ©eifl aUe^ attein tt)ut 2Sdre id) 

word simple has two significations connected in the same way. See 
p. 39, Note 5. 

' So gehet's doch f a u 1, etc. "still it goes on sluggishly 
and feebly, and one finally becomes weary and sick at heart, and falls 
to the ground." 

^ Durchtrieben, for durchgetrieben, carried through 
to the end as contrasted with " falling to the ground" before comings 
to the end. 

•^ Irren is sometimes, as here, used in an active signification, 
for which irre machen is commonly employed. 

*Geisthin, Geist her, "the spirit here and the spirit 
'i there," i. e. what signifies the spirit ? ft is all nothing. " I also 

Ihave been in the spirit, and have seen perhaps more spirits (if it is 
ever allowable to boast of one's own flesh) than these same persons 
' will see in a year, however much they boast. My spirit has also dis- 
played itself somewhat, while theirs is stock-still in its hiding-place 
and does little more tlian boast." Aufwerfen see, p. J 51, Note 5. 
^Dass weiss ich aber wohL Here Luther speaks more 
1 1 seriously of the spirit, referring to its ordinary influences, but still 
maintaining that spiritual influences without study, will not make 
22 



I 



254 SELECTIONS FROM LUTHER. 

bocf) atten S3ufd)en ju feme gemefen, too mir nicf)t bte Spra^ 
ct)en ge()olfen, unb micf) ber ®d)nft fict)er unb getvig gemacf)t 
t)dtteiu 3cf) f)a te aucf) n>ot)I fonnen fremm fei)n, unb in 
ber ©ti((e recl)t prebigen ; a6er ben ^ab)t unb bie ©epbijlen 
mit bent ganjen enbed)n)l:ifrf)en Diegiment n^i'trbe id) xvobl 
I)a6en laffen fet)n, wa^ jTe jTnb. ®er 2!eufet adjtet meinen 
®ei|li nid)t fo fajl, af^ meine ®prad)e unb geber in ber 
©cf)nft. S'enn mein ®eift nimmt tbm nid]t^, benn mid) 
atlein ; aber bie l)ei(ige (2d)rift unb ®pradt)en macben ibm 
bie 5Se(t ju enge, unb tt)ut il}m Sdbaben in feinem $Keid)e» 
©0 faun id) and) bie SSriiber 3Sa(benfe^ barinnen gar 
nid)t (oben, bag jTe bie ® :rad)en 'oevad)ten. Senn ob <Ie 
gfeicf) red)t lebrten/- fo miijfen ffe beef) gar eft be^ red)teji 
^Certe^ febfen, unb and) ungeritjlet unb ungefrfiicft bfeiben 
ju fed)ten fiir ben ©(auben wiber ben 3trtbum. Xa^n ifl 
i^r Sing fe pnfter/'^ unb auf eine eigene 2Beife gejegen, au^ 

one a sound teacher. " But 1 know full well, how the spirit does al- 
most everything. Still I should have been out of reach of my object 
(too far from the bush) had not the languages come to my aid, and 
made me sure and certain respecting (of) the Scripture. I might 
also have been pious, and have preached the true faith in sentiment." 

* G e i s t here does not mean talent, but spiritual gift or influence. 
— M eine Sprache und Feder in der Schrift, "my 
philology and my pen in connection with the Bible," i. e. his langua- 
ges or philology in studying the Bible and his pen in explaining and 
enforcing it. '• For my spirit (i. e. the grace of God in me) takes 
nothing but myself away from him ; but the Holy Scriptures and the 
[knowledge of tlie] languages drive him out of the world (make the 
world too narrow or uncomfortable for him) and inflict an injury 
upon his kingdom." 

* Recht lehrten, taught no heresy. Though their doctrines 
were correct, they necessarily failed very often in applying the right 
proof- texts. 

^Dazu ist ihr Ding so finster, etc. " Besides, their 
views are so unenlightened, and are represented under such peculiar 
forms, not following the language of the Scriptures, that 1 fear they 
are not, or will not continue to be right." This sentence will hardly 



ADDRESS IN BEHALF OP PUBLIC SCHOOLS. 255 

^cr ber ©cf)rift SBeife ju reben, bag tcf) beforge, eg fet) ober 
wcrbe nict)t fauter 6(ei6en. Scnn ed gar gefdt)r(idE) ijlt, t)Ott 
©otteg ©adien anicv^ reben, ober mit anbern SBorten, 
benn ©ott fel6fl braurf)et ^iirjlidv i^^ mogen bei t[)nett 
felbjl t)ei[ig lebeit nub (el)ren; aber mei( jTe obne (SpradE)ett 
bleibeit, tt)trb ibnen mangcln mnjTen, ba^^ atten anbern 
mangeft, ndmticf) : bag jTe bie Scf)rift gen)ig nnb griinblid) 
nirf)t l)anbe{n nod) anbern SSotfern nit^fid) fet)n mogen. 
5Geit jTe aber bag mobi fonnten tlnm, unb nid)t tbnn motten, 
mogen fie jufeiVn/^ n)ie eg Dor ®ott ju ^erantmorten fei). 

?iun bag fei; gefagP ^on 5tufeen nnb 9t0tt) ber Q5prad)en 
nnb d)rift{td)en ©d)n(en, fitr bag gei|lt(id)e 2Sefen nnb jnr 
Seelen S^cit 3l\\n faffet nng^ and) ben ?eib t)ornet)men 

admit of a literal translation. Ding does not mean cause or enter- 
prise^ which would be expressed by the word Sac he, but their 
whole character and manner, as uncultivated and partaking largely 
of cant. Finster, means dark^'i. e. not luminous, not enlight- 
ened ; d u n k e 1, durk^ i. e. not clear, obscure ; d Q s t e r, dark^ i. e. 
not cheerful, gloomy, melancholy. Without a nice observance of 
these synonymes, there would be a liability to misinterpret the wri- 
ter, and to understand him as saying that the Waldenses were vague 
in their thoughts and obscure (d u n k e I) in their language, like 
Bohtne, or that they were gloomy and sad (dttster), like some 
of the more rigid puritans. 

^ D a s, used like w a s, that irhich. See p, 15, Note 4. The neg- 
atives n i c h t and n o c h, seem hardly necessary after m a n g e 1 1. 
(The want or defect consists in not treating the Scriptures with cer- 
( tainty and thoroughness. Allen a n d e r n, a^^ other people^ — a 
complaint against the general neglect of the Scriptures. 
I * M o g e n s i e z u s e h e n, 'Met them see to it, how they are 
'to answer for it before God." 

^Das sei gesagt, "so much for the utility and necessity of 
the languages, etc." Literally, " let this be said," i. e. considered or 
i received as said. Hence a similar form is used in commands or 
(threats, meaning, " give attention to this." See p. 240, Note 3. 
j *Nunlassetuns, etc. " Now let us consider the body and 
I inquire (setzen, suppose, propose): though there were no soul 
nor heaven, nor hell, and [we] should regard merely the civil gov- 



256 SELECTIONS FROM LUTHER. 

imbfcfecn: cb fcf)on fcinc ©cefe tied) ^immet ober S)blU 
tt)dre, imb fodtcn aliein ta^ 5eit(id)e Dtegiment anfeben nach 
ber SBett, ob bajyc(6e nid)t bebiirfte t>ic(mebr gutcr Sd)ulen 
unb gelcbrtcr iente, bcnn bag @eifl(id)e? Scnn bibber 
ffd) bcjjclben bie (2ept)iil:cn fo gar nid)tg l)aben angenommen, 
imb bie (gd)u[cu fo gar anf ben geiiKidieu (Stanb gend)tet, 
bag gleid) cine ©d^anbe gen^efen ijl, fo ein ©efebrter ift 
ct)c(id) gcmorbcn, iinb bat mujTcn boren fagen : ffebe, ber 
mirb mclt(id), iinb n>itt nid)t gci|l(id) n>erben ; gcrabe, alg 
n>dre aKcin ibr geirt(id)er Stanb &ott angenebm, iinb ber 
n)eft[id)e (mie jTe ibn nennen) gar beg 2!enfelg unb un^ 
d)rifKid). 

Tain ill bier nid)t -yiDtb ju fagen, rvic bag tt)efrtid)e 9?egi^ 
ntent eine gottlid^e Drbnnng nnb Stanb ifl, bat)on id) fenfl 
ml gefagt b^be, bafi id) boffe/ eg j^reifett ?tiemanb baran, 
fonbern ift jn banbefn, mie man feine gefd)irfte ?ente barein 
friege. Unb bier bieten nng^ bie jpeiben einen gropen Zvo^ 

ernment in reference to the present world, whether this do not re- 
quire good schools and learned men, even more than our spiritual in- 
terests do. For hitherto the sophists (Papists) have not taken the 
least interest in it (z e i 1 1 i c h Regiment), and have arranged the 
schools so exclusively for the priesthood that it has become a matter 
of reproach, if a learned man marries, and he has been obliged to 
hear it said, * Behold, he has become a man of the world, and desires 
not the clerical state,' as though their priestly condition alone were 
acceptable to God, and the secular classes, as they are called, be- 
longed to Satan, and were unchristian. On sich desselben 
angenommen haben, see p. 55, Note 2. 

* Dass ich ho f e, " so that I hope, no one will doubt respect- 
ing it." 

* K r i e g e. This word signifies properly to catch with the hand. 
In the sense of b e k o m m e n, to obtain^ as used here and often by 
Luther, it is now employed only in common life, among the unedu- 
cated. 

3 U n d h i e r bieten u n s, etc. " And here the heathen ofTt'r 
us a challenge and put us to shame." On the peculiar use of the 
word Trotz, see p. 120, Note 1. The force of the word must be 



ADDRESS IN BEHALF OF PUBLIC SCHOOLS. 257 

unb ©cf)inaif) an, bie t)or B^^t^^V fonberlicf) bie Dlomer uub 
©ricdjcn, gvir ntrf^t^ getDugt baben, ob fo(cf)er ©tanb ®ott 
gejte(e ebcr nicf)t, unb baben t^od) mit fofd)em' @rn(l unb 
g(cig bie jungcn ^tnaben unb ?Oiabdien laften (ebren unb 
aufjiehen, ba^^ fie bajn gefd)icft n)urben, ba^^ id) niirf) un^ 
ferer Shrij^cn fdiamen mug, vpenn id) baran gebenfe, unb 
fonbertid) unferer S^eutfd)cn, bie toiv fcgar ©torfe unb 
!lt)iere jTnb, unb fagen bitrfen : ja^ ma^ folfen bie ®d)ufett, 
fo man nid)t felt gei|"t{id) n^erben ? Sie tt)ir bod) tt)ijTen,2 
ober je n)ifien fetlen, anc ein notl)ige^ unb niil3lid)e^ 1^ing 
e^ i]i, unb @ott fo angenehm, mo ein ?5itrn:, ^err, D^atb^^? 
mann, ober \v>a^ vcgieren foU, gelet)rt unb ge[d)icft ifl:, ben=^ 
felben ©tanb d)rifttid) ju fitbren* 

^IQcnn nun gleid) (n)ie id) gefagt habe^ him ©eefe VDare, 
unb man ber ©d)ufen unb (Sprad)en gar nid)t bebitrfte, urn 
bcr £d)rift nnb ®otte^ n)i(ten, fo tt>dre bod)^ attein biefc 

variously expressed in English, according to the connection. — V o r 
Z e i t e n, see p. 113, Note 1. Here vor Alters might also be 
used ; but that would modify the representation, though the idea 
would remain the same. 

^ After solchem Ernst, the first d a s s refers to 1 e h r e n 
und aufziehen, and the second (d a s s i c h m i c h, etc.) to 
solchem. " That, when I think of it, 1 am ashamed of Christians, 
and especially of our Germans, who are very blockheads and brutes, 

, and can say, " pray, what is the use of schools, if one is not to be- 

I come a priest .^" Was sollen is explained p. 123, Note 2. 

^Die wir doch wissen, " who, notwithstanding, know, 
or ought to know, how necessary and useful a thing it is, and so (or 
how) acceptable to God, if a prince, lord, counsellor, or whatever 
else that exercises authority, is instructed and skilled in discharging, 

I in a Christian manner, the functions of the office." 

' ^ S o ware doch, etc. " still, for the establishment of the very 
best schools everywhere both for boys and girls, this, of itself, would 
be a sufficient reason, namely, that society (the woild), even for the 
maintenance of civil order, needs accomplished and well-trained 

I men and women." — Genugsam "that which can or may be 
enough;" genug, "that which is enough," may frequently be 
22* 



258 SELECTIONS FROM LUTHER. 

Urfacf)c gcnuflfam, bie aUerbcften ®d)u(en, fcette fi'ir ^nabcn 
itnb ^DiabAen, an alien Drten anf5iirict)ten, fcap bie ^iQclt 
and) ibrcn n>elt(ic{)cu Staub diiper(icl) ju l)altcn bed) bebarf 
feiner gefd)icfrer ^annev unb grauen, bag bie 5)ianner 
lt)oh( foniUeu vegicrcn ?anb nub ?eiite, bie graueu n)oM 
giehen unb balten fouiuen s>ani, jlinber unb ©efinbc. 
?tun fo(d)e ^JDtanner miijTeu au^ ^naben n)erben, unb foId)e 
grauen mii|Kn an^ ?!}?abd)en t^erben ; barum ijlt^ ju tt)un, 
bag man jtnaben unb 9[)cabd)enba5U red)t lebre unb aufjiebe. 
?tun babe id) obeu gefagt : ber gemeine ^lann tbut bier 
md)t^ JU, faun e^ and) nid)t, wili eg and) nid)t, tt)cig and} 
md)t^. giirflen unb .^erreu foUten eg tbuu ; aber jTe 
f)aben anf (2d){itteni ju fabren, ju trinfen unb in ber 
SOJummerei ju laufen, unb jTub betaben^ mit t)obett merffi^^ 
d)en @efd)afren beg JteKerg, ber ^iid^e unb ber jammer. 
Unb 06 eg (gt[id)e gerne tbciten, miijTen fie bie 2(nbern 
fdjeuen, bag fie nid)t fiir 5Jtarren ober ^lel^er gebalten n>er^ 
ben. 25arum xviii^ eg end), tiebe $)tatl)gberren, attein in 

used for each other. The adjective terinination s a m corresponds 
to the English ending able or ible. 

* S c ii 1 i 1 1 e n. This word, and the English words sled and sledge 
and the American word sleigh^ all have one common origin, and are 
only different dialectical forms, derived, probably, from the old Sax- 
on and Anglo-Saxon word s li d a n, to slide. The connection be- 
tween the words sled a.nd sleigh is indicated in Low German where 
the same word is sometimes written S 1 e d e, and sometimes Slee. 

^ Und sind beladen, " and are burdened with the high special 
(remarkable) duties (or employments) of the cellar, kitclien, ami 
chambor (drinking, eating and sleeping). And though some would 
be glad to do it (would gladly do it), they must stand in fear of the 
rest, lest they should be held as fools or heretics." Sc lieu en, to 
fear, to be sc he u, shy of. 

' Will, does not like w i rd with the infinitive, express mere fu- 
turity, but implies either that a person icills, or that circumstances 
rf^w//«J, a thing to be. See p 32, Note 2. — Euch allein in der 
JIand bU'iben, ** remain in your hands alone." On this use ot 
the dative (e u c h) see p. 18, Note 7, and Gram. p. 347 infra. 



ADDRESS IN BEHALF OF PUBLIC SCHOOLS. 259 

ber S^xni Ueiben ; il)v habt and) Dlaum unb gugi baju, 
bejTer bcnu gurlTen unb 5;^erreu* 
3a, fprid))! bu i^ eiu 3cglict)er mag feine (gobne unb 

^ R a u m u n d Fug. R a u m, like the English word space, is fre- 
quently used with reference to time. Fug, which may commonly 
be rendered by tiie word, rlgfit^ properly means propriety, i. e. a thing 
which it is proper for one to do, and which he therefore, and in that 
sense, has a right to do. A light which is founded in the nature of 
things or in law is Recht; a right which is derived from a special 
decision or decree is B e f u g n i s s. This last word comes from b e- 
fugen, to authorize, to empower . But Fug is derived from fU- 
gen, 1. to connect or join; 2. to connect so as to put a thing in its 
fitting or proper place. M i t F u ge in the old German is the same 
in sense as pdiS send, fitting. " Therefore, respected members of 
the city councils, this business must be left in your hands. You have 
the leisure for it and the right to it, better than princes and lords." 

^ J a, sprichst d u, etc. "But nay, say you. Each one may 

himself teach his sons and daughters, or discipline them. Reply. 

Yes, we see how it goes with teaching and training ! And even if 

discipline is carried to the highest point, and succeeds (turns out) 

well, it amounts to no more than that, in some measure (e i n we- 

nig), a forced and respectable mien is acquired (is there) ; in other 

respects (sonst) they nevertheless remain mere dunces, who can 

say nothing of this or that (or of one thing or of another), and are 

able neither to advise nor to aid any one. But if they should be 

taught and educated (if one should teach and educate them) in the 

schools or elsewhere, where there should be educated and well-bred 

instructors and instructresses, who should teach languages and other 

arts and history (histories) then they (the pupils) would learn the 

histories and maxims of all the world, how things went with this 

city, this kingdom, this prince, this man, this woman ; and thus they 

I would be able in a very short time (short time immediately) to con- 

1 template (apprehend) for themselves, as in a mirror, the character 

! (We sen), life, counsels, proposals, successes and failures of the 

whole world from the beginning. From this (daraus) they could 

j adjust their views, and with piety regulate themselves in the course 

, of the world (i. e. in life) ; and moreover (daz u) from the same his- 

I lories become \vise and prudent [as to] what is to be sought and 

I what avoided in this (outward) life, and advise and direct others ac- 

: cordingly. But the training which it is proposed to give at home 



260 SELECTIONS FROM LUTHER. 

Zbd)tcY n)obI fe(6er (el)rcu ober jTe jiel)en mit ^n(tjt. ^UxU 
rvoYt : ^a man ficbet mol)f, me <Td)'^ tebret uut) jiebet 
Unb menu bie S^^^^^t aiif ^ t)bd)\te gctrieben n^irb, unb mot)! 
gcrdtb, fo fomnU c^ nid)t tDeiter, benn bag ein roenig cine 
eingqtDiingenc unb ebrbare ©eberbe ba ifl ; fonfi: bfeiben 
e^ g[cid)rDobl eitel A^otjblorfe, bie wciev bieDon iicd) bat)on 
n>i(KMi ju fagen, Dftiemanb n)eber ratbcn itoct) b^lf^n fointen* 
9830 man fie aber (ebrete, nnb goge in ©cbulen ober [onjl., 
ba gelebrte unb siid)tige 9Keifter unb 9)^eirterinnen marcn, 
He ba ©pract)en unb anbere .f nnfte unb 5;^i(lorien lebreten, 
ba tt)iirben jTe l)oren bie ©efct)id)ten unb (2priict)e aKer 
5ffieft, roie e^ biefer ©tabt, biefem 9?eicf)e, biefem giirften, 
biefem 5Dianne, biefem ''Sieibe gegangen wave ; unb fonnten 
affo in furjer ^eit g(eirf) ber ganjen 2SeIt Don Slnbeginn 
SS3efen, ?eben, 3iatl) unb Sinfcblcige, ©elingen unb Ungelim 
gen fiir fid) faiJen, voie in einem ©piegel ; baraud fie benn 
ibren ©inn fd)iden, unb ffd) in ber 3Bett ?auf rid)ten fonm 
ten mit @otre^fnrcf)t, baju n)i6ig unb f(ug tDerben ani 
benfelbeu J?iftorien, xva^S ju fud)en unb ju meiben ware in 
biefem dugerlid)en ?eben, unb Jlnbern and) barnad) ratben 
unb regieren* Sie 3iJ*'"t)t aber, bie man babeim obne fo(d)e 
@d)u(en Dornimmt, bie n>ilt un^ \Deife madicn burd) eigene 
Srfabrung- (i[}e ba^ gefd)iebt, fo jTub wiv bunbertmaf 

without such schools, that would [attempt to] make us wise by our 
own experience. [But] before that would take place, we should die 
a hundred times, and should have acted (done everything) all our 
lives long inconsiderately ; for our own experience would require 
much time." — J a is explained p. 228, Note 3; Selber p. 103, Note 
3, end. — Sich's lehret und ziehet, literally, "how it teaches 
and trains itself," i. e. how teaching and training are performed. 
Compare p. 12d, Note I, end. — Ihren Sinn s c h i c k e n, literally, 
** to fix or adjust their sense," means " to form their views," or to 
acquire practical principles. — Zu meiden ware, "is to be avoid- 
ed." Compare p. 1:2, Note 3. — Geschiet and sind todt, the 
present for the fuliirt», is nmch more common in Gernjan than in 
English. See Gram. p. 308, (1). 



ADDRESS IN BEHALF OF PUBLIC SCHOOLS. 261 

tobt, itiib haien unfer Mcnlanc^ affeg im6efcacf)tig geban^ 
beft: benn ju cigener (grfabrung geboret t)ie( 3^^^- 

2i5ei( bcnn ba^ jiinge 5>o[f map lerfeni unb fpringen, obet 
je2 etmat^ jii fcf)ajfen babeit, ba e^ ?ii(l innen bat, unb ibm 
bavin nicbt ju it^ebvcn i)V ^^ and) ind)t gut tx>dre,bag man 
5(Ifci? iDcbrete; n^arum fcttte man benn ibm nicbt \old)e 
©cbufen juridbten, unb foldje ^unft t)or(egen ? ©internal 
et> jcfet t)on ©otte^ ©nabe allc^ al\o jngerii^tet ift, bag bie 
J^inber mit Sujlt unb ®pie( (ernen fonnen, e^ fei)en ©pra^ 

^ L e c k e n, old German, to leap and run. In modern German 
it is entirely out of use in this sense. 

2 J e, like the English word ever, (See p. 41, Note 2) has a vari- 
ety of derived significations which are difficult to be traced. Here, 
it is used nearly in the sense of d o c h. What is true always, or at 
any time (j e) is true in any case, or at leasts or certainly ; and so the 
signification approaches to that of doc h. Inje zu Zeiten 
(always at times), it means (at intervals, z u Zeiten) icithout any 
entire cessation. Hence the phrase, like j e b i s w e i 1 e n, signifies, 
now and then. It is frequently used as a mere particle of affirmation, 
meaning indeed, truly, resembling w o h 1, or j a, and may be en- 
tirely omitted in English. What is said, p. 16, Note 5, and p. 151, 
Note 2, on the use of j e for j a may be explained in this way. The 
following, though somewhat obsolete, may serve as examples. Das 
heurige Gewachs istje so reich als das vorige, 
"this year's crop is (indeed) as plentiful as the last year's." Das 
ist je ein Wunder-ding, " That is truly a strange thing." 
Das ist je gewisslich wahr, '' That is (indeed) certainly 
true." W i r m u s s e n j e b e k e n n e n, " We must indeed con- 
fess." Compare the force of the word ever, in whoever ; also in the 
word every, as illustrating derived but remote significations. 

^Ihm nicht zu wehren ist means, ei non resistendum 
est. Ist is impersonal ; zu wehren, ^o restrain, after ist (see 
p. 259, Note 2, near the end) governing the dative i h m, means " it 
is proper to restrain it," i. e. the youth. " Now since the young 
must leap and jump, or at least have something to do, because they 
desire it and ought not therein to be restrained, and it would not be 
well to check them in everything, why should we not provide for 
them such schools and lay before them such knowledge .''" 



262 SELECTIONS FROM LUTHER. 

d)ert ober aiibere ^iinfte ober 5;^i(lonen* Unb ifl je^t^ tticf)t 
mel)r tic S^btic unb ba^ gcgfeuer itnfcre (gitu(e, barinnen 
n)ir gcmartert finb ii6er ben Casualibus unb Temporalibus, 
ba mv hod) nid)t^, benn ettel nirf)tisJ (}c(ernet haben bnrc^ 
fo t)ic{ (grdupcn, 3^^^*^^!, 3(ngfl unb Sammcr. 9iimmt 
man bod) fo mi 3cit unb 93^iibc, bag man bie ^inbcr fpie^ 
(en auf Garten, fin(]en unb tanjen (ebrct ; tvarum nimmt 
man nid)t and) fo t>icf 3^'^^ bag man ffe tcfcn unb anberc 
^iinfte (el)ret, xvcii f[e jung unb miif^c], gcfdnrft unb lujlig 
bagu finb ? 3d) tebe fiir mid), iDcnn id) ^inbcr bdttc unb 
t)ermod)te eg, fie miigten mir uid)t aKein bie ©prad)en unb 
^iflorien boren, fonbern and) finc^en, unb bie 93?nfif mit 
ber ganjen ?[)?athematif fernen* ®enn \va^ ift bieg 5illed, 
benn eite( ^inberfpiel, barinneu bie ®ried)en ibre A'inber 
t)or ^eitcn erjogen, baburd) bod) iDunber gefducfre ?cute 
barauc^ gett)orben, ju atterfei bcrnad) tiid)tig ? 5^ tt>ie leib 
ift mir'g jel^t, bag id) uid)t mebr ^oeten unb 5;^if^orien gc^^ 

^Und istjetzt, etc. " And our schools are now no longer 
a hell and purgatory, in which we are tortured over cases and tense§, 
in which, by the way, we learned nothing but mere nothing by so 
much flogging, trembling, anguish and wretchedness. If men take 
80 much time and trouble to teach their children to play at cards, 
sing and dance, why should they not take as much time to teach 
(that they teach) them to read and other branches of knowledge, 
while they are young and have leisure, nre adapted to it and take 
pleasure in it? I speak for myself. If I had children [Luther wm 
not yet married], and were able, I would have them learn (they must 
learn for me) not only hinguagos and history, but singing and (in- 
strumental) music and the entire course of mathematics. For what 
is all this but mere children's play in which the Greeks in former 
ages trained their children, whereby wonderfully skilful people 
were made of them, afterwards capable of all sorts of things, flow 
Borry I now am, that 1 did not read the poets and histories more, and 
that no one taught me those. Instead of these, I was oblitrod to rend 
the devil's filth, the philosophers and sophists (the Aristotelian and 
scholastic philosophy) at great expense, labor and injury, so that 1 
now have enough to do to unlearn it." 



ADDRESS IN BEHALF OF PUBLIC SCHOOLS.. 263 

fefett [)a6e, unb mid) and) biefe{6eit 9tiemanb gelet)ret \)at. 
Unb babe bafiir miiffen lefen be^ Znxfcl^ Srerf, bie ^Icjiio^ 
fop()cn imb ®opbijl:en mit gro^en ,f eflen, Slrbeit unb ©cfja^ 
ben, ba^ id) geniig babe baran an^^ufegen> 

©0 fpricbjl bu : 3a, met fann feiuer Miniet fo entbe^^ 
ren,i unb aUe ju 3unfern jieben?^ jTe mujTen im 5?aufe ber 
Slrbeit tvarten^ K. Slntmort: Sft^^^ borf) and) nid)t meine 
gjjcinung, bag man foIrf)e ©d)ntett anrid)te5, tt)ie fte bi^t)er 
gen>efen jTnb, ba ein ^nabe jtt>anjtg ober brei^ig ^al)xc bat 
iiber bent 2)onat^ unb Sfleranber^ gelernet, unb bennod) 
nid)t^ gelernet. @^ tjl jej^t eine anbere 2BeIt, unb ge()et 

^ Entbehren, entrathen, missen and vermissen 

all signify to be without something. Entrathen means this sim- 
ply, and in the most general sense. Entbehren adds to that 
signification the idea of bearing, or suffering the want as an evil. 
These two words do not intimate whether that which is wanting was 
ever possessed or not. The other two words imply that there is a 
loss of what was once possessed ; and this loss when slightly felt or 
merely perceived, is expressed by missen; and when keenly felt 
by vermissen. 

^Alle zu Junkern ziehen. If no regard were paid to 
the German idiom, this phrase might be supposed to mean, " lead or 
conduct them all to [other] young gentlemen." But on z u see p. 
94, Note 2, and p. 104, Note 6 — " bring them all up as gentlemen.'* 
On the etymology of J u n k e r, see p. 58, Note 1, end. 

3 W a r t e n, see p. 224, Note 7. 

'* I s t's for e s i s t, see p. 16, Note 7. 

^ Anrichten, see p. 50, Note 2, near the beginning. 

^ D o n a t. " Among the later Roman grammarians is to be men- 
tioned Aelius Donatus in particular, who lived at Rome as teacher 
of grammar about the year 250 of the Christian era, who introduced 
a new method and whose book was used in the schools for more than 
a thousand years/' Schwartz, Geschichte der Erzie- 
hung, Vol. II. p. 200. 

^Alexander. " But the Grammar of the Franciscan monk, 
Alexander of Brittany, who flourished about 1250, written in hex- 
ameter verse and in rhymes and called Doctrinale, had the most in- 
fluence and was most used in schools. The pupils were obliged to 
learn it by heart from beginning to end." Schwartz. II. 201. 



264: SELECTIONS FROM LUTHER. 

anbcr^ ju^ ?D?einc 5(?eimntg2 iff, ba^, man hie ^wahn be^ 
ZaQc^ cine ©tiinbe^ ohcv ^wci ia\]c ju foliter Sd)u[e gehen, 
unt) niitt^ bcfto tDcnigcr bie aubere ^cit im .^aiifc fd)afcn, 
.^anbmerfe lernen, unb rooju man fie ijabcn rvill^ ba^ beibe^ 
niit cinanber gehe, tt)eit ba^ 3Sc(f juitg ift, unb gemartcn 
fainu ^ringen jTe bed) fonfl: voobl jebumaf fo t)ie( 3^it jn 
mit ^euld)en fd]ie^en, Salt fptcfeit, ?aiifen luib Dtammeln. 
Sllfo fann eiit UKagblem^ ja fo Diet ^eit l)a6en, bag fie 

^ Und gelietandersza, " and things go differently (now).'' 
See p. 130, Note 2. 

2 M e i n u n g, opinion, sentiment. It corresponds exactly in sig- 
nification with the verb, m e i n e n, which see, p. 47, Note 2. 

3 Des Tages eine Stunde, etc. This passage illustrates 
well the difference between the genitive and accusative when they 
designate time. Des Tages, signifies at some point, during 
some part, or within the day. Eine Stunde means, an hour 
long, ox for an hour. " My view is that one send (1 a s s e g e li e n) 
boys to such a school one or two hours a day, and yet make them 
work (lasse schaffen, the rest of the lime, learn some employ- 
ment (manual exercise) and [do] whatever one shall wish, that both 
[study and labor] may be carried on together, while the children 
(folks) are young and can attend to them. They spend now (sonst 
otherwise, i. e. not in school, or as they now are) ten times as much 
time in shooting with cross-bows, in playing ball, in running and 
tumbling about." Schaffen, to do, pioperly governs etwas, 
whicli was omitted, in familiar style, as it is now in the South of 
Germany. It tiien corresponds to our word work, as familiarly 
used in common life. Und wozu man sie haben will, 
is elliptical, " and [attend] to wliatever one will have them," or 
desires them. Gewarten when, as here, it means, "to at- 
tend to any business," requires the genitive ; which is understood, 
or to be supplied in this sentence. Compare warte five or 8i.x 
lines below. The word also means, to expect, to wait for. B r i n- 
g e n — z u (z u b r i n g e n) to pass, or spend time. K e u 1 c h e n, 
a dart^ nr omnr^ a diminutive of K c n 1 <% a club, is not in commo/i 
use. 

< Mf\g(il('in, girl, the obsolete dininuitive of Magd. The 
modern word is M a d c h e n. 



i 



ADDRESS IN BEHALF OF PUBLIC SCHOOLS. 265 

be^ Xac^e^ cine ©tmtbe jur (2rf)iife gcl)e,i itnb bennorf) i\)xe^ 
®c]d)aft^ im ipaufe tvohl marte ; jTe t)erfrf)ldft2 unb t)ertanjt 
e^, uub tjcrfpielet bod) n)ol){ ntebr 3^if* ®^ febfet aHeiit 
baran,3 bag man nirf)t ?u(l nod) Srnil bajn \)at^ ba^ jnnge 
SSo(f jn jieben, nod) ber 2Be(t jn betfen unb jn ratben mit 
feinen Lenten, ^er Znxfd hat t)ie( fieber grobe 95(o(fe unb 
unnitlse ?ente, bag e^ ben 5JJenfd)en fa ntd)t fo n)ot)t ge^e 
anf grben, 

^iQeld)^^ abet ber Stu^bnnb^ barunter n)dren, ber mem 
ftd) tjerbojft^, bag e^ gefd)irfte ientc foKen VDerben ju ?ebrern 
unb ?ebrerinnen, ju ^rebigern unb anbern get|l(id)en Stents 
tern, bte foil man beflo mebr unb Icinger babei faflfen, ober 
felbjl ganj baju t)erorbnen. 28ie wiv (efen t)on ben \)exlU 

* Dass sie — gehe, " that she may go," or, as we should say 
in English, " as to go." 

-Sie verschlaft, etc. " She sleeps it (the hour's time) 
away, and dances it away, and plays away (consumer in play) more 
time." On the force of the prefix, v e r, see Gram. p. 250,^ 1, and 2» 

'Es fehlet allein daran, etc. " Herein alone lies the 
difficulty (fault) viz. that we have no desire nor solicitude to educate 
the young, nor to aid mankind (d e r Welt) and to benefit them 
with accomplished citizens " Ra t he n is often coupled with he 1- 
f e n and has a similar signification ; which comes from the idea of 
helping one out of difficulty by giving good counsel. 

* W e I c h e, what persons, \. e. "such persons among them aa 
would be a choice selection, etc." See p. 239, Note 3. 

* Ausbund literally means a specimen or pattern which shop- 
keepers put out (a u s) for show, and bind or fasten (b i n d e n) upon 
a frame. As such specimens are generally the best of their kind, the 
word has come to signify commonly a choice or selection. When ap- 
plied to anything bad, it means the worst of the kind. 

®Der man sich verhofft, " of whom one entertains the 
hope that they will become suitable persons for instructors and in- 
structresses, preachers and other clerical offices, these we ought to 
retain (leave) there so much the more, and the longer, or even direct 
^ them wholly to this employment," etc. D e r, for derer in the 

I genitive plural, is governed by sich verhoft. The construction 

II ift obsolete. 

I! 33 



266 SELECTIONS FROM LITTHEK. 

gen 5!}?drti)rent, bie St. 3(gneo unb 2(gata iinb ?nctan bit 
berg(eirf}cn aufgejocjcn babcn; bal)er aiict^ bie ^ttofler unb 
©tifte gcfommen jTub, a&er nun gar in cincn aiibcrn t)er^ 
bammten 53raiicf) t)erfel)ret* Unb ba^ wili and) n>oh( 9iotf> 
fci>n, benn bcr bcfcf)orene ^;^aiife nimmt febr ab : fo ifl and} 
ber gropere !J!bei[ imtitcf^tig ju febren unb ju regiercn; bcim 
jTe fonnten ind)t^ cbne be^ Saud)^ pP^gen, tt>efd]e^ man 
and) ^e aHein gefebret bat* ®o miijTcn nnr ja ?cnte babcn, 
bie nn^ @otte^ 5Bort nnb ©acramente reid}cn, nnb Sccfcus^ 
carter jTnb im So(f* ^iBo tvoUcn wir jTe aber ncbmcn, fo 
man bie ©d)n(en t)ergeben fci^t, nnb nid)t anbere d)rifKid)ere 
anfrid)tet ? ©internal bie ©d)n(cn bibber gcbalrcn, eb 
jle gfeid) nid)t t^ergiengen, bed) nid)t^ gcben mogen, benn 
eitef Derforene, fd)abfid)e 35erfii[)rer* 

Sarnm e^ \jo\^c yioth i(lt/ nid)t altcin ber jungcn ?cnte 
{)atben, fonbern and) beiber nnferer ©tanbe, gciftlidien nnb 
n)eltlid)en, jn ert)alten, bag man in nnferer ^ad)e mit @rn|l 
nnb in ber 3eit bajn tbne, anf bag n>ir'^ nidit binten nad), 
njenn wir^^ t)f rfainnet babcn, t?icl(cid)t miiflfcn fafTen, ob 
mx'6 benn gerne tbnn ^Dolttcn, nnb nmfiMiil ben a^culiiig 
un^ mit ©d)aben beigen laflfcn ewig(id). ©ebet an jnm 
(Srempcf, n^etd)' cincn grogcn ^kifi bcr .^onig SafoniD 
l)ierinnen getl)an bat,^ n)ie l)at cr fict) be^ jnngen a>o(fe^ 

'Darum es hohe Noth ist, etc. " Therefore there is 
an urgent necessity, not only on account of the youth, but in order 
to sustain both of our orders, the spiritual and tlie temporal, that men 
take hold of this our cause with earnestness and in season, lest after- 
wards, when we have neglected it, we should be obliged to omit it, 
though we would be glad then to attend to it, and should, to no pur- 
pose, forever cause remorse to gnaw us to our detriment. Z u e r- 
h a 1 1 e n is used in the sense ofum zu erhalten. Hinten 
n a h, means after n tfiinir is done, or when it is too late. Hinten 
d r e i n is used in the same sense. II e u I i n g, for R e u e is en- 
tirely out of use. 

'Gethan hat, vscd. This word is often employed in connec- 
tions where neither to do, nor to make, could be employed in English. 



ADDRESS IN BEHALF OF PUBLIC SCHOOLS. 267 

angettommcu/ ba^ er nuter feineit fonigItrf)eit ®efd)aften 
and) ciit ^nd) fitr ia^S juitge aSo(f gemarf)t i)at^ ia^ ia^ 
beipet Proverbiorum, Uub Sbrijlu^ fctbjlt, VDie jiebt er bie 
jungcu ^inb(ein ju jTd) ? SGie fleipig beftel){et er fTe un^, 
unb ritbmet and) bie (gngef, bte i[)rer tt>arteu^ ^attl). 18*; 
bap er mxS anjeige, mie eiii groger Sienft^ e^ ijl, ttjenn man 
ba^ jiinge 25o(f mobf jiebet: tt)ieberum, n)ie grdutirf) er 
giintet, fo man jTe drgert uiib Derberfeen la\Jct. 

Sarum^ Iie6e ^^erru, i(i]f^t end) bag SKerf angetegen^ 
fei)n, bag ©ott fo l)ed)^ t)on end) forbert, bag eiier Stmt 
fdni(btg ifl:, bag ber ^ng^nb fo ?totb ijl, unb bag meber 
28e(t nod^ ®ci\t entbebren fann* 5Bir f[nb (eiber (ange 
genng en ginjl:ernip i^erfaufet unb t)erbor6eu, n)tr jTnb aU^u, 
lange genng^ beutfd^e Se|lien ge\t)efen. ?aflet ung and) 
einmaf tie Sernunft 6raud)en, bag ®ott merfe bie Sanf bar^? 
feit feiuer ©itter,^ unb anbere ?dnber feben^ ha^ toix and) 
^5Jenfd)en unb iente finb, bie etn^ag 9ti't^(id)eg eutvt)eber 
t)on ibnen (ernen ober f[e febren fonnten, bamit and) burd) 
ung bie 2Beft gebeffert n^erbe. 3d) babe bag 5!Keine gett)an, 
id) mottte ben bentfdjcn ?dnbertt gerue geratl)en unb gebof^ 
fen t)aben/ ob mid) gfeid) <2t(idie baritber tt^erben t)erad)ten^ 

In such cases, it may be rendered by, to use^ to exercise, to appty^ 
etc. Compare p. 20, Note 3. 

^ Sich des jungen Volkes angenommen. See p. 
1 55, Note 2. 

* D a s da. See p 43, Note 4, end, and Gram. p. 157, infra. 

^ Wie ein grosser Dienst. The German does not allow 
^ the article to follow the adjective except in exclamations, as in the 
English how great a service. 

* Angelegen. See p. 70, Note 2. 
^ Hoch. See p. 152, Note 4. 

^ Genug is redundant here. 

' Dankbarkeit seiner Gater, " that God may observe 
I [*'' "s] gratitude /or his mercies." 

* Gerathen und geholfen haben. See p. 265, Note 3. 



268 SELECTIONS FROM LUTHER. 

unb feW)cn tnien dlath in 2Binb fd)fagen,i iinb tefTcr n?iffen 
tt)ottcn, baii muf^ trf) gcfd)ct)cn (ajT^n^^ 3d) n)eig tDobt, bag 
e^ Stnberc foniUcn bcjTcr aui^gerid)tet haben, abcv trcil jle 
fdwcigen, rid^te id)'^ a\\^^ fo gut al^ id)^^ fann* @^ i|t je 
bejjer baju gerebct, tt)ie nngcfdiirft e^ and) fei), benn alter 
2)ingc3 ba^en gefd)n)iegen. Unb bin ber i^offnung/ (yott 
tDcrbe je eiirer @t(id)c ern)ecfen, bap mein treiier dxath nid)r 
gar in 3lfd)e fa((e, nnb n^erben anfeben nid)t 1>en, ber e^ 
gerebet, fenbcrn bie Qad)e fctbjl^ bewegen, nnb fid) bewegen 
lajTen* 

Sunt le^tcn^ \]t and) ba^ n)ol){ ju bebenfen atten benjenu 
gen, fo ikbc nnb ?nfi: baben, ta^ fe(d)e Sd)n(en nnb gpra^ 
d)en in bentfd)en ?dnbern anfgerid)ret unb erbaltcn merben, 
ba^ man g-feig nnb Soften nid)t fpare, gnte ?ibercien nnb 
S5iid)erl)anfer, fonberlid) in ben gro^en Stabten, bie fe(d)e^ 
n)ol)( tjermogen, ju t)erfd)affen* I^enn fo ba^' (gt)ange{inm 

» I n W i n d s c h 1 a g e n. See p. 202, Note 2. 

* Dass muss ich geschehen lassen, "to that 1 must 
Bubmit." 

3 A 1 1 e r D i n g e, wholnj. See p. 240, Note 4. Geredet — 
geschwiegen [zu haben]. 

"♦Bin der Ho fFn u n g, am of the hope, or entertain the hope. 
Compare p. 68, Note 3. 

^ Die Sache selbst, etc. " agitate the subject itself* and be 
moved by it," — a very pecuhar form of expression. 

•Zum letzten, etc. " Finally this must be considered by all 
those who have a solicitude (love) and desire that such schools 
ghoulcl be established and such languages preserved in the Gernian 
states, that one should spare neither labor nor expense to procure 
good libraries, and buildings to contain them, especially in large 
cities, which can well afford it." 1st das zu bedenken al- 
ien denjenigen, is highly idiomatic. The dative points out 
the persons who ought to consider, as in the Latin, id omnibus con- 
sidrranduvi est. 

' Denn so das, etc. "For, if the gospel and knowledge of 
every kind are to be preserved (to remain), they must be embraced 
in and attached to books and writings." 



I 



ADDRESS IN BEHALF OF PUBLIC SCHOOLS. 269 

unb atterfei Minx^ felt b(ei6en, mii^ e^ je in S5iirf)er imb 
Srf)rifreu i)crfajTet unb anc^ebiiubcn fcpn ; tt)ie tie ^ropt)ei5 
ten unb 3{pc|lel felbft getban baben, at^ icf) broben gefagt 
habe, Unb ba^ nid)t alicin barunt, ba^ biejenigen, fo un^ 
geiftlicf) nnb n^ettlid) Dorftebcn;, fotten gu (efen- unb ju f^ubf:^ 
ren baben : fcnbcrn bag and) bie gnten 33ucf)er bcbatteu 
unb nid)t t^ertoren tDerben, fammt ber ^unft unb ©prarf^e, 
fo rviv jegt Don ©Cttci^ ©nabc baben* 5;)iennnen ifl and) 
gt, ^^anfn^ fletgig gett^efen, i)a er Jimotbeo beftebft : „@r 
fo((e anbaften am ?efen/' nnb and) beftebft : ,^@r foUe ba^ 
^ergament, ba^ er jn U^reaba getajfen, mit ffd) brtngen/' 

3a, fofd}e^2 t)aben jtd) beflijfen atte ^tonigreid)e, bie cMa^ 
fonberiid^e^ gemefen f[nb, unb jui^or ba^ ifraelitifd]e 25oIf^ 
unrer roeld^en fo(d)e^ ffierf 93?ofe anfteng, ber erjie, unb 
t)ie§ bay ©ud) bc^ ©efe^e^ in bie ?abe ©Dtteg t)ertt)af)ren, 
unb that e^ unter bie I^^anb ber ?ev)ii:en, bag man bei benfet^; 
ben fottte l}ofen 2(bfd)riften, n^er e^ bebiirfe, a(fo, ba^ er 
and) bent ^onige gebeut, er foffe wn ben ?emten foId)e^ 
S5ud)e^ 2ibfd)rift nebmen* Sag man n)ol)( ffebet, me ®ott 
ba^ ?et?itifd)e ^rieilertbum unter anbern @efd)aften and) 
ia^n i)erorbnet bat, bag fie ber S3iuter bitten unb xcavten 
foHten* 9tad)bem bat biefe Siberei gemebret unb gebejfert 
3ofua, barnad) ©amuef, Sat^ib, Salomo, 3^fcij^^/ unb fo 

*Sollen za les en, etc. " should have something to read and 
to study." See p. Ill, Note 3, and p. 151, Note 3. 

^Solches is in the genitive. ** All kingdoms which have been 
distinguished, have bestowed care upon this (such) ; and first of all 
the Israelites, among whom Moses was the first to begin such 
a work, and commanded [them] to preserve the book of the law in 
the ark of God, and put it under the care (hand) of the Levites, that 
from (by) them persons should procure (go and get) copies, whoever 
needed them. He even commands the king (so that he commands 
the king) to take of the Levites a copy of this book. Thus one may 
see (so that one may see) that (how that) God directed the Levitical 
priesthood, to this among other duties, namely that they should pre- 
fidfve, and give attention to the books. 

23* 



270 SELECTIONS FROM LUTHER. 

fortan i)ie( me()r ^onige uub ^ropbcten* S^al)er ift gcfom^ 
men bie beitige gd^rift be^ atteii Xejlament^, tt>cld)e fiMifl 
nimmermebr n>are jufanimengebrad)!^ eber gcblicben, too 
&on nirf)t bcitte fo(d}cn glcip baraiif l)ei^eu habeiu 

2^em (Jrempet nact)^ l)a()cn and) bic Stifte unb ^(6(ler 
t)or 3^'f^'J^ ?ibereieu aiigcrirf)tet, n)ic)t)ob( mit VDcnig guten 
S5iid)ent. Unb tva& e^ fiir (2d)aben getl)an l)ar, bag man 
ju ber 3^it nid)t barob gcbaften bat, S5nd)er unb gnte ?ibe^ 
teien jn Derfd)ajfcn, ba man Siid)er unb ?cnte genng bajn 
^atte, ift man barnad) n)obf gen^abr n^erbcn, bap leibcr mit 
ber ^Ht bat)in gefaUen (Tnb atle Simile nnb (5prad)en, unb 
anftatt red)tfd)ajfenen a3nd]ern bie toUen, nnniifecn, fd)dt^ 
nd)en ?|}Jond)bnd)Cr Catholicon, Florista, Graecista, Laby- 
rinthus, Dormi secure, nnb berg[eid)en t)om Itenfel einge^ 
fiibret jTnb, bag bamit bie fateinifd^e (£prad)e jn 35eben ijl 
gegangen, nnb nirgenb^ feine gcfd)trfte Sdnde, nod) ?cl)rc, 
nod) ^iBcife jn (tnbiren i|lt iibriggebliebcn* Unb tme rvix er^ 

* Zusarnmengebracht [werde n], etc. " which would 
otherwise never have been collected, or have been preserved (re- 
mained) if* God had not required (commanded) such diligence [in re- 
gard] to it.*' 

* Dem Exempel n a c h, etc. " After this example did the 
collegiate churches and convents formerly found libraries, although 
with few good books. And what harm it has done, than men were 
not at that time intent upon procuring books and good libraries, when 
there were books and persons enough for that purpose, was after- 
wards perceived, namely, that, in tin)e, all the arts, and languages 
declined, and, instead of good books, the senseless, useless, and infect- 
ing books of tlie monks, the catliolicon, Florista, Graecista, Labj- 
rinthup, Dormi secure, and the like were introduced by Satan, so that 
the Latin language was destroyed by them, and neither good schools, 
good instruction nor good modes of study remained." Da rob 
(d a r « b e r) h a 1 1 e n. Sec p. 231), Note 2.— D a h i n g e f a 1 1 e n, 
fallen (un/iy. On the use of d a h i n, see p. 80, Note 1. The mo- 
nastic productions here censured were miserable school books, lexi- 
cons, graniiiiiirs, etc. with these quaint titles. 



ADDRESS IN BEHALF OF PUBLIC SCHOOLS. 271 

fahvcn^ unb gefe{)ett t)a6en, bag mit fo Diet 5[)iiit)e itnb 9J[r^ 
bcit man bic Sprad)cn imb ^unft bennod) gar uuDeUfom^ 
men aihS ctiid)en 23rocEen unb ©tiicfen after ©nd)er au^ 
bent ©taube unb ben 5ffinrmern n^ieber berDorgebrad^t b^t, 
unb ned) tdglid) baran fnd)t unb arbeitet, gleid)n)ie man in 
einer jcrflorten ©tabt in ber 5(fd)e nad} ben (£d)d§en unb 
^tcinobien grdbet. 
Darin ijt nn^ and) red)t gefd)ebert/2 unb ©ott f)at unfere 

* U n d w i e w i r e r f a h r e n, etc. This is an irregular con- 
struction. U n d properly connects dass rait so viel Miihe 
with dassdamit die iateinische Sprache in the preced- 
ing sentence, which with the clause, dass lei der mit der 
Z e i t, depend on the words gewahr worden. 

2 Darin ist uns auch rechtgeschehen, etc. There- 
in we have received our just due, and God has paid us well (r e c h t 
wo hi, nV/i^ z/;e/Z) for our ingratitude, in that we did not consider 
his benefits, and make provision at the proper time (when it was 
time) and when we easily might, with which to have kept in posses- 
sion of good books and learned men, but let it pass, as though it did 
not concern us. So did he [to us] in turn, and suffered, instead of 
the Bible and good books, Aristotle and numberless pernicious books 
to come into vogue, which only led us farther and farther (i m m e r 
w e i t e r) from the Bible. To these [were added] Satan's grim vis- 
ages, the monks and the university ghosts, which we founded at an 
inhuman expense, and [besides these,] many doctors, preachers, mag- 
isters, priests and monks, i. e. great, coarse, fat asses, adorned with 
red and brown caps, like swine led by a golden chain provided with 
pearls, and we have burdened ourselves with these, who have taught 
us nothing useful, but made us more and more blind, and senseless, 
and as a reward (d a f ii r) have consumed all our property, and have 
filled all the cloisters, and indeed every corner (sammelten alle 
Kloster, ja alle Winkel voll) with the dregs and filth of 
their dirty, noxious (poisonous) books, on which one cannot think 
without horror (on which it is horrid to think)." Jst uns recht 
geschehen, corresponds to our phrase " It, or he served him 
right;" and Es geschiet ihm Unrecht, to, "Injustice is 
done him." — Als gienge es uns nicht an. Angehen, 
is explained p. 234, Note 2. — S o that er wiederum. This 
last word often indicates reciprocity, whereas w i e d e r without the 



272 SELECTIONS FROM LUTHER. 

Unbanf6arfcit rerf)t u^ohl 6ejal)fet, ba^ voiv tticf)t 6ebad)tcn 
fcine 3BohItbat, unb syorratl) fct)afften, ba eg 3^i<^ ^i^^t, imb 
n)cb( fonnten, bamit tt)ir gate 33iic{]er unb gc(et)rte ?cute 
hdtten bel)a(ten, unb liegeu eg fo fal)ren, afg gieiige eg ung 
tiicf)t an ; fo that er and) tt>iebernm nnb Iie§, anftatt ber 
Ijeiligen ©dirift nnb gnter 23nd]er, ben ^riftote(eg femmen 
mit nnjd[)(tgen fd)ablid)en S3nd)ern, bie nng nnr innner 
voeitcv t)on ber S3i6el fitbreten ; bajn bie ;tenfe(g[art)en, bie 
5i)iond)e nnb ber ^oben[d)nIen ©efpenft, bie n^ir mit un^ 
nien[d)Iid)em @nt geftiftet, nnb Diefe 2^octoren, ^rebicato^ 
ten, ?!Kagi|ler, ^fajfen nnb 5[yjond)e, bag ijT: groge, grebe, 
fette (ijfef, mit rotben nnb brannen SSaretten gefd)mitcft, n)ie 
bie (5dne mit einer gotbnen ^ette nnb ^erle ert)aften, nnb 
anf nng felbjl gelaben baben, He nng nid^tg ©nteg lebre^ 
ten, fonbern nnr immer met)r b(inber nnb tolfer mad)ten, 
unb bafiir att' unfer @nt fragen, nnb fammeften nnr beg 
2)redg nnb SiJiifteg ibrer unfldtigen, giftigen 93nd)er aKe 
^lofter, ja aik 2GinfeI Dolt, baran graiilid) jn benfen ifl* 

Sft'g nid)t ein elenber jammer bigber gemefen, ba^ ein 
^nabe bat miijTen^ Jtranjig Sabre eber Idnger (Inbiren, aU 
Uin^ bag er fo Diel bofeg Sateinifd) bat gelernt, bag er 
med)te ^fajfe n)erben unb 5}iejfe (efcn ? Unb tt)e{d)er ba^ 
l)in gefommen iff, ber i)l felig geit^efen, fcfig ift bie 5i)tntter 
gemefen. bie ein fo(d)eg Jlinb getragen l)at. Unb ill bcd)^ 

addition of u m expresses repetition merely. For this force of u m, 
see p. 133, Note 1 . — D es Drecks is governed by v o 1 1, and 
the whole phrase alle Kloster, ja alle Winkel voll, 
as the object of the verb samnielten expresses a measure or 
quantitij. 

* Hat mOssen, has been obliged. See p. 148, Note 3. 

*Und ist doch, etc. " And yet he has continued to be a 
poor, ignorant man all his life long, who has been good for nothing 
either to cluck or to lay eggs. Z u m belongs not to E i e r (for 
d e tn in z u in or z u d e in could not belong to a plural noun) but 
to lege n. The article is used because the infinitive here absames 
the nature of a substantive, — cgfr-latjing. Sec p. 14, Note 3. 



ADDRESS IN BEHALF OF PUBLIC SCHOOLS.. 273 

cirt armer, itn(5cfet)rtcr 9i)Jenfcf) fern Sebenraitg gebfieteit, ber 
VDeber jit gUicfen, nod) jam dicx legen getaugt bat ©old)e 
?el)rer nub ?Oieijler baben tx)ir miiflfen attentbatben baben, 
bie fefbjl nid)t^ Qcfonnt^ uub nid)t^ ©ute^ nod) D?erf)te^ b^^ 
ben mogen (ebrcn, fa and) bie SQSetfe nid)t gen)u^t, n>ie man 
bod) (erneu unb (ti)ren foffte. 2Sa^ i^l bte (2d}utb ? @^ 
finb feine anbere S3iid)er t)orbanben gen)efen, benn fo(d)e 
toKe gjWnrf)^:^ iinb ^o)(^l)iitQn^^nd)ev. 3Ca^ foltten benn 
anberi^ barau^ a>evben, benn eirePtotte ©cbitfer nnb ?ebrer, 
it)ie bie SSiicber n)aren, bie fte tebreten ?3 @ine S^obfe becfet 
feine !i;anbe, nnb ein yiaxx mad)t feinen ^higen. 2)a^ ifl 
ber ioijn ber Unbanfbarfeit, ba^ man nicbt t)at g(ei^ an 
?ibereien gett)enbet, fonbern bat bie gnten S3iicf)er t5ergel)en 

i (ajien nnb bie nnniigen bebalten. 

Slber mein 9?atb i|l nid)t, bag man o[)ne Unterfd£)ieb atter^ 
lei 33iicber jn ^;^anfe rajfe, nnb nicbt met)r gebenfe, benn 
niir anf bie QKenge nnb ben ^anfen ber 23iid)er. 3d) vt)olfte 

' bie 5Babf barnnter baben, bag^ eg nid)t 9totl) fet), atter Sn^^ 
rij^en Comment, alter Xl)eo[ogen ©ententiarien,^ nnb alter 
^bifofopben Dnejlionen nnb aller Wdnd)e ©ermone jn fam^* 
me(n. 3a id) tDoUte fo(d)en 5iKifl ganj an^flogen, nnb mit 
red)tfd)affenen 95iid)ern meine ?iberei t)erforgen, nnb ge:^ 

I Icl)rte ?ente baritber jn D?atb nebmen. 

'^ (Srftlid) folCte bie l)eilige (2d)rift beibe anf ?ateinifd), 
- ®ried)ifd), Sybvai^d) nnb Sentfd), nnb cb jTe nod)^ in mel)r 

^ G e k o n n t, known. See p. 221, Note 4. 

II « Eitel- See p. 10, Note 4. 

|i ''Die sie lehreten. Grammatically, either die or sie 
!j might be the nominative ; but both usage and the sense require d i e 
to be the nominative. 
'* D a s s, because. 
]'■ * Sententarien. Sententiarier (sententiarii) were those 
I who wrote Sententiarien (sententiaria) on the Sentenzen 
H (sententiae) of Peter Lombard us. 
' ^Und ob sie noch, etc. " and if it be still in other langua- 



274 SELECTIONS FROM LUTHER. 

©pracben noavc, barinnen fepn. S^arnad) tie bef^cn 5Iu^^ 
fe(]er iinb bie 2(cltc(^cn, teibc ©riccl)ifd}, §ebrdi[d) unb ia^^ 
tcinifd), xvo id) jTe finben fonute* 

Earnad) fo(d)c S3iid)er, bie gu ben (Sprad)en ju (ernen 
biencn/ ai^ bie ^oeten unb Dratoren, md)t an^qefeben/^ ob 
fie i^eibeu ober Cbrijlteu u^dren, gried)ifd) eber (ateini[d)» 
Senn an^ foldien mii^ man bie Grammatica lernen, 

Earnad) foKten fepn bie 95iid)er wn ben freien ^iniflen, 
unb fonft t)en aUen anbern ^iuiften* 

Bnlel^t and) Snd)er ber dlcdjic unb 2(rjnei, unemol)( and) 
^ier nnter ben Sommenten eine gnte ffi^abl nothig i]l. 

^it nnter ben iJornebmrten aber foUten fepn bie (^brcni^ 
fen nnb i^iflorien, «>efd)er(ei (2prad)en man baben fonnte :^ 
benn biefelben^ njunbernit^Iid) jTnb, ber 5ffie[t ?anf ju er? 
fennen nnb jn regieren, ja and) ®otte^ 2Bnnber nnb IBcrfc 
jn feben. £) mie mand)e feine ®efd)id)ten^ nnb Spriid)e 
follte man jegt baben, bie in bentfd)en ?dnbern ge[d)eben 
nnb ergangen finb, beren voir jel^t gar feined tDijTcn. Eai^ 
mad)t :6 5Jtiemanb ifl ba genjefen, ber jTe befd)rieben, ober 
ob jTe fd)on7 befd)rieben gen)efen n)dren, 9iiemanb iic S8iu 

ges," is elliptical for, " and in other languages, if it existed in any 
other." 

*Diezuden Sprachenzu lernen dienen, a pe- 
culiar expression, " which serve for the languages to learn (them). ' 

* Angesehen. See p. 15, Note 8, and p. 7, Note 6. 
^Wclcherlei Sprachen man haben konntefor 

in welch erlei Sprachen man sie haben konnte. 

*Denn dieselben, etc. " for they are wonderfully n^rful 
for learning and regulating the course of the world." 

* G e 8 c h i c h t e n (not f 1 i s t o r i e n) can be said to g c s c h < - 
hen because tlie former properly indicates crcjits (was geecli- 
i e t), whrieas ihe latter properly means the nurratices of those events. 

^ D a s m a c h t. D a s is in tlie accusative, and the following 
sentence is nominative to m a c h t. In a free translation, it would 
be, " The cause is that no one,' ' etc. — D er sie bcschrieben 
[hat]. 

'Ob — 8 c h o n, if. Literally it means although. 



ADDRESS IN BEHALF OF PUBLIC SCHOOLS. 275 

d)ev behattcn bat ; bariim man and) t)on un^ ®eutfcf)en 
nid)t^ n)eip in anbcrn ?anbern, unb ntitflfen^ in atter SS^cit 
tie beutfd)en 23eftien f)eigen, bie nid[)t^ mebr fonnen,^ benn 
friegeu, freflfen unb faufcn. Slber bie ®riec()en uttb patenter, 
ja aucf) bte ^ebrder, babcn ibr Stng^ fo genau iinb flei^ig 
befd)ne6en, ba^, n)o and) etn SBetb ober ^inb etoa^ Son^ 
berlicf)e^ getban ober gerebet bat, ba^ mug atte 2Beft fefeit 
unb miflfen : biemetl jTnb mv 2)eutfcf)e nocf) immer ®eiitfcf)e, 
unb tDotten Deiitfcbe bleiben. 

SBcil im^ benn jefet ©ott fo gndbigtidb bcvat\)en t^at mit 
atter gi'itte, beibe ber ^unfl, gelebrter ?eure unb S3itd)er, fo 
i\V^ ^eit, ba^ tviv ernten unb einfcf)ueiben ba^ SSefle, bag 
n)ir founen, unb ©d)dge fammeht, bamit wiv etn>a^ hel^aU 
ten anf bag SnfiinftiQc t)on biefen golbnen 3abten, unb 
ni&jt biefe reid)e (grnte i:)erfdumen. Senn eg ju beforgen 
ifl/ unb jegt fd)on toteber anfdngt, bag man immer neue 
unb anbere S5itd)er mad)t, bag eg julefet bal)in fomme, bag 
burcf) beg ;j;eufelg 2Berf bie guten 53iidher, fo jci^t burd) ben 
Srucf bert)orgebrad)t finb, n>ieberum unterbriirft merben, 
unb bie lofen, beittofen Siid)er Don unniigen unb totten 
Singen wieber einreigen unb atte 5Binfef fiitten* 2)enn 
bamit gebet ber 2!eufel gemigfid) xun^ bag man jTd) mcbev^ 
urn mit eitel (Jatboficeu, gforijl-en, ?B3oberni{lten/ unb bem 

^ Und [w i r] mfSssen. 

^Die nichts mehr konnen, etc. " who know nothing 
but how to fight, eat and drink." On the words fressen and 
8 a u f e n, see p. 51, Note ] . 

3 D i n g. See p. 254, Note 3. 

*Denn es zu besorgen ist, etc. '* For it is to be feared, 
and even now has begun again [to take place], that new and differ- 
ent books will not cease to be made, so that at least it will come to 
this, that through Satan's influence the good books which," etc. 

^Catholicen, Floristen, Modernisten, CatfwLicons^ 
Florists^ Modernists. It would be amusing to see a list of all the 
fanciful names which the monks gave to the school-books which they 
wrote. 



276 SELECTIONS FROM LUTHER. 

t)erbammten Won(i)c\u iinb Sopbi(tcn^5)Ji)l tragcn unb 
martcrni mu|Te,n)iet)erl)in,nnb immer ferncn, unb beef} im^ 
mcv nirf)t^ crlcrneiu- 

2)ero[)alben bitte id) end), mcine licbeit i^errn, bag if)r 
tDottet biefe mcine Zvnc nnb g(eig fcei end) (affcn ^rud^t 
fd)affen» Unb ob (itlid)c tDdren,^ bie mid) ju geringe bafiir 
ijieftcn, bap jTe meine^ Dtatb^ foUten feben, ober micf), al*:^ 
ben SSerbammten wn ben S^prannen, t>erad)ten : bie n>oK^ 
ten bed) ba^ anfel)en, bag id) nid)t ba^ mcine, fenbern aU 
kin be^ ganjen bentfd)en ?anbe^ @(iicf nnb 5;^eif fud)c» 
Unb ob id) fct)en ein 5tarr n>are, nnb trafe bed) ettt>a^ 
©nte^/ feUte e^ je feinem 28eifcn cine (5cf)anbe biinfen, 
mir jn fefgen* Unb eb id) gfcid) cin XiwU nnb .^eibe n)drc, 
fo^ man bed) jtebet, bag nid)t mir baran^J fann ber 9tU&ert 
femmen, fenbern ben ($t)riilen, fe^ fellen jTe bed) bittig^ mei^^ 

* Sich mit — tragen und martern, to busy and torture 
one's self 10 it h. See the lexicons on the reflective verb sich tra- 
gen, when used of a person. Of a garment, it means to sit, to fit. 

* E r 1 e r n e n. The prefix e r implies success, in the act express- 
ed by the verb. See Gram. p. 249. 2. " To be ever learning, and 
yet never acquire anything." 

^Und ob Etliche waren, etc. " And though there 
should be some, who regard me as so insignificant that they will not 
accept of my advice (hold me as too insignificant for this, namely, 
that tliey should take my advice) or contenm me as one condemned 
by the tyrants, still let them (they should) consider this, that I am 
not seeking my own interest but merely that of all Germany." — 
R a t h s is governed by 1 e b e n. Compare p. 68, Note 3. — W o 1 1- 
t e n, imperfect subjunctive, theij should be willing. — G lack und 
H e i 1 are regarded as one and the same, and hence das m e i n c, 
in the singular, can agree with them. 

* Und t r a f e d o c h c t w a s G u t e s, etc. " and should y( t 
hit uj)on something good, no wise man should think it a disgrace to 
follow me. On d a n k e n, see p. 22, Note 3. The rule of the gram- 
marians there referred to is often disregarded, and so here. 

* S o, in the first instance is conditional (if) ; in the second, illa- 
tive and not to be translated. 

« B i 1 1 i g. See p. 102, Note 3. 



ADDRESS IN BEHALF OF PUBLIC SCHOOLS. 277 

tten X)mil nid)t "ocradjtcn. d^ hat wohi jemat^i ein ^axv 
befler geratben, benn ein ganjer diatij ber ^fugen. 5[Rofe 
innate jTcf) t)on 3etf)ro te{)ren {affen;^ 

§icmit befef)(e tcf)^ end) StKe ®otte^ ©nabe, ber tDotte 
eure ^erjeu ern)ctd)en unb anjimben, baf jTe jTcf) ber armen, 
efenbett, t)erlaflfenen Sugenb nttt Sntfl attnebmen, imb 
buret) gottlicf)e S)nlfe itjuen ratl)en unb betfen ju feligem unb 
ct)nil(id)em 9?egimeut beg beutfcf)en ?aubeg an ?ei6 unb 
®ee[e, mit aUev ^ixUe unb Ueberflu^, ju ?ob unb dijten 
®ott bent aSater, burcf) 3@fum St)^tftunt, unfern ^etfanb^ 
2(men. 2)atum 3Bfttenberg, Slnno 1524. 

' Jemals properly signifies ever in the sense of at any time» 
It seems here to mean, at times ^ sometimes. 

^Sich von Jethro lehren lassen, " seek instruction 
from Jethro," (cause himself to be taught by Jethro), 

^Hiemit befehle ich, etc. " Herewith 1 commend you 
all to the grace of God. May he (who may) soften and kindle your 
hearts, that they may interest themselves in behalf of the poor, 
wretched, and abandoned youth, and with the blessing of God coun- 
sel and aid them on to a happy and Christian state of social order 
(government) in respect both to body and to soul, will all fulness and 
plenty to the praise and honor of God the Father through Jesus Christ 
our Saviour." Welche herzliche Seelsorgerliebe Luthers spricht 
aus dieser Schrift ! Wie vertritt er, als ein kraftiger Vormund, die 
Sache der Jugend bei den Eltern und Obrigkeiten ! — wie die Sache 
der Gelehrsamkeit, besonders das Erlernen der Sprachen gegen rohe, 
eigenntttzige Philister einerseits, und gegen freres ignorantins an- 
drerseits ! — Raumer, Geschichte der Padagogik I. 169. 



24 



278 SELECTIONS FROM LUTHER. 



EXPOSITION OF THE FOURTEENTH CHAPTER OF 
THE GOSPEL OF JOHN. 

Slu^teguitg beg 14 gapiteig ^ohanni^.* 



as r r c b e. 

3n btefem imb jn)ci)cn folgenben Sapitcfn bcS (5i)ange^ 
Iijlen ®t* 3ot)annig, haben mir bie frf)6ne ^rcbigt bed ^?erni 
(5t)rifli, n>elcf)e er getl)an bat itad) bem tegten Sibenbma^l, 
ba er je$t an fcin ?eiben treteu unb fcine liebe hunger tjiiv 
ter i{)m laffen follte, jTe bamtt ju troilen^ unb jit j^arcfen, 
bet)be, tDiber bie gegeutDcirtfge >l!raurigfeit iiber feitiem 516^ 
fd)eiben, unb n)iber bad jnfiinftige ?eiben, fo fie iiberfalfnt 
miirbe Dom J^eufef, Don ber 5Bcft nnb i()rem eignen ©ewif^ 
fen. 

Unb i(l frcr^lid) bi^ bie befte nnb trofKid}|lte ^rebigt, fo ber 
^err gl)rifluii anf @rben getl)an, nnb ©t. 3obanned bi^'- 

(Stiicfd t)alber infonber()eit ju preifen ifl t)or anbern diyan^ 

i - 

* Several paragraphs, not essential to the connection, have been 
omitted for the sake of brevity. The orthography has not been con- 
formed strictly to that of the preceding part of the work ; but, as Lu- 
ther himself was by no means uniform in this respect, it has been 
thought best, in order better to prepare one to read Luther and other 
old writers, to let the orthography, in the present piece, stand as it is 
in the edition from which we copy. The peculiarity consists mostly 
in using the vowel i single, when it is long, for the diphthong i>, as, 
in diss instead of diess; double consonants instead of single con- 
sonants, as in klopffen, instead of k lo pfe n ; ?/ for ?*, as in bey 
instead of b e i ; and ren and len in certain verbs instead of ern 
and e In, as in trauro n instead of traucrn. 

* Sie damit za trosten in the sense of u m s i e d a m i t z u 
trosten. "In order therewith to comfort and strengthen them 
both against," etc. 

* Diss for dieses, " on account of this piece." 



EXPOSITION OF JOHN FOURTEENTH. 279 

gcfiften, ba^ er fo(dE)e ^rebxgt gefaffet, iinb ber (Sbrijlen{)ett 
jii Siroft nadE) il)m gcfajTcn/ aid eineu ®rf)afe unb ^Ictnob, 
fo mit ber 2Ge(t ®ut nid^t ju &ejat)[cn,2 mtb ja tmmer 
®c{)abe nub bed) ju tcffageu vodre, n)0 ford)e ^rebigt foUte 
uubcfd)ne6en, unb «)ir feld)cd (5rf)a^ed bexaxxbct bfieben 
fej)n,3 

Sentt ed ^nb iod) l)iertun^ bie atterlte6(id)fl:en, freuttb^ 
lid)ilen S^rojlungcn unb fiijifcjlen Sffiorte bed treueit, (teben 
§eifanbed <Sl)rijl:i, fo er femen (ie6en Simgern, afd er Don 
ibnen fd)eibet, jur ^ije^e^ gibt, berg{etd)en ntmnter fern 
9Keu[d)6 auf (grben gegen fetnen Itebjlen unb beflten §reun^ 
fcen tl)un unb rebeit iann. Sap^ man jlef)et, n)te ex and 

^ Geiassen [hat]. And so a ]ittie above, gethan [hat]. 

2 So mit der Welt Gut nicht za bezahlen [ware], 
•Mvhich (so) it would not be possible to repay (nicht zu bezah- 
len wSLre) with [all] the goods of the world."" 

•^ Beraubet [ge] blieben seyn [soil ten], 

* H i e r i n n. According to present usage, this word wouM end 
in a single n. Short unaccented monosyllabic terminations, particles, 
and auxiliaries double their final consonants only when they receive 
an accession, forming a new syllable, thus giving some degree of ac- 
cent to the former; as hierin, hierinnen; Fcirstin, Ftirs- 
tinnen; des, dessen; hat, hatte. There are a few excep- 
tions. See Gram. p. 80. 

^ Zur Let^e, as a token of affection on parting. It is now pro- 
vincial. 

^ Dergleichen nimmer kein Mensch, " such as (the like 
of which) no man ever." See p. 4, Note 2, and p. 148, Note 6. 

^ Dass, so that, \s dependent on the preceding assertion. *■* So 

that one perceives how he, from the pure, overflowing, indescribable 

love with which his heart burned towards them, cared for them, and 

took a heartier interest in them, than the greatest peril and distress 

f one's nearest friend can give him, so that over it he forgets his 

An sorrow and anguish (in order that he may support them with his 
consolation), of which, however, his heart was, at this hour, full (as 
he himself says to them : My soul is sorrowful even unto death) and 
was already in the sternest conflict with death and the devil." — E i- 
nem zu Hertzen gehen is to go near one's heart. Instead of 
hoheste, hochste is now used. 



280 SELECTIONS FROM LUTHER. 

eitet DoKer imauiSfprcd)fid)er ?iebe, bamit fetn S^ex^ gcgen 
i^nen gebraunt, fiir \lc forqet, iiub jTd) il)rcr annimmt, hcx^^ 
ficf)er, benu feincm ?Oicnfd)en feineg nad)(len gremifc^ he^ 
l)e|le ©efabr iinb ?tot() mag ju ^ertseu gel)cn, bag er and) 
taxob [ciitc^ eigenen ?cib^ unb Stngil t^crgiiJet, (baniit er 
nur jTe biirrf) feiitcn itroft crbafte,) mc[rf)er bed) aiif biefe 
©tmibe feiu ^ert^ Dolt tvar, (trie er felbjt ju ilnicn fagt : 
DJJeine (gce(e i(l bctriibt bvS aiif ben !tob,) unb tereit^ in 
bem I)ol)eflen ^ampf ftunb n^iber ben Zoi unb 2enfeL unb 
hat ailbie reid)(id) au^d)nttet atte ben l)ol)en, l)erl^{id)en 
$troR, fo bie ganl^e (5t)ri(l:en[)eit l)at, unb fo ein ?[}Jenfd) in 
atten ■Jtot()en unb ?eiben bege^ren fottte* 



1. Unb er fpr ad) ju feiu en 3rtngern: @uer 
^erj erfd)recfe nid)h 

^ier <Te()e)l \>n errt[id),tt>ie ()er(3fid) unb txcxilid) ber frennb^ 
lidjc S^cxx Sbrifln^ jTd) feiner lieben 3«nger annimmf, unb 
fiir fie forget, bag er f[e ntd)t obne Zxo^ ta^c, wcii e^ je^t 
an bem mar/ bap er eben in berfefben 3tad)t fellte t?en 
ibnen gefd)ieben u>erben burd) feiu bitter ?eiben unb (§reu$, 
(n)ie er ibnen bii^l)er mannigfaftiglid) juDor gefagt b^tte,) 
unb f[e aKcin binter ihm fajfen in grojfer ®efabr, ^urc^t 
unb (2d)recfen. 

35enn bi^ ba()er- maren ffe aUc^eit fid)er, getrojl unb obne 
gnrd)t geu>eiV ^^^cif er fefbft perfonlid) bei) ibnen n>ar, unb 
jTe faben, wic er fid) fo getvaltiglid) beuunfete in bem 2>c(cf 
mit ^>rebigen unb 5Bunbern, bag jTe alle ?lnffel)en anf ibn 

* An dein war dass er sollte, "was on the point of (was 
at the point that he should separate,) being separated." An dem 
is often so used. 

* Bis da her, up to that point; bisher, hitherto. Daher, in 
the former expression, does not mean hnicc^ but at that place^ as it 
frequently does. 

^ Gewest, obsolete for gewosen. 



EXPOSITION OF JOHN FOURTEENTH. 281 

hahcn mugtcn,i imb bie ijol)enpricjler unb Cberjleu'^ fefbjl 
fid) mii^ten furd)ten, unb forgeit, wo jTe ilm angriffen,^ 
mocf)te jTcf) bac^ ganfee aSoW tt>iber ffe erregen* 2^arum bie 
Slpoftel, cb fte n)of armc, gerutge'* Ceute iDaren, bod) n^aven 
|1e oI)ne (gorge unb §urd)t, gingen ba{)Tn, a(g^ miigten jTd) 
cf)e bie anbern i?or ibnen furcf)ten- 2)enn jTe bad)tcn^ voeil 
mvS biefcr 5i)tann (ebet/ fo l)at e^ feine 9totl), er fann xmg 
tDobf fd)iiiKn unb rettcn 2C. Saber tt^ar and) ®t ^etru^ 
fo ein^ treflflid) fiUjner 9i)^ann unb unerfcf)rocfener sipoflef, 
bag er jTd) barbeut^ unb t^ermiflfet,^ mit g()rijlto and) in J^ob 

^ Dass sie alle Aufsehen a«f ihn haben muss ten, 
" that they (das V o 1 k) must all be amazed (have amazement) at 
him," or that he created a great sensation among them. 

^Obersten. Der Oberste, from ober, over^ means the 
highest in authority^ and varies in signification according to the class 
of individuals to whom it refers, as ruler, chief , captain, etc. O b r i g- 
keit (or Oberkeit) means the civil authorities, the magistracy, 
and admits of the distinction hochste Obrigkeit and Unter- 
Obrigkeit. 

^ Angriffen, imperfect subjunctive. "If they should appre- 
hend him." 

^ Geringe, weak, insignificant. See p. 249, Note 2. 

^ Gingen dahin, als, etc. "went on, as if the others were 
sooner to stand in fear of them." 

^ Weil uns dieser Mann lebet, " while this man (Christ) 
is alive with us (for us), U n s is dativus commodi. 

7 S o e i n. See p. 25, Note 7. 

^ Darbeut, obsolete for d a r b i e t e t. See Gram. p. 203, supra, 

'^Vermisset. Sich vermessen, from m e s s e n, to mea- 
'ne, and ve r, wrong, means to presume, promise or affirm too muck 

I consequence of over-estimating one's self In the old writers and 
n common life, it means, to affirm with an oath, or solemnly ; and so 
here. " That he volunteered and solemnly averred that he would die 
with Christ, though all the others should deny him, and began to 
-how it (his courage or the truth of what he said) with his action. 
When the Jews would apprehend Christ, he put himself at once on 
the defensive, and began to lay on with the sword, not intimidated 
I (by the circumstance) that a great and armed multitude had come to 

24* 



282 SELECTIONS FROM LUTHER. 

ju gebn, eb it)n g(cict) bie anbcrn aUc i^crfcugncten, unb ftng 
and) an, ^old)c$ mit bcr Xl)at ju bctt)eifeu : a(^ bie 5nbctt 
S{)riftiim ^t)ot(tcu fa()en, pcKt er jTrf) fo6a(b juv ©egenn>el)r, 
unb fdbet an, mit bem (£cf)tr>crbt brcin jn frf)fagen, unge^ 
fc^enet, bag ber 5?anfe grog nnb mit 2Sa(fcn geriijlct ju 
if)ncn fommcn n)ai\ Unb Snmma,^ fo (ange jTe gbriilum 
bei) jTcf) batten, bnrften jTe jTd) nid)t^ befergen, tt)dren ami) 
n)of Dor jebernmnn <Tcf)er btieben* 

?tnn abcv &)xi\lni ibnen i^erfiinbiget, bag er mug t)0« 
ibnen fcbeiben, jeigt nnb n^eijlaget er il)nen jut)or, bag e^ 
if)nen ml anber^, benn bi^ baber, gcben merbe, nnb nun 
iaiii fommcn, bag ibr S^evi} mit ©rf)rerfcn nnb ^aQcn i)ctf 
fnct)t n>crbe. 2Qie ec^ benn gefcbab, cili^ er binn^eg trar, fo 
fc{)anbficf), jdmmcrlirf) nnb drgerf id) bingcrid)tct ; ba entftef 
ibnen batb ba^ ^^^erb, bag fie \id)^ t)or gnrd)t Derfd)(offen 
nnb Dcrjlcrften, nnb nid)t l)erfiir bnrften* 

them." — Fahen is obsolete for fan gen, and fahet an, for 
fangt an. — Drein zu schlagen. See p. 166, Note 1. Un- 
gescheuet is formed from s c h e a, timid. Gescheut has come 
to have the secondary or derived signification, cautious, prudent, wise^ 
and is often confounded with gescheit. With the prefix u n, 
the word sometimes, as here, has its original signification, fearless, 
though it more commonly means, heedless, impudent. — Kommen 
stands for g e k o m m e n . 

^ S u m m a, in a word. See p. 213, Note 2. " And, in a word, so 
long as they had Ciirist with thom, they ought to fear nothing; they 
would, no doubt have remained safe before any man." B lie ben 
for g e b 1 i e b e n . 

* Als. There is confusion in tiiis s(Milence. Either al> ii* <- 
performs improperly the two-fold office of introducing the apodosts 
(Nac hsatz) to the preceding words, and, at the same time, of stand- 
ing at the beginning of the protasis (Vordersatz) to the clause 
beginning with da entfiel (As it happened, when he went awtj. 
When he went away, etc. their helirts failed them), or, wic es 
denn geschah belongs to the preceding sentence, and al s should 
begin a new one. The latter is probably the case. 

^ Dass 816 sich, etc. " so that they shut themselves up, and 



EXPOSITION OF JOHN FOURTEENTH. 283 

Scnn eg n)ar auct) gar ju ein fd)redncf)er/ fcf)eug(id)er 
gal(, ba^ ber gf)riilitg, fo juDor gefiirc{)tet unb fct)rerf(icf) 
mar altcn Matt)gl)erren unb ^riejlern ju 3erufa(em, ber 
wirb^ pIoBlicf) fo fcf)tt>acf) unb fo gar Derfaffett, ba^ er fommt 
in bie j^dnoe fciner ^einbe^ bie il)n l^anbefn anfg atterdrgjle, 
unb beg fcf)dnbnd)iT:en ZobcS bal)in ricfjten*^ Da i(l mcf)t 
mebr ber g()ri|lug, ber ik Xoimx aufermerfet/ bie ^dufer 
unb SSerfdufer aug bent 2!empel ftieg, unb fo n)unberte bafS 
ffcf) jebermann bafi'tr entfe^et ; fonbern fo fcf)n)acf) unb ^c^ 
racht, aU ber drgejlte, efenbejle SKenfcf) auf @rben, ben je^ 
bermann ntit '^ii^cn trit, unb bie Slttergeringften iljn^ an^ 
fpet)en. Sag mar ja meit unb tief gefaKen^ t)on ber t)ori^ 
gen \)cvxiid)tn (3e\tait^ bag bie (ieben Siinger, a(g bie aucf) 
nod) fct)tt)arf)7 im ©(anben, unb foIc{)e qjitfe nirf)t me^r er^* 
fal}ren t)atten, mugten forgen unb jagen : D, mo motteu 

hid themselves, and did not dare come forth." HerfQr, for her- 
vor kommen. See p. 35, Note 3, and p. 6, Note 4. 

^ Gar zu ein schrecklicher, " quite too frightful an occur- 
rence," is obsolete for ein gar zu schrecklicher. 

2 Der wird, etc. Der is not needed here; it merely resumes 
the beginning of the clause der Christus." "That Christ, who 
was formerly so feared, and so terrible to all the elders (counsellors) 
and priests at Jerusalem, he becomes (instead of, " that he should be- 
come") all of a sudden so weak," etc. 

^ Des schandlichsten Todes dahin richten. Dahin 
r i c h t e n (to put out of the way) is nearly the same as h i n r i c fa- 
te n, to execute. See p. 50, Note 2 near the end, and p. 57, Note 1. 
— Todes is a genitive of manner. See p. 68, Note 3. 

'^Auferwecket (hat]. Wunderte for Wonder that, 
used in this sense, in the old German only. 

^ Ihn, is not necessary, as without it, den is sufficient. 

^ Das war — ge fa lien, a peculiar German idiom, by which a 
preterite participle (that was far fallen) is used where we should use 
a present participle substantively. " That was falling far," i.e. was 
a great fall. See p. 9, Note 5. 

■^ Als die noch schwach, "as those still weak," or those 
who are still weak. 



i 



284 SELECTIONS FROM LUTHER, 

mir nun 6Iei6en P @r ifl unfer Zxo\t iinb Zvoii gcnjefl, 
ber^ ijl mm bal)in, imb i^abcn niemaub mel)r, bcr lut^ fcf)% 
en ober bei)jlel)cn fonnte ; jc^t finb unfere geinbe ftarcf unb 
mdd)tig, n)ir abcr fd)tt>ac() unb i)cr(ajTen t)on alter SGBett, k» 
aSiber fo[cf)e fiiuftige 2(ng)1t unb (2rf)recfen fommt er ju^ 
Dor, a(^ ein frommcr, treiier 5?err, mit biefem Jiroft unb 
aSermat)nung, bag fie bennod)^ b(ei6en fonnen unb nid)t Der^ 
jagen, fdhet fo(cf)e^ eben an wn bem, ba^ i()nen begegnen 
foCtc unb mugte, bag, n)enn e^ a(fo gcfd)e^en n^iirbe, <Ie 
baran gebdrf)ten, bag er^ it)nen jut)or gefagt unb bagegen 
k)ermal)net bdtte, unb fprict)t jum allererjlen : (Suer 5^er$ 
erfcf)recfe nid)t* 2(t^ fottte er fagen : 3d) tt)eig tt)oM,4 
meinc fieben Siing^t*, tvic e^ eucf) gel)ett n)irb, it)enn id) i)on 
end) fommen unb end) allein faflen n^erbe, bag end) eitcl 
@d)recfen unb gurd)t n)irb iiberfaUen, unb tDerbet fold) 
2)ing an mir erfel)en, ba^ end) groflfe Urfad) wirb geben, ju 

* Wo wollen wir nun bleiben. "Where now shall we 
keep ourselves (remain)?" What shall we do with ourselves? 
With the word bleiben several idioms are formed besides those 
mentioned p. 63, Note 5. See the larger lexicons. 

* Der, as a demonstrative is more emphatic than er would be 
here, and is equivalent to he italicized in English. See p. 243, Note 
4. — Und [wir] haben niemand. 

^ Dass sie dennoch, etc. It may seem a little doubtful what 
the relation of this clause is to the preceding, whether dass is lobe 
rendered, namely that, or to the end that. The latter is undoubtedly 
the right construction. 

"* Ich wiess wohl, etc. "1 know full well, my dear disciples, 
how it will be (go) with you, when I shall go away from you and 
leave you alone, viz. that nothing but (eitel) terror and fear will 
come (fall) upon you, and that you will behold in respect to me (not, 
in me) things tliat will give you great occasion to be alarmed, so that 
your heart might be shut up within you, and that you will not know 
what will become of you (where you shall keep yourselves). — Solch 
Ding — das, "such things as," or "things which." — An mir, 
upon me, or relating to me externally (not to his character). See p 
80, Note 3. Zusch melzen, means to solder, to seal, or close up 
by melting. 



EXPOSITION OF JOHN FOURTEENTH. 285 

jagen, baf5 eiicf) fca^ §er^ im ?eib tttbd)t jufcf)mef§en, unb 
nicht n)ijTeit iDcrbet, n>o tt)r 6(e{6eu foKet 25a^ fage id) eurf) 
jui?or unb cben barum, ba^ it)r eucf) md)t fo balb laffet bag 
^crg gar ueljmen/ fonbern fepb fedf, unb riijlet eucf) ju bem 
^ampf ; unb t^enn eg baju f ommt, fo bencf t btefer ntetner 
SBermabnung, ba$ ihv barum nid^t fo balb Derjagt unb t)er^ 
jn>eife(t K. 

2((fo tvolltc er i()nen gerne bag ^er§ aufricfjteu unb er^ 
flatten, a(g ber ba n)ot)t mn^te, tt)o eg tl)nen Itegen n)urbe t^ 
ba^, ob fie gfetcf) gcf)recfen unb 2lngjl fu^(en n)urben, ftcf) 
bennocf) fonnten auft)atten unb bejl^o teicf)ter ban)iber 6efie^ 
tjtn. ®enn eg tiegt gar 'oid baran, n)te bag §er§ geritflet 
fet) : ob Ung(ucf3 ^^^j) ®d)recfen ba^er ge^et, ba^ man ien^ 
nodt) moge Stufent^aft n)iffen, ober jemanb l^abe, ber itftn 
i cm trofltttcf) SGort etnrebe ober ertnnere ; fo t|l eg atteg beflo 
Ietcl)ter ju tragen> 2}arum t\)nt er t^nen btefe ^rebtgt ju^ 
t)or, 6ei)be, bag f iinftige ©cf)rerfen anjujeigen, unb baneben^ 

^ Euch — das Hertz nehmen, "takeaway your courage." 
See p. 52, Note 4. " That you do not at once allow your courage to 
be taken away, but that you be bold, and arm yourselves for the con- 
flict; and when it comes (to it)," etc. 

2 Wo es ihnen liegen wQrde, " where the difficulty would 
lie with them." Wo is here used nearly in the sense of woran. 
Compare es liegt gar viel daran, at the beginning of the next 
J sentence, and p. 169, Note 4. 

'j ^ObUnglack, etc. " [that] if calamity and terror come, one 
' may still know where to find support, or have some one, who," etc. 
^ Though the English idiom requires the word, that, at the beginning 
y of this sentence (before, if), in the German, dass properly comes 
n after the clause. — A ufenthalt commonly signifies abode. But the 
J word aufhalten in the preceding sentence, (for which Luther 
i I sometimes uses enthalten. See p. 83, Note 2,) and erhalten 
j a little below, and furthermore the circumstance that the old writers 
use the verb aufenthalten in the sense of to sustain, to support, 
make the meaning evident here, as given in the translation. 

* Dane ben, "in connection with that," or, " at the same time." 
See p. 94, Note 4, and p. 193, Note 3, near the middle. 



286 SELECTIONS FROM LUTHER. 

jii tropen, auf bag fie ffcf) f)ernad) berfe(6en ertnnern iiitb 
bamit erbatten foUteit ; it>tctt>e( bicfc Xropung^ ju ber 
(Stunbe fobatb nicf)t l)aff, nod) ju ^rdften fam, bt(^ fo fang 
ber ^eifige ©eifl fam* Stber jn ber S^it, aU S^rtjln^ bin? 
tt>eg n)ar, ba mar e^ gar an^ nnb fetn Syvi^ nod) yjlxxt\) mel)r 
bei) i()nen, bag and) il)rer feiner fiir einer ol)nmdd)tigen 
3[Ragb fonnte jleben ; ba waxen atte fetn SOBort nnb SGBerrf 
baf)in, nnb biefe^ 2!ro(I^ ganfe nnb gar i?ergeflen. Sllfo l)at 
er bigmat feine licbcn ^pojltetn t)ermal)net nnb getroflet, aU 
bie^ and) be^ $trofl^ n)o[)f bcbnrften* 

@^ tjl aber nid)t nm it)rentn)iffen, fonbern nn^^ gefd)rie? 
ben, bag voir and) biefe^ Xrojle^ lernen gebrand)en anf ge^ 
gentmrtige nnb fiinftige ?cotl), nnb bag ein jeg(id)er (5l)ri(l, 
xvenn er getanft t|l, nnb ffd) l)at jn St)ri(lo begeben, ntag 
nnb foK ftd)^ and) atfo bretn fd)irfen, nnb gewiglid) beg i)exf 
fel)en, bag i^m and) begegnen n)irb ©d)rerfen nnb 2(ng(i, 
bie ibm ba^ §er^ blob nnb tJerjagt ntad)en, e^ fei) bnrd) 
eine ober mand)erfet) 5einbfd)aft nnb SOBiberflanb. 

2)enn ein &)xi\l Ijat an^ ber 5!)iaafie t)iel ^einbe,^ n)o er 

* Wiewolil diese Trostung, etc. " although this consola- 
tion did not at the moment immediately aid, and take effect, until 
the Holy Spirit came ; but at the time that Christ was [taken] away, 
then all was over (out), and no heart nor courage was in them, bo 
that none of them could stand before (f U r for v o r) a feeble maid ; 
all his (Christ's) words and works were away (out of mind), etc. — 
A us as an adverb after ist, war, etc. is used just like our word, 
ozjcr, in similar constructions. A lie, with Wort and Werk as 
collectives. 

* A 1 s die, as those who. 

^ Uns, is not governed by um — wiUen, which requires tht" ' 
genitive, but the construction is changed to the dative, uns instead I 
ofunsertwiUen. " But it is written not on their account, but 
for us." I 

* Mag und soil sich, otc. ** he may and should accommodate 
himself to it, and confidently expect it tliat fear,'' etc. 

*Au8der Maasse viel Fcinde, etc. *Mias surpassingly 
numerous enemies, if he will stand (abide) by his Lord; the world 
with the devil daily seeks his (body and) life, furthermore his own 



EXPOSITION OF JOHN FOURTEENTH. 287 

6ei) fetnem S^evxn bfeiben n)tff, bie SOBelt famt bent ^eufet 

jlet)t t^m tdg(tcf) nacf) ?eib unb ?eben, baju fern eigeit gfeifcfj 

unb aSernunft unb ©emifien, fo iijn flet^ plagt, ba^ tl)m 

leicf)t(icf) (Scf)recfen unb 3^9^^^ tt)iberfd^ret, aucf) Don feinem 

eignen §ergen. 

©arum, n)iK(1: bu aucf) ein Sf)rtjl fei)n/ ben Slpofltefn unb 

r fttten ^eitigen gfetcf), fo riifle bidf), unb n)arte bef gen)tg, 

I ba^ einmal ein ©tunbtein fommen n)irb, unb betn §er§ 

' trefen, ba^ bu erfrf)rerfen unb jagen n>ir(l. 2)enn fotd)e^ 

ijl atten gbrtjlten t)erfunbtget, auf ba^ fie (ernen^ ffcf) ge^ 

' wo^nen, unb fnr^ i^re ©ad)eu atfo rirf)ten, n)enn ffe je^t 

■J flesh, reason and conscience, which constantly tortures him, so that 
^ terror and fear easily invade him, even from his own heart." B 1 e i- 
' ben with b e i, in a figurative sense, often means to adhere to one, 

to stand by him, — Stehen followed by nach, (different from 
]( nachstehen meaning to be inferior), s\gn\nes, to seek, Vike the 
li Latin petere, generally in a hostile sense. L e i b, the body, i. e. to 

kill it. L e i c h 1 1 i c h, see p. 186, Note 2. 

^ Willst du auch ein Christ seyn, etc. "Ifj'^ouwill 

also be a Christian like the Apostles and all the saints, arm yourself, 
; and assuredly expect (it) that an [evil] hour will come and pierce 
i| your heart so that you," etc. 

^Aufdass sie lernen, etc. " in order that they may learn 

[in their thoughts] to accustom themselves, and immediately so dis- 
t» pose their affairs (if they at present feel secure) and that they so ap- 
p prehend and regard it as if (that) their state (it) will soon change, 
l( and that they may say to themselves (think) : * let things continue 
! as they are, just as long as it is God's will; to-day, joyful and in 

good spirits, to-morrow sad ; to-day alive, to-morrow dead ; to-day in 

prosperity and security, to-morrow in all sorts of calamity,' — and that 
. they do not slumber (snore) ever on, as though there never were to 
I be any calamity." Also in both instances relates to als dass. 
|i The latter indicates how it will be with Christians in fact, the former 
Ij points out a corresponding feeling. In good English, we should vary 

the form of comparison and say ; " In order that they may regulate 

their plans, and adjust their affairs, and all their views and feelings 
' as though they were certain that a change would take place." 

Wurde es, is impersonal, and refers to the idea of life, condition, 

etc. 



288 SELECTIONS FROM LUTHER. 

fictjcr fittb, ba^ fie e^ atfo anne^nten unb anfe^ett, a(^ bag 
eg fid) batb cinbern tt>erbe, imb benrfen: eg n)dt)re, tt)ie 
lange @ott n)itt ; I)eut fr6t)(id) unb guteg 9D?utl)g, niorgen 
traurig ; l)eut lebenb, morgen tobt ; ijcxxt in ®iM nnb 
©ic()ert)eit, morgen in alter 9totf), unb nicf}t fo gar fiir unb 
fiir babin fd)nard)en, aU mxvic eg feine -Rotl) l)a6en* 

Dag weig nun St)ripug n)ot)f, n^enn rvix tt)otten fein blei^ 
ben, an ber Staufe, ©acrament unb @t)angefio balten, bag 
eg nid)t anberg fei)n faun, n)ir miiffeni ben Zcnfcl ixxm 
geinb baben, ber ung o^n Unterlag jufe^et mit alter feiner 
5[Wad)t unb ung nacf) ?eib unb ©eete fle()et : unb n)o it)m 
©ott nicf)t tt)e^ret,2 bag er bid) nicf)t faun in einem ZaQc 
ern)iirgen, fo tdgt er bod) nid}t ab mit allerlei) ?iften unb 
2;iiden, bag er bir jum n)enig(lten beinen yjlxxt\) unb Sid)er^ 
^eit nel/ine, unb ju llnru()e unb 2:ranrigfeit, barnad) and) 
in anbere ©efa^r unb 9iotl) bringe^ aSeil eg benn alfo 
ge^en mug, bag n^ir miiflen bem Jteufel unter bie gpiefie 
laujfen,^ unb ung i:fon x\)m ptagen unb martern tajfen ; fo 

^ [A Is dass] wir mUssen. Such ellipses are not uncommon. 

'Undwoihm Gott wehret, etc. "and though (if) God 
hinders him from destroying you (so that he cannot destroy you) in 
a single day, still he (Satan) does not cease (leave off) from his de- 
vices and tricks, in order that he may, at least, take away your cour- 
age and security and bring you into disquiet," etc. N i c h t before 
wehret injures the sense as the construction now is. Undoubt- 
edly the writer unconsciously changed the construction, forgetting 
when he came to the close, how he commenced it. 

^ D e m Teufel unter die Spiesse 1 a u f e n, etc. 
" expose ourselves to the darts of Satan (run under the darts to Sa- 
tan), and be vexed and tormented by him, still Christ, would hereby 
warn us against them and comfort us, in order that we may not yield 
to them, nor be greatly terrified nor easily let Satan capture us, that 
he may bring us into [a state ofj melancholy and despondency." — 
Uns von ihm plagen lassen, literally, " suffer ooFBelvcs 
to be vexed by him." Uns vermahnet haben, " have us 
warned." This idiom is also found in Englisli ; as, " 1 would have 
you," for " 1 wish you would." Uns dazu schicken, "ac- 



EXPOSITION OF JOHN FOURTEENTH. 289 

wiff itn^ gbriftii^ fcac^egen hicmit t^ermabnet mib getroflet 
baben, ba^ n)tr un^ bajit fct)irfen fotfen, nxd)t fo febr cr^ 
fcf)recfcn, itocf) ben ^cufcf fo (etditfirf) mi^ cinnehmen (aj7cn, 
bag er im^ in ©dbn^ermutl) unb 2Scr5U>eifliing fringe* 

2)ariim ia^t im^ biefcn Zvo^ aitcf) gefagt feyn,i unb affo 
einbilben unb fajTen, bag n>ir ibn braudien, nnb bamtt un^ 
(tdrrfen fonnen, n?enn n)tr !j;rn6fa( nnb SlngjI fiibten, af^ 
boreten wiv af^benn Sbritlnm fofdje ^iCorte ju nn^ fagen r 
3Ba^ tbnj^ bn ? 2BiIIt bn barnm jn tobe erfrfjrecfen nnb ja^ 
gen ? (Set) be* getrofl nnb fafle ein 5^erfe ;2 ifl- barnm nocf> 
nicbt an^,3 ^5 t^fct) ber Xenfef, bte S[Be(t, ober bein etgen @e^ 
tt)iflfen pfagt unb fd)rerft, nnb mid) nid}t gegentvdrtig fi't()[e|l. 
^eifit bn nid)t, bag id) bir^ fang jnt^or gefagt t)abe, nnb 
ben !i;rejl t)inter mir gefalJen, ber bid) frdrrfen nnb erbaftett 
fott ? ©tebe, a(fo fottten voiv (ernen nnb nn^ getDobnen, 
biefe Itroftnng be^ i^errn Sbrifti jn nnfee jn mad)en bnrd) 
tdg(id)e Uebung, in alten nnfern 2(nfed)tnngen, bag mv nn^ 
fo[d)e^ nid)t Kejfen Dergeb(id) gefagt nnb gefcf)rieben fei)n. 

Unb au^ biefen unb berg(eid}en SBorten nnb SSermabnnn^ 
gen gbrifti foKen tt)ir and) fernen ben ^errn Sbrijlum red)t 

commodate ourselves, i. e. yield to it." Dass here refers to so. 
So s e h r and so leichtlich are used absolutely in the sense 
o^very much and easily, and dass means in order that. 

^ Lasst uns diesen Trost auch gesagt seyn, "let 

! this consolation be said to us," i. e. let us receive it. See p. 240, 

' Note 3. Einbilden und fassen, '' and let us so apprehend 

and understand it, that we can use it," etc. Lasst uns is used 

in two distinct senses here. In the first clause the verb governs 

jTrost, and uns is in the dative; in the second (und [lasst 

,uns] also einbilden), uns is in the accusative. " And let 

us so apprehend." 

^Fasse ein Hertz, "to take courage," " to pluck up cour- 
age." Compare the English word dishearten. 

'1st darum noch nicht aus, etc. " All is not therefore over, 
leven thouorh the devil, the world and their own conscience distress 
,and terrify thee, and thou dost not feel my presence (me present)." 
j|Sec p. 2.36, Note 1. 

25 



290 SELECTIONS FROM LTJTHER. 

feiiiteit, baf? tt>ir befto bcrl;[id)cre, troftlidfjcre 3i^^<^^f'fc^<' 
ju ibm (]ctt>inncn mogen, iinb mcbr anf fcin fficrt aittcn, 
benn anf alte^, fo un^ mag Dor 3(ngen, Dhrcn iinb 
Sinne femincn* I>enrt fo id} cin (Sbrijl: bin/ unb mid) 
JU ibm baftc, fo wcifi id) je, ba^ cr mit mix rcbct 9?un 
bore id) ja bic unb anberi^tDo, bag altc feinc 2Sorre babin 
gebcn, baf? cr mid) trofle, ja allcc^, n)a^ cr rcbct iinb tbut 
ober gcbcnrfct, citef freunb[id)c, trofKid)c SOBorte nub 58er(fc 
finb, 

J'arnm mug ba^ gcn>ig fci)n unb uid)t feb(cn : 9Scnu ein 
gjjcnfd) trauert uub cin blobc^ crfd^rorfcn 5^cr6 bat, ba^ 
mug uii-bt t)on Sbrifto fcpn^ 2^cnu cr ifl uid)t bcr 9}?ann, 
ber bie ^^^crtpcn crfd)rerfet, ober traurig uub fcbn>crmiitbig 
mad)eu wiU. 2^cun cr ift cbeu baju fommeu, uub bat allci^ 
getbau, fid) and) barum biuauf gen 5?immc( gefclst, bag er 
Jt^raurigfeit unb ©d>rcrfeu bc^ .^er^cu^ bintrcg uebmc, un^ 
bafiir cin fr6b(id) 5;>crl^, ©crDiffen unb ©ebancfcu gcbc, unb 
t)erbeigt and) barum, feineu Sii^tgcru unb Sbriflen beii 
^ei(igeu ©cift ju feubcn, unb nennct ibn cincn !tr6ftcr, ba^ 
burd) cr ffe (larcfcn unb crl)altcn wiii, nad)bcm cr Icib(icf) 
i)on ibnen gcbcn mufnc* 

2Gcr nun bac^ fonnte fernen unb n>obI in^ Syvi} faflVn, 
xvie (Slmftn^S mit fcinem ^TTJnnb rcbct unb jcngct, bag c^ 
it)m jnmibcr unb (cib fci), xr>cnn cinci^ Sbriftcn syv\} tranru] 
ober crfd)rorfcu i\i, bcr xviivc n)o!)l brau,^ uub bcitte mcbr 

'Denn so ich cin Christ bin, etc. " For if I am « I 
Christian, and adhere to him, then I always know that he [in thrse 
words] spraks to nie. Now I learn in tliis very passage and else- 
where that all his words tend to this, to comfort me (that lie comfort 
me) ; — indeed all that he says and does or thinks aie nothing huti 
kind and consolintr words and works." — [G e] U o m m e n in line 14. 

* D e r ware w o h 1 d a r a n, he is (would be) in a good way,! 
or is doing well, (in the matter, d a r a n) or is well otT, and has morel 
than half conquered." Daran, in such cases, is indefinite, as in| 
English, at z7, in such familiar phrases as to go at it. 



EXPOSITION OF JOHN FOURTEENTH. 291 

bcnn halb gcwoinien. i:^cnn wemx e^ fo rvcit fommt/ ba^ 

id) ben '^cin'o, fo mid) er[c{)reden uub betritBen nn(t, tenne, 

itnb tt>cig, it>o[)er fodtc ©ebanrfeu unb ©nfaKe fommen, fo 

babe id) bcvcit^S cincn fcfteu !J!rit unb ^cdv barauf tcf) 

griinbcu nub flcben faun, unb mid) fciu cxwchccn^ unb fa^ 

gen : Sa^ ijl: iud)t meiit Syvv (Sbrijlu^, fonbcrn Sbrijlti 

gcinb, ber (eibigc Xcnfci:^ S)enu er 6etrciigt and) tt)e[ bte 

fremmen Syvi^en bamit, bag er fid) 'ocxfteUt (mtc ©t ^au^ 

fu^ fagt, 2 6or. 11, 14.) in eiuen @ngc[ be^ ?id)t^, unb 

fid) a(fo btlbet uub i?orgi6t, aU fei) er Sbriftu^ felbjl. 

gin (Sbriil aber (cbet tDot and) affo,^ bag er auffcr(id) mi 

I ?eiben unb 3{nfed)tung \)at ; aber bod) tann er ein getrojl, 

: frobtid) 5^er^ unb gjjutt) ju ®on l)aben, unb jTd) bc^ atter^ 

beften ju ibm t)erfet)eu. J^arum faffet un^ fofdje^ toohl kv^ 

uen : e^ fomme iiber nn^, rva^ fitr Ungtiid fommeu mag, 

^ejlifeug, ^rieg, tbeure 3^^^/ 2lrmutb, Serfefgung, fd)tt>ere 

! ©ebanden, fo ben ^opf uieberfd)[ageu unb ba^ 5;^er^ flopf^ 

fenb unb jappcfnb mad)eu, bag^ n)ir bed) fo t)iel VDiffen unb 

^Denn wenn es so weit kommt, etc. " For, if so 

much progress has been made (it has gone so far) that 1 know the 

' enemy who would terrify and distress me, and understand whence 

such thoughts and fancies come, I have already a firm fooling and a 

rock," etc. Denn wenn, must not be confounded with dann 

w e n n, then if or then vJien. On the difference between k e n n e n 

J and w i s s e n, see p. 54, Note 6. E i n f a 1 1 means i//e act of fall- 

1 ing into^ which when it relates to the territories of an enemy, means 

z,ii invasion^ or assault; when it relates to the mind, it means the 

' thov gilts thai fall accidentally or -pop into the mind., — ichims^ conceits^ 

fancies, — M ich sein erwehren, wai'd him off. 

^InderleidigeTeufel, asinder liebe Gott is a 
peculiarity which distinguishes the German language from ours. 
\ We do not say, the wicked devil, and the dear God. Betreugt for 
' hetriegt. See p. 281, Note 8. 

^Lebet wohl auch also. Wohl here softens the affir- 
j mation. Not, " lives well also thus," but '■ lives commonly (or, prob- 
I ably) in such a way that," etc. 

* D a s s refers to s o 1 c h e s, near the beginning of the sentence. 



292 SELECTIONS FROM LUTHER. 

fitncjjcn fointcn, bap fo(c()Cti nid)t wn (Sbrifto fciv unb fn'u 
ten luu^ fiir bcm S:ciifc(, bcr jTcl) faun bilbcn unb barftcHcn 
in &)x\}ti QScftalt nnb 9iamcn. 

X^ai u\irei woi bie rcitte 5lnnft cinei^ Ghriftcn, n>er alfc 
Unntc inUcrfcf)cibcn im rcd)tcn ^ft\impf, rvivS iil)v\\ii ober 
bct^ Xcufcli^ C5ini]cbcn fci) ? 3lbcr, ane fcf)trcr cc^ iff, ba^ 
gldiibet nicmanb, bcnu cr ci crfabrcn bat.^ ^cwn bcr ZciXf 
fc( faun ]id) fo ftcibcn unb fttniiicfcu mit &-}vi]ii Tiamcn 
unb ^liSortcn, unb fo bilbcn unb ftcKen, bap cincr mof tau^ 
feub &)tc frf)tt>nre, e^ marc u>ahrl)afti() Shrijln^S fclbft, fo 
e^ bod) bcr (^'rlsfcinb unb rcchtc (Jrlpn^ibcrdirift^ i)i, 

Sarum (erne* l}icraut^, fo bu cin (5l)ri)lc tn'fl, u>cr bid) mU 
fd)rccfcn unb ba^ .^crt3 b(obc mad)cn, baf; bu (]cunf;(id) fon^ 
uc|T: fd)Iic(Tcn, bap cr bc^ :I!cnfcI^ 33otc i]l. 2^cnn tvo awd) 
&)xi\in^ jcmanb fd)rccfct jnr ^n^c unb 33cfcbrun(] t)em 
Ungtaubcn unb fnnb{id)cn ?cbcn, Cm^ cr ©t. ^Vinhun i>cr 
ber S8cfcl)rung, item ©t. ^>au(u»^^ wn (5l)rijii t\>cgcu bie ju 
Sorintbo, item bie ©atater fd)recfct,) fo tiMhrct e^^ beef) 
uid)t {ani]c, 2^cnn cr thutti nid)t barnm, bap bu foUt trau^ 
rig bfciben., fouberu fiibret bid) balb berau^, unb tri^iict bie^ 

•Das ware, etc. " That would be a Christian's true knowl- 
edge when one (whoever) could, in the real conflict, distinguish be- 
tween the sutrorestions (what is tlie suircrestion) of Christ and of Sa- 
tan." W e r has this indefinite meaning in itself and in consequence 
of subjunctive mode, which represents not real but supposed cases. 
This idiom frequently occurs in Luther's writings. 

' Denn er [der] es erfahren hat. — Und [s i c h] so 
bilden und stellen. 

3 Ertzwiderchrist, arch-antichrist. Endechrist also 
occurs, e n d e standing for nnti. 

*Darum lerne, etc. " Learn therefore from this, if you are 
a Christian, that whoever would terrify you, and make your heart 
fearful, yoti may certainly infer that he is Satan's messenger." 
D a s 8 bef >re d u g e w i s s 1 i c h must, in the translation, be placed 
at the beginning of the preceding clause. See p. 285, Note 3. 

•Item St. Paul us, etc. "Also St. Paul, on Christ's ac- 
count terrified those at Corinth, and the Galatians. 



EXPOSITION OF JOHN FOURTEENTH. 293 

wieber, S:*a^ thnt bcr S;ciifc( inrf]t, foubcru (dj^t fcineni 
StoIlS'JU imb Unbujjfertigen t)ersvigt n^crbcn, obcr n)0 cr aiifg 
leljte ill (£d}rccfcn inib 2Jng|l fdllt (tt)ie bcnn juteljt folrfjeit 
alien gcfd)iebt) : fo Idgt cr it)U barinn (Iccfett, mad)t bcj]el:s 
bcii fciu (f ube, tvcibt uiib bnicft fo l)art, bag er emiglid) Der^^ 
jweifclu miip, rvo er iud)t n)icbcr bard) Sl}rijlum aufgerid)^ 
tet rcirb. 

Sicl)e, bad tr^ilt Sbriflud aUhk tcbren, ba er fprid}t : (5uer 
^erlj erfd)recfc nid)t ic. $Mld foKte cr fagcu : 3d) Rerbe 
unb fabre baDon aud euent Slugcn, unb lajje end) btnter 
tttir in ber 2Se(t, ba ibr mid) nid)t fcben nod) ()6rcn roerbet, 
fonbern miijTct nnr fcben, boren nnb fiiblcn allerlet) ^lage 
nnb Unglncf, ta^ end) aUentl^atben it^irb fd)recfen unb angjl 
tnad)en«2 giber ia^t cud) barnm bad 5;ter§ nid)t matt nnb 
feig mad)en,3 fonbern l)altet end) bagegen beg,^ fo ibr wn 
mix l)6ret, bag ibr foUet getro|l nnb gnten SO^ntbd fep. 
Senn id) wiii^ nid)t fet)n, ber^ end) fd)recfet nnb betriibet, 
fonbern, tt)o ibr foldicd i)bvct ober fiiblet, fo fd)liejjet fingd, 
bag ed bed S^enfeld ©cfpentl: nnb Itrng^ fep, 5i}teine ©tim^ 



^ Sondern lassl keinen, etc. " but [ordinarily] causes no 
haughty or impenitent one to beconrie discouraged, or if the latter at 
last falls into [a state of] fear and distress (as happens to all in the 
end), he leaves him there (lets him stay or stick there), makes no 
end to (of) it, pursues (urges) and presses him so hard," etc. 

2 Angst machen. Angst with mac hen, seyn and 
werden is an indeclinable word, meaning, anxious, distressed. 
These verbs are, when so employed, followed by a dative. The word 
a n g s t, when not a substantive, is litnited to these expressions. 

^Aber lasst euch, etc. " But do not therefore become faint 
hearted and timid (suffer one to make your heart faint and cowardly) 
but, on the contrary, rely on that which you have heard of me," etc. 

^Haltet euch dess, " hold yourselves or adhere to that." 
This verb is now always followed by a n with the accusative, instead 
of the genitive, as here. 

^ D e n n i c h wills n i c h t s e y n, d e r, etc. " For I would 
/lot be one to terrify and trouble you, (1 will not be it who, etc.)" 

^Gespenst und Trug, " grim visage and illusion." 
25* 



294 SELECTIONS FROM LUTHER. 

mc (iabof) if)r mid) fetlt fennen, al6 bie ®d)afc if)ren vcdtj^ 
ten .s)irrcn,) foK alfo hciiJcn : giintte bid) nid)t unb er^ 
fd)rirf nid)t ! 2>a^ jTub^ meine ^iBorte iinb ©ebancten* 
S)'ke\t bii cin anberi^, fo borejlt bu nid)t meiuc gtimmc, ob 
f(d)^ (](eid) in ineincm Dtameit inib ©c|la(t bir i^orbitbet. 
IDanim foUt bu fold)em nid)t gtaiiben, nod) fofgcit- 

©taubet ihr an &ott, \o Qlanbet andj an 
mid). 

X^a \ci}t ex Urfad)cn bcr Dorigcn ^iBorte, bamit- cr angc^ 
fangen l)at^ ffe ju Dcrmabncn, gctroft nnb nncrfd)rccfcn ju 
fei)n» ?a^t end) nid)t crfd)reden (fprid)t cr), ncd) iai 
S^cv^ feig mad)cn, ob id) tDcl (cibtid) Den end) fcmme unb 
cud) jlcden la^c mitten nnter ber ^iSeft nnb ;j!cufe{^ @en)a(t, 
bie end) briirfen nnb ftemmen, nnb aliei Ungliicf aniegen 
TDerben ; fonbern (lebet ferf nnb Deft n?iber aUe^, ia& end) 
mag begegnen* 2^enn il)r, al^ Ql)x\]ien, foUet ja nid)t trau^ 
ten nod) jagen, ireit il)r nid)t fei)b,3 une bie, u>eld)e, fo jlc 
in ?eiben, Ungdicf nnb SBibenvartigfeit fommen, feiuen 
Xro^ nod) 3ii^^r(^d)t l)aben, ai^ ia jTnb, bie ba nid)t gldu^ 
ben, nod) Q^yotte^ 2Bort mi)Jen, fonbern il)ren S;roft anf ^eit^ 
Iid)e Dinge felsen nnb mit bent Joerl3en nnr an bem I)angen, 
ta6 ba gcgenu>artig nnb f[d)tbar ifl, nnb wo baffelbe u^enbet, 
l>a tt):pbet and) il)r ?Otutl) nnb 3nv>er(Td)t, I^arnm, n?eun 
fid) bao ©did manbelt in Ungliicf ; fo fatten fie plolplid) ba^ 

* Das 8 i n d, these are. See Gi am. p. 348. — E i n a nde rs, «iy 
4)ther. 

^ I-) a in i t in the sense of w o m i t, icilh wliich. Com p. p. JO"), 
Note I. 

^ W e i 1 ihr n i c li t sey d, etc. " because ye are not like thoso, 
who, if they come into suffering, misfortune and adversity, have no 
consolation or confidence, as is the case with those (as are those) whf^ 
do not believe, who are not acquainted with the word of God, but put 
their trust (consolation) in temporal things, and in their hearts are 
attached only to whiit is present and visible, and if tiiat fails (turns 
away), their spirits and confidence also fail." — Vest, three lines 
above, for f e s t. 



i 



EXPOSITION OF JOHN FOURTEENTH. 295 

hin^ imb ner^agen, aU fci) c^ alk^ mit t()nen an^. Sag 
jTub iciite^ bie feiucn ®ott babcn, imb m'rf)tg iDiflen, nod) 
erfabren Don foktem Slrojl, bcr ba bej^eben nnb jTcgen fann 
mitten tn^ bo*|tev D^oti) nnb Ungtiicf, obg(eirf) aKeg 3eit^ 
My: nnb aSergdng(id)e, fo man fid) jn Derfcl)en nnb jn bof^ 
fen bat, anfborct* ©ofcbc ?ente Cfprid^t er,) foEet i^r 
nid)t fepn. 2:enn ibr babt ja (3ottc^ SBort, babnrd) i()r 
ibn babt fennen fernen^ nnb an ibn cjlcinben* Sarnm \oU 
let ibr end) fein ©d)reden itbern)dltigen nod) iibertDinben 
fajfcn, fonbern fedlid) nnb mann(idi tDiber|lel)en, nnb enc^ 
crjeigen, aU bie inef anbern,^ qett>iflern, bobern Xrojl nnb 
Zxo\} roiilfen, benn alle iGett bat, nnb grojfer ©tdrde nnb 
5i)Jad)t, baranf ibr end) jn t)er(aflfen l)abt, benn ber SOBeft 
nnb be^ !tenfctd ®ett)a(t nnb ^ad)t ift. 'ia^ct anbere anf 
ibre jeit(id)e ®ett)att nnb ®(iid tro^en nnb )ficd)m ; ibr 
aber trojlet end),^ bag ibr einen ®ott babt nnb ibn fennet, 
nnb Derfajjet end) baranf, bag er bet) end) ijl:, nnb end) be(^ 
fen fann, tt>ie er end) bnrd)^ ^Bort jngefagt \)at^ nnb 8en)ig^ 
(id) nid)t fet)(en it)irb, obgteid) atte^ n)iber end) ijl:, fonbern 
end) bei)jl:eben, befd)irmen nnb an^l)e(fenn)irb, bienoeif tt)r 
nm feinetn>i((en aUed (eibet* 
©(dnbet ibr nnn, nnb Derfajfet end) anf ®ott, fo gfdnbet 

^ Mitten in. In English the order is always reversed, m the 
midst of, instead o^ middle in. 

2 L e rn e n for g e 1 e r n t. See p. 238, Note 5. " By which 
you have learned to know him and to believe on him." 

^Als die viel andern, etc. " as those who have (know) 
very different (not " much other"), surer and higher consolation and 
assurance, than all the world has, and greater strength and power to 
rely on (on which you have to rely) than," etc. 

*Ihr aber trostet euch, etc. " but console ye yourselves 
that you have a God and that you know him, and rely (imperative) 
on it that he will be with you and help you, as he has promised you 
through his word, and certainly will not fail [to fulfil it] though 
everything be against you, but will stand by you, defend you and de- 
liver you, because you have suffered everything for his sake." 



296 SELECTIONS FROM LUTHER. 

and) an mid). 3)1 cucr &lanbc rcd^t, bag ibv cndi ju ©ott 
aik'S ©utcn t)crfcl}ct/ fo t)crfcl)ct cud) bcjytlbcn and) ju mir. 
SGBvi^ ihx bet) ibm Zvo]ii unb j^^iUfe fud^et unb getDartet, bag 
gea>artct and) t)on mir ; id) tt)i(( cud) gcunpHd) uid)t fchtcu, 
fo tDcnu] ai^ ®ott \cib\t. Syabc id) cudi 6idl)cr gcbolfcn, 
unb altcg bet) cud) gctbau, ruvi^ il)r bcburft bcibt, unb mid) 
a(fo ergcigt, bci)be, niit 3Bortcn unb 2Qcrcfcn, ba^ ihr cud) 
mcin babt biirfcn trejicn/^ unb fiihuJid) auf mid^ vicrfaffen, 
unb id) end) nod) nie nid)t l)abe la\]en fchkn : fo and id)i 
and) binfort tbun, unb cud) nid)t faflfcn, ob id) g(cid) nid)t 
tciblid) bet) cud) bicibc* £^cnn id) babe nod) bicfctbigc ^vaffi 
unb 5Dfad)t, bci)bc, Don unb mit ©ott, bag idj^ tbun faun 
unb n)iK ; allcin, jn>cifc(t nub jagt nid)t, ali bdttct ibr, 
bci)bc, &ott unb mid) Dcrforcn, fonbcrn ftcbct t)cft im ®(au^ 
ben, unb lajfct cure 3n^^^fftt)t nid)t fincfcn nod) fdin)ad)cn, 
ob ibr g(cid) fcbct mid) Icibcn unb ftcrbcn, unb end) hintcr 
mir allcin (ajfcn* Unb n>ic ibr bibber bei) mix gcfcl)cn nni 
crfabrcn babt {cibnd)cn 23ci)jlfanb unb Scbnls : alfo glaubct 
nun and), ob ibriS gtcid) nid)t Dor 3(ngcn fcbcn u>crbct. 
Scnn fo ibr mcinc Sihtgcr nub rccf)tc (5briftcn fci)b, miiffct 

* Dass ihr euch zu Gott alles Guten versehet, 
" that you look confidently to God for every good thing, then look 
confidently to me for the same." Sich verse hen, with the 
genitive, means io ^r/;fr^ a //// 7/^ ccnfidinthj ; and with the addition 
of a dative of tlic person with z ii, to look to one for a things or to ex- 
prxt it of one. — W as — Trosts und 11 a lie, icliat of consola- 
tion and aid. 

* Dass ihr euch mcin li a b t d r f e n trosten, "that 
you have been able to comfort yourselves in me." M e i n is in the 
genitive for m e i n e r. S i c h t r o s t e n which is now in common 
languanro f )llowed by the preposition b e r, m it or i n, formerly 
governed a jronitive in the same sonse, to comfort one's scfforcr,tcith 
or in. — N o r h ii i e n i c h t is obsolete for n o c h nie. 

^ D e n n i c h li a b e n o c h d i e s e 1 b i g e K r a f t, etc. *' For 
1 have the same efficacy and power still from God nnd the same with 
iiim, (i. e. with liis aid, or through him,) so that 1 have both the power 
and the will to do it, (both can and will do it). 



EXPOSITION OF JOHN FOURTEENTH. 297 

H)v \\\d)t^ immerbar Uciben bangen an bem (Sef)ctt itnb 
gitbfen aujycr(trf)cn S^ro)!^, fcnbern fovtfai)xcn unb bte 
^iiuft fernen, C\v>cld)c^ \\t bcr Sbriftcn ^unflt,) baf il)r xxn^ 
geju)eifc(t gfaubct, bag id) end) l)c{fcn fann unb n)i(I, ba tl)r^ 
nirf)t fct)cn nod) fitbtcn fonnct, fonbent ba^ 2BiberfpieI fe^ 
I)ct unb fiibtct, ncmh'cf) im ?eiben unb affen ?tott)en, nnb 
bennorf) altejeit ben !j;rofl 6c()vi(tet, bag il)r ®ott nnb micf) 
{}a&t, obg(eicl) [cnjl aKeiJ encE) abfagt nnb entfdlfet 

2—4. 3n meineS aSater^ §anfe jTnb t)iet 
22obnnngen; n)c aber ba^ nidE)t n)dre, fo 
fage id) end) bod), ba^ id) l)inge()e, end) bte 
©tdtte jn bereiten. Unb ob id) bingebe, iDitt 
id) bod) U) i e b e r f m m e n, n n b end) j n m i r n e ^:^ 
men, anf bag ibt fei)b, mo id) bin; unb wo 
id) bingebe, ba^ wi^fet i\)V^ nnb ben SCeg 
toilet il)x and). 

dv trojlet afbier feine lieben Siinger nnb Sbn'pen anf 
brei)er(et) 2Ceife : Sie erjie i(l, bag jl'e n?ij]en fotten, bag 
bei) feinem aSater t)iet SSobnnngen fiir jTe jTnb. 2}a^ fet^et 
er gegen anbere jn)et)er(ei)2 ^jansS ober 2Bobnnngen ; aU 
fottte er fagen : Slnf Srben n)erbet il)r nid)t Diel ^dnfer, 
nod) gett)ifl'e SBobnnng bciben. 2)enn albi^t bat ber 2!enfef 
fein Dieid), fein S^an^ nnb SBobnnng, ba er ^err i(l, nnb 

* Musset ihr nicht, etc. " You must not always continue 
to cling to seeing and feeling outward consolation, but make progress 
and learn the art (and this is the Christians's art) of believing unhes- 
itatingly, that I have the ability and disposition to aid you, even 
when you can neither see it nor feel it, but see and feel just the con- 
trary, viz. are in suffering and distress. Still yon always have the 
consolation, that you have God and myself, though everything else 
forsakes (renounces) you and flies from you." 

^Zweyerley. " This he represents in comparison with others 
in a two-fold manner," i. e . in saying this, he compares two kinds of 
houses or dwellings. The construction is harsh and not very clear. 



298 SELECTIONS FROM LUTHER. 

ff^et in bcm ©eincn ;i banim n)irb er each, wnl \{)x Wxbet 
tt)n nnb fcin dicid) ftrcbet, nid)t lang alljicv rvol)ncn unb 
^aufen (afKn* 

Slbcr fct)b2 beg iincrfd)rccfen, (fpricf)t Shriflut^,) c^ foil 
eucf) ntdit^^ fd)aben ; fount ibr bier fein 5>in^ nnb $Oebn^ 
nng baben, nnb end) ber Xcnfcl niit feinen !tt)rannen ani 
ber Ti?clr jagt : fo fodt ibr benncd) 9tanin^ g^n»g baben, 
ba ibr bfeiben foKt.^ 2i5etten fie end) nid)t feiben^ jn S^itr^^ 
gem nnb 9cad)barn, ober and) jn ©aftcn, nnb jTe bie 2Belt 
attein bebalten : fo Uiffet fie bebalten, nnb anlJet, bag il)r 
bennod) and) fottt 2Bol)nnnfl, nnb berer Diel l)aben. 

Sip foil afbier anf^ einfdltigfte bie SBci)nnng fei;n, eben 
n)ie er an einem anbern Drt fprid)t, 93tattb, 13, 29 : ^Ber 
ba t)er(dgt ^>Hnfer, i^riiber ober (Bd)xvc]tcv, ober 2>ater, 
ober ?[Rntter, ober 28eib, ober ^inb, ober 3(ecfer, nm meim 
etn)i(fen nnb nm be^ (St)ange(ii tr^ilten, ber n^irbd bnnbert^ 
fattig empfa[)en in biefer ^cit, nnb in ber jnfitnftigen 20e(t 
ba^ ett)ige ?eben k., alfo fei) and) bier bie ''Diei)nnng : 2Benn 
man end) an^ einem i^anfe i^erjacjt, fo foUt ibr inel .s^infer 
bafiir l)aben ; nimmt man end) einerlep/^ fo foUt il)r mcl^ 

*Sitzetin dem Seirien. " He is in possession of his 
own," or what belongs to him. On this use of s i t z e n, see p. 63, 
last line and the note to it, and p. G4, lines 6 and 7. 

^Aber seyd dess unerschrocken, etc. *' But bo not 
afraid of that; it shall do you no liann." Unerschrocken, 
liere followed by the genitive, is now almost alwaj's folIowtHl by the 
preposition v o r. 

^ D a i h r b 1 e i b e n s o 1 1 t, ''to remain in," where you may 
remain. 

* W o 1 1 e n 8 i e e u c h n i c h t 1 e i d e n, etc. " If they will 
not endure you as citizens and neighbors, or even as guests, but will 
have the world to themselves, let tiiem have it, and be assured your- 
selves that you will still have a dwelling-place, and enough of them. " 

** K i n e r 1 e y. See p. 77, Note 2. — E m p f a h e n obsolete f'r 
e m p f a n g e n. "If they should not act so wickedly, and should 
not take so much away from you, still you shall have a hundred-fold 
and more [for what you shall have lost]." 



EXPOSITION OF JOnX FOURTEENTH. 299 

fafttg riM'cbcr bvigcaeu cmpfvibcn ; iinb fotTen^ fo bofe nicfjt 
ntvicbeii unb end) fo ml ntcht nebmen, ibr foUet^ bunbert^ 
mal fo (3Ut imb i)icf bcjjer babcn. .^abt il)r^ bier nutt, fo 
frigt ibr^ gen)ig(irf) bort reuttich. S'enn er bat nod) fo 
grcjTcn Sorratb, bag er euer jeglicbem^ fanit f3eben bunbert 
3Bobniingeu fiir etne. I^arum nur gctrcft^ iinb frifcb babiit 
gefe^r, tv^vS end) bie 53e(t nebmen fann : bie SSobintngett 
be^ ?e6end ftnb met weiter, bettn bie SBobnung beg ^lebeg. 
£)b fie eitd> nun bier in ^ercfer nnb ©efcingnig ftcrfen, cber 
and) an^jagen, bag ia^t end) nid]t fiimmern, eg finb bdnfer, 
bie ber ^iQelt jngeboren ; ibr aber febet auf ein anberg,n)o^ 
ranf ibr 5U tr^arten babt, unb ttya^ ii)v bort frigen nnb be^ 
fifeen foKct* 

^i]o m biefer ^^ert ju Jtrofl gerebt ben Sbriften, bag fie 
ficb nid>t irren faffen, ob ibnen tie 22e(t alle page antegt, 
unb nicbt allein biefer SSobnnng beraubt, fonbern alteg 
tiimmt, mag ffe atbier baben, (3nt, @bre, ?eben, unb anrft 
fie ing @(enb, 2(rmntb, Sli^fle, Scbanbe, (Bd)mad) unb ^^ob ; 
fonbern bag fte bagegen batten,^ n>ag fie gegen biefen gerin^ 
gen aSerfnft geminnen, mo )ie jeftt einer $2obnung bevanbet 
merben, bag ffe bafiir met befjere 2Bobnungen frigen fofkn, 
tiemlicf) an bent SDrt, i>a^ ia beigt: 3n meineg 33aterg 

^ Euer jeglichem, "to each one of you." 

^Darum nur getrost, etc. The preterite participle is 
often employed for the imperative. See Gram. p. 262 infra. " There- 
fore be firm and resign yourself (d a h i n g e s e t z t, bring your 
mind to it) cheerfully in respect to what the world can take from you. 
The mansions of life (heaven) are much more spacious than those of 
death (this world). Whether, now, they thrust you into dungeons 
and imprisonment, or banish you, let that not trouble you ; they are 
houses [those from which you are driven] which belong to the world. 
Look to something widely different, which you are to expect, and 
which, in another world (dor t), you shall acquire and retain." 

^ Dagegen halten, " that they compare w^ith this (hold side 
by side with this) that which they obtain in return for this small loss 
if they are now robbed of a dwelling." See p. 152, Note 1. 



300 SELECTIONS FROM LUTHER. 

S)a\\{e. ^SQo icv \]V niib bleibct, ia trcrbc id) unb ihv and) 
bleiben, Ctt>ie cr bernad) fagen wiv'oj bail ihr nicbt mett(id)e 
xxnb mcnfrf)(irf)c, fonbcrn l)immtifcf), gottlirfje 2Qohnungcu 
unb 5;^aiifcr haben fottct ; 't^a^ ijl:, fiir cine luiflcitigc, t?er? 
gangfiitc, iin<Tcf)tTe unb iinftcite SGcbiiiing, (bie tbr unb 
alte 5Beft obnc bao^ 6alb lajTcn mnjTet,) citcl fdunie, bcrr^ 
iid)e, vocite, en)ige, ficf)cre nub geanj^e SSobnungen, bie cndj 
nicf)t fonncn gcnemmcn tt>erben, unb t>ox jcbcrmann fricb^ 
lid) bebalten tperbet. 

2)er anbcre ^rojl ijlt, bag cr mcitcr fprid)t : ^So ba^ nidjt 
n)are,3 j-^ [age id) end) bod), bag id) bingebe, end) bie Stdttc 
ju bereitcn 2C^ Snmma, SCobnnngcn foUt ibr gcvoigtid) 
^aben ; nub 06 ibrcr nod) nid^t genng u>arcn, fo nn(( id) 
tl)rer genug fd)ajfcn, bag, cb c^S ju tvenig mre, bag ibr bnn^ 
bert fiir cine frigt, wotite id) ibr bnnbcrt tanfenb nnb nod) 
ntet)r fd)ajfen, bag t:>a fcin 9}iangc( nod) ©cbrcd)en foil 
fei)n nnb altcrlci) SBobnnngcn, n^ic c^ ener Syxb bcgebren 
wag. 

3J(fo rebct er mit ibncn anfi^ attcrcinfatrigftc nnb glcid)^ 
fam finbtid), nad) ibrcn ©cbancfcn, (unc man mng @infdf^ 
tige rei^en nnb locfen,) bamit cr \ie t)on bcmfclbigen binauf 
jiebc, bag jTc fonncn cincn ^Dtutb nnb Xvcft fd)opfcn. 

3(ber bac^ u>arc bie ilnnrt,^ n>cr fotd^ce^ and) fonntc qUUu 
ben. Scnn e^ ijl ja n>al)r, bag ein jeglid)cr SbrijT, bcr ba^ 

'Wo d e r i s t, etc. " Where he (m e i n V a t e r) dweHs, 
there wiH we (I, i. e. Christ and you, i. e. my disciples) dwell." I s t 
und h 1 e i b t, is and remaius conveys an idea which is best ex- 
pressed in English, by continue to be. 

*Ohne das, aside from tit is. 

' Wo das n i c h t ware, *' If that were not so (if there were 
no mansions ready) still I would say that 1 go to prepare places for 
you." So many of the old interpreters understood this passage. 
The English version is undoubtedly more corr^^ct. 

*Abcr das ware Kunst, etc. *' But that would be an 
attainment, if one (or, whoever) could believe all this." See p. 21>2, 
Note 1, and p. 14, Note 5. 



EXPOSITION OF JOHN FOURTEENTH. 301 

2Sort tefennen n)i((, entn>eter mit prebigen, ober, fonjl Dor 
@ericf)t, ber jlebet fe()r iibel auf (Srbcn, atte (Stunbeu mt^ 
jTd)er unb in ®efal)r, bag man ibn Don ®nt, ©eib nnb 
^inb jage, ba bie anbern aUc6 Dottanf^ babcn, im (ganfe 
unb gntem ©emad) leben. 3(6er, menn mir ancf) anfet)en^ 
n)a^ nn^ Dorbebaften ijl-, nnb moju mv fommen fotten, folfj? 
ten tdix fa fr6l)ticf) barju fei)n, nnb nn^ Dtehnebr jammcrn'^ 
taflen ber armen, elenben 3Se(t Senn ma^ t|l:g, ob jTe 
un^ mit ^iiiKn trit, nnb anf^ \)bhciic nn^ pfaget nnb !?eib 
tbnt, t^ir fonnen borf) nirt)t^ Derlieren* aSerfieren wit aber^ 
fo Derlieren rviv ben ®arf, fo mv am §alfe tragen, ba^ ijt 
nid)t mebr, benn bie 5>iUfen Derforen ;3 inbeg bleibt nn^ 
gfeid)n)ot ber ®cf)a6, bag n>ir 6ei)be, biefe^, fo tt)ir !)ier (af^ 
fen, reid)tid) n)ieber friegen, unb bajn Diet me^r eiDiger, 
g6ttficf)er ©liter* 

3nm britten fpricf)t er : £)b icf) jci^t Don end) gebe, (encf) 
bie SGBol)nnng ju bereiten,) foUt ibr nid)t erfd)rerfen nocf) 
tranren, bag ibr mid) nid)t babt ; fonbern foUt ben Strofl 
and) bciben, bag id) end) nid)t voiff tajfen, fonbern n)ieber ju 
cud) fommen, nnb end) ^n mir b^f^i^ ^c*, bag i^r meine^ 
®ange^4 ^^er 2lbfd)ieb^ nid)t fottt ®d)aben f)aben ; fonbern 
tt)iflet, bag e^ end) ju gnte gefd)ebe, bag id) end) bie 9Bob^ 
unngen beym aSater bereite nnb bejlette, nnb barjn and) tDie^^^ 
ber ju end) fommen, nnb fetbfl end) mit mir babin bringen 
tt)iC, bag ibr bie 2Bo^nnngen einne^met, nnb affo bet) mir 

^ Alles vollauf " all, in abundance." 

I ^Uns vielmehr jammer n, " and rather bewail the [con- 

l dition ofj the poor, miserable world." Literally, "cause ourselves 

to be distressed." Jammern in the first person may take a b e r 

after it. In the second and third persons, it takes the accusative of 

the person. 

^Denn die Hulsen verloren, " than losing the husk." 
See p. 240, Note 3. 

* Dass ihr meines Ganges, etc. " that ye may not loose 
by my going or departure (have the loss of my going, etc.)." 

26 



i 



302 SELECTIONS FROM LUTHER. 

bfeibet, tt)0 id) bin : alfo, bag tbr bei)bcg flen>ig babt, tie 
SOBobnungen im 5)imme( nnb mid) in (Sn^igfeit bet) end), 

35a^ |Tnb bie brci) ©tiicte, bie nn^ troften feUcn n>iber 
Xexxfd unb 2Beft, nnb atte^, ma^ nn^J aSofc^ mag n>ibcr^ 
fabren, bag n>ir einen fefd^en ^errn nnb trenen ^ei(anb 
^aben, ber bal)in gefabren ill, nnb nn^ fd)en aDol)nnng be^ 
reitet, nnb g(eirf)Wo( bei) nn^ fepn nnb bteiben toitt. & i(l 
aber nocf) febr t)erborgcn, nnb frf)einet nidbt ; benn wir feben 
nnb fiiblen, bag bcnnod) bie SBett nnb !ti)rannen iiben ibreii 
Xvoi} nnb gre^et immerfort tDiber ba^ (St)ange{inm nnb bie 
(Sbriflen. Slber barnm beiffet er nn^, an ibn glanben. 3l(* 
foUte er fagen : SBenn ibr nnr fonntet bie ffeine SSeife 
©ebntb l)aben, nnb an meinem SSort bangen, fie tt)erben^* 
bod) nid)t l)inan^ ftngen, eb jTe jefet atte nod) i)iel bofer tva^ 
ten ; benn e^ i(l fd)on befd)fojien, unb ba^ iirtbcit ifl ju 
flarrf gegangen, jTe n)irb ba^ ©titnbfein trejfen, ba^ fie 
fd}recfen nnb il)nen fo bange nnb angfl mad)en n)irb, ba^ jTe 
nirgenb merben gn bfeiben b^f^<^«. SlUein ifl^ barnm ^ 
t^un, bag ibr bie Slngen red)t anfrbnt, nnb nid)t anfebct^ 
tt)ie eg t)or benfelben gebet nnb flebct, fenbern, xva^ id) rebe 
unb fage, bag id) end) nid)t mill laffen, nod) Don end) bfeiben^ 
fonbern jn end) fommen nnb end) jn mir ne[)men, alfo, ba^ 
id) bet) end), nnb ibr bet) mir bleibet 2C- 

3nm Dierten befd)(engt2 er : d^ foil nid)t genug fet)n, ba^ 
t^r tDiflet, bag id) b^^^g^be, end) bie 3Bobnnng jn bereiten, 
unb tDieber jn end) fommen nnb bet> end) bteiben tt>il(, bag 
i()r fet)b, roo id) bin ?c., fonbern bariiber \)abt ibr and) ben 

* Sie werdens, etc. " they could (would) not carry it out 
(aing their song out), even if they were much worse than they now 
are ; for it is already decreed, and the decree too firmly made [for 
that]. The evil time will come upon them, which will terrify them 
and make them fearful and anxious, so that tliey will have no quiet 
abode (will nowhere have a place to stay in). This alone is to be 
attended to," etc. On Darum zu t h u n, see p. 20, Note 3. nied 

* Beschleusst, for beschliesst. 



EXPOSITION OF JOHN FOURTEENTH. 303 

SSortbeif, ba^ iijv bercit^ tt^iffet, tDo id) fjingc^e, unb iDiflfet 
and) ben SBeg. 

Sa^ ift nun bcr Sfficg fetne^ bctfigen ?eiben^, batjon er 
ibnen bereit^ t)iel unb oft gefagt barte^ fonberficf) an bentfer^^ 
btgen [cfeten 5{6enb ; vt^ietrol fie c^ hod) xnd)t Derfl:ehett 
fonntcn^ unb ibnen big 2Sort nccf) bnnrfef n>ar, ba^ iTe il)ni 
6alb tavanf fragen, ijl aber fo t)iel gefagt : SSa^ fell id) 
tnd) i)iel fagen ? 3rf) tt>i({ end) nid)t iiabbern nod) fcf)tr>ebett 
la\\en mit ©ebanrfen ; i\)v Moi^et^ nnb fe[)et^ fcf)on aCeg* 
Senn t^enn it)r micf) habt, fo t)abt tt)r @ott unb atte^, unb 
n^enn ibr mid) febet bingeben, fo febet ibr fd)on ben 3Beg* 
2cf) ^i^iff euif) feinen anberniffieg tt>etfen, nod) anbere ®eife 
V)orfcl)Iagen, ed ifl: fcf)on aCe^ ba ;2 attein, ba^ euer ^erfe 
itnr jufrieben fei)^ unb ffd) nid)t bafiir entfefee, ob end) bie 
2Be(t fdjredet iinb befiimmert^ b^g i\)t in mix greube unb 
griebe ^abet ic. 

5,6. ©prid)t ju t^m 2;f)oma^, ber ba ifti^t 
Spiffing: S)exT^ n)ir vt^iffen tttd)t, n>o bu f)tn^ 
ge!)efl, unb n^te fonnen tvfiv ben SOBeg njiffen? 
Sefug fprtd)t ju tt)m: 3d) bin ber 2Beg, utti 
bie SGBat)rf)eit, unb ba^ ?ebem 

®ie i)attcn ge()5ret,3 bie [ieben 2ttnger, ba^ er wollte l^in^ 

-* Dass sie ihn, etc. "so that they soon ask him about it." 
Bat this is what was meant (so much as this was said) : ' Why 
should 1 use many words ? 1 wish not to make you flutter and fly 
all about with your speculations.' 

*Es ist sehon alies da, etc. "Everything rs contained 
in this (i. e. nothing else is necessary). Only let your heart be quiet 
(only that your heart may be quiet) and not be alarmed, though the 
world terrify and trouble you. Have (or seek) joy and peace in me.'* 

''Sie hatten gehoret, etc. " The beloved disciples had 
heard that he would go away and prepare dwellings for them ; and not 
only so (that), but that they themselves already knew the way, where 
he would go and stay, and [thatj they also should follow him thither, 
that he eould not [now] say much to them, and [that] they ought 



304 SELECTIONS FROM LUTHER. 

geben, unb ihnen bic SBobnintgen befleUcn ; unb nicf)t aUcin 
ba^, fonbern bag <Te and) fct)on fet6ft ben 3Bcg n^iipten, tt)o 
er bin9el)eu unb hkibcn n)nrbc, nnb pe il)m and) bal}in fol^ 
gen fotltcn, ta^ er nicf)t t)ie{ prebigen biirfte, nnb fie [idj 
befto weniger bef ummern nnb erfd)rerfen [oUten, bag er je$t 
k)en ihnen [rf)eiben iniigte* S'aranf fdbet^ (£t. ^bema^ an 
jn tt)nnbern, nnb ift il)m ebentl/enertid) gerebt, bag er fagt : 
fie mijTen, wo er l)init?olle, nnb tpiffen bajn ben 5Beg, fo er 
ibnen bod) nid)t^ bat)on gefagt l)abe, t))ol)in cber tvcld}ci 

not (ought so much the less) to be troubled and alarmed at his leav- 
ing them now (that he must now part with them)." — D i e 1 i e b e n 
J (J n g e r, in apposition with s i e, is a forcible mode of expression. 
— All the principal clauses, after the word g e h 6 r e t, are dependent 
on that word, as is indicated in the translation, whether the woid 
dass is inserted or omitted. — Bestellen is a difRcult word to 
explain, particularly if all its significations are to be referred to one 
radical signification. The objects to which it relates, however, give 
it this diversity of meinings. The word itself in its common, i. e. 
figurative sense, means, to put in its place. 1. To direct a person to 
his proper place (einen wohin bestellen). 2. To commis- 
sion SL person with a certain business, or impose some duty on him 
(einen zu etwas bestellen). 3. To order (also, engage), 
direct (also, deliver) or prepare something (etwas bestellen). 
Consider therefore whether the object is a person (einen) or a 
thing (etwas), and then, whether there be also an indirect object, 
and whether that relates to a place (wohin) or to a thing or duty 
(z u etwas). The literal meaning of the word, to cover a place 
over J is obsolete. The third signification is very broad, and admits 
of a variety of modifications. Compare the miscellaneous examples 
in the larger lexicons. 

^ Darauf fahet (f fl n g t), etc. "Thereupon Thomas be- 
gins to wonder ; to him the remark appears strange (to him it is 
spoken strangely) when Christ says (that he says), » they know 
whether he intends to go (h i n w o 1 1 e) and they know the way 
thither,' though (s o - d o c h) he has said nothing about (it) whither 
or what way (VVeges, genitive of manner) he will go from them. 
Therefore he begins, in a gross, carnal manner (W e i s e, genitive), 
to inquire in his \u\u(\ (d c n r k e n) after the road," etc. 



EXPOSITION OF JOHN FOURTEENTH. 305 

SSegc^ er 'oon i()uen (^cl)cn woUte^ fdhet affo art ju bencfen, 
grobcr, flei[d)(trf)er 2Bcife, nad) bcr ©traffe, barauf man 
leiblid) gcl)et obcr fcibrct t)on ciiter ©tabt jur anbcrtt, unb 
iiadi bent 2Sege, baraiif bie g^itfje tvctcn. Seffelben/ fpre^ 
d)eit jTe, VDiffen tDir feine^, n)o ober ju tt>errf)em ;j;t)or unb 
n?o bitiau^ bit n^iKft 2Die foKteu mv benn 3Beg ttJiffett ? 

^uf bicfe grobe, fleifd)ficf)e ©ebatirfen antn^ortet ttutt (^\)vU 
jlu^ : 3rf) trtepne c^ a(fo,^ ba^ it)r ben 5Beg n)tflet, ba^ ifl, 
% feitnet fa beit, n^efdier ber 5Beg t'flt, nemh'd) mid) ; benn 
tf)r fe[)ct unb tDiflfet, ba^ id) bin Sbrijtit^, ener §err unb 
jQeifanb, unb it)r meine 3iinger, bie ibr^ fo tange meiite ^re^ 
bigt gebort unb tneine 2Buubertr>ercfe gefeben l)abt ©o 
xi)v ttun mid) fenuet, fo feuuet unb m^ct ihx ben ®eg^ unb 
atte^, n?a^ il}r tDtfien fottt. 

Sa^ ifl nun aberntaf^ ein fonber(id)eg, unb eben, ba^ ber 
(jDangelifl: (gt 3of)Cinni^ pf^^gt itnmer jn fd)reiben unb ju 
treiben, bag atte unfere ?ebre unb ©tauben foil auf ^\)xif 
(ium gebeu, unb aUcin an biefer einigen ^erfon baugen, unb 
bag n)ir Calle ^un(l unb Sffiei^beit bet)feite getl)an,) fd)ted)tg 

* Desselben, etc. " We know, say they, nothing of this 
desselben-keines), when or at what gate [of the city], and 
at what passage (wo h i n a u s) thou woaldest go out." Wo h i- 
naus du wills t, " you will go out," is here peculiar on ac- 
count of the connection of h i n a u s not only with wo, but with 
w i 1 1 s t, analogous to h i n w o 1 1 e a few lines above. Such a 
twofold use of a particle is not unusual with Luther. 

*Ich meyne es also, *'I mean as follows" (I mean it thus). 

^Und ihr meine JOnger, die ihr, " and that you 
[are] my disciples who," etc. 

"^Das ist nun abermal, etc. " That again is a peculiarity 
(peculiar) and precisely [the one] which the Evangelist John is al- 
ways accustomed to write and treat of, namely that all our teaching 
and faith should relate to Christ and be attached to this peculiar per- 
son alone, and that we (all human knowledge and wisdom apart) 
should know nothing at all (simply, or purely nothing) except," etc. 
— Beyseite gethan is put absolute with Kunst und Weis- 
heit. 

26* 



306 SELECTIONS FROM LUTHER. 

nid)t^ miffeit foHen, bcnn, me (gt* a>aufu^. 1 gor. 2, 23 ; 
2, 2. fagt, ben gecreut^ic^tcu Sbriilum, 

2(bcr, me (]rof^^ unb fd)mer bicfe ?el)re unb ^iinjlt i(t, and) 
ben rerf)ten (2cl)u(eru Sbrijli, bad beweifet n)obI albier (2t 
^bomad unb ba(b bcrnad) St ^M)i((ippud, (n^ie wr boren 
iDerben,) tt>efcf)e i^or ben anberlt a((ertt)egen l)eraiidfabren 
init ibrem llinierfT:anbe, unb laffen jTd) mercfen, ba^ jTe'nod) 
feiner DIebe n^enig ober nid)t^ Dcrfteben : fo fee bed) ben 
^errn SbtiRiim fo fange geboret, unb and) je^t iiber Xi^dje 
boren, une er il)nen faget t?on feined SSaterd i>cinfc, ba er 
it)ot(e bingcl)en, nnb ibnen bte 5Cal)nnng bereiten jc, laficn 
ibn ba binter bent 2!ifd)e jTfeen, nnb fo(d)ed tJorprebigen jn 
ibrem Il^rojl, fo flabbern ffe bien?etT anberd tDobtn niit ®c^ 
bancfen nnb mad)en ibnen einen anbern SBeg, nnb fdjeibeu 
Sbrifinm nmt t)on ibnen* 

S^arnm riirfet er ffe l)ernm,2 bod) mit feinen, frennbnd)cn 

^ A b e r, w i e gross, etc. " But how great and difRcult this 
doctrine (and knowledge) is, even to the true disciples of Christ, 
(that) is shown by Thomas here (shows Thomas here) and soon after 
(as we shall hear) Philip, who always dash on before the rest with their 
foolishness, and show (and cause themselves to give indications, or to 
be observed) that, as yet, they understand little or nothing of his dis- 
course. Though they have so long heard Christ their Lord, and 
even now hear at table, as he speaks to them of his Father's house, 
to which he will go and prepare mansions for them, [still] they leave 
iiim sitting there by the table and giving them beforehand such in- 
struction for their [future] consolation, and meanwhile tliey fly oli' 
with their own thoughts, and strike out anotlier tracli for themselrea 
and separate themselves widely from Christ (Christ widely from 
themselves)." — A 1 1 e r w e g c n, everywhere, is here used in the ob- 
solete sense of always, which word is of the same etymology. — 
H i n t e r d e m T i s c h e s i t z e n is a form of expression which 
admirably intimates the disrespect which is here censured. The lat- 
ter part of this paragraph is highly idiomatic, and is easier felt than 
explained. An attempt is made to give the force of it in the transla- 
tion. 

^Darum rOcketer sie hcrum, etc. " Therefore he 
censures them (pulls or jerks them around), though with delicate and 



EXPOSITION OF JOHN FOURTEENTH. 307 

SOBorten, ali cin gi'tttgcr Syvv itnb 5!3icifter, fo fcer ©einen 
Unn)ijTenl}eit nub (B\vad)hcit n^obl fann i)erfeben imb ju gut 
I)a(ten, unb U)if( jTc fd)(cdit aKein an jTrf) l)ejften imb binbett 
mit ^iXQen, Dbrcn unb §crgen,^bag jTe nirf)t tDciter fet)en 
nod) bencfen fotteit* Stf^ foKte er bit?rmit fagen : X\)oma^ 
Zijoma, tt>o gajfcjlt obcr bencfefl: bu bin ? SHfo nni^ man 
nid)t fpccnfiren nub flabbern ; l)ierber auf mid) miij]et tf)r 
feben. Sb^^ fcnnet nub tr^iffet ja mid) ; fo ibr nun mid) 
fennet unb febet, fo fennct unb fcbet ibr ben 2Beg, unb biir^ 
fet nid)t iDeiter fud)en nod) forgen* Senn ibr miijfet^ mid) 
nid)t affo anfcben, wie bie ^ub ein neu ^b^^ anfiebet, ober 
n)ic mid) bie ungtdubigen Sitnger anfeben, me id) 2{ugen, 
SDtaul unb 5tafen babe, a(^ euer einer ; fonbern mii^t bie 
Slugen fdutern, bie Dbren fegen, unb anber^ f^b^^/ bi^ren, 
benrfcn unb Derjleben, benn nad) fleifd)lid)em ©inn unb 
SSer(lanb* 

©iebe, auf foId)e 2Beife mH er bi^r ftd) angefeben l)aben, 
nid)t a(fo, vt)ie bie 2(ugen feben, ba^ er kibiid) mit ben gitf^ 
fen bor ibuen gebe an einen anbern Drt, eine^^ SOBeg^, ben 
fie nid)t miffen, wo er binfcibrt ober bleibt, unb f[e alfo i)i\u 
ter ibm (affe, ba^ fte ftd) fein nidit^ mebr troften^ fonnen ; 

gentle words, as a kind lord and master, who can overlook and leni- 
ently construe the ignorance and weakness of his dependents, and 
will fasten and bind them directly to himself alone, with their eyes, 
ears and hearts, that they should neither look nor think farther ; as 
if he would thereby say, ' Thomas, Thomas, whither are you gaping 
and wandering with your thoughts 1 One must not speculate and 
fly about so. You must look hither at me.'" Rucken is used 
here in the obsolete sense, equivalent to z i e h e n, or r e i s s e n. 

^ Denn ihr mUsset, etc. " For you must not stare at me 
as a cow does at a new gate, or as my unbelieving followers do, to 
see what sort of eyes, mouth and nose I have, as one of you ; but 
you must purge your eyes and clear out your ears, and see, hear, 
think and understand otherwise than after carnal sense and under- 
standing." 

^Sich sein-trosten, *' console themselves in respect to 
him." S e i n genitive for seiner. See p. 296, Note 2, 



308 SELECTIONS FROM LUTHER. 

fonbent, wie er gciflfirf) gel)ct unb fcitjret, n)e(cl]C(^ er rcd)t 
l)eigt jam SSater geben, baburcl), ba^ er leibet unb jtirbt, 
unb bocf) nid)t im ^l^obc b(ci6t, fenbcrn cbcn baburrf) baf)m 
fommt, bag er in fein JKeirf) trit unb I)errfrf)et, bajn, bag jic 
burrf) ibn jam aSater fommen, unb er jTe frf)«^Kr ^^^^^ wnb 
belfe in affen ?t6tf)en» S^arum fprid}t er : 2Qer mid) alfo 
an(Te[)et, VDie id) jnm aSater ge[)e, ber I)at alfo t^iel gefel)en, 
bag id) ben 2;ob leibe nacf) meine^ aSater^ 2!BilIen, unb bar^ 
nadj cmQlid) tebe anb regiere, anb a(fo gel)e id) ead) t>or 
unb 6red)e bie aSabn, bag il)r and) fottet nad^fofgen* 1:ai 
tl)ae id) aab fein anbrer, anb mag e^ tl}aa, fcnfl miirbet iijX 
uimmermet)r bajn fommen* Saram, fo \\)x fofd)e^ n)ij]et,i 
fo tt)ij]et i()r bepbe^, wo id) l)in n^iff, anb toilet and) ben 
2Geg, bag id) ialjin fomme, unb it)r mir fofgen miiffet, nem^f 
lid), bag id)6 felbjl bin, unb ibr atle^ in mir f)abt, wai iijX 
bebiirfet, af^ ber fiir end) flirbt, bea SSater Derfobnet, bie 
©iinbe titget, ben !Iob t)erfd)(inget, unb affo aUci ja mir 
giebe, bag ibr ia mir alle^ l)abt. 

2^ieg beigt aaa (5t)riflam i^iel anberd anfel)en, benn if)tt 
alte 5Qeft anfiebet, unb bie ^sitnger fe(bft juDor ibn anfabem 
:£>enn jefet jTnb bie 9(ngen gelautert bard) bea ®faaben, nn)) 
ifl gar cine neue Srfenntnig* &icid) aU tt>enn2 id) cinci 

* Darum, so ihr sole lies wisset, etc. "Therefore if 
you know this, you know both where I intend going, and you know 
also the way (that 1 may go there and you must follow me), viz. 
that it is 1 myself, and you have everything you need, in me, as [in 
one] who dies, reconciles the Father, blots out sin, swallows death 
for you, and thus attract everything to myself, that in me ye may 
have everything." There is great freedom here in the use of paren- 
thetical observations. 

* G 1 e i c h a 1 s w e n n, etc. " Just as if I should see a king's 
son captured and in wretchedness, in a gray coat or in pilgrim's cos- 
tume (form) [and should regard him] as a poor man, and not otherwise 
than as (for) a poor beggar, as my eyes direct me ; but ifl hear that 
he is a king's son, then the gray coat, the staff and every such beg- 
garly appearance disappear so that I bow the knee before liim and 
call him gracious lord/' etc. 



EXPOSITION OF JOHN FOURTEENTH. 309 

^onige^ ©o[)n gefangeu unb im @(enb fef)e, tu einem grauen 
diode ober ^i(grim^ ©eftalt, af^ eincn armen 5!)tann, unb 
iiicf)t^ anbcr^, benn fiir cineu SSettfer, n)te mid) bie ?iugett 
tt)cifcn : iDcnn idi abcr l)ore, ba^ er eine^ ^ouigeg ®o[)tt 
ijl, fo fdltet fobalb ber graue Dtocf lutb ber ©tab unb atte 
fo(cl)e S5ctt(crgc(la(t au^ ben 3(ngen, ba^ id) bie ^nie gegen 
ibm benge, unb il)n gndbtgen ^errn beijje, ob gleid) nod) 
teine giUbene ^rone, nod) 5[)^aje(ldt an ibm gefet)en n)irb. 
§ll(fo, ba ©t- 2;t)oma^ unb bie 2{nbern gl)rifi:um feben l)in^ 
ter bem $tifd)e filsenb, a(^ init fleifd)lid)en Stugen, fel)en fie 
nod) nid)t^ n?ad er fiir ein yjlann i% iMber {)ernad) frigen 
fie ein anber ®efid)t, neni(id), ba^ er fei) ber 3Beg, unb burd) 
feinen Xoi jum SSater gebe, unb (baburd), ba^ fie an iljU 
gtdnben,) ffe and) babin burd) ibn gebrad)t tt)erben* 

Sarum, trenn ba^ ©tiinblein fommt, ba unfer Zl)nn unb 
2Bercf aufboren mn^, unb n>ir nid)t langer albie ju bfeiben 
Ijaben, unb biefe i:)ifputationi angebet : 2Bo nel)me id) nun 
eine S5riide ober ©teg, ber inir gen^ifi ift, baburd) id) binii^ 
ber in jene^ ?eben fomme ? n^enn man bal)in fommt, (fage 
id),) fo fiel)e bid) nur nad) feinem SBeg urn, fo ba ijci^cn 
menfd)(id)e 2Bege unb unfer eigen ®nt^ b^ifig ?eben ober 
SBBerd ; fonbern la^ fofd)e^'2 atte^ jugeberft fei)n mit bem 
aSater Unfer, unb briiber gefprod)en : aSergib nni unfre 
©d)u{b 2Cv unb I)alte bid) aKein ju biefem, ber ba fagt : ^d) 
bin ber 2Beg 2C. Unb fTebe, ba^ bu big SGBort aldbenn bit 
tJeft unb tief eingebifbet babeft, unb affo, aU t)ortejl bu 
Sbriftum gegenn)drtig bir fagen, tt>ie er bier ju Jtboma fagt : 
5Ba^ fud)ejl unb gajfeft bu nad) anbern SBegen ? ^;^ie{)er, 
auf mid), mugt bu fet)en unb bteiben, unb bir feinen anbern 

^ Disputation, soliloquy. — Wenn man dahin kommt, 
" when one comes to that," or when that time arrives. 

2 Sondern lass solches, etc. "let all that be overspread 
• with the Lord's Prayer, and over it (all 3^our good works) let the 
I words be spoken, ' Forgive us our sins,' and cleave alone to this one, 
I who says," etc. 



310 SELECTIONS FROM LUTHER. 

©ebancfctt laflen mad)en, mc bit mogejl gen ^immet fom^ 
ttten ; fonbcrn allci vciw^ ab unb voeit awS bem ^;^cr§cn ge^ 
fcgt, unb nid)t anber^ gcbactt, bcnn, wie id) bir fage : 3ct) 
bin ber 2iBcg. (Sicl}e niir, bag bu auf mirf) tretejl:, ba6 i(l, 
t)aftc bid) mit Deftem GJtauben unb alter Si^^^^^i^rf)^ be* 
^erfeen^ an mid) ; id) voili bie Sriide fet)n unb bid) iibertra^ 
gen^ bag bu fellt in eincm 2(ugenb(id an^ bem 2!obe unb 
ber S>bllcnanQ\t in jene^ ?eben fommen. S'enn id) bin*,* 
ber ben 2Ceg ober 25al)n fefbjl: gepeflaftert, unb felbftgegan^ 
gen unb iibergefabren bin, auf bag id) bid) unb alte, fo an 
mir bangen, l)iniiber bringe ; attein, bag bu bid) ungejnoei? 
felt auf mid) fegeft, frifd) auf mid) n)age(l, unb getrejl unb 
fvbhiid) ia\)in fabreft unb fterbeft in meinem Stamen* 

©0 Witt er f)iemit feine 3iinger unb Sl)ri)len baju juril? 
ften unb bereiten, bag (Te immerbar gen^arten be* ©ange*^ 
ju jenem ?eben» Slffo fottte er fagen : @* mxb nun »ief 
anber* mit end) v^erben, n)ci( id) t)cn end) fd)eibe» 2^er 
Zoi> wirb^ end) tdg(id) unter Slugen jlojfen, unb n>erbet atte 

* Sondern alles rein, etc. " but [let] everything [be] put 
entirely away (rein ab) and far from your heart, and nothing else 
[be] thought than," etc. The participle for the imperative. See p. 
297, Note 1. 

*Denn ich bins, " For it is I who have myself paved the 
way or path, and have myself gone and passed over it, in order that 
I may convey across thee and all who cleave to me. Only [be sure] 
that you surrender yourself unhesitatingly to me, that you cheerfully 
venture upon me, and that you go confidently and joyfully and die 
in my name." 

^ Dass sie immerdar gewarten des Ganges, etc. 
*' that they may be ever awaiting their passage to that other life." 
Gewarten like warten, governs the genitive. See p. 224, 
Note 7. 

* Der Tod wird, etc. "Death will daily stare you in the 
face (rush upon your view) and you will needs expect every hoar 
that men will torment you, murder you and hunt you from the world, 
so that you must go the way that 1 go out of this life. Therefore 
see to it, that you know then where first to set your foot, and find 



EXPOSITION OF JOHN FOURTEENTH. 311 

©tnnben n^arten miiflfen, bag man end) mri martertt, n)ur^ 
gen nnb an^ ber SSelt jagen, bag i\)v and) miiffet ben 5Beg 
ge[)en, ben id) jei^t gebe an^ biefem ?e6en. 2)arnm febet jn, 
bag it)r af^benn njiflfet, ti^obtn i\)v ben gng jnm erpen fegen 
feUet, nnb ben 2Seg trejfet, ber end) tragen fann, ba^ i(l, 
bag ibr t)efle an mtr banget, bag tt)r ntcf)t a(fo jappe(t nnb 
jaget, n^ie He, fo wn mir nirf)tg miflfen nnb i^ren D?eim 
fiiljren : 

3rf) febe, nnb n)eig nid)t, VDte tang. 
3d) (lerbe, nnb tt)eig nid)t, mann. 
3d) fabr, nnb n)eig ntd)t, n)ol)in. 
9}?id) tt?nnbert, bag id) fr61)lid) bin> 

©0 fottten bte fagen, bte biefe ?ef)re nid)t n)oIIen {)6ren, 
nod) ben 2Beg anne()men, nnb ibr Sebenlang t)ergeblid) an^ 
bere SGBege fnd)en^ Senn a(fo (Itebet^ nnb mng be^ 5[Ken^ 
fd)en §erg, (fo e^ obne Sbrijlo ijl,) bag e^ imnterbar ijaxi^ 
get nnb pampett in fofd)em etrigen B^eifel, (Sd)reefen nnb 
3agen, n^enn e^ be^ Xobe^ gebenrft, bag e^ nid)t n^eig, tt>o 
an^, n^ottte gerne bem ^obe nnb ber pollen entflieben, nnb 
tt)eig bod) nic^t, mie, tt)ie jTe fefbjl: ntit biefem 5){eim befennen* 

Slber ein (^\)vi^, al^ ber biefen 28eg !ennet, nnb fd)on an^? 
gefangen bat, baranf jn ge^en, folt bag aSlat nmttjenben^ 
nnb froblid) alfo fagen : 

the way that can support you, i. e. that you cleave fast to me, and 
that you therefore do not struggle and shrink back with fear (z a- 
ge t), as those who know nothing of me, and say in their song," etc. 

* Denn also stehet, etc. " For so it is (stands) and must 
be with the heart (so is and must be the heart) of man, if it is with- 
out Christ, that it ever hangs and swings (dangles) in such doubt, 
terror and fear, when it thinks of death, that it knows no way out; 
it would gladly escape death and hell, and yet knows not how, as 
they themselves acknowledge in this stanza." P a m p e 1 n is pro- 
vincial for b a m m e 1 n, or rather for b a u m e 1 n which is a bet- 
ter word. — W o aus [zu kommen]. 

^Das Blatt umwenden. See p. 135, Note 2, Compare 
p. 124, Note 6. 



312 SELECTIONS FROM LUTHER. 



3cf) febe, iinb tt)ei^, me fang* 
3cl) jlerbe, mib vt>ei^ tt?obt, mie unb tt>atin» 
(nem(irf) aUe XaQc unb ©tunbcn Dor bcr 2BeftO 
3cf) fat)r, unb n^eig, @ott ?eb ! n)ol)in, 
5i}Jicf) n)unbert, bag id) traurig bin* 

:^enn ein Sbrifl fo([ ja^ feiner (2acf)en gcn^ig fci)n, unb 
n)eit cr Sbrijlum t)cit, fo bat er^ aUc^^ bag er biUiQ fc(( atfe 
©tiuiben in (Sprimgen gebcn ; aber fefcf)e^ a((ed iiad) bent 
©eijl unb ©fauben in Sbrifto, bamit er angefangen t)at, 
auf biefem 2Bege jn ge^en^ S'enn nacf) bem ^leifcf) unb 
Ieibficf)en ^iiblen i(l e^ nod) jugebedt unb gar Derborgen* 
2)enn, n)ie gefagt, inenfd)nd}e aSernunft unb ginne fonnen 
xiidjt^ ^reniger Derfleben nod) begreijfen, benn bag big fo((te 
ein 2Ceg fepn, ba fie nid)t^ jTel)et nod) fiil)lct, baran jTe jTd) 
^aften fonne, fonbern fd)(ed)t iiber unb anficr it)r ^iibfen 
unb aSerjleben fid) fo b(og babin begeben unb ir^agen, aU in 
eine groffe SCBitbnig ober xvcite^ 5!}Jecr, ba ffe fcinen Slnfen^ 
tl)alt bet) fid) fetbft finbet, 2:^arum mug bier ber ©laube 
fei)n, ber ba(J 5Bort ergreiffe unb fid) baran f)alten fonne^ 
unb getroft auf benn ?!)2ann babin fat)re, obgleid) ber altc 
Slbam bariiber ju fd)eitern ge()et» 

^ Denn ein Christ soil ja, etc. " For a Christian should 
be sure of his case, and, since he possesses Christ he possesses every- 
thing, so that he should, by good rights (b i 1 1 i g) go leaping [with 
joy] every hour. But all this [should be done] according to the 
spirit and the faith in Christ with which he began to walk in this 
way. For according to the flesh and natural feeling it is still covered 
and quite concealed. For, as I said, human reason and sense can 
understand anything sooner (nothing less) than that this should be a 
way where it can neither see nor feel anything to which it can cleave, 
but [must] yield itself up and venture above and beyond feeling and 
knowledge, as if into a great desert or wide ocean, where it finds no 
dwelling-place (by itself). Therefore there must be a faith which 
will seize the promise (word) and be able to hold on to it, and confi- 
dently commit all (go away) to Christ (the man), though the old 
Adam meanwhile goes to wreck." 



EXPOSITON OF JOHN FOURTEENTH. 313 

3l(i5o and) t[)r, (tDilf (Sbrijlu^ bicr fancn,) n)entt i{)r inicf) 
burcf) ben ®(aubcn ergrijfen I>abt, fo fci)b tl)r auf bem red)^ 
ten 5Gege, ber end) gen)ip ijl nnb nicf)t i:)erfitt)ret. Slber 
fel)et aKcin jn, ba^ x\)V baranf Heibet nnb fcrtfat)ret ; benn 
e^ mtrb endf) gar mawdjcxkt) Stnflo^ nnb ^Jinberni^ bcQCQ^ 
nen, be5)be, jnr rerf)ten nnb linrfen (Bcitc. Sarnm ntii^t 
iijV geriift fet)n/ ba^ i()r Deil an mir l)aftet, nnb end) nid)t^ 
Iaj]et anfed)ten, n)a^ end) granfame^ ober fd)red(id)e^ t)or 
3(ngen femmt, fo end) t)on mir n)itt abfd)reden ober mit 
fd)onem Sd)ein gnr Seite an^reigen nnb (ocfen xviti, nnb 
UJiflfen, ba^ fo[d)e^ atte^ eitef ?ngen nnb SSetrng be^ Zen^ 
fefi^ ijl, babnrd) er end) in^ 25erberben fnl)ret, 3rf) aber 
ipitt end) getDi^ fei)n, nnb bnrd) biefe^ tt^eite Wlcev^ au^ bem 
Xobe in^ ett)ige ?eben, an^ ber SOBett nnb ^enfel^ 9?eid) jnm 
aSater bringen* Sarnm ir>itt id) nid)t attein felbjl: ber 2Beg, 
fonbern and> bte 2Saf)rl)ett nnb ba^ 'iebm fet)n nnb l)etflen* 

Sie()e, a{fo t)erilel)e id) biefen ©prnd) anf^ einfcittigfle, 
ba^ e^ immer bfeibe anf einerlei) ^fJe^nnng t^on bem einigen 
@bri|lo, 'oa^ er t>eijfe ber SBeg,^ nm be^ Slnfang^ mlkn ; 
t^k 5Sabrt)eit, 'oon iDegen be^ ^littelS nnb gortfa^ren^, nnb 
and) ba^ ^ehcn^ t)on n^egen bed @nbed. 2}enn er mn^ bod) 
al(ed fei)n, ber Slnfang, ?[Rittef nnb (5nbe nnferer ©etigfeit: 
bag man il)n jnm erflen ®tein (ege nnb bie anbern nnb 

^Darummttsst ihr gerast[et] seyn, etc. " Therefore 

you must be armed, that you may cleave fast to me, and let nothing 

that appears (vor Augen kommt) cruel or fearful, which would 

frighten you away from me, or [which] would draw you aside and 

. allure you with an attractive appearance, tempt you, and be assured 

■ that all this is nothing but Satan's lies and deception, by which he 

would lead you (leads you) to destruction." 
I ^ Dass er heisse der Weg, etc. " that he is called the way, 
1 on account of the beginning ; the truth, because of the middle and 
progress ; and the life, because of the end. For he must be every- 
, thing, the beginning, middle and end of our salvation, so that one 
* must make him the foundation stone, lay the others, the intermediate 
ones upon it, and then ciown it with the vaulted summit or roof" 

27 



314 SELECTIONS FROM LUTHER. 

ntittfern baranf fc^e, iinb and) ba^ &emibc ober T^ad) bar^ 
auf frf}(ieflc* dv i}l, bc^bc, bte crfle, mittct inib (cl^te 
©tufe an ber ?eiter gen 5>imme{, 1* 9!)ief» 28, 12* 2>enn 
burd) tt)n miiiJcn mir anfal)en, fertfabren nnb l)inbnrd) jum 
?e6en tommcn. 

9tientanb tbmmt jnm 3Sater, benn bnrd) midj. 

25a nimmt er bie brci) (gtiicfe anf eincn ^>infcn, nnb faf^^ 
fet^ allc6 in ©n^, bcntct mit nnDcrbhimtcn, ffarcn 2i5crtcn, 
n>a^ cr met)ne, nnb n)ojn er jTd) a(fo genennet l)a6e : ben 
SBeg, aOabrt}eit nnb ?eben, nenilirf) affo nnb ba3n/ bag 
man jnm 3Satev fomme* Snmma, (n)i(( er fagen,) id) im^ 
atlein allei ; fo([ jemanb jnm SSater fonimen, fo nnig e^ 
alfein bnrd) mid) gefd)e(}en, SJnfang, ?Diitte( nnb @nbe. 

5ffia^ ift aber jnm SSater femmen ? ?tid)ti^ anber<^, 
benn, mie nnn oft gefagt, an^ bem Zoic in^ ?eben, an^ ber 
©iinbe nnb aSerbammnip jnr nnfd)n{b nnb grommigfcit, 
ang bem Skinnier nnb j^erl^efeib jnr emigen g^renbe nnb 
©eligfeit femmen, ^oid)c^ (fagt er,)^ nebme ihm niemanb 
Dor, anf anbere 5Beife ba^n jn fommen, benn bnrd) midr* 
X^enn id) (n'n aUein ber 9Qeg, bie SGabrbeit nnb ba^ ?eben. 
2^a^ I)eipt ja Hax nnb bentiut genng gerebt, rein andge^ 
fd)foflen nnb geuuiltigfid) niebergefegt allc ?ebre t>om SSer^ 
bienfl ber $Gerrfe nnb eigener @ercd)tigfeit, nnb fd)fed)t i^er^ 
neint nnb i^erfagt aUen anbern Xroft nnb 3>ertranen, ba^ 
bnrd) man t)ermet)net, gen .(;^immet jn fommen* 2:^enn e^ 
t^ci^t fnrl3 : 9iiemanb, niemanb fommt jnm Skater, benn 
bnrd) mid) ; et^ i|l fein anber ^d)i\f nod) lleberfabrt. 

* Nemlich also und dazu, " namely thus, and to this end." 

* Sole h OS (sagt cr), etc. *' This (such), says he, let no one 
attempt to arrive at (take before or upon him to come to it) in 
any other manner than through me. For I alone am the way, the 
truth and the life. This is speaking plainly and distinctly enough; 
[it is] excluding and putting down witli a strong hand all doctrine of 
the merit of works and of our own righteousness, and directly deny- 
ing and prohibiting any other consolation or confidence through 



EXPOSITION OF JOHN FOURTEENTH. 315 

7- 5B e n n i^v mid) f e n u e t e t, f o f e u n e t e t i f) r 
and) meincn 2>atcr, nub t?on nun an fennet 
i I) r t b n nub b a b t i t) n g e f e b e n. 

Sye nmd)ct bcr .^;^cvr Sbriiltn^ ahcxmai cine neue ^axaiei 
uub tjcrberfte 9iebc i)er ben 3n«3t'nt, ba^ ffe erfl anfal)en 
ju fragen t^on bem ^'ater, tt)a^ unb n^o er fci) ? Senn, 
tDiemoI er beut(id) genng baDon gerebt unb ffd) txUaxct t)atf 
n)ie er fet) ber SBeg, bie 58abrbctt unb ba^ ?eben jc, bamit, 
bag er fagt: „gttemanb fommt jnm SSater, o{)ne buret) 
mid)/' fo finb bed) bie licbm Sintger nod) uuDerftanbtg, ^6^ 
ten biefe SfBorte a{(e : 2Beg, 9Bat)rl)eit, ?eben, jum Sater 
fommcn jc^ fo gar mit (anter S?ernunft unb fleifd)[td)em 
©inn, ba^ jte <td) ntd)t fonnen brein rid^ten. ©arum fagt 
er fie freunbtid) anfauflren,^ unb wrft il)nen einen ^lo§ in 
ben 2Beg, baran fte fid) j^ofen foKen^ nni t)erurfad)t tt)er^ 
ben, tDeiter ju fragen. 

35arnm fat)et er atfo an : 2Senn i\)X mid) fennetct k. 
2Sie ? ^ennen ffe benn nun (^briftum ni(t)t^ fo fte il)n boc^ 

which many fancy that they are going (to go) to heaven." See p. 
283, Note 6. 

*Darum issst er sie fretindlieh anlaufen, etc. 
** Therefore he kindly lets them trip, and throws a stumbling-block 
in the way, against which they should dash and be induced to inquire 
farther." Einen anlaufen las sen is now used only in a fig- 
urative sense, to treat one as he deserves, to treat one coldly. But 
originally, it meant, to make one run against something and stumble^ 
and that was considered as treating a wrong-headed man as he de- 
served. This signification is very obvious from several passages in 
Lutlier's version of the Scriptures, as Ps. 27: 2. " If the wicked, mine 
enemies come upon me they must stumble (mtissen sie anlau- 
fen) and fall." Ezek. 3: 20. "if a righteous man turn from his 
righteousness and do evil, 1 will lay a stumbling-block before him 
(so werde ich ihn lassen anlaufen), so that he shall die." 
See also Rom. 11 : 11, and on the substantive Anlaufen, stumbling, 
see Rom. 9: 32 and 33. — Nearly all the significations of the verb can 
be derived from the literal one laufen, to rvn, an, a gainst, upon ox 
vp. TJms this otherwise difficult word is made to appear quite simple. 



316 SELECTIONS FROM LUTHER. 

t)or if)nen gcgcnwartig fct)eu uub l)6ren, unb fo (ange 3<^it^ 
tnit i\)m umt)er gcjogcn finb ? 2)a<J ift^ a6cr, bad id) qc^ 
fagt babe, bag : Sbriilum fenucn, l)cigt l)icr nirf)r, xxa&f bem 
2(ngejTd)t unb (trie St* ^auhid f'^gt,) f[eifrf){icf) it)n fennen, 
fonbern tt>ij]en, tDofiir er ju batten, n)ad n>ir an ibm b^iben 
unb me wiv fcin braudben feUen. Senn bad ijl in ©nmma 
feine 5!)iei)nung, bag ed aUed baran liege, unb aUcin bad 
foK ber Sbfiften ^unfl fepn, bag tvix ibn xed)t fennen Ier«j 
nen unb andmabten^ wn aUcn ©ebancfen, 28efen, ?ebren 
unb ?eben, unb xva^ man t)ornebmen faun, unb a(fo an ibm 
atlein bangen init bem ®(auben, unb t)on gangem 5;^ergen 
fagen : 3ct) treig nicf)td unb n)i(( uicbtd n^iffeu in gottfid)en 
(Sad)en, obne aUcin t)cn meinem ^^errn Sbrifto ; ber fetid 
altein atted fet)n, tt>ad meine ©etigfeit betrift unb jn?ifd)en 
JSott unb mir ju banbetn ifl.^ Unb ob id) n)ct jnand)erfet) 
2lnfed)tung unb 2Qiberftanb l)abe t)om S^enfet, 2Bett unb 
meinem eigenen ©ewijjen, baju ben Xoi mug briiber fei^ 
beu,4 nod) n)itt id) babei bteiben, feben unb flerben* Ta^ 
l)ie(Te benn^ Cfprid)t er,) mid) red)t gefennet, unb burd) 
mid) and) ben aSater* 



* Und so lange Zeit, etc. "and have gone about with him 
so long." U m her z ie he n, as an active verb with tlie auxiliary 
haben, means to drag about, etc. As a neuter verb with seyn, it 
means to move or atroll about, Heruinziehen as an active, and 
as a reflective verb has very nearly the same significations. 

* Und ausmahlen, etc. " and separate him from all [human] 
thoughts, qualities (W ese n, those things which constitute a whole) 
teachings and practices (life), and whatever one can propose, and so 
cling to hini alone," etc. — Ausniahlen, to grind out, to sift out, 
and thus to separate, must not be confounded with a similar word, 
now commonly written a u s m a 1 e n, to fill out or complete a painting. 
The participle of the former is ausgemahlen, that of the latter, 
ausgemalt. 

^ Zu h a n d e 1 n i s t, is to be transacted. 

* Dazu den Tod muss drUber Iciden, " and besides must 
die from it (over it)." 

* Das hi esse denn, etc. " For this, says he, is rightly know- 



EXPOSITION OF JOHN FOURTEENTH. 317 

8, 9. ® p r i d) t 3 u i () ni ^3 b i [ i> p u ^, 5> c r r, j e t^ 
ge inx^ be it 2>ater, fo genitget nng* 3cfu^ 
f p r i rf) t J u i I) m : © I a n g e bin i d) b e 1; e u cf), 
u n b b u f e n n c j t mid) n i d) t ? ^ b i f i P P ^/ ^ ^ ^ 
mid) jTebet, ber fiebet and) ben aSater. 5IBie 
f p r i d) (I b n b e n n : 3 ^ ^ 3 ^ int ^ ben -8 ate v. 

2}a!^ i|T: eine febr fd)one Sifputation ober ©efprad) unb 
^Vebigt be^ 5;^errn (SbnRi* 25enn, na(i)hem er ibnen t)iel 
gefagt l)at 'oon feinem SSater, ti^ie er jn iljut geben VDoKe, 
nnb jTe and) jn i[)m bringen, bajj fte ibn and) feben fotten, 
ja and} bereit^? ibn fennen nnb gefeben b^iben : ba fabrt ber 
5(po(lcf ^bilippn^, aii etwag Dcrftcinbiger nnb fd)arfer, benn 
bie anbern, beran^ mit ber boben grage;, bamit ffd) attejeit 
ik biibeften, n)eife(ten ?ente ml nnb l)od) bcfiimmert, flei^ 
^tg gefnd)t nnb gefor[d)et baben ; \ioa§ bed) ® ott fei), nnb mie 
man ©ott erfcnnen nnb erfangen moge, aber nie feiner bat 
trejfen f onncn, nnb and) nnmogfid^ ijl ber aSatnr nnb menfd)^ 
Iid)er aSernnnft ^n trejfen, n:>te ^bif^PP^^ f^^f^f^ W i^W^ 
unb 3etget,bag,n)ien:>of er Sbnjlnm geboret ^om SSaterprebi^^ 
gen nnb fagen,bod) bejfefben nod) nie nid)t^i iiberatt i:)erftanjj 
ten babe, ober nod) tJerfiebe. 2^a^ mad)t, ba^ erg nod) mit 
Sernnnft faffen nnb bnrd) eigene ©ebanfen ertangen voiU. 
; Sarnm, obtDobf (i^xi]tn^ ibn attein anf fein 3Bort UJeifet 
Uttb an jTd) bangen mU/^ nnb fagt, er fenne ibn bereitg nnb 

ing me and, through me, the Father." See p. 48, Note 5, and p. 283, 
Note 6. 

* Doch desselben noch nie nichts, etc. " stiil he never 
understood anything (nichts) at all (uberall) of it (dessel- 
ben." 

^Undan sich hfingen will, etc. "and wishes to attach 
him to himself, and says that he (Philip) already knows him (Christ) 
and has seen him, still there is yet no cleaving to him, but (Philip) 
freely acknowledges what is passing in his mind (how he has it in 
his heart)," etc. — Hangen, as causative of hange n is an active 
verb. See p. 132, Note 3.— H af te t e s, is impersonal, but refers, of 
course, to Philip. 

27* 



318 SELECTIONS FROM LUTHER. 

f)a6e Urn gcfcben, tocf) bajfrct c<S nod) md)t 6ci) ibm, fontcnt 
bcfennct frcp jii, roic cr(^ inx Syxi}cn l)at, iinb fprict)t : 2ld) 
jeigc un^ ted) ben SSater, fo guiigct nn^» Sllfo fellte cr fa^ 
gen : Sit fagcfl un^ mot wm abater, tDie tt)ir it)U fennen ; 
hab icf) il)u iod) tvann mcin ?cbtagi nie gcfel)en, iinb tviipte 
nid)t(^ fic6cr^ jii n)iutfcf)en, beun bag icf) med)tc fo fclig 
fepn, unb einmat i()n fcl)eu* 

Sitfo (agt jTd) bcr (icbe atpoflcl [)6ren, bag er itorf) ijl ciu 
n)anc6enbcr, unbcfldnbiger ©laubigcr, glciditme bie anbern 
al(e, n)icn)oI jTe nid)t fo hcvan^faljxcn. Scnn er glaubet 
and) an @ott unb bat t)ief Don i^m gel)6ret 3?un er aber 
I)6ret Sbriftum fagcn : 2Benn tt)r mid) fennet, fo fennet ibr 
ben aSater, unb jelst fennet il)r ibn, — ba^ ift ibm gar eine 
frembe, nnt)erjltanbige Sprad)e^ (So n^eit fommt er^ mit 

'Traunmein Leblag. Traun, certainly^ from trauen, 
to rely vpon ity is obsolete. M e i n Lebtag, all my life, is, in mod- 
ern German, always in the plural, meine Lebtage. Probably 
me in Le b tag is not designed as a singular, which would hardly 
make sense, but is an abbreviation, as is common in familiar lan- 
guage, of the plural form. " Yet I have certainly never seen him 
in all my life, and 1 could wish nothing more fondly than that I 
might be so happy as once (one day) to see him." Und wQste 
nichts liebers zu wUnschen, literally, " and I should know 
nothing more agreeable to wish or to be wished." Liebers for 
L i e b e r e s is used in the sense of A n g e n e h m e r e s, as the positive 
L i e b c s, something agreeable, is used for A n g e n e h m e s. Such 
adjectives wlicn appended to nichts, etwas alles, wenig, 
viel, etc. are, in modern German, generally written with a capital, 
as nichts Gutes, nothing good ; nichts Neues, nothing new. 

' So we it kommt er, etc. " Thus far does he wander away 
(da von, from the true meaning of Christ's words) ; he lets Ciirist 
Bet there and talk by the table (i. e. leaves him there talking), as 
Thomas did (see above v. 5), [and] is utterly unable (can directly 
not) to cleave to Christ, who is talking with liim, but, notwithstand- 
ing that, sallies out one side with his own thoughts, and flies up into 
the clouds, * O that we might but see him, as he sets above among 
the angels.'" Desselben with ungeachtet is used as d es- 
se n is. See p. 7, Note 6. 



EXPOSITION OF JOHN FOURTEENTH. 319 

feiiicu ©cbaurfcn taww, lix^t Sbvijltum ba fffecn unb rcben, 
g(eirf)tx)ie ©t. Xbomai^ brobcn (33. 5.) aucf) that, fann 
fd)tcii)ti> nicf)t I)a|ften an bcm 6l)ritlo, fo niit ibm rebet; 
fonbcrn, bejfclbcu iingcacbtet, fpal^ievet er tei)feit au^ mit 
eigcneu ©ebanrfcn, nub flabbcrt Muauf in bie 2Bofden : 
2lcf}, bag mir il)n bed) [ehen mi>rf)tcn, n^ic er broben ^get 
unter ben @ngeht ! 

2l6er ba^ @c()cn unb ^cnncn mn^t bit ntrf)t a{fo grob 
unb flcifrf)[icf) t^erflcbeii, bajj, mcr Sbrijltum jTebet, (wk bie 
^ub ciit Xi)ox aujTebet,) bag ber ben aSater atfo mit Slitgen 
febe, n>ie er gcftaft^ ijit, fonberu wad) be^ ©eijl:^ unb (3ia\x^ 
beni ©cjTdjt, unb bod> imbrbaftig a(fc, une bie SBerte beu^ 
ten. ©onft b^ben ibn and) gefeben unb gefennet Saipb^^r 
^itatu^, .^erobe^ unb fafl ba^ gan^e 3ubifd)e SSo(d, unb 
bod) n^eber ibn nod) ben SSater erfennet. Senn ob jTe n)obf 
bie ^^Vrfon Sbriili feben unb fennen : bod) feben fie nod) 
nid)t, n)ie ber 3Sater in dhvifto, unb Sbti|ltug in ibm, unb 
bet)ber ein JCerg, ©inn unb 2Bitte, ja, and) ein einig, unjer^* 
trennlid), gotttid) 5Befen x\i. 

©iebe^ atfo n)il( er l)ic\nit ^bifippnm unb bie anbern 
2{pojlte( juri'tcf jieben, aU bie^ bin unb b^t n)anden unb flab^ 
bern mit ©ebanden, unb fo n^eit fommen Dom ®ianbcxx^ bag 
ffe nid)t tt)iffen, tt>o unb mc fte @ott fud)en ober ftnben fof^ 
(en, ob fte mo( &)xi^vim t)or ibrer 9tafe feben. 3Bo gaflfejl 
bu bitt, fprid)t er, unb tt)ag flabberjl: bu unb fdbrefi mit (3c^ 
bancfen, tt)ie ein unftdt DuerfiTtber ? 2Cie fprid)ft bu nod), 
id) foil bir ben SSater jeigen ? 3d) mepnete, bu fennetefl 
ibn febr tt>obL S^oxeit bu nid)t, n)er mid) ffebet, ber ftebet , 
ben aSater 2C. ^aS i|l, tt^ittt bu njijfen, wic bu mit ®ott 
bran fet)iV ^^^^"^ ^^^ ^^ 9^9^^^ ^irf) gefinnet fei), ober iiber 

^ Gestalt for gestaltet, "how he is formed," or of what 
form he is. 

2 Als die, "as [those] who." 

^ Wie du mit Gott dran seyst, " how you are off (d ran, 
or dar an, on it) with God," or how you stand with him. 



320 SELECTIONS FROM LUTHER. 

iid) gcbcnrfct, uub Summa, mc bit 511 ibm fommcn m6gc|l, 
(bcuu fo(d)c^ n)i|Tcn/ beiiit cu]ent(irf}, bcu SSatcr fcmien,) 
fo frage nur bciu cigcu i>crl3r noil) aScnuutft uub ©ebaucf^ 
eu, aud) fciucu ^Iljofcu ebcr aubcru Scbrer uid)t barum ; 
fouberu aiicin mid) jlcbe an^ uub bore, tDa^ 3d) rebe» 9(uf 
mid) (fage id)) nuipt bu fcl)eu uub l)orciu ^iSeuu bu fo(d)eg, 
fo bu an mix jTcbcil uub 'oon mix boreji, iu^ 5:^cvt3 fafiVR, 
n)ic id) mid) gcgcu bir crjcigc uub boreu (ajjcu, fo triff (I bu 
geanp(id) bcu aSatcr, uub baft ibu rcd)t gcfcl)cu uub crfaunt, 
tx)ie mau il)u fe[)cu uub fcuucu foil* 

2)euu an bicfer ^>erfou gl)rirti fief>eft bu, ba^^ cr uiemaub 
fauer aufie()ct, uod) uufreuubfid) l)aubc[t, ober fd)rcdct uub 
t)OU fid) jagt, fouberu jeberm»auu, bct)be, mit SGorteu uub 
Oeberbeu aufi^ freuub(id)(le ju fid) focfet uub reiser, crjeiget 
fid) uid)t auber^, icnn ali ciu i:^icuer, ber, jcbermauu geruc 
betfeu n)i(( : al{o and)^ baf^ er fid) urn bcinetu>illeu ia^t ani 
Creul3 fd)fageu, uub feiu 93(ut mifbigtid) Dergeupt* X^a^ 
fiebeft bu mit 3Iugeu ; baju borefT bu mit rbreu nid)tS an^ 
berd, beuu cite! foId)e freuublid)e, fiiiJe, tr6ft(id)c SKorte : 
(rucr 5;^erl3 erfd)rerfc uid)t k. ^^ommt ju mir alfe, bic ibr 
miibfetig uub befabeu fet)b, 5D?attl)- 11, 28. 5i?er an mid) 
gtciubet, fo(( nidjt Dcrforeu u>erbeu, fouberu ba^ eroigc ?ebeu 
babcu 2Cv 3ob. 3, 16, uub \i\i^ fo(d)er S-prud)e mebr fiub,^ 
tt)e(d)er ia^S gaube (Si>auge(ium Jc'bauuii^ ^ott iji. :r*arau^ 
fauuft bu gemif?(id) fd)[ieffeu, ba^ er bir uiJ t feiub i\i, fou^ 
beru aKe ©uabe uub 5l5ob(tbat crjeigeu mil. X:a bkibc 

* Denn soldi es wissen. Sole lies can grammatically be 
•either an accusative governed by wissen, as den Vatcr is by 

k e n n e n, or it can be used ad jecti vely agreeing with wissen as a 
substantive, — " to know such," or '' sucli knowledge." The latter 
is much the simpler construction. 

* Eigen Hertz must be connected witii nicht darum. 
" Consult not thine own heart about it, nor thy reason and thoughts, 
nor any Moses or other teacher." 

^ S o 1 c h e r S p r U c h e m c h r s i n d. Sec p. 106, Note 5. 



EXPOSITION OF JOHN FOURTEENTH. 321 

6ei) unb f)a[te t)e|T: bran, bencfe nub ffebe md)t tt^eiter, unb 
fag bicf) nirf)tii irren,^ \va6 bir anber^^ t?orfommt* 

2Bie bu nun gbrijltum borcft unb iie\)e% atfo f)ore(l bu 
unb ftckflt (]eanf;(u-f) and) ben 35ater <Tcf) gcgcn bit erjeigen. 
S'cnn bie SEortc, fo icf) ju end) rebe, fpnrf)t er balb bernacf), 
OS. 100 fnib nid}t mein, fonbcrn nietncg SSater^, bag n)er 
ben ©ot)n fiet)et nub g(dnbet an ibn, tjabe bag emige ?e6en 
2c,, 3o(). 6, 39. 40. aSer nun fo(c{)eg mit bent ©fanben 
fajjet, ber faun ja md)t bencfen, bag ®ott mit tl)m jiirne, 
ober ibn t)on ffrf) jltofien unb t)erbammen woUc. Senn eg 
ill ja f)ier fein SBort nod) 3^id)eu einiger Ungnabe, fonbern 
titel frennb(id)e, bolbfetige ^iBorte unb fie6Iid)er, frennbfirfjer 
2lnb(icf, unb ©umma, eitel ^vnn[t unb ®int unaugfpred)^ 
Iid;er, i;)dtertid)er, t}erlp{id)er ?iebe. 

10. ©rdubejl: bu uid)t, bag id) im 3Sater 
unb ber SSater in niir ifl:? ®ie SGBorte, bie 
id) rebe, bie rebe id) nic^t Don mirfelbfl. 
Ser aSater aber, ber in mix tt)o^net, ber 
tf)ut bie 2Berrfe. 

Sag ijl: atteg ba^in gerebet, bag er biefen §auptartirfef, 
n)ie id) gefagt babe, n)obt cinbiiic unb einbfdue,^ bag man 
lerne axx^ ben 2tugen unb ^er^en tt)un alfeg, n)ag ba mag 

^ 1 r r e n, in the sense ofirre machen. See p. 253, Note 3. 

2 E i n b 1 a u e, beat into, from b 1 a a e n, ^o beat black and blue. It 
is now no longer an elevated word. " That is all said to this end, 
that he might impress and beat in this leading principle, as I have 
said, that men should learn to put away from their eyes and from 
their hearts whatever may be taught and preached even in the law 
of Moses, and much more [what proceeds] from human reason and 
from one's own thoughts, when it relates to this that one is to have 
to do with God and ascertain his will. He must be established in 
this one point, namely that he can bring before him [the image ofj 
this Jesus Christ, and let nothing tempt him to the contrary or lead 
him astray, whether it be called doing and living right or wrong, 
holiness or sin." 



322 SELECTIONS FROM LUTHER. 

ge(e()ret nnb geprebiget VDcrbcn, and) im ©cfcl^ 5!Ko(Ti^, \)\eU 
mchr ani inenfcf)tid)cm Serftanbe unb cigcncn ©cbancfen, 
tt)cnn c^ baju fomml:, bag bcr 5!JJcnfd) jTrf) niit ®ott bdiun^ 
mem felt unb fcincn ^Bitten crfunbigcn n)itt, unb a((ciu ba^ 
einige Stiicf fajfe, bvif; cr ibm fonnc biefcn 3^fitin (5l)vifhim 
fiirbitbcn, nub nicf)t^ lafjc bagcgeu aufed)ten nod) irrcn, cjS 
ifci\]c tt)ol)( obcr iibel gctl)au unb gctcbt, .^^ei[lgfeit cbcr 
©iinbe. 

Eip ijlt bie ^nnfl, ba^on ®t. 5of>^nnci% af^ cin an^tntn^ 
biger' (5t)angeIi)T: in bicfcm Stiirfe, unb (2t* ^Viuhiu Dor an^^ 
bern tct)rcn, bag jTe fo m^ in cinanbcr Innben unb l)cflrtcn 
Cbriiluni unb ben Sater : auf bag man (erne, Don &ott 
nid)ti gu bencfen, benn in Ctjrifto, unb fo batb wiv l)oreu 
©otte^ Stamen nennen, ober ^on feinem 2l5i(Ien, SBercfen, 
©nabe ober Ungnabe fagen, bag mv nict)t barnad) rid)ten, 
n)ie e^ in unferm 5;^erl3en ifl:, ober einige^ g)Jenfd)en SKei^:? 
l)eit baDon bifpntiret, ober and) ba^ ©efe^ Dorgit^t ; fonbern 
attein in biefen gl}ri|1tum un^ tvicfefn unb l}iitten, unb nidjti 
anber^ vvoHeu fel)en nod) ()oren, benn, une er jTd^ un^ jei^ 
get ali ein neb(id)e^ ^inbfein an ber 9)tutter 3{rmen unb 
®rf)00^, item, aB ein treuer 5?ei(anb an bem ^renl) feiu 
^(nt fiir un^^ mi(big(id) Dergengt, item, n>ie er unber auf? 
(lehet, ben Jtenfef unb SyHc nnter fid) nnrft unb ben Zob 
mit "^iiifcn trit, unb bir fo(d)eii, bei)be, fclbft unb burd) feine 
Slpojlef Derfiinbigct unb fd)encfet, bamit er genugfam jeuget, 
bag er feinen ^crn nod) Ungnabe gegen bir hcit^ fonbern 
aUci bir jn .\>n(fe unb J'roft tlnit, n>ai^ er tlnin fo(( nub 
t{)nn faun, fo bu e^ aUcin wiUt glcinben unb annebmen. 

5a, fprid)|l bn, tai fehe unb bore id) uu>bl, tver weig 
aber, tvo e^ &ott and) al]o mit mir me^^net ? 3(nhDort : 
2a bute bid) fnr ;2 tcnn bac^ beigt (i'briftnm nub CJott ges^ 

* Ausbdndiger, two*^ c/rc//r/i/, an obsolete word. See p. 265, 
Note 5. 

2 Da hate dicli for [voi], vU'.. *' Devvare ofthat ; for that is 
dividing and separating Christ and God." 



EXPOSITION OF JOHN FOURTEENTH. 323 

tl)eifct unb getreitnct ®lcid)\vk ^l)i(tppng afMer tl)itt, ber 
ba (5!)ri|Tiim la^t fabrcn, unb ®ott oben im ^immcf fud)t, 
unb bcnrfet : 3d) l)6re n)o(, bag (5(}rijlug mit mix rebet ; 
ir>ic meip icf) abcr, n)a^ ®ott broben im ^immel i'tber mid) 
gebenrfet ober 6cfd)toflfen f)at ? SOBag i)l: ba^ aiibcr^, benn 
eitt Ungtaube unb l)eim(id)e 3Ser(cugnung ®otte$, bag i^n 
SbriRug bicrmit ftrafen mug, auf bag er ibn t)on fo(d)em 
fd)anb[id)en ^iSabn veij]e, unb fprid)t : ^iSih'ppe, n)a^ fott 
bag fei)n/ bag bn ben aSater unb mid) wn einanber rciflfeflt, 
ffetteril binauf in bic 2Sofcfcn mit ©cbanrfen, unb Wgt mid) 
f)ier Dergebeng mit bit reben ? Syvcft bu nid)t, mag id) bir 
fage, bag, n?er micf) jTe{)et, ber ftel)et ben aSater felbft, unb 
gtdubei^ nid)t, bag idj im aSater unb ber SSater in mir ijl: ; 
item : ©ie ^iGorte, bie id) rebe, finb nid)t meine, fonbern beg 
aSaterg SBorte ? :©ag finb U)ol freunblidje, aber bod) eru^ 
fte 2Scrte beg fierrn. Senn er wiUo nid)t leiben, bag 
man affo i)ergebfid) unb ungemig t}in unb f)er gaf e unb um^ 
l^er flabbere ; fonbern voiU ung gani^ unb gar an jTd) unb 
an fein SBort gebunben ^aben, bag man ©ott nirgenb, benn 
in i^m, fuc^e. 

©iet)e, baS 01^ big fd)one ©efprad) unb ^rebigt auf bie 
^rage beg 3lpofltefg ^bifippi, bamit i h m nid)t aKein geant^^ 
mortet, fonbern alter ?OJenfd)en fliegenben ©ebanrfen, ba^ 
mit fte jTd) unterflet)en, @ott ju ergreif en, alfo, bag bir unb 
alter 2i5elt biermit burd) Sbrijium gefagt fei) : 2Bag mad)^ 
efl bu, bag bu wiUit @ott anberg fud)en, benn in mir ; ober 

* Was soil das seyn, etc. "what does this mean, that you 
rend the Father and me asunder, and clamber up into the clouds in 
your thoughts, and leave me here talking with you to no purpose ?" 

2 Siehe, das ist, etc. " Behold, such (that) is this fine dia- 
logue and discourse on the question of the apostle Philip, with which 
a reply is made not only to him but to the towering thoughts of all 
men with which they presume to comprehend God, so that herewith 
it is said by Christ to you and to all the world." — Geantwortet 
[ist] is impersonal, like gesagt sey below. See p. 155, Note 3. 



324 SELECTIONS FROM LUTHER. 

anber 5Qort iinb SGercf, bcnn bie id) rcbe unb fcf)viffe, fel)ett 
itnb borcn ? ^Qci^^t bit nidit, bag icf) im SSater unb ber 
SSater in mir ijl: 2C. ? Savnarf) t)5re)l bu mid) in ©t ^pauto, 
^aiifum in 2!ito eber aubern ^rcbigern, unb alfo fort in 
atten, fo big ^iOert prcbigcn, bag c^ al(cd ©in ^ucf)eui ift 
in bem .v^crrn Sbrifto* ^IBo ^aulu^ iff, ba bin id) ; tDo icb 
bin, ba ijl ^\in(n^ nnb alle ^rebigcr. 3I((c^ in Sbvijlo 
burd) nnb bnrcf) ; SbriRn^ abcr in nnb mit bcm 3Sater ; 
nnb n)icbcrnm, (Sbrij^n^ in attcn, ber 35atcr abcr in Sbrijie. 
^ai fragcjl bn bennccb, fprid)t cr, an^S ber nnt)errtdnbigen 
3Sernnnft, xvo bod) ber aSater \ct} ? 91Ifo foil fein Sanger 
&)xifli nid)t2 fragen. ?ag bie anbern Und^riflen, fi^epben, 
Siiben, 2!iirrfen, ^el;er, 5!}?6nd)e nnb gcpbiften alfo for^ 
fd)en nnb fnd)en ; bn aber biite bidi, bag bn nid)t anger niir 
fal)re|l:» S)enn affo finbefl: bn nid^t @ott, fonbern ben feibi^ 
gen !J!enfef, n)e(d)er, ii)ie gefagt ift, fann nid)t bie ?ente an^^ 
ber^ betritgen, er nuig ber 93tajetT:dr Dianien an feine ?ngen 
fd)inieren* 

11. @(dn bet niir, bag id) inx aSa*ter bin^ 
unb ber 2>ater in mir i|1; n)o nid)t, fo gldn^ 
bet mir bod) nm ber Si\?ercfe n>il(en. 

9BoI(et ibr nid)t gtdnben, fprid)t er, nm mciner ^rebigt 
roi((en, bag 0ott in mir tDobne nnb fci), nnb id) in ibm : fo 
gldnbet^ bod) nm ber 9Bercfe unden, fo ihr i>or -Jlngen febct, 
nnb fein ?Oienfd) fengncn fann, bag ei^ nid)t menfd)fid)e, 
fonbern, gottIid)e SBercfe f[nb, nnb ftarcf genng beu^eifen 
nnb jengen, bag er in mir nnb bnrd) mid) rcbe nnb nnrcfe. 
'J^a^ finb nnn bie 2Sercfe nnb ^iGimber, bie er i^or aller 
2Pc(t er^eigt bat, ba er bie JMinben fcbcnb, tic !I'anben ho^ 
renb, allcrlep ^irancfe gcfnnb,^^ bie Xenfel anc^getrieben nnb 

* K Q c h en, cafce^ used here to indicate "one and the same thing." 

• K e i n — n i c h t, a double fur a single negative. 
•* Gcsund [geniacht]. 



EXPOSITION OF JOHN FOURTEENTH. 325 

bie S^obteu aufermccfet Ijat, alkin mit bem 2Qert, tt)efcf)c^i 
jTnb nuf)t allein (i6ttfid)e 5Bercfe, fenbern and") S^^^S^^ ^on 
©ott bem 2Satcr, bag man nid)t aKciit ben @(au6cn barau^ 
fcl)opjfen, (bag er in Shrijlo unb 2brijlu^ in ilm x\\^ fon^ 
bent aivi) ben ;i!ro|"t fajfeit fann ber t»aterlicf)en ?iebe unb 
©nabe gegen un^, 

Senn xvo er ?nrt h,atte ju jiirnen, t)erbammen, ftrafen 
unb plagen, n>rirbe er nid)t bnrd) Sbrtjlnm ©iuibe Dergeben^ 
unb bie ©trafe berfelbigen tx)egnel}men an bem @ict)t6rnd)i^ 
gen, Slu^fdl^igen unb aubern, bie t^om Steufet befeffen unb 
gcpfagct tDaren 2C* "^tcm, too er ?nilt batte jnm Zoic, mi'trbe 
er nicf)t bie j:obten anfertDeden unb tebenbig macf)en. 9tun 
aber bat er fo(d)e^ in Sbrifto getban unb un^ g^J^igct, ia^ 
mv it)n (ernen red)t anfel)en unb erfennen, al^ einen gnds^ 
bigen aSater, ber nn^ gerne be(fen unb fefig mad)en tt^ifL 
Unb jn^ar ben^eifet er^ and) tdg(id) an aflen feinen 2Berrfen, 
fo er in ber ganfeen ©elt tbut, bag er feine greaturen ftet$ 
erbdtt, unb alter ^iBelt fo Diet 2Bobftt)aten tbut, unb feiue 
©liter reicf)tiit an^frf)iittet, obne, xioo^ er an^ ?tOtt) unb um 
ber ^rommen tr^ilfen jltrafen unb ben S3ofen jleuren mug* 
Serf) regieret er a(fo, bag mx and) kibiid) affjeit mebr fei^^ 
ner ©naben unb 5Qobftbaten fel)en, benn B^^tn unb ©trafe* 
2ienn, wo einer franrf, bfinb, tanb, girf)tbriirf)ig, aup^ig 
i(l, ba finb bagegen bnnbert taufenb gefnnb ; unb ob ein 
©lieb am ?eibe einen gebl bat, fo ift bagegen ber gauge 
yjjenfd), fo nod) ieib unb ©eele l)at, eitel ©otte^ ©iite* 

12. 2Babr(irf), n)at)r(irf), id) fage eucf), n^er 
an mid) g(dubet, ber n>irb bie 2Berrfe and) 
tb nn, bie id) tbue, unb n)irb grojfere, benn 
biefe tbun; benn id) gel)e jum 2>ater. 

^ Welches refers not to Wort, but to the whole clause. 

* Ohne, wo, etc. " except where he must of necessity and on ac- 
count of the righteous punish and govern the wicked." See p. 147, 
Note 1. 

28 



326 SELECTIONS FROM LrXHER. 

S^iQV fommt cr wiebcr aiif ben Xvcft, fo cr ijat avqcfarif 
gen ben 3*ni(]crn jn (^cbcn, ba(5 ffe iiktt fcUtcn bantm cy^ 
fd)recfcn nod) traiivcn, baf? er rviivic iciblid) otcx ffittbarlicl) 
t)on ihnen (^cbcn, unb ffe in bcr ^iCeft faffcn, fonbcrn taQ^f 
gen anfchcn iinb jiim Xvo]l fafTen, maii jTe bei^ fi?r Jlnij^n 
xtnb ^rommeiii baben feKeu fiir ben (]cringcn (cibficben 
?[Ran(3c( : uemlirfv t^^^P ^^ ibncn imcI bcvrlicf)cre 2Bobnnnp.cn 
bcreitcn n)i((, unb bod) bci) ibncn fepn, bag er jTe and) babin 
brin(]c,2 ba er ifi, babin fi'e fonjl: nid)t fommcn fonnten, item, 
bag fie fd)on ben 2Beg n^ninen nnb ben SSater fcnnctcn ; aU 
fo, bag er nun ba^ an3gerid)ter, barnm er bey ibncn (]en)e^ 
fen tt)ar, nnb nid)t mcbr jTe bnrfte Jcbrcn, obne bag cr^ 
nnn DoUbringc nnb ibnen bclfe, babin jTe fommcn follcn* 
3ubem fctset er nnn haS and), bamit ffc bejlo mcbr 2rofi^ 
baben nnb fpiiren, bag \le ,qar fcinen 93can(]ct nod) Sd)aben 
feine^ 2lbfdueb^ babcn, fonbcrn i>icl rcid>[id)er nnb berr^ 
Iid)pr, bcnn bit^ber, bcv^nabct n^crbcn : ncmlid), bag ffe ba^ 
bnrd) fo{d)ei^ nberfommcn,^ bag ffe ebcn bicfclbcn Sfpcrcfe 
tbnn foHcn, fo er (]ctban bat, nnb bajn (irojTcre, bcnn er 
Iciblid) bci) ibnen cjctban bat, obcr nod) tbnn n>crbe. Unb 
tt)ie er jct^t ficfajit bat, bag er fcktc ®cvcfe tbnc, babnrd) 
fie fottcn flldnbcn, bag bcr SLsatcr in ibm nnb cr im Skater 
fei): aJfo fiibret er^ bie berab^ nnb fagt, bag fie and) folfen 

* Was — des fOr Nutzen unci Fro in men, " wliat kind of 
(was fa r) use and advantage from it (d e s, of it) they should have," 
etc. 

'Dasser sie aucli dahin bring e, etc. *' that he brini; 
them to that place \vh("re iie is, whither they could not otherwibc 
come ; also, that they have now ascertained the way and known the 
Father; likewise that he lias now accomplished that for which (dar- 
u m) he was with them, and could not [consistently] teach tJiem 
any more without doing the work itself (e s) and giving them the 
aid [by which] they should come thither." 

^ Sole he 8 Oberkommen, "come into possession ol .-.u.. 
[power]." 

* Also fahret ers hie herab, etc. ** thus he brings it down 



EXPOSITION OF JOHN FOURTEENTH. 327 

fofcfte SGercfe tf)uu, baSet) man fpitrcu VDcrfce, ba^ and) fie 
in (Sbrifto nub glnnftn^ in il>i!cn fci), tDic cr bcrnarf) tt^eiter 
fagen mvb. 2^cnn cr bicrmit anjeigt^ wai er in ihncn nnb 
bnrd) ]ic H)im nnb awSndjtcn av;([ in ber (5l)nftenl;cit, n)ie 
nnr bercn u^erbcn* 

2Sai^ fed man a&er bajn fagen, ta^ cr nid)t affcin wn 
ien 2lpc!lc(n fefd)c^ rctcr, fonbcrn i:>cn affcn, bic an il)n 
gfanbcn ? Unb ma^ m5i3cn bag fhr SBercfe fct)n, bie ba 
fottcn grojjcr fei)n, bcnn te$ Syvvn (^bvi\ti ? SSiaS tann 
gri3)Jcrg gcnennct roerben, bcnn Zobte (cbcnbig mad)cn, bie 
©cc(cn and bc<? !^cnfe(g nnb beg S^obeg ®ctt)a(t crfofcn 
nnb bag cunge ?c6cn gebcn ? Stub bag nid)t affcin fcine 
ecgene Sffierif c, fo er bard) fcine gDttfid)e ^raft nnb 5[)tad)t 
an nng tt)nt ? SBcr fanu bcnn fagcn ba^ \Dir foKen grop 
fere t\)m\ ? 

S^icv (ag id) mir gefaKcn ben ^exncincn 9Serf!anb bicfeg 
®prnd)g, me eg benn nid)t fann anbcrg fct)n, ba^ eg bar^^ 
nm grofiere 2Bcrde gcrl)an beiffe bnrd) fcine (§[)riftcn, ba^ 
bie SIpoftef nnb (Shrijlten meiter fommcn mit ibren ^Bcrrfen, 
benn er fommen ijl, nnb me(}r jn Sbrifto bringcn, bcnn er 
kiblid) anf @rben getban bat. Senn er bat^ nnr einen 
ftcincn 2StndcI Dor fid) genemmcn, ia cr geprcbigt nnb gc:^ 
tr^nubcrt bat^ bajn cine flcine 3^^^- ^^^ 2(pofte{ abcr nnb 
ibre 9iad)femmen finb bnrd) bic gan^e 5Bclt fommen, nnb 
f)at gctt5dbret/2 fo (ange bic (Sbriffcnbeit geftanben iil: a(fo^ 
bap eg Sbriftng nnr pcrfonlid) angefangen l)at, abcr bnrd) 

to [this further] application." That is, the works performed by them, 
will not only prove, by the fulfilment of his promise, that lie is in the 
Father, but also that they are in him. 

*Denner hat, etc. *' For he entered upon a small district 
(corner) only, in which he preached and wrought miracles, and that 
for a short time." W u n d e r n, see p. 283, Note 4. 

^ [Ge]kommen, und [es] hat gewahret "went into all 
the world and it, i. e. their work, has been going on as long as Chris- 
tianity has existed." 



828 SELECTIONS FROM LUTHER. 

bie 3(po(lc( unb fofgcnbcn ^^rcbigcr bat mi'tflcn immcr w^citcr 
aii^gcbrcitct mcrbcn bi^ an ben Sinigflen Za(^. 3(lfo ift^ 
n)al)r, ba^ bie C5brijicn grojTere 2Bercfc, ba^ ijl, niebr nnb 
n>citer tbnn, bcnn Sbriftn^ fclbfi: ; bed) finb eg ciner(ct) unb 
cbcn bicfe(bi(]cn 2Bcrcfe. S^cnn bamit, bag cr [prid^t : 5Ccr 
an mid) glaubct, ber wivb grejTcrc ^iGcrcfe tbun, t)crneinct 
er nid)t, bag fotcbe 2Gercfc burd) feme ^raft miijTen gefd)e^ 
ben, unb an^ ibm, afg bem 5;^aupte, berfliejTen ; fenbent 
jeiget felbft, bei;be, bier, ba er fprid)t : „2Ber an mid) 
gtdnbet", nub in fofgenben SfBerten : X'enn id) gebe jam 
aSater ; item 23. 14 : 2Bag it)r bitten VDerbet, bag rviVi id} 
tl)un 2Cv bap^ fo(d)e nid)t gefd)e(/en, benn allein Den benen, 
fo bnrd) ben ©(auben an ibm bangen, nnb er feine ^raft in 
t^nen tvixdct nnb bnrd) jTe bemeifet. 

25ag fage id), bag man biefen :i;ert bejio 6ag2 t^erflebe, 
n)ie bnrd) bie Sbriflen obne Unterfag bie allergrofTefien 
2Qerrfe gefd)eben in ber 2Be(t, eb jTe n>ot nid)t anjnfeben 
<mb, nod) erfannt merben, bcpbe, im geiftlidien nnb and) im 
kiblidfcn ^iBefen nnb D^egiment, afg nem(id) : 3"f^i>ri"^9 
beg 2!enfelg 9teid)g, (Jrlofnng ber Seelen, S?efebrnng ber 

*Sondern zeigct selbst beidc, hier — und in fol- 
genden Worten — dass. Beide refeis to hier and to i n f o 1- 
genden Worten, "but he even intimates both here when he 
says, * He who believeth on me,' and in the following words, etc. 
that such things do not take place except with those who," etc. 

- Bass, good, well, an obsolete word in the positive degree from 
which the comparative besser (basse r) is formed. In Luther's 
time, it was commonly used as a comparative, better. " This I say 
in order that one n)ay the belter understand the text, how that, 
though they are not obvious (to be seen) nor perceived, tlie very 
greatest works are effected in the world tlirough Christians continu- 
ally both in spiritual and in secular matters and government, as, for 
example, the overthrow of Satan's kingdom, the redemption of souls, 
the conversion of men (hearts), the triumph and maintenance of 
peace in countries and among nations, aid, protection and deliverance 
in all kinds of calamity and distress." Tliis translation is given as 
the easiest way of explaining the construction. 



EXPOSITION OP JOHN FOURTEENTH. 329 

Jonlpcn, Sie(] unb (Srbaftinig beg gricbeng bet) ?anbcn unb 
?cittcn, vS^iilfe, ©d)iU3 uub Ofcttiutg in aUer(et) ^Mageu unb 
9t5t[)cu» ©o(die<^ atteg fprid)t cr, foil buret) bie gbriften ge^ 
fd)ebeu, lyeit pe an (5l)rijlum gfduben uub aUe^S t)on i()m, 
a(»J bent Syd\)(^t, bcryebet^ ja, aiirf) burd) eincn jeglidjcn in^ 
foubeii)eit, bag er niod)te fagcn : 2^ie SBJercfe, bie id) tl)ue, 
tie tl)ue ciu jeg{id)er Sl)viiT:^ fo l)cute getauft i^. 

2Sci( \i?ir benu fotd)eu ©d)al3 l)abcu, fo l)a6en mir affe^^ 
uub f[nb §errcn iibcv al(e ^^erreu- S3ett(er ^ub mv auf 
@rbeu, ttne (Shrirtu^ and) {cib\l ge^Dcfl ift, abcr Der ®ott/ 
ffnb n)ir iibcrfd^iutei mit alien ©litem : bag bie 2Belt gegen 
ung elcnb unb blog ijl:, unb obne un^ and) ihvc ©liter nid)t 
fcet)altcn faun, id) abcr, tt>enu id) |Ter6e, l)a6e id) bed) fold)e 
©liter, bie mir blei&en follen ; benn id) l)a6e ben Syxvxx 
(Sbriftum fclbjl:, fo bvoben im i^immet f[^et, bu abcr mw^t 
at^benn iiadet uub btog baDon fcbeiben unb nid)t einen %a^ 
ben mit nehmen, unb bort and) aUc<$ ©uten beraubt fet)n, 
iOb bu gteid) cin mdd)tiger ,f onig marejlt, unb aller S3ett 
@ut t)vitte|l» 5(ber cin Sbriil fell feiner ©liter nid)t eiii 
5;^drlein*2 binter ibm laffen ; benn er bat bereit^ feinert 
<Sd)a6 broben im ^jimmel in unb mit Sbrifto, xvic ©t* 
^Aanlu^, Spbef, 2, 6., fagt, bag n^ir fdion burd) ibn gefefet 
jTub in bag bimmtifd)e 2Bcfen» ^ci^t ift eg rool nid)t ojfen^ 
fear ; aber am 3iingiien ZaQc irirb aUc 2Belt miijTen fet)en, 
n)ag ber arme ?ajarug, ber t?or beg 5yieid)en S;biire nid)t bie 
23rofamlcin bvitte, fo wn feinem !tifd)e ftelen, fiir ^eidj^ 
thnm unb emige i^errli*feit baben mirb im 5;^immel, ba ber 

* Aber vor Gott, etc. *' but before God we are overwhelmed 
with all good things (possessions) ; so tliat the world in comparison 
with us (see p. 151, Note 1.) is miserable and destitute (bare. See 
2 Chron. 28: 19), and without our aid (us) cannot hold its posses- 
-sions, whereas I, if I die, have such goods as (or goods which) must 
remain with me." 

^ Harlein diminutive of H a ar, like Brosamlein a little be- 
low, from B r o s a m, a crumb, from an old verb b r o s e n, to break, 

28* 



S90 SELECTIONS FROM LUTHER. 

reid)e 2Qaiifl famt aller ungfaubigen 5ffielt wixb in cwuyv 
©hit liegen unb brennciu ?iic» 16, 19» jf* 

?tiut, wai id bcnn bic Urfacl)e, irariim bic (5l)riften fotten 
ebcn fo grejTcre iBcrcfe thnn, benn cr fclbfl ? Stciwc an^ 
bere,i fprid)t cr, obne bicfe : X'enn tcf) gcbe jum Satcr. 
SBie reimet jTd) bed) ba^ ? SJ^ t'cr 5!)?ann tnnicfen, eber 
rebct im itraiim ? Slbcr ba^ iftd, bag id) gcfagt babe, bag 
tt)ir fo(d)c SBerrfe nid)t tl)im wn iing [ctber. I^ag abcr bie 
(5t)rij^ciit)cit fo groj]e SlBercfe tbiit bard) bie ganlje $Be(t, bie 
er auf (5rben niir in bem ffeinen 35o(dIciu getban, bag 
fommt ba()er, miff er fagen, bag id) jum SSatcr gebe, iinb 
ntein 9?eid) ciniicbme, bag ijT:, biird) mein ?eibcn, (gtcrbeii 
unb 2(uferftebcn iibern)inbe id) ben !^enfc(, 2!eb, g(eifd) unb 
S3lnt, ^iGclt nnb affcg, waS brinnen i|l, nnb fctse mid) l)inanf 
gur 9{cd)ten beg 3Saterg, bag id) gcn)aftig(id) regiere nnb 
tnir affcg nntertban inad)e, nnb fonne fagen jnm ;j'cbe, 
^linbe, Xcnfcl, ^iBeft nnb affem, bag ba bofe ifi: : X^a liege 
niir jnn giiflT^n nnb fet) nimmer !tob, Siinbe, Xenfel unb 
bofe 2Gelt, xvic bn gemefen bifl^ 

13, 14. Unb n>ag ibr bitten n) erbet in mei^ 
n e m ?t a ni e n, b a g ti) i ff i d) t b u n, a n f b a g b e r 
SS a t e r g e e 1) r e t m e r b e in b e nt @ o b n. Ul^ a g 
i I) r bitten ti) e r b e t in m e i n c nt 9t a nt e it, bag 
win id) tl)un. 

dv jeiget init biefcn unb fofgenben 2Dorten, rvai ba fci)- 

' Keine and ere, etc. "No other, says he, but this, * For 1 
go to my Fatlier.' But what sense is there in that (how does that 
agree) ? Is the man intoxicated, or is he dreaminof ? But that is 
what 1 have said, that we do not perform such works of ourselves. 
But that the cliurch performs such great works in all the world, 
which he [while] on earth performed only among a small nation, 
comes from tliis (he wishes to say)," etc. 

* Was da sey, etc. " what is the proper office and work of Chris- 
tians, and how necessary the same is in the church." 



EXPOSITION OF JOHN FOURTEENTH. 331 

fccr (5[)ri)lcn cigeuttirf) 2lmt itnb 5Bcrcf, nnb tine notl) bajjef^ 
bige in fccr gl)n)1tenl)cit fci), baDcn fcer ^ropl)et 3^d)aria^ 
12, 10. fagt, bag Sbriihi^ foil au^giejfen unb gc6en bcit 
©eifT-; ber ba t)eigt eiu @ei|l ber ®naben nnb be^ ©ebet^* 
X^enn btefe jn^ci; ©ti'tcfe foH er au^nd)ten xmb frt)ajfen in 
altcn (5t)rij^en : crftlidi, bag tl)r §er6 i:)erfict)ert nnb genoig 
fet), bag fte cinein gncibigen ®ott t)a6en ; jnm anbern, bag 
jTe and) fonnen anbern belfen bnrrf) ba^ ©efcet IDa^ erjlte 
©titcf mad)et, bag iie mit @ott i:)erfot)net n)erben, nnb fitr 
fid) aKe^ t)a6en, n)a^ ffe bebnrfen. 2Bcnn fie ba^ l)aben, 
folten f[e barnad) and) ©otter roerben^ nnb ber Sffieft S)ci^ 
[anbe bnr* ba^ ©ebet, nnb atfo bnrd) ben ©eifl ber ©na^ 
ben fetbil ©ottc^ ^inber t^erben, barnad) ai^ ©otte^ ^tnb^ 
er j\i:)ifd]en i()m nnb bem ?iad)jl:en f)anbefn nnb anbern bie^? 
nen nnb l)d\en, bag fie and) bajn fommen mogen. 

2^enn n^enn ein Shrill: anfat)et, gt)rifl:nm jn fennen a(^ 
feinen ijerrn nnb ^^^eitanb, bnrd) tt)e(d)en er ifl: ertofet an^ 
bem ^obe nnb in feine i^errfd)aft2 nnb @rbe gebrad)t, fo 
n)irb fein ^erfe gar bnrd)gottert, bag er gerne XdoUte jeicx^ 
ntann and) bajn t)e(fen* Senn er bat feine bobere grenbe, 
benn an biefem (Bdjai^^ bag er St)ri(lnm erfennet^ Sarnm 
fdbret er berani^, [ebret nnb t)ermabnet bie anbern, riibmet 
nnb befennet baffelbige Dor jebermann, bittct nnb fenfjet, 
bag fte and) mod)ten jn fofd)er ©nabe fommen* X^a^ ift 

^ Gotter werden, etc. " become gods and saviors of the world 
through prayer, and thus by the spirit of grace become themselves 
children of God, and then as children of God mediate between him 
and their neighbor, and serve and aid others so that they may come 
to the same state (dazu)." 

2 Und in seine Herrschaft, etc. "and is introduced into 
his (the Christian's) dominion and inheritance, his heart is pervaded 
with divinity, so that [like God] he would gladly help every one [to 
come] to the same." D u rchgo tte r n, formed after the analogy 
ofvergottern, admirably expresses the apostolic idea of our " be- 
ing made partakers of the divine nature" by the infusion of the divine 
Spirit as a pervading element of our character. 



332 SELECTIONS FROM LUTHER. 

ciit nnru[n,qcr &ci\t in bcr bobcftcu D?iil>c,i bao i\t in QSottci 
03nat)e luit) gricbtv bap cr nid)t fanu fWte ned) miung fcpn, 
fonbcvu iuimcvbar barnad) ringct unb ftrcbct mit aUeu 
^raftcn, aid ber adciu banim Icbt, balj er ®ettcd (5*brc 
nub iob wcitcv nntcr bie l^cnte brinc^e, bap anbcre fo[d)ett 
©cift tcv ©nabcn and) cmpfabcn, unb bnrd) bcnfctbigcu 
and) ibm bclfcn bctcn* Scnn vdo bcr ©eijl; bcr ®nabcn 
ift, bcr mad)ct, ba9 wiv and) fonncn unb biirfcn, ja mnjyen 
anfahcn, jn betcn* 

9(6cr cin rcd)t (5bri|l(id) ©ctct- foH unb nni^ alfo flcl)en 
an^ bcm ©naben(]ci|T, ber ba faget : 3rf) babe gcfebt, tt)ie 
id) fann, fo Dittc id), bn tPoUejl: ja nid)t mcin icbcn unb 
;i;bnn anfcl)cn, fonbern bcinc iVirmhcrlpigfcit iinh ®iitc, 
bnrd) Sbriilnm t)crl)cij7en, unb nm bcrfctbcn wiiicn mix gc^ 
ben, w.ii id) birte. Sllfo, bag man in bcm G5cbet in red)tcr 
l)erlp(ic{)er 2)cmntl) i>en nni^ fcIbftfaKc, nnb aHcin bange an 
ber SScrbciiTnng ber ©nabe, mit i^cftcm 3Scrtranen, bag er 
iw.'S woUe erl)oren, wic er ju beten befoblen nnb (Srborung 
jngcfagt bat* 

S^arnm fcl^ct er and) felbfl bentHd) baju big SBortfein : 
i n m cine m 9i a m e n, jn (cbren, bag obne ben ©(anben 
fein rcd)t Oicbet gcfd)cbcn fann, nnb an^cv Sbrifto nicmanb 
iKrmag cincn iMid)iTabcn ^n hctcw, t>iV:^ iH>r ©ott gclte nnb 
angenebm fei)» 

2ttfo feme l)ier, bag tt>ir bnrd) ben .s'^^errn Cbriflnm aUciit 

* In der liohcslen (hoc listen) Rulio, etc. "in Ihe great- 
est repose, i. e. in the jrrace and peace of God, so that," etc. 

' Aber ein recht christlicher Gebet, etc. "But a truly 
Cliri:itian prayer should and must thus proceed from the spirit of 
grace, which says : *■ I have lived, as 1 could ; but I pray that tiiou 
wouldest not look upon my life and works, but upon thy mercy and 
kindness, promised in Clirist, and on account of these grant me wliat 
I request." Soil utid muss is an idiomatic phrase not unlike ist 
und bleibt, and handeln und wandeln. In English, the 
word mu6t renders the word should unnecessary. 



EXPOSITION OF JOHN FOURTEENTH. 333 

baScn bic jtDct) ©ti'icf : ®nabe nnb Srhoriiug be^ ®ciet^^ 
bag mv crjind) ^inber ©etteo roerben, bamit wiv itjn feu^ 
nen anrujfcn, iinb barnad) ami) fiir uu^ nnb anbere erlani^ 
gen, M^a^S voiv 6cbitrfciu S^arum, xvo ein Sbrtjl iff, ba t(l 
cigcntHch ber i';^ci(i(]e @ci(^, ber ba nid)t^ anbcr^ that, benn 
immcrbar bctet* l^entt ob er g(eicf) nicf)t immerbar ben 
?l}cnnb rcget, cbcr 2Sorte mad)et, bcnnod) gebet nnb fd)(dgt 
ba^ Syvi}^ gfeicbn>ie bie ^^nt^abcrn nnb ba^ §er§ im ?eibe, 
cbne Unterlag mit fo(rf)em Scnfjen : 2(d) tieber SSater, ba^ 
bod) Vein Jlamc gebeiliget n?erbe, l^ein dleid) fomnte, Dein 
SBiffc gefd)ebe bei) nn^ nnb jebermann 2C* Unb barnad)^ 
bte 'TJiiffe ober 2(nfed)tnng nnb 9tctl) barter briicfen nnb trei^ 
ben, barnad) gebet fetd) Senfgen nnb SSitten bejlto (larcfer, 
and) miinbfid) : bag man feinen Sbrijlen fann ftnben obn 
beten, fo n)enig, al^ einen lebenbigen ?[Renfd)en cbne ben 
^nhS, tt)e(d)er ftebet ninimer jiiff, reget nnb fd)(dget tmmer^ 
bar fiir fid), eb gfeid) ber ?[ftenfd) fd)tdft ober anber^ t^nt, 
bag er fein nid)t gen>abr tDirb,^ 

21 nf bag ber aSatergeebretujerbeinbem 
©obn. 

?Ba^ beigt nnn, ber SSater n>erbe geebret in bem (gobn ? 
9tid)t^ anber^, benn ia^ ber aSater atfo erfannt nnb fiir ben 
gebaften tt)erbe, ber ba fei) ein gndbiger, barmber^iger Sa^ 
ter, ber ba nid)t mit nn(^ jiirnet, nod) jnr i^otlen Derbam^j 
men n)iK, fonbern bie (giinbe Dergibt, nnb atie feine ©nabe 
nn^ fd)enctet, nm feine^ ©obne^ Sbnfti vriKen, tvie bibber 
genng gefagt t|T"* Vai i]t bie red)te Sb^^/ bamit ®ott Qeci)^ 
ret n^irb, Venn baber ern)dd)fet im 5?er6en red)te^ SSer^? 
tranen, ba^ e^ jn ibm 31^^^^)^ bat, nnb ibn fann trojllid) 

^ Und darnach, etc. "And (according) as assaults (blows) or 
temptation and trial (distress) press and urge us the harder, so (ac- 
cordingly) go forth such sighs," etc. 

^Dasser se in (seiner) nichtgewahr wird, "so that 
he is not aware of it." 



334 SELECTIONS FROM LUTHER. 

anruffen in aKcu 9?otl)cn, item fiir feinc ©nabe imb ^ohU 
that baucfct, feincu 5tamcn iinb ifi?ert i^or jctcniuiiin bcfcn^ 
net nub fiinb niaci)ct, tt)c(d]Ci> fiub tic xcd)tcn ©ette^bienfte, 
fo it)m gcfadcn unb baburrf) er gepreifet wivb. SoId)e aber 
fonncn nid)t gefdicben, ol)ne aUein, wic cr fagt, in bcm 
gebnc^ ba^ ift, rvo i^l)vi]in6 alfo erfamtt unb qcgldnbt mirb, 
trie gefagt ifl, ba(5 n)ir bnrd) ibn lernen, &ott feben unb 
feine ©nabe unb Daterlid) ^^er^ erfcnnen, unb tviiJen, \va^ 
tt)ir in feincm Xiamen bitten wn ©ett, gen)ip(id) geiDdl)ret 
fepn unb empfat)en fetten. ' 

15. iicbet il)r mid), fo haltct meine 2Sorte. 

2^enn id) miff nid)t ein Wlo\ci fepn, ber end) treibe unb 
plage mit 2^rduen^ unb (gd)rccfen, fonbern gebe end) fefd)C 
©ebote, n)e[d)e il)r toobf cbne ©ebieten fonnet unb u>erbet 
batten, fe ibr mid) anberc^ lieb babt* S^enn wo ia6 nid)t 
ift, ba ill bod) t)crgebenc^, bag id) end) i^ief gebieteu tvcffte ; 
benn c^ bfeibet bed) ungebatten. 2^arum febet nur baranf; 
SBofft il)v mein ©ebot I)alten, bag ibr mid) fieb babt, unb 
bebencfet, tt)a^ id) end) getban l)abe, bag ibr mid) biffig folTt 
lieben, af^ ber id) mein ?eib unb ?eben fiir end) felse unb 
mein 53(nt fiir end) t^ergiejje ; fo tbut^ bod) um meinettriffen, 
unb bfcibt unter einanber einig unb frennbtid), bag ibr ju^ 
g(eid) an mir b^'^ftet mit enerer ^^^rebigt, unb einer ben an^ 
bern bnrd) bie \?iebe trage, unb nid)t !?rennnng unb Ofotteu 
anrid)tet. S'enn id) babe ei^ and) reblid) unb u>ob( i^erbie^? 
net ; ei^ mirb mir ja berlslid) faner unb foftet mid) meiu 
?eib unb ?eben, bag id) end) erlofe. Cni) u>erfe mid) felbjlt 
unter ben Xot unb in beiS 2:enfe(^ 9{ad)en, bag id) bie 
Simbe unb Xob v»on end) nebme, bie j>offe unb bet^ Jeufef^ 
CMeu\i(t ^erftove, unb fd)encfe end) ben .'oimmel unb affed, 
mail id) babe, unb um'U end) gerne ^^n gut balten, ob ibr mu 
tenveilen irret unb feblet, ober and) groblid) fallet, fdnrad) 

* Drauen. See p. 95, Note 1. — Anders, olheritise^ \% oflen 

belter omitted in llie translation. 



EXPOSITION OF JOHN FOURTEENTH. 835 

unb nct'ted[)(id) fepb, aUcin, bag ibv cucf) wicicx an mid) 
haltct unb m bie ?ie6e trctet, unb unter einanber einer bem 
anbcrn and) Dcrgebe, n>ie id) and) gegen end) tbue, auf ba^ 
bie ?iebe unter end) nid)t jntrennet n>erbe» 

16. Unb id) Witt ben Sater bitten. 

2^enn id) mtt nid)t mn^ic^ jTl3en broben im Symmel^ unb 
ener t^ergelTen, fonbern nid)t^ anber^ tbun, benn ener lieber 
^vicilcv unb 5!)?itt(er fei)n, ben -Bater fiir end) bitten unb 
flehen, bag er end) \^en .s^eifigen ^^cifl: gebe, ber end) in alien 
9tetben trojlten, garden unb erbaften fo(f,bag ibr in meiner 
Hebe bleibet, unb atteg fro(}[id) ertrageu fonnet, tt>ag end) 
urn nieinetn)i(len miberfabret. 

Unb er (off eud)ein en anbern^ro jit erge^ 
ben, ia^ er bet} end) bleibe en^iglid). 

3tIfo fdbet er nun an ju prebigen Don bem i^ettigen Qm}i^ 
fo ber St)rirtenbeit fctlte gegeben merben, unb baburd)^ fie 
fottte erba(ten n^erben bi^ an ben 3intgjlen Za^. unb ijl 
bier fonberlid) ju merden, mie ber i;^err Sbrij^n^ fo freunb^ 
lid) unb trojllid) rebet fiir at(e arme, betriibte fi^er^en unb 
furd)rfime, b{5be ®ett){jTen, unb un^ jeiget, tine n?ir ben Syi^ 
ligen @ei)lt red)t erfcnnen unb feine^ Xvo\l^ empfinben foUen* 

2)enn bi^t ijl befd)tojTen, bag er it)i(t ben 3Sater bitten, 
unb alfo bitten^ bag er un^ nid)t foK fdireden, nod) in bie 
S^blle ftoffen, fonbern bag er foil einen antern ^rl^fter geben, 
unb einen fo(d)en !Irofter, ber M en)ig(id) bei) un^ fei), unb 
nid)t^ bei) un^ tbue, benn obn Unterfag un^ ftdrde unb trojle* 
Jtun ifl fein S^eifel, bag be^ fi^errn Sbrifli ®ebet gen^iglid) 
erboret ill:, unb ber aSater alle^ tbut, ti\id er ibn bittet ; bar^^ 
um mug e^ nid)t ®otte^ 2BiI(en unb ^DJepnung fei)n, xvag 
un^ milt fd)reden unb betriiben. Senn gbrijlu^ tbut e^ fa 
md)t, n>ie er, bei)be, mit 2Borten unb SSerden a(fentt)alben 

^ D a d u r c h in the sense of w o d u r c h, through ichich. 



336 SELECTIONS FROM LUTHER. 

bcmeifet ; bcr 3Sater tlmt c^ and) ttid)t, ahi fccr mit &xi^o 
ein Syx^ unb 2yi((cn hat ; bcr 5^cilu]c ©cift ami) itid^t, bcnn 
er i\l^ imb fed bcijTcn, wic ibn (5()ri)lu5 all)icr ncnnct unD 
ntabfet, ein Sirofter* yinn ^crftebet jebcrmami, tt>a^ ba 
f)ei§t big 515ort : Zvo^ unb S^rojler, baf5 man nid)t faim 
bafiir jTcf} fi()cucu obcr fiinttcn, fenbcrn cben ia^i ijl:, ba^ 
ein c(enb, bctriibt S^exi} am alferbod)flcn bcgcbrct. 

17. 2 e n ® e i jl b e r SB a I) r I) c i t. 

9tid)t attein ijl ber ^;^eiL ®ei)l ein !j;ro|lcr, ber bie S()ri)lcn 
troisig nnb mntbig mad)ct nnbcr af(cr(ci) Sd^rccfcn, fenbcrn 
ijl bajn and) ein @ci(l: bcr SBabrbcit, ba^ ijT:, ein wabrbafti^ 
ger, gcmij]er ©eift, ber nid)t trcngf^ nod) fcbfcn Idgt, 2^cnn 
bi^ geboret and) bajn, ba^ jTe fccf nnb nnerfd)rccfcn n>crben* 
^enn e^ mng nicf)t fci)n ein fo(d)cr tnmmcr ginn, I'nrfl^ 
unb Xto6/al^ ba ijlt ber toKen ^ricg^^fente nnb Wagcbdife, 
bie frenbig babin treten gegen bie Sd)mcrter, Spicffe nnb 
Siidifcn. Vai i(l and) vooi cine ^renbigfeit, aber ein fa(fd)^ 
er Zvoil nnb Xvoi}, bcnn er t^crtdgt jTcf) enta^cber anf 
eigene jtraft, ober anf citcfe (Sbre nnb 5Knbm. 1^arnm i|1 
tt)o( ba ein ©eijl, aber bod) nid)t ein rcd)tcr ma I)rbaf tiger 
®ei|L 

2BeIcf)en bie 5Qe[t nid)t fann enipfaben; 

b e n n f[ e jT e I) e t i b n n i d) t nnb f e n n e t i f) n 

n i d) t. 
I^a^ geboret and) jnr Illroflnng bcr Sbrificnbcit. ^enn 
tt)enn fie fid) nmfeben^ in bie weite 5Geft, tt>ei( ibr nnjdbfig 



* Denn er ist, etc. " for he is, and deserves (ought) to be caHed, 
(as Christ here terms and represents him), a comforter." 

' Treugt, obsolete for triegt or trOgt, for which betrQgt 
is now used. 

' Durst, not thirst, but rfrtnn^, from dOrfen in the old sense 
of wage n. — T u m m e r for d u m m e r. 

* Denn wenn sie sich umsehen, etc. " For where they 
look about them in the wide world (because there are very many of 



EXPOSITION OF JOHN FOURTEENTH. 337 

t)ier jTnb, bie unfere ?ebre t)erad)ten, tdflern itnb Derfefgen, 
unb nid)t fcf)[ed)te, geringc ?cute, fonbern aUermeijl: bie 
^od)t)erjl:dubi.qrten, ®e(et)rtcjten, ©crDaltigjleu, unb and)^ 
bie ba moffen bie ^rommllen nub ^^ei(ig)leu fet)n, ba^ ftoflet 
ein fd)n)ad)g(dubig .^er^ Dor ben jtopf, bag e^ anfdt)et ju 
bencfen : ©ottten benn fo grolJe ?eute atfjnmat irren, unb 
alfe^ faffd) unb Derbammt fet)n, toa^ jTe tf)nn unb fagen, 
fegen unb fd)(iejyen ? 2)an)iber jleUet er biemit ba^ Urtbeif 
biirr unb ffar, bag tr>ir beg fotten getrig fei)n, bag e^ uid)t 
anber^ gebet nod) geben faun, unb fd)[enjl, bag jTe e^ uid)t 
fonnen Derfle[)en, nod) ju n>arten ober ju bojfen fei), bag ber 
groffe Sanfe, n)etd)e jTnb bie ©rogten, @be(jlten, SSefleit, 
unb ber red)te ^ern ber 2Ce[t, foCten bie 2Qat)rt)eiten ):)aben. 
2l(fo jTebet (5t)ti(lu^ in biefer ^^rebigt ininier bet)feit^ auf 

it (the world) who despise, reproach and oppose our teaching and 
[are] not simple, insignificant people, bat the most intelligent, learned 
and powerful, and those, too, who would pass for the most pious and 
holy), that strikes down (strikes in the head) one who (a heart which) 
is weak in faith, so that he begins to think, ' Is it likely (soil ten) 
that such great persons should all err, and everything that they do 
and say, decide and conclude upon, is false and damnable ? Against 
this he gives hereby the plain (dry) and clear decision, that we must 
be certain of this, that it is not, and cannot be otherwise, and con- 
cludes that they [men of the world] cannot understand, nor is it to 
be expected or hoped, that the great mass, who are the greatest, no- 
blest and best [of mankind], and the very cream (kernel) of the world 
should possess the truth." 

" Thus Christ, in this discourse, glances at those who would 
frighten his little flock, and make them timid and fearful, so that 
they should fall into doubts and think [within theuiselves and solilo- 
quize thus] ; Shouldst thou alone be wise, prudent and holy, and so 
many excellent persons be and know nothing ? What can I do alone, 
or with so few ; [how can I] endure persecution and suffer myself to 
be condemned and given over to Satan by so many distinguished 
and excellent people ?' ' Take courage, says he, you must be pre- 
pared (gerQst, for gerOstet, armec?) for that, and not let it tempt 
you, but be assured, that you have the spirit of truth, of which the 
Others, who persecute you, are not worthy,' " etc. 
29 



338 SELECTIONS FROM LUTHEK. 

bie, fo feirt fleine^ .^anflein rvoUcn crfcf)rerfen, bfobe xmb 
t>erjagt niarf)eiv b^^^ jTe fcKen jtreifcfn unb bencfcn : Self^^ 
tefl bu aikin xvci]c, f(nq unb bcifig fei)n, tinb fo t)ic[ treff^ 
ficf)er ?eiite aHc nic()t^ fet)n nod) tvi^en ? 3Bag fed id) aU 
Uin ober mit fo mentgcn madden nnb SSerfofgmtg (ciben, unb 
rnirf) faffen i^on fo 'ciel bobnt, trc|fHrf)en ?cntcn Derbamnteit 
unb bem Xcnfd gckn ? 5Bo(an, baju (fprtrf)t er) tnnft 
bu geriijl fepn, unb bid) fofd)cg nid)t (affen anfed)ten, fcn^ 
bem Qcvoi^ fei)n, ba^ bu Ijahe^ ben ©eift ber SiSahrhcit^ 
tt)e(d)e^ bie anbern, fo bidf) t)erfofgen, nicf)t mertl) fepn, ja 
H)n nirf)t fonneu fe[}en nod) fennen, n)enn ffe ncd) inel ge^ 
lebrtere, meifere unb bohere iciite n^dren, unb ba^ bein 
:j:()un unb SCefcn foK getten unb rcd)t fcpn unb bfeiben Dor 
®ott, unb ibre^ bagegen t)erbammt fepu^ 2lI^o beutet er^ 
m\n felbft, fo er f))rtd)t : 

3{)raberfeuueti{)u; beunerbfeibet betj 
end) unb n)trb in end) fepn* 

2Bot)er fennen unb I)aben fie ben ^eih'gen @ei(l, ba^ er 
bei) ibnen b(eibct ? 9U(ein baber, n>ie gcfagct ip, ba^ (Te an 
Sbvifto bteiben l)angcn burd) ben ©lauben, fcin 2Bort lieb 
unb W)cxti) l)aben» Sarum, \y)a6 fie tbun, leiben unb leben, 
ba^ ijl al(e^ be^ .rNei(igen ®ei(Te^ Zt)nn unb SBercf, unb 
l)eigti red)t unb tt)o[)I ge(ebt, getl)an unb getitten, unb ifi 

* Und heisst, elc. " and consists in (or is) right and well liv- 
ing, doing and suffering, and is purely a precious thing before God. 
One will at the same time (da bey) perceive, says he, if it is done 
(goes) in my name, and relates to me, that the name of Christ creates 
the difficulty (dispute) and that the game has respect to (arises re- 
specting) him, as (thank God) we now see acts of violence (Grei- 
f e n) pass before our eyes. Therefore we have consolation, though 
we are poor, frail persons, and sinners besides. Although, in respect 
to our lives, we might, in comparison with them make our boast, and 
they have in reality as gross faults (things) attached to them, as they 
accuse us of, so that they might well come to a pause with us. But 



EXPOSITION OF JOHN FOURTEENTH, 3S9 

citcl foiliid) Ding ber ®ott Va^ mvi> man babet) extent 
lien, (fprid)t er,) fo e^ in meinem Stamen ge[)et, nub um 
mid) ju tl)int iff, ba^ bcr 3tame Sl^rifti ben S^ahcv marf)e, 
uub ba^ ©pie( jTd) iiBer it)m erbebe, n)ie C®ctt ?ob !) n)ir 
jegt fel)eu greiffen Dor afugcn gehen ; baber wiv and) t)a6eu 
ben Zxo% ob rviv vdcI arme gebrec^fid)e ?eute ftnb, unb 
©ihtber baju* SOBicmof mir be^ iebmS haiben and) n)ot 
gegen uufere gciube rubmcu fonuen, unb fte fa fo grobe 
©tiicfe anf ibncn [)abcn^ ai^ fte nn^ ^d)nib geben, ba^ fte 
n)of mogen mit nn^S gleid) anfbeben. giber, tt)ei( e^ um be^ 
^errn (^\)vi\ti mlkn gu tbun ijl, bag n.nr ben prebigen unb 
i)od) beben, fo a>o((en mx babei) bteiben unb fte^en it>iber 
atte 2SeIt, unb fte fof(en nn^ ben $>Iubm laffen, and) obne 
it)ren Sanrf, bag unfer ©eift ber ©eift ber SBabrbeit fet), 
unb Wfolkn^ barauf mit if)nen augfed)ten unb uufere ^opffe 
an tbre fe^en. 

2)enn unfer §err hat and) ©ta^f unb Sifen im ^opf unb 
SOJarrf in gdujien unb 93einen, ba^ ex§ fann au^ftefjen, mc 
ex bereitg an mien getban bat, bie ben ^opf an ii)m ab^e^ 
{aufen unb ^nbxodjen l)aben unb nod) jubred)en fotten, aber 
ben unfern unjubrod)en (aflfen* 

because it concerns Christ our Lord that we proclaim and exalt him, 
we will abide by our cause (stand by) and face all the world, and 
they must yield to us the credit (no thanks to them) that our spirit 
is the spirit of truth, and we will fight it out with them, and beat 
our heads against theirs. For our Lord has a head of steel and iron, 
and nerve (marrow) in his hands and legs, so that he can stand it 
through, as he has already done towards many who have lost their 
heads in running against him (run off their heads against him) and 
broken them, but have left ours unbroken." On um zu thun, 
which occurs twice in this passage, see p. 20, Note 3 med. and p. 35, 
Note 5. On gelebt, gethan und gelitten, see p. '283, Note 
6. — G r e i f f e n, or g r e i f e n is an infinitive used substantively, the 
art of seizing. The closing sentences are in the old German warlilce 
and feudal spirit, so forcibly expressed in the word Faust-recht, 
cLuh-latD. 



3*40 SELECTIONS FROM LUTHER. 

18. 3cf) Witt end) nid)t aBdi)fen^ fajTen, id) 
fomme ju eucf). 

(5^ fd)einet n)oI affo,^ 6 e t) b e, nad) bcr 2Beft 2(d)ten unb 
nad) unferm eigenen ^uMen, aU fep bip 5?dufletn ber 
(it)vi]ten arme, DcrtvijTene ^iSai)fen, bcpbe, t)on Oott unb 
@l)rifto, unb babe imfcr t)ergeflen, xvcil ex ta^ (eibet, bag fie 
geldftert unb gefd)dnbct, t^erbammt, Derfofget unb ermcrbet 
n)erbeu, unb jebcrmann^ gugtud) jTub, baju t)on bem ^eu^ 
fef im Serine n immerbar erfd)rcd|-, betriibt unb gepfaget 
tDerben, bag jTe mobf unb red)t SBdi;fen, niogen t)ciffeu t)or 
atten anbcrn 2Bdt)fen unb ^erfaffeuen 5!Kenfd)eu auf @rben, 
Don tt)eld)ert bie (5d)rift fagt, bag (Td) ©ott berfetben mug 
fefbfl anne()men, a(^ fonfl t)ou jebermanu tjerfaflfeu, ^^fafm 
27, 10., unb ein SSater berfctben jTd) uenneu fdgt, i^fafm 
68, 6. Siber id) mtt end) nid)t atfo t)er{aj]eu, mie e^ jTd) 
aujTebet unb fut)(et,3 Cfprid)t Sbriflu^,) fouberu milt end) 
ben Scroller geben, ber end) fohi)eu 9)Zutt) niad)e, bag if)r 
beg gemig fet)b, bag i\)v meine red)te Sl)ri(leu unb bie red)te 
^ird)e fet)b. 2)aju tt>iU id) fefbll gemiglid) bei) end) fei)n 
unb bfeiben mit mcinem ©d)ng unb Dbert)aub, fo idj nod 
jegt teiblid) unb fid)tbarfid) t)on end) gebe, bag iljr miiflfet 
affein fei)n, bed ZenfeUS unb ber ^iCeft Sodbeit unb ^iladjt 
Dorgemorfen* Slber fo mdd)rig4 fott bie SOSett uid)t fepu, 

* Waysen, or Waisen. 

*Es schcint wol also, etc. "It seems indeed both ac- 
cording to tlie view of the wrld and according to our own feelings, 
as if this handful of Christians were poor, forsaken orphans, [forsak- 
en] both of God and of Christ, and [as if] he had forgotten us," etc. 

^Wie es sich ansiehet und fuhlet, is explained by 
the first clause in tlie paragrapli. The verbs are both impersonal, 
*' as it appears and is felt." 

* A b e r so m ,1 c li t i g, etc. '* But so powerful [as you or oth- 
ers imagine] shall thf» world not be, nor so much miscliief shall Satan 
make; so prudent shall all the learned and wise not be; but my 
baptism and preaching about me shall continue and be carried on," 
etc. 



EXPOSITON OF JOHN FOURTEENTH. 341 

nod) ber ;j;eufe( fo bofe macf^en ; fo ffiig foKett atte ©e[e^r^ 
ten unb aSeifen nict)t fet)n : e^ fett bcnnoci) nteine Zaufe 
unb ^rebiflt t)cn mir bfeibcn unb gctrteben tt^erben, unb 
mein SyHic^cv @ci(l in end) regieren unb n^irrfen, 06 e^ im^ 
merbar angefocf)ten mtrb, unb aucf) bei) end) felbjlt \d)\vad)^ 
Jid^ frf)einet. 

19> a^ ijl nod) ttttt etn fteineg, fo vt)irb mid) 
bie SBelt nidit me^r fef)en, it)r aber fottt 
ntid)fel)en;bennid)tebe, unbi^r foHt and) 
I e b e n. 

dv fd^ret immer fort, ber liebc ^>err Sbriftn^, mit freunb^ 
Iid)en, trofKid)en 2Borten, bag er ffe bereite unb gefd)idft 
mad)c^ (Td) in it)rem 2!riibfa(, ;j!rauren unb ?eiben fein ju 
troften/ unb auf it)u einen SSJJut^ ju fd)opf en n)iber atteg, 
ba^ ffe anf[d)tet 

Sarum fprid)t er nun : (S^ foff balb anget)en,2 unb ijl 
nod) uin eine "^a&jt ju t^un, fo n)irb mid) bie 2Beft nid)t 
mel)r fel)en. 2{(^ foHte er fagen : d^ ift fo bofe,^ giflftig 
Sing urn bie SSSelt, bag, mer fein Xxoft unb §eif auf bie 
^entc mU fe^en, ber ijl fd)on t^erforen* 2)enn id) f)ab^ Der^ 
fud)t unb erfa()ren* 3d) bin f ommen, ibr ju l)etfen, itnb 
l)abe affe^ gett)an, n^a^ id) an ibr tt)un foltte : fo mU |Te 
ntid) nid)t (eiben, unb be^ SSater^ 3^i^S«ig i^ni^ t*^^ ^eifigen 
©eifte^ ^rebigt unb SBerd tt)eber annebmen, nod) n)ijfen^ 
fonbern fd)fed)t^ be^ S^eufef^ fe^n unb bfeiben. 

i:)arum mH id) and) iljv an^ ben Slugen^ g^^^tt/ bag ffe 

^ Sein zu trosten, "to comfort themselves in him." See 
p. 307, Note 2. 

^Es soil bald angehen, etc. " This should soon begin, 
and there is but one night first (and one night is still concerned)." 

^Es ist so bose, etc. " The world is so malicious and 
deadly." Literally, " It is so malicious and poisonous with the 
world." See p. 247, Note 6. 

-^Ihr aus den Augen, out of its sight^ " out of the eyes to 
it, or of it." 

29* 



Si2 SELECTIONS FROM LUTHER. 

mid) nicf)t feben foti, unb bocf) affo marf)en, bag <Te mirf) mug 
auf @rbcu (ciben uub lajTen regicven* Senn ob id) n>ol 
mid) crcnfeigen (affe iinb biefcm ?cben abftcrbc, n>ill icf) bed) 
baburd) in ein anber unjlerbtid) ?e6en gel)en unb fommcn, 
bartnne id) ctDig regiercn mcrbe ; af^bemt folt erfl mm 
dieid) vcdjt angcbcn* 2)enn n)eil id)^ a(fo gebc (lerb(id) t)cr 
ibren Sdigcn, fo ijt fciu 3(uft)orcn ici ZobenS imb SBiitcn^ 
n)iber mid), tDoHeit unb fonncn mid) nidjt febcnbig fel)cn nod) 
leibcn, 6i^ jTe mid) jam 2:obe bvad)t f)abcn. Slber id) n)i((^ 
balb cin (Snbe mad)cn, bag jTe an mir tl)im, tt)ag fie n^ollcii, 
unb mid) nid)t me()r, fct)cn, mic jTe begc()ren, unb bod) ebcn, 
bamit bag augrid)ten, bag fte mid) ot)ne il)ren Sancf^ in mc^ 
tne S)cxvlid)feit unb JKegimcnt bringen, n)cfd)cg fie miiffen 
leiben, unb fett eg niemanb ti?el)ren* 2((fo ift big^ ju l)ot)em 
Jlrog gerebet ber fd)anb{id)cn, bofen 2Qe(t, fo Sbriftum unb 
fein 3Bort tJerfofget, a(g ber il)r nid)t tt>itt bie @{)re tbun, 
bag fie il)n mel)r fottte fel)en prebigen ober 2Gunber tHun ; 
unb t\>cil fte il)n nid)t n^otten bci; ibnen (eiben, ti>itt cr ii)ncn 
and) tDeit genug axii ben 9(ngen fommen. 

2l(fo baben unr bie tr6ft(id)e 3Scr()eiffnng benen Cbrijlen 
gegeben, fo ba gefd)rerft merben burd) ben !tob unb aUerlei) 
Unglitcf, bag [\c fonnen trolsen voiber ben !t!enfef unb bie 
aSeft, unb fagen : 38enn bu mid) ti;>bteft, fo ti>bte(t bu mid) 
uid)t, fonbern ()i(feft mir jnm Men ; begrabjl bu mid), fo 
reiffe)! bu mid) ang ber 3(fd)e unb ©tanbe gen i^immeL 
Unb ©nmma : bein 3orn unb Zc^bcn i(l eitef @nabe unb 
S)nl\c ; benn bu gibfl mir nur Urfad)e unb ben 2(nfaug, bag 

* D e n n w e i 1 i c h, etc. " For because I am (go, or go and 
come) in a mortal state before their eyes, there is no cessation," ' *'^ 

«Ohne ihren Danck. See p. 338, Note 1. 

^ Also i 8 t diss, etc. " Thus this is said by way of dcfianc* 
to the shameless, wicked world, which perseculej Christ and his 
word, as [of] one who will not do it the honor to allow it to see (that 
it should see) him longer preach and work miracles." 



EXPOSITION OF JOHN FOURTEENTH. 343 

mid) (§t)rijlit^ jam ?e6en bringet ; voie er ^icr fpricf)t : ^d} 
?e6e, unb il)r fottt lebcn* 

3a, Cfpnd)t gteifcf) unb 95fut,) icf) mug gteid)n)o( bett 
^cpf ()erbatten?i 3^, bag fd)abet bir nicf)tg Cfpncf)t 
gt)ri|litg) ; jTe l)a6ett mtrf) aitdE) gecreu^tget, ern)urget unb 
tug @rab gelegt ; aber, n^ie fte mid) im ®rabe unb Jtob 
gcbafteu babeu, fo folteu jTe end) and) barinueu batten. 
2)enn eg Ijeigt unb foC l)eiflen : SBte trf) febe, fo follt if)v 
and) khcn ; bai folt mir n)eber Jteufet nod) Zob n^ebren. 
£)iefe 2Borte mug em Sbrifl (eruen faflen unb fetueu 
g^nfltum alfo fenneu in fetueu tro(ind)eu 2Sert)etfrungen, 
ob tbm ber Xob^ ben ©ttrf) beitt mtt fetnem ©pteg, unb 
ber S^eufet feiuen ^55C[euracf)eu gegen tl)m auffperret, bag 
er nid)t bafitr erfrf)rerfe, fouberu fonue bem 2!eufef iDteber 
ben Zvot;, bteteu burc^ ben ©I'auben auf biefe SOBorte : 
3Betgt bu aitcf), n^ie bu ben S)evxn Sbrijltum and) gefref^^ 
feu bajl unb bod) baft miifleu mtebergeben, ja er bid) me^ 
ber gefreffeu bat ; atfo foltft bu micf) and) ungefrefieu faf^? 
feu, tveil id) in tbm Ueibe unb um fetuetn)tffeu tebe unb 
leibe. Db man mid) briiber^ aug ber 2Beft jaget unb 
xinter bte @rbeu fcf)arret, bag faffe id) gefcf)e^eu ; aber 
barum wiii id) nid)t im Xobe b(etbett, fouberu mtt met^ 
uem S)etvn (H)vi\to febeu, me id) gidube unb n)etg, ba^ 
er lebt* 

gg tjT: aber unb Ueibt mol eine ^of)e ^uuft, fofcf)eg fap 
feu unb glaubeu, bte i\)nen fd)mer mtrb imb mancf)eu l)ar^ 

^ Den Kopf herhalten, " lay the head on the block," or 
yield to execution. " Must I not" is to be appended in English to 
such affirmatives with the interrogation point. See p. 235, Note 5. 

2 Ob ihm der Tod, etc. " though death offer him a thrust 
with his dart, and Satan yawn at him with fiendish fury." Be ut 
is obsolete for b i e t e t. 

2 Ob man mich drober, etc. " If man will on this ac- 
count (on account of my religion) hunt me from the world and lay 
(scrape) me under the ground," etc. 



344 SELECTIONS FROM LUTHER. 

ten ^ampf foflet, nub bcuuocf) nimmer guitg geternet fantt 
tt)erben am unfer^ gleifd)e^ unb Slutc^ tr>illen, n)clrf)e^ 
md)t fault be^ ©rf)rcrfcn^ unb 3^9^^^^ "^^^ i^^^« "^^^^ «^f)« 
fct)n.i J)od) mug c^^ augcfaugeu fei)u, uub berXrollgc^ 
faflfet n)crbcu, 2)cuu a>o n)ir bcu uicf)t l)atreu, fo fouute 
niemaub bei) bcm @t)augc(io jltel)eu uub bel)arrcu, weil 
uu^ ber Ileufet fo morblid) feiub ijl, uub bie 3Be(t fo 
greu(id) jufelsct, uub atteutt)al6eu fo jugef)et, bag fein 
eteuber, t)crarf}ter Siug fft auf Srbeu, bcuu cin &)xi^. 
©arum uiiiffeu n)ir bagegeu eiueu l)of)cru, flavcferu unb 
geuoijferu Xroft l)a6eu, beuu alte il)r Jrol^ uub 9J2ad)t ift. 

20. 2(u bemfetbigeu J^age to evict i^r er^ 
feuueu, bag icf) im 3Satcr biit, ^^^^^ if)^ nt mir, 
uub id) in eucf). 

SCBeuu e^ baju fommt,^ (tmlt er fagen,) bag il)r mid) mcr^ 
bet fcl)cu, an^ bem ©rabe uub Slobe mebcv auferflaubeu, 
uub l)iuauf jum SSatcr geu i^immel fa()rcu, uub il)r fcfd)e^ 
t)ou mir prebigeu merbct : fo mevbct il)r burd) bcu 5>cifigeu 
@eifl uub euerc cigcue (5vfal}ruug iuuc u>cvbcu uub cvUn^ 
ucu, bag id) im SSatcr biu, uub and) il)v in mir uub n)ieber^ 
urn id) iu eud), uub alfo n)ir mit eiuaubcr @iu ^ud)cu fe^n 

* O h n [o h n e] s e y n, obsolete to be tcithout^ governs the geni- 
tive like entbehren. 

2 Doch muss es, etc. " Still we must make a beginning and 
acquire confidence. For if we had not this, no one could stand by 
the gospel and hold out ; because the devil is so mortally hostile to 
us, and the world so cruelly assails us, and on every hand things go 
in such a way that nothing on earth is more wretched and despised 
than a Christian. Therefore, we must against all this have a confi- 
dence, higlier, and stronger and more sure than all the insolence (de- 
fiance) and power of the world." 

** Wenn es dazu kommt, etc. "When it comes to this 
that," is a circumlocution like, " when it comes to pass that." The 
fccnse is tlie same as " Wiien ye shall see me," etc. — E i n K u- 
chen, all one. See p. 3*i4, Note 1. Eitel. See p. 10, Note 4. 



EXPOSITION OF JOHN FOURTEENTH. 345 

merbctt : affo, bag e^ eitef ?e6ctt fei), baburcf) ihv in mir k^ 
bet, g(eid)tt)ie id) im aSater iinb ber aSater tu mir kiet 
3Demt id) (ebe iin 2>ater, unb fclct)e^ ?cbeng, bag tcf) in eige^ 
ner ^erfou beu 2!ob crwiirgt/ bag il)v miigt fagen, ba^ 
atteiit ®ott juge()i)rct 

Saniad)2 and) roerbet i[)r fageit, bag id) in end) hin. 
®enn xoic mid) ber 2Sater aufern)erfet, unb id) ben ij^ob ge^ 
frej]en b^fce : alfo mitt id) in end) and) ben $tob freflen, bag 
i()r burcf) ben ©fauben an mid) be^ :j'obe^ ^erren fei)n fottt, 
unb nid)t fi\vd)ten bie SBelt, J^enfef nod) S^bUe unb aKe 
tt)ren S;ro§, bag if)r mujT^t al^bann fagen : ©ofd)e ^raft 
l^abe id) jui^cr^ in mir nirf)t gebabt ; benn id) miigte fomof, 
aB bie anbern, nnter ieS Xenfef^ (Betoalt^ be^ Siobe^ 
©dE)rerfen unb 5Karf)t bteiben* 2lber je^t tjabe id) einen 
anbern 5iJJntb, ben mir gl)riftug gibt burrf) feinen ©eijl, ba^? 
ran id) fpiire,^ bag er bet) unb in mir i)*, bag id) fann atte 
ber 2Se(t, beg J^obeg unb 2!euferg (2cf)recfen unb 2)rduen 
Deracbten, unb bagegen froblid) unb freubig trogen auf met^ 
nen ^errn, ber broben bei) bem aSater kht unb regieret 

21* aSer meine ®ebote ijat unb f)dlt jTe, 
beri|ltg, bermicf)Itebet S03er midjaberHe^ 
het^ ber tt)irb i:)on meinem SSater geliebet 
n)erbeu, unb icf)tr^erbe i^nlieben, unbmid^ 
it)m ofenbaren. 

dv hat iie getrojltet mit bem boben JCrojit, bag fte fotten in 
i()m unb er in i\)nen fet)n, n)e(cf)eg ijl ia^ ^auptjltiicf ber 
g()ri|l(icf)en ?ebre, barau^ wiv fofcben aSerjlanb baben,^ bag 

^ ErwUrgt [ha be]. "That 1 have in my own person de- 
stroyed death so that," etc. 

2 D a r n a c h, in a similar manner^ or accordingly. 

3 Z u V o r, before receiving the Holy Ghost. 

^Daran ich spOre, "by which [courage] 1 perceive (trace) 
that," etc. For the force of a n in d a r a n, see p. 80, Note 3. 

^ Daraas wir solchen Verstand haben, " from which 
we learn," from which we have this understanding, viz. 



346 SELECTIONS FROM LUTHER. 

n)ir nid)t in, uocf) burd) lut*:^ felbft gcrcdH iinb fcfu] merbeit, 
fenbcrn in ($l)rirto unb burd) C^briilum, bcr fiir uii^ atteg 
aiuiacrid)tet, 'ocii &c\ci} crfiiKct, ©iuibc, Xob unb Stcufct 
iibcrwunbcu l)at* 'ZiVS wcrbct il)r l)aben Cfpvid)t cr,) an 
mir, unb barnad) wiU id) and) in cud)(]cprcifctwcvbcu, unb 
Jt)crbct»^ miiiTcn bcfcnncn nub prebiijcn in ber 2Bcft* 

S'iJ licgt abcv alted baran, ob bu fo{d)e^' bet) bir ful)re|l 
unb ftnbcft, (u>ic cr brebcn, 9:^. 15, and) gcfagt bat,) ba^ 
bu bicfcu 93uinu licb babc)l. Scmt tr>o il)r feld)c^ mabr^ 
baftig gdiubct, fo n>irb and) bie ?icbc ba fcpn, unb tr>crbct 
fiibfen cucr .v^crfe ai\o gcfinnct : ©o ^icl l)at (^briftu^, mcin 
lieber .'ocrr, fiir mid) gcthan, ben Sater mir t)er[6hnet, fein 
fShit fiir mid) DergoiJen, mit meinem ^ebe gefdmpft unb 
tbn iibermunben, unb altei^, tvai er bat, mir gefd)enrft ; folltc 
id) benn il)n uid)t u>ieberum lieben, bancfen unb loben, bie^? 
uen unb el)ren mit ?eib unb ®nt ? SEellte id) bed) el)e 
n)iinfd)en, ba^^ id) fein 5[l?enfd) geboren tt)dre* 

Sarum (fagt er) gebiiret jum red)tfd)aflreneu (5f)ri(len, 
bag er mid) Don j^erlsen fieb b^^be ; fonjl n>irb er^'^ \r>a\)Vf 
iid) nid)t tbun. T^ai S^cvi} muf5 aHein an il}m I)angen, unb 
Mid)t^ anbcr^ (ieben nod) fiird)teu» 

3(1 aber bie iicbc ba, fo faun ffe nid)t ruf)eu xxod) fepren ;3 

^ S o 1 c h e s, viz. an assurance that Christ has done all this for 
you. " Everything depends on this, whether, as he said above v. 15, 
you feel and experience this (i. e. have this confidence and trust) 
within you, so tliat this man becomes (is) dear to you." 

' S o n s t w i r d e r, etc. *' Otherwise he will certainly not do 
it," viz. obey and trust. 

^ F e y r e n. The word written fully would be f e y e r e n. The 
c in one of the last two syllables is always dropped. In the old 
language either of them was dropped ; in modern German, the latter 
is always dropped and the former always retained. This rule applies 
to all verbs that have e r or e 1 before the termination e n, or to ex- 
press it still more clearly, those verbs which have the derivative end- 
ings e r n and e I n. F c i e r n or f e y e r n, means, as a regular 
verb, to have a holy-day, to cease from toil. 



EXPOSITION OF JOHN FOURTEENTH. 347 

jTe fdt)ret herau^, prcbigct utib (el)ret jebermantt, n^oKte 
gerne ben (5l)riftiim jebermann^ in^ i^erg pflant3en, unb 
aHe ju iljm bringen, roac^t unb (dgt bruber,^ n?asi jTe foU unb 
faun* (go(cf)e ?iebe troHte er gerne in jTe treiben burcf) 
fo(d)e t)er6{id)e ^iBorte ; barum fpricf}t er : 2Bob(an, id) 
lajTe end) biefe ?egte,3 ba^ it)r babt in mir aUe^, n)a^ il)r 
beget)ret, SSergebung ber Siinbe, ben Symmd, t)c6 SSater^ 
§u(b unb ©nabe ; atlein fet)et ju, bag it)r fo(d)e^ recf)t 
gldubet, fo werbet ibr mid) n>ol)( lieb t)aben unb t)alten atte^, 
n)a^ id) end) gefagt babe* 

5fi5a^ foUen aber bie wicbevum ^aben, fo fo{d)e ?iebe ju 
ibm baben, ober, n^ae geniefjen fte bcrfclben ?4 T^a^ triff 
id) ibnen (fpridit er) n)ieberum tbun : n)er affo ()erau^ fdt)^? 
ret, unb fid) ergeigt a(^ einen red)ten (Sbriflten, ber n^irb Don 
meinem SSater ge(iebet werben, unb id) mill ibn tieben unb 
mid) il)m ofenbaren* 

$Benn ein Sbrifit angefangen bat, unb nun in Sbriflo if?, 
gldubet unb lebt in ibm, unb nun ibn lieb bat, fdbet an ju 
prebigen, befennen unb tbun, xva^ cin Sbrijl: urn feineg 
S^errn tDillen tbun foil : fo greiflpet ibn ber 2!eufet an unb 
iiberfdllet ibn mit fold)em 22olrfenbrud), innn>enbig burd) 
Slngfl: unb ?5urd}t, au^n)enbig burd) allerlei) ©efabr unb 
Ungliirf, bag er feinen Zvo]t fiiblet, unb Idgt fid) anfet)ett 
unb fubten,5 af^ fet) @ott broben im ^cin^^tiet, nid)t bep un^, 
unb \)abe unfer t)ergeffen. Xenn er t)erbirget fid) fo gar, 

^ J e d e r m a n n, is in the dative, " every man's heart." 

^Wagt und lasst drCiber, etc. " It ventures and suffers 
(permits) for that purpose (for it) whatever it ought, or can." 

3 L e t z t e. See p 279, iNote 5. 

^Was geniessen sie derselben, etc. " What benefit 
do they derive from it (what do they enjoy of it) ? I will reciprocate 
the act (love them in turn). He who goes forth and shows himself 
a true Christian, will be loved of my Father," etc. 

'Undlasstsichansehen und fa hie n, "and he looks 
on and feels as if," etc. Literally, " allows himself to look at it and 
feel." 



348 SELECTIONS FROM LUTHER. 

ai^ fci) cS axx^ mit un^^ iinb n?ir fcine ^iitfe mef)r Den ihm 
habcn : ba^, wo er ficf) nirf)t erjeigte, nub licflc feine ?iebc 
fpiiren, fo tDiirben tvix t)erjTncfen mib t>erjtt)eifefn, 

2l6er la^t eucf) ba^ nidjt ba^ i?er$ net)men,2 ®enn eg i(l 
nicht a(fo, n)ie tbr ful)fct iinb cud) bi'inrfet ; benn id) babe 
nocf) anbcre unb mel)r 5:^u(fe, bte crfle, anbere lutb britte 
bajn,3 unb wiH end) ben 9?iirfen baUcn,^ ba^ i()r in bcr 9totb, 
barinncn it)r benrfet, ibr b^bt mid) t)er(oren, nid)t foHt Der^ 
fincfen, fonbern trilt^ mad)cn, bag bie 2lnfed)tung, (2d)rerfen 
unb 9totl) bennod) cud) in inir foU^ lajTcn bteibcn nnb noie^^ 
bernm mid) in cndj^ ob ibr^ wot nid)t fo eben fiibfet jn ber 
©tnnbe, n^enn ber !JeufeI xviitct. dv foil end) aber bod) 
nid)t freflcn, fonbern foK nnr eine 2Serfud)nng fei)n, ob^ i()r 
red)t glaubet nnb iiehct. 3ci, id) tr>itt fommen, nnb mid) fo 
offenbaren, bag ibr in ber 9Jnfed)tnng fpiiret bie l}cxtplid}C 
iiebe^ fo bepbe, mein 3Sater nnb id), jn end) baben* 

22» © p r i d) t J n i b ni 5 » b a ^, n i d) t ber 3 f d) a^ 
riotf): iQerr, it)a(^ ijld benn, bag bu nng n>itt(l 
bid) offenbaren, unb nid)t ber 2BeIt? 

Sag i(l fa(lt bie ^rage, aU foUte er fagen : (gotten benn 
n^irg attein fepn, ge(el)rt, ftng, l)ei(ig unb felig ? 2Gad tt)itt 

* Als sey es aus mit uns, "as if it were all over with us." 
See p. 286, Note 1. 

*Euch das Hertz nelimen. See p. 285, Note 1 . 

'Die erste, andere und dritte dazu, "a first, sec- 
ond and third besides," i. e. 1 have more than one expedient ; I can 
resort to another, a second and a third. 

*Euch den Rucken halten, " support, protect or aid 
you." This comes from one's putting his shoulders under another 
and holding him up. 

*Dennoch euch in mir soil, etc. " shall still leave you 
remaining (to remain) in me, and me, in turn, in you," or shall still 
let you remain, etc. 

® Versuchung seyn, ob, "a temptation or trial, [to show] 
whether, etc. 



EXPOSITION OF JOHN FOtJRTEENTH. 349 

He SfQeft baju fagcn ? gotten bciin fo 'oici hccf)ge[el)rter, 
trejf(irf)er, l)ei(i(]er ?cute, ^>rie|'tcr, ^>barifder, unb ber be(le 
^crn be^ gan^eu SSofcf^, u^etcf)e^ bed) ©ottc^ 3[5o(cf l)eigt, 
unb fo met treif(irf)eri 9tnfcben ba6en, benn wir arme S3ett^ 
ler, attjumat nitttg unb i^erbammt fcy)n ? SfBag ffnb mv 
gegen il)nen, bcnn ai^ tauter ni'itt^ ? Setttefl: bu nicf)t beit 
l)ot)en ?euten bicf) off^nbaren, bet) benen ba^ 9iegiment, @e# 
n?a(t, @l)re, unb ba,5u grofi'e 5;^eiligfeit unb ®otte^bien|l ifi^ 
unb ba e^^ >n boflpen n>are, ba^ e^ t)cn jiarteu geben ^Derbe ? 
2Ba^ fottten wiv elenbcu ?ente au^iicf}ten ? ^Ber tpiff un* 
gfauben ober jufatten P SBir iDerben ber (Bad)c Diel ju 
fcf)it>acf) feiin. 

®ac^ id eben bie ^rage, baran fid) nod) atte SiGelt flogt, 
©etebrt, Ungetebrt^ i^eid'ge unb giinber* 503a^ ifl e^ bcuti 
(fprid)!: bte ^^e(t) um^ biefe ueue ^rebigt? 3d) febe ba 
uid)t^ fonber{id)e^ ; ITnb^ bod) eitel i:)erad)tete ?eute, ^cv^ 
faufene S5uben unb 93cttefco(d, fo an ttefer ?ebre b^ngen. 
2Benn fiebefl bu, bag greflfe .^erren, jtonige, gitrRen, 95^ 
fd)5ffe, cttva^ bawn baften ? ^ai i]t ba^ grogte SJrgu^ 
ment unb bie ftcirdfte Urfad), marum unfer ©tjangelium 
nid)t fott red)t fet)n : 3Beun eiS mabr mare, fo bcitte eg 
®ott tt)of anbern ?euteu offenbaret SCarurn fotten^ bie 
l)ot)en 5;)dupter nid)t n^ijTen, bie ba fonnen unb fotten bie 

* Trefflicher is here in the comparative degree undeclined, 
whereas two or three lines above, it is in the positive and genitive 
plural. "Shall then so many (of) very learned, excellent and holy 
persons, priests and Pharisees, and the very flower of the whole peo- 
ple, which is even called God's people, and [who] have so much bet- 
ter standing than we poor beggars, all at once become (be) nothing 
and be condemned ? What are we compared with them but mere 
nothing ?" 

^Und da es, etc. " and where it was to be expected that it 
would all go on well ?" 

^ Z u f a 1 1 e n, which generally means to fall to one^ here means, 
to take ones part, to join one's 'party. 

* Was ist es — um. See p. 247, Note 6. 

30 



350 SELECTIONS FROM LUTHER. 

2Be(t recjferen nub rcformiren ? Sie fofftcn^J tbmt, fo 
nioct)tc c^ t)on flatten gcl)ciu 

23, 24. 3ffn^ antxvoxtctc unb fpracf) ju 
i I) m : 553 c r in i d) t i e b e t, b e r ti? i r b me in 2B o r t 
^ a 1 1 e 11, n n b m e i n SS a t e r n) i r b i b n H e 6 e n, 
n n b tv i r n> c r b e n J u i b m f o m m c n u n b 58 c 1)^ 
itung be I) il)m mad) en. 5!Ber aber mid) nid)t 
( i e b e t, b e r t) d f t m e i n e 5B o r t e n i d) t. 

?ieber "^n^^a^ Ovili er fagen), biefe (Zad)e ijl alfo getf)an, 
ba^ man nid)t mng fragen ; ob ^onig, ^ai)fer, Saipba^ 
ober ^erobe^, ge(el)rt nnb ungetebrt fci), fonbern cb id)g 
fei) ? 2^ad ijT- bie 2{nttt)ert auf bie grage. 3" t*it'fer ^re^^ 
bigt unb 9?egiment, ba^ id) \mii anfaben fcU mir g(eid) gef^ 
ten,2 \va^ in ber 5Be(t ijl, einer n>ie ber anbere, id) tr>i(( fei^ 
iten au^fonbern, nod) an^mablen. 3" ber ^Belt Dtegiment 
miijyen vdoI foId)e Unterfd)iebe fei>n bcr^erfonen nnb Stdn^ 
be : ein Stnc&it tann nid)t .s^err fei)n, ber Joerr mn^ nid)t 
jtned)t, ber (2d)ufer nid)t 5S)tcitler fei)n, nnb a(fi> fort ; aber 
bamit babe id) nid)t^i jn tbnn, nnb gebet mid) nid)td an. 
5d) aber )mli ein fold) Diegiment nnrid)ten, barinne tt>ir alle 
fcKen g(eid) gelten. (5in ^tonig, ber bent geboren nnb ein 
Syvv i\l iibcr mi S^ani nnb l^ente, ber foil cbcn fon^of frie^ 
d)en in meine :Tanfe nnb (Td) mir ergeben, atd ein armer 
S3ett(er, nnb unebernm foil biefcr ebcn fou>of bai^ Simngefi^ 
nm bin-en prebigcn, ober bie Sacramente enipfaben nnb 
felig iDerben, aU jener. 3((fo wiii er bie l^ente alljnmaf 

* Also gethan, so ronstitutedj or so managed. — Sonde rn 

b i c li 8 soy, " but whether it is 1 [that am concerned in it]. 

* S o 1 1 mir g 1 e i c h ij o 1 t e n, etc. " it wiH be to me in- 
different whnt there is in the world [as opposed to my kingdom] one 
person as well uh another [one will pass for no more than the other] ; 

1 will s<*parate and sift out mf)re," i. e. my religion is destined for 
all indiscriminately, and favors no particular classes, as the world 
does. 



EXPOSITION OF JOHN FOURTEENTH. 351 

gfeicf) itub ©nen ,^uci)en ivaxx^ macf}cn/ bag e^ ciit anber 
2Scfen fei), bcnit bie 2BeIt, fiibrct, n)e(rf)e mug ba^ Sbre 
and) habcn iinb bebaften, unb SbviftiK^ (dgt and) geben unb 
bleibcn ; aber er i(l nicbt barum ba, bag er fotrf) 2Se[treid), 
fonbent ciu §imme(reid) anrtrf)te^ 

Sarum anttt)ortet er alfo bem Jfpoftet 3wbd : (g^ wivb 
nid)t bavan licgcn,^ ma^ bie ^iSelt 1)1:, fonbern barauf ftebet^, 
bag id) bir gefagt bvibe, id) motle mid) bit ofiTenbareu unb 
beueu, fo mid) Ucb, babcu ; nid)t^ bcr cine bret)fad)e gitfbeue 
Sroue ober fd)arladeu 3?ecf trcigt, uid)t, n)er ebef, mad)ttg, 
ftarcf, reid), gclebrt, n^cife, f(ug unb beifig t)eigt, fonbern, 
n)er mid) (ieb bat, Oott gebe,^ er l)eijfe ^onig, §iirfi, ^abfi, 
S3ifd)off, >priefl:er, J^cctor, ^a^e, 5;^err ober ^ned)t, ffein 
ober grog ; in meimm 3?eid) foil atter fofd)cr Unterfd)ieb 
auf boren* 

Unb mcin 2?ater n^irb tfjn {feben. 
2)a^ i|l^, ba^ wr nun oft gef)oret baben, bag Sbriftu^ 
mit t)obem ^(ei)^ immer ung I)inauf geud)t jum Sater, m^ 
ber bie (eibigen ©ebanrfen/ fo Sbrijium t)om Sater fd^eiben 
unb bem ^er^en einbifben : Db id) mot an gt)rijltum gfdube, 
^er mag aber, ob mir ber Sater gndbig ijl ? Sarum mitt 
er uni5 immer in be^ 2?ater^ i^er^ fiibren, bag wiv nid)t^ 
forgen nod) fi'trd)ten fotten, fo tmr attein ibn iich baben, unb 
\mit an^ bem ^er^en merfen unb reiffen alien 3*^^^ unb 
®d)recfen* 

* Gleich und Einen Kuchen draus machen, "make 
them alike, and make one batch out of them." See p. 324, Note 1. 

^Es wird nichtdaran liege n, etc, " it will not de-, 
pend on what the world is, but it rests upon this [principle, viz.] that 
1 have said to you (or, as I have said to you)," etc. 

3 Gott gebe, Gr>£^oT«?ii, i. e, " whether, in the providence of God, 
it be king," etc. 

* Wider die leidigen Gedancken, etc. " against the 
wicked thoughts which separate Christ from the Father, and frame 
in the heart [the question] though I believe," etc. 



852 SELECTIONS FROM LUTHER. 

Unb l)ie6et) (fprid[)t er meitcr) fet( eg nuf)t b(ei6en,i bafi 
Id} nnb ber SSatcr ibn lieb baben, ber ba nn'cf) lic6ct, fon^ 
b e r n, rviv ti) o H e n j ii i I) in f o m m en nnb ^iSo\) n^ 
ung bet} il)m mad) en ic: ba^ er nict)t aUcin fott ffi? 
cf)er fei)n wy bem jnfiinftiflcn B^^^"/ !£enfef, ^eb, Sylk nnb 
allem llngliicf, fonbern fott and) bier anf ©rben nn^ bet) 
i[)m tx>obnenb baben, nnb n^otlen- tag(id) feine ©djie, ja 
^an^^ nnb :tifd)geno|yen fey;n. 

24* SOB e r mid) a b e r n i d) t lieict^ b e r b d f t 
meine 2Qerte nid)t 

^jier bail bn tnvi} bie Sfficft abgemal)(et nnb befd)rieben/ 
n)ag H)xex 2irt i(l, nnb ma^ Don ibr jn batten ill, nemlidj' 
ba^ fie (SbriRum nid)t fann nod) mH iicb t)aben, nod) feine 
SBorte l)a(ten* 

24. Unbba^SGort, bag if)r boret, i|lnid)t 
mein, fonbern beg aSaterg, ber mid) gefanbt 

r>at. 

SGBie fann bod) ber gSJtann alfo reben ? 5;^arte jnt)or3 {)at 
er gefagt : 2Ger mein 5Cort \)at nnb bdlt k*, nnb je^t 
fprid)t er : 9}teine 5\5orte f[nb nid)t mein, fonbern meineg 
Saterg. SBie f[nb eg benn sngteid) feine nnb nid)t feine 
SBorte ? @g i|l aber immer, bag^ er ffd) flei^iget, ber 

* Hiebey soil es nicht bleiben, "it shaH not stop with 
this." 

* U n d ["w i r] w o 1 I e n. 

*Harte zavor, jusf. btjore. Compare the phrase, hard by. 

* E s i 8 t aber i m tn e r d a s s, ** It is always the case that 
he takes pains (or, he always takes pains) to speak in such a manner 
(in the manner) that he may draw us to himself, and when he haa 
drawn us to himself, then he flies (pass<*s instantly) to the Father, so 
ihit whi'U we heir him speak, we learn immediately to say [to our- 
Belvcs], * The Father says that to me throutrh Christ ;' and [learn 
hence] to derive comfort, joy and love to him, so that [he can say] 
there is no other word of God to me or respecting me in heaven, 



EXPOSITION OF JOHN FOURTEENTH. 353 

2Beife ju rcfccu, ha^ er un^ erfflicf) ju jTcf) brutge, unb fo tt)ir 
ju ibm gebrad)t jTnb^ barnacf) flu{^^ jum aSatcr jeucf)t, ba^, 
VDcnn tt)ir iini Imcxi rebeu, at^batb [enteit fagcu : Sa^ res^ 
bet ber aSatcr burd) bicfcn (5l)n)lum ju mir ! unb ben "Xxoft/ 
greube imb ?iebc gcgen il)m fcf)6pfcn, bag fein anbcr ^ISovt 
®ottc^ jit mir ober i)on ntir tm ioimmcl i(l, unb and) bte 
@nge( fein an^cvi l)5reit, benn bag Sbriflitg mit mir rebet 
Sarum i|Ig gfeid) fo Dtef/ bag er fagt : 28er mein 2Qott 
\)att^ unb : 2)ie 2Qorte, fo id) rebe, finb nicf)t mein, fonbern 
beg aSaterg* 2)enn fie gehen nicf)t Don mir, unb id) bin 
nid)t ber Stnfang beg $Gortg ; fonbern ber Sater hat mirg 
befoMen unb midb gebeij]en, ia^ niemanb foil jn)eifeln ober 
fagen : 3ci, Sbriftug prebiget n)o( fitjfe unb fein, tt>er wzi^ 
aber, tt)ag ber aSater broben fagt ? @r trojlet mid) n?o(, 
bag er mid) lich Ijahc^ unb fid) mir offenbaren unb bet) mir 
n)o[)nen mU ic. 3^/ ^^nn eg gevt^ig tiodre ? SGBenn id)g 
t^om aSater fetbft borte, t)om §imme( berab. 9tein (fprid)t 
er), beg barfll: bu md)t,'^ unb n)iirbeft t^ergebfid) barnad) 
gajfen, fonbern foHjl: beg gemig fei)n, bag ber aSater im £^im^ 
met tciix anber SOBort rebet, benn bag bu aug meinem 
SUJnnbe borejlt, alfo, bag eg n)abrbaftig nid)t mein, fonbern 
beg aSaterg 2Bort iji unb beiffet 

25,26* © f d) e g b ct b e id) j u end) g e r e b t, n) e i f 
id) bet) end) gemefen bin* Slber ber Xrofler, 
ber ^eilige ®eijl:, n)eld)en mein aSater fenb^? 
en n)irb in meinem Xiamen, ber fe I big e tt)irbg 
end) atteg lebren, unb end) erinuernaCeg 
beg, bag id) cndj gefagt l)abe. 

even the angels hear no other than what (das for was) Christ 
speaks to (with) me." 

^ Darum ists gleich so viel, etc. " So much is implied 
when he says, ' He who keeps my word,' and, * The words,' " etc^ 

^Dess darfstdanicht. *' That you do not need." D e s s 
gewiss, " sure of this." 

30* 



354 SELECTIONS FROM LUTHER. 

Qv diet jam S3efcf)fu0, bag er rvitt aufflehen unb baDcu 
get)eit ju feinem ?ciben ; bcnii big bat er aUeg necf) iibcr 
?i;ifcf) gcrebt* 3^) l)^£>^ ^ncf) met @ute6 9<*f^g^ fpnrf)t er, 
end) ju troflen unb ^n lltarcfen, bag ibr foUet unt)erjagt fei)u 
tinb end) ind)t betriiben meine^ 2lbfcf)eibcn^. ?tiin ba^ jKnb 
fodte 3{ebe unb 2Bort, bie i()r mol luit ben Dt)ren boret, 
n)ei( tcf) gegentDdrtig bin ; aber jTe jTnb end) nccf) ju l)ecf), 
iinb n>erbetk> bod) nid}t ^erftehen, t^enn ibr mid) febet t)en 
end) genommen, ba trirb^ bali aii^ unb tjergeflen fepn, rt>ai 
id) jel^t end) fage unb trojle. ^ernad) aber, n^enn ba foniJ? 
nten n)irb ber JtroRer, ben id) end) t)erl)eijTen l)abe, ber folt^ 
tnd) fein febrcn, bag ibr^ mobi Der(lel)et unb end) beg allei^ 
crinnern fonner, voa^ id) end) gefagt babe, ©onfl wiirbe 
id)i umfon(l gerebt l)aben, unb itjr aiie^ Dergeflfen, ai^ be^ 
tten eg je^t nid)t jn 5;^er^en gebet, unb nid)t fonnen begreif^ 
fen> Senn ibr fei)b nod) ju fd)n)ad) t)on S^^^fd) ^^^^^ 53f^^^ 
faj]et md)t(J me()r bauon, benn bag ibr^ mit D[)ren boret ; 
barum mug ber ^eilige @ei(l fommen, ber eg end) ing i?er$ 
briicfe unb weife burd) (Srfabrung, bag i()r Derpel)et, \vai 
id) gemepnet, unb icn J^rojl empfa()et unb fiil)fet, fo ic^ 
end) gegeben t^ahe. 

27. Sen grieben laffe id) end), me in en 
^riebeu gebe id) end); nid)t gebe id) end), 
loiebieSBeltgibt. 

Sad i|l nun cin febr tr6(l(id) unb fiebfid) ?e^emort, bag 
er il)nen (agt nid)t Stabte unb Sd)Io|Ter, nod) ©ifber unb 
©o(b, fonbern ben (5rieben,a(6ben bod)iTen ^d)a^ im .^im^ 
me( unb (Srben, bag |Te fein Sd)rerfen nod) ^Cranren follen 
IJon ibm baben, fonbern red)tenfd)onen,gett>rinfd)ten '^xic'oe 
(m 5;?erl)cn. X^aux fo mef, al6 an mir i)i, (fprid)t er,) 
fottt il)r nid)tg anberg baben, benn eitef ^^riebe unb Jvtenbe. 
Denn atfo babe id) end) geprebiget, unb bin mit end) affo 
iimgegangen, bag il)r gefel)en unb erfannt Ijabt, bag id) end) 



EXPOSITION OF JOHN FOURTEENTH. 355 

t)on S)cxi}en lich i^aie unb affeg ®nte& thue, unb meitt aSa^ 
ter end) mit attcn ©naten mepiiet. 2^a^ tfl ba^ befte, fo 
id) end) faflfen unb geben faun. S^cnu ba^ ifl ber l)6d)fie 
J^riebe, n)enn ia6 S>cxis jufrieben ifl, n)ie man fagt : ^er^^ 
tien^freube i]t iiber alle grcnbe, unb mieberum : ^ergeleib 
ijl iiber atte^ ?eib. 

@iS 1)1: uid)t^ mit ber ^inber^ unb 3^arrcnfreube wn 
fd)onen ^{cibern, ©efbjahlen, 5Bof)fu)T:, unb 95n6crei) ; benn 
biefetbige greube mcif^ret eincn 3(ugenb(irf, unb bkibet bod) 
ba^ inerl$ ungctDig unb in Unfrieben ober (Sorgen. 2^enn 
e^ faun nid)t fagen, bag e^ einen gndbigen ®ott babe, \)at 
immer eiu bofe^ ©ewifieu, ober l)at eine fa(fd)e ^ojfnung, 
bte bod) jtt)etfe(t : bag e^ bod) immer bleibet in Unfriebe 
xiub Unrube, t)om Xenfet getrieben, ob jTe e^ g(eid) jegt nid)t 
fiiblen in ibrer toffen SSeltfreube, fo jinbet jTd)^ bod), tt>enn 
ba^ ©ti'tnbfein fommt, ba^ ber Unfriebe angebet. Sarum 
babt it)r ja nid)t^ mei)r ju flagen, id) (afle end) ben treff^ 
{id)en, ^oben ^djai^^ ia^ i()r fount l)aben cin gut, fein, 
frieb(id) £^er!3 gegen ®ott unb mir ; benn id) fafle eud^ bie 
iiehe unb greunbfd)aft meine^ aSater^ unb meine,i n)ie i^r 
nid)td anber^ an mir gefeben unb get)6ret ^abt, benn (iebi^ 
fid)e, freunb(id)e SBorte unb 2Berde, unb biefelbige uid)t 
mein, fonbern be^ 2Sater^ finb ; barum babt ibr atte^, tva^ 
ibr t)on mir begebren moget, ob id) gfeid) wn end) ge^e, unb 
it)r mid) nid)t mebr fet)et* 

28. (Sue r $)er^ erfd)rede uid)t unb furd)^ 
tef[d)nid)t. 3br l^abt ge()o ret, bag id) end) 
gefagtt)abe:3c{)ge^e bin unb fomme toie^ 
ber ju end). 

Sa befd)feugt er eben^ me er erftfid) biefe ^Vebigt angers 
fangen t)at, unb n^itt fagen : iCeil id) nun t)on end) fd)eiben 

^ M e i n e, etc. " my (as you have seen in me and heard no other 
than) affectionate and friendly words and works." This is harsh, 
and hardly bears a literal translation. 



356 SELECTIONS FROM LUTHER. 

mu^, unb nid)t famt anber^ fet)n, benn bag if)r urn mcinetiJ 
tv\iV:n nxn\)et in bcr 2i?e(t llnfriebeu l)aben, bap end) bcr 
^eufcl mit fciucm SJiibang bajjct, Dcrfefc]ct nub plagt : fo 
riiilct end) bajit, bag ibr bariim iurf)t crfd)rccfet ncd) t)er^ 
^ac^t^ fonbcru gctroft unb gute^ ^Rntl)^ fci)b, n)ie id) end) 
anfan^qfid) unb bi^l)er t)ermabnet I)afcc burd) inand)er{ei) 
trofHid)c unb l)crr(id)e aSerl)eigun(5, unb fo incl (gtitcfe ctJ^ 
jel)Ict, bie end) biUig fottcu fret>Hd) unb unt)crjagt inad}cn, 
'Oaf; ibr bci^ gcringen gKangef^ (bag id) leib(id) t^on end) 
gebe, item, t)a$ ibr miilTet in ber 5ffielt duger(id) ?cibcu l)a^ 
ben,) tt)oh( unb iiberreid)(id^ ergol^et tDerbet* ia^t end) uur 
ia^ nid)t erfd)rerfen, ob ibr feben n>erbet mid) fo fd)anblid) 
unb jdmmerfid) gecreulsiget, unb i()r i)crflreuet unb in gro^ 
gem @(enbunb Summer fepn wcxbct wv ber UBeft unb eur^ 
em ^iibfen nad) ; e^ fott nid)t fo bb\e fei)n, al^ [\d)^ Idgt 
anfeben* S^enn fe(d)er dugerlid)er 3animer unb 83etriib^ 
nig, SSerfofgnug unb ^Magen, foil nid)t en>ig mdbren, nod) 
itct^ bleiben ; benn idf mitt tDieber ju end) fommeu unb end) 
erfreuen, bepbe, (eibtid) unb gei|llid). 

28, 29. § ci 1 1 e t i () r m i d) I i e b, f o m ii r b e t i I) r 
end) freuen, bag id) gefagt I) a be, id) gebe 
J u m 33 a t e r ; benn ber 25 a t e r i}t g r 6 g e r, benn 
id). Unb nun babe id)^ end) gefagt, ebe benn 
e ^ g e f d) i e b t, a u f b a g, ti) e u u e ^ nun g e f d) c ^ c ti 
\v i r b, b a g i 1) r g I a u b e t. 

I^aii i|T and) ein trofttid^er ^n^ai}. 5l'ai^ wolU ibr end) 
befiimmern meineti ^IBeggebcnc^ ? !j>br foKt end) inelmebr 
freuen. I'enn \w gebe id) bin ? 9iid)t in bie ^;Ni>ffe, fon^ 
bern jnm "Jsater, in bai^ berrtidK, cMnc\c dicid)^ unb tbue ed 
end) ju gnte, ta\\ id) and) end) jur >>cr(id)feit bringe. J^ar^? 
um, 1V0 id) nid)t n>eggeben u>ollte, fo foUt ibr mid) baju baf^ 
ten unb treiben, unb end) baju freuen unb guter ^'inge fet)n, 
bag id)^ uur ba(b tbdte. 



EXPOSITION OF JOHN FOURTEENTH. 357 

a^ i}i aber e6en a(fo gcrebt, aU unter fcenen, bte itngerne 
Don ciitauber fcf)eit)en, al(^, aSater, ?D?utter unb ^inb, 5)?antt 
itnb 21>ei6 2c» 2J(^ ba einer jum vanbern fagte, ben er urn 
be^ g'oangetii ti^ittcn i^erfajTen mu^te : ?ieber ®obn ober 
SSater, 5[)?ann ober SBeib, id) l)dtte bicf) n)ot gerne bei) mir 
bier ; aber bit bill getauft unb berujfen jum @t)ange(io» 
2Bo(au, fann e^ nicbt anber^ fet)n, fo faf)re l)in in ®otteg 
gftameu ; fonnen n)ir un^ l)ier nicf)t mebr febeit, fo feben 
nnr nwS in jcnem ?eben- Sfber, wet fann fo(c{)e^ tbun ? 
X^ie tbnncnS rt>of, bie ibre ^inber ober 55^^unbe l^aflen, aber 
nid)t bic, fo ftrf) untereinanber tiebcn. 

Unb jmar befeuuet er bier felbjl, ia^ er ni(f)t gerne t)on 
ibnen frf)eibet, unb ffe and) nidjt gerne t)on ibm, nnb ntiiflen 
fd) bod) untereinanber laffen. Sarum rebet er, gfeid) mie 
ein SSater ju feinen ^inbern : 3cf) fafle end) n)oI nid)t gerne ; 
aber wcil e^ fei)n mug, fo gebet end) jufrieben, nnb trojlet 
end) beg, bag it)r n^iffet, n)o id) binfabre* i:}enn id) fomme 
nid)t in Stob, nod) jur §offe, fonbern in meine^ aSaterg 
©d)oo^ unb fHicid), bag id) end) and) babin bringe, ba tf)r 
foltt tro^t fei)n* 2)arum fottet il)r end) ja freuen meine^ 
@eiy n^* ©enn e^ iit nid)t ein fofd) ®d)eiben, bag id) en^ig 
t)on end) bleiben fottte, fonbern, bei)be, euer unb mein SSefle^, 
me er bernad) im 16. Sapitef, 7. and) fagt : d^ ijl end) gut, 
bag id) t)on end) gebe. 2)enn e^ i(l end) bod) eine gett)iffe, 
e\t)ige ^t'eube, 5;\errfid)feit unb mdd)tig ^eid) beftellet, ia^n 
ibr fonil nid)t fommen fonntet. 

£)a^ ijl^, bag er fprid)t: 3d)ge^ejum aSater. 
2)enn, jum aSater gel)en, l)eigt nid)t^ anber^, benn au^ bie^* 
fern jlerbnd)en ?eben, (barinne id) {)abe bent aSater unb end) 
gebienet, geniebrieget unter aUen ?i}?enfd)en,) ba^ ill, an^ 
bem Sammertbaf unb ©efcingnig gegangen, in ba^ f)errfid)e, 
l)imm(id)e Sd)Iog unb ewige, gottIid)e 2Sobnung, ba id) xe^ 
gieren merbe jur ^ed)ten be^ aSater^, unb ein Syxv fet)tt 
liber alle^, Moa^ im S^immel unb auf (grben ift, toeidje^ id) 



358 SELECTIONS FROM LUTHER. 

nicht fann tbmi in bicfcm I^icnftbanfe unb fncrf}t(ic{)en 9Gcjj 
fen ; id) mn^ jnDor meincn Dicnft aui^ricbtcn, nnb mein 
!l^cbcn baran fcl^en* Sarnm \\l n\d)t bcjfer, benn je ebe jc 
belJer batmen ,qcgangcn, bag id) gecrcnljiget tverbe, nnb bar^^ 
nad) i)erfiarc(-, bamit ber S)cH\Qe (3e\]t gefanbt, nnb fnnb 
n)crbc, baf5 id) mid) jnr Dtcd)ten be^ aSater^ gefcfetnnb mein 
dlcid) cingcnomnien \)abc. X^a^ fottte ener Xvoil unb 
grcnfce fci)n, nnb fottet^, bei)be, mix nnb end) gerne gonnen, 
n)enn ihr^ t)er(liinbet nnb mid) t)oUf5mm(id) lieb bdttet, ^t^ie 
ibr bernad) (ernen merbet* £enn id) end) barnm jelst [ofj? 
d)ei^ jnt)or fage, bag tbr^ b^niad) affo crfabret nnb felbjl 
innen merbet, bag e^ bie 2I?abrI)cit i)T, nnb id)^ txcniid) unb 
^erlslicf) mit end) gemei)net babe. 

I^eg fel^t er nun Uvfad)e, nnb fprid)t : S e n n ber ^a^ 
tev i\t g r 6 f f e r, benn id). 2K^ tt>oI(te er fagen : I^a^ 
foil and) ein groffer $tro(lt fei)n, bag id) fomme in bag groflfc 
Dteid) meineg 3Saterg, ba id) wcxbc regieren, gleid) bem 3Sa^ 
ter, in en)iger i^errfd)aft iiber alle Sreatnren k. 

aSon feiner 2Serfldrnng rebet er, bai^ ijlt t>on bem d^cid)C^ 
babin er gebet, an^ biefem S^ienjlbanfe, bag er feine gottlid) 
allmad)tige ©emalt nnb Syxx^djaft, mld)c er \)at mit bem 
aSater wn Smigfeir, offenbarlid) einnebme, n>eld)ed er ic1}t 
nid)t fann tbnn nad) nnb in fcincm fned)tlid)en 5lmtc, tt>eil 
er gefanbt \v>ax in ben 2)ienfl nnb S^emntb, barinne er fid) 
aller feiner gortlid)en 5';^errlid)feit gednffert, (n^ie St ^^ant^ 
n^:^, ^^bi[ipp. 2. 7, fagt,) nnb eineii .ft'ned)te(^ &c^aU an f[d) 
gcnommen : bag er bemfelben nad) nid)t allein fleiner ijl, 
benn ber -Satcx, fonbern and) geniebriget nnter alien 5D?en^ 
^d)cn. Vcixnm mollte ftd)i^ nid)t reimen, bag er ffd) feiner 
5;Nerr(id)feit annebme, ebe nnb jut>er er fold) fned)tlid) 3lmt 
an5:^gerid)tet batte. 5l(fo i{lS wn feinem gegenmdrtigen 
?lmte, fo er jclU anf grben fiibrete, red)t gerebet: I^er 
aSater i\t groiJer, benn id), u>eil id) jcl5t ein Stncd)t bin ; 
aber, wcnn id) mieber bortl)in fomme, jn meinem aSater, ba 



EXPOSITION OF JOHN FOURTEENTH. 359 

Yocxhc id) grojfer tDcrben, ttemfirf) fo grofi, aU ber SSater i^^ 
ba^ i)"t^ id) wcvic in glcid)ev ©etmift uub yKajcftcit mit ihm 
l)evx\d)cn. 

(Boldje^ \^ahc id) end) gefagt, (fprict)t er,) 
el)e,beun c^ gcfct)tef) t, auf ba^, n>enn e^ 
nun gefd)et)en it>irb, bag ibr g (an bet. 2^a 
mei)net er nid)t atteiu big te^te ©tiirf, fonbern, n)a^ er bnrd) 
ba^ gang Sapitet gerebet bat^ at^, bag er will ibnen bie 
3Bot)nung bereiten, item, bag ber Zvb^lev fcK ju ihnen fom^ 
men, unb (gr famt bem SSater trieber ju ibnen fommen n)ill. 
X)a^ fage id) end) n>D( jefeunb ;i aber ibr tJerflebet^ jefet 
nid)t* 2)od) fage id)^ end) barnm, bag, n^enn eg nun fo 
gefd)iebt, bag ibr al^benn juriicfe bendet r^ ©iebe, feld)eg 
bat er ung atfeg juDorgefagt, ba er t)on un^ fd)eiben \r)oU^ 
te ; ba ffnb Xdiv tine tie ©tocfe gefejfeu, betritbt unb er^ 
fd)roden, unb baben nid)tg ba^cn Derjlanben. 9cun aber fe^? 
ben unb greiffen tinr, n>ag er gemci)uet bat ic. 9(Ifo n)er5J 
bet it)r benn gtduben, (fprid)t er,) ob ibr U)o( mid) nid)t 
mebr febet, famt ber gangen St)ri)lenl)eit bi^ an ben Siing^ 
ften ZaQ. 

30, 31. 3 d) n) e r b e fort m e b r n i d) t t) i e f m i t 
end) reben; benn eg fommt ber gitrft biefer 
28e{t, unb \)at nid)tg an mir. ?J(ber, auf 
bag bie ^iBelt erfenne, bag id) ben SSater lie^^ 
be, unb affo t^ue, tt)ie mirberSSatergebo^^ 
ten hat: fle^et auf, unb (agtungt)onI)ini^ 
nen get)en. 

Sie 3^it ill bier, bag id) batmen mug,^ unb big iflt bie fefete 
^IJrebigt, bie id) tbue. Senn ber !J!eufe( fommt, unb geuAt 
baber mit 3uba uub feinem 5;^aufeu, unb n)il( an mid) unb 

^ J e t z u n d obsolete for j e t z t. 

^Zuriicke dencket, " call to mind [and say]." 

"* D a V o n muss, " must [go] away." 



860 SELECTIONS FROM LUTHER. 

ba^ ©einei aitgrirf)ten. 3rf) mn^ it)m fjer^alten, unb ijl 
bofe imb jornig, er met)net, mid) ju freffen ; abex e^ fed 
it)m fo gcratf)en, bag e^ ibm fofl ben aSaud) jureijTcn* 
25enn er t)at fein 5Kecf)t ned) (2d)ulb an mir, id) \)abe eg 
nid)t t)erbienet, nnb bod) an^^ 6cfcm, gtfftigem 5;^ag mid) an^^ 
greiffet nnb tDiirget ; er fot( eg bejablen. I^rdnet^ alfo bent 
J^enfef l)eimfid) mit fd)eefen 5(ngen, <Td) fclbjl: jn jlcirden 
n^iber feinen bittern S^^V ^"^ ^^^ Sanger jn trotlen {vok^ 
n)ol jTe eg nod) nid)t t)erflel)en)* 2((g [ottte er fagen : 
""Siioian fomm l)er, nnb t)erfnd)e, it)ag bn fanft, frig nnb 
n)iirge, n>ie bn n^ittjl. 3Iber bn foHfl an bem SSigfein^ ju 
fvinen nnb jn fd)Iingen f)aben, bag bn ba^on ern^iirgen 
mngt* 3d) rvill bir tt>ieber ang bem S5and)e reiflfen, bag bn 
mngt mid) nnb "oicl mebr, bie bn gefrejTcn baft, tt>ieber faf^ 
fen. Unb bag id) fofd)eg feibe, tbne id) nid)t barnm, alg 
voire id) bem 2!enfel nid)t ftard genng, ben id) oft angge^ 
tDorfcn nnb t)ertrieben l)abe, fonbern barnm, bag eg fo{f 
fnnb werben in ber 2BeIt, bag id) meinem SSater geborfam 
bin, nnb bag man an mir febe nnb erfat)re tci SSaterg 2Bi(^ 
ten, bag id) end) bnrd) mein 53Int nnb Xob crlofen foK. 

3J((fo troftet nnb ermabnet er fid) fefbft n^iber ben feibigen 
S!enfe{. S^enn eg gebet ibm nnn nntcr bie 2(ngen, nnb be^ 
ginnet bag 5jer§ jn trejfen, bag er fo gar jcimmerlid) foil 
l)erta|fen fcpn, geldflert nnb anfg fd)anblid)fte gcbanbelt 
tt)erben ; aber eg fd)abet nid)t. ?ag nnr bergeben, n>eif eg 
ber SSater witt, bag ber !J!enfcI foH iibenvnnben nnb ge^ 
fd)n)ad)t n)erben, nid)t bnrd) 5)?ad)t nnb ^raft nnb berrlid)e 
5Bnnbertbat, wic jnDor bnrd) mid) gefd)eben if?, fonbern 
bnrd) P^eborfam nnb T'emntb, in ber bod)f?en ^d)n)ad)beit, 
Sren(j nnb J^ob : bag id) mid) nnter ibm xvcvfc nnb mein 

* A n in i c h u n d dad S e i n o, "do his work on nie." 
' D r a u e t. "He thus Ihrealens Satnn slily with Icoring eyes," etc. 
^ A n d o m B i s s 1 e i n, etc. ** But you shall have in the mor- 
sel something to chew." Biss, bit. Bisslein is a diminutive of 
this. 



COMMENT ON PSALM 118:1. S64 

9tccf)t unb ?[Racf)t fasten (afle, abcv eben bafcurcf) alfe feitt 
?ftcd)t mi) SO?ad)t ihm n>ieber abfct)(age unb getDtnue, ba^ er 
and) an end) fein $)ied)t unb SD?acf)t [)a&e, n)ei( cr mid) ot)nc 
atte ©d)u(b mtgreifet unb ermorbet, unb af^benn t)or mir 
mn^ xveid)m unb fiteben, fo n^eit bie 2BeIt t|l, buret) feine 
eigene @cf)u(b Dcrurtl)ei(t unb i)erbammt» X)a^ fctt a(d:? 
benn in alter 2Be[t geprebiget unb offenbar tr^erben, ba^ id) 
fofd)e^ getban t)a6e, nid)t au^ Unfraft cber D()nmad)t, fou^ 
bern an^ ©et)orfam be^ SSater^, ben S^eufel affo ju xiber^ 
mtnben, bag baburd) feine (gbre, bei)be, feiner gottItd)en 
©nabe nnh ®iite gegen un^, unb feiner at(mad)tigen @e^ 
tt)a(t miber ben S^eufef, gepreifet unb au^gebreitet, unb bie 
S^riflen baburd) getreftet unb geftdrdet, unb a(fo beg Xen^ 
fe(g 3iieid) gan^ unb gar jerpret n)erbe. ?Iinen» 



COMMENT ON PSALM 118, V. 1. 

Sanfet bem §errn, benn er ifl freuublid) 
nnb feine ©itte wat)xct en)iglid). 

£;iefer SSer^ ift eine gemeine Sanffagung fiir atte 3Bcl)f^ 
t^at, fo ®ott ber §err erjeigt alter SBeft tdgtid) of)ne Unter^ 
fag, in alien 2)ingen, beibe guten unb bofen SO?enfd)en* Senu 
bag ijl: ber l)ei(igen ^ropl)eten 2Beife, menu ffe @ott in fon^ 
berfid)en Singen (oben unb banfen n)otten,fo fangen fte i)od) 
an unb ^ofen eg n)eit, foben il)n jug(eid) ingemein, in aUeu 
fenten SBunbern unb S[8ob[tf)aten. Sttfo ()te, n)eit biefer 
^falm fonberlid) @ott tobt urn bie bod)(le 9[Bof)rt^at, ber 
5BeIt erjeiget, ndm(id) nm S^rifltum unb fein ^eid) ber 
®nabe, ber SBett i)ert)eigeu unb jel^t erjeiget, fdngt er an 
mit gemeinem ?obe unb fprid)t : X^anfet bem §errn : benn 
er ijl: ja bod) ein l)erjfid)er, gndbiger, frommer, giitiger ®ott, 
31^ 



862 SELECTIONS FROM LUTHER. 

ber tmmer imb immer tDobftbut itnb eiuc ©iite iiber h'e an^ 
bere niit ^anfeit iibev un^ aii^fd)uttct* 

Scnn bu mii^t biefe Sffiorte : ^fremiblicf)" iinb „feine 
©iite'^, nid)t fo faft unb rol) lefen, nod) bariiberf)in faufen, 
n)ie bie Jtonnen ben ^fatter lefen, eber xvk bie gl)orI)erren 
unb (5borfd)u{er foIrf)e feine 2Borte Ubden unb l}enfen in 
il)ren ^ird)en, fonbern benfen, ba^ c^ lebenbige, tren(id)c 
xutb reic()e SOBorte jTnb, bie 2(tte^ nnb SJlIe^ fciffen nnb ein^ 
bit6en, ndm(id) ba^ @ott frennbfid) ifl, nicf)t mc ein50?e n fd), 
fonbern ber t)on ©rnnb feine^ ^jerjen^ S^^^^igt nnb gnnjlig 
tjl, immer ju beffen nnb n^obfjnthnn, nnb nirf)t gerne jiirnt 
nod) flraft, er miigte c^ benn^ tl)nn, nnb n)erbe iibert)anj.it 
bajn gejtt>nngen nnb gebrnngen bnrd) nnab(d^(id)e, nnbng^ 
fertige nnb t)er(lodte a3o^l)eit ber 5)?enfd)en, bag, wo er jiir^ 
nen mng nnb jlrafen, ba Bnnte ein QJJenfd) nid)t fo fange 
!)arren, fonbern ftrafte l)nnberttanfenbmal el)er nnb Ijarter, 
benn er tbnt 

Unb foId)e frennbfid)e nnb gndbige ®nn|l bewciit er iiber 
atte 9!}iaagen reid)(id) nnb gen^altigfid), mit fciner tdgtid^en 
unb emigen @iite ; mc er bier fprid)t : (Seine Oiite mdbret 
ewigtid), bag i(l : ol)ne unterfag tl)nt er nniS immer bag 
aSefle, fd)aflFt nng ?eib nnb ©eele, bebiitet nng !j:ag nnb 
?tad)t, erbdft nng obne Unterlag bei'm IVben, (dfu Sonne 
unb ^loni nng fd)einen, nnb ben .^immef, gener, ?nft nnb 
SGBajfer nng bienen, ang ber @rbe 2!Bein, ^orn, gutter, 
©peife, ^(eiber, S^ol^ nnb aCe gtotbbnrft n>ad)fen, giebt 
®o(b nnb ©iiber, ^;^ang nnb .^of, SOBcib nnb jtinb, SBieb, 
SSogel, gifd)e, ©nmma, n>er fann eg Sllteg erjdbten ? lint 
bief} 3(Heg bie 5^iiUe- nnb iiberfd)U\ing[id) allc ^s^bre, alU 
XaQQ, alte ©tnnben, al(e 5(ngenb[ide» I^enn roer fann ah 
lein bie ©iite red)nen, bag er @inem giebt nnb erbdft ein 
gefnnbeg Singe ober 5?anb ? SBBenn n)ir franf ffnb ober 

*Er mOsste e s de nn Ih u n, " unless he is obliged to do it.' 
» D i e F U 1 1 e. See p. 235, Note 8. 



COMMENT ON PSALM 118 : 1. 368 

beren dixxe^ cnt6e()rett miiflfen, fo ^leijt \nan attercrf}, Yt>a& 
fitr etnc Sffiobftbat ifl, ein gefmtbe^ Sluge, enie gcfunbe 
.^anb, ^ugi, Sein, i^aupt, gjafe, finger baben, item, n)a^ 
fitr eine ©itabe fet), Srob, ^feiber, 2Bafler, ^ciier, S^an^ 
t)aben ic. 

Unb VDenn mir 5!}Jenfcf)en ttirf)t fo blinb unb ber ©iitc 
©ottei^ fo itberbriiffig unb unacf)tfam n)aren, fo ill freitid) 
feiu 9}?enfc{) auf @rben, er bat fo ml ©ittcr an ftct), njenn 
e^ foltte jiim 5Bed)fe(n fommcn, er nabme fein ^aifertbum 
nod) ^onigreid) bafiir, nnb n)are bafi'tr berfefbigen ©iiter 
beranbt. ®enn t^a^ fann ein ^onigreid) fitr ein (Bdjai^ 
fei)n gegen einen gefunben ?eib ? 2Qa^ ijl: aKer SDBelt ©elb 
nnb @nt gegen einen S^ag, ben nn6 bie fiebe Sonne tixQiid) 
ntad)t ? SBenn bie Sonne einen ZaQ nid)t fd)iene, n)er 
tt)ottte nid)t tobt fet)n ? Dber ^a^ bi'ttfe ibn al(e fein @nt 
unb §errfd)aft ? 2Sa^ n)are ader 2Bein nnb SJJateafier in 
atter SBett, t^enn mir foKten einen !J!ag 20ajfer^ mangefn ? 
2Ba^ mdren atte bitbfd)en (2d)(ojfer, ^aufer, ©ammt, @ei^ 
ben, ^nrpnr, gotbene ^cttcn nnb (Sbefgefleine, atter ^rad)t, 
©d)mitcf nnb §o|fart, tt)enn n^ir eine^ Saternnferg bie ?nft 
(angi entbebren fottten. 

®o(d)e ©itter ©otter ffnb bie grogten nnb attert)erad)tet^ 
ften, nnb barnm, bag fte gemeine ftnb, banfet ®ott 9tie^ 
ntanb barnm, nebmen fte unb brand)en berfelbigen tdgfid) 
intmer fo babin, al^ mitgte e^ fo fei)n, nnb mx batten ganj 
dledjt bajn, nnb bitrften &ott nid)t einmal bafitr banfen. 
§at)ren bien)ei( jit, baben ba^ ^erjeteib jn tbun, forgen, 
babern, ftreiten, ringen nnb miitben, urn itbrig ®efb ober 
@nt, nm @bre unb 2BoKu)t, unb ©umma nm ba^, n)e(d)e^ 
fo(d)en obgenannten ©ittern nid)t ia^ SCafler veidjcn 
fonnte, nnb un^ anp^ {)unbertjl:e X\)cii nid)t fo niifee fet)n 

* Eines Vaterunsers — lang, *' for the space of the Lord's 
Prayer, i. e. as long as it would take to repeat the Lord's Prayer. 



364 SELECTIONS FROM LUTHER. 

mag, fonbern i^iefmebr xm^ binbert an bent frol)(id)en imb 
fricblicf)eu aSraud) ber gcmcinen ©iiter, ba^ mv jTe bafiir 
nid)t crfcnucn, nod) @ott barum banfen fonncn^ Sag 
mad)t ber feibige ^tenfet, ber nn^ nid)t gonnen mag, ba^ 
mv ©otteg ©lite unb ber reid)en tdg(id)en 2Bot)(tl)at brau^f 
d)en nod) erfennen fonnten, tt>iv tvixven aU^n felig^ 

©ie()e, nnn fage bu, me met jTnb tvohl icnte anf (Srben, 
bie biefen 2Ser^ t^erfteben ? 2Bal)r ijt e^, hin 93nbe t(l fo 
bofe, wcnn er in ber ^ird)e fotd)en SSer^ ftngt ober fon|l 
bort, er fdgt ftd) bitnfen, er Derjltetje ibn iiberan^ n^obl unb 
babe ibn nun bi^ anf ben SSoben au^gefojfen, ber bed) fein 
ganjeg ?eben lang nie baran gebad)t nod) gebanft l)at fiir 
t)ie ?!}tifd), bie er Don feiner ^DZiitter gefogen l)at, gefd)n)eige 
benn fi'tr aHe bie ©i'tte ®otte^, bie ibm @ott fein ganjcg 
?eben fo unjd[)(id) unb unfdglid) erjeigt \)at; baf5 er it)ol)t 
atte (Stunben allein feiner Unbanfbarfeit \)aibcn me^r 
©iinbe getban l)at, benn ianh unb ©ra^ im 28a(be ifl, mo 
©ott ein 2Bud)erer n)dre, unb njoKte genaue 9?ed)nung for^ 
bern* 

©arum foltte biefer 3Ser^ bittig einem jeglid)en 9)cenfd)en 
tdgltd), ja atte 2(ugenblicfe im Syvi}cn unb 9JJunbe fei)n, fo 
oft er df;e, trdnfe, fdbe, borte, rod)e, gienge, (liinbe, ober wie, 
mo, tt>enn er feiner ©lieber, icibc^^ &nti ober einiger (5re^ 
atnr braucf)t, bamit er baran bdd)te, bag mo if)m ©ott nid)t 
fo(d)e^ ju braud)en gdbe unb miber ben !I!eufef erbiefte, fo 
miigte er mol)t entbcbren, unb baneben fid) ermal)nte unb 
gen)ol)nte ju einem frobnd)en y?er^en unb hiftigen &ianbcn 
gegen ©ott mit Danffagnng fiir fo[d)e feine tdg(id)e ©iitc 
unb fagen : ^IBobfan, bu bift bod) ja ein freunblid)er, giitiger 
©ott, ber M emiglid) (bai^ i|l : immcr unb immer, obne llit^ 
terlafO mir Unmiirbigem unb Unbaufbarem fo reid)fid)e 
©lite nub "3Bo!)ltl)at erjeigejl ; ?ob unb I'anf mnf]c\t bu 
baben. 

Unb bag bient and) baju, ba(5 man bamit fid) trojlen fann 



COMMENT ON PSALM 118 : 1. 365 

in allem Unfatt* ©eitu voir fittb \old)e Sarttittge unb fo 
tt>eid)c ?>)tdrti)rer^ n)enn un^ mir ein ©ein n^ehe tbut ober 
ein fleine^ Stdtterfeiu aufdt)rt, fo fonnen mv S>\mmel unb 
dvbe i)offfd)reien mtt ^(agen nnb x^enlen, 5!JJurren unb 
g^(ucf)en, unb nid[)t fef)en, tt^ie gar etn gerinqe^ Uebel fotcf) 
S5(dtter(ein tjl:, gcgen \>ie anbern nnjdbligen ©i'tter ®otteg, 
tie tviv nod) ^oU unb ganj l)ahcn. ©feid) af^ n)enn ein 
^ontg unjTnnig n)erben n)oUte, bag er einen pfennig tJerlos? 
ren Ijdtte, unangefe{)en bag er frf)ier bie t)a{6e SBelt f)dtte, 
mit unjdt)Iigem ®db nnb ®nt, unb n)oUte bariiber martern, 
ijeit^tanjen unb pe(ti(enjen/ ®ott frf)dnben unb tnit anbern 
g[iicf)en {)eran^bonnern, VDte jefet bie ^iJJarterbanfen^ mit 
g(uct)en il)re 5!)?annf)eit 6en)eifen* 

9cun (dgt borf) ber fromme @ott fofrf)e geringe Ue6e( un^ 
aiiein barum tt)iberfabren, bap er un^ bamtt jldrfer au^ 
bem tiefem ©djiaf ern)erfe unb treibe bal)in, bag wiv (ern^ 
ten bagegen anfeben bie grogen unjdbftgen ©itter, bie nod) 
t)or[)anben jTnb, unb n)a^ e^ n^erben foUte, voo er feine ®ntc 
gar t)on nn^ menben unb nebmen woUte. $Bie ber fromme 
^iob tt)at, ba er fprad) : „5Da6en vt>ir ®ute^ empfangen 
t)om §errn, noarum tt)oHten \mv bag Ucbet nid)t leiben ?" 
©iebe, berfetbe fonnte bieg fd)one gonfttemini unb biefen 
2Serg gar fein ffngen unb fprad) : 2Gie eg ®ott gefdKt, fo 
gebe eg, beg £^errn Dtame fei) gefobet 2C, dv fdKt nid)t af^ 
(ein auf bag Uebe(, mc mv ^^uppenbei(igi»n tbun ; fonbern 
bebdCt tJor 2(ugen alte ©iite unb 2i;abrl)eit beg i^errn, trojl^ 
et fid) bamit unb iiberminbet bag ^ofe mit @ebu(b. 

S((fo foKen mv and) atte unfer Ungfiid nid)t anberg anfe^ 
ben nod) annef)men, benn aU jitnbete ung ©ott bamit ein 
S!:id)t an, babei xioiv feine ©ute unb ^iQol)lt\)at, in anbern un^ 
jdbtigen ©tiiden feben unb erfennen mod)ten, bag mv ung 
biinfen liegen, eg n^cire fold) geringeg Uebet ein Xropflein 

^ Veitstanzen und pestilenzen, " act like one with 
St. Vitus's Dance, or in the pestilence." * Coicards,jficks, 

31* 



366 SELECTIONS FROM LUTHER. 

9S3aflfer^ in ein grogc^ geucr, ober ein gitnffem in eiit gro^ 
^e^ 2Baj7er gefal'tcn, bamit ber SSer^ uu^ befanttt unb tieb^ 
ltd) n)itrbe : „i:)anfet bent §errn, benn er ijl: ja bod) frennb^ 
lid) nnb feine ©itte n)dt)ret ewigttd)/' 

©nmma, n)ir fonnen gegen ®ott fein grepere^ nod) beflfe^? 
rej:> SBerf tl)nn, nod) cbteren ©ottci^bienjt erjeigcn, benn 
xbm banfen, n>ie er felbfl fagt, ^f. 50. : „2)a^ S^anfopfer 
ifl metne @t)re ober ©otte^bienfi, nnb baffelbc ifi ber SOBeg 
bajn, ba^ id) mein S)eii fe^en tajfe/' ®oId)e^ Dpfer ge^ 
fdttt i\)m iiber alte Dpfer, ©tifte, ^lojler nnb tva^ ba fep 
ntag, tt)ie er fagt ^fafm 59. : ,,3d) tviH ben -ytamen ©otteg 
foben mit meinem ?iebe, nnb voiU ibn l)od) ebren mit 2)ant 
Sa^ n)irb bem §errn bejjer gefaEen af^ ein barren, ber 
£>6rner nnb ^lanen bat/' 

SKiebernm, g(eid)tt)ie ®ott foben nnb banfbar fei;n ber 
b6d)fle ©otte^bienft ijl, beibe bier anf S'rben nnb bort emig^ 
lid) ; atfo ift and) Unbanfbarfeit bai;^ a((erfd)dnbfid)fle ?a(l:er 
nnb bie b6d)fte Unel)re (^otte^, n)eld)e^ bod) bie SBelt Dott, 
i)ol(, Dott ijT:, bit^ an ben .foimmet l)man. 3Ibcr ®ott ifl fo 
ein giitiger A^crr, wic bicfer SScrd fingt, ba^ er nm fo(d)er 
Unbanfbarfeit voiiicn bennod) nid]t ab(dgt nod) anfbi>rt tvoU 
jnthnn, fonbern, n>ie er l)ier fagt, feine Oiiite n^abret ewig^ 
fid>, (vifu immer fitr nnb fiir feine (Sonne anfgeben, beibe 
iiber &ntc nnb 33ofe, nnb taf^t regnen beibe iiber 2^anfbare 
nnb Unbanfbare, ^DJattb- 5. ©iebt ^nben \v>ol)l fo i^ief 
®itter, jiinber, ©civalt atii ben .s?ei(igen, nnb inef mebr, 
behntet ^or ^trieg, ^pejlilenj, Jbenrnng nnb aUen ^^(agen 
bec^ !tenfe[^* ^ai i|t nnb beif;t eine gottIid)e ®iite, bie nm 
feincr 55ot^heit n>i((en abldpt ober niiibe un'rb. (Sin ?Oienfd) 
Derinag fo(d)e ©iite nid)t. X^enn Unbanfbarfeit fann fein 
5i)?enfd) (eiben, nnb finb 2?iefe bariiber rafenb, toH nnb nn^^ 
ffnnig gcmorben, n)ie bie .sMftorien i>on !timon fd)reiben» 
Q^ lit menfd)[id)cr ::)iatnr jn fd)mer, 2Cob(t()nn nnb eitel 
5}ofe^ bafiir enipfahen. 



INDEX TO THE NOTES. 



The first figures refer to the page, the second to the notes. 



A. 

A b e r, page 2, note 7 — p. 35, n. 

6. Compare p. 230, n. 5. 
A bf alien, p. 242, n. 1 end. 
Ab gott, p. 70, n. 6. 
A b h a n g, p. 53, n. 2. 
Ab lass brie fe, p. 176, n. 2. 
A b n e h m e n, p. 26, n. 5— p. 242, 
A b r i c h t e n, p. 50, n.2. [n.l end. 
Abschaumen, p. 106, n. 3. 
Adelig, p. 221,n. 7. 
Adjectives not declined in the 

neut. p, 4, n. 3 — p. 80, n. 2 — 

p. 103, n. 3 — not declined if a 

predicate, p. 61, n. 1 — ending 

in er, p. 150, n.2 — two or more, 

p. 157, n. 2. 
A e f f e n, p. 108, n. 7— p.205, n. 1. 
Aggravatio, p. 172, n. 3. 
Alexander, p. 263, n. 7. 
Alkair, p. 131, n. 5. 
All, in composition, p. 71, n. 1. 
A lie, how declined and used, p. 

5, n. 1 — p. 56, n. 2— p. 57, n. 5 

p. 70, n. 8. 
Allerargersten, p. 137, n. 2. 
A Her D i nge, p. 183, n. 3 — p. 

26^, n. 3— p. 241), n. 4. 
Allerdurchlauchtigste, p. 

92, n. 3. [n. 3. 

Allererst, p. 16, n.2 — p. 225, 
Alle rlei, p. 3, n. 4. 
A 1 1 e r w e g e n, p. 306, n. 1. 
A 1 1 e s a m m t, p. 97, n. 3. 
Allhier, p. 71, n. 1. 
Alliterations, p. 44, n. 2. 
Als da sind, p. 128, n. 2 — p. 

178, n. 2. 
Als d i e, p. 286, n. 2— p. 283, n. 7, 



Also, p. 3, n. 2--.p.28, n. 1— p. 

96, n. 6. 
Am ersten, p. 1, n. 2. 
A n, p. 40, n. 1, end — p. 80, n. 3— 

p. 99, n. 5— p. 132, n. 3— p. 204, 

n. 4. 
A n b r e c h e n, p. 39, n 4. 
Anbringen, p. 197, n. 2. 
Ander, p. 2, n. 6. 
An ders, p. 7, n. 5 — p. 334. n. 1. 

— Distino-uished from s o n s t, 

p. 227, n. 2. 
A n f a h e n for a n f a n g e n, p. 

166, n. 4. 
A nf an gen, p. 39, n. 4. 
A n f e c h t u n g, p. 22, n. 1. 
A n g e h e n, p. 234, n. 2— p. 180, 

n. 1— p. 203, n. 1. 
A n g e 1 e g t, p. 50, n. 2. 
Angelegen, p. 70, n. 2. 
An ge sell en, p. 15, n. 8 — p. 98, 

n. 4 — p. 144, n. 6 — dass, p. 7, 

n. 6. 
Angst mac hen, seyn, wer- 

den, p. 293, n. 2. 
A n h a n g, p. 53, n.2 — p. 99, n. 

7, end. 
A n h e b e n, p. 39, n. 4. 
A n h a b e for a n h o b e, p. 101, 

n. 1. 
A n 1 a u f e n, p. 315, n. 1. 
A n 1 i e g e n, p. 70, n. 2 — p. 169, 

n. 4. 
Annehmen, p. 26, n. 5. — s i c h 

a n n e h m e n, p. 55, n. 2 — p. 

267, n. 1— p. 231, n. 1— p. 255, 

n. 4 end. 
A e n d e rn, p. 28, n. 3, 
A n n a t e n, p. 1 13, n. 1 end. 



3 68 



INDEX TO NOTES. 



Anrichten, p. 50, n. 2 — p. 40, 

n. 1. 
A n s e h e n, p. 103, n. 1. 
A n s p a n n e n, p. 48, n. 3. 
A n t h e i 1, p. 42, n. 3. 
Arm, poor, p. 44, n. 4. 
Arrangement of* words, p. 2, n. 5 

— p. 10, n. I and 3 — p. 11, n. 1 

— p. 13, n.l — p 97, n. 4 and 5 — p. 

99, n. 1— p. 145, n. 5— p. 148, 

n. 3. 
Article of one substantive govern- 
ed by another in the genitive, 

p. 17, n. 1. 
A u, or A 11 e, p. 57, n. 4. 
A u c h, p. 2, n. 4 — with a nega- 
tive, p. 8, n. 3 — p. 28, n. 1 — p. 

16, n. 3. 
A u f d a s s, p. 37, n. 1 — p. 59, n. 

3— p. 94, n. 1. 
Auf diessmal, p. 6, n.l. 
Au Tenth alt, p. 28, n. 2 — p. 

285, n. 3. [n. 1. 

A u f e r b e n, p. 137, n. 5— p. 148, 
Auffallen, p. 31, n. 1. 
A u f g e h e n, p. 142, n. 5. 
A u f ge se t z t, p. 5, n. 1. 
A u fl e ge n, p. 10, n. 5. 
A u f m a c h e n, d. 164, n. 2. 
A u f n e h m e n, p. 26, n. 5. 
A u f r i o h t e n, p. 50, n. 2 — p. 

220, n. 2. 
A u f s e h e n, p. 281, n.l. 
Auf [stehen], p.67, n.2. Comp. 

p. 35, n. 3. 
A ufth un, p. 164, n. 2. 
Aufwerfen, p. 15J, n. 5 — p. 

253, n. 4. 
Augen, vor, aus den, in 

die, an d e n, p. 221, n. 2. 
Aus, over, p. 286, n. I end — p. 

289, n. 3. 
A u s b u n d, p. 265, n. 5. 
A 11 s b a n d i g e r, p. 322, n. J . j 
A u s (re zoge n, p. 210, n. 5 end. I 
A u s h a n g, p. 53, n.2. ' 

A u 8 1 e go n, p. 244, n. 5. 
A n 8 in a h 1 e n, p. 31(), n. 2. 
A u s n e h ni v n, p. 26, n. 5. , 

A usri ch te n, p. 50, n. 2. 
A u sse r, p. 74, n. 5. i 

A uszug, p. 17, n. 2. I 



Auxiliary verbs omitted, p. 19, n. 
2— p. 61, n. 3— p. 93, n. 3 — p. 
94, n. 6— p. 114, n. 2. 

B. 
Bann, p. 171, n. 2. 
B a n n e n, p. 143, n. 3. 
Bass, b e s s e r, p. 328, n. 2. 
B e f e h 1 e n, p. 32, n. 5. 
Befreien, p. 83, n. 3. 
B e f u g n i s s, p. 259. n. 1. 
Begangniss, p. 168, n. 2. 
(S i c h)b e g e b e n, p. 165, n. 7 — 

p. 251, n.2. 
B e g e h r e n, p. 32, n. 1 . 
B e g i e r d e, p. 32, n. 1 . 
B e g i n n e n, p. 39, n. 4. 
B e g n a d e n, p. 222, n. 2 — p. 

237, n. 3. 
Begnugen lassen, p. 135, 

n. 4— p. 160, n. 2. [3, n. 3. 

B e g r e i f e n and B e g r i ff , p. 
Behende, behendiglich, 

B e h e n d i g k e i t, p. 93, n. 7. 
Beherbergen, p. 65, n. 1. 
B e i, p. 120, n. I . 
B e i f a 1 1 e n, p. 31, n. 1. 
B e i 1 e h r e n. p. 74, n. 4. 
Benedeien, p 62, n. 2. 
B e q u e m, p. 145, n. 2. 
B e s c h i c k e n, p. 70, n. 3. 
B e s c h i r m e n, p. 84, n. 5. 
B e s i t z e n and B e s i t z e r, p. 

99, n. 6. 
B e s s e r 1 i c h, p. 9, n. 4. 
Bessern, in the inf. witli z u m, 

p. 14, n. 3. 
Bestehen, p. 66, n. 3. 
B e s t e 1 1 e n, p. 303, n. 3 end. 
(I h m das) b e s t e s e y n, p. 

184, n. 4. [4. 

B e y s e i t o g o t h a n, p. 305, n. 
Bibe In, pi. p. 14i), n. 3. 
Biege and B i e g u n g, p. 51, 

n. 2. 
B i 11 i g, p. 102, n. 3. 
Bis duhor, p. 280, n.2. 
B i 8 c h o f, p. 45, n. 5. 
B i 1 1 c r s s s, p. 161, n. 2. 
B 1 a 8 e n, p. 50, n. 1 . 
B 1 a 1 1 u m k e h r e n, p. 124, n. 

6 — w e n d e n, p. 135, n. 2. 



INDEX TO NOTES. 



869 



I 



B 1 e J b e n, peculiar use of, p. 63, 

n. 5 — p. 284, n. 1. — d a b e i 

b 1 e i b e n, p. 229, n. 4— p. 286, 

n. 5— p. 298, n. 3. 
CSeyn und) bleiben, p.235, 

n. 6. 
B 1 o ss e n, p. 73, n. 3. 
B o g e n, p. 51, n. 2. 
B o r gen, p. 60, n. 1. 
(den) Braten riechen, p. 

237, n. 4. 
Brauchen, with gen. p. 94, n. 

5 — for g e b r a u c h e n, p. 101, 

n. 3— p. 106, n. 4. 
Brosamlein, p. 329, n. 2. 
Br a s ten, p. 79, n. 4. 
B a c h s e, p. 218, n. 4 end. 
Btlrgermeister, p. 228, n. 2. 
B u 1 1 e r b r i e f e, p. 176, n. 3. 

C. 

Cardinals, number of, p. 107, n. 3. 
Causative verbs, p. 27, n. 1. 
Catholic testimonies, p. 109, n. 2. 
Christenheit and Chris- 

tenthum, p. 11, n. 3. 
Colonj when used, p. 2, n. 2 — p. 

81, n. 3— p. 199, n. 3. 
C o m m e n d e n, p. 126, n. 3. 
Confessionaiien, p. 176, n. 

5. 

D. 

Da as an expletive, p. 43, n. 4 — 

p. 46, n. 3. — for w o, p. 105, n. 

1 — distinguished from d o r t, p. 

223, n. 2. 
Da nicht von, for da von 

n 1 c h t, p. 130, n. 3. 
D a, d a r, d r, p. 42, n. 1. 
D a c h, p. 25, n. 3. 
D a b e i, p. 157, n. 3— p. 143, n. 1. 
Dadurch for wodurch, p. 

335, n. 1. [3. 

Dagegen halten, p. 299, n. 
D afe r n, p. 97, n. 7. 
D a f r, p. 13, n. 6 — p. 15, n. 1 

and 5 — p. 16, n. 4. [3 end. 

Daheim suchen, p. 219, n. 
Daher, p. 106, n. 2— p. 227, n. 

4. — hither^ here, p. 252, n. 2. — 

bis daher, p. 280, n. 2. 



Daher wachsen, p. 227, n. 4. 
D a h i n, p. 80, n. 1 — g e h e n, p. 

281, n. 5— fallen, p. 270, n. 

2— richte n, p 283, n. 3. 
D a m i t, p. 94, n. 3 — p, 38, n. 5 — 

p. 65, n. 6 — p. 96, n. 1 — for w o- 

mit, p. 294, n. 2. 
D a n e b e n, p. 94, n. 4 — p. 193, 
n. 3— p. 285, n. 4. 
Danken, for Verdanken, 

p. 171, n. 3 end. 
Daran, p. 129, n. 1 — W o h I 

daran,p. 290, n. 2. 
Daran liege n, p. 207, n. 2. 
Daraufseyn, p. 116, n. 5. 
Daraufhalten, p. 238, n. 1. 
Darbeut for darbietet, p. 

281, n. 8. 
D a r e i n, or drain fallen, 

reden schlagen, p. 166, 

n. 1. [n. 5. 

D a r i n n e for d a r i n, p. 16. 
D a r n a c h, p. 345, n. 2. 
Darob for darUber, p. 72, 

n. 2. 
D a r a b e r, p. 188, n. 5— p. 190, 

n. 1— p. 231,n. 7. 
Daraber arbeiten, bau- 

en, bieten, bringen, ge- 

hen, halten, hergehen, 

hingehen, kommen, etc. 

p. 231, n. 7. 
D a r u m d a s s, p. 77, n. 1. 
Das, referring to what follows, 

p. 184, n. 2— p. 237, n. I— for 

w a s, p. 255, n. 1 — p. 15, n. 4. 
D a s s, place of in certain instan- 
ces, p. 285, n. 3— p. 292, n. 4. 
Das s i n d, p. 294, n. 1— p. 124, 

n.2. 
Dative, p. 35, n. 7 — after n e h- 

m e n, p. 52, n. 4 — p. 124, n. 7 

— p. 173, n. 2 — Expletive, p. 59, 

n. 1— p. 124, n. 2. 
D a u c h t e n, p. 7, n. 7. 
D a V o n, p. 71, n. 3. 
D a z u, p. 45, n. 2— p. 233, n. 2. 
Dazu brauchen, essen, 

halten, h a u f e n, k o m- 

m e n, g e h e n, t h u n, p. 233, 

n.2. 
Dazu t h u n, p. 94, n. 4. 



370 



INDEX TO NOTES. 



D e c k e n, D e c k, D e c k el, p. 
25, n. 3. 

D e i n, genitive for d e i n e r, p. 
46, n. 4. 

(A n) d e m d a s s, p. 2^0, n. 1. 

D e n n, then, p. 214, n. 2 end — 
for a 1 s, than, p. 5, n. 3 — p. 
8, n. 4 — after n 1 c h t, p. 19, n. 
1 — after k e i n, p. 97, n. 2 — ex- 
cept, after e s s e i, s i e h a- 
b e n, etc., p. 37, n. 2 — p. 73, n. 
5. 

D e n n o c h, p. 66, n. 5 — p. 16, 
n. 3. 

D e r, for d e r e r, p. 4, n. 2 — p. 
106, n. 5 — p. 115, n. 1 end — d e r, 
he, more emphatic than e r, p. 
243, n. 4— p. 284, n. 2 — d e r 
(with de r understood), he,who, 
p. 39, n. 1— p. 43, n. 4 — p. 48, 
n. 1 — p. 61, n. 6— d e r d e r dis- 
tinguished from der wer, and 
derjenige welcher, p. 
14, n. 5— p. 35, n. 4. 

D e r g 1 e i c h e n, p. 4, n. 2. 

D e rh a 1 b e n, p. 8, n. 2. D e- 
r o h a 1 b e n, p. 217, n. 1. 

Derjenige welcher, p. 14, 
n. 5. 

D e s s, for d e s s e n, p. 4, n. 2 — 
p. 126, n.2. 

D e s 8 g 1 e i c h e n, p. 4, n. 2. 

D e s s h a 1 b, p. 246, n. 4. 

D e 8 s V i e 1, p. 231, n. 6. Com- 
pare p. 241, n. 1. 

Desselben ungeachtet, 
p. 318, n. 2. 

Desswegen, p. 217, n. 1 — p. 
246, n. 4. 

D e u t e n, p. 244, n. 5. 

(Al le r) Dinge, p. 183, n. 3. 

D i c h t e n, p. 4. n. 1 — p. 73, n. 
2— D ichten und Trach- 
t e n, p. 4, n. 1. 

Die, those, p. 7, n. 3 — p. 19, n. 3. 

D i e s s m a 1, p. 6, n. 1. 

D i e w e i 1, p. 26, n. 2 — p. 104, n. 
1— p. 106, n. 4. 

Ding, p. 58, n. 3 — p. 26, n. 1 — 
p. 254, n. 3 — p. 275, n. 3. 

D o c h, p. 66, n. 5. 

Dorf, p.27, n, 2. 



D o r t, distinguished from d a, p. 

223, n. 2. 
D r a u e n, for d r o h e n, p. 95, 

n. 1 — p. 155, n. 2. 
Dran seyn, p. 319, n. 3. 
D r i n n e n, p. 71, n. 4. 
D r o b e n, p. 42, n. 1. 
D a n k e 1, p,74, n. 6. — D u n k el, 

p. 254, n. 3. 
D a n k e n, p. 22, n. 3. 
D a n n e s i e h e n, p. 233, n. 4. 
D u r c h, p. 126, n. 1. 
Durchgottem, p. 331, n. 2. 
D u r c h 1 a u c h t i g, p. 92, n. 3, 
Durchtreiben, p. 253, n. 2. 
Darfen, p. 54, n. 4. 
Durst, daring, p. 336, n. 3. 
D u s te r, p. 254, n. 3. 

E. 

E, final omitted, p. 5, n. 4 — p. 6, 
n. 3. 

E b e n, p. 171, n. 3 med. 

E d e 1, p. 221, n. 7. 

E h e r, p. 57, n. 2. 

E i g e n with the genitive, p. 3, 
n. 5— p. 119, n. 2— with m e i n, 
8 e i n, etc. p. 216, n.2. Conop. 
p. 214, n. 2 end. 

E i g e n 1 1 i c h, properly, literal- 
ly, p. 45, n. 3. 

E i n, when an adjective, p. 165, 
n. 3 — when it goes before an 
adjective, p. 267, n. 3. 

Ein um den a n d e r n,p. 116, 
n. 1. 

Einblauen, p. 321, n. 2. 

Ein bilden, p. 289, n. 1. 

E i n fa 11, p. 291, n. 1. 

K i n f a 1 1 e n, p. 242, n. 1 end. 

E i n i g, for e i n z i g, p. 93, n. 2 
-.p. 149, n. 1— p. 210, n. 2— p. 
251, n. 5. 

E i n e r 1 e i, p. 77, n. 2. Com- 
pare, p. 3, n. 4. 

E i n in a 1, p. 48, n. 2. 

E i n n e h m e n, p. 26, n. 5. 

E i n r i c h t e n, p. 50, n. 2. 

E i n 8 e t z e n, p. 164, n. 4. 

E i t e 1, p. 10, n. 4— p. 82, n. 1. 

E 1 e n d, p. 44, n. 4. 

Ellipsis of verbs, p. 35, n, 3. 



INDEX TO NOTES. 



371 



Empfahen, for empfang- 
e n, p. 298, n. 5. 

E n d e c h r i s t, p. 292, n. 3. 

Entbehren, p. 263, n. ] . 

E n t h a 1 1 e n, p. 54, n. 5 — p. 83, 
11.2. 

Entrathen, p. 263, n. 1. 

Entrichten, p. 50, n. 2. 

Entsagen, p. ] 65, n, 7. 

Entschuldigen dass, p. 
229, n. 1. 

Ensetzen, p. 51, n, 4. 

Entwischen, p. 67, n. 3. 

E r, Ae, indefinite use of, p. 7, n, 
1 — termination, 98, n. 1 — adjec- 
tive termination, p. 150, n. 2. 

E rdre ic h, p. 64, n. 1. 

E r d r e i s t e n, p. 155, n. 3. 

E r f a h r e n e, p. 73, n. 6. 

Erfallen, p. 125, n. 4. 

E r g r e i f e n, p, 67, n. 3. 

(Sich) erheben, p. 210, n, 3. 

Erjahren, p. 138, n. 1. 

Erklaren, p. 244, n. 5. 

E r k 1 tl g e n, p. 120, n. 3. 

(Sich) e r k a n e n, p. 155, n. 3. 

Erlernen,p. 276, n. 2. 

£ r 1 o s e n, p. 83, n. 3. See 1 o- 
s e n. 

E r n s t, p. 47, n. 3. 

E r r e 1 1 e n, p. 83, n. 3. 

Errichten,p. 50, n. 2. 

Ersetzen and ersessen, p. 
138, n. 1. 

Erst, or a 1 1 e r e r s t, p. 16, n, 
2 — p. 225, n. 3. Z u m e r s t e n, 
am e r s t e n, fars erste, 
p.l,n.2. 

Ertappen,p. 67, n. 3. 

E r w a r t e n, p. 118, n. 2. 

Erwehren, p. 108, n. 6. 

Erwischen, p. 67, n. 3. 

Erwargen, p. 129, n. 1. 

E r z (1 rn e n, p. 21, n. 2. 

Ertzwiderchrist, p. 292, n. 
3. 

E s, with a nominative after its 
verb, or as an expletive, p. 52, 
n. 1 — omitted, p. 17, n. 5 — p. 35, 
n. 1— p. 36, n. 2— p. 101, n. 2— 
p. 116, n. 4. 

Es sind, es giebt, p. 22, n. 
4~p.27, n. 1. 



Es sev denn, p. 37, n. 2 — p. 

73, nr 5— p. 133, n. 2. 
E s s e n, p. 51, n. 1. Z u e s s e n 

h ab e n, p. Ill, n. 3. 
E tl ic he, p. 1, n. 3. 
E t w a, p. 245, n. 1. 
E t w a i g, p. 43, n. 3. 

F. 

F a h e n, for f a n g e n, p. 281, 

n. 9 med. 
F a h r e n, p. 30, n. 4 — p. 153, n. 

1 — e i n h e r, p. 151, n. 4. 
F a h r 1 i c h and F a h r, p. 15, 

n.2. 
Fallen, causative of fa 1 1 e n, 

p. 27, n. 1. 
Falls, p. 97, n. 7. 
FNa s s e n, p. 26, n. 5. 
F as t, p. 153, n. 4. 
Faul, p. 253, n. 1. 
Fehlspruch, p. 245, n. 3. 
F e i n, p. 24, n. 4. 
Fe i n d, p. 59, n. 4. 
Feldkirchen, p. 178, n. 1. 
Feminine nouns declined in the 

singular, p. 3, n. 5 — p. 141, n. 

4— p. 173, n.2 end. 
F e y r e n, p. 346, n. 3, 
F i n s t e r, p. 254, n. 3. 
Fleck and F 1 e c k e n, p. 27, 

n.2. 
Flinte, p. 218, n. 4 end. 
Folge thun, p. 209, n. 1. 
F o 1 g e n, io persecute, p. 38, n. 2. 
Foreign verbs, how formed, p. 

23, n. 2. 
Fr e i, p. 16, n. 4. 
F r e i e s L e b e n, p. 159, n. 2. 
Freilich, p. 236, n. 3. 
F r e s se n, p. 51, n. 1. [n. 4. 

F r e u d i g and F r e u d e, p. 32, 
F r e u n d, p. 59, n. 4. 
Frisch, p. 139, n. 1. 
Froh, p. 32, n. 4. 
F r o h 1 i c h, p. 32, n. 4. 
F r o m m, p. 49, n. 2. 
F u g, p. 259, n. 1. 
(d i e) F U 1 1 e, like die M e n ge, 

p. 235, n. 8. 
FQndlein, p. 130, n. 1. 
F U r for v o r, p. 6, n. 4. 
Far u n d far, p. 100, n. 4. 



372 



INDEX TO NOTES. 



Far sich hin, p. 249, n. 1. 
Fa rs e rste, p. 1, n. 2. 
F a r b r a c h t i g, p. 79, n. 4. 
F a r d e r, or f o r d e r, p. 6, n. 5 

—p. 84, n. 3. 
Farsatz, for Vorsatz, p. 6, 

n. 4. 
Farsichtige, p. 214, n. 1. 
F a r s t, p. 53, n. 4. 
Farwendet, p. 235, n. 1. 

G. 

Gar, p. 36, n. 3— p. 139, n. 1. 
Gasthaus and G a s t h o f, p. 

65, n. 1. 
Ge, omitted, p. 166, n. 4 — p. 140, 

n. 4. 
Geben, for gegeben, p. 166, 

n. 4. 
G e b i e t e n, p. 32, n. 5. 
Gebreche, p. 232, n. 2. 
Gebrechen, p. 68, n. 1. 
Gebahre n, p. 226, n. 1. 
Gedenken, p. 217, n. 3. 
Gefahrte, p. 220, n. 5. 
Gef alien, p. 31, n. 1. — dass 

war g e f a 11 e n, p. 283, n. 6. 
Gegen, p. 46, n. I — in compari- 
son with^ p. 132, n. 1 — p. 152, 

n. 1. 
Gegenpart, Gegner, p. 34, 

n. 5. 
Gegner, p. 59, n. 4 — p. 34, n. 5. 
Gegenurtheil, p. 76, n. 2. 
G e h e i m and G e h e i m n i s s, 

p. 66, n. 4. 
Gehen, p. 153, n. 1 — forgel- 

te n, p. 12, n. 1. 
Gehe far d i c h, p. 16, n. 8. 
G e h t, impersonal, p. 23, n. 5. 
G e i s 1 1 i c h e r, p. 45, n. 5. 
G e 1 a s s c n, p. 65, n. 5. 
G e 1 d s t r i c h, p. 176, n. 1. 
G e 1 e g e n h e i t, p. 55, n. 1 . 
G c 1 a 8 t e n, p. 30, n. 2. 
Gemach, p. 219, n. 1. 
G e m c i n hin, p. 71, n. 2. 
G e m e i n i g 1 i c h, p. 71, n. 2. 
G c m a t h, p. 60, n. 3 — p. 61 , n.l . 
Genitive governed by indefinite 

adjectives, etc. p. 13, n. 3 — p. 

22', n. 4— p. 63, n. 2. before 

its governing noun, p. 17, n. 1 — 



p. 44, n. 1— p. 61, n. 2— p. 138, 
n. 3 — p. 143, n. 2. of man- 
ner, p. 68, n. 3 — p. 117, n. 1 — 

p. 268, n. 4. as predicate, 

p. 146, n. 1— p. 148, n. 2— p. 153, 

n. 1. without the ending 

s or C5, p. 140, n. 3 — p. 110, n. 

1 ? of feminines, p. 3, n. 5 

—p. 141, n. 4— p. 173, n. 2 end. 

governed bybrauchen, 

p. 94, n. 5 — g e d e n k e n, p.46, 
n. 4 — genug, p. 108, n. 3 — 
g e w a r t e n, p. 264, n. 3 end — 
e i n, p. 96, n. 2 — p. 127, n. 1 — 
p. 171 , n. 1 — m e h r, p. 13, n. 3— 
p. 106, n. 5— p. 150, n. 3— p.l27, 
n. 5. — 1 a c h e n, p. 46, n. 4. — 
s e y n, p. 198, n. 5. — s p o 1 1 e n, 
p. 177, n. 2— p. 247, n. 2— t r o- 
s t e n, p. 296, n. 2 — p. 307, n. 
2. — V e r g e s s e n, p. 46, n. 4. — 
V e r s t e h e n, p. 74, n. 1. — w e- 
n i g e r, p. 108, n. 1 . — w e r t h, 
p. 147, n. 3. 

G e n o s s, p. 220, n. 5. 

Genugsam, p. 257, n. 3. 

G e n n g t h u u n g, p. 2, n. 3. 

G e p 1 a r r, for G e p 1 e r r e, p. 
18, n. 8. 

G e r a t h e n, p. 38, n. 3 — p. 156, 
n. 2— p. 233, n. 1— p. 240, n. 7. 

G e r i c h t, p. 72, n. 3. 

G e r i n g, p. 55, n. 3 — p. 249, n. 
2— p. 281, n. 4. 

G e r n e, p. 7, n. 4 — p. 193, n. 3. 

G e r U s t, for g e r a s t e t, p. 313, 
n. 1. 

(Sich) g e t r a u e n, p. 155, n. 3. 

Gesagt seyn, p. 240, n. 3 — p. 
289, n. 1. 

Gescheut, p. 281, n. 9. 

G e s c h i c h t e, p. 274, n. 5. 

Ge sc h i c k, p. 207, n. 1. 

G e s c li i c k t, p. 145, n. 2. 

G e s c h m e i s s e, p. 229, n. 7. 

G e s c h o p f , p. 32, n. 3. 

G e s c h r e i, p. 203, n. 2. 

Gesegneten, see segen. 

Gesell and its compounds, p. 
220, n. 5. 

Ge s e t z, p. 11, n. 5. 

G c s i c h t e and G e 8 i c li t e r, 
p. 25, n. 2. 



INDEX TO NOTES. 



873 



G e s i n d e, p. 119, n. 4. 
G e s p a n, p, 48, n. 3. 
Gespenst, p. 178, n. 4 — u n d 

T r u g, p. 293, n. 6. 
G e s p a g n i s s, p. 96, n. 1 — p. 

209, n. 4. 
G e s t a 1 1, for G e s t a 1 1 e t, p. 

319, n. 1. 
G e s u c h, p, 206, n. 1. 
G e s u n d, distinguished from 

w o h 1, p. 13, n, 6. 
G e t h an, p. 15, n. 6. 
G e t r o s t, participle for the im- 
perative, p. 299, n. 2. 
G e w a 1 1, p. 54, n, 2. 
Gewarten, p. 264, n, 3 end. 
G e w e s t for g e w e s e n, p. 

280, n. 3. 
G e w i s s, p. 249, n, 5. 
G e w i s s e n, p. 74, n. 3. 
G e w i s s 1 i c h, p. 42, n. 2. 
Gewohnen, Gewohnung, 

Gewohnheit, gewohn- 

1 i c h, p. 28, n. 2. 
GewOrm and Geschwfl rm, 

p. 110, n. 2— p. 144, n. 3. 
(E s) g i e b t, e s s i n d, p. 22, 

n. 4, 
G i e r and g i e r e n, p. 32, n. 1. 
G 1 a u b e n, plural, p. 178, n. 6 — 

p. 192, n. 2. 
G 1 e i c h, p. 21, n. 3— p. 215, n. 

4 — p. 197, n. 1 — gle ich a Is, 

p. 152, n. 3^g 1 e i c h a 1 s da, 

p. 238, n, 2. 
G 1 e i s s n e r, p. 24, n. 6. 
Glo 8 s le i n, p. 131, n. 1, 
Gl il ck, p. 21, n. 1. 
G n a d e, p. 23, n. 1 . 
Gockelnarr, Gochel, Go- 

g e 1, G i g e 1, p. 146, n. 3. 
Gott gebe, p. 351 , n, 3. 
G o tt L o b, p. 9, n. 4. 
Gott vor sey, 240, n. 7. 
G 6 t z e, p. 70, n. 6. 
G o 1 1 z e n b i 1 d, p. 70, n. 6. 
G r a t h or G r a t, p. 236, n. 2. 
I G r e i f e n, p. 26, n. 5. See B e- 
I g re i fe n. 
IG r i m m, p. 38, n. 1. 
]G r o s c h e n, p. 105, n. 6. 
iGrund und Boden, p. 123, 

n. 3 end. 

32 



G u 1 d e n, p. 105, n. 6 — p. Ill, n. 

1. 
G u n s t, p. 52, n. 5. 
Gut distinguished from w o h 1, 

p. 13, n. 6— p. 33, n. 1. 
(das) G u t, and die G (1 1 e r, 

p. 52, n. 2 — p. 61, n. 1 and 2. 
Gut t h u n, p. 20, n. 3. 
(Z u) gute with a dative, p. 

126, n. 1. 
(Das) Gat e, p. 52, n. 2. 
Giite, gOtig and Gatig- 

k e i t, p. 52, n. 2, 

H. 
Haar breit, with gen. p. 47, 

n. 5. 
H a a r 1 e i n, p. 329, n. 2. 
H a b e n, as an auxiliary omitted, 

p. 9, n. 3 — with certain partici- 
ples, p. 288, n. 3. 
Haben gut thun, orsag en, 

p. 20, n.3. 
Haben z u with an infin., and 

with or without an ace, p. Ill, 

n. 3— p. 151 , n. 3— p. 269, n. 2. 
H a b e n d for wohlhabend, 

p. 69, n. 1. 
H a d e r and Haderrecht, p. 

122, n. 2 and 4. 
H a 1 b e n and h a 1 b e r, p. 8, n. 

2— p. 10,n.2— p. 200, n.7. 
H a 1 1 e n, p. 16, n. 4 — p. 117, n. 1. 
(U e b e r or a u f e t w a s) h a I- 

ten, p. 239, n. a 
Haltetauch dess, p. 293, 

n. 4. 
(E u c h in d e r) H a n d, p. 258, 

n. 3. 
(Z u t r e u r) H a n d, p. 231, n.3, 
Handel, p. 29, n. 2. 
Handel und Wandel, p. 

28, n. 3. 
H a n d e 1 n, p. 29, n. 2. 
H a n d 1 u n g, p. 29, n. 2. 
H a n g, p. 53, n. 2. 
Han gen in and an, p. 132, 

n. 3. 
Harnisch and Harnisch- 

z e u ge, p. 231, n. 5. 
H ar r e n, p. 39, n. 2. 
Harte zuvor, p. 352, n. 3. 
Hartiglich, p. 142, n. 4. 



374 



INDEX TO NOTES. 



H a u p t b u b e n, p. 125, n. 1. 
Hauswesen, p. 72, n. 2. 
H a u t, p. 95, n. 4. 
H e b e n in various phrases, p. 

106, n. 1. 
H e i 1 a n d, p. 59, n. 4. 
Heilwartige, p. 215, n. 2. 
H e i m 1 i c h, p. 66, n. 4. 
Heimlichkeil, p. 66, n. 4. 
H e i m s u c h e n, p. 219, n. 3 (p. 

237, n. 3). 

H e i s s e n, p. 26, n. 3 — p. 32, n. 

5 — p. 48, n. 5 — p. 61, n, 4. 
H e i s s e n for g e h e i s s t, p. 238, 

n. 5. 
H e \ f e n, to be of use, p. 39, n. 3, 

p. 54, n. 3— p. 190, n. 5— p. 227, 

1. 
Helfen for ge ho If en, p. 

238, n. 5. 

H e 1 1 e r, p. 105, n. 6. 
H e r a b f a h r e n, p. 326, n. 4. 
Herberge, p. 65, n. 1. 
Herfar for h e r v o r, p. 282, 

n. 3. 
Herhalten, p. 343, n. 1 . 
Hernachmals, p. 165, n. 6. 
H e r V o r (k o m m e n), p. 35,n.3. 
(Euch das) Hertz neh- 

m e n, p. 285, n. 1. 
(E i n) H e r t z f a s s e n, p. 289, 

n. 2. 
(Zq) Hertzengehen,p. 279, 

n. 7 end. 
H e r u m z i e h e n, p. 316, n. 1 . 
H e u, p. 25, n. 4. 
H e u c h 1 e r, p. 24, n. 6, end. 
Hienach ah men, p. 251, n.2. 
H i n i s t h i n, p. 223, n. 5. 
Hin — her (G e i s t h i n, 

G e i s t her), p. 253, n. 4. 
HinfOrder, p. 6, n. 5 and p. 

13, n. 6. 
H i n d e r n, p. 98, n. 7. 
H i n r i c h t e n, p. 50, n. 2 — p. 

57, n. 1. 
Hinten nach, p. 266, n. 1. 
H i n w o 1 1 e n, p. 304, n. I. 
H o c h, p. 224, n. 4 — (h o h e), p. 

2(3(i, n. 1— p. 267, n. 5— p. 227, 

n. 3— p. 152, n. 4. 
II o c h 1 a h r e n, p. 205, n. 4. 
H o f, ace. ? or gen. ? p. 110, n. 1. 



H o f fe n, p. 26, n. 4. 

(bin) der H of f n u n g, p. 268, 

n. 4. 
H o h e S c h u 1 e n, p. 201, n. 1— 

p. 221, n. 5. 
H o r e n, p. 23, n. 6. 
H o r t e n for g e h o r t, p. 238, 

n. 5. 
Hungers sterben, p. 68, 

n. 3. 

1. 

1 g, termination appended to par- 
ticles, p. 43, n. 3. 

Ihm for s i c h, p. 151, n. 6 — p. 
208, n. 3. 

I h r, for i h r e r, p. 161 , n. 2. 

das Ihrrige, die Ihrigen, 
p, 70, n. 8. 

1 m me r, p. 41, n. 2, 

Immerdar, p, 69, n. 5 — p. 84, 
n. 3. 

Indefinite pronouns, adjectives, 
etc. p. 110, n. 3 — p. Ill, n.^— 
p. 137, n. 3— p. 181, n.2. 

1 n d e s s, p. 36, n. 5. 

Infinitive after s e y n, p. 12, n. 3, 
p. 222, n. 8— p. 268, n. 6— p.275, 
n. 4 — p. 259, n. 2 end — used sub- 
stantively, p. 13, n. 6, and with 
tlie def article, p. 14, n. 3 — p. 
103, n. 1. 

Infinitive of foreign verbs, p. 23, 
n.2. 

Infinitives, as participial nouns, 
p. 42, n. 5 — p. 44, n. 2— p. 68, 
n. 2— p. 148, n. 4— p. 161, n.2— 
187, n. 3— p. 272, n.2. 

Infinitive form for the participial, 
p. 238, n. 5. 

1 n h a b e r, p. 99, n. 6. 

Inne haben, p. 99, n. 6. 

I n sge m e i n, p. 71, n.2. 

Interrogation point with an af- 
firmation, p. 235, n. 5. 

Inversion of a clause, p. 13, n. 1 — 
p. 15, n. 7. 

I r e n, infinitive termination, p 
23, n 2— p. 143, n. 6. 

1 r g e n d e i n e r, p. 1, n. 3. 

Irregularitat, p. 172, n.2. 

1 r r e n for i r r e m a c h e n, p. 
253, n. 3. 



J 



INDEX TO NOTES. 



875 



Istundbleibt, p. 300, n. 1— 

p. 235, n. 6. 
1 1 e in, p. 7, n. 2. 

J. 

J a, p. 228, n. 3. 

J a h r, time indefinitely, p. 220, 

n. 1. 
J a h r t a g, p. 168, n. 2. 
J a m m e r n, p. 301 , n. 2. 
J e, p. 41, n. 2 — p. 261, n. 2. 
J e, provincial for J a, p. 16, n. 5 

— p. 151, n. 2. 
J e m a 1 s, p. 41, n. 2 — p. 277, n. 1. 
J em a n d, p. 43, n. 1. 
J e t z u n d, p. 359, n. 1. 
J u n g f e r, p. 58, n. 1. 
Junker, p. 58, n. 1. — Z u J a n- 

kern ziehen, p. 263, n. 2. 

K. 

K an d e 1, p. 155, n. 1. 

K a n z e 1 e i, p. 117, n. 2. 

K e cklic h, p. 14, n. 2. 

K e h r e n, p. 33, n. 2— p. 218, n. 4. 

K e m n o t, or Kemnate, p. 
240, n. 5. 

K e nn e n, p. 54, n. 6. 

K e u 1 c h e n, p. 264, n. 3, end. 

K i r c h e n w e s e n, p. 72, n. 2. 

Klein, p. 249, n. 2. 

Kloster, p. 104, n. 4. 

K o n i g, p, 53, n. 3. 

K d n n e n, fo know, p. 221 , n. 4 — 
p. 273, n. 1— p. 275, n. 2.— K o n- 
n e n for g e k o n n t, p. 238, n. 
5. 

Kraft, p. 54, n. 2. 

Krebs, p. 231, n. 5. 

K r i e g e n, p. 256, n. 2. 

Kre uzer, p. 105, n. 6. 

Kuchen, p. 324, n. 1— p. 351, 
n. 1. 

K u n s t, p. 19] , n. 1— p. 193, n. 2 
(p. 252, n. 4)— p. 292, n. 1— p. 
300, n. 4. 

Kurz, various phrases formed 
with it, p. 116, n. 3. 

Kurzlich, p. 64, n. 3. 

Ktihr or Kur and its com- 
pounds, p. 236, n. 1. 

Karass, p. 231, n. 5. 



L. 

Lange n, p. 11, n. 2. 

Lasse sich irren, p. 184, n. 3. 

Lassen, for nachlassen, p. 

12, n. 2 — for gelassen, p.238, 

n.5. 
Lassen wir, and 1 asset 

u n s, p. 222, n. 7. 
Lasst sich nicht thun, p. 

249, n. 3. horen, p. 249, 

n. 3. denken, p. 249, n, 

3. 
L aster, p. 34, n. 1. 
Las te rn, p. 34, n. 1. 
Lateinischland, p. 223, n. 6. 
Lau te r, p. 10, n. 4. 
Leben der Hoffnu ng, p. 68, 

n. 3. 
Lebtag, p. 318, 1. 
L e c k e n, to leap, p. 261, n. 1. 
Le hen, p. 113, n. 1. 
Le hn en, p. 60, n. 1. 
Lehren and lernen, for ge- 

lehrt and gelernt, p. 238, 

n. 5 (p. 295, n. 2). 
(S i c h) 1 e h r e n, p. 259, n. 2 end. 
(bei) Leib, p. 191, n. 3. 
Leichtlich, p. 186, n. 2. 
(sich) 1 e i d e n, p. 134, n. 2. 
(g e r n) 1 e i d e n, p. ] 93, n. 3. 
Leidige, p. 291, n. 2, 
Le ihen, p. 60, n. 1. 
(sich) lernen, p. 128, n. I. — 

Comp. p. 259, n. 2 end. 
Le tze, p. 279, n. 5. 
Liebe, adj. p. 180, n. 4. Lie- 
ben for liebe, p. 223, n. 1. 
(Eure) Liebe, p. 216, n. 6. 
Liebers, p. 318, n. 1. 
Liege n, oben, unter, p. 38, 

n.4. 
L i e g e n v^ith a n, p. 169, n. 4 — 

v/ith wo, p. 285, n. 2. 
Liquids, I, n, r, dropped in Eng., 

p. 178, n. 6 med. 
Los werden, p. 1 25, n. 3. 
L d sen, p. 9, n. 1. 
Lust, lUsten, lastern, 

Lustdirne, p. 30, n. 2. 
L u s t i g, p. 32, n. 4. 

M. 
M a c h e n, p. 20, n. 3 end. 



376 



INDEX TO NOTES. 



M a c h t, p. 54, n. 2. 

Mag und soil, p. 286, n. 4. 

Magdlei n, p. 264, n. 4. 

Mai, p. 134, n. 1. 

M a 1 e d e i e n, p. 62, n. 2. 

M a n c h e r 1 e i, p. 3, n. 4. 

M a r s h a 1 k, p. 36, n. 4. 

Maue r, p. 100, n. 3. 

Maulpferd, p. 147, n. 2. 

M e h r with a gen. p. 13, n. 3 — 

p. 106, n. 5. 
Mehrer and mehrerer, p. 

18, n, 1— p. 67, n. 4. 
(das) in e h r m a 1, p. 205, n. 5. 
M e i n, gen. for m e i n e r, p. 46, 

n. 4. 
M e i n e n, p. 47, n. 2. 
M e i n u n g, p. 264, n. 2. 
M e i s t e n s and am m e i s t e n, 

p. 171, n. 3— p. 214, n.2end. 
(die) M e n g e, p. 222, n. 3.— 

Comp. p. 235, n. 8. 
Mensch, p 200, n. 1. 
M e s s b r i e f e, p. 176, n. 4. 
M i 1 d e, p. 60, n. 2.— free, with 

gen. p. 205, n. 2. 
M i r, d a s s i n d m i r, p. 124, 

n. 2. 
M i ssen, p. 263, n. 1. 
M i s s t r e u e, p. 84, n. 6. 
Mitten in, p. 295, n. 1. 
M o g e n, use of, p. 24, n. 1— for 

g e in o c h t, do. — p. 1 18, n. 2 — 

p. 238, n. 5. 
M o c h t e g e r n e, p. 7, n. 4. 
M o n c h, p. 45, n. 5 end. 
M u th w i 1 le, p. 34, n. 2. 
MUssen for geinust (comp. 

mo ge n), p. 67, n. 1. 

N. 
Nach bleiben, p. 228, n. 4. 
N a c h 1 a 8 s e n, p. 8, n. 1 — p. 167 

n.2. 
N a c h 1 a 8 s u n g, p. 0, n. 2. 
N a c h t r a g, p. IMJ, n. 7 end. 
N a he, p. 58, n. 1. 
N arre n, p. 10H, n. 7— p.205,n.l. 
N ata rl ich, p. 73, n. 1. 
Negatives, double, p. 148, n. 6 — 

p. 151, n. 1. 
N e h m e n and its compounds, p. 

26, n. 5. 



N e h m e n, with the dative, p. 

52, n. 4 (p. 173, n.l). 
(Von) n e u e n an, p. 207, n. 5. 
Neuter pronouns, etc. indefinite, 

p. 110, n. 3. 
N i c h t as a noun, p. 35, n. 2. 
Nicht mehr denn, p. 75, 

n. 3. 
N i c h t s for n i c h t, p. 2, n. 4 — 

p. 9, n. 5 — p. 63, n. 1. 
Nichts geredet, p. 9, n. (i — 

p. 101, n.2. 
Nie, p. 41,n. 2. 
Nieder, niedergehe n,N ie- 

derdeutschland, Nie- 

derhessen, Niederr hein, 

niederlegen, nieder- 

t a u c h e n, p. 241, n. 4. 
Nie K e i n e n, p. 79, n. 1. 
N i e m al s, p. 41, n. 2. 
N i e m a n d, p. 8, n, 1 — p. 10, n . 

5— p. 43, n. 1. 
N i m m e r, p. 41, n. 2. 
N i m m e r m e h r, p. 41, n. 2. 
N i r g e n d s d e n n, p. 71, n. 5. 
N o c h, p. 225, n. 3. 
Nominative after its verb, p. 52, 

n. 1. 
Nominative pi, with a verb sing., 

p. 93, n. 4— p. 112, n. 5. 
Nominative for the accusative, p. 

103, n. 3. 
Nominative omitted, p. 17, n. 5 — 

p. 18, n. 3— p. 22, n. 4— p. 65, 

n. 3 — p. 69, n. 4 — p. 70, n. 5 — p. 

%, n. 5. 
N o t h, how construed, p. 162, n. 

l_p. 247^ n. 4. 
N u n, as a conj. p. 12, n. 4 — p. 

70, n. 7— p. 131, n. 3. 
Nur, p. 198, n. 3. 

O. 

Ob, p. 16, n. 1— p. 244, n. G. 

O b, for o b e n in composition, p. 

(>, n . 6. 
Oben bleiben, p. 77, n. 4. 
Ob en lierron, p. 38, n. 4. — 

Comp. p. 77, n. 4. 
Ob a u c h, p. 244, n. 6. 
O b e r k e i t, p. 281 , n. 2. 
Oberste, p. 281, n.2. 
O b g 1 e i c h, p. 244, n. 6. 



INDEX TO NOTES. 



377 



O b s c h o n, p. 244, n. 6. 

O b r i g k e i t, p. 228, n. 2— p 

28], n.2. 
Ob wohl, p. 244, n. 6. 
O e f n e n, p. 164, n. 2. 
Oelgotze, p 140, n. 2. 
Oesterreich, p. 64, n, 1. 
Official, p. 143, n. J. 
Ohne, p. 226, n. 3. 
O h n e d a s s, p. 95 

n. I. 
Ohne i h 



II. o. 

p. 95, n. 3 — p. 147, 
n. I. 

hne ihren Dank, p. 342, 
n.2. 



P- 



Ohne seyn, p. 344, n. 1. 
Or de a 1, p. 43, n.2. 
Ort, p. 27, n. 2. 
Orthography, p. 278, note * — 
279, n. 4. 

P. 

P a b s t for P a p s t, p. 45, n. 5. 

P am p e In, p. 331, n. 1. 

P a n z e r, p. 231, n. 5. 

P a p s t-M o n a t e, p. 115, n. 2, 

P a r e t for B a r e t, p. 198, n. 4, 

Participle, peculiar use of, p. 15, 

n. 6 — p. 98, n. 3. 
Participle with an auxiliary verb 

omitted, p. 19, n. 2 — p. 61, n. 3. 

See Auxiliary. 
Participle used absolutely, p. 107, 

n. 5 — p. 15, n. 8— p. 98, n. 4. 
Participle, past, where we use the 

present, p. 240, n. 3 — p. 255, n. 

3— p. 283, n. 6. 
Participle past for the imperative, 

p. 255, n. 3— p. 299, n. 2— p. 

310, n.l. 
Particles, compound, separated, p. 

182, n. 2 — abundant use of, p. 

219, n.2. 
Passive verbs impersonal, p. 218, 

n. 1. 
P f for 7?, p. 45, n. 5 end. 
P fa d, p. 45, n. 5 end. 
Pfajff, p. 45, n. 5. 
P f a r r h e r r, p. 45, n. 5. 
Pf a u, p. 45, n. 5 end. 
P f e n n i g, p. 105, n. 6. 
P f e r s c h e, p. 45, n. 5 end. 
Platz, p. 27, n.2. 
Platzregen, p. 223, n. 4, 

32* 



Play upon words, p. 110, n. 2 — p. 

119, n, 2. 
Position of words, p. 2, n. 5 — p. 10, 

n. 1 and 3 — p. 11, n. 1 — p. 13, 

n.l. 
P r a k t i k, p, 112, n. 4— p. 139, n. 

3. 
P r e d i g e r, p. 45, n. 5. 
Present for the future, p. 259, n. 

2 end. 
Pronouns, possessive adjective, 

when declined, p, 226, n. 3. 

R. 

R a s e n d, p. 47, n. 4, 

Rath u n d That, p. 214, n. 2 

med. 
R a t h e n with h e 1 f e n, p, 265, 

n. 3 — p. 267, n. 8, 
R a t h e n with the dative, p. 251, 

n. 4, 
Rathsherr, p. 228, n. 2, 
R a u m, p. 259, n. 1. 
R e c h t for g e r e c h t, p. 36, 

n.l, 
Rechtgeschehen, p. 271, 

n, 2. 
Recht, p. 259, n. 1, 
Reciprocal pronoun, p. 182, n. 1. 
R e d e n (g e r e d e t), p. 9, n. 5 

— p, 14, n. 4, 
R e d 1 i c h, p. 22, n. 5. 
Reflective verbs used reciprocally, 

p. 182, n. 1. 
R e g i e r e n, of ecclesiastical 

rule, p. 148, n. 4. 
Reich, substantive in composi- 
tion, p. 64, n. 1. 
Reich, adj. p. 203, n. 2. 
Re i te n, p. 153, n. 1. 
Re 1 1 e n, p. 83, n. 3. 
R i c h t e n, p. 50, n. 2 — d a h i n 

r i c h t e n, p. 283, n. 3. 
Riechen, den Braten, p. 

237, n. 4. 
R u f, p. 42, n. 5. 
R u f e n, p. 42, n. 5. 
Ra Is, p. 234, n.l. 
R u i n e n, p. 37, n. 4. 
Racken herum, p. 306, n. 2. 
(den) R c k e n h a 1 1 e n, p. 

348, n. 4, 



378 



INDEX TO NOTES. 



(s i c h) R a h m e n, p. 103, n. 2— 
p. no, n. 3. 

S. 
S a c he, p. 58, n. 3. 
S a I z, p. 43, n. 2 end. 
S a u f e n, p. 51, n. 1. 
S a u b e r 1 i c h, p. 105, n. 3. 
Sch aden, p. 23, n. 7. 
S c h a fFe n, p. 32, n. 3— p. 220, 

n. 6 — to icork^ p. 264, n. 3 med. 
S c h a 1 k, p. 36, n. 4. 
Schalten, p. 29, n. 4. 
S c h a n d e, p. 56, n. 3 — p. 35, 

n. 4. 
Schatz, heben,p. 106, n. 1. 
S c h e i t e r and S c h e i t, p. 37, 

n. 4. 
S c h e 1 m, p. 36, n. 4. 
S c h e 1 1 e n, p. 18, n. 6. 
S c h e u e n, p. 258, n. 2 end. 
S chic ken, p. 114, n. 3— p. 206, 

n. 4 end, — S inn schicken, 

p. 259, n. 2 end. — dazu 

schicken, p. 288, n. 3. 
S c h i e r, p. 25, n. 5. 
Schindleich, Schindun- 

g e r, S c h i n d g r u b e, p. 182, 

n. 4. 
S c h i m p f, p. 56, n. 3. 
S c h i r m and its compounds, p. 

84, n. 5. 
Schlappern and s c h 1 a b- 

b e r n, p. 168, n. 3. 
Schlecht, p 39, n. 5 — p. 78, n. 

3 (p. 247, n. 6)— p. 252, n. 5. 
Schlicht, p. 39, n. 5. 
S c h li m ni, p. 39, n. 5. 
S c h 1 i t te n, p. 258, n. 1 . 
S c h 6 p f e n, p. 32, n. 3. 
S c h 6 p f e r and Schopfung, 

p. 32, n. 3. 
S clil (l pfern, p. 74, n. 2. 
S c h in a c h, p. 56, n. 3. 
S c h m e c k o n, p. J 00, n. 2. 
S c li o n, p. 225, n. 3. 
S c h r e c k 1 i c h, p. 24, n. 5. 
S c h r c i o n, p. 42, n. 5. 
Sc h re i n, p. 240, n. 4. 
S c h r i f t, passage of Scripture, 

p. 6, n. 2. 
Schuld, p. 246, n. 3. 



S c h u 1 w e s e n, p. 72, n. 2. 

S c h w e i g e d e n n, p. 168, n. 1. 

S c h w e r 1 i c h, p. 2. n. 4. 

S c h w u 1 s t, p. 50, n. 1 . 

Sege n, p. 62, n. 1. 

S egnen, p. 62, n. 1. 

Sehen, for gesehen, p. 238, 

n. 5. 
Sehen lassen, p. 112, n. 3. 
Sehen wir zu, p. 105, n. 3 — 

p. 121, n. 1. 
S e i n, gen. for seiner, p. 46, n. 

4— p. 73, n, 4— p. 163, n. 2— p. 

196, n. 2— p. 209, n. 5. 
Selber, p. 103, n. 3 end. 
S e n d e n, p. 114, n. 3. 
Sententiarien, p. 273, n. 4. 
Setzen, n. 11, n. 5 — p. 94, n. 7 

—p. 124, n. 4. 
Setzen, causative of sitzen, 

p. 27, n, 1. 
(Hoch) sin gen, p. 211, n. 2. 
S internal, p. 18, n. 9— p. 99, 

n. 1. 
S \ tze n^ to be in possession of, p. 

63, n. 5— p. 298, n. 1. 
Sled, p. 258, n. 1. 
Sleigh, p. 258, n. 1. 
So bald, p. 242, n. 1. 
So doc h, p. 13, n. 5 — p. 59, 

n. 2. 
S o e i n for e i n s o 1 c h e r, p. 

25, n. 7. 
So — u n d, 50 fl5, p. 152, n. 4. 
So fern, p. 97, n. 7. 
S o 1 c h for s o 1 c h e s, p. 18, n. 

8— p. 80, n. 4. 
Soil u nd m u s s, p. 332, n. 2. 
S o 1 1 e n, p. 84, n. 1— p. 105, n. 

3 — how to be translated, p. 148, 

n. 3. 
S o 1 1 e n, in the sense of h e 1- 

fen, p. 123, n. 2 (p. 257, n. 1). 
S o 1 1 e n for g e s o 1 1 1, p. 238, 

n. 5. 
S o n d c r n, p. 2, n. 7. 
S o n s t, p. 15, n. 1— p. 74, n. 7 — 

dislinguisliod from a n d e r s, 

p. 227, n. 2. [n. 1. 

S o n s t — so, p. 74, n. 7— p. 250, 
S o r g e, p. 34, n. 3. — S o r g e 

a ber and fa r, p. 70, n. 1. 



INDEX TO NOTES. 



879 



S p a n n e, p. 48, n. 3. 
S p a n n e n, p, 48, n. 3. 
Spiegelfechten, p. 209, 

n. 4. 
Spiel, p. 112, n. 1. 
(Unter die) Spiesse lauf- 

en, p. 288, n. 3. 
Spitze, p. 201, n. 4. 
S p (1 g n i s s, p. 96, n. 1. 
Starke, p. 54, n. 2 —■ p. 92, 

n. 1. 
S t a 1 1, its various uses, p. 41, n. 3. 
S t a a t s w e s e n, p. 72, n. 2. 
Statte, p. 41, n. 3. 
Steg, p. 218, ri. 4 end. 
Stehen nach, different from 

nachstehen, p. 286, n. 5 

end. 
(g 1 e i c h) s t e 1 1 e n a 1 s, p. 21 4, 

n. 2, near the end. 
S t e r b e n, with the genitive, p. 

68, n. 3. 
Stiften, p. 50, n. 2. 
Still and stillen, p. 23,n. 3. 
S t i 1 1 e h a 1 1 e n, p. 35, n, 7. 
Stock, in composition, p. 115, 

n. 1. 
S t r a f e n, p. 130, n. 4 — p. 75, n. 

4— p. 142, n. 4. 
S t a c k e, p. 138, n. 2— p. 30, n. 

1— p. 102, n. 2. 
Sta cklein, p. 156, n. 3. 
Subjunctive, p. 11, n. 4 and p. 13, 

n. 4— p. 59, n. 3— p. 63, n. 4— 

p. 99, n. 2. 
S u m m a, p. 243, n. 2— p. 282, n. 

Superlative degree with adverbs, 

p. 171, n. 3 end. 
Suppe, Hand aus der 

Suppe Ziehen, p. 149, n. 3. 

T. 

T a b e r n e, p. 178, n. 6, mid. 

Tade], p. 134, n. 1. 

(e i n e n) Tag, and e i n e s 

Tags, p. 169, n. 3— d e s T a- 

g e s, p. 264, n. 3. 
T a u gen, p. 249, n. 4. 
T a u g 1 i c h, p. 145, n. 2. 
Tausend oder zehn, p. 107, 

n. 1. 
Theil, n. 42, n. 3. 



T h u n, various uses of, p. 20, n. 

3-^p. 127, n. 2— p. 266, n. 2. 
(zu) Thun haben, p. Ill, 

n. 3. 
Thuringian dialect, p. 169, n, 3 — 

p. 180, n. 2. 
T o b e n, p. 46, n. 2— p. 47, n. 4. 
Toll, p. 47, n. 4.— toll und 

voll, p. 141, n. 2. 
(des) Todes, p. 283, n. 3— p. 

68, n. 3. 
Tragen for eintragen, p 

124, n. 5. 
(S i c h) tragen m i t, p. 276, 

n. 1. 
Tr a nken, causative of trink- 

e n, p. 27, n. 1. 
(s i c h) t r a u e n, p. 155, n. 3. 
Traun, p, 318, n. 1. 
Trefflich, p. 157, n. 1. 
T r i b u 1 i r e n, p. 143, n. 6. 
T r i e b, p. 29, n. 1. 
T r e i b e n, p. 29, n. 1— p. 109, 

n. 2. 
Tr ift, p. 29, n. 1. 
T r i n k e n, p. 51, n. 1. 
T r o t z, p, 120, n. 1— p. 256, n. 3, 
T r o s t e n, with the gen. p. 295, 

n. 4. 
Trostlich, p. 25, n. 1. 
T r a m m e r n, p. 37, n. 4. 
T u c h t i g, p. 145, n. 2. 

U. 

Uebels thun, different from 
libel thun, p. 20, n. 3 — p. 
23, n. 4. 

Ueberhelben, p. 162, n. 3. 

U e b e r k o m m e n, p. 216, n. 3. 

Uebertreten, p. 144, n. 5. 

Uebrig genu g, p. 108, n. 3. 

U m, of time and place, p. 41, n. 
1 — p. 116, n. 1 — of exchange, 
p. 133, n. 1— p. 175, n. 3. 

U m, double use of, p. 183, n. 2. 

(Sich) um Einen Ver- 
dient machen,p. 247, n. 6. 

Um desswillen, p. 246, n. 4. 

(T h u t s e h r) u m s e i n e n 
F r e u n d, p. 247, n. 6. — U m 
dieLiebe, ein sonde r- 
bares Ding, p. 247, n. 6. — 
Uebel um ihn, p. 247, n. 6. 



380 



INDEX TO NOTES. 



Um raich geschehen, p. 

p. 247, n. 6. [35, n. 5. 

U m z u t h u n, p. 20, n. 3 — p. 
Umbringen, p. 57, n. 1 — p. 

176, n. 6. 
U m g e h e n, p. 102, n. 4. 
U m h a n g, p. 53, n. 2. 
Umherziehen, 316, n. 1. 
Umbringen, p. 57, n. 3 — p. 

176, n. 6. 
Urns H e r t z, p. 247, n. 6. 
U n a n g e s e h e n, p. 7, n. 6. 
Unausmesslicb, p. 135, n. 

4. 
U n d, when omitted, p. 66, n. 1 

— p. 93, n. 4 — how differing from 

and, p. 248, n. ] . 
Uneigentlich, p. 45, n. 3. 
Unerschrocken, with the 

gen., p. 298, n. 2. 
U n g e f a h r, p. 245, n. 1 . 
U n g e r a t h e n, p. 38, n. 3. 
Ungescheuet, p. 281, n. 9. 
Ungeschickt dazu, p. 230, 

n. 2. 
U n g e z i e f e r, p. 229, n. 7. 
Ungezogen and u n e r z o- 

gen, p. 229, n. 6. 
U n g 1 e i c h, p. 163, n. 3. 
Unter, untergehen, Unter- 

italien, Unteragypten, 

unterliegen, untertau- 

ch en, p. 241, n. 4. 
(sich) Unter fan gen, p. 155, 

n. 3. 
U nte r liegen, p. 38, n. 4. 
U n t e r n e h m e n, p. 26, n. 5. — 

sich un te rne hme n, p. 155, 

n. 3. 
Unterrichten, p. 50, n. 2. 
(sich) Unterstehcn, p. 155, 

n. 3. [n. 1. 

Unterwcgen las se n, p. 227, 
(sich) U n te r w i nden, p. 155, 

n. 3 (p. 244, n. 4). 
Untachtig, p. 145, n. 2. 
U n V e r w o r f e n, p. 5, n. 5. 
U n w e i 8 1 i c h, p. 75, n. 2. 
U r s a c h e, p. 22, n. 2. 
Urtheil, p. 43, n. 2. 

V. 
Vale te, p. 135, n. 3. 



Verachten, p. 33, n. 4. 

V e r a n d e r n, p. 28, n. 3. 
Verb auxiliary, see Auxiliary. 
Verbs, causative, p. 27, n. 1. 
Verderben, p. 68, n. 4. 
Verdriessen and Verdruss, 

p. 30, n. 3. 
VerdrQcken, p. 34, n. 4. 

V e r f a 11 e n, p. 125, n. 3. 
Vergebens, p. 51, n. 3. 
Verheissen and V e r h e i s- 

s u n g, p. 26, n. 3 — p. 31 , n. 2. 
(Sich) V e r h o ff e n, p. 265, n. 6. 
Verlassen, p. 54, n. 1. 

V e r m a 1 e d e i e n, p. 62, n. 2. 
Vermessen, p. 281, n. 9. 
Ver m i ssen, p. 263, n. 1. 
Vermogen, p. 24, n. 1. 
Vernehmen, p. 250, n. 7. 
Vernichten, p. 84, n. 2. 
Verrichten, p. 50, n. 2. 
Versaumen, p. 174, n. 1. 

V e r s c h m a h e n, p. 33, n. 4. 
Versehen, p. 222, n. 6 (p. 240, 

n. 6) — sich versehen, p. 

296, n. 1. 
Verzichten, p. 165, n. 7. 
Versprechung, p. 26, n. 3 — 

p. 31, n. 2 — to revile, p. 33, n. 

3. 
Versuchung, p. 22, n. 1. 

V e r ti 1 ge n, p. 84, n. 2. 

V e r t r e i b e n, p. 40, n. 1 . 
Ve r w al te n, p. 29, n. 4. 

V e r w a n d e 1 n, p. 28, n. 3. 

V e r w e 1 k e n, p. 24, n. 3. 

V e r z e i h e n, p. 165, n. 7. 

V i e 1, governing the gen. p. 10, 
n. 1— p. 52, n. 3— p. 110, n. 4. 

Viel Wesens mac hen, p. 
72, n. 2. 

V i e 1 e n, position of, p. 145, n. 5. 

V ielleicht, p. 245, n. 1. 

V i c le rle i, p. 3, n. 4. 
Viel for se hr, p. 19, n. 2. 

V i g i 1 i e n, fem. sing. p. 169, n. 
3. 

Voll, p. 141.n.2. 
Vollauf,p. 301, n. 1. 
Von Stat ten gehen, p. 41, 
n. 3. 

V o r, o?i account of, p. 230, n. 4. 

V o r and f Q r, p. 6, n. 4. 



INDEX TO NOTES. 



381 



Vor Alters, p. 113, n. 1. 
Vor Zeiten, p. 113, n. 1. 
Vor diesem, p. 113, n, 1. 

V o r b e i (g e h e n), p. 35, n. 3. 

V or de m, p. 113, n. 1. 

V o r g e b e n, p. 99, n. 7. 

V o r h a n g, p. 53, n. 2. 
Vorschreiben, p. 32, n. 5. 
VortrefFlich, p. 157, n. 1. 

V o r m al s, p. 113, n. 1. 
Vorwenden, p. 99, n. 7— p. 

136, n. 1. — Examples, p. 93 line 
9— p. 47, line 3. 

V or wi tz, p. 93, n. 1. 

W. 

W a c h s e n, p. 25, n. 7. 

Waffen, p. 49, n. 3. 

"W as, p. 98, n. 5. 

Was s o n s t, p. 15, n. 1. 

W al le n, p. 156, n. 1. 

Walten, p. 29, n. 4. 

W a n d e 1 n and W a n d e 1, p. 

p. 28, n. 3. 
W a n d e r n, p. 156, n. 1. 
Warten, p. 39, n. 2~p. 224, n. 

7. 
W SL h n e n, p. 47, n. 2. 
Was far e i n, p. 53, n. 1. 
Wechsel, p. 28, n. 3. 
W e g (g e h e n), p. 35, n. 3. 
W e h r e n, p. 98, n. 7 — p. 146, n. 

4— p. 218, n. 3 (p. 237, n. 4).— 

Ihm zu wehren, p. 261, n. 

3. 
Weichling, p. 34, n. 3. 
Weil, p. 104, n. 1— p. 215, n. 1. 
We it, p. 3, n. 1. 
W e 1 c h, for w e 1 c h e r, p. 80, 

n. 4. 
W e 1 c h e r, p. 44, n. 3. 
Welsch, p. 104, n. 3. 
Wen den, p. 136, n. 1— p. 218, 

n. 4. 
We nig, p. 55, n. 3. 
W e n i g e r, with the gen. p. 108, 

n. 1. 
W e nn, p. 97, n. 7. 
Wenn auch, p. 244, n. 6. 
Wenn gleich, p. 244, n. 6. 
Wenn schon, p. 244, n. 6. 
Wenn z w ar, p, 244, n. 6. 



W er, p. 40, n. 1— p. 98, n. 5— in- 
• definite whoever^ p. 224, n. 2 — 

p. 292, n. 1. 
W e r, distinguished from d e r 

and w e 1 c h e r, p. 14, n. 5. 
Werkstatt, p. 41, n. 3. 
W e s e n, p. 26, n. 1 — p. 66, n. 1 — 

(difficulty) p. 72, n. 2— p. 97, 

n. 1. in composition, p. 72, 

n. 2. 
Wess ist die Schuld, p. 

246, n. 3. 
W i de r, p. 46, n, 1. 
W i d e r f e c h t e r, p. 246, n. 1. 
W i d e r p a r t, p. 34, n, 5. 
W i d e r s a c h e r, p. 59, n. 4 — p. 

246, n. 1. 
Widerthiel, p. 79,n. 2. 
W i e d e r u m, pr271, n. 2 end — 

p. 243, n. 1. 
W iese, p. 57, n. 4. 
Wilde Kapellen,p.l78,n.l. 
(In) Wind schlagen, p, 

202, n. 2 (p. 222, n. 4)— p. 268, 

n. 1. 
Wirker, p. 187, n. 4. 
Wirthshaus, p. 65, n. 1. 
Wi s c he n, p. 67, n. 3. 
W i sse n, p. 54, n. 6. 
W o, if, p. 97, n. 7— p. 99, n. 3~ 

p. 101, n. 3— for w i e, p. 229, 

n. 1. 
Wo — h i n, p. 244, n. 3 — w o h i- 

n a u s, p. 305, n. 1. 
W o f e r n, p. 97, n. 7. 
Wo hi, like gut, p. 12, n. 4— 

distinguished from g u t, p. 13, 

n. 6 — p. 33, n. 1. — concessive, 

p. 13, n. 1. 
W o h 1 f a h r e n, W o h 1 f a h r t, 

p. 30, n. 4. 
Wohlgefallen,p. 31, n. 1. 
Wohlthat, p. 33, n. 1. 
Wohnen, Wohnung and 

Wohnsitz, p. 28, n.2. 
W o 1 1 e n, p. 32, n. 2— p. 218, n. 

3_p. 258, n. 3. for ge- 
wol t, p. 238, n. 5. 
Wollust, p. 30, n.2. 
Wrack, p. 37, n. 4. 
Wucher, p. 133, n. 4. 
Wundern, p. 283, n. 4 



382 



INDEX TO NOTES. 



W(inschen,p.32, n. 1. 

Wu th, p. 38, n. 1. 

W a t h e n, p. 46, n. 2— p. 47, n.4. 

Z. 

Ziehen for e r z i e h e n, p. 225, 
n. 3 end. 

Zorn, p. 38, n. 1. 

Zu, pointing out destination, p. 
78, n. 4— p. 94, n. 2— p. 97, n. 
4— p. 104, n. 6. 

Z u for u m z u, with the infini- 
tive, p. 95, n. 2. 

Z u n i c h t e, p. 35, n. 2. 

Zu Statten komnien, p. 41, 
n. 3. 

Zubringen, p. 264, n. 3 end. 

Z u e i g n e n, p. 100, n. 1. 

Zufallen, p. 349, n. 3. 

Zugehen, p. 68, n. 4 — p. 130, 



n. 2 (p. 235, n. 2)— p. 264, n. 1. 
Zu horen, p. 26, n. 3. 
Zum ersten, p. 1, n. 2. 
Z u r i c h t e n, p. 50, n. 2— p. 221, 

n. 3. 
Za men, p. 21, n. 2. 
Zusagung, Zusage, p. 31, 

n. 2. 
Z u s a t z, p, 99, n. 7 end— p. 206, 

n. 2. 
Zuschmelzen, p. 284, n. 4 end. 
Zusehens and zusehends, 

p. 40, n. 1. 
Zuthun, p. 163, n. 5 (p. 235, n. 

3). 
Zuvor, p. 92, n.2— p. 93, n.4. 
Zwar, p. 236, n. 3. 
Z w e i e r 1 e i, p. 3, n. 4. 
Z w o and Z w e i, p. 100, n. 3 — 

p. 49, n. 1. 



END, 



Deacidified using the Bookkeeper process 
Neutralizing agent: Magnesium Oxide 
Treatment Date: April 2005 

PreservationTechnologies 

A WORLD LEADER IN PAPER PRESERVATION 

1 1 1 Thomson Park Drive 
Cranberry Township, PA 16066 
(724)779-2111 






LIBRARY OF CONGRESS 




014 087 144 8 



